_ PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS

OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY
: OF LONDON.

FOR THE YEAR

1876.

PART’ T.

CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN

JANUARY ann FEBRUARY.

JUNE ist, 1876.

' PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY,
“ . SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER- SQUARE,
LONDON:

“MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, READER, AND DYER,
‘ PATERNOSTER-ROW.

[Price Twelve Shillings. oe)

LIST OF CONTENTS.

PART I.—1876.

January 4, 1876.

Page

The Secretary. Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in December 1875 -...

Mr. G. Brown, C.M.Z.S. Letter from, on birds transmitted to the Society from Duke-of-
Work: Iplarid? 2°. 5. ‘ope s proper pital tearm siccchs\ cla bie ehe\ kis peige ¢ Rona at ees rate an

Mr. R. Trimen. Letter from, addressed to the Secretary, containing remarks on Canis
Chama Smith 2 iz «10°5).13\s 3 iter terete Oe ool arelatesal ene. weiss ne)0 4, «gO er Nee ee eee

Dr. Hector. Exhibition of and remarks on three feather mats, made by the Maoris of New
VEN PR SREP SHAN hn Gib gaa aUc Daan EAE oor Eom Abr nse ae Shera: ke 8

1. Description of the Skull of a Species of Xiphodon, Cuvier. By Witu1am Henry Frower,
VRS HUZS5 HGS: Ace mie eatGek yi tarsireyet pe fan-Wete ite rele ieists as Sete ta cg ene een

. On a New Ziphioid Whale. By Jutius von Haast, Ph.D., F.R.S., Director of the Can-
terbury Museum, Christchurch, New Zealand. Communicated by Professor W. H.
RGOWER: (SRS! sve'e Sip tote obs inistene rojo he ph ane retin eile eileisbeey cial etstn icicle clestet (tae inren area

bo

3. On some additional Species of Birds from St. Lucia, West Indies. By P. L. Scuarmr,
M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary to the Society. (Plate IT.)

4, Note on the Spoonbill of the Argentine Republic. By W. H. Hupson, C.M.Z.8. ......

5. On Peruvian Birds collected by Mr. Whitely. By P. L. Scrarnr, M.A., Ph.D., F.RS.,
and Ossert Satvin, M.A., F.R.S.—Part IX. (Plate TIT.) ......................

6. Notes on some Fijian Birds, including Description of a new Genus and Species. By
Orro Hinscs} Ph.D; O.MiZS: &e. ais ck cee tchaclt els ae pesncioie aie ee eee

7. On the Cecwm Coli of the Capybara (Hydrocherus capybara). By A. H. Garrop, M.A.,
iKZ.8;;-Prosector tothe! Society saint nithke jet satel oie’ ioin cm ieie s,s rie eee ieee ate ee
8. Contributions to Morphology. Icurnyorsipa.—No. 1. On Ceratodus forsteri, with Ob-
servations on the Classification of Fishes. By Prof. T. H. Huxuny, Sec. B.S. ......

January 18, 1876.

1, Ona Peculiarity in the Carotid Arteries, and other Points in the Anatomy, of the Ground-

Bee (Bucorvus abyssinicus). By A. H. Garrop, M.A., F.Z.S8., Prosector to the
ociety

oe Je'G ole 9:C010) 6.0 0\n)0\e, 00 6's gy 0 00s) 0614/0, 910,89. 8'w10\ 0.016 Bais p ae brea SO wa a Slisvals teba > bara tale’

2. On the Classification of the Order Glires. By Epwarp R. Auston, F.G.S., F.ZS.
(Plate IV.)

3. On the Land-Shells of Taviuni, Fiji Islands, with Descriptions of New Species. By E.
A. Liarper. (Plate V.)

4. Notes on the Rails of the Argentine Republic. By W. H. Huson, C.M.ZS.

1

ee)

~T

20

24

Contents continued on page 3 of wrapper.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE
SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS

OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY
OF LONDON

FOR THE YEAR

PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY,
AND SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER SQUARE.
LONDON:
MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, READER, AND DYER,
PATERNOSTER ROW,

Lek T

OF THE

COUNCIL: AND DWPPICHES

OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL

SOCIETY OF LONDON.

COUNCIL.

Tar Marquis or Tweeppae, F.R.S., President.

Tur Lorp ABINGER.

Tue Lorp CantrHorpn.

Masor-Gen. Henry Currx, R.A.,
E.R.S.

Roprert Droumuonp, Esq., Trea-
surer.

Prorrssor Frower, F.R.S., Vice-
President.

Jonny P. Gasstorr, Jun., Esq.

Artuur Grorr, Esq.

Dr. AtBert Ginruer, F.R.S.,
Vice-President.

Dr. E. Hamiaton, Vice-President.

Epuunp W.H. Hotpsworts, Esq. |

Rozsert Hupson, Esq., F.R.S.,
Vice-President.

Prorrssor Mivart, F.R.S.

Proressor Newton, F.R.S., Vice-
President.

Henry Porrocr, Esq.

Tur Lorp Artuur Russewt, M.P.

Ospert Satvin, Esq., F.R.S.

Pare Lurnny Scratur, Esq.,
M.A., Pa.D., F.R.S., Secretary.

Ricwarp H. 8, Vyvyan, Esq.

Tur Lorp WALSINGHAM.

Grorcr R. Warternouse, Hsq.,
Vice-President.

PRINCIPAL OFFICERS.

Office, 11 Hanover Square, W.

P. L. Sctater, Esq., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary.
Mr. F. H. Wateruouse, Librarian.
Mr. W. J. WitttaMms, Clerk.

Gardens, Regent's Park, N.W.

Mr. A. D. Barrrerr, Superintendent.
Proressor Garrop, F.R.S., Prosector

LIST

CONTRIBUTORS,

With References to the several Articles contributed by each.

Page
Apams, Henry, F.L.S., and Ancas, Georce FREeNc#H,

F.L.S., C.M.Z.S.

Descriptions of five new Species of Land-Shells from Mada-
gascar, New Guinea, Central Australia, and the Solomon
Islands (Plate XLVII.).... 2... seees- ee cere cece eens 488

Auston, Epwarp R., F.G.S., F.Z.S.
On the Classification of the Order Glires. (PlateIV.).. 61

On the Genus Dasyprocta; with Description of a new
Species. (Plate XXUR.) 2... 0. Sacesieeeece cece e es S47

On two new Species of Hesperomys.............-++.. 758

ANpERSON, ANDREW, F.Z.S.

Corrections of, and Additions to “ Raptorial Birds of
North-western India.’’— Part II. (Plate XXIII.)........ 310

Exhibition of a coloured drawing of Emys hamiltonii.... 751

Corrections of, and Additions to the “ Raptorial Birds of
North-western India.’ Part III, (Plate LXXXII.) .... 776

Loa

iv
Ancas, GrorGEe Frencn, F.L.S., C.M.Z.S.

Descriptions of Four new Species of Helix ; with some
Notes on Helix angasiana of Pfeiffer. (Plate XX.) ...... 265

Ancas, Greorce Frencu, F.L.S., C.M.Z.S., and Apams
Henry, F.L.S.

Descriptions of five new Species of Land-Shells from Ma-
dagascar, New Guinea, Central Australia, and the Solomon
Palands;° (Plate XLY Dy) 222 acre eee e ee ete 488

BartuietTt, Epwarp, and Druce, Hersert, F.L.S., F.Z.S.
List of the Butterflies of Peru, with Descriptions of new
Species... (Plates XV. cy VGn) aha. sm wom cee 205

Breppomg, Lieut.-Col. R.H., C.M.Z.S.

Description of a new Species of Indian Snake of the Genus
Platyplectrurus from the Wyuad: . P5223. Gass tise es 2 701

BELL, F. Jerrrey, Exhibitioner of Magdalen College, Oxford.
Notes on the Myology of the Limbs of Moschus moschiferus 182

Bennett, Dr. Grorce, F.Z.S.
Dietterdrom.... si... cue c de Be eee BOIL

Bianrorp, W. T., Assoc. Roy. Sch. Min., F.R.S., F.G.S.,

F.Z.S.
Note on the ‘ Africa-Indien’ of A. von Pelzeln, and on
the Mammalian Fauna of Pibeé 7. 7 se se ee eee eon

On some of the Specific Identifications in Dr. Giinther’s
Second Report on Collections of Indian Reptiles obtained by
the’Brifish Miuusenin 2 2... 2202 sy ne oe ee

BowerBank, James Scott, LL.D., F.R.S., F.Z.S.

A Monograph of the Siliceo-fibrous Sponges.—Part VI.
(Plaben Tyga CLD) 4.x jsiacase, chateertenten! aan eke ROGD

Contributions to a General History of the Spongiade.—
Part VIII. (Plates LXXVIII.-~LXXXI_)......0.0.5. 20 768

v

Page
Brooke, Sir Victor, Bart., F.Z.S.
Supplementary Notes on Cervus mesopotamicus .......- 298
On Cervus schomburghi (Blyth) .......0..00.. sce ee 304
Brown, Rev. Groreer, C.M.Z.S.
Letter from, on birds transmitted to the Society from
Muke-ol Yorke Usland.. 0.5 2.4 ees,s ecient SL SR DE
Buck ey, T. E., B.A., F.Z.S. >
On the past and present Geographical Distribution of the
Laree Mammals ‘of Sonth Africa... .: Slee se 0 2)2 4 2 fa4 277
BurMEIsTeR, HERMANN, Director of the National Museum,
Buenos Aires, F.M.Z.S.
Additional Notes on Dolichotis salinicola .........+.. 461

Busk, Grorer, F.R.S., F.Z.S.

Notice of a Memoir on the Ancient or Quaternary Fauna
of Gibraltar, to be published in the Society’s ‘Transactions’ 415

Butter, ArTHuR GarpINER, F.L.S., F.Z.S., Assistant, Zoo-
logical Department, British Museum.

Revision of the Lepidopterous Genus Teracolus, with De-
scriptions of the new Species. (Plates VI. & VII.) ...... 126

On a small Collection of Butterflies from the New Hebrides 251

Descriptions of Lepidoptera from the Collection of Lieut.
Howland Roberts. (Plate XXII.) ............ phatetoye pias US

Descriptions of new Species of Lepidoptera from New
Guinea, with notice of anew Genus. (Plate LXXVII.) .. 765

Campripeée, Rey. O. Pickarp, M.A., C.M.Z.S., Hon. Mem.
New-Zealand Institute.

On a new Order and some new Genera of Arachnida from
Rereneenis Land... (Plate XX. ws. 25 weipetiae? 258

vi
Page
Catalogue of a Collection of Spiders made in Egypt, with
Descriptions of new Species and Characters of a new Genus.
(Plates LVIII.-LX.)........-- eeseee eevee Salata cca Pa ae 541

Cuark, J. W., M.A., F.Z.S.

Notes on a Dolphin taken off the Coast of Norfolk.
(Pilates XIV. & LAV) 2 eae ae ee eee ete 686

Coszotp, T. Seencer, M.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., Correspondent
of the Academy of Sciences of Philadelphia.

Notes on Entozoa.—Part III. (Plate XVI.) ........ 200
Exhibition of and remarks on a parasite (Hchinorhynchus). 256
Notes on Entozoa.—Part IV. (Plate XXI.) ........ 294

Comries, Dr. P.

Exhibition of, and remarks on, zoological specimens col-
lected during the survey, by H.M.S. ‘ Basilisk,’ of the S.E.
coast of New Guinea.............. NARs eee tes 422

Cooxson, Commander W. E., R.N.

Letter from, containing remarks on the Tortoises of the
Galapagos «xii - Beet eos aoe Se aoneeeey oe 520

Cunnincuam, D. J., M.B., Demonstrator of Anatomy, Uni-
versity of Edinburgh.

Description of a young Specimen of the Delphinus albi-
rostris. (Plate XX PV.c) 3% wcisiets aca diatens sirens bette ie taal 679

D’ Ausertis, Luigi Mari, C.M.Z.S.

Ketter (from ss '. Saitek A ENG . VO ees 519
Day, Surgeon-Major Francis, F.Z.S. &c.
On the Fishes of Yarkand ........ AOR tee Aer eee . 781

Dosson, G. E., M.A., M.B., F.L.S., C.M.Z.S., &c.
On Mystacina tuberculata . ...ccccceceeee eee teats 486

vil

On peculiar Structures in the Feet of certain Species of
Mammals which enable them to walk on smooth perpendi-
euler curtacesi: (Plate Le Ve) hss tesia sissies

A Monograph of the Group Molossi ...... SPY eee

Dresser, Henry E., F.ZS.
Remarks on a Hybrid between the Black Grouse and the

laze) Grong 625 2104-7 n ans, os apse ani Solas. ee Ue ee
On a new Species of Broad-billed Sandpiper ...,......
On a new Species of Tetraogallus.... .0..60 .seeee sees

Druce, Hersert, F.L.S., F.Z.8., and Barrierr, Epwarp,
Curator of the Museum and Public Library, Maid-
stone.

List of the Butterflies of Peru, with Descriptions of new
Species. (Plates XVUL. & MVILE OT... et. le
Drummonp, W. H.

On the African Rhinoceroses..............

Duncan, Professor P. Martin, F.R.S., Pres. G.S.

Notice of the second part of his Memoir on the Madrepo-
raria dredged up during the Expedition of H.M.S. ‘ Porcu-

D2 1s 2. 6 nee eae d

Notices of some Deep-sea and Littoral Corals from the
Atlantic Ocean, Caribbean, Indian, New-Zealand, Persian
Gulf, and Japanese, &c. Seas. (Plates XXXVIII.-XLI.)..

FrercGuson, WitxuiaM, F.L.S.
Description of a New Snake of the Genus Aspidura from
RCN IOM Seo Ord Sis deuterated eo ee se Ay 1 ee et
Finscu, Orro, Ph.D., C.M.Z.S. &c., Curator of the Bremen
Museum.
Notes on some Fijian Birds, including Description of a
Mew Geuue anG NEECIES ;'. 5. catare sales s «anaes +0)6 0 aera ee

Letter from, containing remarks on the supposed existence
of the Wild Camel in Central Asia ..........

Page

526
701

205

109

428

819

vill

Page
Firower, Witt1am Henry, F.R.S., F.L.S., V.P.Z.S., Con-
servator of the Museum of the Royal College of Sur-
geons, and Hunterian Professor.
Description of the Skull of a Species of Xiphodon, Cuvier.
(EL i ee PRE mst ee ee Sarees 3
On some Cranial and Dental Characters of the existing
Species of Rhinoceroses .......-...- See eo Oh 443
Remarks upon Dr. von Haast’s Communication on Ziphius
ROUE-COMANINE ©. 5 os « sinaix Gale Gea ial ee & eee wise
Remarks upon Dr. von Haast’s Communication on Mesop-
lodenepniocrs Vc f. vutth «paths calttotles «Bien wea ohne erie 2 485 .
GarRrop, Aurrep Henry, B.A., F.Z.S., Fellow of St. John’s
College, Cambridge, Prosector to the Society.
On the Caecum Coli of the Capybara (Hydrocherus capy-
DEF) oitin vik os che alo ROR Tee RR Ge TG lass aes SR wiete 20
On a Peculiarity in the Carotid Arteries, and other Points
in the Anatomy, of the Ground-Hornbill (Bucorvus abyssi-
MCUS)\.% a's ae Ree Fo oo SACU: cb Pee Doo cor SOB oe fc 60
On the Anatomy of Chauna derbiana, and on the Systematic
Position of the Screamers (Palamedeide). (Plates XII.—
Vi) 2200's). stattes ROR eRe Mer tt, Sere ier as 189
On the Anatomy of Aramus scolopaceus .....4......++. 279

Notes on the Anatomy of Plotus anhinga. (Plates
RXVI.-XXVALL.) 0. cae tah aie cite ate SO ete ee eee eee

Notes on the Anatomy of the Colies (Colius).......... 416

On some Anatomical Characters which bear upon the
Major Divisions of the Passerine Birds.—Part I. (Plates
SU VIESHLUIL) ae ss oe Bo oes ko eek dee ee eee

Notes on the Anatomy of certain Parrots

On the Chinese Deer named Lophotragus michianus by
Me? Swinhos.. (Plate duXX VI.) .:. 5» ss, «eneisipie osteo can VOR

ix
Page
Grote, Artuur, F.L.S., F.Z.S.

Exhibition of and remarks upon the original drawing, by
Colonel Gordon, from which the Plate of Ovis polii in the
‘ Proceedings’ (1874, plate L111.) was prepared...... ome L414

Gintuer, ALBERT, M.D., Ph.D., F.RS., V.P.Z.S., Keeper
of the Zoological Department, British Museum.

Exhibition of specimens of Antechinus minutissimus, from
Rockhampton, Australia .......... ota atetep oe fapal orcraotetatore 274

Exhibition of and observations on specimens of a Species
OP alate. ow ae 363 OS witnc here: ce anak tet tee sipia ae 274

Extract from a letter received from Commander W. E.
Cookson, R. N., concerning two large Land-Tortoises from
the Galaparos: Velma!” . .ss cots aso ee ees c uses wae - 422

Remarks on some Indian and, more especially, Bornean
Mammals. (Plates XXXVI. & XXXVII.) ............ 424

Notes on a small Collection brought by Lieut. L. Cameron,
C.B strom Arpaae 2 55 seen aw a ic Binaysccreres x BRAM 678

Report on some of the Additions to the Collection of Mam-
malia in the British Museum. (Plates LXIX.-LXXIV.).. 735

Description of a new Species of Lizard from Asia Minor.. 818

Gurney, J. H., Jun., F.Z.S.

Letter from, containing Notes on the Breeding of a pair of
the Polish Swan (Cygnus immutabilis)...........0..04.. 466

Exhibition of an example of the Lesser White-fronted Goose
(Anser erythropus) kilied in Egypt................... . 414

Haast, Juxius von, Ph.D., F.R.S., C.M.Z.S., Director of the
Canterbury Museum, Christchurch, New Zealand.

Further Notes on Ouxulodon, a new Genus of Ziphioid
Whales from the New-Zealand Seas..............e00e-- 457

Notes on the Skeleton of Ziphius nove-zealandia. (Plates
Pa ee DUNE Vo a sciaveoan ic0\ 3S 0,x , . 466

Notes on Mesoplodon floweri. (Plates XLV. & XLVI.) . 478

x
Page
Hecror, James, M.D., F.R.S., C.M.Z.S., Director of the
Geological Survey of New Zealand.
Exhibition of and remarks on three feather mats, by the

Maoris of New Zealand. i! 2 .'.) . sl. aes wo ee oe se ee 2
Hupson, Witi1aM Henry, C.M.Z.S. .

Note on the Spoonbills of the Argentine Republic ...... 15

Notes on the Rails of the Argentine Republic.......... 102

Huxiey, Tuomas H., LL.D., Sec.R.S.

Contributions to Morphology. Icuruyopsipa. No. 1.
On Ceratodus forsteri, with Observations on the Classification
OPI IRR CS nn ees aye cin en oe
On the Position of the Anterior Nasal Apertures in Lepi-
DORIPEI ath Meco Cialis io, be 2S Ee areas ako tes ae

JacosBy, MarrTIn.
Description of new Genera and Species of Phytophagous
Cole Perth, ccc dia +s) ney anaieasls ah oes eee
Layarp, Epncar Leopotp, C.M.G., F.Z.8., H.B.M. Consul
at New Caledonia.

Description of a New Thrush from Taviuni, one of the Fiji

Islands». ?. sce peeeteee «Soe ites ie ans, cae Uele = gure 420
Notes on the Birds of the Navigators’ and Friendly Islands,
with some Additions to the Ornithology of Fiji .......... 490

Liarpet, E. A., C.M.Z.8.

On the Land-Shells of Taviuni, Fiji Islands, with Descrip-
tions of new Species: °(Plate Vi) <3. c-cloren= «cee «ee

Newton, Aurrep, M.A., F.L.S., F.Z.S., Professor of Zoolog
and Comparative Anatomy in the University of Cam-
bridge.
Exhibition of and remarks on a book belonging to the
Rev. R. Hooper, containing a notice of the Dodo ........ 333
Note upon Canon Tristram’s recent Discovery of the Roe-
buck (Cervus eapreolus) in Palestine .........+00.2-.2- 700

xi
Parker, W. K., F.R.S., F.Z.S.
Memoir on Egithognathous Birds. Part II. (Abstract) .

Abstract of a Memoir on the Structure and Development
of the Skull in Sharks and Rays ......

Ramsay, E. Pierson, C.M.Z.S.

List of Birds met with in North-eastern Queensland, chiefly

Page

256

699

a Bockineham (Bay) Part: Woo. 06 io aha vat cole en case os 114
Letter from, containing notes on the habits of some living
Ceratodiin the Australian Museum, Sydney ............ 698
Ramsay, Lieutenant R. Warpiaw, F.Z.S.
On an undescribed Species of Nuthatch and another Bird
from: Karen-aee,” (Plate DXIEL ks 5 fac co 677
Row ey, Grorce Dawson, M.A., F.Z.S.
Exhibition of a specimen of Macherirhynchus nigripectus 414
Satvaport, Tuomas, M.D., C.M.Z.S.
Letter from, containing remarks on some birds mentioned
by Signor D’Albertis as seen by him during his first excursion
UpCthe Hiy Tame =|, 20 a RE IR Woche ieee sop 752
Letter from, addressed to the Secretary, concerning the
discovery of a supposed new species of Drepanornis ...... 776
Savin, Ospert, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S.
Exhibition of a portion of a trunk of a pine from Guate-
mala, perforated by a Woodpecker ................ worn 414
Sarvin, Ossert, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S., and Scuarer, P. L.,
M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S.
On Peruvian Birds collected by Mr. Whitely—Part IX.
ET eet ee eR a es oe nig on é oth ait anc eae 15
Descriptions of new Birds obtained by Mr. C. Buckley in
IS alata at aS la oS «0.5. «<p vad 253
Notes on some of the Blue Crows of America,......... 268

xil
Page
On newSpecies of Bolivian Birds. (PlatesXXX.—-XXXIIL.) 352

A Revision of the Neotropical Anatidee. (Plate XXXIV.) 358

SaunpErs, Howarp, F.Z.S.
On the Stercorariine, or Skua Gulls. (Plate XXIV.).. 317

On the Sternine, or Terns, with Descriptions of three
new Species. (Plate LXI.).......+ 0200. see eeeer ese 638

Scuirer, Epwarp A., Assistant-Professor of Physiology, and
Witiiams, D. James, Student of Medicine, in Uni-
versity College, London.

On the Structure of the Mucous Membrane of the Stomach
in the Kangaroos. (Plates VIII.-XI.) ..........+.+-.- 165

Scuater, Purse Lurvey, M.A., Ph.D., F.RS., Secretary to
the Society.
Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
Decembens! Spies nce iekeiuee iereleioleus avetepele) Sevtemaeorekonare 1

On some additional Species of Birds from St. Lucia, West
Tndies.. (Plate TE) 5 se cysie'ins 3 ae cane n> ses eng appease

Extract from a Report of the visit of H.M.S. ‘ Peterel’
to the Galapagos Islands ..........-2-+eeeesseeeeee-+ 178

Exhibition of, and remarks on, an antler of a Rusa Deer.. 179

Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
Janwary.187 6.23 ashes ciiersiep sepa were tine ses wena oe 254

Exhibition of, and remarks on, a new Parrot (Conurus
illigeri) belonging to the Museum of Neuchatel....... «s+ Zoo

Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
Febrtiaty) 1876 os o'..0:c sates anoea ses ote serene te eetname 273

Exhibition of and remarks on the skin of a female of
Amerson 2s PEAS am tertiles otose exe io oe certeteieumcciopemars ener ees 274

Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of skins of the
Parrots of the Fiji Islands, obtained by Mr. E. L. Layard,

xiii

Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
March 1876./ (Plate XXV.) ........

Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
April 1876, and remarks on the Cassowaries in the Society’s
Colleetion.: (Blate XXXV.): of das acs einen vata oa

Extracts from several letters addressed to him by Dr. G.
Bennett, F.Z.S., referring to the proceedings of Mr. L. M.
PACH NG IMA SS sh hacen Coes es oe ee

Exhibition of a rare Pacific Parrot, Coriphilus kuhli, and
remarks on its habitat ........

On the Birds collected by Dr. Comrie on the South-east
Coast of New Guinea during the Survey of H.M.S. ‘ Basilisk.’
(Pintes airs TR) om, stitieet bee. i a ae!

Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in May
1876, and list of Indian animals deposited by H.R.H. the
gg eae ih 11S a ae | ep

Exhibition of Land-Crabs from Ascension Island, pre-
Banter iy Wit ia, UE Wi oc. 2 dh: bir aia oy set cxdaeaie

Exhibition of, and remarks on, the skins of a male and

female Pheasant (Lobiophasis bulweri). (Plate LAA

Exhibition of a drawing of a Fruit-Pigeon living in the
Muvico Gardens se sets thie cots ase sinter he oo MX. eer

Exhibition of a collection of birds received from Signor
L. M. D’Albertis, and descriptions of two new Parrots.
CURIE 3. (6A) aC eae eR AORN as ge ce a

Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in June,
July, August, and September 1876. (Plates LK VI .-LXVIII.)
Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
Pi HE RSV AOr he te cence eee Raat tines sy ee ST
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a skin of a young
Rhinoceros from the Sunderbunds .

Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
Noyembem F202 1 fs 26 vy css twas

scp Gs,

Page

-looe

els

- 462

464
465
519
519

693

751

ae «1/0!

é

xiv
Scuater, P. L., M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., and Sanvin, OsBErt,
M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S.

On Peruvian Birds collected by Mr. Whitely.—Part IX.
CEM Ee eae IGS RR a ee

Descriptions of new Birds obtained by Mr. C. Buckley in

BOLIVIA ae ge ee) ER aR ae oe ge Se A ce
Notes on some of the Blue Crows of America..........

On new Species of Bolivian Birds. (Plates XX X.—XXXIII.)

A Revision of the Neotropical Anatide. (Plate XXXIV.) ;

Sexous, FREDERICK, Jun.
Exhibition of, and remarks on, a series of horns of

African Rhinoceroses

Saarpr, Ricuarp Bowpter, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &c., Senior
Assistant, Zoological Department, British Museum.

Exhibition of a specimen of Hawk-Owl (Surnia ulula),
Nailed inateat MiAGes vows cere as seks st oe we sats once

Description of an apparently new Species of Owl from the
Solomon’ [slandsne(GblaCewa XM). craic cleteis) «alewi-ts gies eis

Sowersy, G. B., Jun.

Descriptions of six new Species of Shells from the Col-
lections of the Marchioness Paulucci and Dr. Prevost.
PEG TRV 0) gtscaye casa cs So fe > shadaports stern race Voge ce tate ase 0 isha ht

TaczanowskI, L., C.M.Z.S8.

Description d’un nouveau Cerf tacheté du pays d’Ussuri

»méridional, Cervus dybowskit .... 1.06 seeeuscenneecens

Trimen, Roxanp, F.Z.S8., Curator of the South-African
Museum, Capetown.

Letter from, addressed to the Secretary, containing re-

marks on Canis chama, Smith .......

Page

3» 179

334

673

752

123

\ XV
Page
Tristram, Rev. H. B., F.Z.S.

Note on the Discovery of the Roebuck (Cervus capreolus)
in Palestine

Wituiams, D. James, Student of Medicine, and Scuirrr,
Epwarp A., Assistant-Professor of Physiology, in
University College, London.

On the Structure of the Mucous Membrane of the Stomach
in the Kangaroos. (Plates VIII.-XI.)

LIST” OF PLAT Es:

Plate Page
I eXiphodon platycenss. a sche inpieete or 1 youn ate oes 3
LG se benrna TAA Via. SABA oo omens Gvbicos Soa soaos.o0 13
III. Thamnophilus melanchrous ........0200ccereecee 15
IV. Chart of Families of the order Glires.............. 61
V. New Land-Shells from Taviuni .,............0008 99
ti New Species of Teracolus.......000.e0cccessceeos 126
VIII. Fig. 1. Stomach of Macropus giganteus............
Ix. poe 2 & 3. Stomach of Macropus giganteus ......
Fig. 4. Stomach of Dorcopsis luctuwosa ........+4+. 165
Fig. 5. Stomach of Macropus giganteus.........+4+
“ Fig 6. Stomach of Dorcopsis luctuosa .........++.
XI. Figs. 7-10. Stomach of Dorcopsis luctuosa ........ 4)
XII. |
XII
XIV. a ecetie Ol CHOU ER OLAMG teal ctelelale iis) Venn tial oieie ers 189
XV.
XVI. Echinorhynchus elegans ......eccesevesscesecees 200
at Peruvian Butterflies 205
XViiz_{ Peruvian Butterflies .........s sess sees eres neces 2
XIX. Kerguelen-Island Arachnida ..........eeeeeeuees 258
XX. New Australian and Solomon-Island Helices........ 265
2.0.05 a IN? Oe rane GVH” 5 4 aoganipaddogo conbueannn a4 20)!
XXII. New Malayan Lepidoptera ........eseeeesseceece 308
NOT HOLCOLO ROY LONI CHR: a iaretsetsiheisteteleie lays ole (einyete seis aint ala 310
XONGV ie ISLENCONUMISHC ELEN STS Watayaietsteseioet= e\atelereletertietsceli=/< ists 317
PRONGV ume DUDS LUNES s <VAL stars cistclanele’ oleelele\eletel teevete tee) tail 333
XXVI.
XXVII.} Anatomy of Plotus anhinga ....eeeccevvereneees 335
XXVIII
OD J DAS NMEA IT GHAUIRAb prob DO DUROD OO NOON Dood ° 347
XXX. Fig. 1. Calliste fulvicervix; Fig. 2. C. argyrofenges.
XXXI. Malacothraupis dentata ....cccceccsccssecreceee 359
XXXII. Lathria uropygialis ...... bedded onosyS Da thmcmun ol
XXXIV. Thamnophilus subfasciatus ...... cece cece ee eevee

AXXTV., Querquedula Gndivm....c.o.scccvssssececetecses 358

Plate Page
OMENS COMUS CASTANONOTUS ey fecnt cs te sc tele cc csc sis chs sos 413
MXMV I> Pupata tana, vars Chrysurd.... ccc es senses ss cane | 404
XXXVI. - Viverra megaspilaad: et fro li eee ee as al
XXXVIII.
eee Deep-sea and Littoral Corals................005- 428
XLI.
MEI -: Manueodia comrtt.. 1... 92. ee en te seek bec dos ees 459
XLIII. Megapodius macgillivrayit ...... ccc cc seeacceees
XLIV. Lobiophasis bulweri. Fig. 1. Q. Fig. 2. d ...... 465
XLV ee 1. Skeleton of Mesoplodon floweri ............ :
* (Fig. 2. Skeleton of Ziphius nove zealandie........ [ 466
XLVI. Fig. 1. Skull of Mesoplodon floweri, upper view .... [
Fig. 2. Skull of Ziphius nove zealandie, upper view
XLVIL eee from New Guinea, Madagascar, and Aus-
PUAN gape coe akeiepe,= eb ctua! ous ap cunin (ureter auaas Kola sisi OOS 0% 488
XLVIII. )
XLIX.
te PAMALOMAY Ol tie! PASSCLES ye) 4) agecit ates acre clerele, e's eels 506
Li.
LIII.
TGV | (Cy clopsitia: suavissvnites yew ite cases spe 2 oes os ne 520

LV. Suctorial and Adhesive Foot-pads of Mammals .... 526
LVI. Figs.1,2. Deanea favoides. Figs.3,4. Farrea inermis 35
LVII. Figs.1,2. Farrea perarmata. Figs.3,4. F.irregularis

LVIII.
ux. { New! Beyptian Spidersijcc)..j26. cqieisiern ope c's 's genes ae 541
LX.
Fig. 1. Anous tenuirostris ........... ay stal eet etals tater
LXI. JF 2. Anous MelANOGENYS v2 2. ces cs isaawevecess 638
Fig. 3. Anous leucocapillus............sc0eeeeees
TONG Nim SOLOMONIS salar) a!<le\etelohoie Mielafaieis/a\«, 0/0) alien's «. 673
TRA Ste LNA vate Tale ate sta ofa state aterevevelataeie¥s © ois) efe''e/si «ree 677
LXIV. Delphinus albirostris. Fig. 1. Specimen from are 679
Grimsby. Fig. 2. Specimen from Lowestoft .... f
LXV. Stomach of Delphinus albirostris ....... siadeiaiae Fe 686
LXVI. Corvus capellanus........ Sabie tBIOINE ayaiorelisl esi eolete-s 694
LXVII. Sarcidiornis melanonota ........ 0. ce eeeeneeceees 695
LXVIII. Sareidiornis carunculata .......0 cece cece cc ereeee
LXIX. Sciurus steeritt ........ SUC OO MHOCOeOS “Go oaee y
LX. (Hy striae crassispinis <0 0.00. cc eects sn sscecas F
LXXT. Trichys lipura ......0:+..: sopede compoaneoasece 735
DXXIT. Hapatle leucopus 2.2... ccc cece cess cs ceseccvens
TOONU Mon eRENeS CANICEPS) Selene cisic\ ee oes oo «neji ee sisinime [
LXXIV. Echimys ferrugineus......00.ccerescercercecsncs #
6b

xviii

Plate Page
LXXV. New shells from the Eastern Hemisphere.......... 752
LXXVI. Head of Lophotragus michianus..........0..0000e Gor
LXXVII. Butterflies from New Guinea ..............0es00% 765
TOROS Desmacrdon plumosa... c/o seks iiss alaiele oleracea
TPXONK Ch alinawerticrll ata vray. a insterstalietnten) sicue seiie stele ieee 768
TREX. (Oplitospongia ifucotdes Hts atsterole otecet= ctetsele stat cre
TEXT. Raphiodesma radtose, ive etetarenetels teioin sellers) over te alan
LXXXII. Polioaétus plumbeus...... SO TOs OPERAS Do 716

CORRECTED DESCRIPTION OF PLATE VI. (p. 165.)

Fig. 1. Teracolus sukfumosus, p. 139.| Fig. 7. Teracolus halyattes, p. 145.
2. lyeus, p. 141. 8. ithonus, p. 146.
3. flaminia, p. 140. oe suffusus, p. 152.
4. —— lycoris, p. 140. 10. pseudocale, p. 154.
5. Sriga, p. 142. Lit: hero, p. 150.
6. lucullus, p. 143. 12. —— pseudacaste, p. 156.

PROCEEDINGS

OF TILE

SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS

OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.

January 4, 1876.
Prof. Newton, F.R.S., V.P., in the Chair.

The Secretary read the following report on the additions to the
Society’s Menagerie during the month of December 1875 :—

The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the
month of December were 86 in number. Of these, 17 were acquired
by presentation, 54 by purchase, | by exchange, | by birth, and 13
were received on deposit. The total number of departures during
the same period, by death and removals, was 113.

The most noticeable additions during the month of December
were as follows :—

A Haast’s Apteryx (Apteryx haasti) from New Zealand, pre-
sented by Baron F. von Mueller, C.M.Z.S., 18th December, 1875.
Two examples of this Apteryx were despatched by our esteemed
correspondent from Melbourne; but only one reached us alive—the
first living individual of this recently determined species (assuming
that its distinctness from A. oweni is fairly established) that has
arrived in this country.

A Night-Parrot (Stringops habroptilus) from New Zealand, pre-
sented by Mr. T. E. Featherston, 23rd December, 1875.

Three male Moose (Adlces machlis) from North America, deposited
28th December, 1875.

Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1876, No. I. ]

2 DR. HECTOR ON MAORI FEATHER MATS. [Jan. 4,

A letter was read, addressed to the Secretary by Mr. George
Brown, Corresponding Member, dated Port Hunter, Duke-of- York
Island (lat. 4° 7'S., long. 152° 22! E.), Sept. 5, 1875, stating that he
had shipped by the ‘ John Wesley,’ for the Society, to the care of
Dr. George Bennett at Sydney two Cassowaries, and a Cockatoo
from the adjoining island of New Britain, and two Pigeons and two
Parrots from Duke-of-York Island, and some other birds, which he
trusted would arrive safely. Mr. Brown stated that he had a col-
lector at work along with him, and hoped shortly to have made a
good series of specimens of the hitherto almost unknown fauna of
this and the neighbouring islands.

The Secretary had received intelligence from Dr. Bennett of the
safe arrival of the two Cassowaries (Casuarius bennetti) and of four
of the other birds at Sydney, and that they would be forwarded to
the Society by the ‘ Paramatta’ on her next return voyage.

The following extract was read from a letter addressed to the
Secretary by Mr. R. Trimen, Curator of the South-African Museum,
Cape-town, dated 24th Nov. 1875.

«Your note (P. Z.S. 1875, pp. 81, 82) on Canis chama, Smith,
leads me to think that you may be interested in hearing that there
are two specimens of that species in this Museum.

“They have hitherto been labelled C. variegatoides, Smith (South
Afr. Qu. Journ. ii. p. 87), the example first received having been so
determined by the late Curator; but on comparison of them with
the characteristic plate (xviii.) in the ‘ Proceedings,’ and with Dr.
Smith’s descriptions of the two species, it is clear that they are C.
chama and not C. variegatoides.

“T should be glad to hear if you know any thing about the latter
species.

Me The late Dr. J. E. Gray referred it (List Mamm. Brit. Mus. 1843,
p- 58) to C. mesomelas, Schreb.; but as Dr. Smith was well ac-
quainted with C. mesomelas, it seems improbable that he would have
founded a new species on any thing less than a well-marked
variety.

“ C’, chama is more widely spread than Dr. Smith’s account would
lead one to suppose, one of our two examples being from the neigh-
bourhood of Beaufort (about the centre of this colony) and the other
from near Caledon, a town about 70 miles east (and a little to the
south) of Cape-town.”

Dr. Hector, F.R.S., sent for exhibition three feather mats, made
by the Maoris of New Zealand :—

No. 1. An ancient mat, obtained by Dr. Buller from a chief be-
longing to the Upper Wanganui river. Centre of pigeon’s feathers
( Carpophaga nove-zealandic } trimmed with feathers from the Kaka
(Nestor meridionalis) and North-Island Kiwi (Apteryx mantelli),
and also tufts of hair of the ancient Maori dog, now extinct.

No. 2. A mat of Kiwi feathers (Apteryx mantelli) from Tampo
Lake, North Island. The harsh feel, from the prolonged shafts

Seer mn ne) 24s
- 7 1 (eae mi :
fae. ff mate

rh ‘7 cae F,
vey wh fs

PZ. 67a

JSmit, lith Hanhart imp.

/

SIPAODON PLATYCHPS, 2.

1876.] PROF. FLOWER ON THE SKULL OF A XIPHODON. 3

characteristic of this species, is obvious. Each feather is worked into

the flax of the mat. SER ERT
No. 3. A mat of wing-feathers of the Kaka (Nestor meridionalis),

made by the natives near Wellington.

The following papers were read :—

1. Description of the Skull of a Species of Xiphodon, Cuvier.
By Witt1am Henry Frower, F.R.S., F.Z.S., F.G.S.,

&e.
[Received November 16, 1875.]

(Plate I.)

The Hon. Auberon Herbert has lately presented to the Museum
of the Royal College of Surgeons a fossil cranium which merits de-
scription, as in some measure assisting to fill up one of the still in-
numerable vacant spaces in the vast and complex history of living
beings, a history gradually, slowly, but no less surely, being recon-
structed by the united labours of explorers and palzeontographers in
all parts of the world.

In some respects, the specimen is provokingly unsatisfactory for
the purpose, partly from its own incompleteness, but especially in
the absence of certain knowledge as to its locality and geological an-
tiquity. As it had passed through several hands before it came into
Mr. Herbert’s possession, there is no external history belonging to
it, except a traditional statement that it was found in the neighbour-
hood of Woodbridge, in Suffolk.

At first little more was to be seen in it than an ovoid mass, nearly
nine inches long, of dark grey, very compact, micaceous sandstone,
with the surface smoothly rounded, and almost polished, evidently by
the action of water. Toa superficial observer it might have passed
for a large rolled pebble; but closer examination showed that, be-
sides having the general form of the head of an animal, the surface
here and there presented darker patches, having a distinctly bony
structure, which, from their situation and form, plainly revealed the
general outline of the cranium within.

After a considerable amount of trouble, the closely adhering en-
veloping matrix was completely cleared away. The specimen was
then shown to consist of the almost entire cranium (skull without
lower jaw) of an animal of the size of a small sheep, with all its
cavities and external depressions filled up with a matrix of the above-
described sandstone, and then so rolled as to wear down some of
the most prominent parts, as the zygomatic arch and, unfortunately
the whole of the crowns of the teeth; for the palatal surface was
exposed, smooth and polished, and the dental characters are only
indicated by the alveoli or by roots worn down to the level of the sur-
rounding bone. This is a very great loss, more especially as it is
mainly by the form of the enamelled crowns of the teeth, generally

1*

4 PROF. FLOWER ON THE SKULL OF A XIPHODON. |[Jan. 4,

better preserved than any other part of the body, that extinct forms
of the group to which this one is allied have been characterized.
The anterior portion of the skull has also been broken off close to the
premaxillary suture, and consequently is wanting in the specimen.

Before proceeding to the description of the skull, the question
naturally arises—What inference can be drawn from the condition of
the fossil and its matrix as to its probable origin? Several experi-
enced palzontologists to whom it was shown while still partially
imbedded, declared that they knew of no fossil remains in a cor-
responding condition ; and on comparing it with all the Mammalian
specimens from every part of the world, contained in the British
Museum, not one was found agreeing with it.

It certainly approximates very nearly in most of its characters to
the curious “box stones” of the Suffolk Crag, to which Mr. Ray
Lankester directed attention in the ‘ Quarterly Journal of the Geolo-
gical Society’ for 1870 (p. 499), though less ferruginous in colour
than they generally are. If this suggestion should prove to be
correct, it will confirm the indication as to locality mentioned above.
The “box stones” are evidently waterworn aggregations of sand-
stone, generally, though by no means invariably, surrounding some
organic body, and are remnants of a broken-up formation of an
earlier age than the Red Crag in which they are now found. They
are considered by Mr. Lankester, from a comparison of the mol-
luscous fossils found in them, to be of “ Diestien”’ age, or approxi-
mately equivalent to the so-called “ Black Crag” of Antwerp ; but,
as will be mentioned hereafter, the zoological characters of the present
specimen indicate a much greater geological antiquity.

The skull is that of a rather young animal, as shown by the still
open suture between the basioccipital and the basisphenoid bones ;
but (at least in the case of existing Ruminants) this sign of imma-
turity remains some time after all the permanent teeth are in place,
as appears to have been the case in the present specimen.

The cranium differs most notably from that of all existing species
of Ruminants in the breadth and flatness of the frontal region be-
tween the orbits, the sudden contraction behind the orbits, and the
large extent of the temporal fossee, which is increased by well-
marked sagittal and occipital erests. Hyomoschus is that to which
it comes nearest ; indeed, if we could imagine a larger animal of the
Traguline type (7. e. an animal with a more lengthened head, and
greater surface for the implantation of teeth and for the attachment
of muscles, without corresponding increase of size of the brain-cavity
and orbits—the modifications, in fact, which always occur in larger,
as compared with smaller, members of a natural group), we should
obtain a form closely resembling the present skull. Its special pecu-
liarity would still be the flatness and width of the interorbital region
above, in consequence of which the cavities of the orbits look directly
outwards, instead of upwards and outwards as in Hyomoschus.

The sides of the face in front of the orbits are flat, as in the Tra-
gulide and in many true Ruminants, without any sign of depression
for a suborbital gland; but further forward, commencing just be-

-

1876.] PROF. FLOWER ON THE SKULL OF A XIPHODON. 5

hind the large infraorbital foramen, is a wide and deep oval depres-
sion, extending over the whole of the region above the premolar
teeth. Indications only of such a depression are seen in the Tragu-
lidee. There is no vacuity at the point of junction between the
nasals, maxille, lachrymals and frontals, as in so many Cervidee and
Antelopes, and as is slightly indicated in Hyomoschus, though not
in Tragulus. The sutures bounding the lachrymal bone, and be-
tween the maxilla and malar, are beautifully marked by deeply in-
dented and wavy lines; but the premaxillary suture cannot be dis-
tinguished, being probably situated anteriorly to the point of frac-
ture of the skull. The supraorbital foramina are not very large,
and are placed in depressions rather nearer the middle line than the
margin of the orbit, on a level with the anterior angle of that
cavity ; and, as in many existing Artiodactyles, a groove is continued
forwards from them.

The posterior margin of the orbits, if, as is probable, they were
originally complete, have been broken away, as has the entire zygo-
matic arch.

Turning to the base of the skull, the occipital condyles are lost ;
but the greater part of the basioccipital, with its pair of pr minent
tubercles, remains. On each side of this the oval form of the bases
of the large auditory bullz can be distinctly made out, though they
have been worn level to the rest of the surface of the skull. Their
interior, however, can be seen to be filled with a fine network of
cancellar tissue—a character common to the Suid, Tragulidz, and
Camelidee, and absent in nearly all the true Ruminants. On the
lower surface of the skull, as well as above, the elongation of the
middle region is a conspicuous feature.

The hinder margin of the palate is produced backwards to the
extent of fully three quarters of an inch beyond the notches on each
side; but as its edge has been broken off, it is impossibie to describe
its true form.

Between the teeth the surface is long, narrow, and depressed
along the middle line. ‘There is no sign, even at the anterior frac-
tured edge, of the incisive foramina, which must consequently have
been small; but there is a conspicuous foramen opening forwards
near the outer edge of the palate opposite the second premolar tooth,
and placed rather more posteriorly on the left than on the right side.

The alveoli, in most of which broken roots of teeth remain, form
a continuous series along each side of the palate, as far forward as
the line of fracture. Posteriorly they have been so much injured
that their form and number cannot be made out with perfect cer-
tainty ; but they appear to indicate teeth of the following character.

Beginning at the hinder end of the series, there are three molars,
with four roots, wider transversely than from before backwards.
The most anterior of the three must have been considerably smaller
than the other two, which appear to have been nearly equal in size.
In front of the molars there are seven roots, rounded or transversely
elongated, placed in a single line, and nearly equidistant, indi-
cating a series of compressed teeth, each with an anterior and a

6 PROF. FLOWER ON THE SKULL OF A XIPHODON. [Jan. 4,

posterior root. Unfortunately the region in which the posterior of
these teeth is situated is most damaged, and its form cannot be clearly
made out; but, judging from the analogy of Cenotherium, Xiphodon,
and allied forms, we have here the whole premolar series, the last
having two external, and one internal root, obliterated in the speci-
men, and each of the others two roots only. The canines would
thus be the teeth next beyond the line of fracture ; but they evidently
could not have been large, or deeply implanted, as in Tragulidze.
Of the incisors, nothing can be said from actual knowledge ; but all
analogies of allied forms lead to the supposition that the complete
number (three on each side) were present.

It is evident that the animal to which this cranium belonged was
a member of that group of Artiodactyles in which the general form
of the modern Ruminants was shadowed out, but in which the typi-
cal number of teeth (eleven on each side, above and below, in con-
tinuous series) was still maintained, a group largely represented in
the North-American Miocene strata by Oreodon and its allies, and of
which the elegant little Cenotherium is one of the best-known
European forms.

It differs, however, considerably in general form and proportions
from any of the former as figured by Leidy, especially in the
absence of a suborbital fossa, and is readily distinguished from
the latter by the want of the deep median notch in the hinder edge
of the palate, and by the more compressed form of the premolars,
as estimated by the size of the roots. I am unable, however, to
point out any character by which to separate it from Cuvier’s Xtpho-
don, constituted in the ‘ Ossemens fossiles’ as a subgenus of Anop-
lotherium. From the type of that form, X. gracilis of the Paris
Upper Eocene, it differs, as far as can be inferred from descriptions
and figures, chiefly in superior size, being about one third larger.

Another form to which it is closely allied is known as a British
fossil from the Upper Eocene of Hordwell Cliff, having been de-
scribed by Professor Owen under the name of Dichodon cuspi-
datus*,

This animal is known by the teeth alone ; and it is singular that, as
far as the comparison of the size and shape of the roots or alveolar
walls will allow, there is no reason why the teeth of Dichodon cuspi-
datus should not have belonged to our present specimen. Although
there is not yet evidence enough to be assured of their identity, and
more perfect specimens of either may show that the idea is fallacious,
I yet think it necessary to point out the possibility. But then there
are grave doubts, as already expressed by Gervais}, whether Dicho-
don is really separable generically from Xiphodon. The main cha-
racter on which the genus was founded, the peculiarity of the last
lower premolar tooth, was, as the original describer himself subse-
quently pointed out, simply the result of a milk-tooth having been
mistaken for a permanent onet. The British species attributed to the

* Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, vol. iv. 1848, p. 36.

+ Zoologie ct Paléontologie Francaise, 2™° edit. (1859), p. 159.
{ Quarterly Journ. Geol. Soe. vol. xiii. (1857), p. 190.

1876.] DR.J. VON HAAST ON A NEW ZIPHIOID WHALE. 7f

genus Dichobune are also considered by Gervais to be more properly
Xiphodons ; so it is perfectly clear that a more careful comparison
than has yet been made will be necessary to determine the claims of
either to generic distinction.

Being always strongly opposed to the multiplication of generic
designations without very adequate grounds, I shall be content in the
present instance, to retain the Cuvierian name X¢phodon*, and, in the
absence of any certain evidence that it belongs to any of the pre-
viously described species, to distinguish it as XY. platyceps.

It may be added that all the species with which it is most nearly
related, found both in England and France, belong to the Upper
Eocene epoch, or “ proicene”’ of Gervais.

The principal dimensions of the cranium are as follows :—

inches. _ centim.

Length, in its mutilated state .......... 8:2 20°8

(About 9 inches if perfect.)
From anterior margin of orbit to occipital

CLES eee ees cect aka ce RUE 13
From anterior margin of orbit to infraorbital

MNIBEM TNE pode caidas shenasions ¢s 14° 28 3
Breadth of upper surface of skull between

TOs oe hs ERNE SIME aeree a
Greatest parietal breadth .............-
Breadth at anterior part of temporal fossa .
Height of skull (between frontal region and

hinder part of palate) . 2. .06..--00.
Height oer. 5 656. << es «= REI RES
Length of molar and premolar series ..
Breadth of palate between posterior molars
between middlepremolars 1°

2? ”

2. Ona New Ziphioid Whale. By Juxius von Haast, Ph.D.,
F.R.S., Director of the Canterbury Museum, Christ-
church, New Zealand. Communicated by Prof. W. H.
Frower, F.R.S.

[Received November 16, 1875.]

In the month of May of this year the Canterbury Museum re-
ceived from W. Hood, Esq., of the Chatham Islands, three skulls of
Ziphioid Whales taken from specimens stranded with about 25 others
during the summer of last year on the Waitangi beach of the main
island of that group.

They were described as ‘‘blackfish,” all belonging to the same
school, by my informant, who moreover believes that the whole series
belonged to the same species.

* Not, however, as a subgenus of Anoplotherium, from which it is perfectly
distinct. é

8 DR. J. VON HAAST ON A NEW ZIPHIOID WHALE. [Jan. 4

Unfortunately the skulls were so badly separated from the body
that the occipital portion has been cut off, so as to lay the brain-ca-
vity open; but as they were brought over with the greater portion of
the skin still attached, some hitherto unknown and, as I think, pecu-
liar characteristic features in the dentition of a Ziphioid genus have
fortunately been preserved.

These three skulls accord in many respects with the genus Mesop-
lodon of Gervais, of which I will point out only one, viz. that they
possess one tooth in each ramus of the lower jaw opposite the pos-
terior edge of the symphysis, and of varying size and shape, either
hidden below the gum or rising conspicuously above, according to age
and sex. They differ, however, from all known species of the genus
by possessing in the upper jaw, starting in a vertical line above the
posterior border of the mandibular tooth, a series of small conical
teeth slightly incurved, which extends to near the gape of the mouth.

I may here at once observe that these teeth are neither rudimen-
tary nor are they confined to young animals, because, as I shall show
in the sequel, these three skulls are derived from individuals of dif-
ferent ages, of which one is an aged (male ?) animal, in which the row
of teeth is best developed. It is thus evident that this series of teeth
is a functional portion of the animal, and is constant and necessary
for its proper nourishment, some of them being broken off, others
evidently worn down from use. That these small teeth, of which
the largest stands scarcely half an inch above the gums, are only
rooted in the gums, does not lessen their value as a specific character
of some importance.

Of the species of Zipbioid Whales inhabiting the New-Zealand
seas I have obtained three, namely Berardius arnouwxii (3 specimens),
Ziphius nove zealandie, and Mesoplodon floweri (Haast, MS.), none
of which shows the Jeast sign or rudiments of teeth in the upper jaw.
Moreover several others have been secured in New Zealand and Aus-
tralia ; but nowhere can I find that, except the teeth in the lower jaw,
they possessed any ; and I have looked carefully over all the different
papers on the Ziphioid Whales of the northern hemisphere to which
I had access, without finding the slightest mention made of the oc-
currence of such a peculiar feature in their dentition.

On the contrary, Professor Flower in his excellent paper on the
recent Ziphioid Whales (Trans. Zool. Soc. vol. viii. part 3), when
enumerating their principal structural characters, begins by stating
that they have ‘no functional teeth in the upper jaw.” IL believe
that this term functional is rather ambiguous and can scarcely be
applied to the genus under consideration, as we are totally un-
acquainted with the food on whieh it subsists, or the manner in which
the same is obtained.

It is true, these teeth do not grow from alveolar grooves in the
maxillaries, but only from a groove in the gums, and have their roots
implanted therein; nevertheless I have no doubt that they are
always present and do perform as distinet and important functions as
those of Koga or any of the Dolphins which possess teeth of similar
form.

1876.] DR. J. VON HAAST ON A NEW ZIPHIOID WHALE. 9

The first of the accompanying photographs shows the three skulls
in comparison with each other; the second the middle portion of the
second skull, belonging to an aged (male?) individual; whilst the
following list gives the principal dimensions of these three skulls with
the soft parts attached, as far as they could be ascertained; but as
soon as they are macerated I shall offer some further observations on
their anatemical structure.

Table of Measurements of three Skulls of Mesoplodon Grayi,
with the greater portion of soft parts adhering.

serete Skull IL., | Skull IIT.,
Petal probably | probably

(full- male male
grown). (aged). (young).

Height of Skull from top of nasals
(skin preserved) to lower border of
pterygoids, the latter lying exposed...) 0 1113 | 0 11:38 | 0 912

Greatest breadth of skull across post-
orbital processes of frontals............ 1 048 |}1 088 9°51

Length of skull from crest of nasal bones

to anterior border of rostrum, in a

SAID HNO, -.15.50- sade wenaaces -oaoscae 2 546 |2 347 |1 507
Length of ramus of lower jaw, soft parts

preserved on anterior border ......... 2 752 |}2 603 |1 775
From gape* of mouth to anterior bor-

der of lower jaw .........s00ecceesesaees I .G50F |i 287 10-05
From anterior border of lower jaw to

Contre Of tOOt .....100.20-eeecseeneeee nee 10°75 10-12 5:00
From centre of tooth to gape of mouth. 7-75 6°75 5:05
Breadth of lower jaw at centre of|

HOP HMR see std os een eee ocsn Seeds ae se eased 2°31 2-69 175
Distance from extremity of rostrum to

first anterior tooth ...........:::e:.000 11-06 10°75 5°62
Distance from gape to end of teeth ... 1-02 1:37 1:40
Bye, perpendicular diameter, about ... 2:25 2:27
Opening of blower, the two extremities

slightly directed backwards, about... 4-50 4:50 3:25
Number of teeth in upper jaw ......... 19 17 17

I should have liked to give also in this list the breadth of the ros-
trum at the anteorbital notches, as it would have supplied another im-
portant point for comparison ; but the coverings prevented this ; also
I was not able to give the total length of each skull, owing to the oc-
cipital portion being cut off; but the length of the skulls from crest
of nasals to anterior border of the rostrum, as well as the length of
the ramus of each mandible, will supply this deficiency and offer us
sufficient material for comparison.

* The drying of the skin has been so unequal in the different. specimens, and

eyen on the two sides of the same skull, that the position of the gape cannot be
fixed with precision.

10 DR. J. VON HAAST ON A NEW ZIPHIOID WHALE. [Jan. 4,

Examining the skulls separately, we find that the one marked No.
1 is longer but narrower than No. 2. This is still more striking
when we compare the two rostrums with each other, that of skull
No. 1 being considerably narrower than that of skull No. 2. The same
observation applies to the mandibles, which in No. 1 only widen very
gradually and are much narrower all along than those of skull No.
2. In fact, if both skulls had been obtained separately I believe that
they would probably have been assigned to two distinct species.

bular tooth. From a photograph.
6, Four of the upper teeth, with the whole of their roots exposed; natural size.

When the skull No. 1 was first examined by me, the sharp point
of a tooth in each ramus of the lower jaw, when passing the finger
over the gums, was discernible; but I doubt if this was to be felt
before the gums were dried up.

In cutting a portion of the gums away, the apex of a very flat tooth,
rather acutely triangular as far as visible, was exposed, which stands
about one eighth of an inch above the upper surface of the ramus.
This tooth is imbedded in a very narrow alveolar cavity situated near
the posterior edge of the symphysis, the ramus here scarcely bulging
out ; this is still more obvious if we compare that portion of the ramus
with that of skulls Nos. 2 & 3.

Above the posterior edge of the small tooth in the lower jaw, and
which without doubt has to perform some function, notwithstanding
that it is covered by the gum, a row of small conical teeth, the apices
slightly incurved, begins on each side of the upper jaw, reaching
within an inch of the gape of the mouth, which, however, may have
somewhat retreated by the drying of the skin.

These small teeth are situated in a well-defined dental groove in
the gums. There were 19 teeth on each side, of which, however,
several are broken off. They are from 0°20 to 0°40 inch long, and
occupied a line 6°12 inches in length, standing nearly the eighth of
an inch apart. Of the whole series, the first or anterior tooth is the
smallest, the succeeding ones gradually getting larger till the eighth,
and then maintaining the same size to nearly their termination.

1876.] DR. J. VON HAAST ON A NEW ZIPHIOID WHALE. 11

The crowns of the teeth stand at about the same level with the cen-
tral line of the palate. The opening along the upper surface of the
rostrum is still unclosed, thus showing that the animal is not so aged
as the next specimen, No. 2.

I may here add that the rostrum in all three skulls is half an inch
shorter than the mandible, and that it lies in a well-defined groove in
the latter.

Skull No. 2.—The measurements of this skull, as far as I was able
to obtain them, show that, as previously stated, it was not so elongate
as the former, but somewhat broader and more massive in all its pro-
portions. The rami of the mandible widen much sooner than those of
the former; about 7 inches from their anterior extremity they ex-
pand considerably in order to form the alveolar cavity for a large tooth
which here rises conspicuously on both sides, having a vertical position.
This tooth has a compressed triangular shape, is 24 inches broad at
its base on the line of the gums, and rises 12 inch above them.

On the inner side near the top it is slightly abraded, and on the
outside broken considerably, so as to suggest that the animal used it
for the purpose of defence or attack. ‘This injury has taken place
on both teeth, so that they have lost their point and show a ragged
horizontal apex with a width of nearly a quarter of an inch.

From behind the tooth the rami expand very little as far as the gape.

A similar row of small teeth, described as occurring in the first
specimen, exists also in this second skull; but there are apparently
only 17 of them. Their position is exactly the same as in the
foregoing, the first standing exactly above the posterior edge of the
base of the large tooth in the lower jaw.

The teeth have the same form as those previously described, except
that they are generally thicker; this becomes conspicuous with the
7th tooth, after which they gradually increase to the 13th, which is
4 of an inch thick at its base and stands 0°45 inch above the gums.
‘They then keep nearly the same size to the posterior end of the series.

As the space on which these 17 teeth stand is only 4°25 inches
long, besides their greater stoutness they are far more crowded than
in the first-described skull.

Owing to the fact that the gums have dried more thoroughly in
this than in the two other skulls, in both of which the teeth stand
erect with the curve of the apex directed inwards, the teeth in this skull
are no longer in their normal position, but lie somewhat forwards on
the palate.

The groove in the upper surface of the rostrum, between the pre-
maxillaries, is filled by a convex ridge of dense bone with a small
channel on each side. That this is only caused by age, and that it
is neither a sexual nor a specific character, is proved by the fact
that the next skull, No. 3, which is doubtless a young half-grown
specimen of the same sex as the one under review, has this groove on
the top of the rostrum still open, and thus resembles the skull No. 1,
although in the latter that groove is narrower and more shallow.

Skull No. 3.—Assuming that the last-described skull belongs to

12 DR. J. VON HAAST ON A NEW ZIPHIOID WHALE. [Jan. 4,

an aged male, the measurements of the third skull under consideration
must lead us to the conclusion that it is that of a young half-grown
male. Beginning with the lower jaw, the same form as in the fore-
going is observable, the rami expanding considerably as soon as we
reach the neighbourhood of the alveolar cavity ; and although the
tooth in the same is only small, and stands only 0°25 inch above the
edge of the ramus, that alveolar cavity is much more bulged out and
has a different form from the first (or female?) skull described.
The apex of the tooth was distinctly visible, and seemed to have
already pierced the gums when the animal was alive.

The row of teeth in the upper jaw, however, which have the
same form as in the skull No. 2, are smaller and somewhat more
slender. They begin likewise above the posterior end of the alveolar
cavity.

There are, as in the preceding skull, 17 teeth on each side, oceupy-
ing a length of 2°48 inches. They stand more closely together than
in the supposed female skull No. 1, thus also agreeing with the second
skull in that respect.

In volume vi. of the Transactions of the New-Zealand Institute,
Dr. Hector describes the lower jaw of a Ziphioid Whale under the
title ‘‘ Notice of a variation in the dentition of Mesoplodon hectort,
Gray.”

It is difficult for me to conceive by what process the tooth in the
lower jaw which, in Mesoplodon hectori, stands at the anterior end
of the ramus, could have travelled as far backwards as to stand now
opposite the posterior edge of the symphysis. Hitherto I have be-
lieved that the position of the mandibular teeth was constant and a
valuable specific character—an opinion which, as far as I am aware, is
held by the most eminent cetologists, and which the observations I
was able to make on the three skulls under review amply confirms.
Moreover [ wish to add that a comparison of these three skulls with
the skull of Mesoplodon hectori, Gray, in the Canterbury Museum,
and which is derived from an aged specimen, shows at a glance the
distinct specific characters.

Weare only at the beginning of the study of our Ziphioid Whales ;
and I have no doubt that year by year new material will come to
hand ; so that by the lumping of two distinct species into one, as at-
tempted by Dr. Hector, and for which no tangible reason can be as-
signed, only confusion will be created.

The occurrence of hidden teeth in the gums of Ziphius australis,
Burmeister, of which he gives a careful description in his ex-
haustive paper, “‘ Descripcion detallada del Epiodon australe” in the
‘ Anales del Museo publico de Buenos Ayres,’ part v. page 328, is a
point of great interest. On first thought, one might assume that
that specimen was so young that the teeth had not yet pierced the
gums, and that animals belonging to that species when full-grown
would be possessed of a row of teeth in each jaw resembling those of
Mesoplodon grayi. However, two (and what I think fatal) objections
have to be urged against such a theory.

The skull of No. 3 belongs doubtless to a younger specimen than

Ps. >

jh a WN a lees

1876.] MR. P. L. SCLATER ON BIRDS FROM ST. LUCIA. 13

Ziphius australis; nevertheless the row of teeth standing above
the gums was perfectly formed; and, secondly, the specimen of
Ziphius nove zealandia, of which the Canterbury Museum pos-
sessses a complete skeleton, was an aged female and obtained in the
flesh, but did not show the least trace of any row of small teeth
above the gums.

I have examined carefully the gums of the new species in both jaws,
where no teeth were visible, but without the least success, no hidden
teeth being in existence anywhere.

Finally I propose to designate this new Cetacean by the specific
name of grayi in memory of the late Dr. J. E. Gray, to whom New
Zealand is so much indebted for his contributions towards the better
knowledge of its natural history.

Conclusion.

In summing up the evidence which the three skulls under review
present tous, the following points may be accepted as fully’ esta-
blished :—

Ist. That there exists a Ziphioid Whale iv the New-Zealand
seas which possesses a mandibular tooth at the posterior edge of the
symphysis, either hidden below the gum or standing conspicuously
above it, according to age or sex.

2nd. That the skull of one of the sexes (probably the female) is
longer but narrower and lower than that of the opposite (probably
the male) sex—the latter possessing also a large triangular compressed
tooth rising above the gum, which in the other (probably female)
sex is much smaller and almost hidden below the gum.

3rd. That both sexes possess permanently in the upper jaw a row
of small conical teeth with the apex slightly incurved, which, although
only rooted in the gums, have to perform important functions in the
nourishing-process of the animal.

3. On some additional Species of Birds from St. Lucia,
West Indies. By P. L. Scratser, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S.,
Secretary to the Society.

[Received November 30, 1875. ]
(Plate II.)

The Rev. J. E. Semper, of St. Lucia, who has already done so
much to make us acquainted with the ornithology of that island,
has lately forwarded to me a third collection of birds, which I have
now the pleasure of exhibiting. Jt contains examples of eight
species not included in my two former articles on this subject*,
and among them two specimens of a very remarkable form, which
* P. Z.8. 1871, p. 263, and 1872, p. 647.

a

14 MR. P. L. SCLATER ON BIRDS FROM ST. LucIA. (Jan. 4,

appears to be referable to a new genus of Mniotiltide. The fol-
lowing is a list of the species, with the local names as given by Mr.

Semper :—

1. Thryothorus mesoleucus, sp.nov. Local name “ Rossignol.”
2. Leucopeza semperi, sp. et gen. nov. Local name, “ Pied-
blanc.”
3. Setophaga ruticilla (Linn.). Local name, ‘ Carrougette.”
4. Progne dominicensis (Gm.). Local name, ‘‘ White-breasted
Swallow.”
. Euphonia flavifrons (Sparrm.). Local name, ‘‘ Moisson a

5
couleurs.”

6. Phonipara bicolor (Linn.). Local name, “‘ Grass-sparrow.”’

7. Zigialitis semipalmata (Bp.) Local name, “ Bécasse A
collier.”

8. Tringa fuscicollis (Vieill.). Local name, “ Bécasse.”’

I append descriptions of the two new species.

THRYOTHORUS MESOLEUCUS, Sp. nov,

Supra terreno-brunneus, alis caudaque nigro transfasciatis, uropy-
git plumis laxis, albo sub apicem punctatis: subtus pure albus
hypochondriis et crisso fulvis, hoc indistincte nigro maculato :
rostro superiore corneo, inferiore albicante, pedibus fuscis :
long. tota 4:0, ale 2°0, caud@ 1:5, rostri a rictu ‘8.

Hab. ins. St. Lucia Antillaram (Semper).

Mus. P. L. S.

Obs. Minor statura quam 7. martinicensis, et rostro longiore

tenuiore et magis incurvo: quoad colores abdomine albo satis
diversus.

LEUCOPEZA SEMPERT, gen. et sp. nov. (Plate II.)

Leucopeza*, gen. nov. ex familia Mniotiltidarum, ad Helmintherum,
Helminthophagam et hujusmodi genera spectans, rostro fere
similt, sed alis rotundatis, remige tertio et quarto longissimis,
secundo quintum equante, primo quam sextus paulo breviore
distinguendum. Ptilosis fere unicolor, cineracea, immaculata.
Pedes fortes. Tarsi elongati. Cauda paulum rotundata.

LEUCOPEZA SEMPERI, Sp. nov. (Plate II.)

Cineraceus unicolor, dorso postico in olivaceum trahente, subtus
pallidior, medialiter albescens, ventre medio fere pure albo:
rostro corneo, pedibus albis: long. tota 5°7, ale 2°7, caude
2°2, tarsi 0°9, rostri a rictu 0°8.

Hab. ins. St. Lucia Antillarum (Semper).

Mus. P.L. S.

* Acuxds, albus, et méGa, pes—ex nomine yulgari “ Pied-blanc”

M & N.Hanhart imp

J.Smit del.et lith

THAMNOPHILUS MELANCHROUS.

1876.] MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON PERUVIAN BIRDS. 15

4. Note on the Spoonbill of the Argentine Republic. By
W. H. Hupson, C.M.Z.S.

[Received November 17, 1875. ]

It has been said that Spoonbills ‘ obtain their food by shovelling
in the mud with their beaks.”’ This is perhaps true of the Euro-
pean bird; the Spoonbills which I have observed feeding certainly
obtained their food exclusively from the water, as Flamingoes do.

In reference to the Rose-coloured Spoonbills of America, I believe
ornithologists have been mistaken in referring them all to one species.

Whether two or only one species existed was a moot question a
century ago: it has been decided that there is but one, the Platalea
ajaja, and that the paler-plumaged birds, with feathered heads and
black eyes, and without the bright wing-spots, the tuft on the
breast, horny excrescences on the beak, and other marks, are only
immature birds. Now it is quite possible the young of P. ajaja
resembles the common Rose-coloured Spoonbill of Buenos Ayres ;
but in that country, for one bird with all the characteristic marks of
an adult P. ajaja, we meet with not less, I am sure, than two or three
hundred examples of the paler bird without any trace of such marks.

This fact of itself might incline one to believe that there two dis-
tinct species, and that the common Platalea of Buenos Ayres inhabits
the temperate regions south of the range of the true P. ajaja.

Other facts confirm me in that opmion. A common Spoonbill
was kept tame by a friend of mine seven years, at the end of which
time it died without having acquired any of the distinguishing marks
of P. ajaja.

I have dissected three examples of the latter species, and observed
in them the curiously formed trachea recently described by Mr.
Garrod*. I have shot perhaps a hundred specimens of the common
bird ; for they are extremely abundant with us. Of these I have
opened about thirty, but in none of them did I find this form of
trachea. I am therefore convinced that we have two distinct
species of rose-coloured Spoonbill, inhabiting different portions of
the continent. .

5. On Peruvian Birds collected by Mr. Whitely. By P. L.
Scuater, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., and Osspert Sarvin,
M.A., F.R.S.—Part IX.+

[Received December 8, 1875. ]
(Plate III.)

The ninth collection of Mr. Whitely’s Peruvian birds, now before
us, has been formed in the same district of High Peru as the last
was. It contains examples of sixty-five species.

* P. Z.8. 1875, p. 297. + For Part VIII. see P, Z. 8. 1874, p. 677.

16 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON PERUVIAN BIRDS. [Jan. 4,

Maramora, Potrero, and Huiro are villages in the valley of Santa
Anna, north of Cuzco, at elevations of 4000, 4500, and 4800 feet
respectively. The other localities have been mentioned in our pre-

vious papers on this subject.

The following is a complete list of the species :—

Nom
Av. Localities.
Neotr
page
1. Parula pitiayumi (Vieill.) .........ceecc.ee 8 | Huiro.
2. Geothlypis velata (Vieill.) ...........caseee. 10 | Huiro, Maranura,
3. Setophaga verticalis, Lafr. et d’Orb. ...... 10 | Huiro, Potrero.
4. Vireosylvia olivacea (Linn.).........62....... 11 | Maranura, Huiro.
5. Atticora eyanoleuca (Vieill.) .......0....00. 14 | Maranura.
*O; (Controstrigmapeicy ikeciiteseicas. see ... | Maranura.
Pi. LUD HONLO. RO aKHin ne. weereen tame. Sate aa ... | Maranura.
8. Tanagra coclestis, Spix........00......seeseeves 21 | Huiro, Potrero.
9) —— oldvina, Sel. ciebicelccdssedecoseseclsevees 21 | Maranura.
10. DOPING BEND Mls odalee cane dienes otoek 21 =| Paucartambo.
11. Ramphocelus atrosericeus, Lafr. et d’Orb.| 21 Maranura, Potrero.
12 Tachyphonus melaleucus (Sparrm.).........| 23 | Maranura, Huiro,
: Potrero.
13. Saltator magnus (GM.)....ccccccecceceeeeecees 26 | Huiro.
14. Orchesticus ater (Gm.)....0...000..c00eeeeeee 26 | Potrero, Huiro,
15. Spermophila guttwralis (Licht.) ............ 28 | Maranura.
16. Coryphospingus cristatus (Gm.) .......6.... 30 | Potrero.
17. Phrygilus atriceps (Lafr. et d’Orb.)......... 31 | Paucartambo.
18. Fruticeti (Kittl.) ......000....::0.0+0..., 31 | Paucartambo.
19. Poospiza cesar, Scl. and Salv................ 30 | Paucartambo.
20. Ostinops atrovirens (Lafr. et d’Orb.) ...... 35 | Huiro.
21. Dolichonysx orizivora (Linn.) ............668 37 | Paucartambo.
22. Cyanocorax incas (Bodd.) ............00.00- 39 | Huiro.
23. Muscisaxicola rubricapilla(Ph. et Landb.)| 44 | Tinta.
24. Sluwiatilis, Sel. et Salv. ........c.. eee 44 | Potrero.
25. Todirostrum cinerewm (Linn.)............4.. 45 | Maranura, Potrero.
26. Euscarthmus wuchereri, Scl. et Saly. ...... 45 | Maranura.
27. Elainea pagana (Licht.) .........cecceceeenee 48 | Maranura.
DO imeem UG OS IN Glens nore a eee eet ee 48
29. —— albiceps (Lafr. et d’Orb.) ...........- 48 | Huiro, Maranura,
Potrero.
*30. —— placens, Scl.........c02.s.ccesscenanseses 48 | Maranura,
31 obscura (Lafr. et d’Orb.)...........0..- 49 | Huiro.
*32. Sublegatus griseocularis .......06.cccsecanees ... | Maranura,
33. Myiozetetes cayennensis (Linn.) ............ 49 | Huiro.
34, Myiodynastes chrysocephalus (Tsch.) ...... 50 | Huiro.
35. Myiobius nevius (Bodd.)....01....cc0cccese0s 51 | Potrero.
36. Mytarchus eruthrocercus, Sel. ......0.00.00+- 52 | Maranura.
37. Tyrannus melancholicus, Vieill, ............ 53 | Huiro.
38. Placellodomus striaticeps (Lafr. et dOrb.)| 65 | Paucartambo.
*39. Thamnophilus melanchrous, sp. nov. ...... ... | Huiro, 4800 feet.
40. —-- radiatus, Vieill. ........cc00.c00.000 ase 70 | Huiro, Maranura.
41. Formicivora rufatra (Lafr. et d’Orb.) ...| 72 | Maranura.
42. Phaethornis guyt (Less.) .........ceeccseeeeee 78 | Huiro.
43, Panoplites matthewsi (Boure.)............04. 83 | Huiro.
44. Acestrura mulsanti (Bourec.) .........6..005 85 | Huiro.
45. Steganura add@ (Boure.)...........0...00000- 86 | Huiro.
*46. Eupetomena hirundo, Gould. ............... ... | Huiro.

1876.] MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN

ON PERUVIAN BIRDS.

17

Nom
Av. Localities.
Neotr
page
47. Leucippus chionogaster (Tsch.) .......+.+ 91 | Huiro.
48. Chlorostilbon prasinus (Less.) .........+.2++- 94 | Huiro.
49. Crotophaga ani, Linn. ............00e00e0eee 107 | Maranura, Potrero.
50. Diplopterus neevius (Gm) ....cseeeeeeeeeee 107 | Maranura.
BUT eraye: cayand (UANNIS)|rs.c-s0-s-.r<-enererees 108 | Huiro.
*52. Bolborhynchus andicola (Finsch) ... | Paucartambo.
53. Tinnunculus sparverius (Linn.) .........+-- 121 | Maranura, Potrero.
54. Phalacrocorax brasilianus (Gm.)........+++- 124 | Laguna de Tungasuca.
55. Querquedula cyanoptera (Vieill.) ......... 129 | Laguna de Tungasuca.
56. Dafila spinicauda (Vieill.) .........00000-00- 130 | Laguna de Tungasuca.
57. Spatula platalea (Vieill.)........-...:.000008- 130 | Laguna de Tungasuca.
*58. Columba albipennis, sp. NOV. ......++.+0-+-+ ... | Paucartambo.
59. —— rufina (Temm.)...........sececseeeeeee ees 132 | Maranura.
60. Metriopelia melanoptera (Mol.) ........-+.. 132 | Tinta.
61. Chamepelia griscola (Spix) .0+...cseeeeeeeees 133 | Maranura.
62. Leptoptila ochroptera, Pelz....... ....2:06.4- 133 | Potrero, Huiro.
*63. Gallinago andind, Tacd. ........ecsecseesees ... | Tinta.
64. Podiceps calipareus, Lesson. .........+ s-ee.| 150 | Laguna de Tungasuca,
65. —— rollandt, Q. et G..cceec..cerecsceeecsceee 150 | Laguna de Tungasuca.

6. ConrROsTRUM, sp. inc.

A single skin of what is probably the female of a new Conirostrum,
allied to C. albifrons or possibly of a new Dacnis.

7. EvpHONIA, sp. inc.

Two skins of the female of a thick-billed Zuphonia of the group
allied to H. violacea, probably of E. lanitroséris (Lafr. et d’Orb.).

30. ELAINEA PLACENS, Sclater.

This brings the range of this species down to Peru. We have
compared skins from Mexico, Guatemala, Veragua, Panama, Bogota,
and Ecuador. The last-named (£. implacens, Sclater, olim) agree
with the Peruvian in being rather darker on the back ; but a Bogota
skin is barely different in this respect from Sclater’s Mexican type.

32. SUBLEGATUS GRISEOCULARIS.

This Tyrant bird, of which Mr. Whitely sends a pair from Mara-
nura, is very closely allied to the Venezuelan S. glader, but is recog-
nizable by its shorter smaller bill, shorter crest, and the paler colour
of the back. Sclater’s collection contains a single immature example
of the same form from Mendoza (Weisshaupt), labelled ‘‘ Elainea
griseocularis, Landbeck ;” and there is a second skin from the same
source in Salvin and Godman’s collection. Whether this name has
ever been published or not we are not sure; but we adopt it as a
designation of this allied species, which is generally of the same
form as its northern congener.

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. II. 2

18 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON PERUVIAN BIRDS. (Jan. 4,

39. THAMNOPHILUS MELANCHROUS, sp. nov. (Plate III.)

Ater ; interscapulii macula magna, campterio et tectricum margt-
nibus albis: ventre lineis quibusdam et marginibus angustis
albis variegato : cauda nigra, rectricum trium lateralium apici-
bus et macula in rectricis utrinque extime pogonio externo
medio albis: rostro et pedibus nigris: long. tota 6:0, ale 2°8,
caude rectr. med. 2°4, ext. 2°1.

Hab. Peruvia alta propé Huiro (Whitely).

Ob. Species quoad formam et colores Thamnophilo aspersiventri

maximé affinis, sed ventre nigro diversa.

46. EvprroMENA HIRUNDO, Gould, Ann. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xvi.
p. 370 (1875).

Mr. Whitely sends the following notes on this interesting new
discovery :—

“‘T found these birds at Huiro in the valley of Santa Ana, at an
elevation of 4800 feet; they rarely approach a flower, but appear
to take their food hawking about in the air, in the manner of Swal-
lows—in fact, at first sight might be easily mistaken for such birds.
Length 62 inches, bill 1 inch, wing 3 inches; eyes and bill black ;
legs, toes, and claws black.”

52. BoLporuHYNCHUS ANDICOLA (Finsch).

Psittacula andicola, Finsch, P. Z. 8S. 1874, p. 90; Sel. et Salv.
P. Z.S. 1874, p. 679.

A third example of this little Parrot from Paucartambo. On the
whole we think this species better referred to the genus Bolbo-
rhynchus, being unquestionably allied to B. orbignesius.

58. CoLUMBA ALBIPENNIS, sp. nov.

Columba maculosa, Scl. et Salv. P. Z. S. 1869, p. 600.

Supra fuscescens, capite et collo postico vinaceo lavatis: dorso
postico et tectricibus supracaudalibus columbino-griseis: tectri-
cibus alarum minoribus albido terminatis, tectricibus majoribus
albo late terminatis, fasciam alarem distincta formantibus : alis
Susco-nigris ¢ cauda fusco-grisea, fascia lata terminali nigra :
subtus griseo-cerulea, collo antico (nisi in gula) et pectore vina-
ceo indutis : alis subtus pallide columbino-griseis: rostro nigro,
basi flavido, pedibus rubris: long. tot. 14:5, ale 9:0, caude 5:0,
rostri a rictu 1'1, tarsz 1°2.

Hab. Peruvia alta, Pitumarca ( Whitely) ; Bolivia (D. Forbes).

Obs. Sp. C. maculose affinis, sed fascia alari alba, corpore subtus
grisescentiore et pagina alarum inferiore pallidiore grisea distin-
guenda.

This species, though closely allied to Columba maculosa, appears to
take its place in Bolivia and Peru, from both of which countries we
possess specimens. The true C. maculosa is found further south ; we
have specimens of it from Mendoza (Weisshaupt), and from the Rio
Negro, where Mr. Hudson obtained it. [Cf. P. Z.S. 1872, p. 545.]

1876. ] DR. O. FINSCH ON SOME FIJIAN BIRDS. 19

63. GALLINAGO ANDINA, Tacz.

Gallinago frenata, Scl. and Salv. P. Z. S. 1869, p. 156.

G. andina, Tacz. P. Z. S. 1874, p. 561.

Having compared one of Mr. Whitely’s skins with M. Taczanow-
ski’s typical specimens, we find them to be identical, and, more-
over, that the bird we attributed in a former paper to the common
G. frenata of Eastern South America really belongs to a distinct
species, as shown by M. Taczanowski. Without placing much stress
upon differences of coloration (a variable and _ unsatisfactory
character in the Snipes), the shortness of the tarsi in G. andina at
once shows its distinctness from G. frenata. The other dimensions
are nearly the same in the two species: the bills appear to be
shorter in G. andina ; but upon this character no value can be placed.
Mr. Whitely (P. Z. 8S. 1869, p. 156) says that ‘the legs and toes
are brownish flesh-colour,” ¢.e. in life. In the skin they are much
paler than those of G. frenata; so that possibly a distinction here
exists between the two birds.

6. Notes on some Fijian Birds, including Description of a
new Genus and Species. By Orro Finscu, Ph.D.,
C.M.Z.S., &e.

[Received December 8, 1875.]

The Museum Godeffroy at Hamburg has received a small collec-
tion of birds from Mr. Theodor Kleinschmidt, of Ovalau, upon which
I beg leave to make a few remarks. I have also the pleasure of
describing a curious new Malurine form, which offers a very interesting
addition to the avifauna of the Fijis and Central Polynesia.

HALcyon sacra, Gm.

One specimen with the blue of the head surrounded by a band of
bright buff; the nuchal collar, sides of vent and flanks, the under
wing- and tail-coverts also strongly tinged with buff. Apparently a
young bird, agreeing with our descriptions (Finsch & Hartl. ‘Orn.
Centr.-Polyn.’ p. 34, “jiingerer Vogel von Viti”) and that of the
“young” by Sharpe (Kingf. pl. 85).

CoLLoOcALiA SsPpoDIOPYGIA, Peale.
Two specimens, agreeing in every respect with specimens from the
Navigators’ (Upolu).

MyZOMELA JUGULARIS, Peale.
An old male in full plumage; rump and upper tail-coverts scarlet;
throat and crop pale orange, remainder of underparts yellowish.

DryMocH&RA, gen. nov.
(Spupos, sylva; xaipw, gaudeo.)
The systematic position of this new and curious Malurine form

is between Camaroptera and Orthotomus. The former has a much
2%

20 MR. A. H. GARROD ON THE (Jan. 4,

shorter, rounded tail; Orthotomus, on the contrary, has a cuneate tail,
whereas in this genus the tail is only graduated. The wings are a
little longer and less rounded than in Orthotomus, the fifth and sixth
quills being the longest, the fourth and seventh scarcely shorter, the
first considerably shortened, half of the fifth ; the bill is straight, at-
tenuated and subulate, a little more robust than in Orthotomus, as
are likewise the legs and feet.

DryMOCHARA BADICEPS, Sp. NOV.

Upper parts olive-brown, tinged with reddish brown on the rump
and upper tail-coverts ; head above to the nape chestnut-reddish ; a
narrow greyish superciliary stripe, extending to the temporal region,
and bordered below by a narrow dark line, which runs from the
lores through the eyes; quills and tail dark olive-brown ; under
parts, from chin to the middle of vent white; sides of head, neck,
and breast washed with brownish-grey, remainder of underparts
pale earthy brown; bill dark brown; feet pale brown.

al. caud. rect.ext. culm. rict. tars. dig. med.
93i 99I" 1 ga Buy gi gam gl

Mr. Kleinschmidt discovered this remarkable little bird during an
expedition inio the interior of Viti-Levu, but could obtain only a
single specimen.

MYIOLEsTES NIGROGULARIS, Layard.

Lalage! nigrogularis, Layard, P. Z.S. 1875, p. 149.

Mr. Layard has described this interesting bird wrongly as a Lalage:
it is a typical M/yiolestes, agreeing in its generic characters with
our M. heinei (H. & F., P. Z.S. 1869, p. 546) from Tongatabu.
Mr. Layard, strangely enough, does not mention this characteristic
bird in his last paper on Fijian birds (P. Z. 8S. 1875, p. 423).

6 Mr. Kleinschmidt obtained but one specimen of this species at
valau.

RHIPIDURA ALBOGULARIS, Layard (ec Less.).

One specimen, agreeing very well with Mr. Layard’s description
(P. Z. 8S. 1875, pp. 29, 434). This is a very excellent and peculiar
species, not to be confounded with any of its allies.

MYyIAGRA CASTANEIVENTRIS, Verr.

One old male as figured (F. & H. Orn. Centr.-Pol. t. ix. f. 2), and
corresponding in every respect with specimens from the Navigators’
Islands.

7. On the Cecum Colt of the Capybara (Hydrocherus capy-
bara). By A. H. Garrop, M.A., F.Z.S., Prosector to

the Society.
[Received December 9, 1875.]
In no work on anatomy with which I am acquainted can I find
any reference to the peculiarities of the cecum coli of the Capybara,

1876.} CCUM COLI OF THE CAPYBARA. 21

which are but an extreme exaggeration of those observed in many of
the allied forms.

In most of those mammals in which a czecum is present, that
organ is simply a direct continuation backwards of the colon beyond
the place of junction of the small and large intestines. In some
Rodents, however, this is not the case, the sacculated caecum in
them not being a direct continuation of the larger gut, but a lateral
diverticulum from a true but simple caecum.

In his account of the anatomy of Capromys fournieri*, Prof.
Owen remarks that the arrangement at the ilio-colic junction is such
that “the two orifices of the blind intestine [that into the ileum and
that into the colon] are analogous to the cardia and pylorus of the
stomach ;” and in his ‘Anatomy of Vertebrates’+ the same illustrious

Sacculated and simple cxca of the Capybara. The continuation of the colon
isseen at a. The small intestine at its termination cannot be seen, being
hidden in the proximal angular bend of the sacculated cecum.

author tells us, with reference to the same animal, that “‘ the caecum
is marked off from the colon by a valvular structure, similar to that
at the end of the ileum.” Thisis an approximation to the condition
which obtains in the animal under consideration.

In the Capybara the small intestine enters the enormous saccu-

* P. ZS. 1832, p. 70. + Vol. iii. p. 425.

guishable from it in structure.

22 MR. A. H. GARROD ON THE (Jan. 4,

lated caecum at about an inch from its open extremity, and its rela-
tions to it are not in any way peculiar. The sacculated cecum is
nearly two feet long, and is traversed by four longitudinal bands.
At its open end, which is an inch beyond (that is, further from the
cecal extremity than) the ileo-ceecal valve, it is constricted by a
circular sphincter muscle, which forms the orifice of communication
with the rest of the cylindrical large intestine. The colic surface of
this sphincter is situated in the side of the colon, three inches from

the blind extremity of a true, simple, thick-walled, slightly pyriform

Fig. 2.

i

--
‘ee

¥.

Diagram of the convolutions of the colon in the Capybara. The dotted line
represents the cxcum springing from the side of the dilated end of the

large intestine, and running forward to the diaphragm. a, ileo-cxcal valve ;
4, rectum.

cecum, which is directly continuous with the colon, and is indistin-

r This second czecum is, as indicated
above, three inches from the extreme end to the centre of the orifice
by which it communicates with the sacculated one. Superficially its

1876.] CCUM COLI OF THE CAPYBARA. 23

longitudinal muscular coat is strongly marked, covering it perfectly
uniformly.

The ileo-ceecal valve is linear and longitudinal ; it projects a short
distance into the sacculated cecum from above as a tube with
slightly turned lips, of which the inferior is a little the longer and
larger. There are some thickened gland-patches in the sacculated
cecum, and a large one in the colon, at the margin of the sphincter
which is towards the continuation of the large intestine; three or
four others are situated irregularly in the walls of the true ceecum.

The disposition of the colon is peculiar and interesting. The
accompanying sketch (fig. 2, p. 22) will explain it best. It was taken
from the view obtained of them as the animal lay on its back. As is
well known, the large intestine commences in the left hypochondriac
region, the true cecum capping the end of the sacculated one an-
teriorly. The gut then, with a curve to the right, runs back to the
hypogastric region, where, with a reversed figure-of-eight twist, it
gets into the normal position of the ascending colon. It so reaches
the right hypochondriac region, and then commences to form, in the
transverse colon, coils very similar to, though on a smaller scale than
those in Indris among the Lemurs and in the Artiodactylate Ungulata,
the much-developed loop being twisted-on itself to the left side.
After reaching the left hypochondrium the descending colon continues
straight to the sigmoid flexure, which is strongly developed, and
thence to the rectum.

The sacculated caecum being bound to the first part of the colon by
bands of equal length (about 23 inches), follows the course of that
canal, and is therefore doubled on itself, not, as Prof. Owen remarks,
occupying the posterior half of the abdomen, but running forwards
towards the diaphragm, above the colon, till its caput arrives in the
right hypochondriac and epigastric regions, where the ruminant-like
coil above referred to is strongly bound to it on its under or ventral
surface.

Neither in Cavia, Dolichotis, Capromys, nor in any of the allied
forms with which I am acquainted, does the strong sigmoid curve of
the large intestine, at the commencement of the sacculated caecum,
develop into a true secondary cecum in the manner that it does in
the Capybara.

Whilst on the subject of the viscera of the Capybara, the following
measurements of those of an adult male will not be out of place—
small intestine 21 feet, large intestine 6 feet 7 inches, caecum | foot
10 inches.

The liver is comparatively simple. The gall-bladder is pyriform,
situated in a cystic fossa, not reaching the free margin of the gland.
The right central lobe is slightly more bulky than the left lateral,
which is more than twice the size of the left central, which, again, is
somewhat larger than the caudate. The spigelian lobe is minute,
and bifid as in so many Rodents.

24 PROF. T., H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. [Jan. 4,

8. Contributions to Morphology. Icuruyorsipa.—No. 1.
On Ceratodus forsteri, with Observations on the Classifi-
cation of Fishes. By Prof. T. H. Huxuny, Sec. B.S.

[Received January 4, 1876.]

Two specimens of Ceratodus forstert have come into my posses-
sion within the last two years. The first was kindly placed at my
disposal by the Secretary of this Society some time ago; but I was
unwilling to dissect it until I had a second. This desideratum was
supplied by my friend Sir George MacLeay, who, on a recent visit to
Australia, was kind enough to undertake to obtain a Ceratodus for me,
and fulfilled his promise by sending me a very fine and well-preserved
fish, rather larger than the first. The first was 32 inches long, the
second only 30 inches, though a considerably stouter fish.

I need hardly say that I have little to add or qualify in the general
description of the exterior structure given by so accomplished and
experienced an ichthyologist as Dr. Giinther*. Only in one point
do I find my interpretation of the facts widely discrepant from his ;
and that is in regard to the position of the external nostrils.

Dr. Ginther says, ‘‘As in Lepidosiren, there are two nasal apertures
on each side, both being situated within the cavity of the mouth.”

That anterior nasal apertures should be situated, in any sense,
‘within the cavity of the mouth” would be so singular a deviation
from the otherwise universal rule, that the anterior nares of verte-
brated animals are situated outside the mouth, on the surface of the
head, that conclusive evidence must be producible before the ano-
maly can be admitted to exist; and, so far as my observations go,
that conclusive evidence is not only wanting, but the contrary is
demonstrable.

In Ceratodus, it is easily seen that the anterior nares are not oc-
cluded when the mouth is shut by the apposition of the edges of the
mandible to the palate. The anterior nares, in fact, lie altogether
outside and in front of the contour of the mandibles, on the under
concave surface of the anterior part of the head. The median portion
of the margin of this region of the head must not be confounded with
the upper lip, with which it has nothing to do. The maxillary por-
tion of the upper lip is, in fact, represented only by a fold of the
integument, which begins on the outer side of the anterior nostril,
and ‘extends back to the angle of the gape, where it passes into the
lower lip. The preemaxillary, or internasal, portion of the upper
lip is represented by a delicate fold of the integument, disposed in
a transverse arch in front of the vomerine teeth, which it separates
from the inner boundary of the anterior nares. The outer and
posterior portion of the lower lip is produced into a free process,
which is folded back against the jaw, and extends for about two thirds
of the distance from the angle of the mouth to the symphysis,
ending by a rounded free edge.

* “Description of Ceratodus,” Phil. Trans, pt. ii. 1871.

1876.] PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. 25

Thus the anterior nares can in no sense be said to open into the
cavity of the mouth, inasmuch as they lie outside the premaxillary
portion of the upper lip, and are not enclosed by the maxillary por-
tion of that lip. They are not even placed between the upper and
the lower lips, inasmuch as the vaulted flap, on the underside of which
they lie, is not the upper lip, but the anterior part of the head.

In Lepidosiren, the anterior nares are closer to the anterior margin
of the head than in Ceratodus, and the premaxillary lip is repre-
sented only by a papillose ridge, in which the integument of the
underside of the head, between the anterior nares, terminates pos-
teriorly. Otherwise the disposition of the nostrils is quite as in
Ceratodus ; and when the mouth is shut, the nostrils open on the
underside of the head, in front of it and of the rudimentary prze-

naxillary portion of the upper lip.

The disposition of the nasal apertures in the Dipnoi is essentially
Selachian*. In the common Dogfish (Scyllium), for example, the
anterior contour of the head answers to the anterior contour of the
head of Ceratodus. The mandibular and maxillary lips are similarly
disposed ; and the external nares are placed on the sides of the head
in a similar position. But the premaxillary part of the upper lip
is much larger and more prominent; and its outer edges (septal alee),
instead of being continued into the maxillary lip, to form the floor of
the nasal passage, are separated from it by a fissure, which commu-
nicates with the nasal cavity. This fissure is overlapped by the
septal alee ; and thus an incomplete nasal passage, which opens pos-
teriorly into the cavity of the mouth, is constituted.

Still more instructive is the comparison of the nasal passages of
Ceratodus with those of Cestracion and Chimera. In Cestracion,
the external nostrils lie just outside the mouth, the lower lip coming
into contact with the maxillary and premaxillary portions of the
upper when the mouth is shut. The anterior end of the maxillary
lip is folded in, and passes into the external part of the ala nasi, which
has a thickened edge, and ends in a continuation of the free fold of
the lip. The inner ala nasi is the outer part of the internasal or pre-
maxillary part of the upper lip. It also ends in a free edge, which is
rolled inwards. The septal ala and the maxillary ala do not unite ;
but a groove is left between their convex edges, which answers to
part of the groove which leads from the nose into the mouth in Dog-
fish and other Plagiostomes. But the greater part of this groove is
represented by a canal formed by the convoluted septal ala, which is
open on its dorsal aspect, and communicates, in front, with the cavity
of the olfactory sac. Behind, the free edge of the septal ala has a
curious fringe ; and when the mouth is shut, this fringe overlaps the
edge of the mandible. The free edge of the septal ala bounds a
large opening, the posterior nostril, which is situated, as in Cera-
todus, at the point of junction between the vomerine and the palatine
teeth. Consequently, when the mouth is shut, there is a free passage
for water through this incompletely closed nasal canal.

* See the excellent observations of Gegenbaur, ‘Kopfskelet der Selachier,’
p. 224 ef seg.

26 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. [Jan. 4,

An arrangement of a very similar character exists in Chimera.
Here the nasal septum is very narrow, but widens out below, where,
as the premaxillary lip, it overlaps the vomerine teeth. The free
edge of the septal ala is curved in, as in Cestracion. Meeting it is
an inward process of the maxillary lip, which abuts against the septal
ala in the same way as the maxillary ala does in Cestracion. Qut-
side this, again, is another flap-like process of the maxillary lip,
which overhangs the foregoing when the maxillary lip is in place.
Between the preemaxillary lip and the maxillary lip is the nasal pas-
sage, open ventrally as in Cestracion; and an interval between the
vomerine and palatine teeth above and the mandibular tooth below
(the posterior nostril) places this passage in free communication with
the oral cavity.

It is obvious that if the septal and the maxillary ale in Scyllium,

Fig. 1.

Ceratodus forsteri. Dorsal view of the brain in situ.

Pr E, lobus communis of the prosencephalon; 7h.H, Thalamencephalon; Pn,
pineal gland; MZ, mesencephalon (the median groove is somewhat too
strongly marked) ; Cb, cerebellum ; 7’, tela vasculosa over the fourth ven-
tricle; ¢.s.c, p.s.c, external and posterior semicircular canals; I, V, VII,
IX, X, cerebral nerves; £.O, exoccipital ossification. The general contour
of the chondrocranium is given; on the right side the cartilage has been
sufficiently removed to show the anastomosis of the seventh and ninth
nerves, the auditory organ, and other deep-seated parts. With respect to
this and the other figures, I may remark that my object has been to make
accurate diagrams drawn to scale, and not pictures.

Cestracion, and Chimera united along the middle line, such a nasal
passage as exists in Ceratodus would be the result. Compared with

1876.) PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. 27

Cerutodus, the Elasmobranchs mentioned are hare-lipped; and as
regards the position of the external nostrils, Cestracion and Scyllium
are intermediate between Chimera and Ceratodus.

It may be.asked, what is the use of a nasal passage and of internal
nares in a purely branchiate animal? Without actual experiment it
is hard to give a definite answer to this question; but I will venture
upon two suggestions. In tbe first place, these communications be-
tween the cavity of the mouth and the exterior must permit slow
respiration to take place when the jaws are shut; and it is easy to
imagine that this, under many circumstances, may be an advantage.

In the second place, the large olfactory sacs of these animals sug-
gest that the sense of smell is of value to them; and the communi-
cation of the nasal passages with the mouth must enable them to do
what they could not do otherwise—namely, accelerate the rapidity of
the contact of odoriferous particles with the Schneiderian membrane
at will. The fish with posterior nasal apertures, in fact, can “ sniff”
effectually, while that operation could only be very imperfectly per-
formed by compression and dilatation of the walls of the olfactory

Fig. 2.

C9,
= :
22> E

Ceratodus forsteri. Left lateral view of the brain in situ,

The details of the structure of the dorsal region of the spinal column are omitted.
Ch, notochord; E.O, exoccipital ossification; P.Sph, parasphenoid; V.Z,
vomerine teeth ; an, pn, positions of the anterior and posterior nares; Op,
operculum ; J:Op, interoperculum ; Spi, splenial, and D, dentary bones of
the mandible; Mck, Meckel’s cartilage; M.B', M.B?, anterior and posterior
mesobranchials; Br. 5, fifth branchial arch; 6, nodule of cartilage, which
possibly represents a rudimentary sixth arch; Py, pituitary body. The
other letters have the same signification as in the preceding figure. The
suprascapular bone is shown in place; and its contour is given as if the
anterior part of the vertebral column were transparent.

sacs.in the absence of any second opening. Probably the second
opening so generally present in the olfactory sacs of the Teleostei,
and the naso-palatine canal of the Marsipobranchs, have a similar

28 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. [Jan. 4,

physiological significance. In Ceratodus there is the further phy-
siological relation to aerial respiration ; and in all the higher Verte-
brata the nasal passages are concerned in sniffing and breathing.
With respect to the internal structure of Ceratodus; I shall con-
fine my remarks, in the present communication, to the brain, the
skull, and the pectoral limbs. Ceratodus is, in fact, the most sur-
prisingly suggestive animal I have ever had occasion to study ; and
the attempt to comprehend the morphological significance of the
organs I have mentioned has led me so far, that I must defer the
consideration of other parts of its organization to another occasion.

I. The Brain.

I had no great hope of finding the brain in a state fit for ex-
amination in my specimen of Ceratodus; and in fact the cerebral
substance and that of the nerves are in avery friable condition. But,
by great good fortune, the pia mater is so very dense and tough,
that it has held the cerebral substance in place; and thus not only
the external form, but somewhat of the internal structure of the brain
could be satisfactorily determined.

Fig. 3.

Ceratodus forsteri. Underview of the brain (nat. size).

I, olfactory, II, optic, VI, third nerve (?); V, VII, IX, X, roots of the tri-
geminal, portio dura, auditory, glossopharyngeal, and pneumogastric nerves ;
v.c, one of the lateral ventricles of the Jobus communis, laid open from below.

The brain is represented from above in fig. 1, from the left side
in fig. 2, and from below in fig. 3.

1876.] PROF: T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. 29

The brain of Ceratodus nearly fills the cranial cavity, the inter-
space left between it and the walls of the latter being, to a great ex-
tent, occupied by a peculiar reticulated tissue. The medulla ob-
longata is long and slender, but widens, anteriorly, in the region of
the fourth ventricle. This cavity is arched over by a ¢ela vasculosa
(Tv, figs. 1 and 2), separated into two lateral convexities by a slight
- median depression. In front, each convexity is continued into a blind
rounded cornu, which lies over the origin of the fifth and seventh
auditory nerves. The two cornua diverge, and the cerebellum is
continued backwards as a triangular lamella between them. The
cerebellum is relatively very small, being represented merely by the
thin arched roof of the anterior part of the fourth ventricle. In
front of it is a rounded elevation, obscurely divided by a longitudinal
depression into two. These are the only indications of the optic
lobes of the mid brain, or mesencephalon. In front of this is the
fore brain. The hinder division (or thalamencephalon) is narrower
than the mesencephalon, and passes below into the infundibulum,
which terminates in the large, oval, flattened, pituitary body (hypo-
physis). This is lodged in an excavation of the cartilaginous floor
of the skull representing the sella turcica.

Dorsally, the thalamencephalon is continued upwards and forwards
into the subcylindrical peduncle of the pineal gland (epiphysis or
conarium). ‘This is a large heart-shaped body, the base of which
is turned downwards and backwards. -The apex is connected by
fibrous and vascular tissue with a depression in the cartilaginous roof
of the skull.

Next follows the largest division of the brain, answering to the
cerebral hemispheres and the olfactory lobes. The former are repre-
sented by a single oval lobus communis, the middle area of the roof
of which is occupied by a broad thick tela vasculosa. From the
anterior dorsal aspect of the prosencephalon proceeds, on each side,
the large olfactory lobe, which, flattening in front, and becoming
obliquely truncated, terminates against the posterior walls of the
olfactory sacs. A backward prolongation of the mesethmoid carti-
lage separates the twolobes. In the lateral view of the brain (fig. 2)
the manner in which the olfactory lobes take their origin from the
dorsal aspect of the prosencephalon is well seen. The short and
thick infundibulum, terminating in the flattened oval pituitary body,
and the origins of the second, third, fifth, eighth, ninth, and tenth
nerves are shown.

The ventral view (fig. 3) displays the origins of the small optic
nerves (II) which arise close together from the floor of the thala-
mencephalon. Whether any chiasma exists could not be ascertained.

In the middle line of its ventral aspect the prosencephalon presents —
a deep longitudinal fissure, lodging anterior cerebral arteries. The
walls of the fissure have been separated by turning the left division
of the prosencephalon to one side; and the floor of the ventricle (v.c),
which is contained in the prosencephalon, has been removed.

When the dorsal wall of the brain was cautiously laid open by
a median section, it was found to contain one large ventricular cavity

30 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. [Jan. 4,

the separation of which into fourth and third ventricles was indicated
only by slight constrictions of the roof and side walls. The large
ventricle of the prosencephalon is partially separated into two cham-
bers by a median septum, formed by the infolding of its ventral wall ;
and the spacious ventricle of each olfactory lobe opens into the dorso-
lateral part of each of these chambers.

The place and mode of origin of the olfactory and of the optic
nerves have already been mentioned.

The third nerve is indicated in the figure; but I am somewhat
doubtful as to the nature of the cord thus marked.

No fourth or sixth nerve was observed.

The fifth arises by a single large cylindrical root just below the
anterior end of the cornu of the tela vasculosa of the fourth ventricle.
The seventh and eighth leave the medulla by a common root just
behind this ; and the roots of the ninth and tenth nerves, divided into
three bundles, arise from a tract at the sides of the medulla which
extends from the last to the hinder limit of the fela vasculosa, and
incline obliquely backwards to their exit.

The brain of Ceratodus is very singular and interesting, inasmuch
as it presents resemblances to that of the Marsipobranchii on one
side, to that of the Ganoids and Amphibia on another, and to that
of the Chimeeroids and Plagiostomi on a third.

As in the brain of the Marsipobranchii, the pineal gland is rela-
tively very large, with its pointed dorsal end inclined upwards and
forwards, and the roof of the fourth ventricle is almost entirely
formed by the ¢ela vasculosa; but, as in the Ganoidei and Am-
phibia, the cerebellum is larger than in the Lampreys. In Cera-
todus it is similar to, though proportionally less than, that of Lepi-
dosteus, and still more like that of Polypterus. In the proportions
of the thalamencephalon the brain of Ceratodus resembles that of
the Sturgeon and that of the Ray; while in the representation of
the cerebral hemispheres, or prosencephalon, by a large imperfectly
divided lobus communis, from the dorso-lateral regions of which the
olfactory lobes take their rise, the brain of Ceratodus presents a feature
hitherto known, so far as I am aware, only in the Plagiostomi*.
Thus, in its cerebral characters, Ceratodus occupies a central place in
the class Pisces.

The development of the cerebral hemispheres in Plagiostome fishes
differs from the process by which they arise in the higher Vertebrata.
In a very early stage, when the first and second visceral clefts of the
embryo of Scyllium are provided with only a few short branchial

* So far as I can judge from the examination of a small but well-preserved
specimen of Lepidostren annectens, for which I am indebted to Mr. Sclater, the
brain of this fish is similar, in all essential respects, to that of Ceratodus. The
figure of the brain of Lepidostren given by Prof. Owen in his ‘ Anatomy of Ver-
tebrates’ is susceptible of interpretation in this sense, Hyrtl’s description and
figure of the brain of Lepidosiren paradoxa (Abhandlungen der koniglichen
bohmischen Gesellschaft, Bd. iii. 1845), on the other hand, leave me in doubt
whether, apart from its curious asymmetry, the brain of this fish does or does
not present important differences from that of Ceratodus and that of Lepido-
siren annectens,

1876.] PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. 31

filaments, the anterior cerebral vesicle is already distinctly divided
into the thalamencephalon (from which the large infundibulum pro-
ceeds below, and the small tubular peduncle of the pineal gland above,
while the optic nerves leave its sides) and a large single oval ‘vesicle
of the hemispheres.”” On the ventral face of the integument covering
these are two oval depressions, the rudimentary olfactory sacs.

As development proceeds, the vesicle of the hemispheres becomes
divided by the ingrowth of a median longitudinal septum, and the
olfactory lobes grow out from the posterior lateral regions of each
“ventricle”? thus formed, and eventually rise onto the dorsal faces
of the hemispheres, instead of, as in most Vertebrata, remaining on
their ventral sides. I may remark that I cannot accept the views of
Miklucho-Maclay, whose proposal to alter the nomenclature of the
parts of the Elasmobranch’s brain appears to me to be based upon
a misinterpretation of the facts of development.

Il. The Skull.

Dr. Giinther* distinguishes in the skull an “inner cartilaginous
capsule and an outer incomplete osseous case, to which again some
outer cartilaginous elements are appended. In the former the con-

Fig. 4.

Ceratodus forsteri. Lateral view of the chondrocranium, with most of the
bones and fibrous tissues removed.

ol, position of the olfactory sac; an, pn, position of the anterior and posterior
nares; @, process of the cranial cartilage, d, between the two; 1, 2, upper
labial cartilages; op, optic foramen; A.O, antorbital process; P.O, post-
orbital process; P.Q, palato-quadrate process; Sg, Qu, remains of the bony

late which lies on the outer side of this process; Q.C, occipital prolon-
gation of the chondrocranium roofing over the branchial cavity; D, den-
tary; An, angular; Hy, hyoid; Lop, interoperculum ; Op, operculum; R,
R’, cartilages representing hyoidean rays; HM, hyo-mandibular.

fluence of cartilage is so complete, that no distinct divisions are trace-
able by sutures; its parts can be designated only by reference to the
locally corresponding bones of the teleosteous skull.”

* LZ. c. p. 521.

32 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. [Jan. 4,

This would seem to imply that the chondrocranium of vertebrated
animals is formed by the coalescence of parts analogous to those which
compose the bony skull of osseous fishes. As a matter of fact, how-
ever, the chondrocranium is never formed of such elements, but is
built up, at a very early stage of embryonic development, by the
union of primitively distinct parachordal, otic, and pleural elements*,
which in no way correspond with the bones of the teleostean skull.
And when Dr. Giinther subsequently (J. c. p. 522) speaks of ‘ three
groups of superficial labial cartilages,” ‘‘the upper labial,’’ the ‘su-
praorbital,”’ and the ‘lower labial,” the discrimination of such car-
tilages must, I think, be regarded merely as regional anatomy ; and
it must not be supposed that they have any thing to do with the
cartilages to which the same names are applied in other fishes, several
of which exist in Ceratodus, and will presently be described.

When the osseous and merely fibrous structures are carefully re-
moved, I find that the chondrocranium (figs. 4, 2, and 7) consists of a
continuous cartilaginous mass, the interorbital region of which is much
narrower than any other part, produced inferiorly and laterally into
two stout suspensorial or palato-quadrate -processes, with the pulley-
shaped ventral endsof which the strong Meckelian cartilages are articu-
lated. Anteriorly the orbits are bounded by the antorbital processes
(4.0), which curve downwards in front of the eye. From these ant-
orbital processes the cartilage is continued forwards to form the evenly
curved roof of the ethmoidal region and its coutained nasal chambers,
and, bending down on all sides, ends in a free edge, which is slightly
concave opposite each anterior nasal opening (an, fig. 4), and much
more deeply excavated opposite the posterior nares (pn, fig. 4). The
small process (a) which lies between the two excavations in question
is connected by a strong fibrous band with the antorbital process
(A.O), and this, by the ossified bar described by Dr. Giinther, with
the postorbital process (P.O); but these structures have nothing to
do with the chondrocranium. Behind the orbits, the skull suddenly
widens out into two broad periotic masses, which lodge the auditory
labyrinth. Anteriorly and ventrally these processes are continued
into the suspensorial pillars (Qu); while behind they pass into thin
but wide cartilaginous plates (O, C, fig. 4), which roof over the
chambers in which the branchiz are lodged.

I thought at first that Ceratodus had no labial cartilages; but
at length I discovered two small upper labial cartilages in their right
places, namely in the region of the nostrils.

One of them (1, figs. 4 and 5) lies in the roof of the mouth, just
in front, and on the inner side of, the posterior nasal aperture. It is
fixed to the mesethmoidal cartilage (M.2) by fibrous bands, and is
broader behind than in front. 'The inner edge of this cartilage is
concave, the outer convex, and it has a nearly horizontal direction.

The second cartilage (2, figs. 4, 5, 7) is stouter, and lies behind,
and on the outer jside of, the posterior nasal aperture. Its dorsal
end is attached to the base of the skull and anterior part of the

* “On the Structuyre of the Skull &c. of Menobranchus lateralis,’ P. Z. 8.
1874.

1876.] | PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTER. 33

palato-quadrate cartilage just above the middle of the palatine tooth.
It thence descends with an outward convexity and inward concavity,
and terminates in the upper lip near the angle of the mouth.

Dr. Giinther states (/. c. p. 524) that “the body of the mandible
is persistent cartilage; but its entire outer and inner surfaces are
covered by bone, forming an articular and a dentary piece... .. .
The articular and dentary bones meet near the top of a low but strong
coronoid process, and again at the symphysis, which is formed by
fibrous tissue, and may easily be separated by the knife... . In
front of the jaw the cartilage is expanded into a slightly concave
lamella (lower labial cartilage).””

-

Ceratodus forsteri. Underyiew of the skull. showing the vomerine teeth ( V1),
the palatine teeth, the mesethmoid cartilage (M,Z), and the upper labial
cartilages (1, 2) in place. The dotted lines An, p.x indicate the form and
position of the anterior and the posterior nares.

I find a persistent Meckelian cartilage, such as that here described ;
but as, after careful removal of the ensheathing bones, I have been
unable to discover any separation between this lamellar expansion
and the rest of the cartilage, I am in doubt whether the lamella
represents the lower labial cartilage or not. The analogy of the
Frog, however, leads one to suspect that distinct lower labial carti-
lages may exist in the young Ceratodus.

Dr. Giinther does not mention a third ensheathing bone (figs. 2 and
4, D) which is united by suture with the other two, and lies on each
side of the symphysis on the ventral face of the mandible. It is a flat
plate, of a triangular form, with a thick rugose inner edge for the
attachment of the symphysial ligament. Its posterior edge is thin and
concave; its external edge is also thin and overlaps the bone termed
“articular”? by Dr. Giiuther, uniting with it by a squamous suture.
The outer half of its dorsal aspect is smooth, and helps to support the
ventral face of Meckel’s cartilage ; the inner or symphysial half pre-
sents a broad rough triangular surface, which extends on the inner

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. III. 3

34 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. (Jan. 4,

side of the symphysial end of Meckel’s cartilage, and unites with a
corresponding surface furnished by the expanded symphysial end of
the bone, termed ‘‘dentary”’ by Dr. Giinther. I cannot doubt that
this bone is the representative of the true “‘dentary”’ element ; nor is
there any question in my mind that Dr. Giinther’s “dentary”’ is the
true “ splenial’’ element, while his articular answers to the ‘ angu-
lar’’ piece of the vertebrate mandible. In the attachment of the
tooth to the splenial, and not to the dentary, element, Ceratodus
presents an interesting and important feature of resemblance to Siren
and to larval Salamanders on the one hand, and, on the other, to
Polypterus.

The splenial element in this Ganoid resembles that of Ceratodus,
not only in bearing teeth, but in form, position, and relative size.
In a young specimen of Polypterus I find that the splenial does not
extend continuously to the symphysis, but that, between its anterior
termination and the latter, there are two short and broad bony plates
developed in the fibrous tissue which overlies Meckel’s cartilage ;
these bear teeth, and correspond with the expanded symphysial end
of the splenialin Ceratodus. Polypterus has a true articulare, from
which Meckel’s cartilage is continued. The angulare is much
shorter, and the dentale much longer than in Ceratodus.

The hyoidean and opercular apparatus present characters of sin-
gular interest. Dr. Giinther says that “on the hinder side of the
tympanic pedicle*, near its base, there is a small round tubercle, for
the suspension and articulation of the hyoid arch (pl. xxxiv.
fig. 3, v).”’

I presume that this ‘‘small round tubercle” of the suspensorial
expansion of the cranium is the small cartilage marked H.J/ in figs.
4 and 6. But this is neither a process of the suspensorium, nor does
it articulate with, nor take the principal share in, suspending Hy,
which is Dr. Giinther’s ‘‘ hyoid arch.”

In fact it is, as fig. 6 shows, a distinct, though small, four-sided,
flattened cartilage, the anterior and ventral angle of which is produced
into a short conical process (Sy). Its anterior edge is firmly united
with the skull, just where the cranium proper passes into the sus-
pensorium. At this point there is a triangular vacuity filled with
fibrous tissue, through which the posterior division of the seventh
nerve passes (figs. 1 and 6, VIT). ‘The outer face of the cartilage is
loosely connected with the operculum (Op); and the conical process
(Sy) is imbedded in the dorsal and posterior part of the powerful
ligament (A.s) (corresponding with the hyosuspensorial ligament in
Menobranchust) by which Hy is mainly kept in place.

It is obvious that this little cartilage is the homologue of the hyo-
mandibular element of the hyoidean arch of other fishes, the small
conical precess being the rudimentary symplectic, and, therefore, that

* It is surely to be regretted that any writer of authority should retain the
misleading name of ‘tympanic pedicle” for a part the total distinctness of
which from the “tympanic bone” of the higher Vertebrata has now been so
copiously demonstrated.

+ PB, Z. 8S. 1874, pl. xxix. figs, 1 and 2.

1876.] PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. 3)

it is itself the dorsal element of the hyoidean arch, attached in its
normal position, as its relations to the seventh nerve show. The
hyoidean cornua are very strong, and consist of a cartilaginous axis
almost completely ensheathed by bone. The dorsal end of each is

Fig. 6.

Ceratodus forsteri. Inner view of the right hyoidean arch (Hy), with the oper-

cular apparatus and part of the suspensorium and of the mandible.

H.M, hyomandibular cartilage; Sy, its symplectic process ; Op, operculum ;
Lop, interoperculum; F, R', cartilaginous rays attached to the inner face
of the operculum and interoperculum; VII, exit of the posterior division of
the seventh nerve; 4.s, hyosuspensorial ligament (immediately beneath it is
the mandibulo-hyoid ligament).

attached by the strong hyo-suspensorial ligament aforesaid to the
suspensorium ; but another very strong round ligament (answering
to the mandibulo-hyoid ligament of Menobranchus*) connects the
dorsal end of the hyoidean cornu with the angle of the mandible
(figs. 4 and 6).

‘Thus the hyoidean arch of Ceratodus strikingly resembles that of
a Plagiostome on the one hand, and that of an Amphibian on the
other. And the small hyomandibular presents a form and connexions
which are strikingly similar to those of the suprastapedial cartilage
in the Sauropsidat, which, on a former occasion, I showed to be the
summit of the hyoidean arch and the homologue of the mammalian
incus,

In describing the operculum Dr. Giinther says (/.c, p. 525),
«© A small movable piece of cartilage is found inside of the articulary
groove of the opercle (pl. xxxiv. figs. 2 and 3, &): it is a rudiment
of the preeoperculum.”

Neither the figures referred to nor the account given enable me to
be certain that they apply to the cartilaginous structures I am about

* P.Z_S, 1874, did.
+ “On the representatives of the Malleus and Incus of the Mammalia in other
Vertebrata,” P. Z. 8. 1869.

ae

36 PROF. T. H, HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. [Jan. 4,

to describe, and which are to be found not only on the inner face of
the operculum, but on that of the interoperculum*.

On the inner side of the former and projecting beyond its free
edge is a curved band of cartilage divided into several portions.
One of these, that nearest the hyomandibular, is conical and bent at
an angle to that which follows it. The terminal plate is broad and
crescentic, and, on one side, was subdivided towards its free edge.
On the inner face of the posterior end of the interoperculuin (I.op.)
there is an oval cartilage surrounded by eight or nive smaller
nodules.

These cartilages represent the cartilaginous branchiostegal rays of
Plagiostomes, which are often subdivided into two groups—a dorsal
group attached to the hyomandibular, and a ventral group to the
cornual division of the hyoid arch.

The preoperculum of Fishes and the squamosal of the higher Ver-
tebrata are represented by the bone Sy, termed ‘‘tympanic lamina”
by Dr. Giinther. I have marked the lower piece, which was distinct
on the specimen represented in fig. 4, Qu; but in another specimen
I can find no subdivision, and I am disposed to think that the divi-
sion arose from an accidental dismemberment of a squamosal (or
preoperculum) corresponding with that of Menobranchus (P.Z.8.
1874, pl. xxix. fig. 1, Sq), and that there is no true quadrate in
Ceratodus. I can discover no ossification of the substance of the
articular extremity of the suspensorium, such as occurs in the Am-
phibia. The pterygopalatines and the vomers, which last are repre-
sented only by the bases of the two vomerine teeth, are similar in their
form and relations to the corresponding bones of Urodele Amphibia.

With respect to the branchial apparatus, Dr. Giinther (J. ¢. p. 526)
says that it “does not differ from that of Teleostean fish, but is
entirely cartilaginous. There are five branchial arches, the last
rudimentary and attached to the base of the fourth. There is no
peculiar modification of any part of this apparatus ; and the middle
pieces have the usual groove for the reception of the vessels and
nerves.”

I find that each of the anterior four branchial arches consists of a
long ventral and a short dorsal piece of cartilage: the former pieces
are united by ligament at their ventral ‘ends, the third and fourth
curving forwards in this part; they are connected by joints sur-
rounded by ligaments with the dorsal pieces (fig. 2). In the median

* Dr. Giinther terms the bone here named interoperculum, “suboperculum.”
He says (J. c. p. 525) that to the lower edge of the operculum “‘is attached by
fibrous tissue the long styliform subeperculwm, terminating at a considerable
distance from the mandibulary joint.” It is quite true that the bone in ques-
tion is thus attached to the operculum ; but amuch more important connexion
takes place between its ventral end and the angle of the jaw, by means of strong
ligamentous fibres which run into the hyomandibular ligament. It thus more
closely resembles the interoperculum of Teleosteans than it does the sub-
operculum,

+ In a specimen of the skull of Ceratodus, for which I am indebted to my
friend Mr. F. M. Balfour, the curved band of cartilage of the operculum is not
subdivided, and the interopercular cartilages are divided less regularly and
differently on the two sides,

1876.] PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI, 37

ventral line, between the ends of the ventral pieces, lie two cartilages—
an anterior elongated and spindle-shaped (M.B'), which is connected
by a strong ligament with the median piece of the hyoid arch, and a
posterior rounded nodule (M. 8B?) at some distance from the foregoing.
The fifth arch consists of a single piece of cartilage curved forwards
and united with the principal branchial of the fourth arch, both
above and belcw; in front of it, close to the ventral end of the fifth
arch, was a small nodule of cartilage, which is probably a rudimen-
tary sixth arch (6).
Fier 7.

Ceratodus forsteri. Dorsal aspect of the skull.

a, the anterior end of the chondrocranium; 3, the antorbital process of the
chondrocranium ; ¢, its suprabranchial expansion; d, lateral elevations of
the occiput ; and e, median ridge, with the surface for the attachment of the
anterior fin-ray; jf, articular surface for the second fin-ray; A, anterior
median bone; B, posterior median bone; C;, inner lateral bone; C’, distinct
ossification on the posterior extremity of this bone; D, outer lateral bone
(squamosal); Z, a separate ossification on the left side; Op, operculum ;
Or, orbit; S.0, suborbital bones; 2, the posterior upper labial cartilage.

As Dr. Ginther has pointed out, the osseous shield which covers
the dorsal aspect of the skull consists of two median bongs (fig. 7,
A, B), one anterior and one posterior, which he terms ‘‘ethmoid”
and “scleroparietal,”’ and of two pairs of lateral bones, the “ frontals”’
internally (fig. 7, C) and the “tympanic lamine”’ externally (tig. 7,
D). In my specimens the anterior half of the anterior median bone
(A) has a different shape from that given in Dr. Giinther’s plate
xxxiv. fig. 1, and its margins are very well defined. Moreover, in

38 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. [Jan. 4,

one specimen, the hinder end of each inner lateral bone is completed
by a distinct ossification (C’). There is also a separate ossification
(EZ) on the left side, on what corresponds with the front part of
the outer lateral bone on the right side. Doubtless these bones are
subject to much individual variation.

The fibrous band which extends, below the eye, between the ant-
orbital process and the ventral end of the suspensorium contains
three suborbital bones. The anterior of these, trihedral, is connected by
its broad base with the antorbital process; the middle bone is slender
and elongated ; the posterior is broad, flattened from side to side, and
its hinder edge is fixed by ligamentous fibres to the outer face of the
suspensorium and of the squamosal.

The dasal bone of Dr. Giinther is the parasphenoid. It extends
backwards, beyond the limits of the proper cranium, into the region
of the vertebral column, to a point just beyond the attachment of the
third pair of ribs. But there is at least one vertebra in front of that
which bears the first pair of ribs. In Ceratodus, as in the Sturgeon
and other Gancids, several anterior vertebrae have coalesced with one
another and with the skull; or, probably, it would be more accurate
to say that the investing mass of the notochord has not become
differentiated into vertebrae for this extent. Nevertheless the pos-
terior boundary of the skull can be strictly defined by the interspace
’ between the exit of the pneumogastric and that of the next following,
or first spinal, nerve.

It is to the outer surface of this interspace that the anterior edge
of the “suprascapular’’ element of the pectoral arch is fixed by
strong ligamentous fibres (fig. 2). Just m front of the boundary
between the skull and the vertebral column, and therefore in the side
walls of the former, there lies, deep in the substance of the cartilage,
a hollow cone of bone (Z.0) It is wider above and externally than
below and internally, where its end lies above the notochord. This
appears to be an exoccipital ossification, such as is to be found in
greater state of development in Lepidosiren, Polypterus, and Meno-
branchus.

The skull of Ceratodus is, as might be expected (and as Dr.
Giinther has pointed out), extremely similar to that of Lepidosiren.
In fact, beyond differences in the proportions of its various parts,
the more extensive fenestration of the roof of the olfactory capsules —
in Lepidosiren, and the absence, so far as my investigations have yet
gone, of the hyomandibular cartilage in the latter genus, the carti-
laginous elements of the skull are the same in the two cases.

As to the superadded bones, the parasphenoid, the rudimentary
vomers, and the pterygopalatine plates correspond in the two genera.
The exoceipitals are much larger in Lepidosiren. The descending
process or preeopercular part of the squamosal is best developed in
Lepidosiren, whilst its dorsal part (proper squamosal) is larger in
Ceratodus.

In both, there are two opercular bones, an operculum and an inter-
operculum ; and in Lepidosiren, as in Ceratodus, there are cartilagi-
nous plates attached to the inner faces of these bones.

1876.) PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. 39

The branchial apparatus of Lepidosiren differs from that of Cera-
todus mainly in the greater number of complete branchial arches.

It can hardly be doubted that the bone D of Ceratodus is repre-
sented, though incompletely, by the supraorbital of Lepidosiren, while
the bony nasal shield of the latter corresponds very closely with the
anterior median bone (A) of Ceratodus. The posterior boundary of
the bone, however, lies further back in Ceratodus than it does in
Lepidosiren. The argument of Dr. Giinther that the posterior
median bone (B) in Oeratodus is not the homologue of the parieto-
frontal of Lepidosiren, because it lies above the muscles, while the
latter is situated beneath them, is weighty against the identification
of the bones in question ; and, in other respects, the parieto-frontal
of Lepidosiren is very unlike the “ scleroparietal’’ of Ceratodus.

When the comparison of the cranial and facial bones of Ceratodus
with those of the Vertebrata is extended beyond the limits of the
Dipnoi, the determination of their homologues is beset with many
difficulties. Polypterus has an anterior and a posterior median
shield in the roof of the skull, which at first seem to correspond with
those of Ceratodus; these shields are each formed by the union of
two bones, which are evidently comparable to the frontals and parietals
of the higher Vertebrata, while the frontals unite with a pair of broad
nasals which cover the olfactory sacs. The apices of the posterior
triangular edges of these bones reach back to near the level of the
middle of the orbits; and the frontal bones are continued forwards
on each side of them. Between the two nasal bones there is a median
ossification which lies upon the mesethmoidal cartilage and spreads
out in front, ending by a broad edge which articulates with the prae-
maxillee.

The median bone, the piscine ‘ethmoid,’’ occupies the same
position as the anterior median bone of Ceratodus would do if the
ethmoidal region were reduced to the proportions it has in Poly-
pterus. Therefore, from this point of view, the determination of the
bone as “ethmoid”’ by Dr. Giinther seems fully justifiable ; and the
inner lateral and the median posterior bones would seem to represent
the frontal and parietal bones of Polypterus.

On the other hand, the many points of resemblance between Cera-
todus and the Amphibia suggest the comparison of the anterior and
posterior median bone to the frontals of Menobranchus, and of the
inner lateral bones to the parietals of this Amphibian. The forward
extensions of the latter, at the sides of the frontals, are especially
noticeable in comparison with the anterior extremities of the inner
lateral bones of Ceratodus. On the whole, I am inclined to think
that Polypterus is the better guide in the interpretation of the cranial
bones of Ceratodus, though the difference between the bones of
Ceratodus and those of the Crossopterygian ganoids, all of which are
readily reducible to the Polypterine type, is very considerable.

In other respects the skull of Cerotodus finds its closest parallel
among the Amphibia, especially such Urodela as Menobranchus*,
and the Anura in their tadpole state.

* See P. Z. S. March 17, 1874.

40 PROF. T, H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. [Jan. 4,

I have already indicated the chief points of resemblance to the
amphibian skull, and need not recapitulate them here. The most
important feature is the manner in which the mandibular arch is ~
connected with the skull.

The part of the palato-quadrate cartilage which is united with the
skull, between the exits of the fifth and second nerves, answers to
the ‘pedicle of the suspensorium”’ of the amphibian, while its
backward and upward continuation onto the periotic cartilage corre-
sponds with the otic proeess. As in the Amphibia and in the higher
Vertebrata, the mandibular arch is thus attached directly to the skull
by that part of its own substance which constitutes the suspensorium.
It may thus be said to be autostylic.

Among fishes, the only groups which possess an autostylic skull,
or in which the dorsal end of the mandibular arch is continuous with
the cartilage of the brain-case, are the Chimeeroids and the Marsipo-
branchii.

In Chimera, the general form and connexions of the palato-quadrate
cartilage are the same as in Ceratodus; but it differs from that of
Ceratodus as that of the tadpole differs from that of a young Frog,
or as that of Menobranchus differs from that of Menopoma; that is
to say, the articular condyle is situated far more forward, and the
gape is, in consequence, relatively shorter in the former than in the
latter. There are the same large olfactory capsules in both cases.
In Chimera, however, these project beyond the termination of the
ethmoidal cartilage, while in Ceratodus the latter projects beyond
the olfactory capsules, which are more lateral in position, more elon-
gated, and, in accordance with the general form of the head, much
more depressed.

Just as in Ceratodus, the palato-quadrate cartilage of Chimera
bears two teeth marked with radiating ridges, while two others, the
vomerine teeth, are supported by the ethmoidal cartilage in front of
these; and in both cases there is a tooth with radiating ridges on
its surface in each ramus of the mandible.

In the disappearance of the notochord and the articulation of the
skull with the anterior coalesced vertebree, the skull of Chimera pre-
sents a higher degree of differentiation than that of Ceratodus ; while
it is needless to speak of such aberrant peculiarities as its supracerebral
interorbital septum, or the vast crest into which the skull is raised
above the anterior part of the brain-cavity. In other respects, how-
ever, as in the inclination of the axis of the suspensorium already
noted, the skull of Chimera presents lower characters than that of
Ceratodus. Among these may be reckoned the great size of the
upper and lower labial cartilages and the condition of the hyoidean
arch, which, excépt in size and some peculiarities of form, is altogether
similar to the four branchial arches which follow it. Like them, it
terminates, dorsally, in a flat, expanded, triangular piece, which is
connected with the superjacent floor of the skull by muscles and
ligaments, but by no direct articulation. ‘The dorsal pieces of the
succeeding branchial arches have the same form and attachments,
and unite with the ventral segments at a sharpangle. These angles

1876.] PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. 4]

are all connected together by a strong ligament, which is continued
to the pectoral arch. Moreover a small styliform cartilage passes
from the last angle to the pectoral arch, and is connected with the
dorsal end of the fifth branchial arch. It appears to represent the
dorsal element of that arch.

Johannes Miiller, fully appreciating the importance of the differ-
ences between the skull of the Chimeroids and those of other
“ Elasmobranchii,” and sagaciously remarking that ‘the skull of
Chimera is most like that of a tadpole’”’*, was thereby led to separate
the Chimeeroids as a suborder of the Elasmobranchii under the name
of Holocephali. It appears to me that he might have been justified
in going still further; for, considering, in addition to the cranial
characters, the structure of the vertebral column and of the branchie,
the presence of an opercular covering to the gills, the peculiar den-
tition, the almost undeveloped gastric division of the alimentary
canal, the opening of the rectum quite separately from and in front
of the urinogenital apertures, the relatively small and simple heart,
the Chimeeroids are far more definitely marked off from the Plagio-
stomes than the Teleostei are from the Ganoidei.

In all other Fishes, except the Marsipobranchii, the mode of con-
nexion of the mandibular arch with the skull is different from that
which obtains in the Chimeeroids and the Dipnoi. The palato-
quadrate cartilage is no longer continuous with the chondrocranium
(though the bony elements of that arch may unite suturally with
those of the skull, as in the Plectognathi), but is, at most, united
with it by ligament. Moreover the dorsal element of the hyoidean
arch, or the hyomandibular, usually attains a large size and becomes
the chief apparatus of suspension of the hinder end of the palato-
quadrate cartilage with the skull: Skulls formed upon this type,
which is exemplified in perfection in Ganoidei, Teleostei, and ordi-
nary Plagiostomes, may therefore be termed hyostylic.

But though the typical forms of autostylic and hyostylic skulls,
as exemplified, e.g., by a Sturgeon, a Pike, and a Dogfish or Ray,
on the one hand, and Chimera, Ceratodus, and Menobranchus on
the other, are thus widely different, certain Plagiostomes present 4
condition of the cranium which tends to connect the two by a middle
form, which may be termed amphistylic.

In the amphistylic skull the palato-quadrate cartilage is quite
distinct from the rest of the skull; but it is wholly, or almost wholly,
suspended by its own ligaments, the hyomandibular being small and
contributing little to its support. The embryo amphibian is am-
phistylic before it becomes autostylic ; and, in view of certain palaeon-
- tological facts, it is very interesting that the link which connects the
amphistylic with the ordinary Selachian skull is that of Ces¢racion
fig. 8).

If the palato-quadrate cartilage of Chimera were membranous in

the centre, as it is in the tadpole, and if along three lines radiating

from this centre the cartilage were converted partly into fibrous tissue

and partly into a true joint, the result would be to produce a palato-
* *Vergleichende Anatomie der Myxinoiden,’ erster Theil, p. 150,

42 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. [Jan. 4,

quadrate apparatus such as that exhibited by Cestracion. The huge
palato-quadrate cartilage (Pl, Qu) of Cestracion is united with the
skull in the preeorbital region by a joint, and in the orbital region by
fibrous tissue, and answers to that part of the palato-quadrate cartilage
of Chimera which lies between the nasal capsule and the mandible.

Fig. 8.

Mck

Cestracion philippi. Left lateral view of the skull.

a, occiput; 4, postorbital process; ¢, c’, antorbital process; d, anterior end of
the chondrocranium ; ol, olfactory capsule; O¢.p, otic process, or spiracular
cartilage; Sp, place of the spiracle; H.M, hyomandibular cartilage; Qu,
articulation of the palato-quadrate cartilage (PJ, Qw) with the lower jaw
(Mck) ; p, part of the palato-quadrate arch which answers to the pedicle of
the suspensorium in Amphibia ; Hy, hyoid ; II, foramen for the optic, and V,
for the trigeminal nerves; 1, 2, 3, 4, the upper and lower labial cartilages; 5,
a small cartilaginous style attached by ligament to the mandibular cartilage.

The small cartilaginous plate (O¢.p), which is connected only by
ligament with the periotic cartilage above and with the quadrate
below, answers to the ofic process of the Frog’s suspensorium. This
cartilage lies in the front wall of the spiracle, which in Cestracion is
situated low at the sides of the head, nearly in a line with the bran-
chial clefts, or in the position which it occupies in foetal Selachians.
Moreover this so-called spiracular cartilage bears a rudimentary
gill and is so far comparable to any of the branchial arches*.

In possessing this permanent mandibulo-hyoid cleft, or spiracle,
which is the homologue of the tympanic cavity and Eustachian tube
of the higher Vertebrata, and in the permanence of its rudimentary

- Gegenbaur considers the spiracular cartilage to be a ray of the mandibular
arch.

1876.] PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. 43

branchia, Cestracion exhibits a lower stage of organization than
Chimera, in which, as in Ceratodus, the mandibulo-hyoid cleft has
disappeared. On the other hand, the hyoidean arch presents a form
intermediate between that of the ordinary Selachians and that of
Ceratodus and Chimera. It is stout; and its dorsal element, still
retaining a little of its original form, but much thicker and more cy-
lindrical, is no longer united with the skull by ligament and muscle
merely, but articulates with a process of the underside of the periotic
capsule. Moreover its distal end is connected by strong ligamentous
fibres with the posterior end of the palato-quadrate cartilage and with
an inward process of the articular end of the mandible (the sustenta-
culum of Gegenbaur).

In fact, the ‘ epibranchial” of the hyoidean arch of Cestracion is
just beginning to take on a new function, that of suspending the
palato-quadrate cartilage and mandible to the skull. It is a true
hyomandibular, though small and insignificant relatively to what it
becomes in other Plagiostomes, in Ganoids, and in Teleostei.

Had I been acquainted with the skull of Cestracion in 1858, I
should have been spared the hesitation which I then felt* as to iden-
tifying the hyomandibular of Fishes with the summit of the hyoidean
arch, and which has subsequently been removed by abundant evi-
dence published by Mr. Parker and myself. .

In the general form of the skull, the position and proportions of
the olfactory capsules, and the characters of the principal labial and
alinasal cartilages, Cestracion has a stronger resemblance to Chimera
than is exhibited by any other Plagiostomes ; and I take it to be one
of the lowest of Selachian skulls.

I am aware that in expressing this opinion I am diametrically op-
posed to Gegenbaur+, whose elaborate study of the Plagiostome skull
entitles his opinion to the greatest weight, and who regards Cestra-
cion as possessed of one of the highest of skulls in its group, while
Heptanchus and Hexanchus have the lowest.

There is a certain ambiguity about the terms “highest” and
“lowest ;”’ but if by the former we understand the most extreme
modification of the hyostylic type of skull characteristic of the group,
then I should have no hesitation in regarding the skulls of the Rays
as the highest of Plagiostome skulls, while Cestracion represents a
low form of the autostylic type.

Notidanus, on the other hand, appears to me to have an essentially
low form of skull, so far as it is more completely amphistylic than
any ordinary Plagiostome; but on this low form is superinduced a
modification by which it approaches the higher autostylic skull.
This is the union of the palato-quadrate arch with the postorbital

* Croonian Lecture, 1858, and Lectures on the Theory of the Skull, 1864.
See also ‘‘ On the Malleus and Incus,” P. Z. 8S. 1869; ‘Manual of Vertebrate Ana-
tomy,’ 1871, p. 85; and Mr. Parker’s “Memoir on the Development of the
Salmon,” Phil. Trans, 1872.

+ ‘Das Kopfskelet der Selachier,’ p. 60. In controverting the opinion of
Professor Owen that the Cestracion is less advanced in cranial development than

Squatina, Gegenbaur observes, ‘‘ So méchte ich gerade das Gegentheil behaupten,
und nicht etwan bloss beziiglich der Basalverhaltnisse des Craniums.”

44 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. [Jan. 4,

process of the skull—an articulation which, in Prof. Gegenbaur’s
view, represents the primitive attachment of the mandibular arch,
but, in my apprehension, is an altogether secondary connexion.

I am indebted to Dr. Giinther for a foetus of Notidanus (Heptan-
chus) cinereus in excellent condition ; and the examination of the skull
(fig. 9), which presents all the characteristic features of the adult*,
has confirmed the suspicion which I previously entertained, that the

Fig. 9.

Hyl

Meck

Notidanus cinereus. eft lateral view of the skull.

Letters as in the preceding figures. VII, the posterior division of
the portio dura,

skull of Notidanus, though fundamentally of a low type, is greatly
modified so far as the jaws are concerned. What first led me to
suspect that this might be the case was the backward position of the
articular end of the suspensorium and the relative length of the gape—
features in which the skull of Notédanus differs from that of ordinary
Selachians as an old frog differs from a young one.

The palato-quadrate cartilage of Notidanus has an inward process
(p), which lies in a strong ligamentous band, by which it is attached
to the skull between the optic and trigeminal foramina. This an-
swers to the pedicle of the suspensorium in the Amphibia. From
this point the palato-quadrate cartilage extends backwards, as a
laterally compressed deep plate, the posterior and inferior extremity
of which gives attachment to the mandible. The dorsal and anterior
angle of this plate is attached only by ligament to the postorbital pro-
cess, in the foetus, but appears to articulate therewith in the adult.
I think that there can be no doubt that this upward and backward
extension of the palato-quadrate cartilage answers to the otic process
in the amphibian. It has similar relations to the posterior division
of the seventh nerve ; and between it and the hyoidean arch lies the

* See Gegenbaur, op. cit.

1876.] PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. 45

spiracle, in correspondence with its homologue the tympano-eusta-
chian passage. The dorsal and posterior edge of this process no less
clearly corresponds with the spiracular cartilage in Cestracion, other-
wise absent in Notidanus. The hyoidean arch is attached to the
periotic region of the skull. It is very slender ; and though closely
bound by ligament to the mandibular arch, close to the articulation
of the mandible, it can contribute little or nothing to the support of
the latter. Remove the great otic process of the palato-quadrate
arch of Notidanus, and bring its quadrate end further forward, and
the result would be a typically amphistylic skull, such as exists in
the larval Siredon and Triton*.

The relations of the skulls of Notidanus, Cestracion, and Cera-
todus may be thus expressed :— :

Notidanus most nearly approaches the amphistylic skull, such as
exists in all the autostylic Vertebrata in the embryonic state; but
it is considerably altered by the development of a great otic process
from the mandibular arch.

In Cestracion the palato-quadrate has become massive, and, in the
region of the pedicle, is firmly united with the skull, while the otic
process is a separate cartilage, connected only by ligament with the
postorbital process above and with the palato-quadrate below.

In Ceratodus the palato-quadrate has coalesced with the skull both
by its pedicle and by its otic process; and the same change occurs in
the autostylic skulls of the Amphibia.

In the ordinary Plagiostomes, on the other hand, the palato-
quadrate becomes smaller and more freely united with the skull. The
otic process (=spiracular cartilage) is smaller, and the hyomandi-
bular takes a larger and larger share in suspending the mandibular
arch to the skull, which is therefore eminently hyostylic.

Turning now to osseous fishes, the skull which presents the nearest
resemblance to Ceratodus is that of Polypterus. This will be obvi-

ous to any one who studies the excellent description of the chondro-
cranium of this fish given by Dr. Traquairy.

But in the character of the palato-quadrate arch and the great
relative size of the hyomandibular, the skull is as thoroughly and
completely hyostylic as is that of any other existing Ganoid or
Teleostean.

Thus, having regard only to the structure of the cranium, the
relations of Ceratodus may expressed as follows :—

Amphibia. _—-Ganoidei. _—_‘ Teleostei.

peste:

ee
CreraToDUsS.—__

[ge Raia.
Chimera.
Notidanus.

VY +
AUTOSTYLICA. AMPHISTYLICA. Hyosty ica.

* P.Z.S. 1874, pl. xxxi. figs. 1 & 2.
+ “The Cranial Osteology of Polypterus,’ Journal of Anatomy and Physi-
ology, 1870. :

W-—~-- ph a5. J

46 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. [Jan. 4,

Ill. Tre Pectoral Limb.

In the memoir cited, Dr. Gunther describes the limbs of Cerato/us
and their skeleton as follows :—

«The limbs consist of two pairs of paddles, similar in appearance
to the termination of the tail; viz. a longitudinal axis, formed by
the endoskeleton and muscles and covered with scales, is surrounded
by a broad rayed fringe. These paddles are structurally identical
with the fins of Lepidosiren; only the axis and also the fringe are
much dilated. ‘The pectoral and ventral paddles taper to a fine point,
the former being longer than the head, the latter rather shorter.
The ventral paddles are inserted at a short distance in front of the
vent’ (p. 515).

“The paddle is joined to the scapular arch by an elongate, flattish,
slightly curved cartilage; its proximal end has a glenoid cavity,
fitting into the humeral condyle ; the joint is simple, free, allowing
of a considerable amount of motion, its parts being held together
by a ligament fastened round its circumference. This is the only
true joint in the limb, all the other parts being fixed to one another
by connective tissue. I consider this cartilage to be the forearm ; a
horizontal section along its longitudinal axis does not show any pri-
mary division. The next following cartilage forms the base of the
paddle ; although externally it appears as a single flat, broad, short
piece, unevennesses of its surface indicate that several primary pieces
are coalesced in it.

““T am confirmed in this view by a horizontal section, in which
the lines of the former divisions are preserved in the shape of tracts
of a white connective tissue. Three such divisions may be distin-
guished, corresponding to the three carpals of most Plagiostomes *.
If this determination is correct, then the antibrachial cartilage just
described is not represented in that order.

««The remaining framework of the paddle shows an arrangement
unique among the Vertebrata. From the middle of the basal carti-
lage a series of about twenty-six subquadrangular pieces takes its
origin, forming a longitudinal axis along the middle of the paddle
to its extremity. The pieces become gradually smaller, and are
scarcely distinguishable towards the end of the paddle. On the two
posterior corners of each piece a branch is inserted, running ob-
liquely backwards towards the margin of the fin; the branches of
the first eight or twelve pieces are three-jointed, the remainder two-
jointed, the last having no branch at all. Slight irregularities, such
as the origin of two branches from one side of a central piece, occur,
as also several four-jointed branches being inserted immediately on
the basal cartilage ” (pp. 532-3).

In general, this description suits the pectoral fins of the specimen I
have described very well. Mine, however, has only twenty median
cartilages. All but the very last bear lateral rays; but towards the
distal end of the fin these become minute, and consist of a single
piece. Moreover the distal joints are much more slender, especially

* Pro-, meso-, and metapterygium of Gegenbaur.

1876.] PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI, 47

the last. A more important point is that the second shows no trace
of such divisions as those deseribed by Dr. Giinther. To make
sure of this | made a thin microscopic section of this cartilage on
the right side, and thereby satisfied myself of the homogeneity of the
cartilage of which it is composed.

I find no true joint between the proximal median piece and the
scapular arch, the connexion between the two being effected by a
solid fibrous mass.

Again, the ‘‘slight irregularities”’ in the distribution of the rays,
in respect of the median pieces, of which Dr. Giinther speaks, are
constant peculiarities of no small importance. This becomes obvious
when the fin of Ceratodus is compared with that of other fishes.
But before proceeding to this point I must make a few remarks on
the normal and primitive position of the vertebrate limb, and on the
changes from that normal position which take place in fishes on the
one hand, and the higher Vertebrata on the other, as, for want of
attending to this fundamental matter, grave errors have crept into
the interpretation of the parts of the limbs of different vertebrates.

The fins occupy the normal position in such a fish as Scyllium.
When the axis of the body is horizontal the plane of the fin is also
horizontal. Its upper surface is covered by a continuation of the
dorsal integument, and its lower surface by that of the ventral side
of the body. The distinctive spotting of the dorsal aspect in the
Dogfish makes this very plain; therefore, to adopt the nomenclature
which I some time ago proposed, the convex thick edge of the fin is
preeaxial, while its concavo-convex thin edge is postaxial, and its
two aspects look respectively upwards and downwards.

In Ceratedus, however, the fin has undergone a rotation upon its
axis, in virtue of which its proper ventral surface looks more or less
outwards, and its proper dorsal surface more or less inwards; and at
the same time the przeaxial edge is turned upwards, while the post-
axial edge is turned downwards. This is very marked when the fin
is applied to the trunk; but the primitive disposition of the surfaces
and edges of the limb becomes obvious when the fin is made to stand
out at right angles to the axis of the body.

In Acipenser, as in any Teleostean fish, the rotation becomes still
more marked ; and divarication of the fin does not greatly diminish
it, by reason of the articulation of the preaxial fin-ray with the pec-
toral arch at a point higher than the proper glenoid cavity.

When Ceratodus, or a Teleostean fish, is placed side by side with
a Urodele Amphibian, such as Menobranchus, in which the fore limb
naturally takes a position nearly parallel with the axis of the trunk,
the manus being directed backwards, nothing is more natural than
to imagine that the outer and inner aspects and the dorsal and
ventral edges of the two correspond.

But a very little consideration will show that nothing can be more
erroneous ; for the outer surface of the Menobranchus limb is its
proper dorsal aspect, and the inner surface is its ventral aspect, as
will be seen the moment the limb is placed at right angles with the
trunk. In fact, though in the amphibian, as in the fish, the limb

48 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. [Jan. 4,

has undergone a twist, the direction of its rotation is exactly contrary
to that which has occurred in the fish. Taking the left limb in each
case, the normal fin would have to be turned in the direction of move-
ment of the hands of a watch to bring it to the teleostean position,

Fig. 10.

POLYODON

“ScYLLiUM
The left pectoral fins of Ceratodus forsteri, Notidanus cinereus (fetal), Scyllium
canicula, Chimera monstrosa, and Polyodon folium.
The preaxial (Pr.a) and postaxial (P¢.a) margins of all are turned in the same
direction; R, the preaxial ray (propterygium of Gegenbaur); Mz, the
metapterygium ; I, the basal or proximal joint of the axial skeleton.

while it would have to be turned in the contrary way to bring it into
the amphibian position. Hence the preeaxial edge in the teleostean
fin is dorsal, while in the amphibian limb it is more or less ventral ;

a

1876.] PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. 49

and the skeletal elements on the dorsal side of the axis of the fish-fin
answer to those on the ventral side of the axis in the amphibian limb.

As Dr. Giinther has observed, the contour of the fin in Ceratodus
is somewhat like that of a sickle. The preeaxial edge is convex
forwards and rather thicker, especially at its proximal end, than
the posterior edge, which is concave backwards in its distal and
convex in its proximal half. The apex of the fin is slender and re-
curved. A rounded and narrowed neck unites the limb with the
trunk.

Thus the limb, as a whole, is essentially unsymmetrical when its
postaxial and preeaxial halves are compared. A corresponding asym-
metry is strikingly obvious in the skeleton when it is prepared by
removing the integument and muscles of the dorsal face, while the
undisturbed condition of the parts is preserved by leaving the ventral
integument and muscles untouched (fig. 10).

It will be seen that, on the preeaxial side (Pr.a), each of the sub-
quadrate segments of the median part of the skeleton, except the first
and the terminal segments, gives attachment by its distal angle to a
single jointed ray. The proximal or first ray (R) is much stouter than
any of those which succeed it; and all take a direction approximately
parallel to one another, their long axes forming an acute angle
with that of the series of median segments. In the distal portion
of the fin, the postaxial rays have a similar arrangement, and are
only more slender than the preaxial rays. But the second seg-
ment bears no fewer than five rays. Of these, the proximal, which
is shortest and slenderest, stands out at right angles to the axis of
the series of median segments ; while the others are gradually in-
clined at a less and less angle to it. The third segment and the
fourth each carry two postaxial rays; the rest have but one.

Dr. Giinther’s figures show that, in his specimen also, the fourth
and the third segments each bore two postaxial rays; but there are
only four attached to the second segment, and all these are represented
as if they had nearly the same inclination to the axis of the fin as the
preeaxial rays.

To dwell so strongly upon these minutice may seem to be making
a great deal of a very small matter; but its importance becomes
manifest when the fin of Ceratodus is compared with that of other
fishes.

In my “Preliminary Essay on the systematic arrangement of the
Fishes of the Devonian epoch”’*, I made use of the term ‘Crosso-
pterygian”’ to express a peculiarity which is very strikingly manifest
in the fishes to which I applied it, the fin-rays of the paired fins being
disposed, like a fringe, round an oval, or elongated, central space
covered with scales. The Crossopterygii, however, were not defined
by this character alone ; and hence the fact that truly fringed fins are
found beyond the limits of that group does not interfere with its per-
fectly natural character. In strictness, all fishes which possess paired
fins are Crossopterygian in so far as the fin-rays always fringe the

* Memoirs of the Geological Survey of the United Kingdom, decade x. 1861.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. IV. 4

50 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. [Jan. 4,

edges of the fin; and they differ only in the relative extent of the
central area, on which the fin-rays do not encroach.

All the Chimeeroids and Plagiostomes are eminently crossoptery-
gian so far as their fins are concerned; and therefore we might
expect to find in the skeleton of the pectoral fins of these fishes a
modification of the skeleton of that of Ceratodus. But in most of
these fishes the skeleton of the fins has undergone such an amount
of metamorphosis that it is difficult to reduce it to the type of Cera-
todus. In Notidanus*, however, the skeleton of the pectoral fin
affords the key to the nature of this metamorphosis. Here (fig. 10)
there is an axial cartilage, the broad proximal end of which articulates
with the pectoral arch. Distally it diminishes in diameter, and ends
by a truncated face, with which another slender cylindrical cartilage,
also axial in position, is articulated.

I take these two cartilages to represent the shrunken axis of the
fin of Ceratodus. ‘The preaxial basal angle of this axial mass is
occupied by a distinct cartilage. Whether this represents the proxi-
mal axial cartilage of Ceratodus, or whether it is the proximal pree-
axial ray, is not clear.

The preaxial edge of the principal axial cartilage, at some little
distance from this piece, presents a series of notches, with which are
articulated a corresponding number of prezeaxial rays, while, as has
been already stated, a single ray is articulated to the base of the
terminal axial cartilage. The uppermost or proximal preeaxial ray is
two-jointed and broader than the others. On the postaxial side there
is a triangular cartilage (Vt), wide distally, very narrow proximally,
where it is connected with the proximal end of the axial cartilages.
Twelve postaxial rays are articulated with the wide distal edge of
this cartilage. I conceive that this triangular postaxial cartilage is
formed by the coalescence of the axial ends of the postaxial rays.

The ftin-skeleton of Notidanus thus results, in the simplest possible
manner, from the shortening of the axis of such a fin-skeleton as that
of Ceratodus and the coalescence of some of its elements.

In Cestracion (fig. 11) the same process is carried a step further.
Here there is a large cartilage (1) which articulates with the pectoral
arch by a concave facet, and corresponds with the proximal axial car-
tilage of Ceratodus and Notidanus. United by ligament with its
hinder concave margin is the triangular postaxial cartilage (M¢),
which obviously answers to the similarly shaped postaxial cartilage of
Notidanus, and which bears a series of postaxial rays, of which the
first is directed almost at right angles to the axis of the fin, as in
Ceratodus. The first preeaxial ray (2) is very large and bifurcates
distally. The ray which is attached to the distal angle of the axial
cartilage probably answers to the ray-like termination of the axial
skeleton in Notidanus ; but it is not distinguishable from the rest.

In the Dogfish (Scyllium) (fig. 10) the further shortening of the
axis gives rise to still greater changes. The axial cartilage (meso-

* The figure represents the fin of the foetal No¢idanus to which I have already

referred. ‘The figure of the fin of an adult of the same species given by Gegen-
baur (Untersuchungen, Heft 11. Taf. ix. fig. 2) shows essentially the same structure.

1876.| PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. 51

pterygium of Gegenbaur, I) is relatively small; but the enlarged post-
axial cartilage (metapterygium, Mt) has extended upwards along the

Fig. 11.

CESTRACION

oe
\N
| \\
a

9
Bya\s,

q
ICHTHYOSAURUS

The left pectoral fin of Cestracion philippi (letters as before), the left fore limbs
of Ichthyosawrus, Plesiosawrus, Menobranchus, and the left manus of Gecko
VverUs.

I, humerus; 2, radius; U, ulna; 7, radiale; 7, intermedium; w, ulnare; ¢, cen-
trale; c!, c?; c3, c4, c°, distal earpals; 1, 2, 3, phalanges of Menobranchus.
In Gecko itis uncertain whether 2 represents the intermedium and the ulnare
coalesced as in Menobranchus (i u), or whether « is the intermedium and
p is the ulnare, occupying the place of a pisiform bone.

postaxial face of the first, until it has not only reached the articular
surface of the pectoral arch, but furnishes a large part of the articular
4¥

52 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FoRSTERI. [Jan. 4, ©

cavity. In like manner the proximal preeaxial ray (propterygium, R)
has ascended along the preeaxial face of the axial cartilage, until it
also is able to furnish a facet which completes the anterior part of
the cup for the condyle of the pectoral arch.

In Squatina, similar modifications have occurred; but the axial car-
tilage remains large, and the large preeaxial and postaxial cartilages
are directed respectively forwards and backwards, in accordance with
the form of the vastly expanded fin.

In Raia, yet further expansion is obtained by the separation of
the axial and postaxial cartilages and the interpolation of postaxial
rays between them. ‘The proximal ends of these enter into the
articulation, as the great postaxial cartilage had already done.

The interpretation of the skeleton of the pectoral fin of Chimera
presents some difficulties. This skeleton consists (fig. 10) of :—(1)a
proximal cartilage (I), which articulates by an excavated surface with
the condyle of the pectoral arch ; (2) a flat, curved, elongated middle
cartilage (Mt), which is inclined backwards; (3) a small semi-
lunar distal cartilage (c), which fits onto the convex distal end of
the last. At the end of the convex posterior edge of the distal car-
tilage is a small cartilaginous ray, consisting of a long basal and a
short terminal segment. Similar rays, which gradually become longer,
follow this along the free convex edge of the distal cartilage and that
of the middle cartilage; but the proximal end of the latter bears a
much stronger ray, with a wide base (R), which for the most part
unites with the ventral edge of the proximal cartilage (1), but is con-
nected with the middle cartilage (M¢) by its posterior produced
angle.

There can, I think, be no doubt that the proximal cartilage (I)
in Chimera answers to the proximal cartilage in Ceratodus. The
small proximal postaxial cartilages also exactly correspond; and
the large proximal preeaxial rays no less closely answer to one
another. But if this be so, it follows that the whole skeleton of the
fin in Ceratodus is represented in that of Chimera. The distal
cartilage (c) in Chimera is the result of the coalescence of the bases
of a certain number of the postaxial rays, as is obvious on tracing the
series round.

Hence it would appear that all that can represent the series of
median segments except the first is the middle cartilage (Mf).
It further seems probable that this middle cartilage in great part,
if not wholly, represents the second segment of the Ceratodus
limb. The postaxial edges, a 6 and 4c, correspond closely ; but the
edge ef, long in Ceratodus, is reduced to nothing in Chimera ;
while the edge ¢ d, occupied exclusively by the third segment in
Ceratodus, is greatly elongated and bears all the przeaxial rays in
Chimera.

In order to change the skeleton of the pectoral fin of Ceratodus
into that of Chimera, all that will be necessary, if this comparison
is correct, is that the third and following median segments of the
former shall be gradually reduced, either by abortion or coalescence
with the second, more and more postaxial fin-rays becoming attached

1876.] PROF. T., H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. 53

to the postaxial edge of the second segment, and more and more of
the przaxial rays to its preeaxial edge. At the same time the first
preeaxial ray, enlarging backwards and forwards, intercepts the
proximal ends of two or three of the following rays, and comes
into connexion with the proximal segment.

The difficulty which arises out of this apparently natural interpre-
tation of the parts of the skeleton of the fin of Chimera consists in
this—that it leads to a doubt as to the true nature of the postaxial
cartilage (M¢) in Scyllium, and therefore in other Plagiostomes. For
this metapterygial cartilage cannot at the same time represent
coalesced postaxial rays, as the analogy of Notidanus would suggest,
and the second joint of the axial skeleton, as the analogy of Chimera,
on the interpretation just given, indicates. If, following the analogy
of Notidanus, we consider M¢ in Chimera to be formed of coalesced
postaxial fin-rays, then the structure will present no difficulty, but
will come very near that presented by the fin of Cestracion. The
study of the development of the parts can alone solve this problem ;
but I am inclined provisionally to adopt the latter hypothesis,
plausible as the former seems.

Polypterus and Polyodon furnish the best connecting links
between the Plagiostome fin and that of the other Ganoidei and
the Teleostei. In Polypterus, the Scyllium type is essentially pre-
served. In Polyodon and all other Ganoids of which the fin-
structure is known, the type is essentially that of the Rays, in so far
as fin-rays enter into the glenoid articulation behind the proximal
median segment (I). These and many other special modifications
of the fish’s fin have been carefully worked out by Gegenbaur*, to
whose excellent descriptions I have nothing to add.

If the interpretation which I have here endeavoured to make good
is correct, it is clear that, as Gegenbaur has suggested, Ceratodus
presents us with the nearest known approximation to the fundamental
form of vertebrate limb, or archipterygium. But the asymmetry of
the skeleton of the fin of Ceratodus, and the differences between its
distal and its proximal portions, as well as the fact that the proximal
median segment has no rays, appear to indicate that the veritable
archipterygium has undergone a certain amount of modification even
in Ceratodus. Analogy leads to the suspicion that a still more
archaic fish than Cera¢todus would have as many pairs of rays as
median pieces. In this condition the skeleton would be made up of
homologous segments, which might be termed pteromeres, each of
which would consist of a mesomere with a preeaxial and a postaxial
paramere. And as this is the actual state of a great portion of the
skeleton of the fin in Ceratodus, it may perhaps be permissible to
carry speculation as to the primitive condition of the vertebrate limb
thus far. Dr. Ginther and Professor Gegenbaur go a step further,
and suggest that even this archipterygium may be the secondary pro-
duct of the coalescence of many longitudinal cartilaginous elements,
which are united by their bases, while they fray out, as it were, at
regular intervals towards the distal end of the limb. In this case,

* ‘Untersuchungen,’ Heft ii. ‘“‘ Brustfiosse der Fische,” 1865.

54 PROF. T. H, HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. [Jan. 4,

Gegenbaur has most ingeniously suggested that the pectoral arch,
with its limb, would correspond with a branchial arch and its rays.

It will be observed that the view of the special homologies of the
elements of the skeletons of the fins of fishes which I have ventured
to put forth differs, fundamentally, both from that suggested by Dr.
Giinther and from that advanced by Gegenbaur, either in its original
form or as he has modified it subsequently to the discovery of
Ceratodus.

The former says (/. ¢. p. 533) :—‘ When I designated the arrange-
ment of the parts of this pectoral skeleton unique, I did not mean to
convey the idea that no homological relation could be pointed out
between the parts of the pector al skeleton of Ceratodus and that of
other fishes. It is quite evident that we have here a further deve-
lopment of the simple pectoral axis of Lepidosiren in the direction
towards the Plagiostomes. The pectoral skeleton of Lepidosiren
paradowa consists merely of the central series of cartilages of Cera-
todus ; there is no fin-like expansion of the skin of the pectoral limb,
which is a simple tapering filament. In Lepidosiren annectens this
pectoral filament is bordered by an expansion of the skin along its
lower edge ; and even minute fin-rays are imbedded in each lamina of
the fold ; in order to support this low, one-sided, rayed fringe, very
small, single-jointed cartilages are added to the axis*. The fin is
still more developed in Ceratodus: it has become a broad, scythe-
shaped paddle, dilated by a fold of the skin, with two layers of fin-
rays surrounding it in its entire circumference ; therefore supporting
cartilaginous branches are added on both sides of the axis; and most
of the branches are composed of several joints, in order to reach the
more distant parts which require the support.”

This is the exact converse of the view of the relations of Lepido-
siren and Cerutodus which, in agreement with Gegenbaur, I am
disposed to take. The fin of the former appears to me to be a
reduced and metamorphosed state of the more primitive condition
retained in Ceratodus.

Dr. Giinther goes on to say that “the arrangement of the limb-ske-
leton of Ceratodus is foreshadowed in the pectoral fin of Acipenser.”
On the contrary, in my judgment, the pectoral fin of Acipenser has
been derived by much modification from a Ceratodus-like type.

In referring to those points in which I venture to dissent from
Professor Gegenbaur’s interpretation, I cannot refrain from express-
ing my sense of the very great value of his investigations into the
morphology of vertebrate limbs, and my grateful indebtedness to
the rich fund of new facts and new ideas which they contain.
However, I found myself unable fully to accept his theory of the
fish’s fin and the vertebrate limb generally, in its original form ; and
I expressed my hesitation and its grounds in the German version of
my ‘Manual of the Vertebrata’+. Gegenbaur’s later view is con-

* Four or five of these ray-bearers are esaeely attached to each joint of the
axis (Peters, Miiller’s ‘ Archiv,’ 1845, Taf. 2. fi

+ Handbuch der Anatomie der Wirbelthiere,’ iibersetzt yon Dr. F. Ratzel
(Breslau, 1873), pp. 34, 35.

1876.] PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI. bd

cisely stated in his ‘ Grundriss der vergleichenden Anatomie,’ 1874,
p. 493, in the following words :—

‘‘The very various forms of the skeleton of the free limbs are
deducible from a fundamental form of which only a few instances
remain, and which, as representing the first and lowest condition of
the fin-skeleton, I term the archipterygium. This is represented by
a jointed cartilaginous stem, articulated with the pectoral arch and
giving attachment, on each side, to a series of likewise jointed
pieces, the radii. The whole structure, resembling a pinnate leaf,
is singularly like the supporting apparatus of many Selachian gills,
and thus throws a gleam of light upon the phylogeny of the limbs.

*‘ Ceratodus presents this form of fin-skeleton, which was perhaps
usual among the Crossopterygide, at present represented only by
Polypterus. The biserial rays of the fin undergo different modifica-
tions. Among the Dipnoi the medial [ postaxial] rays are retained
in the form of thin rods of cartilage; while in the Selachians the
lateral [przeaxial] rays attain a considerable development and consti-
tute the greater part of the massive fin-skeleton. Of the medial
[postaxial] rays but few remain, though they are sufficiently distinct
to sanction the assumption of a former more extensive biserial
arrangement of rays on the stem of the fin.”

The metapterygium Gegenbaur considers to answer to the axial
skeleton of the archipterygium. The propterygium is formed by
the union of the proximal preeaxial fin-rays. The mesopterygium is
formed by a certain number of the succeeding preeaxial fin-rays.

The only part of this interpretation with which I can agree is the
determination of what Gegenbaur names the propterygium as the
representative of the proximal preeaxial fin-ray or rays in most cases,
but not in Chimera, and probably not in Notidanus.

In my judgment, the mesopterygium of Gegenbaur is the proximal
piece of the axial skeleton, which constantly retains its primary
articulation with the pectoral arch. His propterygium represents
the proximal preeaxial fin-ray, and his metapterygium the proximal
postaxial fin-ray in almost all cases; and the zchthyopterygium, as
the typical fish-fin may be termed, differs from the archipterygium
not by the more or less complete suppression of the postaxial rays,
but by the general abbreviation of the whole skeleton and the gradual
connexion of more or fewer fin-rays (parameres) with the pectoral
arch.

In the effectual discharge of the function of the fish’s fin, increase
of breadth is needed ; and this increase of surface is obtained by the
gradual approximation of more and more lateral elements of the
archipterygium to the shoulder-girdle.

Professor Gegenbaur has extended his theory of the limbs to the
higher Vertebrata. He conceives that the axis of the archipterygium
(which he considers to be the homologue of the metapterygium of
the Selachian) is represented by the series of bones which 1s formed
by the humerus, the radius, the radial segments of the carpus, and
the radial digit or pollex ; while the ulna, the radial segments of the
carpus and the ulnar digit, the other carpal bones, and the fourth,

56 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI, [Jan. 4,

third, and second digits represent so many preeaxial rays. The very
serious objection that this hypothesis makes the radius and the radial
digit postaxial, while, as a matter of fact, in every vertebrate animal
it is preeaxial, is met by the assumption of a torsion of the humerus.
But I must confess that I am wholly unable to satisfy myself of the
existence of any torsion of the humerus capable of bringing about
the effect attributed to it in any vertebrated animal; and, moreover,
if such torsion has brought about the observed position of the
manus and pes in the higher Vertebrata, any reversal of that torsion
would destroy the homology of the pollex and the hallux—which is
surely out of reach of doubt.

I am disposed to think, though I am far from imagining that the
hypothesis can at present be demonstrated, that the higher vertebrate
limb has arisen from the archipterygium in another and simpler
method.

According to Gegenbaur’s view, the higher vertebrate limb is
the result of further progress, in the same direction, of the meta-
morphosis which has given rise to the ichthyopterygium. But this
appears to me to be highly improbable. The ichthyopterygium is
specialized pari passu with the other peculiarities of piscine structure,
and is not developed in the Dipnoi, which are the nearest allies of the
Amphibia. Moreover the higher vertebrate limb, which may be
termed the chiropterygium, as an organ of support and prehension,
requires length, strength, and mobility of its segments—conditions
exactly the opposite of those which give the ichthyopterygium its
special utility.

Hence, as the most highly specialized forms of ichthyopterygium
result from the shortening of the skeleton of the fin, the approxi-
mation of its distal elements to the shoulder-girdle, and the multipli-
tion of its rays, we might expect that the chiropterygium would take
its origin by the lengthening of the axial skeleton, accompanied by
a removal of its distal elements further away from the shoulder-
girdle, and by a diminution in the number of the rays.

The parts which are traversed by a line drawn through the
humerus, the intermedium, the centrale, the third distal carpal, and
the third digit in the cheiropterygium may be regarded as so many
mesomeres, representing the axis of the archipterygium. Two pairs
of parameres are retained on each side. The przeaxial are :—(1) the
radius, the radiale, the first distal carpal, and the pollex; (2) the
second distal carpal and the index. The postaxial parameres are :—
(1) the ulna, the ulnare, the fifth distal carpal, and the digitus mini-
mus; (2) the fourth carpal and the annularis.

In fig. 11 the skeleton of the pectoral fin of Cestracion is repre-
sented side by side with the skeleton of the fore limbs of Meno-
branchus, Ichthyosaurus, Plesiosaurus, and Gecko; and the shading
of the different parts of the ichthyopterygium is repeated in what
I suppose to be the homologous elements of the chiropterygium. In
the case of Menobranchus, however, it is possible that the true pollex
is suppressed, and that the actual radial digit represents the second of
the pentadactyle limb, and therefore should have been left unshaded,

1876.] AND ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF FISHES. 57

In accordance with the view thus suggested, the humerus in the
chiropterygium is the homologue of the proximal mesomere or joint
of the axis of the archipterygium, while the radius and the ulna are
the homologues of the proximal ends of przeaxial and postaxial para-
meres of the archipterygium.

The confirmation or refutation of this hypothesis is to be sought
in development, and in the condition of the limbs in those Pale-
ozoic Amphibia which may have more nearly approximated to Dipnoi
than any existing or extinct forms at present known. I suggest it
mainly in the hope of stimulating investigation in both these direc-
tions.

IV. Taxonomy of Ceratodus, and Remarks on the Classification of
“ishes.

The indications afforded by the brain, the skull, and the limbs of
Ceratodus are sufficient to show that it occupies a curiously central
position among the Ichthyopsida, being allied on one side to the
Amphibia, on another to the Chimeroidei and Plagiostomi, and on
yet another to the Ganoidei—especially to that group of the
Ganoids which I have termed Crossopterygide, and to the affinities
of which with Lepidosiren I called attention in 1861.

But even Dipterus, which approaches Ceratodus and Lepidosiren
so closely in its dentition and in the form of its fins, is far more similar
to Polypterus and Amia in other respects ; and there is, at present, no
reason to believe that any of the Crossopterygian Ganoids possessed
other than a hyostylic skull, or differed from Polypterus in those
respects in which Polypterus differs from the existing Dipnoi. All
known Crossopterygians have jugular plates, of which there is no trace
in the Dipnoi. And as to the position of the anterior nares, which
appear to have been situated on the under face of the broad snout,
not only in Dipterus, but in Osteolepis and Diplopterus, I have
shown above that, so far from being a diagnostic character of the
Dipnoi, it is simply an embryonic feature retained in them, the Se-
lachians, and very probably in many of the early Ganoidei. On the
other hand, in Amia, there is an even closer approximation between
the Ganoids and the Teleosteans than can at present be shown to
exist between any Ganoids and the Dipnoi; while the differences
between the Dipnoi and the Chimeeroidei, and between the Chime-
roidei and the Plagiostomi respectively, are not less than those between
the Ganoids and the Dipnoi.

It seems to me, therefore, that by forming the Dipnoi, Ganoidei,
Chimeeroidei, and Plagiostomi into a group of “ Paleichthyes,’’ from
which the 'Teleostei are excluded, as Dr. Giinther proposes to do, the
differences between the Teleostei and the other hyostylic fishes are
brought into undue prominence, and that it is better to retain the
Millerian groups of Dipnoi (Strenoidei, Miiller), Ganoidei, Teleostei,
Plagiostomi, and Chimeeroidei (Holocephali, Miiller) as equivalent
and distinct natural assemblages.

In discussing any system of classification, however, it must be

58 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON CERATODUS FORSTERI, (Jan. 4,

recollected that known forms certainly represent but a portion, and
probably a small portion, of those which have existed, and that the
most natural groups are therefore, to a great extent, the result of the
influence of extraneous, and what may be properly termed accidental,
conditions.

It has occurred to me that, in the present state of science, it is
very desirable to have some mode of stating the facts of morphology
in a condensed and comprehensible form, which shall be purely ob-
jective and free from speculation ; and I now proceed to illustrate my
meaning by drawing up a scheme of the morphology of the
Ichthyopsida.

Looking at the animals included under this head as a whole, or at
the development of any of the higher members of the group, it is
observable that they present a certain series of stages of differentia-
tion marked by the broad characters of the skull, the nature of the
olfactory and respiratory organs, and the development or non-develop-
ment of an opercular fold of the integument.

Thus the skull either retains its primitive segmentation (Hntomo-
crania), or the primitive segmentation is lost, and a chondrocranium
is developed (Holocrania). There are two external nostrils (Am-
phirhina) or only one (Monorhina).

A pneumatoceele, or air sac, which may become either an air-
bladder or a lung, is developed (Pneuwmatoceela), or not (Apneumato-
cela) ; and a fold of the integument may cover the branchial aper-
tures (Operculata), or not (Jnoperculata).

The Ichthyopsida also exhibit a series of stages of differentiation of
the limbs, being either apodal or pedate; and, when pedate, having
the limb-skeleton constructed upon the type of the archipterygium,
or on that of the icthyopterygium, or on that of the chiropterygium.

Moreover, when the limb is an ichthyopterygium, it may possess
one, or at most two basal elements, which articulate with the pectoral
arch (unibasal), or there may be three (tribasal), or there may be
many (multibasal), in accordance with the greater and greater diver-
gence of the fin from the archipterygial type.

The chondrocranium may be constructed upon either the amphi-
stylic, the hyostylic, or the autostylic plan.

Now, if the stages of general differentiation be indicated by points
on a vertical line from which horizontal lines are drawn, and the
stages of subordinate differentiation of the skull and limbs be indi-
cated by points on a horizontal line from which vertical lines are
drawn, we shall have vertical series of intersections indicating general
differentiation, and horizontal series of intersections indicating special
differentiation. Every known form will occupy some given inter-
sections, and the unoccupied intersections will indicate unfulfilled, or
unknown, possibilities of organization.

The following Table exhibits the groups of the Ichthyopsida
arranged according to this scheme.

AND ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF FISHES,

1876.]

I. HOLOCRANIA.
A. Amphirhina.
a. Pneumatoceela.
1. operculata.

2. inoperculata.

b. Apneumatoccela,
1. operculata.
2. inoperculata.
B. Monorhina.
1. operculata.
2. inoperculata.
Il. ENTOMOCRANIA.
1. operculata.

2. inoperculata.

Marsiro-
BRANCHIi.
PuHARYNGO-
BRANCHII.
~~ YH Oo

Amphistylica. Hyostylica.

Autostylica.
pe
AMPHIBIA Dipnoi.
(caducibranchiate). :
AMPHIBIA
(perennibranchiate).:

Apoda.

Chiropterygium. segs Figs a
|

Polypterus. GANOIDEL::

CHIMAROIDEL.

Cestracion. Most
Notidanus. Selachii. Raii.

PaLaicruyns (Ginther).

Unibasal. Tribasal, Multibasal.
| |
Icthyopterygium.
|

~ —

Pedata.

60 MR. A, H. GARROD ON THE GROUND-HORNBILL. [Jan. 18,

January 18, 1876.
Robert Hudson, Esq., F.R.S., V.P., in the Chair.

The following papers were read :—

1. On a Peculiarity in the Carotid Arteries, and other Points
in the Anatomy, of the Ground-Hornbill (Bucorvus
abyssinicus). By A. H. Garrop, M.A., F.Z.S., Prosector
to the Society.

[Received December 10, 1875.]

A specimen of Bucorvus abyssinicus having recently died in the
Society’s Gardens, I have had the opportunity of examining the
anatomy of that genus for the first time. In all respects, except the
one to be referred to as regards its arterial system and a minor myo-
logical feature, it agrees with Buceros. As is the case in all the
Bucerotidee, there was not a trace of fat to be found on any part of
the body of the adult bird, though it may be present in young
individuals; and the air-cells extended so extensively among the
muscles that on removing the skin no dissection was required to
display each muscle from origin to insertion. The muscular tissue
was also strikingly compact and dry, as in the Hares among mam-
mals, in which animals also it is known that fat is never deposited.
The oil-gland, as in Buceros, instead of being simply tufted, was also
covered with a dense mat of short feathers, about a square inch in
area.

In Buceros, as in most birds, the two carotid arteries, immediately
they separate from their respective innominate arteries, converge,
and meet before they have gone any considerable distance up the
neck, to run together in the median hypapophysial canal on the
anterior surface of the cervical vertebrae. In some Parrots the left
carotid, instead of coursing the above-mentioned canal with its
fellow, runs up along the side of the neck together with the left
pneumogastric nerve to reach the head. In Bucorvus, in the specimen
dissected by me at least *, a further extension of this peculiarity ob-
tains ; for both the carotids, instead of meeting and running toge-
ther, course up the sides of the neck in company with the pneumo-
gastric nerves and jugular veins of their respective sides, as they do
in mammals, and in no other birds, as far as I am aware. Another
peculiarity is, that these abnormally placed carotids are particularly
small in calibre ; and I noticed that the vertebrals were as conspicu-
ously large, evidently to make up the blood-supply of the head.

As to the visceral anatomy, it may be mentioned that the uni-
formly cylindrical crop leads, through the zonary proventriculus, to
the stomach, which is much like that of Bucerost, but more mus-
cular, and with the dense epithelial lining much more firmly

* A second specimen, since received, entirely agrees with the above descrip-

tion.
+ Vide Trans. Z. 8. vol. i. pl. xviii. p. 122.

a

REPT Oe ee

‘SHYITO YWHCUO AHL AO SHTUNVA AO LYVH

dat qequeH NW

TA LN Oa aa GAOT

Yf LM 2 Zi Y init Z iyi; WA we, oO EE
€ epnrninciy ] eproaullisw DQ ts
ee MET ELIE = Cp iad’
TULA GI DAIS SAIS qumead ia :
YY Ut’ ie Ly

Y MMM 7 Why
ps

PPP eet

Wie

JLRS LSE
Ym ae — Y MLL

pile iusoydeyy /

LO, TAU
va LD Qa ITED

Nitiel Sisis Zeb

1876.] MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 61

attached. The intestines are particularly capacious, being quite an
inch in diameter ; they are four feet in length, and have no colic ceca
connected with them. The liver has a gall-bladder ; and the left of
the two lobes which go to form it is a little the smaller. In the
syrinx there is a pair of intrinsic muscles to the first bronchial half-
ring. The tongue is almost as small as it is in the Pelicans. ,

Myologically, of the five muscles in the thigh, which, in my esti-
mation, are specially significant*, the ambiens is absent, as are the
femoro-caudal and the accessory femoro-caudal, the semitendinosus
and the accessory semitendinosus being well represented. In this
respect Bucorvus, therefore, differs from Buceros and Toccus, the
accessory femoro-caudal muscle being present in the two latter
genera. As is most probably known to many, Bucorvus walks,
placing one foot in front of the other, whilst Buceros always hops,
with both feet together.

2. On the Classification of the Order Glires.
By Epwarp R. Axston, F.G.S., F.Z.8.

[Received December 14, 1875.]
(Plate IV.)

The following attempt at a natural arrangement of the gnawing
mammals is the result of a revision of the genera of that order,
undertaken at the suggestion of Professor Flower, on which I have
been for some time engaged.

In laying it before the Society it may be well to say at once that
the proposed classification has few claims to novelty, being in fact a
modification of that first suggested by Mr. Waterhouse, and since
improved by Professors Gervais, Brandt, and Lilljeborg. Neverthe-
less I have found it necessary to propose several changes in the
arrangement of the families and subfamilies, as well as rectifications in
their nomenclature. I have also taken the fossil forms into consi-
deration, and have thereby been compelled to propose the establish-
ment of a new suborder. Lastly, I have endeavoured to bring the
whole up toa level with the improved state of our knowledge, which
has gained much of late years from the labours of Milne-Edwards,
Gray, Giinther, Leidy, Coues, and others, but, above all, from those
of Dr. Peters.

The order Glires has always been a stumbling-block to naturalists,
owing to the immense number and variety of the forms which it
includes, and to their puzzling cross-relationships to one another.
Nor has paleontology here yielded, save ina few instances, the same
help which she has lent the student of some other orders of mam-
mals; for most of the fossil rodents yet discovered are referable
to families which still exist, and are often closely allied to recent
genera.

* P. Z.8. 1873, p. 626, and 1874, p. 111.

62 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. ([Jan. 18,

These difficulties were insuperable as long as zoologists placed
their trust in outward appearances; and when sounder principles
gained ground it was some time before the necessary anatomical data
could be collected. Without detailing all the classifications which
have been proposed within the last fifty years, I must briefly men-
tion the memoirs of the four zoologists on whose labours, as already
stated, the following proposed arrangement is chiefly based.

In 1839, Mr. G. R. Waterhouse, then Curator of this Society,
published the first of a series of essays in which he may confidently
be said to have laid down the groundwork of a natural arrangement
of this order*. Unfortunately, as the mammalogist must think,
this accurate and thoughtful zoologist has long since turned his
attention to other departments, and only a small portion of his great
work on the Rodentia ever appeared}. In his first papers Mr.
Waterhouse, taking the characters of the skull and mandible as his
chief guides, arranged the Rodents into three great families, the
Murina, Hystricina, and Leporina, with twelve subfamilies. Con-
tinuing his labours for ten years, his views were naturally changed
on many points. Latterly he separated the Sciuride asa group
equal in value to the other two, the following being the arrangement
of families and subfamilies adopted in his later writings :—

RODENTIA.

I. Sciuride. Ill. Hystricide.

II. Muride. 1. Hystricina.
1. Saccomyina. 2. Dasyproctina.
2. Dipodina. 3. Echimyina.
3. Ctenodactylina. 4. Octodontina.
4, Murina. 5. Chinchillina.
5. Spalacina. 6. Caviina.
6. Arvicolina. IV. Leporide.
7. Bathyergina.

In 1848 Professor Gervais published an arrangement of this order,
in which he instituted two principal sections or suborderst. The
first of these included the ordinary Rodents with only one pair of
incisors above and below; the second consisted of those with two
pairs in the upper jaw, and was consequently equivalent to Illiger’s
group Duplicidenta§. The following was Professor Gervais’s ar-
rangement of the families :—

* “QObservations on the Rodentia,” Mag. Nat. Hist. iii. pp. 90-96, 184-188,
274-279, 593-600; Ann. Nat. Hist. viii. pp. 81-84, x. pp. 197-203 (1839-42).
“ On the Geographical Distribution of the Rodentia,” P. Z.8. 1889, pp. 172-174.
“ Order Rodentia,” Keith Johnston’s Physical Atlas, Phytology and Zoology,
map. 5, letterpress (1849).

+ Natural History of the Mammalia, vol. ii. “Rodentia.” London 1848 (in-
cludes only the families Leporide and Hystricide).

+ Dict. Univ. d’Hist. Nat. xi. p. 202 (1848); Ann. Scien. Nat. 3™* sér. t. xx,
pp. 245, 246 (1853).

§ Prod. Syst. Mamm. p. 91 (1811).

1876. ] MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 63

GLIREs.
I. Rongeurs ordinaires. 6. Lagostomide.
1. Sciuridee. 7. Hystricide.
2. Pseudostomide *. 8. Caviade.
3. Muride.
4. Dipodide. II. Rongeurs duplicidentés.
5. Ctenomydee. 9. Leporide.

In 1855 appeared Professor J. F. Brandt’s learned and elaborate
review of the cranial structure and classification of recent Rodentst.
On the whole he adopted Mr. Waterhouse’s arrangement; but recog-
nizing the fact that his four groups were of more than family value,
he raised them to the rank of suborders. He also made several
changes in the arrangement of the families and the position of some
of the more doubtful forms, and imposed new names on all the
divisions, which he arranged in the following order :—

GLIRES.
I. Seiuromorphi. Ill. Hystricomorphi.
1. Sciuroides. 8. Hystricoides.
Il. Myomorphi. 9. Spalacopodoides§.
2. Myoxoides. 10. Eriomyoides||.
3. Castoroides. 11. Hemionychoides].
4. Sciurospalacoidest. LIV. Lagomorphi.
5. Myoides. 12. Lagoides.
6. Spalacoides.
7. Dipodoides.

Eleven years later Professor Lilljeborg published his admirable sys-
tematic review of this order**. Appreciating the great importance of
the characters which separate the Leporide and Lagomyide from
all other rodents, he adopted Gervais’s two suborders under the
names Glires Simplicidentati and Glires Duplicidentati. In the
arrangement of the former he pointed out a well-marked and con-
stant character which separates the Myomorphi of Brandt from both
the Sciuromorphi and the Hystricomorphi, namely the complete
ankylosis in the former of the lower part of the tibia and fibula.
Although Professor Lilljeborg does not retain these divisions in his
tabular arrangements, he observes that the M/yomorphi include the

* Saccomyina, Waterhouse.

t J. F. Brandt, ‘‘ Untersuchungen iiber die craniologischen Entwicklungs-
stufen. . . und Classification der Nager der Jetzwelt,” Mém. de l’Acad, Imp.
(3 50) Pétersbourg, 67° série (Sciences Naturelles), vii. pp. 127-336, 12 pls.

{ Containing Geomys and Thomomys.

§ Equal to Echimyina and Octodontina of Waterhouse.

|| Chinchillina, Waterh.

§| Equal to Dasyproctina and Caviina, Waterh.
teen Systematisk Gifversigt af de Gnagande Diaggdjuren, Glires. 4to. Upsala,

64 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. |[Jan. 18,

first six, the Sciuromorphi the seventh, and the Hystricomorphi
the eighth to eleventh families in the following Table :—

GLIRES.
I. Simplicidentati. 8. Haploodontide.
1. Muridee. 9. Chinchillide.
2. Spalacidee. 10. Spalacopodidee.
3. Dipodide. 11. Hystricide.
4. Myoxidee. II. Duplicidentati.
5. Saccomyide. 12. Lagomyidee.
6. Castoride. 13. Leporide.
7. Sciuridee.

In his recent work on Scandinavian mammals*, Professor Lillje-
borg retains the above arrangement, adding a new family, allied to
the Muridee, for the reception of Milne-Edwards’s genus Lophiomys.

As it became clear that the cranial characters of the groups pro-
posed by Waterhouse and Brandt are liable to exceptions, and that
they are connected by more or less intermediate forms, they have
not been regarded with favour by recent systematic writers; never-
theless the affinities which they indicate have been very generally
accepted in the arrangement of the families. But if a group is a
natural one, it should not, I think, be rejected because it is difficult
to characterize. The Insectivora may be taken as an example of a
very natural order, of which, in Professor Huxley’s words, ‘it is
exceedingly difficult to give an absolute definition.” Even if it
were not possible to separate the first three of Waterhouse’s great
families by perfectly constant characters, they ought, as it appears
to me, to be recognized as indicating three distinct lines of develop-
ment. But by the help of the characters of the leg-bones, pointed
out by Professor Lilljeborg, the difficulty is overcome. In the few
cases in which the cranial differences fail us in separating the
sciurine rodents from the murine, and the latter from the hystricine,
the complete ankylosis of the lower part of the tibia and fibula in
the second group comes to our aid. As far as I am aware, there is
no real exception to this rule; for the union between these bones
sometimes observed in the genus Pteromys, in aged individuals of
Castor, and in several of the hystricine series, is totally different
from the true fusion which we meet with in all the known Myomor-
phi. The first and third groups, which agree with one another in
this point, are at once separated from each other by the form of the
mandible, as well as by the whole type of cranial structure.

But while recognizing these groups as true and natural, I cannot
consider them to have any thing like the rank of Brandt’s Lagomor-
phi, and rather treat them as sections of Lilljeborg’s suborder Glires
Simplicidentati, of somewhat similar value to the sections instituted
by Turner and Flower in the Carnivora fissipedia.

Before proceeding to some general remarks on these various divi-
sions, it should be premised that an absolutely equal value is not

* Sweriges och Norges Ryggradsdjur, I. Daggdjuren. Upsala, 1874.

1876.] MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 65

here claimed for all the families and subfamilies. Such is the variety
of the extent of differentiation that it appears to me that no Procrus-
tean standard can be applied. Either we must load our memories
with tribes, legions, cohorts, series, superfamilies, &c., or we must be
content with divisions pretending only to an approximate equality of
value.

General Remarks.

The first suborder of Rodents, GLIRES SIMPLICIDENTATI, con-
tains an enormous majority of both the recent and extinct forms, and
is at once proved by its dentition to be the most highly specialized
division of the order. here is only one pair of incisors above and
below at all ages ; and their enamel is restricted to their front surface.
In the skull, the incisive foramina are moderate and separate, the
optic foramina are very rarely confluent, and there is an alisphenoid
canal*. The fibula is either ankylosed below to the tibia or free,
and does not articulate with the caleanium. Vesicular glands are
present ; and the testes are usually abdominal, only temporarily de-
scending into the scrotal pouchest.

Of this suborder the first section, Sciuromorpha, has for con-
stant characters the combination of a peculiar form of mandible with

Fig. |.

Mandible of Arctomys marmotta.

the persistence of the fibula as a distinct bone throughout life. The
former character at once separates it from the Hystricomorpha, the
latter from the Myomorpha. In the mandible the angular portion
springs from the lower edge of the bony covering of the interior
incisor, not from its outer side ; and its outline is more or less rounded.

* Cf. Turner, P. Z. 8, 1848, p. 65. + Cf. Owen, Anat. of Vert. iii. p. 649,
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. V. 5

66 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. [Jan. 18,

The difference between the mandible characteristic of the Sciuro-
morpha and Myomorpha and that peculiar to the Hystricomorpha
will be best shown by a comparison of the figures*. In the more
typical forms the infraorbital opening is not enlarged to give passage
to a portion of the masseter muscle; and in all the malar extends far
forward, and is not supported below by a continuation backwards of
the maxillary zygomatic process. The incisive foramina are small,
and confined to the intermaxillaries ; the foramina of the base of the
skull are proportionalty small; and there is no interpterygoid canalf.
The clavicles are always perfect, the posterior ridge of the scapula
is strongly developed, and the acromion is broad and flattened.
Externally the muffle is naked, the upper lip usually cleft, the
nostrils rounded above and comma-shaped, the ears hairy, and the
tail cylindrical and well haired, except in Castor, in which it is
flattened and scaly.

The typical family, the Sciuride, easily distinguished by their
postorbital frontal processes, has been divided for convenience into
two subfamilies, the long-tailed arboreal Squirrels (Securine), and
the short-tailed terrestrial Marmots (Arc/omyine), though it must
be confessed that their differences are merely adaptive and not very
striking. he other families are all more or less aberrant, and their
true affinities have been the subject of much discussion.

The first of these is the Anomaluride ; and I have alreadyt given
my reasons for considering that it must be regarded as an undoubted
though specially differentiated family of this section. The sciurine
affinities of the Haplodontide, in spite of its peculiar dental and
cranial characters, have been definitely established by Dr. Peters§,
although Prof. Lilljeborg has strangely relegated it to the Hys-
tricomorpha\|. The position of the remaining family, Castoride,
has been a still more vexed question, ever since the Beaver has been
extricated from the old jumble with the Musquash and the Coypu.
Professor Gervais appears to have been the first to treat Castor as
an aberrant member of the present group §, in which Mr. Water
house** and Professor Baird++ have concurred ; and although these
writers have not been generally followed, it seems evident to me that
we must revert to their views. Professor Brandt fully recognized
that in all the more important points the osteology of Castor agrees
with that of the Scturomorpha, but considers this resemblance to be
negatived by the external habitus and manner of life, as well as by
the structure of the teeth, feet, and tailt{. Prof. Lilljeborg places the

* By permission of Professor Flower the illustrations have been drawn from
specimens in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgecus.

+ This name was proposed by Mr. Waterhouse for the fissure which in some
rodents leads from the bottom of the pterygoid fossa into the orbit. Cf. Turner,
P. Z. 8. 1848, p. 63.

1 “On Anomalurus, its Structure and Position,” P. Z. 8. 1875, pp, 88-97.

§ Monatsb. Ak. Berlin, 1864, p. 177. || Op. cit. p. 9.

© Dict. Univ. d’Hist. Nat. xi. p. 203.

** Physical Atlas, Zool. map, 5 (letter-press).

tt North-American Mammals, p. 350.

+t Op. cit. pp. 149, 150.

1576.] MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 67

Castoride among the Myomorpha, but on the boundary between
them and the Seiuromorpha, remarking that the fibula is stout, and
remains long separate from the tibia*. But the characters of these
bones seem to me to be strictly sciurine ; for though they are more
or less firmly attached to one another in aged individuals, yet they
always appear to remain essentially distinct throughout their length.
Less weight is now generally given to external characters than was the
case when Prof. Brandt wrote ; and the purely adaptive differentiation
of the teeth, feet, and tail cannot be allowed to outweigh the nume-
rous and important characters which are at once evident on a careful
comparison of the skulls and skeletons of a Beaver and a Marmot.
These external peculiarities, coupled with those of the digestive,
excretory, and generative organs, certainly show that the Castoride
is a very isolated and aberrant family; but they do not appear to
indicate any specially murine affinities.

Mandible of Cricetomys gumbianus.

An interesting confirmation of these views as to the position of
the Beaver is afforded by the fossil rodent of the American Miocene,
to which Professor Leidy has given the name of Ischyromys. In
this form the dentition of the typical Sciurid@ is combined with a
form of skull which very closely resembles that of the Castoride, and
especially that of the Miocene genus Stenofider. It differs from
both these groups, however, in the possession of a large infra-
orbital opening, and should form, as it appears to me, a fitth family
of the Sciuromorpha, under the name of Jschyromyidet.

The second section, Myomorpha, is at once separated from either
of the others by the single character of the complete fusion in the
adult of the lower part of the tibia and fibula. Externally, the
muffle and upper lip are as in the last section ; and the tail is eylin-

* Op. cit. pp. 7, 39.

+ Of. Leidy, Journ, Acad. Philadelphia, 2nd ser. vol. vii. pp. 835-338, pl. xxvi.;
Cope, Report U.S. Geol. Survey, 1873, p. 477.

5*

68 MR. E. R. ALSTON UN THE ORDER GLIRES. (Jan. 18,

drical, either covered with scales arranged in rings, or more or less
hairy. The Myomorpha contains such a variety of forms, many of
them much specialized, that it is ouly by allowing for exceptions
that its definition can be carried further ; still many and important
distinctions are common to the vast majority. The form of the man-
dible, by which the section was first separated from the Hystrico-
morpha, agrees with the last section, the angular portion springing
from the lower edge of the bony covering of the lower incisor,
excepting in the subfamily Bathyergine, in which it has exactly the
form so characteristic of the hystricine rodents. The other cranial
characters are very varied. In the more typical forms the infra-
orbital opening has a peculiar shape, which may be termed murine ;
it is high, perpendicular, narrow, wider above than below; and the
lower root of the maxillary zygomatic process is perpendicular and
flattened into a thin plate with a rounded anterior edge. The zygoma
is comparatively slender; the malar seldom adyances far forward
(except in the Dipodid@), and is usually supported below by a con-
tinuation backwards of the maxillary process, being reduced in some

Fige3.

Mandible of Bathyergus maritimus.

of the typical genera to a mere splint between the latter and the
squamosal process. The outer walls of the pterygoid fosse are gene-
rally obsolete ; and they have no direct fissure at the bottom, except
in the aberrant subfamily named above. The clavicles are perfect
except in the Lophiomyide.

1876. | MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 69

Of the seven well-marked families into which this section may be
divided, the typical one, the Muride, comprises a great number of
genera. The best classification of these with which I am acquainted
is that of Dr. Peters, which is here adopted with some little modifi-
cation, his groups being ranked as subfamilies, and a slight alteration
being made in their arrangement*. M. A. Milne-Edwards having
clearly proved that the genera E/lobius and Siphneus really belong to
this familyt, the subfamily SipAneine is now placed alongside of the
Arvicoline, with which it is so nearly allied.

Of the other families, the Myoxide bear a very strong outward
resemblance to the Sciuromorpha, which, however, is not mark-
edly confirmed by their anatomy. Dr. Peters having shown that
Platacanthomys must be removed to the Muridet, the remaining
genera of Dormice are all very closely allied, and are isolated from all
other known rodents by the complete absence of the cecum. The
next family, Lophiomyide, contains a single form differing in struc-
ture not only from all the rest of the order, but even from all the
known members of the mammalian class§. Nevertheless, if the ex-
traordinary development of the temporal and malar regions be over-
looked, the whole skull of Lophiomys is truly murine in type; and
this is confirmed by all the other more important points in its
anatomy. It is strange that, although its habits appear to be at least
partly arboreal, Lophiomys should differ from all the rest of the
section in the incomplete development of its clavicles.

The Spalacide, even when disencumbered by the removal of
Siphneus and Ellobius, are still divisible into two subfamilies—the
typical Spalacine, which have the normal mandible of the section,
and the Bathyergine, in which are found the hystricine characters
already mentioned (supra p.68), and which were hence named Spa-
laces subhystriciformes by Prof. Brandt. The next family, which in-
cludes the American rodents with cheek-pouches which open outside
the mouth, was founded by Mr. Waterhouse under the name of Sacco-
myide, and subsequently divided by Prof. Baird into two subfamilies,
Geomyine and Saccomyine. Dr. E. Coues, in a recent valuable
memoir, has contended that these latter divisions should rank as
separate though allied families||—a view in which I cannot agree.
The diversity in their outward form may be paralleled by that in the
Squirrels and Marmots; and the differences in their cranial structure
are, as Dr. Coues himself observes, of a superficial nature. In any
case, Mr. Waterhouse’s name must be changed; for Dr. Peters has
shown] that the genus Saccomys of Frederic Cuvier is in all proba-
bility, a synonym of Desmarest’s Heteromys. The oldest and best-

* The names only of these divisions appeared in the Monatsb. Ak. Berlin,
1866, pp. 13, 14.; for access to Dr. Peters’s hitherto unpublished characters J
am indebted to the courtesy of the author.

+ Recherches pour servir 4 l’Hist. Nat, des Mammiféres, pp. 71-129.

¢ P. ZS. 1865, pp. 397-399.

§ Cf. A. Milne-Edwards, Nouy. Arch. du Mus. iii. pp. 81-118.

|| Rep. Explor. Colorado River, p. 215; Bull. U.S. Survey of Territories,
2nd ser, no. 2, pp. 81-90.

§| Monatsb, Ak. Berlin, 1874, p. 354-359.

70 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. [Jan. 18,

known genus: will therefore legitimately give name to the family
Geomyide, the subfamilies standing as Geomyine and Heteromyine.

Here I am inclined to place, at least provisionally, a family of
Rodents which flourished in Europe in the later Eocene and Miocene
periods, and of which three genera are known. Each of these was
at first ascribed to a distinct family of the Hystricomorpha—namely,
Theridomys to the Octodontide, Archeomys to the Chinchillide,
and Issiodoromys to the Caviide. M. Gervais was the first to re-
move them entirely from that section, uniting the first two in his
tribe Théridomins of the family Myowidés (which also included
Anomalurus). He placed Issiodoromys in his tribu des Pédétins of
the Dipodide, but with the remark that it might have to be rele-
gated to the Théridomins*. That these animals were strictly myo-
morphine is clearly shown by the form of their mandibles. Now
that dnomalurus has been definitely separated from the Myowide,
there seems to be nothing to unite these ancient rodents with that

Fig. 4.

Mandible of Capromys pilorides.

family ; and, both in their very varied dentition and in what we know

of their cranial characters, they appear to me to be very nearly related

to the Dipodide—the two former to the true Dipodine, and the last

to the Pedetine. Meantime it may be best to allow them to stand
as a distinct family under the name of Theridomyide.

The last family of the Myomorpha, the Dipodide, is divisible

into three plainly marked subfamilies—Jaculine, Dipodine, and
* Zool. et Paléont. Frang. (2me ed.), pp. 31-36,

1876.] MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES, 71

Pedetine, of which the first is the most murine, and the second the
most highly specialized, while the third shows more than superficial
resemblances to the Chinchillide.

The third section, Hystricomorpha, is characterized by the
form of the mandible, combined with persistence of the fibula as a
distinct bone throughout life. In the mandible the ascending ramus
and coronoid process are low, and the angular portion does not spring
from the lower edge of the bony covering of the lower incisor. In
the great majority of forms in which that tooth is long, the angular
portion springs from the outer side of its bony sheath, so that when
viewed from below there is a longitudinal groove between the angu-
lar and dental portions. In the Caviide, in which the incisors are
short, ‘‘the direction of the incisor is such that, were it prolonged

Mandible of Cavia aperea.

backwards, the alveolus of the tooth and the angular portion of the
jaw would hold the same relative positions’’ as in the other members
of the section*. This difference in the form of jaw will be best under-
stood by a comparison of figures 4 and 5. In the skull the infraorbital
opening is always large, oval or subtriangular, an interpterygoid
fissure is present, and the foramina of the base of the skull are pro-
portionally large, while the incisive foramina are small. The fron-
tals have no distinct postorbital processes (except in Chetomys) ;
and the malar, which is rarely continued far forward, is not sup-
ported below by a continuation of the maxillary zygomatic process.
The clavicles are either perfect or imperfect; and one premolar is
present above and below (except in Ctenodactylus). The upper lip
is rarely cleft, the muffle is usually clad with very fine hairs, and the

* Waterhouse, Nat. Hist. Mamm. ii. p, 149.

72 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. _[Jan. 18,

nostrils pointed above, sigmoid or linear. The ears are very generally
emarginate behind; and the tail, when present, is cylindrical, hairy,
sealy, or subnaked.

In the division of the hystricine Rodents into families much diver-
sity of opinion has prevailed. Mr. Waterhouse, laying too great
stress on dental characters, entirely separated the Dasyproctina from
the Caviina, and placed them between the Hystricina proper and the
Echimyina*. Prof. Brandt reunited the two former in his family
Hemionychoides, equivalent to the Subungulata of Iligert. But the
group thus formed is so ill defined that Prof. Lilljeborg found it im-
possible to separate it from the Hystricidet. It seems to me that,
although Mr. Waterhouse was certainly misled in entirely separating
the Agoutis and Pacas from the Cavies and Capybara, they must still
be ranked as distinct but allied families, and that the same value
must be given to the curious form named Dinomys by Dr. Peters§.
Accordingly I would recognize six families of the Hystricomorpha.

Of these the first, the Octodontide@, consists of three subfamilies ;
for here, I think, must be placed the Ctenodactyline, formerly asso-
ciated with the Jerboas, but of which the hystricine affinities have
been established by Dr. Peters||. The other subfamilies are the Octo-
dontine and Echinomyine of Mr. Waterhouse. Some of the genera
of the latter make a close approach to the next family, the Hystri-
cide, which in its turn is composed of two very distinct subfamilies,
Sphingurine and [Hystricine ; for I cannot follow Professor Lillje-
borg in relegating the former to the Octodontide4, principally on
account of their better-developed clavicles, which are probably an
adaptive peculiarity connected with their arboreal habits. Of the
remaining families the Chinchillide form a small but very natural
group, connected in some characters with the Dinomyide ; and the
latter, again, has close affinities with the nearly allied Dasyproctide
and Caviide. ‘These latter families in many points, as in the mode
in which their incisors wear down, their emarginated palates, and
the large size of their basicranial foramina, show a striking ap-
proach to the next great group of Rodents.

The second suborder, GLIRES DUPLICIDENTATI, containing only
two families, is clearly less specialized than the first, and appears to be
a survivor, representing a comparatively early stage in the develop-
ment of the Rodent type. At birth, the upper jaw contains the
normal number of incisors; but only the two inner pairs are retained ;
and of these the second remain very small, and are placed directly be-
hind the large middle pair. In the mandible there is never more than
one pair. Another important proof of the inferior degree of speciali-
zation in the Glires duplicidentati is the fact that the enamel of the
incisors may be traced round to their posterior surface, though it is
here much thinner than in front**, Of cranial characters, it maybe

* Nat. Hist. Mamm. ii. p, 360. + Prod. Syst. Mamm, p. 92.
t Op. cit. p. 54.

§ Festschrift. Gesellsch, nat, Freunde, pp. 227-234 (1873).

|| Tr. Z.S. vii. pp. 897-409. | Op. cit. p. 51.

** Cf Owen, Comp. Anat. Vert. iii. p. 296.

1876. ] MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 73

noted that they have no true alisphenoid canal, but a carotid canal
is present in the tympanic*. The optic foramina are confluent ; and
the bony palate is reduced to a mere bridge between the molar series,
being bounded in front by the large confluent incisive foramina, and
behind by the deep posterior emargination. The fibula is ankylosed
below with the tibia, and articulates with the caleaneum. There are
no vesicular glands; and the testes are permanently external.

The two families Leporide and Lagomyide are certainly very
nearly allied, but differ in several important characters; and I have
therefore followed Professor Lilljeborg in keeping them distinct.
The absence of postorbital frontal processes, the posterior continua-
tion of the zygoma towards the auditory meatus, the absence of
reticulation in the facial portion of the maxillary, and the full
development of the clavicles in the Pikas are among the points in
which their anatomy confirms their distinction from the Hares, out-
wardly indicated by the different proportion of their ears and tails.

The remark has been madeabove that paleontology has hitherto not
yielded much of interest to the student of thisorder. A striking ex-
ception, however, is to be found in certain wonderful forms from the
South-American Miocene and Pliocene, of which the true position has
been much disputed. Of these the most striking is the huge animal
whose skull, discovered by Mr. Darwin, was described by Professor
Owen under the name of Toxodont, and since more fully investigated
by Dr. Burmeistert. Its Ungulate characters, however, much over-
weigh in importance those which it has in common with the Rodents;
and it may therefore be dismissed from present consideration.

Another animal presenting an extraordinary combination of cha-
racters is that discovered by M. Bravard, and placed by him, under
the name of Typotherium, among the Pachydermata$. Almost every
part of its skeleton has been obtained ; and the whole has been weil °
described by M. Serres|| under the name of Mesotherium, and by
Professor Gervais§] under Bravard’s name**. The last-named zoolo-
gist considers that it must be regarded as a link between the Rodents’
and the Perissodactyles, and that its nearest affinities are with the
Leporide,

The most important characters in which Mesotherium differs
from existing Rodents are, briefly, the transversely hollowed crowns
of the incisors (which have not the chisel-edge so characteristic of

* Cf. Turner, P. Z..8. 1848, p. 65,

+ Zoology of the ‘ Beagle,’ pt. 1, pp. 16-35.

{ Ann. Mus, Pub. de Buenos Aires, i. pp. 254-286.

§ Catalogue des espéces d’anim. foss. recueillis dans l’Amér. du Sud, 4to.
Parana, 1860. ‘

|| Comp. Rend. Ac. Paris, xliv. p. 961 (1857); lxv, pp. 6, 17, 140-148,
273-279, 429-437, 593-599, 740-748, 841-848. .

{{ Zool. et Paléont. Générales, pp. 134-137, pls. xxii.-xxv.

** M. Gervais regards Bravard’s name as having priority ; on what grounds I
cannot discover. It does not appear whether or not it was used in the latter
writer's paper on the Geology of La Plata, published in the ‘ Registro Esta-
distico’ of Buenos Ayres in 1857 (which M. Gervais was unable to find in Paris,
and which is not in the British Museum); but even if it was it would only be
contemporary with M. Serres’s very appropriate name.

74 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. [Jan. 18,

the order), their number in the lower jaw (as in Hyraz), the curva-
ture of the molars, of which the convexity is not inwards but out-
wards (as in Torodon), the transverse form of the condyle of the
mandible and the glenoid fossa, and the articulation of the ischia
with some of the caudal vertebree (as in some Edentates). With
regard to the first of these characters, we have seen that the enamel
is present, though very thin, on the back as well as the front of the .
incisors of the Glires duplicidentati ; and a side view of these teeth
in the Hares and in some of the lower Hystricomorpha shows a sort
of gradation between the acute edge of the more highly specialized
forms and the hollowed crown of Mesotherium. Of the condyle and
glenoid cavity also it is to be noted that, although they are not
transverse in any existing Rodent, yet their shape is much less clearly
defined in the less-specialized forms. In other respects the whole
skeleton of Mesotherium presents so many resemblances to the Ro-
dents that it seems to me that we must follow Professor Gervais in
placing it in that order rather than in any other. Its affinities with
the more aberrant Ungulates, and especially with Towvodon, cannot,
however, be overlooked ; and it appears to have been a survivor, to
Pliocene times, of a much earlier type, which represented an era at
which the Rodents were not yet clearly marked off from their allies*.
In fact Mesotherium seems to continue into the order Glires that
line of affinity which Prof. Flower has pointed out as extending from
the typical Ungulates through Hyracodon, Homalodontotherium,
Nesodon, and Toxodon*+.

As to the affinities of Mesotherium within the Order Glires, they
do not appear so exclusively leporine to me as to M. Gervais. While
agreeing with the Hares in many important points, as in the form of
the mandible (which, however, is still more like that of Hyraz),
in that of the brain, as indicated by a cast of the cranial cavity, and
in the articulation of the fibula with the calcaneum, Mesotherium
rather inclines in other particulars to the Glires simplicidentatt, and

‘especially to Hydrocherus. Among these may be enumerated the
comparative shortness of the incisors, the smallness of the incisive
foramina, the development of the bony palate and of the paroccipital
processes, the depth of the malar, the form of the scapula, &c.
Some at least of the toes seem to have been subungulate; and the
terminal phalanx figured by Gervais (pl. xxv. fig. 34) very closely
resembles the same bone in the Capybara.

As Mesotherium thus appears to present relationships to each of
the existing suborders, combined with peculiarities which forbid its
admission into either, I venture to propose the establishment of a
third for its reception. It might be named GLIRES HEBETIDEN-
TaTr{, and characterized by the incisors being two above and four
below, the molars curved inwards and the condyles placed transversely.

Before ending this paper, with a Table of the characters of the
various divisions here adopted, attention may be drawn to the accom-

* We have seen that in Europe the Rodents were fully differentiated in the
Eocene period (anted, p. 70).

+ Phil. Trans. 1874, p. 181. { Hebes -tis, blunt ; dentatus, toothed,

1876. | MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 75

panying chart (Plate IV.), on which I have endeavoured to indi-
cate approximately the relationship of the different families to one
another.

Arrangement.
Order GLIRES.
Suborder I. Gurres stmpxici- Sec. 3. Hystricomorpha.

DENTATI. Fam. 1. Octodontide.
See. 1. Scturomorpha. », 2. Hystricidze.
Fam. 1. Anomaluride. », 3 Chinchillide.
» 2. Sciuride. », 4. Dasyproctide.
» 93. Ischyromyide. » 5. Dinomyide.
» 4. Haplodontide. » 6. Caviidee.
» ©. Castoride.
Sec. 2. Myomorpha. Suborder II. Guires pup ict-
Fam. 1. Myoxidee. ‘ DENTATI.
», 2. Lophiomyide. Fam. 1. Lagomyidz.
» oo Muride. », 2. Leporide.
»» 4. Spalacidee.
“ 5. Geomyide. Snborder III. Guires HEBETI-
,, 6. Theridomyide. DENTATI.
» 7. Dipodide. Fam. 1. Mesotheriide.

Table of Characters.

Order GLIRES.

The middle pair of incisors long, curved, rootless, and constantly
growing, their points more or less chisel-edged (except in Mesothe-
rium), the other pairs very small or absent; no canines, a large
space intervening between the incisors and the grinding-teeth, which
are variously formed ; premolars present or absent; three molars
above and below (except in Hydromys). Skull with the temporal
fossze continuous with the orbits, within which the lachrymal fora-
men opens ; an interparietal almost always distinct ; the periotic and
tympanic ankylosed to one another, but not to any other bone ; and
the auditory bulle moderately or largely developed. Scapula nar-
row with a deep notch, a well-developed more or less bifurcated
acromion, and a small coracoid. Clavicles perfect or imperfect.
Scaphoid and lunar usually combined. Manus with five or four digits.
Tibia and fibula either separate or ankylosed below. Pes with five,
four, or three digits. Intestinal canal long; cecum large (except in
Myoxide). Liver with a bifid Spigelian lobe (except in Anomalurus).
Placenta deciduate and discoidal.

SuborderI. GLiIRES SIMPLICIDENTATI.

Incisors 2 only, even at birth, their enamel confined to the front
surface. Skull with both a true alisphenoid and an external ali- -
sphenoid canal* ; optic foramina rarely confluent ; incisive foramina
separate ; and bony palate well developed. Fibula either ankylosed

* Cf. H.N. Turner, P. Z. 8. 1848, p. 65.

76 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. _[Jan. 18,

with the tibia below or free, not articulating with the caleaneum.
Testes abdominal, descending periodically ; vesicular glands present*.

Section I. Sciuromorpha.

Premolars present ; when there is more than one in the upper
jaw the first is smaller than the others; grinding-teeth rooted or
rootless. Postorbital frontal processes present or absent, infraorbital
opening various. Zygomatic arch mainly composed of the malar,
which is not supported below by a continuation of the maxillary
zygomatic process. Outer walls of pterygoid fossz obsolete ; no inter-
pterygoid fissure. Incisive foramina small or moderate, not extending
into the maxillaries. Mandible with the angular portion springing
from the lower edge of the bony covering of the lower incisor, its
outline more or less rounded, not pointed ; coronoid process high and
faleate. Clavicles perfect. Fibula persistent as a distinct bone
through life, and usually perfectly free. Upper lip usually cleft,
muffle small and naked; nostrils comma-shaped, rounded above.
Tail cylindrical and hairy (except in Castoride). Five families :—

Family I. ANoMALURID&.

One premolar above and below; grinding-teeth subequal, not
tuberculate, with flat crowns and transverse enamel loops. Skull
with postorbital processes obsolete ; infraorbital opening large, sub-
ovate; palate contracted in front, deeply emarginate behind. Six-
teen pairs of ribs. Limbs connected by a flying expansion of the skin,
supported by a chondrified fascia articulating with the olecranon.
Tail long, hairy, with a series of large scales on the lower basal
portion. Distribution Ethiopian. Recent genus :—

Anomalurus, Waterhouse, P. Z. S. 1842, p. 124 . . . (1842).
(Characters those of the family.)

Family II. Scrurip#.

Two premolars above, and one below; the first upper premolar very
small, sometimes deciduous; grinding-teeth rooted, tubercular (at
least in youth). Skull with distinct postorbital processes ; infra-
orbital opening small, usually placed in front of the maxillary
zygomatic process; palate broad, flat. Twelve or thirteen pairs of
ribs. Tail cylindrical, hairy. ‘Two subfamilies :—

A. Scrurin#. JIncisors compressed. Limbs either free or united
(Pteromys) by an expansion, whose fascia articulates with the carpus.
Form slender, tail long. Cosmopolitan (exc. Australasian region).
Recent genera :—

1. Pteromys, G. Cuvier, Legons d’Anatomie..... (1800).

Limbs united by a flying expansion, the supporting fascia of which
articulates with the carpus; tail long, bushy. Grinders usually
soon ground flat, in some tubereulate through life.

* Of. Owen, Comp. Anat. Vert, iii. p. 649.

1876.] MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. Wik

2. Scturus, Linnzeus, Syst. Nat.i.p.86 ....-... (1766).

Limbs free, form agile, tail long, bushy. No cheek-pouches ;
three or four pairs of teats. First upper premolar sometimes soon
lost. Frontals ankylosed with parietals ; postorbital processes
moderate ; infraorbital opening in front of anterior root of zygoma.
Palate broad, flat.

3. Xerus, Hemprich & Ehrenberg, Symbol. Phys., Mamm. i., gg

waftir tomy (1832).

Ears very short or rudimentary, tail short, fur sparse, harsh,

with flattened spines. No cheek-pouches, two pairs of teats. Nasals

and palate narrower, and postorbital processes much smaller than in
Sciurus.

4. Tamias, Iliger, Prod. Syst. Mamm. p. 83 ..... (1811).

Ears short, fore feet with the fourth digit longest, limbs subequal,
tail short. Large internal cheek-pouches. First upper premolar
soon lost. Skull slender; infraorbital opening in anterior root of
zygoma, not in front of it.

B. Arcromyin. Incisors not compressed. Limbs free, form
usually stout, tail short. Palearctic and Nearctic. Recent genera :—

5. Spermophilus, F. Cuvier, Mém. du Mus. vi. p. 293 . (1822).

Form somewhat slender; tail short or moderate. Claw of pollex
rudimentary or absent. Large cheek-pouches. Series of grinding-
teeth nearly parallel. Skull with no marked ridges; postorbital
processes slender, directed backwards.

6. Cynomys, Rafinesque, Amer. Monthly Mag. ii. p. 45 (1817).

Form thickset, tail short, claws of fore feet long on all the digits,
shallow cheek-pouches. Series of grinding-teeth strongly convergent
behind. Skull short and broad ; postorbital processes long, directed
backwards ; parietals narrow, parallelogrammatic.

7. Arctomys. Schreber, Saugethiere, iv. p.721..... (1792).

Form thickset, tail short; pollex rudimentary, with a flat nail.
Cheek-pouches rudimentary or absent. Series of grinding-teeth
nearly parallel. Skull broad ; postorbital processes large, trian-
gular, standing out at right angles ; parietals narrow, parallelogram-
matic.

Fossil genera. The following genera, characterized from details
of dentition, seem to be referable to this family :—Plesarctomys,
Bravard, in Gervais’s ‘ Zool. et Pal. Franc.’ pl. xlvi. (1852), Eocene
of France; Pseudosciurus, Hensel, Z. Deutsch. geol. Ges. 1856,
p- 660, bone-beds of Wiirttemberg ; Sciwravus, Marsh, Am. Journ.
Se. 1871, p. 120, Eocene of North America; Paramys, Leidy, Geol.
Survey, Montana, 1871, p. 363 (perhaps the same as the last); Gym-

notrichus, Cope, Pal. Bulletin, i. p. 6 (1874), Miocene of North
America,

78 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. [Jan. 18,

Family III. Iscoyromyi1p (fam. nov.)*.

Dentition as in Scituride. Skull resembling Castoride, but with
the infraorbital opening large, a sagittal crest, no postorbital
processes, palate broad, basioccipital keeled. Miocene of North
America. Fossil genus :-—

Ischyromys, Leidy, Proc. Acad. Philad. 1856, p. 89 . . (1856).
(Characters those of the family.)

Family IV. HapLoponrip#.

Two premolars above and one below, the first upper premolar
small; grinding-teeth rootless, simple, and prismatic. Skul! much
depressed, no postorbital processes, infraorbital opening small,
angular portion of mandible much twisted. ‘Tail short, cylindrical,
hairy. Nearctic. Recent genus:—

Haplodon= Aplodontia, Richardson, Zool. Journ. iv, p. 334
(1829).
(Characters those of the family.)

Family V. Casrorip2.

One premolar above and below; grinding-teeth subequal, semi-
rooted or rootless, with reentering enamel-folds. Skull massive, no
postorbital processes, infraorbital opening small and placed low, a
sagittal crest, angle of mandible rounded. Carpus with a large acces-
sory ossicle. Stomach with a glandular appendage, excretory and
generative organs opening into u common cloaca. Tail broad, flat-
tened, spatulate and reticulated. Hind feet fully webbed, Palearctic
and Nearctic. Recent genus :—

1. Castor, Linneeus, Syst. Nat.i.p.78........--: (1766).

(External characters those of the family.) Upper grinding-teeth
subequal, each with one internal and three external enamel-folds ;
the lower similar but reversed; the subsidiary folds not soon
isolated from the exterior.” Parietals narrow, parallelogrammatic ;
interparietal triangular; basioccipital concave.

Fossil genera :—

2. Diobroticus, Pomel, Arch. Bibl. Univ. Geneve, ix. p. 167+.
(1848).
Skull much as in Castor. Third upper molar and lower premolar
elongate, with four enamel folds, the rest with only two ; all the folds
soon isolated.

3. Stenofber, tee Geoffroy, Revue Encyclopédique. . . . (1833).

Parietals not parallelogrammatic ; interparietal subhexagonal ; basi-
occipital not concave. Grinding-teeth as in Cas/or, the subsidiary
folds sooner isolated.

* Tt seems probable that Pseudotomys, Cope, Proc. Am. Phil. Soc. 1872,
p. 467, from Eocene of North America, may prove to belong to this family.

+ =Trogontherium Owen (nec Fischer), Brit. Foss. Mamm. p, 184; Geol.
Mag. vi. pp. 49-56 (cf. Gervais, Zool, et Paléont. Générales, pp. 80-84).

1876. | MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 79

4. Castoroides, J. W. Foyster, 2nd Rep. Geol. Ohio, p. 81 (1838).

Parietals not parallelogrammatic ; interparietal very small ; basi-
occipital concave. Incisors with numerous longitudinal grooves ;
grinding-teeth with the enamel-folds extending quite across their
crowns, completely separated and united only by cement; the last
upper molar and lower premolar with four folds, the rest with three
only. ‘

More doubtful fossil genera are :—Trogontherium, Fischer, Mém.
Soc. Imp. Nat. Mose. ii. p. 260 (1809) ; Paleomys, Kaup, Isis, 1832,
p. 992; Chalicomys, Kaup, op. cit. p.994; Chelodus, Kaup, op. cit.
p. 995; Paleocaster, Leidy, Journ. Ac. Philad. vii. p. 338 (1869).

Section II. Myomorpha.

Premolars present or absent ; grinding-teeth rooted or rootless.
No postorbital frontal processes ; infraorbital opening various. Zygo-
matic arch slender; the malar rarely extending far forward, and being
usually supported below by a continuation of the maxillary zygomatic
process. Incisive foramina usually long, and extending into the
maxillaries. Outer walls of pterygoid fosse often obsolete, no inter-
pterygoid fissure (except in Bathyergine). Angular portion of
mandible springing from the lower edge of the bony covering of the
lower incisor (except in Bathyergine). Clavicles perfect (except in
Lophiomy:de). Tibia and fibula completely ankylosed in the adult
for at least their lower third. Upper lip usually cleft ; muftle small
and naked; nostrils comma-shaped, rounded above. Tail cylindrical,
either hairy ‘or covered with scales arranged in rings. Seven
families :—

Family I. Myoxipz.

One premolar above and below, which is rather smaller than the
molars ; all the grinding-teeth rooted, with transverse enamel-folds.
Skull with frontals much contracted, clasped by the parietals ; inter -
parietal broad, articulating with the squamosals. Infraorbital opening
moderate, high, narrow. Mandible with the angle rounded or sub-
quadrate, coronoid long and slender. No cecum. Form gracile ;
eyes and ears large; fore limbs small; tail long, hairy. Palzearctic
and Ethiopian. Recent genera :—

1. Myouus, Schreber, Siiugeth.iv. p.824........ (1792),

Tail bushy and distichous throughout. Stomach simple. An-
gular portion of mandible not perforate. Premolars small; molars
large, with well-marked enamel-folds.

2. Muscardinus, Kaup, Entw. europ. Thierw. p. 139 . . (1829).

Tail bushy and cylindrical throughout. Stomach complicated.
Mandible not perforate. Grinding-teeth large ; their crown flat, with
well-marked and numerous folds.

3. Bliomys, Wagner, Abhand, baierisch. Akad. iii. p. 179 (1843).

Tail with short hairs at base, tufted and distichous towards its

80 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. |Jan. 18,

end. Stomach simple. Angular portion of the mandible perforate.
Grinding-teeth smaller; their erowns concave, with few and faintly
marked folds.

4. Graphiurus, F. Cuvier & Geoffroy, Mammiféres, 60™¢ livr.
(1845).
Tail short, cylindrical, ending ina pencil. Mandible not perforate.
Grinding-teeth very small; their crowns flat, with hardly a trace of
enamel-folds.
Family I]. Lopusomyip.

No premolars ; molars rooted and tuberculate. Skull as in the
typical Muride, but with the temporal fossee completely arched over
by thin plates developed from the temporal ridge and the malar,
articulated with one another ; surface of skull granulated. Clavicles
imperfect. Czecum small. Form thickset. Hair long, forming a
crest along the back and tail. Ethiopian. Recent genus :—

Lophiomys, A. Milne-Edwards, L’ Institut, xxxv. p. 46 . (1867).
(Characters those of the family.)

Family III. Murip#.

Lower incisors compressed ; no premolars (except in Sminthine) ;
molars rooted or rootless, tuberculate or with angular enamel-folds.
Frontals contracted. Infraorbital opening in typical forms high,
perpendicular, wide above and narrowed below, with the lower root
of the maxillary zygomatic process more or less flattened into a per-
pendicular plate; very rarely the opening is either large and oval or
small and subtriangular. Malar short and slender, generally reduced
to a splint between the maxillary and squamosal processes. Ex-
ternal characters very variable. Pollex rudimentary, but often with
a small nail. Tail generally subnaked and scaly, rarely densely haired.
Cosmopolitan. Ten subfamilies * :—

(a Molars rooted.)

A. Smintuin#&. Premolars 4, molars 3. Infraorbital opening
subtriangular, widest below. Incisive foramina long. Palearctic.
Recent genus :—

1. Sminthus, Keyserling & Blasius, Wirbelth. Europ. p. 38

(1840).
(Characters those of the subfamily.)

B. Hypromyinz. Molars 3, divided into transverse lobes. In-
fraorbital opening crescentic, scarcely narrowed below. Incisive
foramina and auditory bulle very small. Hind feet partly webbed.
Australasian. Recent genus :—

2. Hydromys, Geoffroy, Ann. du Mus. vi. p. 81 . . .°. (1805).

(Characters those of the subfamily.)

* Supra, p. 69.

1876.] MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 81

C. PoaracantHomyine., Molars 3, divided into transverse
‘amine. Infraorbital opening typical ; incisive foramina and audi-
tory bullz small, Form myoxine; fur mixed with flattened spines ;
tail densely haired. Indian. Recent genus :—

3. Platacanthomys, Blyth, Proc. As. Soc. Bengal, xxviii. p. 289
1859).
(Characters those of the subfamily.)

TD. Gersiiiin#%. Incisors narrow ; molars divided into transverse
lamin. Infraorbital opening typical ; pterygoid fossee short ; audi-
tory bullee usually large. Hind limbs elongated; tail long, hairy.
Palearctic, Indian, and Ethiopian. Recent genera :—

4. Gerbillus, Desmarest, Nouy. Dict. d’Hist. Nat. xxiv. p. 22
(1804).
Form murine; muzzle pointed; ears moderate, sparsely haired; tail
long, hairy, slightly tufted. Skull with occipital region broad; audi-
tory bulle large. Incisors grooved or plain. First molar with three
laminze, the second with two, the third with one only.

5. Mystromys, Wagner, Wiegm. Arch. 1841, p. 132. . (1841).

Fars large and broad; tail moderately long, truncated, not tufted.
Auditory bulle smaller. Incisors plain. First molar with three
lamin, the second and third with two each; these are alternated,
and the last is very small.

6. Otomys, F. Cuvier, Dents des Mamm. p. 168 ... . (1825).
Ears large, hairy ; tail moderate, clad with scales and short hairs,
not tufted. Nasal profile more arched than in Gerbillus. Incisors
grooved. Molars with their laminze completely separated and united
by cement ; the third the longest, with from three to seven laminz.

7. Dasymys, Peters, Monatsb. Akad. Berlin, 1875, p.12 (1875).

Ears moderate, hairy ; fur somewhat coarse ; tail moderate, scaly,
and sparsely haired. Skull intermediate between Gerbillus and Mus.
Lower branch of maxillary zygomatic process produced forward in a
hook-shape. Incisors plain. Front molars the longest ; the posterior
lamina of the first and the anterior laminze of the second and third
upper molars large and complicated.

EK. Pataomyina. Incisors broad; molars divided into transverse
lamine. Infraorbital opening typical. Claws large. Indian. Re-
cent genera :—

8. Phleomys, Waterhouse, P. Z. S.-1839, p. 108. . . . (1839).

Muzzle blunt; lip imperfectly cleft; ears moderate, hairy exter-
nally ; tail moderately long, densely haired. Skull ovate; frontals
not contracted, with a rudimentary postorbital process at their junc-
tion with the squamosals ; anditory bulla very small. Incisors very
broad. First upper molar with three laminz ; second and third with
two ; first lower with four, second with three, and third with two
lamine.

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. VI. 6

82 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. [Jan. 18,

9. Nesokia, Gray, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. x. p. 264 . (1842).

Muzzle blunt; ears moderate; claws long; fur rather harsh ; tail
short, scaly, sparsely haired. Palate narrow ; incisive foramina short ;
auditory bullee rather small. Incisors broad. First molars with three
lamine ; the rest with two only.

F. Denpromy1n#. Incisors convex in front ; molars tuberculate.
Infraorbital opening not narrowed below ; coronoid process very small.
Ears hairy. Claws long. Ethiopian. Recent genera :—

10. Dendromys, A. Smith, S. African Q. Journ. ii. p. 158 (1834).

Form slender; taillong, scaly, and sparsely haired. Three middle
digits of each foot much longer than the first and fifth. Incisors
grooved. Molars parallel in series ; the first as long as the second
and third taken together ; their tubercles arranged in pairs.

11. Steatomys, Peters, Reise n. Mossambique, i. p. 162 . (1852).

Form plump ; tail rather short, finely scaled and densely haired ;
claws of fore feet the longest. Incisors grooved. Molars converging
behind ; the first longer than the second and third taken together ;
their tubercles arranged in twos and threes.

12. Lophuromys, Peters, Monatsb. Ak. Berlin, 1874, p. 234
(1874).
Form as in Steatomys, but fur developed into fine flattened bristles,
pterygoid fossze longer, and coronoid process better-developed. In-
cisors plain. Molars nearly parallel in series; the third upper with
only two anterior tubercles,

G. Cricetrn™. Molars tuberculate. Infraorbital opening sub-
typical, not much narrowed below, and the perpendicular plate little
developed. Large internal cheek-pouches. Palzearctic and Ethiopian.
Recent genera :—

13. Cricetus, G. Cuvier, Régne Animal (17¢ éd.), i. p. 198 (1817).

Form thickset; limbs short; claws large; tail short, not scaly,
sparsely haired. Cheek-pouches large. Skull with marked but
rounded supraorbital ridges continued into temporal ridges ; coronoid
process high and faleate. Incisors plain. Molars with tubercles
arranged in pairs, of which the first has three and the rest two only ;
these entirely disappear in aged specimens.

14. Saecostomus, Peters, Monatsb. Ak. Berl. 1846, p. 258 (1846).

Form as in Cricetus, but feet and claws weaker and more murine.
Cheek-pouches moderate. Supraorbital ridges more parallel, and
infraorbital opening more typically murine ; incisive foramina longer.
Incisors plain. Molars with tubercles arranged in threes, one of each
row being smaller than the other two.

15.. Cricetomys, Waterhouse, P. Z.S. 1840, p. 2... . (1840).
Form more murine; muzzle pointed ; tail long, scaly, and very

1876.] MR. E. R, ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 83

sparsely haired. Cheek-pouches large. Skull most lke that of
Saccostomus, but incisive foramina much smaller. Upper incisors
grooved. Mbolars as in Saccostomus.

H. Murina. Molars tuberculate, at least in youth. Infraorbital
opening typical; pteryguid fossee lengthened ; auditory bullee mode-
rate. Cheek-pouches absent or very small. Tail scaly, more or
less naked. Cosmopolitan. Recent genera :—

16. Mus, Linneus, Syst. Nat.i.p.79 ..... as ea Cha).

Muzzle pointed ; eyes prominent ; ears rather large, subnaked ; fur
soft (rarely mixed with spines); pollex rudimentary; claws short; tail
moderate or long, scaly, with scattered hairs. No cheek-pouches.
Skull elongate, narrow ; temporal ridges nearly parallel ; palate com-
pressed ; incisive foramina long ; auditory bulla moderately large ;
coronoid process high, faleate. Incisors rarely grooved. Molars
with transverse ridges, each composed in youth of three tubercles.

17. Pelomys, Peters, Reise n. Mossambique, i. p. 157 . (1852).

Middle three digits of each foot longer than the first and third ;
fur bristly ; tail short, scaly. Palate much compressed. Incisors
grooved. Molars broader than in Mus.

18. Echinothriz (=Echiothrix), Gray, P.Z.8.1867, p.599(1867).
Head elongate, muzzle produced ; fur mixed with flattened spines ;
tail long, scaly. Facial portion of skull greatly elongated ; nasals
very narrow ; palate much compressed ; incisive foramina long ; coro-
noid process small. Incisors grooved. First upper molars large, with
three ridges, second with one only; third small, simple, subcircular.

19. Uromys, Peters, Monatsb. Ak. Berlin, 1867, p. 343 (1867).

External characters as in Mus; but the caudal scales thick, poly-
gonal, and not overlapping, auditory bulle and incisive foramina
smaller, and pterygoid processes more like those of Hapalotis.

20. Hapalotis, Lichtenstein, Darst. neu. Saugeth. Th. iv. pl. 29

(1829).

Muzzle produced ; ears long, tapered, sparsely haired outside ; hind

limbs elongated; fur soft; tail long, hairy, terminating im a pencil.

Skull with no distinct occipital crest or supraorbital ridges ; incisive

foramina very large; coronoid process obsolete. Incisors plain.
Molars as in Mus.

al. Acomys, Is. Geoffroy, Ann. Sc. Nat. 2™¢ sér. x. p. 126 (1840).

Fur mixed with flattened spines, especially on the head and back ;
tail short, scaly. Skull asin Mus, but the pterygoid fossee more
shallow, and the incisive foramina extremely small; coronoid process
little developed. Teeth as in Mus.

22. Nesomys, Peters, Sitzungs-Ber. Gesell. nat. Freunde, 1870, p. 54>
(1871).

Form murine; upper lip grooved, not cleft ; ears and eyes large ;
6*

84 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. [Jan. 18,

feet as in Mus; tail long, scaly. Skull as in Mus; the infraorbital
foramen lower and wider. Incisors plain. Molars like those of Hes-
peromys; the first upper, when worn, with one internal and two
external indenting folds; the first lower with one external and two
internal, the rest with one external and one internal fold.

23. Brachytarsomys, Ginther, P. Z. 8. 1875, p. 79 . . (1875).

Upper lip grooved, not cleft; eyes small; ears short; hind feet
much shorter than the lower leg; tail long, scaly. No supraorbital
ridges ; auditory bullee moderate. Incisors plain. Molars with two or
three indenting folds on each side, one of which in the upper molars
passes quite across the crown.

24. Drymomys, Tschudi, Fauna Peruana, p. 178 . . (1844-6).

Form murine; muzzle pointed; upper lip cleft; ears large; tail long,
scaly. Incisors furrowed on the sides. Molars small; the first with
three pairs of tubercles, the second with two, the third with one pair
only.

25. Holochilus, Brandt, Mém. Ac. St. Pétersb. (6™¢ sér.) ili. p. 428
(1835).

Muzzle obtuse; upper lip not fully cleft; fore feet small; hind limbs
large and strong; tail long, sparsely haired. Skull short, strong;
supraorbital ridges well marked. Incisors broad, flat, plain. Molars
large, the third as large as the second, with tubercles arranged in

pairs, which soon wear away, leaving the crown flat with indenting
folds.

26. Hesperomys, Waterhouse, Zool. Voy. Beagle, i. p. 75 (1839).

Upper lip cleft; ears large or moderate ; tail sparsely haired. Small
interual cheek-pouches in a few species. Skull murine, with or with-
out marked supraorbital ridges. Incisors plain. Mbolars as in the
last genus, but narrower; the third smaller than the second, and the
first upper with three roots.

27. Ochetodon, Coues, Proc. Acad. Philad. 1874, p. 184 (1874).

As in the last genus; tail moderate. Upper incisors grooved.
First upper molar with four roots.

28. Reithrodon, Waterhouse, P. Z.S. 1837, p. 29 . . . (1837).

Profile arched; eyes large; ears hairy; hind feet with first and fifth
digits very short; tail moderate, hairy. Skull with nasal portion
large, supraorbital ridges well marked, posterior nares narrowed by
the approximation of the pterygoids. Upper incisors grooved.
Molars as in Hesperomys, their indenting folds deep.

29. Sigmodon, Say & Ord, Journ. Acad. Philad. iv. p.352 (1825).
Muzzle blunt; upper lip partially cleft; ears large, but nearly
concealed in the long fur; hind feet with first and fifth digits very
short; tail moderate, nearly naked. Skull with supraorbital ridges
sharp, perpendicular plate of zygoma emarginate in front, incisive

1876. ] MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 85

foramina large. Incisors plain. Molars never tuberculate, the in-
denting folds deep and closed, those of the second and third lower
molars sigmoid.

30. Neotoma, Say & Ord, Journ. Acad. Philad. iv. p. 346 (1825).

Ears large, nearly naked; tail long, either sparsely haired or
bushy. Upper incisors broad, plain. Molars never tuberculate, with
open angular indenting folds, giving them a very arvicoline appear-
ance.

(8. Molars semirooted or rootless.)

I. ARvicotin%. Molars composed of triangular prisms placed
alternately. Skull with brain-case rhomboidal, frontals much con-
tracted, infraorbital opening typical. Limbs moderate; tail mode-
rate or short, hairy. Paleearctic and Nearctic. Recent genera :—

31. Fiber, G. Cuvier, Legons d’Anatomie........ (1800).

Form thickset; muzzle blunt; limbs short, subequal; hind feet
fringed with long stiff hairs ; tail moderate, compressed, clad with
scales and short hairs; supraorbital ridges united in a sagittal
crest. Palate and lower surface of maxillaries minutely perforated.
Incisors plain. Molars semirooted, separated into prisms, which are
placed alternately.

32. Arcola, Lacépéde, Tableau . .%......... (1803).

Muzzle blunt ; fore feet small, with short claws, soles naked ; tail
longer than the hind foot, clad with short hairs. Skull as in Fiber;
but the supraorbital ridges diverge after meeting, and converge again
on the interparietal ; palate not perforated. Incisors plain. Molars
as in Fiber, rootless (rarely semirooted).

33. Myodes, Pallas, Zoogr. Rosso-Asiat. i. p. 173. . . (1811).

Muzzle blunt ; fore feet moderate, with strong hooked claws; soles
hairy ; tail not longer than hind foot, hairy. Skull as in Arvicola,
but the brain-case broader and the zygomatic arches stronger.
Molars rootless, as in Arvicola, but the prisms of the posterior teeth
usually compressed and twisted.

K. Srpunern#. Molars as in the Arvicoline ; infraorbital open-
ing small and subtriangular. Form cylindrical ; ear-conch rudimen-
tary; limbs and tail very short. Palearctic. Recent genera :—

34. Hilobius, Fischer, Zoognosia, iii. p.72....... (1814).

Body subcylindrical ; limbs very short, upper lip cleft ; eyes small ;
no external ear-conch ; fore feet with short claws, but stronger than
the hind feet ; tail very short. Skull as in Arvicola, but the profile
more arched and the facial portion shorter. Upper incisors arched
forward.

35. Siphneus, Brants, Het Geslact der Muizen, p. 20. . (1827).
Eyes small; ears rudimentary ; fore feet with long, strong claws,

86 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES, [Jan. 18,

that of the fifth digit being longer than the toe itself; tail short,
hairy. Skull broader and more trune ated behind than in Lilobius ;
supraorbital ridges nearly parallel ; occipital crest sharp; infraorbital
foramen subtriangular. Upper incisors perpendicular.

Fossil genera. The following genera will probably prove to be
referable to this family : —Cricetodon, Lartet, Notice, p. 20 (1851) ;
Eumys, Leidy, Proc. Ac. Philad. 1856, p.90; Heliscomys, Cope, New
Vert. Colorado, p. 3 (1873), Miocene of North America; Mysops,
Leidy, U.S. Geol. Sury. Terr. i. p. 111 (1873), Eocene of America.

Family IV. Spavacips.

Incisors large; premolars present or absent; grinding-teeth
rooted, not tubereulate, with reentering enamel-folds. Infraorbital
opening moderate or small, with no perpendicular plate ; occipital
plane high, often sloped boldly forward ; palate narrow. Form cylin-
drical ; eye and ear-conch very small, sometimes rudimentary ; limbs
short and stout; claws large; tail short or absent. Two sub-
families :—-

A. Spauactna. Palate between the molars broader than one of
the alveoli. No interpterygoid fissure. Mandible of normal myo-
morphine form (the angular portion springing from the edge of the
bony covering of the lower incisors). Palzearctic, Indian and Ethi-
opian. Recent genera :—

1. Spalar, Giildenstidt, Nov. Comment. Petrop. xiv. i. p. 409
(1770).
Head broad, flat, with a ridge of long stiff hairs on each side;
eyes rudimentary, covered by the skin; no ear-conch or external
tail; feet broad, claws short. Skull depressed, occipital plane high
and sloped boldly forward ; parietals and interparietal small and soon
ankylosed ; infraorbital opening moderate, suboval. Upper incisors
plain, nearly perpendicular. No premolars. Molars with curved ena-
mel-folds in youth only,

2. Rhizomys, Gray, P. Z. 8. 1830, Tae EPI © pace i (1834).

Form robust; eyes very small; ears very short, naked; pollex
rudimentary ; tail rather short, partially haired. Skull broad, occi-
pital plane only slightly sloped forward ; infraorbital opening small,
subtriangular. Upper incisors arched forward. No premolar. Upper
molars with one deep internal and two or more external enamel-folds ;
the lower molars reversed.

3. Heterocephalus, Riippell, Mus. Senkenb. i. Saugeth. p. 99
(1834).
Eyes very small; no ear-conch ; pollex short, not rudimentary ; tail
short; whole body almost hairless. Skull as in Rhizomys, but
broader, occipital plane more perpendicular, and infraorbital fora-
men larger. Dentition similar, but the upper molars with an exter-

nal indenting fold only, the lower with one external and one internal
fold.

1876. | MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 87

B. Batuyercin#. Palate between the molars not broader than
one of the alveoli; an interpterygoid fissure ; mandible hystricine in
form (the angular portion springing from ¢he side of the bony cover-
ing of the lower incisor). Ethiopian. Recent genera :—

4, Bathyergus, Uliger, Prod. Syst. Mamm. p. 86... (1811).

Eyes small ; no ear-conch ; fore feet with very long claws ; hind feet
with the third digit longest ; tail short, hairy. Skull massive, occipital
plane perpendicular ; nasals very narrow ; parietals very small ; infra-
orbital foramen very small, subcircular ; angle of mandible pointed.
Upper incisors enormously large, broad, grooved. One premolar above
and below. Molars with indenting enamel-folds in youth only.

5. Georychus, Mliger, Prod. Syst. Mamm. p. 87 ... . (1811).

Externally like Bathyergus, but the claws, especially of the fore
feet, shorter and weaker, skull with the profile more arched, the
occipital plane slightly sloped forward, and the angle of the mandible
rounded. Upper incisors long, arched forwards, plain. Grinding-
teeth as in Bathyergus.

6. Heliophohius, Peters, Monatsb. Ak. Berlin, 1846, p. 239
; (1846).
Differs externally from Georychus in the second digit of the hind
feet being the longest. Skull with the infraorbital opening smaller,
the bony palate shorter, and the coronoid process larger. Incisors
plain. Three premolars above and below ; but sometimes two only are
developed.
Family V. Gromyip&.

One premolar above and below. Grinding-teeth rooted or rootless.
Malar extending forward to the lachrymal. Squamosals extremely
large. Angular portion of mandible strongly twisted. Large
cheek-pouches, opening on the cheeks ouéside the mouth. Upper
lip not cleft. Other external characters very variable. Nearctic
and Neotropical. Two subfamilies :—

A. Gromy1n&. Incisors broad. Skull massive; infraorbital
opening very small; mastoid not appearing on the top of the skull ;
malar stout. Form thickset; eyes small; ear-conch rudimentary ;
limbs short, subequal; fore claws very large. Recent genera :—

1. Geomys, Rafinesque, Am, Monthly Mag. ii. p.45 . . (1817).

Fore feet large, with very large compressed curved claws; tip of
tail naked; cheek-pouches large. Skull very massive ; zygomatic
arches stout. Upper incisors deeply grooved. Crowns of premolars.
divided into two subequal lobes.

2. Thomomys, Max. Prinz zu Wied, Nov. Act. Ac. Car. Leop.
OES OAS Se) Oe nh ei ar a (1839).
Fore feet comparatively small, with moderate claws ; cheek-pouches
moderate. Skull less massive; zygoma more slender. Upper inci-
sors plain, or with merely a fine groove near their inner edge. An-

88 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. [Jan. 18,

terior lobes of premolars small. A third upper molar small, sub-
circular.

B. Hereromyin. Incisors narrow. Skull more delicate, with
the mastoid appearing largely on its top; infraorbital opening not
defined, through the non-development of the lower root of the maxil-
lary zygomatic process ; malar slender, Cervical vertebrae sometimes
ankylosed (as in Dipodine). Form slender; hind limbs and tail
elongated ; eye and ear moderate or large. Recent genera :—

3. Dipodomys, Gray, Aun. & Mag. Nat. Hist. vii. p. 521 (1840),

Ear large, rounded ; tail long, densely haired, tufted ; soles hairy ;
pollex very small, with a small claw. Cheek-pouches large. Skull
with nasals produced in front; upper part of zygoma produced into
a fiat plate articulating with the frontals ; interparietal very small,
narrow; auditory bulle enormous, projecting far beyond the occi-
pital plane. Incisors plain. Grinding-teeth rootless, at first with
slight indenting enamel-folds, afterwards simple.

4. Perognathus, Max. Prinz zu Wied, Nov. Act. Ac. Car. Leop.
MIKO. PP OOT coe. wie eh eae e (each S Salta eure Meteo (1839).

Ears shorter ; tail thinly haired; soles more or less naked ; pollex
with a flat nail. Skull less modified ; nasals not so much produced ;
zygoma not deyeloped into a flat plate ; interparietal broad ; auditory
bulla not projecting behind the occipital plane. Incisors grooved.
Grinding-teeth rooted, tuberculate in youth, afterwards with isolated
enamel-loops.

5. Heteromys, Desmarest, Mammalogie, p. 313. ... . (1820).

Like Perognathus, but the fur bristly, mixed with flattened spines ;
tail shorter, clad with large scales and scattered hairs. Skull with
sharp supraorbital ridges; interparietal very broad. Upper incisors
plain. Grinding-teeth as in Perognathus.

Family VI. TarripomMyID.

One premolar present above and below. Grinding-teeth rooted or
rootless, not tuberculate, with more or fewer transverse enamel-folds.
Infraorbital opening large, suboval. Palate somewhat contracted in
frout and emarginate behind. Eocene and Miocene of Europe. Fossil
genera :—

1. Theridomys, Jourdan, Compt. Rend. Ac. Paris, v. p. 483 (1837).

Grinding-teeth rooted, with three or four reentering enamel-folds,
which become isolated enamel-loops in the worn teeth.

2. Archaomys, De Laizer et De Pariev, C. R. Ac. Paris, vill. p. 206
; (1839).

Grinding-teeth rootless, the enamel-folds continued diagonally
across the crowns, which are thus divided into laminz, of which the
anterior is the largest above, while they are subequal below.

1876.] MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 89

3. Issidioromys (Croizet), De Blainville, C. R. Ac. Paris, x. p. 932

; (1840).

Grinding-teeth rootless, with open reentering folds dividing their

crowns into heart-shaped lobes; the subsidiary folds only repre-
sented here and there by a minute isolated enamel-loop.

Family VII. Dieopip.

Incisors compressed. Premolars present or absent. Grinding-teeth
rooted or rootless, not tuberculate, with more or fewer transverse ena-
mel-folds. Skull with the brain-case short and broad ; infraorbital
opening rounded, very large (often as large as the orbit) ; zygomatic
arch slender, curved downwards; the malar ascending in front to
the lachrymal in a flattened perpendicular plate ; facial surface of
maxillaries minutely perforated ; mastoid portion of auditory bullee
usually greatly developed. Metatarsal bones greatly elongated, often
fused into a cannon bone. Form gracile; front portion of body and
fore limbs very small ; hind limbs long and strong, with from three
to five digits; taillong, hairy. Three subfamilies :—

A. Jacutina*., One premolar above. Grinding-teeth rooted.
Cervical vertebre free, metatarsals separate. Hind feet with five
developed digits. Tail sparsely haired. Nearctic. Recent genus :—

1. Jaculus, Wagner, Syst. Amph. &. p. 23. ..... . (1830).
(Characters those of the subfamily).

B. Diropinz. Premolars present or absent. Grinding-teeth
rooted. Cervical vertebree more or less ankylosed. Metatarsals
united in a cannon-bone. Hind feet with only three digits function-
ally developed. ‘Tail thickly haired, often tufted. Paleearctic and
Ethiopian. Recent genera :—

2. Dipus, Gmelin, Syst. Nat. ed. 13,1. p. 157 .... . (1788).
Hind feet with three digits only ; tail cylindrical, tufted. Skull with
occipital region very broad, auditory bullze enormously developed,
infraorbital opening with a separate canal for the nerve. Incisors

grooved. Premolars absent or almost rudimentary, and found above
only.

3. Alactaga, F. Cuvier, P. Z. S. 1836, p. 141. .... . (3836).

Hind feet with five digits, of which the first and fifth do not
reach the ground ; tail cylindrical, tufted. Skull with the occipital
region less broad, auditory bullze smaller, infraorbital opening with
no separate canal for the nerve. Incisors plain. One very small pre-
molar present above only.

4, Platycercomys, Brandt, Bull. Ac. St. Pétersb. p. 209. (1844).
As in Alactaga, but the hind limbs proportionally shorter, and
* Since the above went to press, Dr. H. Coues has published a paper in which

he rejects the generic names Jaculus and Meriones as preoccupied, substitutes

Zapus, and regards the form as the type of a distinct family, Zapodide (Bull.
U.S. Geol. Sury. y. pp. 253-262).

90 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. [| Jan. 18,

the tail flattened, lancet-shaped, covered with short hairs and not
tufted. No premolars.

C. Pepetinz. One premolar above and below. Grinding-teeth
rootless. Cervical vertebree free. Metatarsals separate. Hind feet
with four well-developed digits, with short broad hoof-like nails.
Tail bushy throughout, not tufted. Ethiopian. Recent genus :—

5. Pedetes, Mliger, Prod. Syst. Mamm. p. 81. ..... (1811).
(Characters those of the subfamily.)

Section III. Mystricomorpha.

One premolar above and below (except in Ctenodactylus). Grind-
ing-teeth rooted or rootless, not tuberculate. Frontals with no
distinct postorbital processes (except in Chetomys). Infraorbital
opening large, subtriangular, or oval. Zygomatic arch propor-
tionally stout; malar not advancing far forward (except in Céeno-
dactyline and Chinchillide), and not supported below by a continua-
tion of the maxillary zygomatic process. Incisive foramina small;
foramina in base of skull proportionally large; an interpterygoid
fissure. Mandible with its angular portion springing from the outer
side of the bony covering of the lower incisor, triangular, usually
pointed behind ; coronoid process small, and condyle low. Clavicles
perfect or imperfect. Fibula persistent as a distinct bone through-
out life. Upper lip rarely cleft. Muftle clad with fine hairs. Nostrils
pointed above, sigmoid or linear. Ears usually emarginate behind.
Tail hairy, subnaked, or scaly.

Family I. OcropontTIp&.

Grinding-teeth with external and internal enamel-folds. Malar
with an inferior angle ; incisive foramina usually long, extending into
the maxillaries; clavicles perfect. Both hind and fore feet usually
with five digits, rarely with four; clawscurved: eats placed high
on the flanks. ‘Tail clad with short hairs or with scales. Three
subfamilies :—

A. CrenopactryLin&. Grinding-teeth semirooted. Malar ex-
tending to the lachrymal (as in the last family) in a flattened
perpendicular plate. Hind feet with the claws of the two inner
digits covered by comb-like series of bristles. Ethiopian. Recent
genera :—

1. Ctenodactylus, Gray, Spicilegia Zoologica, p. 10 . . (1830).

Ears very small, with no antitragus. Tail rudimentary. Interparietal
and auditory bullee large ; coronoid process reduced to a ridge. No
premolars. Molars with single external and internal enamel-folds.

2. Pectinator, Blyth, J. A. S. B. xxiv. p. 294 ..... (1855).

Ears with a small antitragus. Tail half as long as the body, bushy.
Interparietal smaller, auditory bullee larger, and palate more con-
tracted than in Otenodactylus. Premolars present, but very small.
Third upper molar with two external folds.

1876. ] MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 91

B. OcroponTIN&. Grinding-teeth semirooted or rootless, with
short and simple enamel-folds. Fur soft. Tail usually short. Ethio-
pian and Neotropical. Recent genera :—

3. Petromys, A. Smith, S. African Quart. Journ. ii. p. 2 (1831).

Ears short. Fur rather harsh. Pollex very short, with a small nail.
Claws short. Tail moderate, rather bushy. Infraorbital opening with
a small groove for the nerve. Grinding-teeth semirooted, with single
external and internal folds, which nearly meet in the middle.

4. Ctenomys, De Blainville, Bull. Soc. Philomath. 1826, p. 62
(1826).
Eye and ear very small. Fur soft. Claws longer than the toes,
those of the hind feet with comblike bristles (as in Ctenodactyline).
Tail rather short, clad with short hairs. Skull and mandible very
massive ; auditory bullze long and pear-shaped; malar with strong
superior and inferior angles ; infraorbital opening with no groove for
the nerve. Incisors very broad. Grinding-teeth rootless, with kidney~
shaped crowns; the third molar above and below small and sub-
circular.

5. Scehizodon, Waterhouse, P.Z.S. 1841, p.91..... (1841).

External characters much as in Cfenomys, but the ears larger and
the claws, th ough strong, not longer than the digits themselves. Skull
less massive ; the superior and inferior angles of the malar weaker ;
infraorbital opening with a groove for the nerve. Incisors broad,
convex. Grinding-teeth placed transversely, with single external and
internal folds, which meet in the middle.

6. Spalacopus, Wagler, Isis, 1832, p.1219....... (1832).

Ear rudimentary ; tail short ; claws of fore feet shorter than the
digits. Skull shorter than in Schizodon ; superior and inferior angles
of malar obsolete ; infraorbital opening smaller, with no separate
canal for the nerve. Incisors broad, the upper arched boldly for-
ward, the lower very long. Grinding-teeth like those of Schizodon ;
but the external and internal folds do not meet in the middle line.

7. Octodon, Bennett, P.Z.S. 1832, p.46........ (1832).

Ears rather large. Claws small, that of the pollex truncated. Tail
long, hairy, bushy at the tip. Skull similar to that of Spalacopus,
but with a separate canal in the infraobital opening for the nerve.
Incisors narrow. Molars like those of Spalacopus, but placed diago-

nally, and the posterior lobe smaller than the anterior in the upper
teeth.

8. Habrocoma (=Abrocoma), Waterhouse, P. Z. 8. 1837. p. 30
(1837).

Ears very.large. Fur very soft. Tail moderate, clad with short hairs,
not tufted. Pollex obsolete. Skull with the facial portion elongated;
malar with moderate superior and inferior angles; auditory bull
very large. Incisors narrow. Upper grinding-teeth with single exter-

92 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. [Jan. 18,

nal and internal enamel-folds ; the lower with one external and two
internal folds, dividing them into narrow angular lobes.

C. Ecuinomyin%. Grinding-teeth semirooted or rooted, with
deep, curved enamel-folds. Fur more or less harsh, often mixed with
spines, Tail usually long. Neotropical and Ethiopian. Recent
genera :—

9. Carterodon, Waterhouse, Nat. Hist. Mamm. ii. p. 351 (1848).

Muzzle blunt; ears moderate; tail short, clad with scales and rather
long hairs. Skull broad, with no marked crests ; frontals with deli-
cate supraorbital ridges. Incisors broad, with longitudinal furrows
and raised ridges. Upper grinding-teeth with one internal and two
external enamel-folds ; the lower similar but reversed.

10. Myopotamus, Geoffroy, Ann. du Mus. vi. p. 81. . . (1805).

Muzzle blunt ; pollex with a truncated nail ; hind feet large, with
the first four digits fully webbed and the fifth free; tail moderate,
cylindrical, scaly. Skull elongated, with sharp occipital and sagit-
tal crests; auditory bulle small; paroccipital processes very long.
Incisors flat, plain. Grinding-teeth as in Carterodon, but the lower
with three internal folds.

11. Cercomys, F. Cuvier & Geoffroy, Mammiftres, 6™° livr. (1829).

Muzzle pointed ; ears rather large; fur without bristles or spines ;
pollex very smail, with a short nail; hind feet not webbed ; taillong,
scaly. Skull ovate; frontals contracted, with sharp supraorbital
ridges, coronoid process small. Incisors flat. Grinding-teeth with
nearly circular crowns; the upper with one internal and three external
enamel-folds ; the lower similar but reversed.

12. Loncheres, Illiger, Prod. Syst. Mamm. p. 90... . (1811).
Muzzle blunt; ears rather short; fur in most species mixed with
flattened lanceolate spine ; toes subequal; second digit of fore feet
with a broad truncated nail; tail long, clad with scales and hairs.
Skull like that of Cercomys. Incisors narrow. Upper grinding-teeth
like those of Cercomys, but longer, with the middle folds usually

meeting in the middle; the lower with one external and two internal
folds.

13. Mesomys, Wagner, Wiegm. Arch. 1845, Th. ii. p. 145 (1845),

External characters as in Loncheres; but pollex with a short
curved claw, fur withewt spines, and tail short, thickly haired. No
distinct supraorbital ridges. Incisors broad’ Upper grinding-teeth
with one or two external folds ; the lower similar but reversed.

14. Echinomys (=chimys), Desmarest, Nouv. Dict. d’ Hist. Nat.
oi Pv Dt. weracge EMMI ae eT aN. has teeth ces bo “sie 2s peeligae

Muzzle pointed ; ears larger than in Loncheres ; feet narrower, the
toes more uneven in length, fur usually mixed with spines. Palate
shorter and broader. Incisors narrow. Grinding-teeth as in
Mesomys.

————

1876.] MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 93

15. Dactylomys, Is. Geoffroy, Ann. Se. Nat. (2™° sér.) x. p. 126

' (1838).

Ears short; tail long, scaly ; fore’ feet with the pollex obsolete,

and the third and fourth digits elongated, with short convex nails.

Skull with proportionally small orbits and high occiput. Incisors

fiat. Grinding-teeeh (except the lower premolar) each divided into
two lobes, each of which has a single enamel-fold.

16. Plagiodon (=Plagiodontia), F. Cuvier, Ann. Se. Nat.
MRE EVEN GN So as. a) ase ace Of Batons, ops - » (1836).

Form stout; muzzle blunt; pollex rudimentary; outer hair coarse ;
under-fur silky; tail short, scaly. Grinding-teeth rootless, the
upper with a deep enamel-fold running diagonally forward from near
the internal posterior angle, and another running back from near the

outer anterior angle ; the lower with one external and two internal
folds,

17. Capromys, Desmarest, Mém. Soc. d’ Hist. Nat. i. p. 44 (1822).

External characters much as in Plagiodon ; fur long and harsh;
tail moderate or long, scaly, sparsely haired. Liver divided into
minute lobules. Skull elongate, with no marked crests; malar
deep; paroccipital process long. Incisors small, convex. Upper
grinding-teeth with one internal and two external folds; the lower
similar but reversed.

18. Aulacodus, Temminck, Monogr. de Mamm. i. p. 245 (1827).

Form stout; muzzle blunt; fur harsh; tail moderate, sparsely
haired ; fore feet with the pollex rudimentary and the fifth digit very
short ; hind feet with four digits, of which the outer is rudimentary.
Skull with the facial portion much inflated; the brain-case small, with
strong sagittal and occipital crests; parietals small; infraorbital
opening with a separate canal for the nerve. Incisors very broad,
the upper with three deep grooves. Grinding-teeth rooted, with folds
arranged as in Capromys.

.

Family II. Hysrricip«.

Grinding-teeth with external and internal enamel-folds. Skull
ovate, often greatly inflated by large air-sinuses in the bones; facial
portion short and broad; malar with no inferior angle ; occipital
plane perpendicular, with a median ridge. Form robust ; limbs sub-
equal; fur more or less modified into spines and hollow quills. Two
subfamilies :—

A. SpuHincurin&. Grinding-teeth rooted. Skull short; lachry-
mal bone not bounding the canal. Clavicles perfect. Upper lip

_unfurrowed. Tail moderate or long, usually prehensile. Soles of

feet tuberculated. Four teats. Nearctic and Neotropical. Recent
genera :—
1. Chetomys, Gray, P. Z.S. 1843, p.21...... - . (1848).
Head and body clad with stout wavy bristles; feet with four

‘

~
\

Cy

94 _MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. (Jan. 18,

digits; the hind feet with a nailless tubercle instead of the first digit,
and an internal lobe, supported by two accessory tarsal ossicles.
Skull short; the frontal and malar with large postorbital process,
which almost meet; walls of auditory meatus produced. Upper
grinding-teeth each divided into three lobes, of which the anterior
and posterior have deep single enamel-folds ; lower teeth with one
external and two internal folds.

2. Sphingurus (= Sphiggurus), F. Cuvier, Dents d. Mamm. p. 256

(1825)*.

Nostrils far apart ; head and body clad above with short stiff spines,

or with mixed spines and bristly hair; feet as in Chetomys; tail

long, prehensile at its tip. Skull short; the air-sinuses greatly

developed in some species ; no postorbital processes; walls of auditory

meatus not produced ; interparietal broad ; angle of mandible pointed.

Grinding-teeth subequal, like those of Sphemgures, but with two
lobes only.

3. Erythizon, F. Cuvier, Dents d. Mamm. p. 256 . . . (1825).

External characters as in Sphingurus, but the nostrils nearer to-
gether, the quills more concealed by hair, the hind feet with five toes
and hardly any internal lobe; the tail short, thick, and non-prehen-
sile. Skull with walls of auditory meatus slightly produced; angle
of mandible rounded. Grinding-teeth like those of Sphingurus, but
the anterior much longer than the posterior.

B. Hysrricina. Grinding-teeth semirooted. Skull more elon-
gate; lachrymal partly bounding the canal. Clavicles imperfect.
Upper lip furrowed ; tail not prehensile ; soles of feet smooth; six
teats. Palearctic, Indian, and Ethiopian. Recent genera :—

4, Atherura, G. Cuvier, Régne Animal (2™¢ éd.), i. p. 215 (1829).

Spines flattened, channelled; tail long, scaly, with a tuft of com-
pressed bristles at the pomt. Nasal part of skull moderate. Upper
grinding-teeth with one internal and three or four external folds, the
latter soon separated as enamel-loops ; the lower teeth similar, but
reversed.

5. Hystrie, Lanneus, Syst. Nata. p. 76. 00. sms vee (1766).

Spines cylindrical; tail short, covered with spines and slender-
stalked open quills. Nasal cavity usually very large. Air-sinuses of
frontals greatly developed. Teeth as in Atherura.

Family III. CuincuiLiip2.

Incisors short; grinding-teeth divided by continuous folds into
transverse laminze. Malar extending forward to lachrymal, with no
inferior angle, and only a rudimentary superior angle. Optic fora-
mina confluent. Auditory bulle moderate or very large. Palate con-
tracted in front, and deeply emarginate behind. Clavicles perfect.

* = Synetheres and Sphiggurus, F. Cuvier (1825) = Cercolabes, Brandt (1835).

1876. ] MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 99

Fore limbs small; hind limbs elongate, with four or five toes. Fur very
soft. Tail moderate or long, bushy. Neotropical. Recent genera :—

1. Chinchilla, Bennett, Gardens &c. Zool. Soc. pt. i. p. 1 (1829).

Ears broad, not elongated. Fore feet with five digits ; the pollex
very small, but bearing a claw; hind feet with four digits. Tail long,
bushy. Skull with the auditory bullee enormous, appearing on the
top of the skull between the supraoccipital, interparietal, and squa-
mosals. Grinding-teeth rootless, with their enamel-folds nearly
straight, each with three lamine; the two anterior laminz of the
lower premolar imperfectly separated.

2. Lagidium, Meyer, Nov. Act. Acad. Nat.-Cur. xvi. p. 576
(1833).
Ears elongated. Both fore and hind feet with four digits. Skull
as in Chinchilla, but the auditory bullz more moderate, articulating
on the top of the skull with the supraoccipital and squamosals only.
Grinding-teeth similar, but their folds curved ; all three lamine of
the lower premolar perfectly separated.

3. Lagostomus, Brooks, Tr. Linn. Soc. xvi. p. 102 . . . (1828).

Ears moderate. Fore feet with four digits, and hind feet with
three ; the tarsus elongated. Tail moderate, bushy, tufted. Skull more
massive than in the other genera, with well-marked sagittal and occi-
pital crests ; auditory bullz smaller, not-appearing on the top of the
skull ; infraorbital opening with a separate canal for the nerve.
Grinding-teeth with two laminz, except the last upper molar, which
has three.

Fossil genera :—

4, Amblyrhiza, Cope, Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. xi. p. 183 . (1869).
Grinding-teeth semirooted, each with either four or five lamine.

5. Lovomylus, Cope, op. cit. p. 187. ...6...66. (1869).

Grinding-teeth as in Amblyrhiza, but each with three laminz
only, their crowns obliquely sloped both longitudinally and laterally.

Family IV. Dasyprocrip.

Incisors long. Grinding-teeth semirooted, with external and inter-
nal enamel-folds. Milk-teeth long retained. Optic foramina sepa-
rate; palate broad; incisive foramina short ; mandible with the masse-
teric ridge obsolete. Clavicles rudimentary. Form somewhat slender,
limbs moderate; upper lip entire; ears short; tail short and naked
or rudimentary. Fore feet with five digits; hind feet with five or
three ; claws short and hoof-like. Neotropical. Recent genera :—

1. Dasyprocta, Illiger, Prod. Syst. Mamm. p. 93. . . . (1811).

_ Form compact; limbs long ; hind feet with three digits only ; tail
either obsolete or short and subnaked. Skull elongate, smooth ;
infraorbital opening with no separate canal; malar simple ; parocci-

96 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. (Jan. 18,

pital processes short. Upper grinding-teeth with one internal and
three or four external folds, the latter soon separated as isolated
enamel-loops ; the lower teeth similar but reversed.

2. Celogenys, F. Cuvier, Ann. du Mus. x. p. 203 . . . (1807).

Muzzle obtuse ; skin of cheeks reflected below the zygoma; hind
feet with five digits; tail reduced to a tubercle. Skull with the
zygoma enormously inflated, the anterior two thirds composed of the
maxillary zygomatic process, which is hollowed out below into a
great chamber, lined with mucous membrane and communicating
with the mouth ; infraorbital opening with a canal for the nerve ;
paroccipital processes long. Upper grinding-teeth with two internal
and three external folds, except the third molar, which is reversed ;
lower teeth with one external and three internal folds.

Family V. Dinomy1p#.

Incisors broad. Grinding-teeth rootless, with folds dividing them
into transverse lobes. Optic foramina confluent. Paroccipital processes
short. Palate broad. Clavicles imperfect. Manubrium broad. Upper
lip cleft. Hair harsh. Tail rather long, bushy. Both fore and hind
limbs with four digits; claws as in the last family. Neotropical. Re-
cent genus :—

1. Dinomys, Peters, Monatsb. Ak. Berlin, 1873, p. 551 (1873).
(Characters those of the family.)

Family VI. Cavirpm.

Incisors short. Grinding-teeth with folds dividing them into trans-
verse lobes. Milk-teeth shed during fcetal life. Optic foramina
separate ; paroccipital processes long and curved ; palate contracted
in front; mandible with a strong masseteric ridge. Clavicles im-
perfect. Upper lip entire; ears short or long; fur moderately soft ;
tail very short or absent. Fore feet with four digits, hind feet with
three only ; claws as in last family. Neotropical. Recent genera :—

1. Cavia, Pallas, Mise. Zool. p. 30 (ew Klein, 1751) . . (1766).

Body plump; limbs very short, subequal; ears short; hind feet not
palmated ; no external tail. Skull much depressed ; malar slender ;
palate much contracted in front, deeply emarginate behind, exposing
the preesphenoid; incisive foramina long. Grinding-teeth each divided
into two angular lobes.

2. Dolichotis, Desmarest, Mammalogie, p. 360... . . (1822).

Limbs and ears long; tail very short or rudimentary. Skull less
depressed than in Cavia, and the facial portion comparatively larger ;
palate still more deeply emarginate, exposing the vomer ; incisive
foramina long. Grinding-teeth each divided into two angular lobes,
except the third upper molar and the lower premolar, which have
each three lobes.

1876.] MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES. 97

3. Hydrocherus, Brisson, Régn. An. p.116 ..... - - (1756).

Body massive ; limbs moderate; muzzle very blunt; eyes and ears
small; tail obsolete ; hair coarse and sparse ; all the feet fully webbed.
Skull massive; malar very deep ; palate produced behind the last
molar ; incisive foramina short ; paroccipital processes very large and
long. Upper incisors grooved in front; upper grinding-teeth each
with two lobes, united only by cement, except the third molar, which
has twelve narrow transverse plates; lower premolar and first molar
with three narrow lobes, the second and third with four.

Suborder II. GuirES DUPLICIDENTATI.

Incisors 4, at birth $; the outer upper incisors soon lost ; the next
pair very small, placed directly behind the large middle pair; their
enamel continuous round the tooth, but much thinner behind. Skull
with the optic foramina confluent, with no true alisphenoid canal ;
incisive foramina usually confluent ; bony palate reduced to a bridge
between the alveolar borders. Fibula ankylosed to tibia below, and
articulating with the caleaneum. ‘Testes permanently external; no
vesicular glands. Two families :—

Family I. Lagomyip&.

Either one or two premolars above and below; grinding-teeth
rootless, with transverse enamel-folds dividing them into lobes. Skull
depressed ; frontals contracted, with no postorbital processes; facial
surface of maxillary with a single perforation ; posterior angle of
malar produced almost to the auditory meatus; basisphenoid not
perforate, nor separated by a fissure from the vomer ; coronoid pro-
cess in the form of a tubercle. Clavicles complete. Ears short. Hind
limbs not markedly elongated. No external tail. Paleearctie and
Nearctic. Recent genus :—

1. Lagomys, G. Cuvier, Tabl. Elém. de l’Hist. Nat. p. 132 (1798).
External characters those of the family ; two premolars above and

below.
Fossil genus :—

2. Titanomys, Von Meyer, Jahrb. fiir Mineralog. 1843, p. 393
(1834).
One premolar only, both above and helow.

Family II. Lerorip.

Three premolars above, and two below ; grinding-teeth as in last
family. Skull compressed; frontals with large wing-shaped post-
orbital processes ; facial portion of maxillaries minutely reticulated ;
basisphenoid with a median perforation and separated by a fissure
from the vomer ; coronoid process represented by a thin ridge of bone,
Clavicles imperfect. Ears and hind limbs elongated. Tail short,
bushy, recurved. Cosmopolitan (except Australasian region). Re-
cent genus :—

Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1876, No. VII. 7

98 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE ORDER GLIRES, {Jan. 18,

1, Lepus, Linneus, Syst. Nat. i. p. 77... ee (1766).

External characters those of the family ; all the grinding-teeth
with three narrow laminee, except the last lower molar, which is small
and simple.

Fossil genus :-—

2. Paleolagus, Leidy, Proc. Acad. Philad. 1856, p. 89 . (1856).

Incisors longer than in Lepus, first lower premolar with only two
laminee.

Suborder III. GuiIRES HEBETIDENTATI (subord. nov.).

Incisors 2; the second lower pair very small, and placed rather
behind the middle pair, their enamel continuous round the tooth,
and their crowns transversely hollowed, not chisel-edged. Grinding-
teeth rootless, curved, with their convexity directed outwards.
Mandibular condyles and glenoid cavity transverse. Fibula articu-
lating with the caleaneum. One family :—

Family I. MesoTHEertip&.

Two premolars above and one below; grinding-teeth rootless, with
single reentering enamel-folds. Skull massive, with sagittal and
occipital crests enormously developed, the latter running forwards at
the sides to the zygoma; frontals with large postorbital processes ;
infraorbital opening small; malar very deep, running forward to the
lachrymal; auditory bullee moderate; paroccipital processes long ;
bony palate perfect, produced behind the molars; mandible resembling
in form that of Leporide. Clavicles perfect ; scapular and humerus
resembling those of Castoride. Both fore and hind limbs with five
digits, claws probably short and hoof-like. Ischia articulated with two
of the caudal vertebrae. Pliocene of South America. Fossil genus :—

1. Mesotherium, Serres, Compt. Rend. Ac. Paris, xliv. p. 961

(1857).
(Characters those of the family.)

P.S. Since this paper was written I have been much pleased to
find that the researches of my friend Mr. A. Doran, of the Royal
College of Surgeons, into the form of the auditory ossicles of mam-
mals, essentially confirm the views of affinity here adopted. Mr.
Doran’s observations are yet unpublished; and it will be sufficient
here to indicate their more general result. He finds in the auditory
ossicles of the more typical Sciuromorpha a different type from that
presented in the typical Myomorpha. Castor, though aberrant,
approaches nearest to Arctomys; and Anomalurus is very close to
Sciurus. Among the Myomorpha, Bathyergus has the characteristic
type of the Hystricomorpha, in which, with few or no exceptions, the
malleus and ineus are ankylosed together ; and Dipus inclines in the
same direction. The ossicles of the GLIRES DUPLICIDENTATI pre-
sent a distinct and less specialized type.

P2.S 18 7etmaee

%

@ Sowerby hth. M&N. Hanhart imp.

NEW LAND SHELLS FROM TAVIUNI

1876. ] MR, E. A. LIARDET ON FIJIAN LAND-SHELLS. 99

3. On the Land-Shells of Taviuni, Fiji Islands, with Descrip-
tions of New Species. By E. A. Liarper.

[Received December 14, 1875.]
(Plate V.)

The land-shells of Taviuni, one of the Fiji group of islands, are
neither conspicuous for the number of their species nor for the
beauty of their colouring. They mostly inhabit the coast-lands, and
are all minute.

At a slight elevation a moderately large Helix (H. casca) and a
Bulimus are common. Some Helicine may also be found, but are
rare. Pupine I have only found at elevations from about five
hundred feet and upwards, and mostly under decayed logs. Partule
frequent the underside of the leaves of Dracene and Dilo-trees near
the coast. Partula lirata is the only one I met with.

But if the want of size or beauty of colouring renders these shells
less sought for by the ordinary collector, yet to the naturalist their
structure and the habits of their occupants must always be a source
of interest.

The natives of Fiji cannot be induced to seek in the dense forests
for shells ; consequently the only way is for the collector to trust to
his own researches. This I did; but the result has fallen far short
of my expectations.

Considering the moist temperature, dense vegetation, and moun-
tainous character of the island, all so conducive to the abundant
existence of land-mollusca, their scarcity is a matter of surprise.
They mostly locate under logs and stones, seldom being exposed to the
sun, which, no doubt, accounts for the absence of rich colour in any
of the species. :

The numerous small shells on the coast-lands are common to
most of the islands; and being found sheltered by bark on logs
and in the decaying husks of old cocoa-nuts, it may be inferred that
they have frequently been transported from island to island—and
though in some cases destroyed by a subsidence, have again, since
the uprising, once more colonized the coast. The island of Ta-
viuni would seem to establish this inference ; for it is only at a height
of some five hundred feet that Pupine and the larger species of Bu-
limus, Helix, and Helicina are found. Now coral-indications show
this island to have been submerged to that level; I would therefore
conclude that the last-mentioned shells are the true representatives
of the molluscan fauna of that part of the former continent whose
peaks are now the islands of Fiji.

In preparing the following descriptions of species believed to be
new I have to acknowledge the assistance I have received from Mr.
Henry Adams.

1. NANINA? TAVIUNIENSIS, sp. nov. (Plate V. figs. 1, la, 6.)

Shell globose, minutely perforated, of a light brown colour, smooth
7*

100 MR. E. A. LIARDET ON FIJIAN LAND-SHELLS. [Jan. 18,

and highly polished ; whorls 5, convex; spire obtuse; suture im-
pressed ; aperture nearly vertical, roundly lunate ; columella short,
excavated, white, with a callous curved tooth near the base.

Animal very active. I observed it on one occasion, when inter-
rupted in progression, lift its tail high, as in figure 1a, and shake it
vigorously.

Hab. Islands of Taviuni and Gamia, Fiji. Rare. (Coll. Liardet.)

2. NANINA? VITRININA, sp.nov. (Plate V. figs. 2, 2a.)

Shell yellow, thin, translucent, perforated, discoidal; whorls 4},
last subangulated, the others slightly convex; beneath shining and
well rounded ; aperture slightly oblique, lunate ; suture marginate ;
peristome thin ; columellar lip slightly expanded over perforation.
Animal black, with mantle covering two thirds of the shell, which it
cannot enter at first.

Found in moist situations under logs, in this respect resembling
Vitrina. (Coll. Liardet. )

3. NaNINA? RAMSAYI, sp. nov. (Plate V. fig. 3.)

Shell similar to V.? vitrinina. When the animal is out I can
detect no difference.

Animal red; a protuberance on the back rests against the shell
anteriorly. It progresses by raising its head, extending the body,
and placing the posterior part of the foot down in the form of an
arch, lands its body gradually from the head; and this arch thus
appears to recede until the caudal extremity is reached. Like N.?
vitrinina, it cannot at first recede into its shell; and like Vitrina
strangei of Australia, it leaves mucus in its track of a brick-red
colour.

Hab. Taviuni, Fiji. (Coll. Liardet.)

4, Hewix princel, sp. nov. (Plate V. figs. 4, 4a.)

Shell very small, depressed, with wide and perspective umbilicus ;
colour dark brown ; whorls 3, prominently costated; suture deeply
impressed ; aperture round.

Note.—This is the only Fijian shell I have seen resembling any
of the Australian Helices.

Hab. Taviuni, Fiji. (Coll. Liardet.)

5. Hexix PINNOCKI, sp. nov. (Plate V. figs. 5, 5a.)

Shell conoid, perforate ; colour a horny yellow ; convex beneath ;
whorls 6, spirally striated, the last carinated, smooth beneath; aper-
ture oblique, roundly lunate ; columellar lip slightly expanded over
perforation.

Hab. Taviuni, Fiji. (Coll. Liardet.)

6. Herx BARKASI, sp. nov. (Plate V. fig. 6.)

Shell minute, trochiform, very minutely perforated, colour golden
horny; whorls 53, convex, roughly and irregularly striated, trans-

1876.] MR. E. A. LIARDET ON FIJIAN LAND-SHELLS. 101

versely ribbed, last whorl acutely carinated; beneath slightly convex ;
striee radiating from the perforation; aperture oblique and triangular.
Hab. Taviuni, Fiji. A scarce shell. (Coll. Liardet.)

7. Herx Cuayi, sp.nov. (Plate V. fig. 7.)

Shell minute, turbinate, minutely perforate, of a golden horny
colour ; spire obtuse ; whorls 5, convex, last slightly carinate, very
finely, closely, and regularly striated ; beneath smooth and shining ;
aperture oblique, roundly lunate.

Hab, Taviuni, Fiji. (Coll. Liardet.)

8. LAMELLARIA PERFORATA, sp.nov. (Plate V, figs. 8, 8 a.)

Shell small, acute, polished, dark brown colour; epidermis thin ;
whorls 53, convex, spirally striate, with a white apertural lamina;
aperture oblique, pyriform; columellar lip white, projecting from the
base of the shell, expanding slightly over region of umbilicus ; outer
lip impressed and of a deep purple tint.

This shell is found embedded in the bark of dead logs.

Note.—-The animal has the tips of the eye-pedicels bulbous.

Hab. Taviuni, Fiji. (Coll. Liardet.)

9. DiepLOMMATINA TAVIENSIS, sp.nov. (Plate V. figs. 9, 9 a.)

Shell with the penultimate whorl contracted in front, leaving the
previous one and lip of the aperture joining regularly costated ; lip
double ; aperture circular and entire.

Animal with two tentacles, short and cylindrical, with an active
arched motion, as in Helicina. yes situated at the base of tenta-
cles inside.

Hab. Taviuni, Fiji. (Coll. Liardet.)

10. LacocueiLus HISPIDUS, sp. nov. (Plate V. figs. 10, 10a.)

Shell small, bulimiform, hispid, of a brown colour; whorls 54,
spirally costate; aperture circular.

Very rare.
Hab. Gamia, Fiji. (Coll. Liardet.)

11. OMPHALATROPIS VITIENSIS, sp.n. (Plate V. figs. 11, lla.)

Sheil bulimiform, acute; colour brown or yellow; whorls 5, last
convex, with a keel round the base of the shell encircling the umbi-
licus, and terminating in a tongue-shaped process at the base of the
aperture ; epidermis thin; aperture pyriform ; lip thickened.

Hab. Islets off Taviuni, Fiji. (Coll. Liardet.)

EXPLANATION OF PLATE V.
Fig. 1, la, b. Nanina? taviuniensis. | Fig. 7. Helix clay?.

2, 2a. Nanina vitrinina. 8, 8a. Lamellaria perforata,

3, Nanina ramsay?. 9, 9a. Diplommatina taviuniensis,
4, 4a. Helix princei. 10, 10a. Lagocheilus hispidus.

5, 5a, Helix pinnocki, 11, lla. Omphalotropis vitiensis,

6. Helix barkasi,

102 MR. W. H. HUDSON ON THE HABITS OF RAILS. (Jan. 18,

4, Notes on the Rails of the Argentine Republic.
By W. H. Hupson, C.M.Z.8.

[Received December 19, 1875.]

The Carau or Courlan (Aramus scolopaceus) has been called “ an
abnormal relative of the Rails at the most; but in habits and
appearance it is certainly near akin to them.

The beak of this bird is nearly 5 inches long, straight, and of an
iron hardness; the tip is slightly bent to one side, the lower man-
dible somewhat more than the upper. The tongue extends to the
extremity of the beak ; at the end it is of a horny toughness, and
frayed or split into filaments. This beak is a most effective instru-
ment in opening shells; for where mollusks abound the Courlan sub-
sists exclusively on them, so that the margins of the streams which
this bird frequents are strewn with innumerable shells lying open and
emptied of their contents.

Every shell has an angular piece, half an inch long, broken from
the edge of one valve. Mussels and clams close their shells so
tightly that it would perhaps be impossible for a bird to insert his
beak, however knife-like in shape and hardness, between the valves
in order to force them open; therefore I believe the Aramus first
feels the shell with his foot whilst wading, then with quick dexterity
strikes his beak into it before it closes, and so conveys it to the shore.
It would be most difficult for the bird to lift the closed shell from
the water and carry it to land; but supposing it could do this, and
afterwards succeeded in drilling a hole through it with its beak, the
hoie thus made would have jagged edges, and be irregular in shape ;
but it is, as I have said, angular and with a clean edge, showing that
the bird had just thrust his beak half an inch or an inch between
the valves, then forced them open, breaking the piece out during the
process, and probably keeping the shell steady by pressing on it with
the feet.

By day the Aramus is a dull bird, concealing itself in dense reed-
beds in streams and marshes. When driven up he rises laboriously,
the legs dangling down, and mounts vertically to a considerable
height. He flies high, the wings curved upward and violently
flapped at irregular intervals; descending, he drops suddenly to the
earth, the wings motionless, pointing up, and the body swaying
from side to side, so that the bird presents the appearance of a fall-
ing parachute. On smooth ground he walks faster than a man,
striking out his feet in a stately manner and jerking the tail, and
runs rapidly ten or twelve yards before rising. At the approach of
night he becomes active, uttering long clear piercing cries many
times repeated, and heard distinctly two miles away. These cries
are most melancholy, and, together with its mourning plumage and
recluse habits, have won for the dramus several pretty vernacular
names. He is called the ‘“‘Lamenting Bird” and the “Crazy
Widow,” but is more familiarly known as the “ Carau,”’

Near sunset the Caraus leave the reed-beds and begin to ascend

1876.] MR. W. H. HUDSON ON THE HABITS OF RAILS. 103

the streams and visit their favourite fishing-sites. They are very
active at night, retiring again at the approach of morning, and some-
times spend the day perched on trees.

As the breeding-season draws near they become exceedingly clamor-
ous, making the marshes resound day and night with their long
wailing cries. The nest is built amongst the rushes, and contains
ten or twelve eggs, large for the bird, slightly elliptical, sparsely
marked with large blotches of pale brown and purple, the whole egg
having a cloudy appearance. When the nest is approached, the
parent birds utter sharp angry notes as they walk about at a dis-
tance from the intruder. Young and old birds live in company till
the following spring.

The Carau is more nocturnal than the Rails, and, having a far
more powerful flight, takes to wing more readily: in general appear-
ance, and in its gestures and motions when on the ground and when
rising, it closely resembles them.

The Jacana (Parra jacana), arrives from the north in Buenos
Ayres early in October, coming singly or in small parties. In their
migration they appear to follow the course of the Plata; and, though
some individuals are found breeding inland, they are for the most part
confined to the littoral marshes.

The Jacanas journey by very easy stages, frequently alighting to
rest by the way ; for they are so incapable of sustained flight that
boys on the pampas occasionally take them, pursuing them on horse-
back till the birds drop down exhausted. I believe the migratory
Rails travel in the same way—a matter not easily determined, as they
migrate by night; but they are feeble-winged creatures, and when
driven to rise flutter away as if wounded. I have observed the
Jacanas migrating by day, but would not for this reason affirm that
they do not journey by night, since the Bartram’s Sandpiper and other
Species journey both day and night.

The Jacana flies swiftly, in a straight line and close to the surface :
the wings flutter rapidly ; and there are frequent intervals of gliding.
When rising it presents a most novel appearance, as the lovely pale
green of the wings is quite concealed when the bird is at rest; the
beauty of its flight is thus greatly enhanced by the sudden display
of a hue so rare and delicate. At a distance from the beholder, and
in a strong sunshine, the wings appear of a shining golden yellow.
Not only when flying does the Jacana make a display of its beau-
tiful wings ; without rising it has a way of exhibiting them, appear-
ing to delight as much in them as the Cockatoo does in its crest or
the Peacock in its train. When several of these birds live in com-
pany, occasionally they all in one moment leave their feeding, and
with quick excited notes, and clustering together in a close group,
go through a singular and pretty performance, all together holding
their wings outstretched and agitated, some with a rapid fluttering,
others a slow-moving leisurely motion like that of a butterfly sunning
itself. The performance over, the birds peaceably scatter again. I
have never observed Jacanas fighting.

Soon after coming they pair, and build a simple nest with few

104 MR. W. H. HUDSON ON THE HABITS OF RAILS. [Jan. 18,

materials, usually on the floating weeds ; the eggs are four, in shape
like Snipes’ eggs, and have deep-brown spots on a pale yellowish-
brown ground. During incubation the male keeps guard at some
distance from the nest, and utters a warning cry at the approach of
an intruder; the female instantly flies from the nest, but in rising
renders herself very conspicuous. When the nest is approached the
parent birds hover about, occasionally fluttering as if wounded, all
the time keeping up a clamour of hurried angry notes somewhat re-
sembling the barking cries of the Black-collared Stilt.

The Jacana has always appeared to me strictly diurnal in its habits.

Some of our Rails and Rail-like birds I will pass over, either be-
cause I have not learnt their habits or have failed to discover any
thing interesting in them not known already, as in the case of our
two species of Fulica.

I will mention, in passing, that the Bartram’s Sandpiper (4céiturus
bartramius), judging purely from its habits, is a near relation of the
Rails. This species, I believe, has not had a place assigned it in the
Argentine avifauna—a strange oversight ; for it is one of our com-
monest birds.

I will now give a brief account of Rallus rhytirhynchus, of Por-
zana erythrops, and of that king of Rails the Aramides tpecaha.

The Black Rail (Rallus rhytirhynchus) abounds everywhere in the
La-Plata region where reeds and rushes grow. They are always
apparently as abundant in winter as in summer ; this fact has sur-
prised me greatly, since I know this species to be migratory, their
unmistakeable cries being heard overhead every night in spring and
autumn, when they are performing their distant journeys. Probably
all the birds frequenting the inland marshes on the south-western
pampas migrate north in winter; and all those inhabiting the shores
of the La Plata and the Atlantic sea-board, where there is abundant
shelter and a higher temperature, remain all the year. On the Rio
Negro of Patagonia the Black Rails are resident ; but the winter of
that region is mild; moreover the wide expanse of barren waterless
country lying between the Rio Negro and the moist pampas region
would make migration from the former place impossible to such a
feeble flyer. Of this instinct we know at least that it is hereditary ;
and it is hard to believe that from every one of the reed-beds distri-
buted over the vast country inhabited by the Black Rail a little
contingent of migrants is drawn away annually to winter elsewhere,
leaving a larger number behind. Such a difference of habits cannot
possibly exist amongst individuals of a species in one locality; but
differences, in the migratory as in other instincts, great as the one I
have mentioned, are found in aces inhabiting widely separated regions.

It is difficult to flush the Black Rails; they rise in a weak flutter-
ing manner, the legs dangling down, and after flying forty or fifty
yards drop again into the reeds. Their language is interesting. When
alarmed the bird repeats, at short intervals, a note almost painful
from its excessive sharpness; it utters it standing on a low branch
or other elevation, but well masked by reeds and bushes, and in-
cessantly bobbing its head, jerking its tail, and briskly turning

1876.] MR. W. H. HUDSON ON THE HABITS OF RAILS. 105

from side to side. It has at such times a very sprightly appearance,
whilst the long tricoloured beak, the blood-red eye, and vermilion
legs admirably contrasting with the fine dark plumage, give it some
claims to beauty. At other times it has a hollow call-note with a
puzzling ventriloquism in the sound; this note is sometimes repeated
at brief intervals for an hour at a time; and whilst uttering it the
bird stands, as usual, on a slight eminence, but in a listless attitude,
and without any of the nods and becks and other frisky gestures.
It has also a kind of song, frequently heard; the common people
fancy it resembles the distant braying of an ass; hence the vernacular
name ‘ Burrito,” by which the bird is known in the Plata. It is
heard occasionally in the day, but oftenest in the evening, and is a
confused performance, uttered without pause, and composed of
several long shrill notes, modulated and mingled with others hollow
and booming. These notes can be heard a thousand yards away ;
but far or near they always sound remote.

I can say little of Porzana erythrops, called with us ‘“Gallinetita,”’
or Little Hen, though it visits Buenos Ayres annually, breeds, and
is abundant there. In language and habits it is like a Coot, not
often seen on land, and feeding principally as it swims about in a
jerky manner amongst the floating weeds. It appears in October,
migrating exclusively, I think, by night; and after the autumnal
departure an individual is rarely seen. By day they are shy and
retiring, but scatter abroad in the evening, frequently uttering their
strange hollow cry, called ‘ witch-laughter’’ by superstitious people,
and resembling a sudden burst of hysterical laughter, the notes be-
ginning loud and long, becoming brief and hurried as they die away.

The Aramides ipecaha, called in Buenos Ayres “ Gallineta,”’ is
a most interesting bird. Without any brilliant tints, there is some-
thing so pleasing to the eye in the various hues of its plumage—
light brown and drab-colour, blue, grey, buff, and black—all these
colours so harmoniously disposed (the effect heightened by the yel-
low beak, golden-red eye, and vermilion legs), that I do not know a
handsomer waterfowl.

They are found as far south as the thirty-fifth parallel of latitude,
and are most abundant along the marshy borders of the Plata, fre-
quenting the vast reed-beds and forests of water-loving Erythrina
erista-galli. When they are not persecuted they are bold pugnacious
birds, coming out of the reeds by day and attacking the domestic
poultry about the houses and even in the streets of the villages situ-
ated on the borders of their marshy haunts. But when compelled
to place Man on the list of their enemies, it is a difficult matter to
get a sight of one; for, like all birds that rise laboriously, they are
vigilant to excess, and keep themselves so well concealed that one
may pass through their haunts every day of the year, and the
Ipicaha still be to him no more than a “wandering voice.” But
even persecution does not entirely obliterate a certain inquisitive
boldness that is one of the strongest traits of their character. Usually
they roam singly in quest of food, but have reunions in the evening
and occasionally during the day, especially in gloomy weather.

106 MR, W. H. HUDSON ON THE HABITS OF RAILS. (Jan. 18,

Where there are forests, and on misty or rainy days, they stray to
a distance from the reeds. They walk with an easy and somewhat
stately grace, jerking up the tail, Rail-like, at every stride, and run with
a velocity no man can equal. Occasionally they perch on trees, and
are fond of strutting to and fro on a horizontal branch.

When surprised on the open ground the Ipecaha lies close, like a
Tinamou, refusing to rise until almost trodden upon. It springs up
with a loud-sounding whirr, rushes violently through the air, till,
gaining the reeds, it glides a few yards and then drops: its flight is
thus precisely like that of the Tinamou, and is more sounding and
violent than that of the Grouse or Partridge. On spying an intruder
it immediately utters a powerful cry, in strength and intonation not
unlike that of the Peafowl. This note of alarm is answered by other
birds at a distance as they hastily advance to the spot where the warn-
ing was sounded. The cry is repeated at irregular intervals, first on one
hand, then on the other, as the birds change their position to dog
the intruder’s steps and inspect him from the reeds. I have sur-
prised parties of them in an open space, and shot one or more; but
no sooner had the survivors gained their refuge than they turned
about to watch and follow me, sounding their powerful alarm the
whole time. I have frequently been followed half a mile through
the rushes by them, and, by lying close and mimicking their eries,
have always succeeded in drawing them about me.

But the Ipecaha’s loudest notes of alarm are weak compared with
the cries he utters at other times, when, untroubled with a strange
presence, he pours out his soul in screams and shrieks that amaze
the listener with their unparalleled power. These screams, in all
their changes and modulations, have a resemblance to the human
voice, but of the human voice exerted to its utmost pitch, and ex-
pressive of agony, frenzy, and despair, A long piercing shriek,
astonishing for its strength and vehemence, is succeeded by a lower
note, as if in the first one the creature had well-nigh exhausted it-
self. The double scream is repeated several times; then follow other
sounds, resembling, as they rise and fall, half-suppressed cries of pain
and moans of anguish. Suddenly the unearthly shrieks are re-
newed in all their power. This is kept up for some time, several
birds screaming in concert; it is renewed at intervals throughout
the day, and again at set of sun, when the woods and marshes
resound with the extravagant uproar. I have said that several birds
unite in screaming; this is invariably the case. I have enjoyed
the rare pleasure of witnessing the birds at such times; and the
screams then seem a fit accompaniment to their disordered gestures
and motions.

A dozen or twenty birds have their place of reunion on a small
area of smooth clean ground surrounded by reeds; and by lying well
concealed and exercising some patience one is enabled to watch
their proceedings. First one bird is heard to utter a loud metallic-
sounding note, three times repeated, and somewhat like the call of
the Guinea-fowl. It issues from the reeds, and is a note of invita-
tion quickly responded to by other birds on every hand as they all

1876.] MR. W. H. HUDSON ON THE HABITS OF RAILS. 107

hurriedly repair to the customary spot. In a few moments, and
almost simultaneously, the birds ‘appear, emerging from the reeds
and running into the open space, where they all immediately whirl
about and begin the exhibition.

Whilst screaming they rush from side to side as if possessed with
frenzy, the wings spread and agitated, the beak wide open and
raised vertically. I never observed them fight or manifest anger
towards each other during these performances; and, knowing the
pugnacious spirit of the Ipicahas, and how ready they are to seek a
quarrel with birds of other species, this at first surprised me; for I
was then under the mistaken impression that these gatherings were
in some way related to the sexual instinct.

Whilst watching them I also remarked another cireumstance.
When concealing myself amongst the rushes I have been compelled
to place myself so disadvantageously, owing to the wet ground, that
any single bird straying accidentally into the open space would have
discovered my presence immediately ; yet the birds have entered and
finished their performance without seeing me; so carried away are
they by the emotion that possesses them during these moments,
But no sooner has the wild chorus ended than, aware of my pre~
sence, they have fled precipitately into the reeds.

How could this curious habit I have described, and which cannot
be considered advantageous, have originated? It is simply that this
species has a somewhat singular way of giving expression to an in-
stinetive feeling common to all creatures. Many birds and mammals
have social gatherings, peaceful like those of the Ipicaha ; and if seen
to fight, these are but playful engagements ; for the emotion that calls
them together is a joyous one. It manifests itself so variously in
different species that a person might easily be led to believe that the
displays he observes are, in many instances, inspired by the sexual
passion.

The Ibis melanotis, the Glossy Ibis, the Black-collared Himanto-
pus, and the Spurred-winged Lapwing also hold similar exhibitions.
The last-named species has a far more remarkable performance on
the ground, aptly called “ dancing ” by the Argentine peasants; for
the birds, in twos and threes, run and whirl about and stand bowing
ull their beaks touch the ground, all the time regulating their move-
ments to drumming rhythmic notes.

The Chimangos (Milvago) frequently have meeting-places where
they circle about, sportively quarrelling in the air, then rest, each
one on his separate perch ; and at intervals one bird utters a long and
song-like ery, followed by a succession of short notes, in which all
the birds join as in a chorus.

Males and females of many species in which the sexes are always
faithful sing and scream together in a jubilant manner at intervals
through the day. his habit is most remarkable in the Oven-bird
(Furnarius) : these stand together facing each other, singing their
shrill excited song, all the while beating their outspread wings in
time with the notes, and each bird taking a part, so that the per-
formance produces the effect of harmony.

108 MR. W. H. HUDSON ON THE HABITS OF RAILS. [Jan. 18,

The Chajas (Chauna chavaria) also sing in concert, ‘‘ counting the
hours,” as the Gauchas say ; for they sing about nine o’clock in the
evening and again just before dawn.

Still more remarkable is the habit in the Scissor-tail (Milvulus
tyrannus) ; for these birds are not gregarious, and yet once a day they
rise up and, hurrying from tree to tree, summon each other to a
general gathering; then, mounting with sharp chirping notes, they
precipitate themselves violently downwards from a great height, their
long tails opening and closing, their zigzag flight accompanied with
impetuous “ whetting” and “ grinding”’ notes.

The Tinamous unite in small coveys and play, running about in
circles, rapidly doubling and suddenly crouching as if to conceal
themselves.

Tyrant-birds and Thrushes chase each other screaming through
the air and amongst the trees. Hard-billed singing-birds sing in
concert on trees and bushes, and sometimes pursue each other and
fight all the time they are singing. Some Ducks fight mock battles
on the water. The habit is different in the Chiloe Widgeon (Mareca
chiloensis) ; for this Duck has an easy and powerful flight. In small
flocks they rise until they become mere specks in the sky; at that
vast height they hover, all the time singing their shrill notes, and close
and separate and close again; and every time they close they slap
each other so smartly with their wings that the blows can sonietimes
be heard when the birds have quite vanished from sight.

Many mammals also have meetings and rejoice together, some
species even having set performances; but the habit is less notice-
able in them, as they are not so impressionable by nature as birds,
and are also less buoyant in their motions, and less garrulous.

In all the instances I have given, the sexual passion is in no way
concerned ; for these gatherings and displays take place at all seasons
of the year, and are in some cases less frequent during the season of
courtship. It is impossible to doubt that the cause is simply the
natural gladness felt by all sentient beings at times, when hunger is
satisfied and they are free from the restraints imposed by other
emotions. It is toa great extent an associate feeling, and, in species
accustomed to meet and to indulge in it with frequency, is instanta-
neously communicated from one to the other. Every shepherd and
herdsman on the pampas is familiar with the fits of joy that seize
his domestic or semi-domestic cattle. Thus a lamb in a flock will
suddenly spring up two or three times in quick succession, coming
down on his four feet together ; and instantly his companions become
possessed with a joyous contagion, and, breaking away from their
dams, they fly off in pursuit. Suddenly they all stop and group
themselves together; but in a few moments another lamb springs up
and bounds away, and the chase is renewed.

It is not to be wondered at that some species should have not
only a definite and unchangeable manner of manifesting their joyous-
ness, but should give it such extravagant expressions as, for example,
the Ipecaha does, whilst in others it shows itself in the most
subdued manner or not at all; for some animals are incapable of ex-

1876.] ON. W. DRUMMOND ON AFRICAN RHINOCEROSES. 109

pressing even feelings so violent as pain, fear, anger, and solicitude
for their young. But that the feeling exists at times in all I am
pretty sure, even in so melancholy a creature as the Heron.

Probably the concert-screaming of Foxes and Monkeys and many
other animals, the pretty ‘“‘showing-off”’ of Jacanas and other birds,
and the aerial vagaries of Snipes, accompanied by peculiar sounds
called ‘bleating’? or “drumming,” and a hundred more strange
performances are due to the same cause.

5. On the African Rhinoceroses.
By the Hon. W. H. Drummonp.

[Received December 20, 1875. ]

I believe that at present naturalists have arrived at no decided con-
clusions as to the number of species of Rhinoceros inhabiting Africa ;
and as I have had some practical experience on the subject I beg
leave to offer these few remarks for their consideration.

As far as my own experience and the inquiries I have made of
natives well acquainted with the facts, and of European travellers and
hunters who were equally qualified to offer an opinion, have gone, I
believe, in accordance with the recorded opinions of most travellers
and sportsmen who have given any attention to the subject, that
there are four distinct species; while if R. oswellii be not merely a
variety of R. simus, as I am inclined to think it is, it would follow
that there was one more. These I would class as follows :—R. simus,
the “ Mohohu”’ of the Bechuanas, and the ‘*‘ Umkave”’ or “ Um-
kombewoquobo”’ of the Amazulu, Amatabili, and Ama Tonga tribes ;
R. keitloa, the Keitloa of the west, and Umkombe Tovote of the
east; R. bicornis major, the greater black species, known as the
Kulumane on the eastern side, while in South Central Africa (I
mean the country north of the Transvaal Republic, and south of
the Zambesi) it is, I believe, known as the “ Borele ;’ and R. dicornis
minor, the small black species, known up to the Limpopo as the
“‘ Upetyane,” and among the Dutch republics to the north as the
**Klin rhinaster.’’ To these must, I suppose, be added R. oswelli,
or the “ Kabaoba,”’ until we are in a position to prove conclusively
that it is merely a variety, as I think, for reasons hereafter to be
stated, will ultimately prove to be the case.

Of the above, R. simus and R. oswellii are those generally known
as the “‘white,” while R. keitloa, R. bicornis major, and R. bicornis
minor are called the “black ;”’ and before proceeding further I should
like to say a few words about the nomenclature I have made use of,
and which (with the exception of the introduction of what I believe
to be a distinct species, which for want of a better name I have called
R. bicornis minor, the Small Black Rhinoceros or Upetyane) is the no-
menclature I believe to be in general use. The distinction, however,
of black and white seems to me misleading and misapplied, all
Rhinoceroses being of the same colour, namely a peculiar shade

110 HON. W. DRUMMOND ON AFRICAN RHINOCEROSES. [Jan. [8,

of brown, or, if any difference does exist, it being in R. bicornis
minor possessing a tinge of red. That to different observers, and in
different localities, they do appear to be of different colours (Baldwin
mentions a blue kind) is undoubted; but, except any slight variation
that may locally exist, from the animal, as in Darwin’s theory of
protective resemblance, conforming to the prevailing colour of the
district it mhabits, all such cases may be referred to outward cir-
cumstances, such as the position of the sun, or the kind of mud they
may have been rolling in last, and partly, no doubt, to the age and
sex of the animal. In exemplification of this, I may mention that I
have watched a bull of R. simus trotting past me in the full glare of
the midday sun, and it has appeared to me almost white ; while after
following the same animal up, and finding it feeding with the long
shadows of evening on it, its colour has then seemed to be, as it
really is, a deep brown. It may also be worthy of notice that no
system seems to have been pursued in giving the scientific names under
which these species are known. R. stmus, the snub- or square-nosed
Rhinoceros, is appropriate enough, as referring to one of its most
distinctive points, while R. oswelli is named after the gentleman
who discovered it; but the term dicornis, though no doubt appli-
cable, would be equally so to every one of the five species, and would
be most especially so to R. keit/oa, in which the two horns are of
almost equal length, while its present name, keztloa, being merely a
native and local designation, conveys nothing to those unacquainted
with the language.

R. simus, the common white Rhinoceros, requires but little de-
scription from me, being, as we all know, a well-recognized species.
It is the greatest in size, and is remarkable for the length the front
horn grows to, as well as its gentle and inoffensive disposition. Its
food is, as far as my experience goes, solely grass. The country
over which I can personally speak as to its existence, extends from
Zululand up to the Limpopo; from there it incontrovertibly reaches
the Zambesi; while Speke mentions it in Karagweh, and Andersson
between Walwich Bay and Lake Ngami and in Ovampoland. Sir
Samuel Baker tells me that he saw at Khartoum a horn “immensely
thick at the base, and about 24 feet long, which came from the
countries west of the Nile; and though for some reason which he
did not state he thinks it was not the horn of a ‘‘ White Rhinoceros,”
yet, unless we conclude that a species exists of which we have
hitherto heard nothing, it is justifiable to believe it to be a specimen
of either R. simus or R. oswelli; and as the habitat of the latter is
distinctly circumscribed, the balance of evidence lies on the side of
its having been the former. It may therefore be generally stated,
subject to correction, that R. st¢mus is common to the south of the
Zambesi ; and while undoubtedly it exists to the north of it, though
not I think in large numbers, it has never been seen in any part of
Northern Africa. It is, however, worthy of remembrance that the
value of its horn in those parts of Africa where it is rare or not found
is great ; while to the south, where it is plentiful, the value is com-
paratively small.

1876.| HON. W. DRUMMOND ON AFRICAN RHINOCEROSES. 111

R. keitloa is another well-recognized species ; but for the sake of
comparison with those killed in other parts of Africa I will mention
the average measurements I have noted, and the peculiarities of
structure.

ft. in.
Length from nose to base of tail, about 11 0
Height at the shoulder ...... about 5 0
Circumference...........-.. about 9 O
Average length of the anterior horn. . 1 8
Average length of the posterior horn. . 1 6

In some few cases the posterior horn is a trifle the longer, and in
others 4 or 5 inches the shorter. The head is of the same type as
that of R. bicornis major and R. bicornis minor; and the peculiar
snout and long prehensile upper lip which characterizes these three
species is more marked than in the former, while less so than in the
latter. Its food is chiefly, if not solely, the young and tender shoots
of various kinds of thorns. In disposition it is decidedly morose and
ill-tempered ; but it seldom charges without provocation. Its habitat
is a very extended one, though it does not seem to be plentiful any-
where, more than two or three being seldom seen together, and then
only at long intervals. I have found it from the Black Umfolosi river
in Zululand up to the Limpopo, and the black crosses seen on the map
now before us in the country south of the Zambesi show the appro-
ximate spots where, to my knowledge, it has been killed. Andersson
seems to have met with it to the west ; and it most undoubtedly exists
in Abyssinia, specimens which I have examined from that country
being now in the British Museum, and a very perfect one in the
possession of Mr. Gerrard; while from the measurements of a pair
of horns from a Rhinoceros cow killed by Sir Samuel Baker (the
front horn 23 inches, the back 17% inches) I should be inclined to
believe that it also must have been R. keitloa, 1734 inches being an
extremely unusual length for the posterior horn of any other species.
I will next speak of R. oswelli, about which, however, much
remains to be learned. In conformation, habits, disposition, and
food it in no way differs from R. simus, except in its horns. This
singularity, as is well known, consists in the front horn, which is
straight, and even in comparison with R. simus unusually long,
pointing forward at an acute angle instead of standing erect from the
snout, though this angle is very various in different animals, some
possessing the peculiarity in the most modified form, while in others
it is very marked. The red marks on the map show where I know
it to have been met with or killed; and I have found specimens
high up on the east coast, though not exhibiting their characteristic
to any great degree. It is, however, by far the most local of any of
the species, so much so as to induce me to believe that it is merely
loeal variety, some bull or cow (probably the former) having either
from injury or accident of birth possessed a horn similar to that
which we now find among its descendants. The fact of the pecu-
liarity varying so greatly in different individuals is, it seems to me,

112 HON. W. DRUMMOND ON AFRICAN RHINOCEROSES, [Jan. 18,

in favour of this view, and of the interbreeding of R. simus and R.
oswelli ; while it is worthy of note that Livingstone mentions having
seen somewhere near the Zambesi a “black”? Rhinoceros with a
horn like that of R. oswelli—a statement which proves the possibility
of the accidental occurrence of such a peculiarity as the inter-
breeding of R. oswelli and any of the species known as the “ black ”
is too incredible to be taken into serious consideration. It is, how-
ever, not possible to settle this pomt until it can be proved whether
R. simus and R. oswellii do or do not interbreed ; and I may there-
fore pass on to the next species.

I may first observe that in using the word R. dicornis for this in
common with the next species, I do so under correction, and for the
reason that while unable to say with certainty which has been
hitherto referred to by different travellers under that name, I think
it very probable that both have been so, though they differ so greatly
that I cannot but wonder at this being the case, and can only account
for it by the fact, which I have myself noticed, that where the one
species is rare the other is common, and vice versd. I will commence
by describing the larger of the two, the one known on the east as
the Kulumane, and up to the Zambesi as the Common Black Rhino-
ceros. This animal does not, I am inclined to believe, on an average
exceed R. keitloa in size, though I have killed individual specimens
larger than any I have seen of the latter; it, however, differs from it
in its horns, which, though following the conformation of R. simus,
never attain to the same size. Their average length in bulls is about
18 inches for the anterior, and 8 inches for the posterior, the cir-
cumference of the base of the larger horn being about 18 inches;
while in cows, which in all the species have longer and more slender
horns, the front one measures 22 inches, and about 16 inches at the
base, the back one being about 12 inches in length. It is also
worthy of note that the length of the horn in all the black species
seldom varies in adults more than 3 or 4 inches, while in both the
white a difference of a foot may not uncommonly be found. I have
already mentioned when speaking of R. heitloa that the species now
under discussion possesses, though in a less marked degree, the
peculiar snout and upper lip characteristic of the three “black ”
species ; and this leads me to the cause of such a provision of nature.
R. bicornis minor and R. keitloa live, so far as my experience goes,
entirely on the leaves and branches of trees; and this remarkable lip
acts much in the same manner as the trunk of an Elephant in
drawing their food towards their mouths. R. dicornis major, how-
ever, though living partly (and I should say chiefly) on the same,
also consumes, like R. simus, large quantities of grass; and therefore
its snout possesses the characteristics of both. I have frequently
seen them browsing on the grass ; but the possession for a few days
of a young calf of this species afforded me an unusually good oppor-
tunity of studying their habits and favourite food. Its mother had
been killed on the banks of the Pongolo by one of my hunters; and
the calf had, as is often the case, remained by the carcass during the
following night, where we captured it next morning, and after con-

1876.] HON. W. DRUMMOND ON AFRICAN RHINOCEROSES. 113

siderable difficulty conveyed it to our camp. The bottom in which
it was tethered contained abundance of the rich grass which forms
the chief food of R. simus ; but it did not eat much of it, though
even on the first evening it consumed a large quantity of the young
shoots and tender leaves of the thorn-branches provided for it, and
seemed to be most fond of the hack, or waitabit thorn, turning over
the other kinds with its snout and tasting them, and then passing
them by to search for the former. On the second evening, however,
I noticed it, after returning from water, commence to eat the sur-
rounding grass; and though it did not show so great a relish for it
as it did for the thorn-shoots, it ate it, both then and afterwards, in
such large quantities as proved that it naturally forms a by no means
inconsiderable portion of its food.

In disposition this species much resembles R. keitloa—neither
often charging without provocation, though they will puff and snort
and show a disposition to do so; and it may also be said to be the
more gregarious as well as the most common, herds of from five to
fifteen being sometimes seen in unusually favoured localities. It
undoubtedly exists in all the country S.E. of the Zambesi, being
especially plentiful in some parts of Zululand. Whether it or the
species I shall next describe under the name of R. dicornis minor is
the one spoken of by Andersson on the west, I am unable to say, as
he gives no measurements, though the head and horns depicted in
one of his plates resemble those of the latter. Travellers in Central
and Northern Africa speak of R. dicornis as existing without giving
any details by which it can be identified ; and though, for reasons to
be hereafter given, I imagine the smaller species is alluded to in
Northern Africa, I cannot of course be in any way certain.

The distinctive characteristics of R. bicornis minor are very marked.
Its average measurements are as fullows :—

ft. in
Length from nose to base of tail ...... 10 4
Height at the shoulder about 4 6
Circumference about ............ si 8 0
Average length of the anterior horn.... 0 10
Average length of the posterior horn .. 0 5

Sometimes specimens are found with the front horn 13 or 14 inches
in length, and the posterior in proportion; but they are uncommon.
The head is smaller in proportion than that of any other species,
while the upper lip protrudes to a greater degree, and the eye is
unusually small. Its foot is also smaller in proportion to its body
than that of any of the others. Its food is, as I have before said,
solely the leaves and branches of thorns; and it is scarcely ever found
out of thorn-jungle, though R. Licornis major is often found in other
coverts. Its disposition is savage and morose to the very last degree.
It continually attacks without other provocation than the mere sight
of a human being affords ; and it will follow the scent of the human
foot for some distance. When seen without the observer’s proximity
being suspected, it is generally heard grumbling and grunting out its
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. VIII. 8

114 MR. E. P. RAMSAY ON THE BIRDS OF [Jan. 18,

ill temper; and in following its spoor the furrows ploughed up in
the ground, and which are more or less made by all the different
species, are so common as, when the ground is too hard to enable
more than a faint mark to be seen, to prove to the hunter the species
he is following. I have never seen more than three (a bull, a cow,
and a calf) together. I have found them in considerable numbers
from the Black Umfolosi river in Zululand all along the Ubombo
range up towards the Limpopo, though as they near that river they
become scarce, and I only know of one instance of their being found
near the Zambesi. I have, however, no doubt that they existed at one
time all over the thorn-country south of the Zambesi, as oral tradi-
tions of their ferocity are common among the Dutch hunters; and no
doubt their own ill-temper accounts for their being now partially ex-
tinct in that district, self-defence on the hunter’s part having caused
their destruction ; while lower down to the south-eastward, where no
doubt they were originally more common, they are disappearing more
rapidly than any other species. I have seen a considerable number of
horns from Abyssinia, and they appear to me to resemble in size and
shape those of this species, though perhaps a trifle longer ; but until
some one will describe the animal to which they belong, it is useless
to make guesses which are not founded on sufficient data.

It will be seen from the above remarks how very limited my
knowledge of the subject under discussion really is; nor should I
have ventured to make them before you this evening had I not felt
that it is only by each traveller describing what has actually come
within his own observation that such questions as the number of
species of any animal on so large a continent as Africa can ulti-
mately be set at rest; and this must be my excuse should you feel
that from my slender acquaintance with my subject I have been to
any extent occupying your time to-night under false pretences.

6. List of Birds met with in North-eastern Queensland,
chiefly at Rockingham Bay. By E. Prerson Ramsay
C.M.Z.S.—Part I1.* :

[Received December 28, 1875. ]

174. PriLinopus SWAINSONII t.
This species is somewhat rare in the Rockingham-Bay district ; a
few only were obtained.

175. LAMPROTRERON SUPERBUS.

I found this, one of our most beautiful species, tolerably abundant
in all the scrub lands of the Herbert river and coast-range. Their
note is a broken “ coo,’ prolonged into a rolling guttural sound at
the end; they may be heard at least half a mile off. But, owing to
the dense nature of the scrubs, the birds are at all times difficult to

* Continued from P. Z. S. 1875, p. 603.
+ Where no references are given, the names are taken from Gould's ‘Hand-
hook,’

1876.] NORTH-EASTERN QUEENSLAND. 115

obtain, although not rare. The female of this species has un-
doubtedly been described and figured under the name of L. cyano-
virens. The young resemble those of LZ. swainsonii, particularly in
having narrow yellow margins to the primaries and secondaries, and
to the tips of the feathers on the chest and breast; they do not
show the forked or split feathers on these parts before the end of the
second year, although the green bands on the flanks are conspicuous
in the nestling.

176. MreGALoPREPIA MAGNIFICA.
I found this species abundant, and very variable in size.

177. MEGALOPREPIA ASSIMILIS.

Although this bird is so much smaller than the preceding species
in all its admeasurements, it should scarcely be considered a distinct
species, as it differs in no other way except in size from M. ma ynifiea.
I have examined numerous examples of both M. magnifica and M.
assimilis, and consider the latter rather the connecting link to M.puella.
This last species has lately been noted from Cape York, whence I
received a fine pair procured there by Mr. J. A. Thorpe.

178. LEUCOMELENA NORFOLCIENSIS.

We procured several specimens of this fine and scarce Pigeon.
They were found feeding in the same trees (Aemena and Jambosa)
with Ptilinopus, Megaloprepia, and others.

179. MyRriIsTICIVORA SPILORRHOA.

_ During the months from October until the end of April, when
they leave, this species is very numerous all over the Rockingham-
Bay district. Early in the morning, as soon as it is light enough,
they leave their roosting-places in large flocks, and betake them-
selves to their feeding-grounds, dispersing over the scrubs and among
the various species of demena and Jambosa which line the margins
of the Herbert river. Towards evening they assemble, and, leaving
the feeding-grounds, return to roost on the mangrove islands in
Hinchenbrook channel, and around the coast and mouths of the
rivers, flying a distance of often 40 miles night and morning. The
tops of the mangroves on which they roost are literally white with
birds ; and, notwithstanding the disturbance and havock committed
among them by shooting-parties, they continue to arrive until dark.
They breed on these islands, building little or no nest, a few sticks
placed so as to prevent the eggs from rolling away being considered
sufficient. Young almost fully fledged were brought to me in
January; but many at this time were laying their eggs. When

freshly killed the concealed portions of the feathers on the body are

of a beautiful delicate rosy salmon hue, which soon fades after death.

180. LorHoLAIMUS ANTARCTICUS.

I once met with a flock flying over some of tie dense scrubs of the
Herbert river, and also a few on the wing near the township of
9*

116 MR. E. P. RAMSAY ON THE BIRDS OF [Jan. 18,

Cardwell. They were not considered plentiful in the district. Those
obtained about Cape York are considerably less in size, and appear
more plentiful in that district.

181. CHALCOPHAPS CHRYSOCHLORA.

This pretty Ground-Dove is tolerably plentiful over the whole
district. I noticed it frequently close to residences and in gardens
within the township.

182. LEUCOSARCIA PICATA.

This species is not by any means so plentiful as in the brushes of
New South Wales, where the woods resound with its monotonous,
deep, and melancholy call. It frequents alike the dry scrubs on the
margins of rivers, and those which clothe the damp stony sides of
the Sea-view range. Its flesh is highly esteemed, and resembles
that of a Quail. The bird is strictly a ground-feeder, only taking to
the trees when disturbed, where, perched on some thick branch, it
remains motionless until apparently all danger is over. The eggs
are two in number, of the usual form, but comparatively small.

183. PHaps CHALCOPTERA.

We met with this bird rarely, and only on the sterile sandy flats
in open forest country beyond the coast range, where numerous
species of Acacia abound, on the seed of which they feed.

184. GEOPHAPS SCRIPTA.

Occasionally found in open forest-country. Met with only in one
place, about 30 miles inland. I found it breeding in the Burnett-
river district in December 1870. The nest was placed beside a tuft
of grass, and consisted of a shallow hole lined with a féw blades of
dry grass. The eggs were two in number, and of a creamy white.

185. EryrTHRAUCHEZNA HUMERALIS.
186. GEOPELIA TRANQUILLA.

187. GEOPELIA PLACIDA.

I found these species by no means rare. They prefer the open
country, and feed on the seeds of the ‘‘ Grass-tree,’’ Xanthorrhea,
and various species of Acacia and other leguminous plants abundant
in the sandy tracts about Cardwell.

188. MacropyGIA PHASIANELLA.

This fine species, so abundant in the “ brushes” of the Richmond
and Clarence rivers in New South Wales, is far from being common
in the Herbert-river district ; I met with a pair on one occasion only.
It was quite an unknown species to most of the settlers in those parts.

189. TALEGALLUS LATHAMI.

However plentiful this species may have been formerly in the Rock-
ingham-Bay district, itis now very scarce, only one having been obtained

1876. | NORTH-EASTERN QUEENSLAND. 117

during my visit. They are still plentiful in the New-South-Wales
scrubs. I found that two or more females visited the same mound
to lay their eggs in; and when this is the case the mound is often
twice as large as an ordinary mound. It seems probable that
several individuals assist in scratching the mound together, when
a space often 50 yards in diameter (on level ground) is found
cleared of almost every fallen leaf and twig. The mounds are often
6 feet in height, and 12 to 14 wide at the base; sometimes they are
more conical. The central portion consists of decayed leaves mixed
with fine débris, the next of coarser and less rotted materials ; and
the outside is a mass of recently gathered leaves, sticks, and twigs
not showing ‘signs of decay. In opening the nest these are easily
removed, and must be carefully pushed backwards over the sides,
beginning at the top. Having cleared these, and obtained plenty
of room, remove the semidecayed strata; and below it, where the
fermentation has begun, in a mass of light fine leaf-mould will
be found the eggs placed with the thin end downwards, often in a
circle, with three or four in the centre, about 6 inches apart. At
one side, where the eggs have been first laid, they will probably be
found more or less incubated ; but in the centre, where the eggs are
placed last, quite fresh ; and if only one pair of birds have laid in the
mound, about twelve to eighteen eggs will be the complement, and will
be found arranged as described above. On the other hand, if several
females resort to the same nest, the regularity will be greatly inter-
fered with, and two or three eggs in different stages of development
will be found close to one another, some quite fresh, others within a
few days of being hatched. There are usually ten eggs in the first
layer, five or six in the second, three or four only in the centre. I
found that the females return every second day to lay, but never suc-
ceeded in ascertaining which of the parent birds opens the nest.
The aborigines informed me that the male bird always performs this
office; and I usually found my black boys very correct in their
statements of this kind. After robbing a nest it is necessary to
replace the different layers as they are found; if the lowermost is
too much mixed up with the others, or the top tumbled into the
excavations made in the bottom one, the birds will invariably forsake
the mound; so that I found it always necessary to carefully replace
the different layers as I found them. It is not so with the Me-
gapodius tumulus, which does not seem to care how much the
mound is tumbled about, so that there is sufficient débris left to
burrow in; and, indeed, should there not be, they quietly set to
work and scratch it together again. The mounds of the Tallegallus
are seldom found on a great incline when a level spot can be obtained.
They frequently bring the débris from a considerable distance ; and
in one instance on the Richmond river I noticed a place where
about a cartload had been scratched through a shallow part of a
creek 3 or 4 inches deep in water, and up the other side of the bank
to the mound, which was over 40 yards distant. The débris is
always thrown behind them. The greatest number of eggs taken
from one mound at one time was thirty-six. This was a very old

118 MR. E. P, RAMSAY ON THE BIRDS OF (Jan. 18,

mound, and resorted to by several individuals, The eggs vary much
in size, and in shape from almost round to a long oval, or pointed at
the thin end; their usual form is an oval slightly smaller at one end.
The shell is very thin, minutely granulated, and snow-white in
colour. hey are of a very delicate flavour, resembling in taste
those of the Plovers.

190. MEGAPODIUS TUMULUS.

This Mound-raiser is very plentiful north after passing Port
Denison; I found it also in tolerable numbers as far south as the
Pioneer river. They are strictly confined to the dense scrubs, and
seldom, if ever, seen elsewhere. Their noisy cackling at night fre-
quently disturbed us when encamped near one of their favourite
resorts ; and during the day their hoarse note at once betrays their
presence. On the Herbert river they are not much sought after as
an article of food either by the natives or whites; for as their eggs
are esteemed a delicacy the birds themselves are not much molested.
I examined several nests in March; and although it was not the
regular breeding-season, yet fresh eggs were obtained, and newly
hatched young were found singly here and there throughout the
denser parts of the brushes. Some of the mounds were very ruth-
lessly destroyed by the whites, and scattered over the ground. This,
however, did not cause the birds to forsake the place; and out of one
large mound, which had been very roughly handled, two new ones
were formed, about 10 yards apart, on the base of the old one, which
was so matted and interlaced with roots from the neighbouring trees
that it appeared to me a marvel how the birds could burrow into it
the great length they did; and having once laid their eggs there,
how ever the young birds found their way out through the maze of
roots is still a mystery. Once out, however, and their wings dry,
they are able to take care of themselves, but remain about the
mounds for a day or so, as if waiting for some of their companions ;
but in less than a week from the day they are hatched they may
frequently be seen at least a quarter of a mile away, and well able to
fly about. I met one little fellow, only 5°5 inches in total length, fully
a mile away from the nearest mound; he flew up and settled in a
tree, about 20 feet from the ground. The wings and feet were
remarkably developed for so small a bird, which could scarcely be
more than four weeks old. Upon more than one occasion I have
seen the birds busy at their mound, or feeding near it, but was
never so fortunate as to meet with them in the act of burrowing.
The largest mound I. met with was about 50 feet in length, 10 in
height, and 14 feet in width at the base, 8 or 10 on the summit. It
seemed to be more like several mounds combined ; and certainly more
than two pairs of birds frequented it. While stationed gun in hand
watching for Cassowaries (Casuarius australis), | noticed on one occa-
sion five birds arrive at this mound in company ; they came very close
_ to me, making a chuckling noise jerked out from their throat, and not
unlike that of a domestic fowl when driven from its nest, but not so
loud. Usually only a pair are met with together. Their flight is

1876. ] NORTH-EASTERN QUEENSLAND. 119

heavy ; and they do not readily take wing, unless pursued by a dog,
when they rise with a considerable flapping to the most convenient
branch, where they are easily approached and shot. Their flesh
is dark, rank, and tough.

The young, about 5 inches in length, are of a dull brown, ashy
brown on the sides of the face, neck, and mantle, and on the
abdomen of a lighter ashy brown, rufous brown on the flanks, and
brown washed with rufous on the breast; the back, rump, and tail
of a rich rufous brown; primaries dark brown ; interscapular region
and upper wing-coverts dark brown, tipped with light rufous; the
secondaries and scapulars freckled, and margined on the outer web
with light rufous; the outer series of secondary-coverts and outer
scapulars barred and freckled with the same colour ; iris dark brown ;
feet yellow. Total length 5°5 inches, bill -45, wing 4°5, tarsus | inch,
tail a tuft of down about | inch in length.

191. TurNIx VARIUS.
192. TurRNIX PYRRHOTHORAX.

193. TuRNIxX VELOX.

I met with these three species occasionally. They were looked
upon as scarce birds in the Herbert-river district. 7. varius prefers
the more open forest land; the other two I found on the margins of
the open grass-flats, and in the vicinity of water-holes and lagoons &c.

194, SyNoicuS AUSTRALIS.

195. ExcALFACTORIA AUSTRALIS.

I found both species plentiful in the swampy parts of the grass-
beds, and on grassy ridges generally throughout the district, and
obtained young a few days old of S. australis in March.

196. DrRoMAIUS NOVEZ-HOLLANDIZ.

Emus were not plentiful, and so hunted that they are only found
now in the unfrequented parts of the district. I met their tracks
only on one occasion on the inland side of the range, in the basin
drained by the Herbert river.

197. CASUARIUS AUSTRALIS.

One of the chief objects of my visit to Rockingham Bay was to
become acquainted with the habits of this noble bird. In 1867 I
had sent my collector, Edward Spalding, to this district for this pur-
pose, but with very poor results. While in Brisbane on my way up
I purchased by telegram a fine young living specimen, the first that
had been obtained and reared, and ultimately succeeded in bringing
it alive to Sydney and shipping it to the Society, where I am glad to
hear it arrived safely*. I found also that several very young Casso-
waries had been obtained, and, for the first time, a nest and eggs had
been found. This was great news; and I need not relate how I made

* See P, Z. 8. 1875, p. 469.—Ep.

120 MR. E. P. RAMSAY ON THE BIRDS OF [Jan. 18,

all haste to the Herbert-river Police Camp, where I was most hos-
pitably entertained and welcomed by Inspector Johnstone, who was
the first to rediscover and bring under the notice of others the
existence of this remarkable species. I found Inspector Johnstone
a true sportsman, as well as an ardent lover of Nature, a zealous and
energetic naturalist, and a careful observer. I am indebted to this
gentleman for much valuable information respecting the manners and
customs of the aborigines, and notes on the habits of many birds
and animals new to me, and especially for information on the present
species.

The Australian Cassowary is a denizen of the dense dark scrubs
scattered over the district of Rockingham Bay, and extending as far
north as the Endeavour river. It was tolerably plentiful only a few
years ago even in the neighbourhood of Cardwell; but since the
advent of sugar-planters &c. on the Herbert river and adjacent
creeks, these fine birds have been most ruthlessly shot down and
destroyed for the sake of their skins, several of which I saw used for
hearth-rugs and door-mats. Formerly they were easily enough
procured ; but latterly so wary have they become, and their numbers
so decreased, that it is only with the greatest amount of patience
even a stray shot can be obtained. I know of no bird so wary and
timid ; and although their fresh tracks may be plentiful enough, and
easily found in the soft mud on the sides of the creeks, or under
their favourite feeding-trees, yet the birds themselves are seldom now
seen. During the day they remain in the most dense parts of the
scrubs, wandering about the sides of the watercourses and creeks,
diving in through the bushes and vines at the slightest noise.
Towards evening and early in the morning they usually visit their
favourite feeding-trees, such as the native figs, Leichardt-tree (S.
leichardti), and various species of Acmena, Jambosa, Davidsonia,
&c. ; they appear to be particularly fond of the astringent fruit of
the Leichardt-trees and of a species of Maranta, which produced
bunches of large seed-pods filled with juicy pulp, resembling in
appearance the inside of a ripe passion-fruit (Passiflora edulis).
Fruits and berries of all kinds are eagerly sought after; the tame
semiadult bird which I had the pleasure of forwarding to the Society
(1875) became so fond of the fruit of the Cape-Mulberry that he
would allow no one to come near the tree he had taken possession of.
This bird has frequently devoured at a time as much as 3 quarts of
*«Loquats”’ (fruit of Hriobotria japonica), and several fair-sized
oranges whole, besides its usual amount of bread per diem (about
3 pounds). In nature, I found that in the afternoons they frequently
came out and walked along the scrubs, or along the side of the river
or creeks, and swallowed large quantities of pebbles and small rough-
edged stones. In confinement, plantains and sweet potatoes (in large
pieces, which they can swallow whole) are a favourite food, while
nothing seems to come amiss to them—grasshoppers, spiders, earth-
worms, cockroaches, caterpillars of all kinds, dough, and even raw
meat. They ascertain the flavour of their diet by first taking it up
in the tip of their bill and giving it a slight pinch ; and if not suitable,

1876.] NORTH-EASTERN QUEENSLAND. 121

they throw it aside. I found they invariably refused green Loquats,
but always picked them up in the bill first to try them. In con-
finement they become very tame, and may be allowed to walk about
the place without restraint, coming when called, or more often run-
ning after and following any one who is accustomed to feed them.
If disappointed or teased, they not unfrequently “show fight”? by
bristling up their feathers, and kicking out sideways or in front with
force sufficient to knock a strong man down—a feat I have witnessed
on more than one occasion. These birds are very powerful, and
dangerous to approach when wounded. On more than one occasion
a wounded bird has caused a naturalist to take to a tree; the sharp
nail of the inner toe is a most dangerous weapon, quite equal to the
claw of a large Kangaroo, and capable of doing quite as much
execution.

I found the Cassowaries to be excellent swimmers, and frequently
tracked them across a good-sized creek or river. On Hinchenbrook
Island, situated about 14 mile from the mainland, they have been
frequently met with; and I have myself heard them calling at night
and early in the morning as I passed up the channel, at a distance of
at least 2 miles from them. Mr. Johnstone informs me he met with
one swimming across a river of considerable width during his ex-
plorations while on the ‘‘ North-east-Coast Exploring-Expedition.”
Their note, most usually emitted by the male, is a series of harsh
guttural prolonged croakings quickly repeated, and continued for
about 3 minutes; it is very loud, and may be detected across the
water at a distance of at least 3 miles on a still night. I have
listened to it resounding through the scrubs at a distance of 14 mile
on land, and then thought it close and one of the most unearthly
noises I ever heard. They breed during the months of August and
September. The first nest procured was found by some of Inspector
Johnstone’s black troopers, from whom Mr. Miller, a settler on the
Herbert river, purchased some of the eggs. One which he kindly
presented to me is of the light-green variety mentioned hereafter.
The nest consists of a depression among the fallen leaves and débris
with which the ground in the scrubs is covered, with the addition of
a few more dry leaves. The place selected is always in the most
dense part, and well concealed by entangled masses of vegetation.
The eggs were five in number in the only two instances recorded ;
and in both cases one of the eggs in each set differed from the
other, being. of a light-green colour, and having a much smoother
shell. The others all have a rough shell, covered rather sparingly
with irregular raised patches of dark but bright green on a lighter-
green andsmooth ground. In the pale (No. 1) variety these raisings
on the shell are closer together, and not so well developed; in both
varieties they are more thinly spread over the central portion than
at the ends. On the whole they closely resemble the eggs of
Casuarius bennettii, in which similar variations are noticeable ; but
they are larger, and of a greater diameter, being greatest in the
middle. I am indebted to Inspector Robert Johnstone for the fine
series of the eggs of this species which at present grace my collection.

122 ON THE BIRDS OF NORTH-EASTERN QUEENSLAND. [Jan. 18,

The following are measurements of some of the specimens of the
eggs of both species :—
Casuarius australis.
Length Width
in inches. in inches,
. Light-green smooth shell.. 5°33 x 3°73
No. 2. Dark-green rough shell... 5°3 x 3°88

Z
7

Casuarius bennettit.

No. 1. Light-green smooth shell.. 5°65 x 3°54
No. 2. Light-green rough shell .. 5°32 xX 3°31
No. 3. Light-green rough shell 534 x 34

No. 4. Dark-green rough shell.... 5°2 x 3°32

The young of Casuarius australis are of a dull rusty brown, the
feathers having frequently a blackish shaft-stripe, giving to the back
a streaked appearance. After the first year the plumage takes a
deeper lighter brown hue, and black feathers begin to appear mixed
with brown, some being party-coloured. After the second season, at
the age of 18 to 24 months, the black feathers predominate, and
the helmet, which has hitherto been undeveloped, more like the
shield of a coot (Fulica), begins to show a keel or ridge in the centre,
which rapidly increases in height. The skin round the head, on
which still remain a few brownish hair-like feathers, begins to become
wrinkled and coloured, varying from bluish-green to orange on the
lower part, and bright blue on the sides of the neck, the wattles
becoming carmine. The helmet still remains comparatively small
and undeveloped long after the wattles and naked parts of the neck
become coloured. I believe that the helmet does not attain its fall
size until the fourth or fifth year at least. In traversing the scrubs
the head is carried low to the ground, and the vines and branches
of trees striking the helmet slide over it on to the back. Otherwise
in the dense vine-scrubs bordering the Herbert river and _ else-
where progress would be greatly impeded ; but as it is, the Casso-
waries traverse the scrubs with wonderful speed, jumping over fallen
trees and logs when in the way. A young bird (the identical speci-
men, I believe, forwarded by his Excellency the Marquis of Nor-
manby to the Society), while in the possession of Inspector John-
stone, during my visit succeeded in jumping out of its yard over
a fence more than 6 feet in height. I measured the fence, and
found it 6 feet 6 inches to the top rail, on which its feet-marks were
plainly visible ; the length of the yard was only 12 x 12 ft. I found
the adult Cassowaries in full moult in March; but the new feathers had
not all made their appearance in May. During these months speci-
mens in confinement were remarkably irritable and frequently sulky,
even refusing their food (which they invariably do when unwell),
and were at times very spiteful, even attacking their keepers ; but
strangers chiefly come in for a share of their dislike. At all times I
have noticed they are very fond of bathing; the semiadult bird
before alluded to, which I forwarded to the Society, was remarkable

1876.] M. L. TACZANOWSKI ON CERYUS DYBOWSKII. 123

in this respect, and might frequently be seen waiting at the pump in
in the yard until some one came for water, when he would sit down
quietly under a copious shower, stretching out his neck and ruffling
his feathers up to allow the water to reach the skin. They do not
like any exposure, and always endeavour to get out of the sun. In
the wild state they seldom leave the scrubs, and certainly never do
so in the heat of the day unless hard pressed ; but on the whole
they are remarkably hardy, and bear confinement well. In February
last (1875) I purchased four fine young birds about 6 months old,
which were obtained from some settlers in the Herbert-river district ;
these also I forwarded to England during the same month.

7. Description d’un nouveau Cerf tacheté du pays d’Ussuri
méridional, Cervus dybowskii. Par L. Taczanowsk1,

C.M.Z.8.
[Received December 17, 1875.]

En 1868, le Capitaine Przewalski a observé pour la premiére fois
des cerfs tachetés dans ce pays, et dit dans son ouvrage imprimé en
russe en 1870, que ces animaux abondent dans les grands foréts des
cétes de la mer du Japon et de la région des affluents de |’ Ussuri, en
indiquant la riviére Tina pour limite septentrionale de la distribution
de ce ruminant, de sorte qu’il n’en trouve point dans la région centrale
du cours de l'Ussuri. M. Przewalski l’a nommé C. awis, Erxl. (7), et
dit ensuite qu’il y a aussi dans ce pays un second cerf tacheté d’une
taille intermédiaire entre le précédent et le cerf commun ; et que sa
peau d’été ne différe en rien de celle de son C. avis, mais en hiver elle
est d’un gris foncé, surtout au dos, ot le poil est presque noir avec des
taches blanchatres 4 peine distinctes. I] a vu plusieurs fois des indi-
vidus de cette espéce, sans pouvoir s’en procurer.

Le Dr. Dybowski vient de me fournir cing peaux de ce cerf, parmi
lesquelles il y a quatre males de différents Ages (deux qui ont atteint
le développement entier, un jeune 4 dagues simples, un d’dge inter-
médiaire) et une femelle. Ces cerfs me paraissent appartenir & cette
derniére forme, celle plus forte du Cap. Przewalski, et tous ces ex-
emplaires ont leur robe d’hiver. L’espéce parait étre inédite ; je
propose done de le nommer C. dybowskii, en Vhonneur de mon ami,
zoologiste plein de mérite, dont le séjour de dix ans dans la Sibérie
orientale a sensiblement augmenté les connaissances de la faune de ce
pays, si curieux et si insuftisamment exploré en faits d’ histoire natu-
relle.

Ce cerf est d’une taille plus forte que celle du daim (C. dama) et
beaucoup plus petite que celle du cerf commun.

Les bois sont élevés et minces, moins penchés que ceux du C. elaphus,
et moins recourbés sur les cétés, A trois andouillers simples, dont le
basilaire et le suivant sont dirigés en avant un peu obliquement sur
les cotés et légérement courbés, et le troisitme dirigé vers le milieu
et trés peu en arriére ; ces embranchements sont médiocres, et pres-

124 M, L. TACZANOWSKI ON CERVUS DYBOWSKII. [Jan. 18,

que égaux entre eux; le prolongement du trone principal est plus long
que les branches précédentes, vertical, légérement courbé vers le mi-
lieu. Le premier andouiller basal prend naissance beaucoup plus
haut quecelui ducerf commun (I’axe de cette branche est 4 4 centim. de
lacouronne), le deuxiéme est plus éloigné du précédent que du troisieme
(19 et 17 centim.). Sur la face supérieure de Ja partie du trone
comprise entre les deux premiers andouillers se trouve une assez forte

Skull and horns of Cervus dybowskii.

caréne, et cette partie est considérablement plus haute que large ;
Vanneau basal est étroit. La rugosité surtout dans la moitié basale
est assez forte. Les appendices osseux servant de base aux bois sont
trés-élevés (5 centim.).

Le nez est nu; les fosses lacrymales profondes. La criniére est
abondante au cou et entre les épaules, et se prolonge d’une maniére
distincte jusqu’é la naissance de la queue; tout le cou est garni de
poils longs. La queue est beaucoup plus courte que dans le C. avis,
garnie de longs poils, qui forment une touffe dépassant l’extrémité
caudale de 22 centim.

1876.] M. L, TACZANOWSKI ON CERVUS DYBOWSKII. 125

La couleur générale des animaux adultes en pelage d’hiver ressemble
a celle d’un chevreuil (C. capreolus) d’hiver, c’est-d-dire qu’elle est
formée d’un semis d’une multitude de petites stries fauves sur un fond
gris brunatre; chaque poil est gris, rembruni vers le haut avec un
large anneau fauve & une certaine distance du sommet, qui est noiratre.
Sur ce fond 4 couleur de chevreuil, il y a sur la partie postérieure du
corps des taches blanchatres, peu distinctes. Le fauve roussatre
prédomine sur les c6tés du cou, tandis qu’en dessous le fond principal
est brunatre, varié de fauve. La criniére est rousse sur la nuque,
ensuite elle devient brune variée de roussatre ; elle est distincte par
une nuance beaucoup plus foncée dans toute la longueur du dos. Le
museau est gris, piqueté de nombreuses stries fauves blanchatres,
cette couleur passe graduellement au roux sur le front; il y a une
tache blanche, pure, cordiforme sur le devant du menton. La face
dorsale des oreilles est roussatre ; interne est blanche ainsi que le
bordexterne dela face dorsale dans sa moitiéinférieure. La queue est
plus ou moins rousse en dessus avec un mélange d’un petit nombre
de poils noirs, et blanche en dessous. II y a aussi un espace blanc au
pourtour des fesses, couvert par une grande tache caractéristique noire.
Le ventre est gris brunatre presque uniforme avec un peu de blanchatre
au milieu et du blane pur dans la partie postérieure. Les jambes sont
fauves roussatres avec une large raie brune le long de la face antéri-
eure, et une tache blanche arrondie sur le edté externe au-dessous du
talon dans les jambes postérieures.

Le jeune male 4 dague simple et un autre a ce qu’il parait de deux
ou trois ans, sont en général plus roux sur un fond brun plus foncé ;
le roux prend un ton ferrugimeux bien intense le long de la criniére
dans toute la longueur du corps. Les taches blanchatres sont beau-
coup plus prononcées, mais elle paraissent étre plus restreintes. La
couleur roussatre des jambes est plus vive, avec la raie dorsale brune
plus foncée.

Dimensions :
j centim.
PA PETIIAES BO 4s sei ctewieabe «0s sun pcin: Eeariuk aes OS
Distance entre les bois 4 la base ................ 995
a »» extremités de la branche principale 43-5
Longueur du 1* andouiller................. legen ne
sant ale a Be ight mink Menke cc earth aD
ap ails Ata = ieee inceltiane Site cca der wan PACES
», du sommet du trone principal............ 24
5 Gevborewlay weet bsoiat feieKesscssys a. sleteacsiciallO
SOR ERE GE Se ee a ae 7,
ca avec la toile. on cs scce cieset OF
Jambe antérieure jusqu’au poing ................ 38
Cette ARIE Fai si olsj'a,cipfdbed va be o> + icc tes AS

126 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

8. Revision of the Lepidopterous Genus Teracolus, with
Descriptions of the new Species. By Artur Gar-
DINER Butter, F.L.S., F.Z.8.

[Received December 8, 1875.]
(Plates VI. & VII.)

The Butterflies treated of in the present paper, although admitted
by all to be very pretty, are by no means favourite objects of study
with the lepidopterist.

Whenever a genus is composed of striking and, at the same time,
sharply defined species, plenty of entomologists are always ready to
work at it; but when, as in the present instance, there is some diffi-
culty in ascertaining the amount of variation obtaining in the dif-
ferent species, it will be found that lepidopterists are not unfrequently
content to catalogue all doubtful forms as varieties of known species,
often giving to the world a false view of their geographical distri-
bution, and thus hindering instead of advancing science.

The genus Teracolus was first founded by Swainson, in his ‘ Zoolo-
gical Illustrations,’ for the reception of his 7. subfasciatus. But a
few years since I extended it for the reception of all the insects
formerly constituting the genera Idmais and Callosune, there being
no reason, but that afforded by colour, why they should ever have
been kept separate.

Until quite recently I was unable, from lack of adequate material,
to attempt a revision of this very difficult group; but the kindness
of Mr. E. C. Buxton, in presenting to the Musenm his valuable col-
lection of African ‘‘ Orange-tips,” has at length put me into a fair
position to work out the whole of the African species.

In order to make the present paper more complete, Mr. F. Moore
has very generously lent me the whole of his Indian specimens, thus
enabling me to avoid errors in determining the Asiatic species—our
deficiencies in Syrian forms being also partially met by the assistance
of my friend R. Meldola, who has put into my hands several species
collected by the late Mr. J. K. Lord.

It would be easy to show that the present genus contains but few,
if any, very sharply defined species. It is not improbable that, when
we know the Butterflies of East Africa, Arabia, Syria, and Persia
more thoroughly, we shall be able to show an unbroken gradation
from one end of the group to the other. At present we get a nearly
perfect transitional series from 7. subfasciatus to T. tone, thence
through T. halimede to T. fausta, calats, and allies, on the one hand,
and to 7’. eupompe and allies on the other; from the latter we can
run on, almost without a break, through 7. eucharis to T. inter-
ruptus, and thence to 7’. evippe.

If the plan of “ lumping” species were to be adopted in this genus,
every year would probably decrease instead of adding to their num-

PZ. O13 /6. FW,

G.Butler del. et hth Feb.1876. Mintern Bros imp.

NEW SPECIES OF TERACOLUS

’

a? 7" ay : ' ee ply Fe 4

et Nr NO oh cob
/ ae %
"x a ie ie
«
ony
\ “
{
.
; ‘
’
aie ~
’
1
a
as Co
te

= a
*

1. VIL.

1876.

Qa
Aww.

P.Z

Mintern Bros

A. G-Butlerdel. et ith, Feb.1876

imp

NEW SPECIES OF TERACOLUS.

ae ™

2

1876.) MR. A.G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 127

ber, until eventually we should be compelled to recognize but one
species in the genus, a consummation certainly not to be desired. At
present nobody doubts the existence of numerous species. Kirby’s
Catalogue, which gives what is styled “the broad view,” inasmuch
as it allows almost unlimited latitude for variation, enumerates 14
species under Idmais, 4 under Teracolus, and 53 under Callosune,
71 in all*. It being, therefore, impossible to be certain, without
careful breeding from the egg, of the limits of any species in this
genus, I have taken the only course open to me, and have described
all the forms which seemed, in both sexes, to present constant
distinctive characters, or which differed sufficiently, as single speci-
mens, to warrant the belief that they were not varieties of known
species.

1. Wings sulphur-yellow or white, the apex of primaries dark, and
traversed in both sexes by pale spots: wings of male below
nearly uniform in tint, sometimes with a few black spots, of
Semale more or less tinted with buff, the disk crossed by an
irregular series of dark spots. Teracolus, Swainson.

la. Wings of male uniformly yellow, apical patch of primaries black
internally ; apical spots confluent ; wings below greenish white ;
apex of primaries and secondaries reticulated with pale greyish
brown. 7. subfasciatus, Swainson.

1. TERACOLUS SUBFASCIATUS.

Teracolus subfasciatus, Swainson, Zool. Ill. Ins. ii. pl. 115 (1823).
* Anthocharis subfasciata, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép.i. p. 567. n. 12
(1836).

Ptychopteryx bohemani, Wallengren, Lep. Rhop. Caffr. p. 18
(1857).

Damara Land (Zrimen). B.M.

14. A black streak on inner margin of primaries, broad in the male,
and uniting with a broad black outer marginal border. 7. eris,
Klug.

2. TERACOLUS ERIS.

Pontia eris, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 6. figs. 15, 16 (1829).

Pieris eris, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 514. n. 111 (1836).

Anthocharis eris, Reiche, Ferret & Galinier, Voy. Abyss. Ent.
p- 460, pl. 31. figs. 1-3 (1849).

Idmais eris, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 499. n. 12 (1871).

3 2, Ambriz (J. J. Monteiro); 3 9,8. Africa (EZ. C. Buxton).

; B.M.

The ground-colour of the-wings of the female is either white, as
in the male, or bright sulphur-yellow.

* It should be observed that several species admitted in the above-mentioned
Catalogue are referred by Mr. Kirby to Pieris.

128 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUs. [Jan. 18,

le. No black streak on inner margin of primaries. TT. fatma.

3. TERACOLUS FATMA.

Idmais fatma, Felder, Reise der Novy. Lep. ii. p. 189. n. 185,
pl. 25. fig. 3 (1865).

Idmais eris, var., Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 499. n. 12 (1871).

Kordofan.

This species is smaller than 7. eris, has the external area of pri-
maries tawny, the discal spots disconnected, and no marginal spots
on secondaries. I have seen a specimen in Mr. Druce’s collection.

4, TERACOLUS COLIAGENES.

Euchloé coliagenes, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. xx.
p- 216, pl. 4. figs. 4, 5 (1867).

Callosune coliagenes, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 500. n. 4 (1871).

White Nile (Petherick). Type, B.M.

Precisely like the 7.-fausta group in pattern, but of a sulphur-
yellow colour.

2. Wings sulphur-yellow, white, or pale ochreous ; below with
transverse bands across the disk of secondaries.
2a. Wings yellow, markings above much like the 7.-fausta group.
5. TERACOLUS PROTOMEDIA,
Pontia protomedia, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 8. figs. 13, 14 (1829).
Pieris protomedia, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 509. n. 105
(1836).
Teracolus protomedia, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 500. n. 4 (1871).
3 2, White Nile (Petherick). B.M.
The plumule of this species is, as might be expected, like that of
the other species of Teracolus.

6. TERACOLUS AMELIA.

Idmais amelia, Lucas, Rev. Zool. p. 427 (1852).

Senegal.
Allied to the preceding species.

26. Wings above pale ochreous and white.
7. TERACOLUS VELLEDA.
Idmais velleda, Lucas, Rev. Zool. p. 428 (1852).
Abyssinia.
Intermediate between 7. amelia and T. vesta.
8. TERACOLUS VESTA.

Idmais vesta, Reiche, Ferret & Galinier, Voy. Abyss. p. 463, pl. 31.
figs. 7, 8 (1849).
Caffraria (Becker), S. Africa (HZ. C. Burton). B.M.

9. TeERACOLUS HEWITSONII.
Idmais hewitsonii, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 498. n. 4 (1871).

1876.] MR. A.G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 129

Idmais chrysonome, Doubleday & Hewitson, Gen. Diurn. Lep.
pl. 7. fig. 5 (1847).

Idmais vesta, Trimen, Rhop. Afr. Austr. i. p. 62. n, 41 (1862).

Congo (4. Curror). Type, B.M.

10. TERACOLUS CHRYSONOME.

Pontia chrysonome, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 7. figs. 9-11 (1829).

Idmais chrysonome, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 585. u. 1
(1836).

Congo (4. Curror). B.M.

2c. Wings above white; primaries with large purplish crimson
apical patch, crossed by a black line.

11. TERACOLUS PHOLO?.

Anthopsyche pholoé, Wallengren, Wien. ent. Monatschr. iv. p. 35.
n. 6 (1860).

Callosune pholoé, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 504. n. 44 (1871).

Lake Ngami.

12. Tx RACOLUS AMINA.

Anthocharis amina, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. iii. Anth. pl. 1. figs. 1-3
(1866).

Callosune amina, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 500. n. 1 (1871).

Between Natal and Delagoa Bay (E. O. Buxton). B.M.

13. TERACOLUS CELIMENE.

Anthocharis celimene, Lucas, Rev. Zool. p. 426 (1852).

Callosune celimene, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 504. n. 48 (1871).

Abyssinia.

The three preceding species seem to be nearly allied; and since
Hewitson gives the Zambesi as the locality of his type, I feel rather
doubtful of their being all distinct.

3. Wings of the male with purple apex, externally and sometimes
internally bordered with black ; females with white-spotted or
orange tips ; secondaries below generally with traces of a trans-
verse oblique brown or blackish line, sometimes obsolete.

3a. Primaries of male above without black internal limitation of the
apical patch; secondaries above and below uniformly white:
apical patch of female with a violet gloss.

14. TERACOLUS REGINA.

Anthocharis regina, Trimen, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, i. p. 520.
n. 1 (1863). ‘

Callosune regina, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 500. n. 7 (1871).

Damara Land. Type, B.M.
Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1876, No. IX. 9

130 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18

36. Primaries of male with apical patch redder in tint and broader ;
secondaries with the veins slightly blackish, and terminating in
well-marked black spots.

rs)
15. TERACOLUS HETERA,

3, Callosune hetera, Gerstaecker, in Van der Decken’s Reisen in
Ost-Afrika, p. 365. n. 7, taf. xv. fig. 2 (1873).

Endara.

This species is larger than 7. regina, and in the marginal spots of
secondaries approaches 7’. cone and allies.

3c. Primaries of male above without black internal limitation of the
apical patch ; secondaries black-veined ; below whitish, with base
of costa yellowish, black veins, and an oblique, ill-defined, dotted
transverse line: female with apical patch of primaries orange,
crossed by black spots; secondaries white, with marginal blackish
spots; below pinkish ochraceous, with a well-marked, spotted,
red-brown, angulated, oblique transverse streak.

16. TERACOLUS PHLEGYAS.

Anthocharis phlegyas, Butler, P. Z.S. 1865, p. 431, pl. 25. figs. 3,
3a (1865).

Callosune phlegyas, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 500. n. 5 (1871).

White Nile (Petherick). Type, B.M.

It is possible that this may be the species represented by Reiche
(Ferret & Gal. Voy. Abyss. pl. 30) as a variety of A. cone; only it
is there represented with a black internal limitation of the apical
patch, and with no trace of a cross bar on the under surface of the
secondaries.

3d. Like the preceding, excepting that the violet apical patch of
the male and the orange patch of the female are both larger ;
secondaries of male below whitish, with base of costa indistinctly
ochraceous, veins below not black : female with outer limitation
of apical patch almost obliterated by the orange colouring, the
black spots small; secondaries white, with the marginal spots
small; belcw very pale brown with the apical area and a well-
marked discocellular spot white ; the brown area reticulated
with slightly darker hatchings, and limited by an oblique whity-
brown streak (not angulated). 7. buatoni.

17. TeERACOLUS BUXTONI.

Teracolus buxtoni, n. sp., supra.
3 @, Between Natal and Delagoa Bay (£. C. Buzton).

Type, B.M.
This is probably the South-African representative of 7’. phlegyas.

3e. Size of the preceding two species ; violet apical patch of the male
bordered on both sides with black ; secondaries below and apex
of primaries with a distinct pink tinge; costa of secondaries

1876.| | MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 131

yellowish towards base; a well-marked oblique brown streak :
apical patch of female above black, spotted with white ; base
dusky ; apex below sordid yellowish, crossed by black-and-white
spots; secondaries sordid yellowish, reticulated with grey; a
black-and-white spot at end of cell; base of costa yellowish ;
an oblique brown streak as in the male.

18. TERACOLUS JOBINA.

3 2, Euchloé jobina, Butler, Cist. Ent. i. p. 14. n. 2 (1869).

Callosune jobina, Kirby, Syst. Cat. p. 504. n. 49 (1871).

3, Teracolus jobina, Butler, Lep. Exot. pl. xliii. fig. 3 (1872).

3 2, Natal (#. C. Buxton). B.M

The violet patch contains from five to six divisions: in the type
in Mr. Druce’s collection there are five, the two upper ones being
very minute, and all of them being distinctly separated ; one example
of the three males presented by Mr. Buxton has six divisions, sepa-
rated only by the black nervures.

3f. Violet apical patch of the male bordered on both sides with
black ; internal vein and apical two thirds of remaining veins
beyond cell of primaries black; basal area and internal two
fifths of secondaries dusted with grey ; internal area of primaries
tinted with sulphur yellow; secondaries with black veins, ter-
minating in black marginal spots: below, the apex of primaries
and the secondaries tinted with pink, the latter with an oblique
dotted line (composed of four to five small brown spots); base
of costa ochraceous. Female with the apical patch orange,
bordered with black and crossed by black spots, or black crossed
by five white spots: secondaries below pinkish grey or yel-
lowish, reticulated with pale brown, crossed by an oblique brown

streak, and with brown outer borders; base of costa sometimes
ochreous.

19. TERACOLUS JALONE.

3, Euchloé jalone, Butler, Cist. Ent. i. p. 14. n. 1 (1869).
Callosune jalone, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 500. n. 6 (1871).
Teracolus jalone (part.), Butler, Lep. Exot. p. 116 (1872).
Anthocaris ione (sic), Lucas, Lep. Exot. pl. 37. fig. 4 (1835).

3 2, Anthocharis ione, Hopffer in Peters’s Reise n. Mossamb.

Zool. v. p. 357, pl. 21. figs. 1-6 (1862).

3, White Nile, Coll. Druce, E. Africa? B.M.
The characters of the females are taken from Hopffer’s figures.

3g. Nearly allied to the preceding ; violet apical patch of male much
larger, more broadly black-bordered ; internal vein and apical
half of remaining veins beyond cell of primaries, and all the
veins of secondaries, black ; basal third of primaries and base
of secondaries dusted with black, black marginal spots; apical
area of primaries and whole of secondaries below cream-coloured ;
primaries with black dot at end of cell, a black squamose spot

132 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

on the margin of the apical area within the lower discoidal
interspace, and two marginal spots terminating the first and
second median branches; secondaries with the base of costa
orange; a black discocellar dot; a broad oblique black bar,
interrupted by the nervures from costa to third median, a spot
on second median interspace, a dot on first median, and a spot
on interno-median interspace, all black. Female with the apical
patch orange, bordered with black, and crossed by a broad lunu-
lated black band, or black spotted witb yellow; secondaries
below either pinkish grey, with a broad, tapering, oblique brown
streak, or yellow with a subangulated macular black streak
(as ia the male); with costa orange, and outer border broadly
brown. T'. imperator.

20. TERACOLUS IMPERATOR.

Anthocharis ione, Reiche, in Ferret & Galinier, Voy. Abyss. pl. 30.
figs. 1, 2, 5-7 (1849).

Callosune ione (part.), Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 500 (1871).

Teracolus jobina (part.), Butler, Lep, Exot. p, 116 (1872).

3, Senegal (2. C. Buxton). Type, B.M.

3h. Violet apical patch of male very widely bordered with black ;
internal vein of primaries white, remaining veins partly black ;
base densely dusted with grey ; veins of secondaries frequently
black, but not so distinctly as in the two preceding forms, with
terminal black spots; apex of primaries and the whole of
secondaries below cream-coloured, with veins dusky ; nervures
terminating in black dots ; black discocellular dots ; secondaries
below with a black subcostal spot (not a transverse bar). Female
with the apical patch orange, bordered with black and crossed by
black spots, or black with three decreasing white spots ; second-
aries below lemon-yellow, partially reticulated with brown, crossed
by an oblique brown streak, and two brown spots on first median
and interno-median interspaces ; discocellular spots well marked.

21. TERACOLUS IONE.

Pieris ione, Godart, Enc. Méth. ix. p. 140. n. 74 (1819).

Anthocharis ione (part.), Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 515 (1836).

Callosune ione (part.), Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 500. n. 3 (1871).

Anthocharis erone, Angas, Kaffirs Illustrated, pl. 30. fig. 3 (1849).

Var. Anthopsyche speciosa, Wallengren, Kongl. Svenska Vetensk.
Akad. Handl. p. 16 (1857).

3 Q, Natal (Becker, Argent, Burrows, E. C. Buxton). B.M.

A small male, agreeing with Wallengren’s description, is amongst
the specimens presented by Mr. Buxton.

3%. Violet patch of the male only represented by two spots ;
under surface of secondaries yellow.

22. TERACOLUS EUNOMA.
Pieris eunoma, Hopffer, Ber. Verh. Ak. Berl. p. 640. n. 2 (1855) ;

1876.] | MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 133

Peters, Reise n. Mossamb. Zool. v. p. 353, pl. 23. figs. 1, 2
(1862).

Mozambique.

4. Wings of male above uniformly sulphur-yellow, with the apex of
primaries and a spot at end of cell black; secondaries below
yellow, with an interrupted oblique black streak: female pale
sulphur-yellow, almost white, with the outer margins broadly
black ; a black discocellular spot in primaries ; secondaries
below lemon-yellow, with an angulated black streak.

23. TERACOLUS MANANHARI.

Pieris mananhari, Ward, Ent. Mo. Mag. vi. p. 224 (1870); Afr.
Lep. pl. i. figs. 1-4 (1873).

Teracolus mananhari, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 500. n. 2 (1871).

Madagascar.

This extraordinary species is clearly related to the 7’. ione group,
but it is very dissimilar from all the species in the genus.

| 5. Wings white, more or less clouded with orange ; primaries
of the males with grey apical border and black veins.

5a. Wings of male grey at base; orange area restricted and pale.

24. TrRACOLUS HALIMEDE.

Pontia halimede, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 7. figs. 12-15 (1829).

Pieris halimede, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 526. n. 129 (1836).

Idmais halimede, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 499. n. 13 (1871).

Anthocharis leo, Butler, Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. xvi. p. 397
(1865).

White Nile (Petherick). B.M

5 6. Wings of male almost entirely covered with deep orange.

25. TrERACOLUS PLEIONE.

Pontia pleione, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 8. figs. 7, 8 (1829).

Terias pleione, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 672. n. 33 (1836)

Idmais pleione, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 499. n. 14 (1871).

Idmais miriam, Felder, Reise der Nov. Lep. ser. 2, p. 190. n. 186
pl. 27. figs. 3, 4 (1865).

Teracolus chrysomela, Butler, Cist. Ent. p. 244 (1874).

White Nile (Petherick). B.M.

This species is much deeper in colour than Klug represents it to
be in his figure ; its affinities seem about equally balanced between
the two groups, of which 7. fausta and J’. eupompe may be consi-
dered as typical, the male nearly resembling the former, the female
more closely approaching the latter.

The succeeding six species, constituting my Section 6, might
perhaps be separated generically from Teracolus, inasmuch as the
males have an embossed spot on the internal area of primaries near

134 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

the base; they could not constitute the genus Idmais even in a re-
stricted sense, inasmuch as Boisduval indicates I. calais as his type,
thus :—

“Nous avions donné primitivement 4 ce genre le nom de Calais,
en prenant comme générique le nom de l’espéce la plus connue ;
mais comme ce changement de nom spécifique en nom générique
n’est pas sans inconvénients, nous lui avons substitué celui d’ Idmais.”

For my part I see litcle utility in distinguishing a group so mani-
festly intermediate between the 7’. halimede and Calais groups, more
especially since the structural distinction is confined to one sex.

6. Wings entirely orange or white above, with black discocellular
spots in primaries, and a maculated black border, expanding in
primaries towards the costa, and more or less enclosing a series
of orange or white spots.

26. TERACOLUS FAUSTA.

Papilio fausta, Olivier, Voy. dans Emp. Oth., L’Egypte et la
Perse, Atlas, pl. 33. figs. 4 a, 6 (1801).

Pieris fausta, Godart, Enc. Méth. ix. p. 132. n. 41 (1819).

Pontia fausta, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 8. figs. 9-12 (1829).

Idmais fausta, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 586. n. 2 (1836).

3 2, Baghdad (W. K. Loftus). B.M.

Mr. Moore has this species from N.W. India.

27. TERACOLUS FAUSTINA.

Idmais faustina, Felder, Reise der Nov. Lep. ii. p. 190. n. 187,
(1865).
?

The colouring of the underside differs from any thing that I have
seen; the spots on the disk being lutescent or orange.

28. TERACOLUS ROSACEUS, n. sp. (Plate VII. fig. 6.)

3. Wings above precisely like dark females of T. fausta, excepting
that the secondaries have a white patch above the subcostal nervure,
and the marginal black spots are linear: wings below pale creamy
yellow ; primaries with the discocellular spot small, lunate, black,
with light centre; apical border rosy, bounded within by six ill-
defined spots of the ground-colour, limited by an inner series of
decreasing spots, the upper four rusty, the lower two minute and
black ; secondaries with a pale-centred buff discocellular spot ;
seven discal spots in a J-shaped series, the first brown, the re-
mainder buff-coloured; outer border rosy; body below creamy-
white. Expanse of wings | inch 9 lines.

Akote. Type, coll. F. Moore.

The succeeding species is nearly allied, but seems to me to be
distinct.

2). TERACOLUS ORIENS, n. sp. (Plate VII. fig. 7.)
3. Wings above precisely like dark females of T. fausta, ex-

1876.] | MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 135

cepting that the secondaries have a white patch above the subcostal
nervure : wings below pale yellowish white, slightly rosy towards the
base; primaries with the discocellular spot small, elliptical, black,
with white centre; apical border pale reddish-orange, bounded
within by six ill-defined yellowish spots, limited by an inner series of
seven decreasing spots, the upper five rusty-brown, the lower two
black; secondaries with a pale-centred rusty discocellular Spot ;
seven discal spots in an irregular arched series, all rusty ; outer
border pale reddish orange, diffused internally ; body below creamy-
white. Expanse of wings 1 inch 8 lines.

2. Altogether paler ; primaries with the costa and base cinereous ;
discocellular spot small, as in the male ; apical border dark brown,
enclosing six spots internally and seven externally ; secondaries with
six large subquadrate marginal dark brown Spots: wings below
creamy sulphur-yellow, rather darker towards the base and on the
outer margins; otherwise asin the male. Expanse of wings 2 inches.

3, Kalka, foot of Himalayas (Boys, B.M.). 2, Kattywar (coll.
Moore).

30. TERACOLUS SOLARIS, 0. sp.

3. Wings above like dark females of 7. fausta, but altogether
of a deeper orange-colour, with the costa of primaries ash-coloured,
and the discocellular spot much larger ; secondaries with a white
patch above subcostal: wings below pale creamy yellow, deeper
towards the base, the markings as in the preceding species. Ex-
panse of wings 2 inches 2 lines.

3 var. Wings above paler in tint; ash-coloured costa of prima-
ries darker ; markings below rather paler. Expanse of wings 1 inch
13 lines.

3, Scinde? (B.M.); ¢ var., N.W. India (coll. F. Moore).

Wallace labelled this as his Idmais fulvia ; but it is quite distinct.

31. TERACOLUS FULVIA.

3, Idmais fulvia, Wallace, Trans. Ent. Soe. ser. 3, vol. iv. p. 392.
n. 5, pl. 9. fig. 5 (1867).

Idmais tripuncta, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. p- 221, pl. 17. fig. 9
(1868).

3 2, N. W. India. Type, coll. Moore.

The female is white instead of orange.

7. Closely allied to the preceding group ; wings pale salmon-colour
or white above, with broad black-brown outer borders, inter-
sected by spots of the ground-colour; wings below coloured
much as in Colias. Idmais, Boisd. Type I. calais.

32. TERACOLUS VESTALIS, n. sp. (Plate VII. fig. 10.)

3 ©. Size of the preceding group of species: white above, with
a broad irregular external black border; two white spots placed
obliquely below the apex of primaries, and a third much larger on
second median interspace ; a large black spot at the end of the cell ;

136 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

the subcostal area, discoidal cell (excepting its inferior angle), and the
base of interno-mediau area black-brown, somewhat diffused in the
male: wings below sulphur-yellow, the male with the internal area
of primaries white, the female with the disk white ; the male slightly
tinted on outer border of primaries, and over the whole of seconda-
ries, with ochraceous ; minute marginal black dots at the termina-
tions of the nervures; primaries with a large black spot, with a
squamose yellow centre at end of cell; three black spots near outer
margin, below the median branches ; secondaries with a blackish sub-
apical costal spot ; a minute blackish annular dot at end of cell; outer
border of upperside visible through the wing; entire wing sprinkled
with black scales. Expanse of wings, ¢ 2 inches, 2 1 inch 11 lines.
S, Scinde (Le Mesurier); 9, Agra, N.W. Punjab. Coll. Moore.

33. TERACOLUS PUELLARIS, N. sp.

& 2. Allied to the preceding, but considerably smaller ; outer
border in the male narrower ; basal area of primaries and base of
secondaries grey, irrorated with brown: wings below sulphur-yellow,
the internal area white; black spots near outer margin of primaries
placed more irregularly, the lower of the three extending downwards
and expanding upon the inner margin; subapical costal spot of
secondaries ill-defined. Expanse of wings, d 1 inch 5 lines, ? | inch
6 lines.

3, Punjab, Wuzeerabad (Hearsay, B.M.).; 2, Scinde (coll.
F. Moore).

This may possibly be a dwarfed form of the preceding species ;
but I think not.

34, TERACOLUS OCHREIPENNIS, 0. sp.

3 2. Above like the preceding species, white, with black ir-
regular outer border, marked in the primaries with three white spots,
black discocellular spot, and grey base: below, however, it differs in
having the primaries with the outer border pale ochreous ; seconda-
ries entirely pale ochreous or buff. Expanse of wings, ¢1 inch 4 to
5 lines, 2 1 inch 6 to 8 lines.

3, India; ¢ 2, Punjab; 9, Scinde; 9? var., N. India.

Colls. Moore and B.M.

The three preceding species have been considered by some Lepi-
dopterists females of n. 37, which has been confounded with the
Phisadia of Godart.

35, TERACOLUS PHISADIA.

3. Pieris phisadia, Godart, Enc. Méth. ix. p. 132. n. 40 (1819).

Idmais phisadia, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 587. n. 3 (1836).

3 9. Pontia arne, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 7. figs. 1-4 (1829).

3. Idmais arne, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. pl. 19. fig. 2
(1836).

Senegal. B.M

This species has the primaries pale pinkish salmon-colour, and the
secondaries white ; the female is, according to Klug’s figure, yellow.

,’

1876.] MR. A.G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUs. 137

36. TERACOLUS ZOE..

Anthocharis zoé, Grandidier, Rev. Zool. p. 272 (1867).
Callosune zoé, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 504. n. 5] (1871).
Madagascar.

This species seems to me to be closely allied to the preceding ;
Kirby, however, refers it to Callosune, whilst he places 7’. phisadia
in the genus Idmais.

I am pleased to find a typical Idmais described as an Anthocharis
by a man who, inasmuch as he worked but little at the Lepidoptera,
was obliged, when he did so, to examine into their structure, because
it is a confirmation of my own conviction that Idmais does not differ
structurally from the group Callosune, hitherto regarded as a distinct
genus by many Lepidopterists.

37. TERACOLUS PROTRACTUS, 0. sp.

3 ¢. Wings above rosy salmon-colour, the base, costa of prima-
ries, abdominal area of secondaries, and five to seven decreasing spots
on the outer border of primaries ashen-grey ; a broad black-brown
outer border, paler, and occupying nearly half the wing in the
secondaries of the female: wings below sordid pale buff ; primaries
with the base of costa and cell sulphur-yellow ; outer border greyish,
owing to the semitransparency of the wing; a black spot at end
of cell, and three below median branches, the lowest one bifid;
secondaries with the external area greyish, as in the primaries.
Expanse of wings, d 1 inch 8 to 9 lines, 9 1 inch 7 to 9 lines.

3, Punjab (coll. B.M.); 9, Punjab (coll. F. Moore).

38. TERACOLUS MODESTUS, nN. sp.

3. Very like 7. amata, pale pinky salmon-colour, grey at base ;
the outer border broadly black-brown, upon primaries very feebly
sinuated internally between the median branches, barely enclosing a
spot of the ground-colour on interno-median interspace, and marked
by an oblique slightly inarched series of three subapical points of the
same colour, upon secondaries bordered internally by four minute
points of the ground-colour, limited by black dots and surrounded
with grey ; costal area black-brown, broader in the male than the
female, and on the primaries dusted in front with grey: wings of the
male below yellow as in T. amata, with similar markings, but the
spots at end of cells very minute and ill-defined: the female, which
is paler above than the male, is slightly tinted with grey below ; two
or three extremely ill-defined ochreous spots beyond the cell of pri-
maries and bounding the usual pale yellow spots of the disk ; fringe
feebly pink ; secondaries with a discal series of five ochreous spots,
and a pale-centred ochraceous discocellular spot. Expanse of wings
1 inch 7 lines, 2 1 inch 5 lines.

Ceylon (Templeton). 3 2, type, B.M.

A white variety of the female occurs, not differing on the under
surface.

138 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

39. TERACOLUS AMATA.

Papilio amata, Fabricius, Syst. Ent. p. 476. n. 143 (1775).

Idmais amata, Butler, Fabr. Cat. p. 217. n. 1 (1869).

Papilio calais (part), Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 351, A—D (1782),
bad figures.

3 2, Kurnool; ¢ 2, Balasore; ¢, Bombay; 9, Madras ;
3, Deccan ; 2, Coromandel. Colls. F. Moore and B.M.

The last two of the examples quoted above are in the Museum
collection: the species is the size of 7’. calais (the female sometimes
larger) ; it is much like 7’. dynamene ; but the outline of the marginal
border is much less irregular, and the colouring of the underside
clear, the female only showing more or less strongly defined trans-
verse discal spots. A white female from Kurnool is in Mr, Moore’s
collection ; it has the markings of the underside better defined than
usual in the typical female.

40. TERACOLUS CYPR&A.

Papilio cyprea, Fabricius, Ent. Syst. ii. p. 203. n. 634 (1793).

3 2, Bombay (8 examples). Coll. F. Moore.

This species is considerably larger than 7. calais, the figure of
which Fabricius quotes for it; the male measures | inch 8 lines to
2 inches 1 line, and the female 1 inch 11 lines to 2 inches 2 lines.
It is easily distinguished from 7. calais on the underside by the
absence of the orange spot on disk of primaries, and by its deeper
coloration ; from the preceding species 7’. amata it is easily distin-
guished by its more elongated primaries, deeper coloration below,
and the more irregular outer border of the primaries, the enclosed
spot on interno-median interspace being much broader.

There is a white female in the collection of the British Museum ;
it is smaller than typical females, and the ground-colour on the
under surface is paler.

41. TERACOLUS DYNAMENE.

Pontia dynamene, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 6 figs. 15, 16 (1829).

Idmais dynamene, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 588. n. 5 (1836).

3, N. India (B.M.); ¢ 9, Scinde and Agra; ¢, Kattywur;
2, Punjab (coll. F. Moore).

This species is frequently confounded with 7. amata in collections.
It is, however characterized by a much less rounded outer margin to
the primaries, paler and more greyish coloration, the abdominal
half of secondaries distinctly grey in the male, the inner edge of the
external border of primaries more irregular even than in 7’. cyprea,
the greener coloration of the under surface, the paler female, which
has a distinct orange blotch (cut by the median nervure and its first
two branches) on the under surface of the primaries, as in 7’. calais,
and in the greater prominence of the pale marginal interneryular
liturze on the upper surface.

42. TERACOLUS CARNIFER, n.sp. (Plate VII. figs. 8, 9.)
3. Allied to the preceding species, but smaller, and of a clearer

1876.] MR. A. G. BUTLER ON fHE GENUS TERACOLUS. 139

and brighter colour, the costa of primaries, base, and abdominal area
of secondaries much less strongly suffused with grey ; the black dis-
cocellular spot of primaries more conical in shape ; the outer blackish
border terminating abruptly upon the first median branch, the margin
alone being black ; the black spot on interno-median area smaller and
not connected with the outer border ; six discal spots of the ground-
colour running in a curved series through the centre of the border,
the first four large, placed in pairs, the last two small and well
separated ; six submarginal smaller spots, the two at apex elongated ;
secondaries with five large diamond-shaped brown spots at the end
of the nervures, the upper three united iuto an apical marginal band ;
the last of these spots ill-defined on a grey ground at end of second
median branch; the first median and internal nervures also terminate
in diamond-shaped grey spots; three small black spots on the disk,
above the median nervures ; costal area, excepting at apex, broadly
black: wings below nearly as in 7’. dynamene, but clearer in colour,
with a suffused orange patch over the median nervure. LExpanse of
wings 1 inch 5 lines.

Mynpuri, N.W. Punjab. Type, coll. F. Moore.

43, TERACOLUS CALAIS.

Papilio calais, Cramer, Pap. Exot. i. pl. 53. figs. c, p (1779).

Idmais calais, Trimen, Rhop. Afr. Austr. p. 61. n. 40 (1862).

Congo (Curror). B.M.

This species is of the size and form of 7. amata, but can readily
be distinguished by the orange patch below, which is more strongly
developed than in any other species; the female has the disk and
external spots of the primaries and the whole of the ground-colour of
secondaries whitish. Cramer confounded the African species with the

insect from Coromandel, which he figured under the same name in
his fourth volume.

8. Wings white or sulphur-yellow, spotted or banded above with
black or grey, the apex of primaries invariably orange in the
males, generally black in the females with a central orange,
yellow, or white macular band ; this band, however, is occa-
sionally absent, leaving the apex wholly black. Callosune,
Doubleday.

8a. Orange apical patch of the male without an internal black
edge, interrupted internally on secoud median interspace by a
transverse black spot. Typical form, 7. interruptus.

44, TrRACOLUS suBFUMOsUS, n. sp. (Plate VI. fig. 3.)

3. Very like 7. interruptus, but with no internal blackish streak
on the primaries, with the black outer border of the orange patch
narrower, the inner spot small; the inferior extremity of the orange
patch not enclosed by a black expansion of the border; secondaries
with the marginal spots small: primaries below white, the apical
area clay-coloured speckled with grey and bordered internally by a
dull orange diffused streak ; secondaries pale buff, densely irrorated

140 MR, A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

with grey, the upper half of discoidal cell, the lower half of discoidal
interspace, and the centres of the interspaces thence to the costa
whitish ; nervures terminating in minute black points; costa and
apical half of outer margin ochraceous. LExpanse of wings | inch
6 lines.

©. Sulphur-yellow or white, base dusky; primaries with a more
or less defined (but always pale) grey internal streak; a black point
at end of cell; outer margin broadly black, dentate-hastate inter-
nally ; immediately beyond and touching the points of the denticles
an oblique angulated black band (the two sometimes barely distin-
guishable owing to the expansion of the black points) ; the spots left
between the border and the band and a narrow streak inside the latter
orange or sulphur-yellow; secondaries with a series of triangular
marginal black spots, a blackish subapical costal spot, and a badly-
defined W-shaped marking cut by the third median branch ; wings
below more deeply coloured than in the male ; the cell of primaries
tinted with sulphur-yellow; otherwise the same. Expanse of wings
1 inch 4-5 lines.

N.E. of Natal (12 examples, #. C. Buzton). Type, B.M.

45. TERACOLUS Lycoris, n. sp. (Plate VI. fig. 6.)

3. Wings above as in the preceding species ; secondaries below
sandy whitish, irrorated with grey-brown; a black-and-orange dot
at end of ce)l; a congregation of brown atoms on subcostal inter-
space near apex, and another on the disk, cut by the third median
branch. Expanse of wings 1 inch 5 lines.

2. Wings above white; base grey ; primaries with a more or less
defined but always pale grey internal streak, ending in a blackish
spot; a black dot at end of cell; apex broadly black, crossed by an
ill-defined series of minute squamose orange spots; inner edge of
apical patch sometimes bordered with sulphur-yellow ; secondaries
with a more or less strongly defined series of marginal black spots,
the three next to apex largest and sometimes united ; a black sub-
apical costal spot, and a larger spot on discoidal interspace, sometimes
throwing off a smaller diffused blackish spot on each side: primaries
below white, showing the discocellular dot and internal spot of upper
surface ; apex clay-coloured or sandy, irrorated with grey, and bor-
dered within by an oblique series of four black or brown spots ;
secondaries clay-coloured or sandy, irrorated with grey; a black
spot or black-and-orange point at end of cell; and an angulated
series of black or brown discal spots. Expanse of wings 1 inch
4-5 lines.

Between Natal and Delagoa Bay (4 examples, 2. C. Buxton).

Type, B.M.

This is the Anthopsyche eucharis of Wallengren, but not of

Fabricius.

46. TERACOLUS FLAMINIA, n.sp. (Plate VI. fig. 1.)

¢. Like 7. subfumosus above, but the primaries with a more or
less defined dusky spot on interno-median interspace, sometimes

1876.]| mR. A.G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 141

connected by a greyish internal streak with the base ; secondaries
with the marginal spots occasionally larger, and a dusky ill-defined
spot on the second median interspace: primaries below with the
apical area dull lemon-yellow, bounded internally by an angulated
brown line, followed by and edging a broad orange streak ; secon-
daries sandy whitish, irrorated sparsely with brown, a congregation
of brown scales on the costa near apex, and an ill-defined streak
across the median branches ; costa at base orange, a black and orange
point at end of cell. Expanse of wings 1 inch 4-7 lines.

2. Sulphur-yellow above, base slightly greyish, internal area of
primaries grey, darkest at base and in a spot beyond the middle,
where it terminates ; outer margin bordered by brown triangular
connected spots, the apices of the nervures also brown; a narrow
angulated discal brown streak halfway between the cell and apex; a
minute black point at end of cell; secondaries with a marginal series
of brown spots, a lunular subapical spot on subcostal interspace ; a
squamose brown discal streak across the median branches: wings
below with the base of primaries yellow and the secondaries slightly
darker; otherwise as in the male. Expanse of wings 1 inch 3 lines.

Between Natal and Delagoa Bay (4 examples, E. C. Buxton).

Type, B.M.

This is a well-marked little species, easily distinguished by the

coloration of the under surface.

47, TeRACOLUS Ly4£US, n. sp. (Plate VI. fig. 2.)

3. Wings above white, base greyish black, base of costa, head,
palpi, and prothorax pinkish ; centre of costa of primaries markedly
black ; apex orange, sharply cut, with lilacine reflections ; outer
border to first median branch black, strongly sinuated between the
veins, whose apices are also black ; a well-defined rounded black spot,
touching the third median branch, upon the second median inter-
space ; fringe, exceptiug at external angle, rosy ; an ill-defined in-
ternal pale grey streak, slightly darker at its extremity ; secondaries
with a marginal series of black spots, more or less triangular; fringe
rosy at anal angle: primaries below with the apical area chrome-
yellow, irrorated with grey and cut by an angulated orange streak ;
fringe and costa as above ; secondaries rosy, irrorated with grey; a
dusky subapical spot, and a second on second median interspace ; an
orange-and-black discocellular point ; costa deep orange. Expanse
of wings 1 inch 4 lines.

2. White above, with the apex of primaries yellow and the costa
rosy; base yellow, irrorated with grey; primaries with apical
markings, as in the preceding species, but broader; a greyish ill-
defined internal streak, terminating in a brown spot; secondaries
with a marginal series of large brown spots, a brown subapical spot,
and a W-shaped discal marking cat by the third median branch:
wings below as in the male, but rather paler. Expanse of wings
1 inch 4 lines.

Between Natal and Delagoa Bay (3 examples, HZ. C. Buxton).

Type, B.M.

142 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

48. TERACOLUS FRIGA, n.sp. (Plate VI. fig. 5.)

3, 2. White above, the female slightly tinted with sulphur-
yellow towards the base; base blackish grey ; primaries with the
apex orange; costa of the male broadly black in the centre; outer
margin black, dentate-hastate, the apices of the nervures black, male
with the usual black spot on the orange, the female with the angu-
lated black streak ; a black internal spot indicating the termination
of a greyish streak (dimly visible in the female only); secondaries
with a marginal series of conical black spots united in the female ; an
ill-defined W-shaped marking touching the third marginal spot:
primaries below white; a black dot at end of cell; apex in the male
broadly dull reddish, becoming greyish externally and crossed by a
scarcely visible angulated grey streak ; costa and apex of the female
ochreous, irrorated with grey; a subapical angulated brown streak ;
base and subcostal area sulphur-yellow ; secondaries of the male
sordid white, irrorated with blackish ; the costa deep orange; two
subapical ochreous spots; an orange-bordered black dot at end of
cell; secondaries of the female sandy, becoming whitish towards the
centre, densely irrorated with purplish brown ; two subapical brown
spots ; costa orange; a black-and-orange dot at end of cell. Expanse
of wings ¢ 1 inch 5 lines, 9 1 inch 4 lines.

N.E. of Natal (2. C. Buaton). Type, B.M.

49. TERACOLUS GALATHINUS, 0. sp.

3. Above like 7’. interruptus, excepting that there is a submar-
ginal zigzag grey streak from the radial to the internal nervure of
secondaries : primaries below white; a black discocellular point ;
apical area reddish orange, with a subapical diffused yellow spot ;
fringe rosy; secondaries rosy, irrorated with brown; a subapical
brown spot, and a discal brown streak across the median branches ;
costa deep orange; a black-and-orange dot at end of cell. Expanse
of wings | inch 6 lines,

@. White, with the subapical and subbasal areas yellow, base grey ;
primaries with the costa and fringe rosy ; a black discocellular spot ;
a broad blackish internal streak terminating in a black spot; apex
broadly black, sometimes crossed by a curved series of cuneiform
yellow spots; secondaries with a marginal series of conical black
spots; an irregular discal black streak; apex yellowish: primaries
below white, the basal and costal areas sulphur-yellow: a black
point at end of cell; apical area clay-coloured, reddish externally,
and bounded within by a brown angulated streak bordered with dull
reddish orange; secondaries as in the male, but darker. Expanse of
wings | inch 4 lines.

N.E. of Natal (1 5,6 9, E. C. Burton). Type, B.M.

50. TERACOLUS INTERRUPTUS.

3, 9 Teracolus interruptus, Butler, P. Z. 8. p. 724 (1871); Lep.
Exot. p. 115, pl. xhii. figs. 1, 2 (1872).—
S$ 2, Loanda (coll. R. Meldola); 3, Angola (LZ. C. Buxton).
B.M.

1876.| MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 143

I have compared our example with male specimens given to me
by Mr. Ansell, from Kinsembo, and find no difference.

51, TeRacoLus LucuLuus. (Plate VI. fig. 4.)

gd. Above very like the preceding species, but the internal streak
of primaries more defined, the base and costa of secondaries blackish,
terminating near apex in a black costal spot; marginal spots of
secondaries more distinctly separated : wings below white, primaries
with the apical area sulphur-yellow, covered internally by a broad
orange patch (not so broad as in 7. interruptus), through the centre
of which runs an angulated grey streak; a black point at end of
cell; a blackish spot on internal area ; secondaries tinted with pale
sulphur-yellow at apex ; basal half of costa orange, a blackish sub-
apical costal spot ; a black-and-orange dot at end of cell; an angu-
lated brown marking on the disk, cut by the third median branch ;
a marginal series of black dots terminating the nervures. Expanse
of wings 1 inch 5 lines.

2, Teracolus loandicus (in part), Butler, P. Z. 8. p. 724 (1871);
Lep. Exot. p. 91, pl. xxxiv. fig. 9 (1872).

3, Ambriz, October 1872 (J. J. Monteiro, B.M.); 2, Loanda
(coll. R. Meldola).

I have no doubt that I made a mistake in referring the above
female to my 7. loandicus, the differences between it and the female
of T. interruptus being precisely parallel to the differences between
the two males. T. loandicus will come into another section, in
which the females have the marginal spots of secondaries rather
small, the orange patch of primaries curved and not extending be-
yond the limiting streak, and an interrupted angular streak from
costa to internal area of secondaries.

52. TERACOLUS GELASINUS, N. sp.

dg. Nearly allied to 7. interruptus, but readily distinguished by
the absence of the internal streak of primaries and the small mar-
ginal spots of secondaries : wings below white, the nervures termi-
nating in black dots, all the wings with black dots at the end of the
cells ; primaries with the apex broadly sulphur-yellow, bounded in-
ternally by a rather narrow orange band, on which are a few dusky
scales ; sometimes a small dusky spot near inner margin beyond the
middle ; secondaries speckled with brown, with the basal third of
costa orange, sometimes a small dusky spot on second median inter-
space. Expanse of wings 1 inch 4-7 lines.

3. Quanza, August 1872; ¢, Ambriz, October 1872 (J. J.
Monteiro). Type, B.M.

53. TERACOLUS ANTIGONE.

Anthocharis antigone, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 572. n. 19
(1836). |

Callosune antigone, Kirby, Syn. Cat, p. 502. n. 21 (1871).

144 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

Anthocharis phlegetonia, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 576.
n. 25 (1836).

Callosune phlegetonia, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 503. n. 30 (1871).

West Africa. B.M.

The Anthocharis phlegetonia of Wallengren and the 4. achina of
Lucas are distinct species.

54. TERACOLUS EIONE.

Anthocharis eione, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 578. n. 29
(1836).

Callosune eione, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 503. n. 35 (1871).

Var. Anthopsyche phlegetonia, Wallengren, Lep. Rhop. Caffr.
p. 13 (1857).

3 @, 8. Africa (Z.C. Buxton); 2, Zoolu (Sir A. Smith). B.M.

55. TERACOLUS STYGIA.

Anthopsyche stygia, Felder, Reise der Nov. Lep. ii. p. 188. n. 183
(1865).

Callosune stygia, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 503. n. 31 (1871).

Bogos.
Allied to T. etone.

56, TERACOLUS ISAURA.

Anthocharis isaura, Lucas, Rev. Zool. p. 424 (1852).

Callosune isaura, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 503. n. 38 (1871).

Abyssinia.

57. TERACOLUS DALILA.

Anthopsyche dalila, Felder, Reise der Nov. Lep. ii. p. 188. n. 184
(1865).

Callosune dalila, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 503. n. 32 (1871).

Bogos.

58. TERACOLUS DAIRA.

3 2, Pontia daira, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 8. figs. 1-4 (1829).

Anthocharis daira, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 579. n. 30
(1836).

Oallosune daira, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 503. n. 34 (1871).

3 2, White Nile (Petherick). B.M.

8 6. Orange apical patch with or without a black edge, but not in-
terrupted internally in the male by black spots.

59, TERACOLUS GLYCERA, 0. sp.

3. Wings above white, with an oblique slightly incurved orange
apical patch on primaries ; centre of costa and outer margin black,
the latter dentate-sinuate ; a greyish internal streak terminating in
a blackish spot ; secondaries with the base and costal area near apex
grey ; a marginal series of triangular black spots, and, touching them,

1876.] MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 145

a submarginal grey streak: wings below white; primaries with the
discoidal cell bright sulphur-yellow, a black dot at the end of it;
apex pale lemon-yellow, bounded internally by an orange streak; a
dusky spot on internal area; secondaries with the base of costa ~
orange; a black-and-orange dot at end of cell; a dusky streak across
the median branches. Expanse of wings 1 inch 6 lines.

Africa ? Type, coll. B.M.

60. TERACOLUS PALLENE.

Anthocharis pallene, Hopffer, Ber. Verh. Ak. Berl. p. 640. n. 4
(1855); Peters’s Reise n. Mossamb. Zool. v. p. 358, pl. 23. figs. 7, 8
(1862).

Callosune pallene, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 504. n. 50 (1871).

Mozambique.

61. TERACOLUS NOUNA.

Anthocharis nouna, Lucas, Exp]. Alg. Zool. iii. p. 350. n. 14, pl. 1.
fig. 2 (1849).

Callosune nouna, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 503. n. 39 (1871).

Algeria.

62. TERACOLUS LIAGORE.

Pontia liagore, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 6. figs. 5-8 (1829).

Anthocharis liagore, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 580. n. 33
(1836).

Callosune liagore, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 503. n. 42 (1871).

Arabia.

63. TERACOLUS EPHYIA.

Pontia ephyia, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 6. figs. 9, 10 (1829).

Anthocharis ephyia, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 580. n. 32
(1836).

Callosune ephyia, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 503. n. 40 (1871).

Arabia.

64, TERACOLUS LAIS, 0. sp.

3. Like the preceding species, but whiter, the orange patch o
primaries much more oblique and consequently shorter, not extend-
ing below the third median branch, but bordered internally by a
broader blackish band; primaries with a well-defined discocellular
spot: below, the secondaries have a black-and-orange dot at end of
cell, the base of costa orange ; the black irrorations scattered all over
the wing, Expanse of wings 1 inch 4 lines.

Orange River, S. Africa. Type, B.M.

65. TERACOLUS HALYATTES, n. sp. (Plate VI. fig. 8.)

g. Wings above white, primaries with an orange apical patch,
more or less excavated internally, enclosed by a black border, and
crossed by blackish veins; base blackish; a more or less defined

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. X. 10

146 MR, A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

black dot at end of cell; secondaries with small black spots termi-
nating the veins, base blackish: primaries below with the costa
rosy brownish; the apical area dull sandy ochraceous, irrorated
with brown ; a black dot at end of cell; secondaries sandy with a
rosy tinge, irrorated with brown ; a squamose subapical costal spot,
and an ill-defined streak across the median branches, brown ; base
of costa orange, a black-and-orange dot at end of cell. Expanse of
wings 1 inch 2-5 lines.

Q. White or sulphur-yellow above, base grey ; primaries with the
costa rosy, an internal grey streak, terminating at second third of
wing in a transverse irregular blackish litura, which almost meets a
spur from the apical area; the latter black, deeply notched inter-
nally, enclosing an oblique series of spots, four or five in number,
orange, yellow, or white; the inner edge of the apical border
bounded with orange in the orange-spotted form, and with an orange
tint in the yellow-spotted form: secondaries with the cell and basal
half of the interno-median and first median interspaces grey ; a more
or less defined angulated discal black streak thence to the costa; a
marginal series of tolerably large black spots. Primaries below white
or pale yellow, the bases broadly sulphur-yellow ; apical area sandy
or yellowish ochraceous, irrorated with brown and bounded by a pale
orange or bright yellow nebulous streak enclosing a macular brown
streak ; a bisinuate brown litura, cut by the first median branch ; a
black dot at end of cell: secondaries as in the male, excepting that
the subapical spot and discal streak are united into an angulated bar.
Expanse of wings 1 inch 5-8 lines.

N.E. of Natal (#. C. Buxton). Type, B.M.

66. TERACOLUs ITHONUS, n. sp. (Plate VI. fig. 7.)

3. Wings above white, blackish at base: primaries with a large
triangular reddish-orange apical patch, not excavated, but notched
internally, a few brown scales along its inner border ; apical portion
of costa and outer margin to first median nervule black; the mar-
ginal border dentate-sinuate, and throwing off long spurs along the
nervures, but not completely separating the apicai patch ; a minute
black dot at end of cell: secondaries with a series of six black mar-
ginal dots. Primaries below white, the apical area lemon-yellow,
irrorated with grey ; a black dot at end of cell: secondaries sandy
whitish, strongly reticulated with brown; a black dot at end of cell;
base of costa orange. Expanse of wings 1 inch 9 lines.

Q. Very like the females of the preceding species, but with all the
black portions of the wing much less pronounced, the grey internal
streak of primaries pale and ending in a distinct dark spot (not in an
irregular transverse litura) ; the apical spots larger; the undersides
of secondaries more evidently brown-speckled. Expanse of wings
1 inch 5-8 lines.

N.E. of Natal (4 examples, H. C. Buaton). Type, B.M.

67. TERACOLUS HARMONIDES, 0. sp.
3. Like a small example of the preceding species above, but the

1876.] | MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 147

marginal dots of secondaries still smaller: primaries below with the
apical area sandy reticulated with grey, with pale rosy borders, and
an oblique inner transverse grey line composed of three grey spots:
secondaries rosy whitish reticulated with grey ; a black dot at end
of cell; the base of costa orange. Expanse of wings | inch 6 lines.

2. White above, the base greyish; primaries with the costa
greyish, black towards apex; apical area orange; outer border
rather broadly black, deeply sinuated internally, extending to first
median nervule; a subapical oblique irregular black streak, united
to the outer border by black lines on the nervures (thus producing
five subapical spots, the second minute); a black dot at end of cell ;
a grey internal streak terminating in a blackish spot: secondaries
with the abdominal area greyish; six decreasing greyish-brown
marginal spots, very large at apex ; a dusky subcostal spot towards
apex ; a dusky oblique irregular marking on the disk and touching
the third and fourth marginal spots. Primaries below white, the base
pale yellowish ; a black dot at end of cell; a grey internal line, ter-
minating in a large black spot ; apical area sandy, speckled with
brown, becoming orange internally, and crossed by three grey spots:
secondaries whity-brown, reticulated with brown ; a black dot at end
of cell ; costa tinted with orange at base. Expanse of wings 1 inch
5 lines.

Between Natal and Delagoa Bay (E. C. Buxton). Type, B.M.

68. TeRACOLUS HIPPOCRENE, 2. sp.

3. Also like T. ithonus above, but the marginal spots of secon-
daries larger and the base more heavily blackened : primaries below
white, the apical area lemon-yellow, becoming paler externally ; a
black dot at end of cell: secondaries creamy white; the veins
brownish ; abdominal half of the wings speckled with brown; base
of costa bright golden orange; a black-and-orange dot at end of cell.
Expanse of wings 1 inch 6 lines.

2. White, the apical area stramineous, with the black and grey
markings as in 7’ ithonus, excepting that the internal grey streak is
narrower: secondaries with basal and abdominal areas greyish; a
marginal series of grey spots; an ill-defined W-shaped marking on
the disk, cut by the third median branch. Wings below white: pri-
maries with a black dot at end of cell; apex creamy yellowish
speckled with brown, stramineous externally, and crossed obliquely
by four brown spots: secondaries creamy, speckled with brown
hatchings, which congregate as spots on the costa near apex and upon
the centre of the disk ; a black dot at end of cell. Expanse of wings
1 inch 7 lines.

Between Natal and Delagoa Bay (Z. C. Buzton). Type, B.M.

69. TeRACOLUs IGNIFER, n. sp.

¢. Wings above white, the base blackish: primaries with the
apical half of costa and the outer margin to first median branch
black, the apical fork of the subcostal, external two fifths of the
radials, half the third median, external third of the second median,
10* .

148 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

and apex of the first median nervule black ; apical area broadly deep
orange (almost vermilion), its internal edge bordered indistinctly by
black atoms; a black dot at end of cell: secondaries with the apices
of the nervures black, a marginal series of grey spots terminating the
nervures. Primaries below white; apical area creamy orange,
becoming clear and bright internally, crossed obliquely by a few
brown scales, and speckled with brown towards apex: secondaries
creamy whitish, with a feeble pink tint, densely reticulated, except-
ing just beyond the cell, with brown; a black-and-orange dot at end
of cell, base of costa orange. Expanse of wings 2 inches.

Q. Very like the female of 7. halyattes, but much larger, the
apical spots of primaries above larger, the secondaries below with a
clear patch beyond end of cell, as in the male. Expanse of wings
1 inch 9 lines.

Var. ¢. Apical area of primaries below uniformly pinkish ; the
secondaries also much more pink. Female with the internal streak
of primaries above expanded into a broad irregular blackish patch.
Expanse of wings, ¢ 1 inch 8 lines to 2 inches, Q 1 inch 9 lines.

3, Zoolu (Sir A. Smith); 3 2, 8S. Africa (12 specimens, ZF. C.
Buxton). Type, B.M.

This is probably Trimen’s Anthocharis antevippe, but not Bois-
duval’s,

70. TERACOLUS CASTUS.

3. Callosune casta, Gerstaecker, Van der Decken’s Reisen in Ost-
Afrika, 3. Abth. ii. p. 365. n. 6, pl. xv. figs. 1, 1a(1873).

Lake “ Jipe,”’ E. Africa.

Allied to 7. deidamia.

71. TERACOLUS SIMPLEX, N. sp.

¢. Wings above white: primaries with a very oblique triangular
orange apical patch, bordered narrowly on its costal and external
edges with pale brown; a minute black dot at end of cell. Primaries
below white, with the apical area ochraceous, indistinctly speckled with
brown ; a black dot at end of cell: secondaries pale rosy whitish,
reticulated with reddish brown ; base of costa reddish ; a pale-yellow-
and-black dot at end of cell; a few brown atoms congregated below
the costa near apex. Expanse of wings 1 inch 10 lines.

D’ Urban (Capt. Shelley). Type, B.M.

This species is readily distinguished by the absence of grey scaling
at the base, the indistinctness of the outer border of the primaries, and
the very oblique inner edge of the orange apical patch.

72. TERACOLUS DEIDAMIA.

Anthopsyche deidamia, Wallengren, Wien. ent. Monatschr. iv.
p- 35. n. 7 (1860).

Oallosune deidamia, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 503. n. 41 (1871).

3, 2 examples, Zoolu (Sir A. Smith). B.M.

1876.] MR. A.G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 149

73. TERACOLUS ZERA.

Anthocharis zera, Lucas, Rev. Zool. p. 423 (1852).

Callosune zera, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 502. n. 20 (1871).

Abyssinia.

Closely allied to T. antevippe, but the crane apical patch with a
black internal margin.

74. TERACOLUS ANTEVIPPE.

Anthocharis antevippe, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 572. n. 18,
pl. 18. fig. 3 (1836).
3 2, White Nile (Petherick), 3, Senegal. B.M.

75. TERACOLUS HELLE.

3. Nearly allied to 7’. antevippe, but the base of primaries broadly
grey ; outer black border of primaries twice the width; costa, ex-
cepting at base, distinctly black; orange patch of primaries below
more restricted: terminations of veins in secondaries less distinctly
black. Expanse of wing 1 inch 1] lines.

Q. Primaries rounded at apex ; basal area of wings considerably
darker than in 7’. antevippe, marginal spots of secondaries larger :
primaries below with the transverse grey subapical streak almost ob-
mee secondaries considerably whiter. Expanse of wings 1 inch 8
ines.

White Nile (Petherick). Type, B.M.

Possibly a variety of 7. antevippe, but quite distinct in appearance.
Until all these species have been bred, it will be necessary to regard
all the dissimilar and apparently constant forms as different species.

76. TERACOLUS HYPERIDES.

Allied to 7’. antevippe ; the male, however, differs in the narrow,
squamose, black, internal edging to the orange-patch, and in the pre-
sence of a grey internal streak in primaries ; the nervures of secon-
daries on underside not noticeably black-tipped ; the orange of costa
confined to the base, and the spot at end of cell smaller. The female
also has the apical area of primaries distinctly orange, with a broad
brown patch covering the base of discoidal cell and extending to
beyond second third of internal area ; the abdominal area of second-
aries brownish, the angulated band more distinct : wings below alto-
gether paler ; primaries with a greyish internal streak, terminating
in a large black spot; secondaries yellow instead of orange-tinted ;
the veins not black, angulated band less distinct. Expanse of wings
3S 1 inch 9 lines, Q 1 inch 8 lines.

N.E. of Natal (3 specimens, 2. C. Buxton). Type, B.M.

77. TERACOLUS ACHINE.

Q . Papilio achine, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iy. pl.338. figs. E, F (1782).
Pieris achine’? Godart, Enc. Méth. ix. p. 122. n. 14 (1819).

S. Africa (4 examples, #. C. Buxton). B.M.
The male differs from the 7. achine of Hibner in having the veins

150 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

of secondaries below black and no marking on the disk; the female
is altogether more heavily coloured.

78. TERACOLUS EVENINUS.

2 . Anthopsyche evenina, Wallengren, Lep. Rhop. Caffr. p. 12
Debs pice evenina, Trimen, Rhop. Afr. Austr. p. 322. n. 216
fe ee evenina, Trimen, Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 380, pl. 6. fig. 11
sae River, 8. Africa (Janson) ; S. Africa (EZ. C. ee

Males referred to 7. eveninus in Mr. Druce’s Collection aie not
differ in character from the other males of this group.

79. TERACOLUS TRIMENI, 0. Sp.

3 2. Aphrodite achine, Hibner, Samml. exot. Schmett. ii. pl.
128. figs. 1-4 (1816-36).

2 var. Apex of primaries black, crossed by five white spots, the
angulated band of secondaries approaching at its angle nearer to the
outer margin than in Hiibner’s figure.

3 9,8. Africa (#. C. Buxton); o, Zoolu, Knysna, and Pletten-
berg Bay. Type, B.M.

This species has the wings of the male below white, the veins not
being blackened asin 7. achine. We have five males and two females
(both of the albino variety).

80. TERACOLUS GAVISA.

Anthopsyche gavisa, Wallengren, Lep. Rhop. Caffr. p. 323 (1857).

Anthocharis gavisa, Trimen, Rhop. Afr. Austr. p. 324. n. 218
(1866).

Callosune gavisa, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 502. n. 18 (1871).

3 2, Anthocharis ? Angas, Kaff. Ill. pl. 30. figs. 4 and 5
(1849).

2, Anthocharis exole (part), Reiche, Ferr. Gal. Voy. Abyss. Ent.
p- 460, pl. 31. figs. 5 and 6 (1849).

3 2, Anthocharis achine,Trimen (nec Cramer), Rhop. Afr, Austr.
p. 46. n. 29 (1866).

Anthopsyche rovane, Felder, Reise der Nov. Lep. ii. p. 187. n.
182 (“1865”).

3 2,8. Africa (7 examples, H. C. Buxton); 9, Natal. B.M.

This species is larger than 7’. achine. 'The male below differs in
having a distinct, subapical, diffused, orange spot in primaries, and
the secondaries more varied with orange, with the veins black to the
base. The female has a broader orange patch above, and the under-
side more yellow in tint.

81. TERACOLUS HERO, n. sp. (Plate VI. fig. 12.)
é. Allied to the preceding species, but larger, the vermilion patch
at apex not bordered within with black, but with a few marginal

1876.] MR. A. G, BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 15]

blackish seales; the black veins only crossing its outer area; the in-
ternal black streak replaced by a tapering dark grey streak, which
disappears just beyond the middle of the internal nervure ; marginal
spots clearly defined and well separated; secondaries below with the
veins white from the base to the middle of the wing and thence grey
to the margin. Expanse of wings 2 inches 1 line.

Q. Pale testaceous, the apical spots of primaries stramineous ;
brown parts of the wing as in 7. gavisa 9, excepting that the sub-
apical band of primaries bounding the apical spots is not irregular
externally, and is of more than twice the width; the spot at end of
cell is lost in the brown basal patch, and the spots towards anal angle
of secondaries are almost lost in the broad marginal border: below
the wings are testaceous, the base and apex of primaries and the
secondaries with a yellow tint and clouded with pale orange ; the veins
of external third of primaries are dusky, but on secondaries they are
uniform with the ground-colour; the subapical, blackish, oblique
streak of primaries is placed much nearer to the apex. Expanse of
wings | inch 11 lines.

S. Africa (#. C. Buxton). Type, B.M.

I believe the above to be sexes; they have much in common.

82. TERACOLUS OMPHALOTDES, 0. sp.

Anthocharis achine, Boisduval (nec Cramer), Sp. Gén. Lép. i.
p- 574. n. 21 (1836).

This species differs from 7. omphale in the narrower, black internal
stripe of primaries, the obsolete character or absence of the male
transverse stripe in the secondaries, and the red tint of the under
surface of the latter wings. Expanse of wings, ¢ 1 inch 4—10 lines,
© 1 inch 5-10 lines.

3 2,8. Africa (11 examples, Z. C. Buxton); 3, Zoolu (Sir A.
Smith). Type, B.M.

If it were not for the number of examples which we now possess
of this form, I should have been disposed to look upon it as a sport
of 7. omphale.

83. TERACOLUS OMPHALE.

Pieris omphale, Godart, Enc. Méth. ix. p. 122. n. 12 (1819).

Anthochaais omphale, Boisduval, Sp. Gen. Lép. i. p. 574. n. 22
1836).

Callosune omphale, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 502. n. 23 (1871).
Anthocharis eurygone’, Lucas, Rey. Zool. p. 341 (1852).
Callosune eurygone, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 502. n. 19 (1871).

3 9, N.E. of Natal (13 examples, #. C. Buxton). B.M.
The undersurface of the secondaries in this species is of a greenish
white colour, with the usual angular streak and discoidal spot.

84. TERACOLUS EXOLE.

3. Anthocharis exole (part), Reiche, Ferr. Gal. Voy. Abyss. Ent.
p- 460, pl. 31. fig. 4 (1849).

Callosune exole, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 503. n. 27 (1871).

152 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

2. Anthocharis achine, Lucas (nec Cramer), Lep. Exot. pl. 37.
fig. 2 (1835).

Anthopsyche acte, Felder, Reise der Nov. Lep. ii. p. 187. n. 181
(© 1865”).

3, Knysna (Trimen); 9, S. Africa (Z. C. Buaton) ; Natal and
Caffraria. B.M.

Wallengren, in his ‘ Lep. Rhop. Caffr.,’ has confounded this species
with J. omphale; the two females are much alike. M. Lucas’s
figure is not quite correctly drawn and is over-coloured ; but there is
no mistaking the species intended.

85. TERACOLUS SUFFUSUS, nN. sp. (Plate VI. fig. 10.)

@. Very like a small female of 7. omphale, but the basal area of
the primaries. grey to costa, the subapical orange spots smaller, and
the angular band of secondaries considerably narrower: wings below
creamy white ; secondaries with a distinct yellowish tint ; primaries
with a large, subapical curved, orange patch, leaving a narrow, sordid,
yellow, apical border ; secondaries with an angulated discal streak
(its upper half ill defined) testaceous ; a black-and-orange spot at
end of cell. Expanse of wings | inch 4 lines.

Ambriz (J. J. Monteiro). Type, B.M.

This very distinct little species is a link between the 7.-omphale
and 7.-epigone groups.

86. TERACOLUS HYBRIDUS, 0. Sp.

3 2. Above like 7. omphale, below like 7. omphaloides, but the
secondaries of a more rosy tint, such as occurs in 7’. theogone. Ex-
panse of wings, ¢, 1 inch 9 lines, 2, 1 inch 10 lines.

3, Plettenberg Bay; 9, Natal. Type, B.M.

This may be the result of a cross between 7. omphale and T. om-
phaloides ; it, however, clearly approaches T. theogone in the colora-
tion of the under surface. Although species of the same genus are
frequently known to make matrimonial mistakes, it is doubtful whether
in such cases the femaies are often fertile.

87. TERACOLUS THEOGONE.
Anthocharis theogone, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 575. n. 23
(1836).
Callosune theogone, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 502. n. 23a (1871).
3 2,8. Africa (5 examples, £. C. Buxton) ; Zoolu (Six A. Smith).
B

The sexes of 7. theogone were taken in copuld by Mr. Buxton.

88. TERACOLUS DELPHINE.

Anthocharis delphine, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 577. n. 28
(1836).

Callosune delphine, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 503. n. 33 (1871).

Sp. ead.? dQ, S. Africa. B.M.

Nobody seems satisfied about the identification of this species; Mr.

1876.] MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS, 153

Trimen, so far as I understand him, appears to have identified it
with 37. omphaloides and Q T. gavisa.

89. TERACOLUS PROCNE.

Anthopsyche procne, Wallengren, Lep. Rhop. Caffr. p. 323 (1857).
( re procne, Trimen, Rhop. Afr. Austr. p. 323. n. 217
1866).
Callosune procne, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 502. n. 17 (1871).
3 2,8. Africa (Z. C. Buxton). B.M.
We have a small pair of this species presented by Mr. Buxton, the
Lae of which has the orange subapical band rather narrower than
usual.

90. TERACOLUS EPIGONE.

3. Anthopsyche epigone (part), Felder, Reise der Nov. Lep. ii.
p- 186. n. 180 (1865).

Callosune epigone, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p- 502. n. 25 (1871).

3, White Nile (Petherick); 79, Orange River, S. Africa. B.M.

I am not certain about the female which I have provisionally re-
ferred to this species.

91. TeERACOLUS LOANDICUS.

3. Teracolus loandicus (part), Butler, P. Z. S. 1871, p. 724
(1871); Lep. Exot. pl. xxxiv. fig. 10 (1872).

Q. Very like 7. procne 9; but the oblique black band bounding
the curved orange band of primaries extremely narrow, the base of
the same wings broadly grey ; the internal streak ill-defined, no part
of it visible on the underside; the undersurface of all the wings
considerably paler. Expanse of wings 1 inch 7 lines.

3, Kinsembo (Ansell); 2, Ambriz (Monteiro). B.M.

3S Q, var., Altogether less heavily marked; the female scarcely
grey at the base, with no trace of the internal streak, and with the
orange band broader; angulated streak of secondaries barely indicated,
underside paler.

3 2, Quanza, August 1871 (J. oS. Monteiro). B.M.

It is possible that this may be distinct; but I am unwilling to
name it, from the close resemblance which it bears to typical 7. loan-
dicus.

92. TERACOLUS EBOREA.

3 . Papileo eborea (part), Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 552. figs. C,
D (1782).

? Africa,

Cramer figures the male of 7. danae from Coromandel as the fe-
male of this species; and (notwithstanding his remarks upon the
coloration of the apical patch) I believe he has improved the scarlet
of the apical fascia in his male to make it more nearly agree with its
supposed female. The species is clearly nearly related to the follow-
ing, and never came from any part of Asia.

154 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

93. TERACOLUS PSEUDOCALE, n. sp. (Plate VI. fig. 9.)

3. White above, the base grey ; primaries with the apical two-
fifths black, enclosing a large, reddish, orange, arched band, divided
by the nervures into six parts; a minute black dot at end of cell ;
secondaries with a marginal series of six large triangular black spots :
wings below white, base yellowish; primaries with the apical area
creamy yellow, bounded internally by a large, curved, diffused, orange
patch, a black dot at end of cell; secondaries with a black-and-
orange spot at end of cell. Expanse of wings 1 inch 6-10 lines.

. Wings above white, basal two fifths grey, obliquely in prima-
ries, and terminating at second third of internal nervure in a darker
grey spot; apical third black, inclosing a curved, orange band, divi-
ded by the nervures into five parts; secondaries with well-developed,
interrupted, angulated, blackish streak and 5 decreasing, triangular,
marginal spots: primaries below nearly as in the male, secondaries
pale yellow, with ochreous discal streak and a black dot at end of cell.
Expanse of wings 1 inch 5-10 lines.

3 2,8. Africa (ZH. C. Buxton); 9, Orange River. Type, B.M.

94. TERACOLUS ANGOLENSIS, 0. sp.

3. Closely allied to the preceding, but the apical patch wider
upon the costa and continued in the form of a tapering costal
border nearly to the base; orange patch half as wide again, its inner
black border tapering towards the costa; marginal spots of secondaries
more pyramidal and consequently separated: wings below destitute
of yellow colouring, the diffused orange patch of primaries broader.
Expanse of wings 1 inch 9 lines.

. Wings above white or yellow, markings as in the preceding
species ; but the orange band broader, the greyish areas darker, the
border and band of secondaries much more pronounced, and the
undersurface more uniform in colour. Expanse of wings 1 inch 7—
10 lines.

3, Angola (EZ. C. Buxton); 3 2, Congo (Curror). Type, B.M.

I believe Felder to have described the female of this species as 7’.
epigone 2.

95. TERACOLUS OCALE.

Q. Anthocharis ocale, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 584. n, 37

(1836).
Guinea.
Seems allied to the preceding species.

8c. Apical patch of the female black, rarely enclosing small orange
spots.
96. TERACOLUS ARETHUSA (T. EVIPPE, var. ?).
2 Papilio arethusa, Drury, Il. Exot. Ent. ii. pl. 19. figs. 5 and 6
(1773).
( Anthocharis arethusa 3, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 582. n. 35
1836).

1876.) MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 155

Callosune arethusa, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 504. n. 45 (1871).

Pieris amytis, Godart, Enc. Méth. ix. p. 123. n. 14 (1819).

Pieris evippe 2, Godart, /. c. p. 122. n. 10 (1819).

3 2, Sierra Leone; 3, Ashanti; S. Africa (EZ. C. Buxton).

Dr. Boisduval attacks M. Gedart for considering this the female
of 7. evippe, Linnzus ; it is, however, not improbable that it is only
a variety of that species, inasmuch as it chiefly differs from it in the
possession of a black dot at the end of the discoidal cell; it cer-
tainly is the female of the A. evippe of Boisduval; the female described
by the latter author is not even nearly related to this species, but is
probably identical with, or nearly allied to, 7. gavisa.

97. TERACOLUS CEBRENE (?=T’ arethusa, var.).

Anthocharis cebrene, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 583. n. 36
(1836). ;

Callosune cebrene, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 504. n. 47 (1871).

Papilio arethusa, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. 210. figs. E, F
(1782).

Sierra Leone.

One of our female examples of 7’. arethusa is intermediate between
the figures of Drury and Cramer.

98. TERACOLUS EVIPPE.

3 . Papilio evippe, Linnzeus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p- 239 (1764); Clerck,
Icones, pl. 40. fig. 5 (1764).

Pieris evippe, Godart, Enc. Méth. ix. p. 122. n. 10 (1819).

Anthocharis evippe, Lucas, Lep. Exot. pl. 37. fig. 1 (1835) ;
Boisduval (part), Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 573. n. 20 (1836).

3 Q, Sierra Leone (Foweroft). B.M.

This is probably the rarer form of 7’. arethusa; the males of the
two forms are almost identical.

9. Wings white, the primaries of the male, and generally of the fe-
male, with broad carmine apical area; underside with a well-
marked discal series of subocellate spots.

99. TERACOLUS CINERESCENS.
Teracolus cinerescens, Butler, Cist. Ent. i. p- 172. n. 53 (1873).
Anthocharis danae, Trimen (nee Fabr.), Rhop. Afr. Austr. i. Pp:
44. n. 27 (1862) ; Hewitson, Gen. Diurn. Lep. pl. 7. fig. 3 (1847).
3 9, Natal, S. Africa (EZ. C. Buxton) ; Caffraria. B.M.
é Var. Anthocharis danaé, Wallengren (nec Fabr.), Lep. Rhop.
affr.
3 9,8. Africa (EZ. C. Buxton). B.M.
This variety has the basal area of the male less strongly suffused
mae grey, and the under surface of the secondaries of a creamy
colour.

100. TreRacoLus EUPOMPE.
3 2. Pontia eupompe, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 6. figs.11-14(1829).

156 MR. A. Ge BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

Anthocharis eupompe, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 571. n. 17
1836).
: Ga chane eupompe (part), Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 501. n. 13 (1871).
9 . Papilio evippe, Cramer (nec Linneus), Pap. Exot. i. pl. 91.
figs. D and E (1779). i
Anthopsyche theopompe, Felder, Reise der Nov. Lep. ii. p. 183.
n. 175 (“1865”); Hopffer, Stett. ent. Zeit. p. 432 (1869).
3, White Nile (Petherick). B.M.
I have examined both sexes of this species, taken by Mr. J. K.
Lord at Akeek (island).

101. TERACOLUS ANTEUPOMPE.

Anthopsyche anteupompe, Felder, Reise der Nov. Lep. ii. p. 184.
n. 175 (1865).

Callosune anteupompe, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 501. n. 14 (1871).

Bogos.

102, TERACOLUS ACASTE.

©. Pontia acaste, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 7. figs 16, 17 (1829).

Pieris polycaste, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép.i. p. 525.n. 127 (1836).

Ambukol.

I much doubt whether this female would not be better placed next
to T'. halimede, of which Klug says it may be a variety; it is, I
should say, more probable that it is the female of 7. pletone than a
variety of 7. halimede.

103. TeRAcoLUs PSEUDACASTE, n. sp. (Plate VI. fig. 11.)

3 Anthocaris (sic) eupompe, Lucas, Lep. Exot. pl. 36. fig. 4
(1835).

Underside like 7. cinerescens, but without the blackish line across
the cell of primaries or the orange costa to secondaries. Expanse 1
inch 9 lines.

Q. Very like Klug’s figure of 7. acaste, but larger and darker,
the apical area of primaries greyish brown, crossed by a curved series
of whitish lanceolate streaks, bounded on the inside by black spots.
Wings below like the male of 7. cinerescens. Expanse of wings 2
inches.

3 2, White Nile (Petherick). Type, B.M.

This species is a link between the 7.ewpompe and halimede groups.

104. TeRACOLUS DEDECORA.

Anthocharis dedecora, Felder, Reise der Nov. Lep. ii. p. 184.
n. 177 (1865).

Callosune dedecora, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 502. n. 15 (1871).

3 Q, Senegal. -M.

The female forms a link between the 7'.-ewpompe and antevippe
groups. It is the Anthocharis eupompe, var., of Trimen (Rhop.
Afr. Austr. p. 46), but it is ticketed ‘“‘Seneg.,” not S. Africa. The
long description is taken from an Indian species, there being no
African butterfly to which it will apply.

1876.] MR. A.G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 157

105. TERACOLUS WALLENGRENII, 0. sp.

Anthopsyche eupompe, Wallengren (nec Klug), Lep. Rhop. Caffr.

This species has three varieties, differing chiefly in size; it is
easily distinguished from 7’. cinerescens by the narrower black edging
of the apical crimson or carmine patch of the male, the much more
yellow apical patch of the female, the restriction of the grey colouring
to the base of the wings, the small size of the marginal spots of
secondaries, and the deep reddish buff colouring of the under surface
of the secondaries and apex of primaries below. Expanse of wings,
31 inch 4 to 11 lines, 2 1 inch 5 to 9 lines.

N.E. of Natal (14 specimens, #. C. Buxton). Type, B.M.

This has, I suspect, been contounded with the Indian 7’. danaé;
the latter, however, is more like 7. cinerescens, its female having
the aspect of a very dark form of T. dedecora.

106. TERACOLUS DANAE.

Papilio danaé, Fabricius, Syst. Ent. p. 476. n. 144 (1775);
Donovan, Ins. Ind. pl. 26. fig. 2 (1800).

Pieris danaé, Godart, Enc. Méth. ix. p. 124. n. 20 (1819).

Anthocharis danaé, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. 1, p. 570. n. 16
(1836).

Calosune danaé, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 501. n. 12 (1871).

3. Papilio eborea?, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 352. figs. E, F
[not C, D], (1782).

3, Ceylon (Templeton, B.M.); Madras, Kurnool, Bombay,
Canara, Deccan; 2, N.W. India (coll. F, Moore).

107. Teracotus DULCIs, n. sp. (Plate VII. fig. 13.)

do. Smaller than 7. danaé, the crimson apical patch narrower and
with narrower internal black border; basal grey suffusion not so
dark ; black marginal spots of secondaries small, and consequently
widely separated; wings below altogether paler than in TJ. danaé,
the spots fewer and smaller; no black spots at external angle of
primaries. Expanse of wings 1 inch 7 to 9 lines.

Q. Differs from the female of 7. danaé in its altogether paler
colour ; with darker apical patch, restricted within the angulated
transverse postmedian series of black spots, all the black spots much
smaller, the marginal spots of secondaries well separated. Expanse
of wings | inch 6 to 11 lines.

3 2. Kattywur (coll. F. Moore); ¢, N. India (B.M.)

Var. The female paler at base of wings, with the disk of secondaries
immaculate.

3 2, Scinde. Coll. F. Moore.

This species generally stands in Indian collections as the 7’. eupompe
of Klug.

108. TreRAcouus pirvs, n. sp. (Plate VII. fig. 11.)

Q. Allied to the preceding and to 7. pseudacaste. Wings above
white, the base broadly dark grey ; an irregular series of black spots

158 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. (Jan. 18,

through the centre of the disk, large and much interrupted in pri-
maries, small, and terminating in the second median interspace in
secondaries : primaries with a well-marked black spot at end of cell ;
apical area and outer border to external angle brown; the inner
margin of apical area scarcely extending beyond the angulated upper
portion of the discal series of black spots ; a subapical curved series
of cream-coloured hastate spots, slightly speckled with scarlet ex-
ternally, and bounded by the black angulated series: secondaries
with a brown border, paler at the internervular folds. Primaries
below white, the base broadly sulphur yellow, the apical area pale
buff ; the four uppermost black spots annular, upon a diffused reddish
ground, otherwise as above: secondaries pale buffy whitish; the
discal spots of secondaries cordiform, carmine, varied with pearly
whitish and black ; a spot of the same colours at end of cell. Ex-
panse of wings 2 inches 1 line.

Scinde. Type, coll. F. Moore.

109. TeERACOLUS EBOREOIDES, n. sp. (Plate VII. fig. 12.)

3. Above very like Cramer’s figure of male T. eborea, but blackish
at the base; below very like 7. danaé, but without the reddish tint
round the subapical black spots. Expanse of wings 1 inch 11 lines.

Q. Wings above with the basal third brownish grey: primaries
with the centre irregularly white; the apical third dark brown, crossed
by four triangular orange spots, bounded internally by black spots ;
a black spot at the end of the cell; a second constricted spot on
interno-median interspace and in the middle of the central white
area, and a minute point near the external border; the apical area
is deeply bisinuate towards external angle, and decreases in width to
the angle: secondaries with a decreasing dark brown border from
the apex to the anal angle, slightly intersected with whitish on the
internervular folds; the area between the grey part and the outer
border white ; five black discal spots, and a spot at the end of the
cell: wings below as in the male, but slightly deeper incolour. Ex-
panse of wings | inch 6 lines.

3 @, India (W. B. Farr), Coll. F. Moore.

The above is a very well-marked species.

110. TERACOLUS SANGUINALTS, 0. sp.

3. Much like a small example of 7. danaé, but the primaries
more acuminate, the carmine patch rather brighter; the grey
colouring confined to the extreme base and costa, not extending into
the secondaries ; the marginal spots of secondaries better separated
and rather smaller. Apical area of primaries below redder; the an-
gulated series of spots larger and redder ; the spots upon the margin
near external angle small and indistinct : secondaries white, slightly
creamy, with the outer border very feebly ochraceous-; the spots,
which are arranged as in 7’. danaé, are greyish brown; the spot at
end of cell reddish, with a narrow brown margin. Expanse of wings
1 inch 6 lines.

@. Differs from the female of 7. danaé in its smaller size, more

1876.] MR. A.G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 159

sulphur-tinted coloration, the regular and much paler basal grey
suffusion, which is almost invisible on the secondaries, the much
brighter apical carmine patch, the absence of the spot near external
angle of primaries, the minute character of the discal spots of seconda-
ries, and the better-defined and narrower outer border; primaries
below with the apical area redder, the basal area yellower, and with-
out a terminal grey streak crossing the cell ; the black spots smaller :
secondaries below distinctly ochraceous, with the discal spots reddish,
irrorated with black and grey. Expanse of wings 1 inch 6 lines.
Ceylon (Stevens). Type, B.M.

10. Wings white, the primaries with the apex dark brown, with
central orange patch, more or less separated into distinct spots
in the female ; underside with a more or less defined series of
discal spots in secondaries.

111. Teraconus PEeRNoratus, n. sp. (Plate VII. fig. 1.)

3. White above, with the base pale grey : primaries with a black
Spot at end of cell; apical area orange, bordered with black-brown,
the inner border tapering towards costa ; the orange area divided into
six parts by the nervures and narrowing to a point behind : seconda-
ries with a black spot on costa and six on outer margin. Below
white, the base sulphur-yellow ; the cells terminated by black dots ;
primaries with the apical area greyish, with the orange patch of the
upperside dimly visible and bounded externally by four or five almost
united red-brown spots in an oblique series: secondaries with a
discal arched series of small brown spots; very minute black spots
terminating the nervures on outer margin. Expanse of wings 1 inch
6 lines.

2. White, sometimes tinted with sulphur-yellow ; the base pale
grey: primaries with a black spot at end of cell: apical area black,
with a central nearly straight series of five more or less defined orange
Spots, only separated by the nervures; three black Spots in an
oblique series below the median branches, the central one small, the
lowest one bifid: secondaries with a curved series of discal spots,
black at costa, but gradually fading away towards inner margin ; a
marginal series of six large spots. Wings below white, the basal area,
apical area of primaries, and outer margin of secondaries bright
sulphur-yellow ; a black spot at the end of the cells, bordered with
orange on the secondaries ; primaries with an angulated discal series
of seven blackish spots: secondaries with a curved discal series of
Seven sap-green spots ; the abdominal and subcostal areas also some-
times irrorated with sap-green. Expanse of wings 1 inch 7 lines.

3 &, Punjab (coll. F. Moore) ; 2, Punjab (B.M.).

This species is distinguished by the broad apical patch of the
male; the pale grey basal third of the wings, the greyish apical
patch below, and the curved discal series of secondaries below.

112. Trracoius FarRinus, n. sp. (Plate VIL. fig. 2.)
$. Distinguished from the preceding by the wider apical area

160 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

with narrower orange patch, the basal grey scaling darkest on costa,
and of a bluish colour; the apical area below lemon-yellow, the spots
on its internal border squamose : secondaries above with larger mar-
ginal spots ; below with the discal spots less strongly defined, and the
base not yellow as in the primaries. Expanse of wings 1 inch
8 lines.

@. Distinguished by the dark brownish grey scaling over basal
third, the larger and better-defined black spots, especially those on
the disk of secondaries ; the under surface of secondaries clouded
with greyish. Expanse of wings 1 inch 7 lines.

3, Kussowlie, N.W. Himalayas; ¢ 9, India (Farr).

Coll. F. Moore.

This species must have been mixed up with Dr. Boisduval’s exam-
ples of 7’. etrida, since his description of the female agrees with this
form alone ; it can never, I think, have come from Madras or Pegu.

113. TeracoLus puRuS, n. sp. (Plate VII. figs. 14, 15.)

3. Distinguished from 7. pernotatus by its purer white colora-
tion, the base in the male scarcely visibly tinted with grey, but in
the female as in the above-mentioned species ; the apical area almost
black, with a narrow regular slightly curved band of five orange
spots ; only the uppermost and lowermost of the three discal spots
visible in the female, and the three uppermost of the discal series of
secondaries ; black marginal spots of secondaries better defined,
rounded : wings below with the base and apex of primaries sulphur-
yellow ; the female with the whole of the secondaries, excepting the
discoidal interspace, more or less tinted with the same colour; only
the two uppermost of the discal spots in the secondaries of the male
below visible ; in the female they are all present, but smaller. Ex-
panse of wings, d 1 inch 3 to G lines, 2 1 inch 6 to 8 lines.

3 2, Punjab (type, B.M.); ¢ 2, Punjab (coll. F. Moore).

We have what I believe to be this species also, marked ‘ India ;”
but the examples are in bad condition.

114. TERACOLUS ETRIDA.

3. Anthocharis etrida (part), Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép.i. p. 576.
n. 24 (1836).

@. Like the female of 7. purus, but rather larger, with the apex
more rounded, the primaries above yellowish, the costal and discoidal
areas of primaries and outer margin of secondaries below distinctly
sulphur-yellow. Expanse of wings 1 inch 7 lines.

3 Q, Scinde; 2, Masuri (Grote) ; ¢, Canara (typical form).

Coll. F. Moore.

The male has the orange patch broad at costa and tapering to
near the second median branch ; but it is more readily recognized
by the coloration of the under surface of the secondaries, which is
white, with yellow diffused outer border ; a small black dot at end of
cell, and two subcostal pale brown spots near apex: the Canara
example has the basicostal area of primaries above darker than in
the specimens from Scinde ; but in other respects it agrees with them

1876.] | MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 161

very fairly : the female from Masuri more nearly resembles the male,
the spots below being very pale.

115. TERACOLUS LIMBATUS, N. sp.

3. Wings above white: the primaries with the extreme base and
the costa dark grey ; an elongate triangular apical patch from costa
to external angle, enclosing a slightly curved tapering orange patch,
separated into six parts by the nervures; a minute black dot at end
of cell: secondaries with the outer margin bordered by a sinuated
brown band. Wings below white, with a black dot at the end of each
discoidal cell; the cell of primaries and the apical area sulphur-
yellow ; a subapical oblique brownish streak tapering towards the
costa ; apical margin greenish grey. Expanse of wings 1 inch 5 lines.

Ceylon (Templeton). Type, B.M.

This is the most distinct-looking of the local forms of 7’. etrida ;
it probably ranges to Madras ; for Boisduval says (in his description
of 7. etrida), “Ailes inférieures avec le bord entrecoupé de points
noirs, assez gros, isolés ou réunis en une bande crénelée.”

116, Teracouus casimirus, n. sp. (Plate VII. fig. 5.)

do. Wings above white, the base grey, more extended in prima-
ries than in secondaries ; primaries rounded at apex ; the apical area
from costa to first median branch black-brown, enclosing a slightly
curved orange band, at the end of which is a minute dot of the same
colour, the band is divided by the nervures into five parts ; a black
dot at the end of the cell : secondaries with four large marginal dark
brown spots, and a minute dot of the same colour ; a subapical costal
ill-defined brown litura. Primaries below white, the basal two thirds
of the cell sulphur-yellow; apical area pale ochre-yellow, bounded
internally by au oblique greyish streak; a black dot at the end of
the cell: secondaries sandy whitish, irrorated with brown ; an arched
macular brownish streak from costa to interno-median area (inter-
rupted, as usual, on the discoidal interspace); a black and yellow
dot at the end of the cell; outer border yellowish, irrorated with
brown atoms. Expanse of wings | inch 7 lines.

Bimbur, Cashmere (Capt. Reed). Coll. F. Moore.

117. TeRaco.us BimBuRA, Moore. (Plate VII. figs. 3, 4.)

3. Wings above white, greyish at base: primaries with a trian-
gular orange patch at apex, narrowly bordered with black-brown, the
outer border sinuated ; a minute black dot at end of cell: seconda-
ries with four marginal black dots. Primaries below white, the basal
three fifths of discoidal cell sulphur-yellow; apical area greyish
stramineous externally, sulphur-yellow internally, bounded within by
a well-defined oblique greenish grey bar; a black dot at the end of
the cell: secondaries sandy whitish, basal three fifths densely irro-
rated with brown, interrupted through the cell and discoidal inter-
space by a whitish streak, and bounded externally by squamose brown
spots; outer border somewhat yellowish ; a black and yellow dot at
the end of the cell. Expanse of wings 1 inch to 1 inch 7 lines.

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. XI. 11

162 MR, A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

@. Apex of primaries above black-brown, crossed by a curved
band of five orange divisions, the last of which touches the ground-
colour ; a black dot on second median interspace ; otherwise as in
the male. Primaries below with the apical area pale ochraceous,
bounded internally by an oblique series of four brown spots, a similar
spot at centre of second median interspace, and a second on interno-
median interspace touching the first median branch: secondaries
sandy throughout, irrorated with brown ; discal spots brown; other-
wise as in the male. Expanse of wings inch 4 lines.

3 @, Bimbur, Cashmere (Capt. Reed); 3, Bombay (coll. F.
Moore) ; ¢ 2, N. India (B.M.).

This is a very distinct species, easily recognized by the coloration
of the under surface: the examples from Bombay vary much in
expanse, the typical male from Bimbur being intermediate and of
the same size as the female.

11. Wings white or sulphur-yellow, the primaries with the apical
area broadly golden-orange, bordered externally in the male
with black; in the female it is interrupted by an irregular
black transverse bar, sometimes separated into distinct spots ;
in two or three species the males have a few scattered black
scales along the inner border of the orange.

118. TERACOLUS EVAGORE.
Pontia evagore, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 8. figs. 5, 6 (1829).
Anthocharis evagore, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. “Lép. i. p. 579. n. 30
1836).
‘ Callosune evagore, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 503. n. 36 (1871).
Anthocharis heuglini, Felder, Wien. ent. Monatschr. iii. p. 272.

n. 20 (1859).

Anthopsyche heuglini, Felder, Reise der Nov. Lep. ii. pl. 25. fig. 4

(** 1865 ”’).

3, White Nile (Petherick). B.M.

‘119. TERACOLUS DEMAGORE.

Anthopsyche demagore, Felder, Reise der Nov. Lep. ii. p. 186.
n. 179 (1865 ”’).

Callosune demagore, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 503. n. 37 (1871).

2, White Nile (Petherick). B.M.

120. TERACOLUS CITREUS, 0. sp.

¢. Primaries above whitish at base, becoming more and more
distinctly sulphur-yellow to beyond the middle; apical area bright
golden-orange, with a linear black marginal border: secondaries
white, with the outer margin narrowly sulphur-yellow, diffused.
Primaries below pale sulphur-yellow, the apical area lemon-yellow,
deepest at the margins ; three decreasing brown spots placed obliquely
between the subcostal branches : secondaries fleshy pink, changing to
pale yellow externally, reticulated with brown; several brownish
spots beyond the middle; a black dot at end of cell. Expanse of
wings 1 inch 4 to 6 lines.

1876.] | MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. 163

2. Above like T. evarne female, but the black markings more
restricted. Primaries below pale yellow, whitish towards external
angle ; apical area ochraceous, reticulated with grey ; blackish spots as
above : secondaries pale flesh-colour, yellowish on outer margin, reti-
culated with dark brown, an arched ‘series of discal yellowish spots
crossed by blackish liture ; a black-edged white spot at the end of
the cell. Expanse of wings 1 inch 6 lines.

3S 2, Hor Tamanib (J. K. Lord) = T. evarne of Walker (nec
Klug) ; 2, White Nile (Petherick). B.M.

121. TrERACOLUS KEISKAMMA.

Anthocharis keiskamma, Trimen, Rhop. Afr. Austr. p. 56. n. 37,
pl. 2. figs. 3, 4 (1862-66).
3 2, Keiskamma river (Trimen); 3, 8. Africa. B.M.

122. TrRacoLus Torna.
Anthopsyche topha, Wallengren, Lep. Rhop. Caffr. p- 15 (1857).

3 9,8. Africa. B.M.
This species is intermediate between T. keiskamma and T. auzo.

123. TrERAacouus XANTHEVARNE, N. sp.

Anthocharis evarne, Lucas (nee Klug), Lep. Exot. pl. 37. fig. 3
(1835).

g. Wings above sulphur-yellow, the primaries brightest in colour,
with the apical area broadly golden-orange, with rather a narrow
sinuated black border from the middle of costa to thé first median
branch ; costa grey: secondaries with small black spots at the ends
of the nervures. Wings below lemon-yellow ; the primaries sulphur-
yellow towards the base ; two subapical brownish dots between the
subcostal branches : secondaries with a black dot at end of cell. Ex.
panse of wings | inch 8 lines.

White Nile (Petherick). Type, B.M.

I have also examined a male taken by Mr. Lord at Harkeko.

124. TERACOLUS SYRTINUS, n. sp.

3. Wings above much as in the preceding species, but the costa
blackish brown from base to apex, and the inner edge of the orange
patch sprinkled with blackish scales ; wings below sulphur-yellow,
the apical area lemon-yellow, a minute blackish dot at end of cell in
secondaries. Expanse of wings 1 inch 9 lines.

Senegal. Type, B.M.

Intermediate in character between the preceding and 7. auzo.

125. TeRaco.us auxo.

Anthocharis auxo, Lucas, Rev. Zool. p- 422 (1852).

Callosune auxo, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 501. n. 11 (1871).

3 &, Natal. B.M.

Tais is probably the 4. evarne of Trimen.
he

164 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON THE GENUS TERACOLUS. [Jan. 18,

126. TERACOLUS EVARNE.

Pontia evarne, Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 6. figs. 1-4 (1829).
Anthocharis evarne, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 569. n. 15
1836).
Callosune evarne (part), Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 501. n. 10 (1871).

Ambukol.

I have never had an opportunity of seeing a genuine 7’. evarne ;
it is evidently a white-winged species. Entomologists almost inva-
riably represent it in their collections by examples of one or other of
the species allied to 7. keiskamma.

127. TERACOLUS EUCHARIS.

3. Papilio eucharis, Fabricius, Syst. Ent. p. 472, n. 127°(1775).
3 9. Euchloé eucharis, Butler, Fabr. Cat. p. 215. n. 5 (1869).
Callosune eucharis, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 500. n. 9 (1871).
Papilio aurora, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 299. figs. A-D (1782).
Pieris titea, Godart, Enc. Méth. ix. p. 124. n. 21 (1819).
Pontia titea, Horsfield, Cat. Lep. E.I. C. p. 141. n. 69 (1829).
3 @, Ceylon (Templeton). B.M.
Mr. Moore has a female from the Deccan.

128. TeERACOLUS PSEUDEVANTHE, n. sp. (Plate VII. fig. 16.)

3. Above like 7. ewcharis, but larger; the outer black border
beginning at apical three fifths of costa, continued round the outer
margin as a rather wide sinuated band to near external angle, and
throwing up an irregular projection across the end of first and the
middle of the second median interspace ; edge of costa and base
sprinkled with brown scales: secondaries with four marginal brown
dots. Primaries below sordid white, the base sulphur-yellow ; apical
area lemon-yellow ; the outer margin orange, with black dots at the
end of the nervures ; a transverse sigmoidal postmedian subapical
ferruginous streak : secondaries sandy white ; a transverse subapical
ferruginous dash; an interno-discal transverse macular streak of
ochreous speckled with brown; a black-and-yellow dot at end of
cell. Expanse of wings 1 inch 11 lines.

©. Above white, base grey; apical area irregularly black-brown,
crossed by four cuneiform orange or white spots ; a black dot at end
of cell, and a black interno-median spot towards external angle :
secondaries with an oblique Z-shaped costal black marking near
apex ; five large black-brown marginal spots. Primaries below white,
with the base sulphur-yellow ; apical area sulphur-yellow, becoming
ochreous externally, and crossed by a macular brown streak, ending
in a black spot; a black spot on interno-median interspace, and a
black dot at end of cell ; black marginal dots as in the male: secon-
daries sordid white, reticulated with sap-green; two streaks of the
same colour answering to those on the secondaries of the male ; outer
margin yellow, spotted with sap-green. Expanse of wings | inch
9 lines.

3, India (B.M.); ¢ 2, Bombay (7 examples), coll. F. Moore.

&

P Z.S.1876' Pl Vill

hs

\.

<
&

i
&
4
e
‘
t
a
ne

Ga
\
v sh GNA \ 4,
Pa
P
7. fag SNe

J.Smit lith

E.ASchafer del.

STOMACH OF MACROPUS GIGANTEUS.

M&NHanhart imp.

os ae

———~ 1s

a eed LT

se thaiihe lial gilt: inl alla Mis OE eel ie

Fag
Cl 7949,

aS
P See

wy “he |
C0995 094 (OSs
SBS “=e : S
Ss Pai cob

\¢ ss | ck

oa
Gae
+

FN

*
Pag & Og eB
oH Ee ye

x}
tre
“~

ka
Ry

del.

1ams

EASchafer et 1).J.Will

Figs, 2 & 3. STOMACH OF MACROPUS GIGANTEUS.
hig-4. STOMACH OF DORCOPSIS LUCTUOSA.

M&N.Hanhart imp.

H MUSsx~:
AS USED
@ 3a, Y

$n Gy oy %
4 Li BD x

a >
~~,

URaL WIS

a =" ¥ -

a ~ — af

omer
Rereage res

cient
< nO

TaASchaler et D.JWilhams del. f JSmit hth

fig.5. STOMACH OF MACROPUS GIGANTEUS. .
fig. 6. STOMACH OF DORCOPSIS LUCTUOSA.

M&NHanhart imp.

r Pie oa
. - re
2 Aas

oe
os ? 4

é

- - mx Ww
RY Yite eee
: aN Ay ; fa4

.

/
a
af
/
; ;
= i
“
A
J “
1
.
t Be
y
a
fl ~
¥
apt «
- rx
2 i~
: bah Se 4
“8 | i 2
| at

Fig. 10. ‘

E ASonifer et DAWiliams, del
Che STOMAGH.. OF DORCOPSIS LUGCTWB SAS
AT M&NHanhart imp.

1876.] ON THE MUCOUS MEMBRANE IN KANGAROOS. 165

The greater size, apical coloration, and markings of the under-
surface readily distinguish this species from Z. eucharis.

12. Wings of the male with the orange patch narrow, not yellowish,
only touching the ground-colour opposite to the end of discoidal
cell; apex of primaries below grey-speckled; secondaries
creamy whitish, reticulated with brownish green.

129. TERACOLUS EVANTHE.

Anthocharis evanthe, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 567. n. 13
(1836).

Callosune evanthe, Kirby, Syn. Cat. p. 500. n. 8 (1871).

8. Africa. B.M.

Pieris doxo of Godart is probably a Synchloé allied to S. suasa ;
Pontia eulimene, Klug, is an Izias; and Anthocharis phenon, Trimen,
is described as allied to the latter, therefore probably belongs to the
same genus.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Puate VI.
Fig. 1. Teracolus flaminia, p. 140. Fig. 7. Teracolus ithonus, p. 146.
2. —— lyeus, p. 141. 8 halyattes, p. 145.
3. subfumosus, p. 139. 9. pseudocale, p. 154.
4. lucullus, p. 148. 10. —— suffusus, p. 152.
5. friga, p. 142. 11. pseudacaste, p. 156.
6. lycoris, p. 140. 12. hero, p. 150.
Puate VII.
Fig. z Teracolus pernotatus, p. 159. Fig. 10. Zeracolus vestalis, p. 135.
farrinus, p. 159. 11. dirus, p. 157.
3, ra —— bimbura, p. 161. 12. eboreoides, p. 158.
5. casimirus, p. 161. 13. dulcis, p. 157.
6 rosaceus, p. 134. 14, 15. —— purus, p. 160.
Gs oriens, p. 134. 16. pseudevanthe, p. 164.
8, 9. carnifer, p. 188.

9. On the Structure of the Mucous Membrane of the Stomach
in the Kangaroos. By Epwarp A. Scniremr, Assistant-
Professor af Physiology, and D. James Wutu14Ms,
Student of Medicine, in University College, London.
(Communicated by A. H. Garrop, M.A., F.Z.8., Prosec-
tor to the Society.)

[Received December 17, 1875.]
(Plates VITI.-XI.)

The observations here recorded have been made upon the
stomachs of two Kangaroos belonging to distinct genera. One was
that of the great Kangaroo, Macropus giganteus ; the other of Dor-
copsis luctuosa, a specimen of which died some months back in the

166 MESSRS. SCHAFER AND WILLIAMS ON THE [Jan. 18,

gardens of the Society. This latter has been described (P. Z.S.
1875, p. 48) by Prof. A. H. Garrod, the Prosector to the Society, to
whom we are indebted for the opportunity of examining the organ
in question in these avimals. Our original object was simply to
record in general terms the differences in microscopic structure
presented by those parts of the membrane which have a different
appearance to the naked eye; but since, in spite of recent researches,
our knowledge of the minute structure of the gastric mucous mem-
brane is still confessedly imperfect, it became obvious that it would
be necessary to enter upon a minute examination of the several
parts ; especially as they present very well-marked differences, and,
in some cases, peculiarities of structure which tend to elucidate
points yet in dispute with regard to the gastric mucous membrane
of the higher Mammalia and of Man.

As is well known, the stomach is, in the Kangaroo, a long saccu-
lated organ not unlike the human colon; and the sacculations, as in
that, are due to the presence of three longitudinal bands of plain
muscular fibre, situate on the exterior underneath the serous mem-
brane and shorter than the rest of the gastric wall, so that this is
bulged out at intervals into sacculi separated by constrictions or
inward folds of the membranous wall. Oue of the three bands is
placed below along the greater curvature ; and it is on either side of
this that the sacculi are most marked; there are none at the lesser
curvature, nor is the pyloric extremity sacculated at any part of
its circumference. Besides the inwardly projecting folds between
the sacculi, and which involve all the coats of the stomach, the
mucous membrane shows the rugze ordinarily met with in a stomach
not completely distended, and produced by contraction of the mus-
cular coat. There are also in certain parts more minute folds,
which would, no doubt, be effaced by complete distention of the
organ, and which are probably due to a similar contraction of the
muscular layer of the mucous membrane (muscularis mucosé).

In the diagrams of the two stomachs which are here given, and in
the accompanying general description, they are for convenience’ sake
treated as if they were more or less straight organs extending across
the body from left to right as in the human subject, whereas in
reality they are twisted upon themselves. A detailed description of
the form of the marsupial stomach and its relations to other parts is,
of course, foreign to the subject of the present paper, and must be
sought for in recognized treatises on comparative anatomy *.

* The following are the dimensions of the organs as they appear after pre-
servation in spirit :—

Dorcopsis _Macropus
luctuosa. —giganteus.

ft. im. ft. in.

Length along lesser curvature..........-.-0.:e1eeeeeeuee 0 1 8
Length along greater curvature, the sacculations

not being taken into account ..............--+2+ 1 eta 245
Length along greater curvature, reckoning in the

SAC CUA DIOS mem eeatn nee eter cate teense cusaa sean ss eaones 2 10 5 0

Greatest circular measurement ...............seeeeeeee (i), ml 1 Pee (

In both cases the stomachs were filled with partially digested food.

1876.] MUCOUS MEMBRANE IN KANGAROOS. 167

Obvious characters of the Mucous Membrane.

With the unassisted eye three distinct regions can be detected in
the stomachs of both animals, the mucous membrane presenting well-
marked differences in feel, appearance, and, as will be presently seen,
in microscopic structure. For the most part they are marked off
from each other by distinct lines of demarcation ; these, however, are
more obvious between the first and second regions than between the
second and third, although, in the latter case also, especially in Dor-
copsis, the distinction can be made out even with the naked eye.

In the two species examined these three regions have somewhat
different distributions, as is indicated in the accompanying diagrams.
Thus, in Dorcopsis (Diagram 1) the first or cardiac region (A), which

Diagram 1. |

/ AKG, 22 wh
(/

%
Y

LSS

mul

Stomach of Dorcopsis luctuosa.

is covered with an epithelium obviously continuous with and similar
to that of the gullet, occupies more than a third of the inner surface
of the organ, lining the whole of the cardiac fundus, and terminating
towards the middle of the stomach by a well-marked line of demar-
cation ( x ), which extends from the lesser curvature obliquely down-
wards and to the left along the anterior and posterior walls to end in
the greater curvature about opposite to the opening of the gullet, ora
little to the right of that point. Commencing on either side of the
cardia two parallel ridges or folds of the mucous membrane (not
represented in the diagram) pass for about 3 inches along the lesser
curvature, depending into the cavity of the organ. They are little
more than half an inch apart, and not quite half an inch in depth ; they
become less prominent and gradually subside towards their termina-
tion. They bring to mind the ridges which are found in a somewhat
similar situation in the Ruminant stomach, but they are by no means
so strongly muscular. The second region (B) commences at the ob-
lique line above traced out, which separates it from the first or cardiac
region, and extends from here to the left, as far as the pylorus,,
comprehending all the rest of the inner surface of the organ except a
circular patch (C) about 24 inches in diameter, which occupies the

168 MESSRS. SCHAFER AND WILLIAMS ON THE [Jan, 18,

pyloric fundus. This patch is distinguishable to the unaided eye
chiefly by its greater thickness, smoother surface, and by a slight
furrowed line which partly encloses it. It shows under the microscope
glands differing in character from those of the surrounding region,
and is therefore here described as a third region of the mucous mem-
brane. But this third region is not entirely confined to the circular
patch ; for a narrow tract of mucous membrane (z) containing similar
glands extends from the upper limit of the patch on either side to
meet its fellow above at the lesser curvature, thus completing an
irregular zone around this part of the stomach.

In Macropus giganteus the epithelium of the first region (Diagram
2, A) has a much more limited distribution than in Dorcopsis.
The tract which it covers is widest in the neighbourhood of the
gullet, whence it passes over the front and back of the stomach.
Even here it does not extend as far down as the greater curvature ;
so that the two parts do not meet below. Moreover the left end of
the stomach, which terminates in a pouch-like projection (p), is not
lined by this epithelium, although a second smaller pouch (p’),
directed upwards and situated nearer the gullet than the first one,
receives a lining from it. Both these pouch-like projections are

Diagram 2.

Stomach of Macropus giganteus.

present also in Dorcopsis luctuosa; but they are both lined with hard
epithelium like that of the rest of the cardiac fundus in this animal.
Anteriorly the hard epithelium gradually narrows in Macropus
giganteus until it becomes reduced to a mere strip along the lesser
curvature, and eventually ceases altogether about halfway between
the two extremities of the stomach. The ridges of mucous mem-
brane which extend towards the right from either side of the cardiac

1876. MUCOUS MEMBRANE IN KANGAROOS. 169

Lew

orifice are only slightly marked in the stomach of Macropus. The
second region (B) has a greater extent in Macropus giganteus than
in Dorcopsis. It occupies all the rest of the inner surface of the
stomach except (as in Dorcopsis) a circular patch (C) about 3
inches in diameter, situate at the pyloric fundus, and not marked off
from the rest by any well-defined naked-eye appearances except the
great thickness of the mucous membrane. But microscopical exa-
mination shows that the glands of this patch present material dif-
ferences from those of the rest of the stomach, whilst resembling
those of the corresponding part of the Dorcopsis stomach ; so that this
patch is to be taken as representing the third region in Macropus also.
The tract n, moreover, which passes in Dorcopsis over the upper
part of the stomach in this place, is also represented in Macropus.
The second region may be said to commence at the extreme end of
the cardiac fundus, where its mucous membrane lines the pouch (p)
above referred to as not being covered by the hard gullet-epithelium ;
from here it passes to the right, along the greater curvature of the
stomach, gradually narrowing at first, so that opposite the cesophagus
it forms a strip only about 2 of an inch wide, bounded on either
side by the epithelium of the first region, but subsequently becoming
gradually wider until it extends continuously round the organ.

In both animals the mucous membrane of the second region has
here and there insular elevations flattened on the surface and beset all
over with small rounded eminences, each with a little pit at its summit
as if made with the point of a pin. These elevated patches vary in
size, but seem to have a fairly regular distribution (Diagrams 1 and
2, 1,1). Thus in both animals there is a large triangular patch on
each wall of the stomach, the base of which is close to the third region
of the mucous membrane, while the apex of the triangle extends
upwards and to the left towards the lesser curvature. From near
the apex a chain of smaller and more circular patches is continued
for some distance parallel to the line of demarcation between the first
and second regions—in Dorcopsis, in fact, as far as the second region
extends. As the result of microscopical examination clearly shows,
these elevations are owing to accumulations of lymphoid tissue in and
beneath the mucous membrane; and they may therefore be termed
‘‘lymphoid patches.” They are in many respects analogous to
Peyer’s patches of the small intestine.

Microscopical Characters of the Mucous Membrane.

The results of the microscopical examination of the several regions
correspond for the most part in both animals (as might indeed have
been expected in genera so closely allied); so that the same description
will apply to both. We shall afterwards take the opportunity of
pointing out any special peculiarity which may obtain in either. The
figures, which have been taken indiscriminately, some from the one
animal and some from the other, will, for the most part, serve to
illustrate the structure of the corresponding parts in both.

The Mucous Membrane of the First Region.—This is covered with
a coating of dense stratified epithelium (Plate VIII. fig. 1, 8) con-

170 MESSRS. SCHAFER AND WILLIAMS ON THE _ [ Jan. 18,

tinuous with that of the gullet, and resembling it in all respects. It
is harsh to the feel, and in this respect contrasts strongly with the
soft mucous membrane of the second and third regions. It is unne-
cessary to enter into details of structure as regards this epithelium,
since it resembles others of its class, the lowermost cells (c') being
rounded or somewhat columnar, the layers above these composed of
polyhedral elements with dentated or ridged surfaces, and those
above these again swollen and enlarged ; finally, most superficial of all
are several strata of flattened scaly cells forming a horny layer (4)
distinguished, both by its somewhat fibrous appearance in section
and by its different reactions to staining fluids, from the Malpighian
layer or layers upon which it rests. Here and there one or two
lymphoid corpuscles are to be seen in between the deeper epithelium-
cells. A few papillae of the mucous membrane project into the
deeper parts of the epithelium ; but neither an inspection of sections
that were made from different parts, nor a careful examination of
the surface, could detect any racemose or tubular glands of any sort
in the region covered by this epithelium. At the line of demarcation
separating it from the glandular portion of the stomach, the surface
of the mucous membrane undergoes an abrupt change, perceptible
as easily by the unassisted eye and hand as with the aid of the
microscope. The manner in which the change takes place is
represented in the figure, but will be more readily understood after *
the structure of the succeeding portion of the stomach has been
described. It is sufficient here to mention that all the layers of
cells of which the stratified epithelium is composed cease abruptly,
with the exception of the deepest layer; this, on the contrary,
becomes directly continued into the simple layer of columnar epi-
thelium which covers the whole of the glandular portion, and which
sends prolongations into the mouths of the glands.

The Mucous Membrane of the Second Region.—This region and
the remaining one include the whole of the glandular portion of the
organ. ‘The mucous membrane is soft to the feel and of considera-
ble thickness ; and its surface is closely dotted with the orifices of
the tubular glands (Plate IX. fig. 2), which are densely arranged
and pass either vertically or somewhat obliquely through the whole
thickness of the membrane (which may, indeed, be stated to be in
a large measure composed of them) as far as the muscularis mucosz
(m. m), which, as in man, limits the mucous membrane and sepa-
rates it from the submucous areolar tissue. Each gland-tube is
bounded (or rather may be said to be formed) by a delicate basement
membrane, appearing in section as a mere line outside the epithe-
lium of the gland. The tubes are cylindrical for the greater part
of their length, but are somewhat enlarged towards the orifice, and
also usually swollen out at the bottom (4). The surface of the
mucous membrane between the orifices of the tubular glands is, as
usual, covered by a single layer of characteristic columnar epithelium-
cells (c), with the attached ends tapering, apparently designed, like
the bricks in an arch, to accommodate themselves to the rounded
surface to which they are attached; and this epithelium is con-

1876. ] MUCOUS MEMBRANE IN KANGAROOS. 171

tinued also into the openings themselves. Tracing it further into
the gland, we find the cells, still columnar, less tapering at their
fixed extremities ; and, moreover, while in the mouths of the glands,
as on the general surface, they stand vertical to the basement
membrane with their free ends on the same level, in the throat
of the glands, on the other hand, they slant upwards, so that they
more or less overlap one another (fig. 2,2). Further downwards
in the tube the cells become gradually shorter, so as to appear
quadrangular or cubical in form ; at the same time the lumen of the
tube becomes much narrowed, and, indeed, in vertical sections of the
mucous membrane is in some parts hardly perceptible. These shortly
columnar or cubical epithelium-cells occupy the greater part of the
length of the tube (m). They have each a very distinct round or
oval nucleus with one or two nucleoli; and the protoplasm of the cell,
which is granular in appearance, becomes stained by logwood,
although not nearly so intensely as the nucleus.

Towards the fundus (6) of the gland the cells undergo a change.
They become gradually larger, and rounded or polyhedral in shape ;
their outlines become more distinct; and the substance of the cell
acquires a clear or very faintly granular aspect, and, moreover,
becomes hardly at all stained by logwood. Further, the nuclei, for
the most part, have not their usual characteristic vesicular appearance,
but in most of the cells (which line, and in some cases almost fill,
the fundus) appear as intensely stained, shrunken or compressed
bodies, usually situated excentrically in the cell, and not frequently
flattened up against the basement membrane. In short, the appear-
ance of these polyhedral cells of the fundus of the gland brings
strongly to mind the cells which occupy the alveoli of the sali-
vary gland (submaxillary) ; and it is not impossible that the clear,
swollen-out aspect they present may be due to a cause similar to
that to which the salivary cells are believed to owe their characteris-
tic appearance, the presence, namely, within the cells at the time
of death of mucus or some similar substance, which swells up on
the addition of fluid. Or it may be that the protoplasm of these
lowermost ceils is younger and less changed than that of the other
cells of the gland, and consequently that they are more readily acted
upon by reagents, or by the secretion of the gland itself after death,
than the rest. At any rate there seems a close analogy between the
structure of the deeper parts of these tubular glands and the alveoli
of the compound racemose glands. . At the same time it must be
remembered that some of the latter class of glands, the pancreas for
example, do not exhibit the clear, swollen-out cells with excentrically
placed nuclei, but their alveolar walls resemble more, on the contrary,
the cubical cells of the middle parts of the tubular glands above
described ; and it is worthy of note that in some parts of the second
region of the Kangaroo stomach, those for instance in the neigh-
bourhood of the pylorus, the tubular glands, which are here very
long, are lined in the deeper as well as in the middle parts, by cubical
or shortly columnar cells which are similar throughout.

The substance of the mucous membrane between the tubular

172 MESSRS, SCHAFER AND WILLIAMS ON THE [Jan. 18,

glands of the second region is in most parts composed of delicate
connective tissue with numerous corpuscles, supporting the blood-
vessels. Here and there well-defined cleft-like spaces are seen in the
sections. These, no doubt, represent the lymphatics which are now
known to be so numerous in the gastric mucous membrane *. They
are particularly large and well marked in the neighbourhood of the
pylorus (fig. 5).

In some places the interglandular tissue contains a considerable
number of lymphoid cells; but this is more particularly the case in
the neighbourhood of the lymphoid patches, to the description of
which we shall immediately come. Moreover a certain amount of
lymphoid tissue may intervene between the bases of the glands and
the muscularis mucose. This last-named layer consists in most
parts of two strata of muscular fibre-cells which cross one another,
the inner being circular, the outer longitudinal in direction. From
the more superficial or inner stratum bundles of fibre-cells pass up
here and there between the glands, towards the surface ; but it has
not been easy to trace their ultimate destination. Probably they
become eventually attached to the basement membrane.

Structure of Lymphoid Patches.—These localized elevations or
thickenings differ from the rest of the mucous membrane of the second
region in the fact that both mucosa and submucosa are largely formed
by lymphoid tissue, 7. e. lymph corpuscles supported by a fine retiform
tissue. This (fig. 3) extends in the mucosa towards the surface of
the membrane between the glands, and is also found as a distinct
stratum at their base. In the submucosa it forms a layer of some
thickness immediately underneath the muscularis mucose. The
lymphoid tissue does not form a uniform layer, but is gathered
at intervals into well-marked nodules or follicles (fig. 4), which cause
the small rounded elevations already noticed on the surface of the
lymphoid patch. Each of these elevations is, it will be remembered,
marked with a small central pit (d). At the bottom of this the
tubular glands fail, and the summit of the follicle is separated
from the free surface merely by the layer of columnar epithelium,
which itself contains numerous lymph corpuscles between the
columnar cells; and these are also to be noticed free within the
depression, as if they had emigrated from the subjacent lymphoid
nodule. Indeed it may be doubted whether in some instances the
covering of epithelium over the summit of the nodule may not be
altogether absent; some of the sections obtained appear to show
this ; but it is possible that it may have become accidentally detached.
Below the lymphoid Jayer of the submucosa is the ordinary connec-
tive tissue of that tunic (s. m) supporting the larger blood-vessels,
nerves, and lymphatics; and at the base of each follicular accumu-
lation there is commonly (as shown in fig. 3) a large lymphatic sinus,
into which the follicle partly dips. At other places the lymphoid
tissue of the mucosa is separated from that of the submucosa by the
layer of muscularis mucosee (fig. 3, m. m); but the latter is wanting
opposite the summit of each follicle (fig. 4), and the lymphoid tissue

* Lovén, Nord. Med. Arkiv, 1878.

1876.] MUCOUS MEMBRANE IN KANGAROOS. 173

of the one blends with that of the other. In this particular, as in
most others, the lymphoid patches of the Marsupial stomach exactly
resemble the patches of Peyer of the human ileum, only that in the
latter the lymphoid follicles occupy more of the mucous membrane
and come entirely to the surface, whereas, in the gastric patches in
question, the follicles, as well as the remainder of the lymphoid
tissue, are surmounted by tubular glands, except at the centre of
each, where the surface is pitted in as far as the summit or cupola
of the follicle. The glands over these lymphoid patches are some-
what shorter than those which are found in the rest of the mucous
membrane of the second region, but entirely agree with them in
structure (figs. 3 & 4).

Transition of the Stratified Epithelium of the First Region into the
simple Columnar Epithelium of the Second Region.—The manner in
which this occurs will be readily understood by again referring to
fig. 1. Close to the limit between these two regions the stratified
epithelium (SS) of the first is of considerable thickness, nearly as thick,
indeed, as the whole mucous membrane of the second. If the lower
line of the epithelium be followed, it will be seen that just as it ap-
proaches the junction it rises rather abruptly towards the surface, the
layers of cells above it being continually less and less numerous until
they are reduced to six or eight only. The lowermost columnar cells
(c’) of the stratified epithelium then become directly continued into
the simple columnar epithelium (c) of the glandular region, whilst
the layers above it cease abruptly, one or two cells often projecting
at the edge like bricks from the end of a wall. The tubular glands
begin immediately beyond this, the first ones passing down parallel
with the ascending line of the stratified epithelium; but they are
separated from it by somewhat more of the tissue of the mucosa
than they are from one another. This tissue (¢, 7) contains very
numerous lymphoid cells, and many are seen also in between the
lower cells of the stratified epithelium of the immediate neighbour-
hood (at /y). Transitional forms of epithelium between the scaly
stratified and the columnar (as described by Henle at the line of
transition of gullet into stomach-epithelium in man) do not occur,
but the passage of the one into the other is quite abrupt and effected
by the cessation of all the layers of the stratified epithelium except
the lowermost.

Structure of the Second Region, in the neighbourhood of the
Pylorus.—The lining membrane as well as the muscular coat is here
very thick, especially in Macropus giganteus; and the gland-tubes
are correspondingly long (fig. 5). They are not enlarged at the
fundus ; and the cells of this are similar in appearance to those of the
rest of the tube. Numerous bundles of muscular tissue (m!. m!) pass
from the muscularis mucose upwards towards the glands. But the
most striking feature of the part is the number and size of the
lymphatics (/, 1). These appear in sections as large well-defined
clefts in the connective tissue between the glands. The clefts are
not merely accidental; for they have a definite wall of flattened
nucleated cells, like the commencing lymphatics elsewhere.

174 MESSRS. SCHAFER AND WILLIAMS ON THE [Jan. 18,

Two such clefts of considerable size are seen between the glands in
fig. 5; other smaller clefts, also for the most part representing sec-
tions of lymphatics, are seen in the interglandular tissue in various
parts of the mucous membrane. It will be observed, moreover, that
the lymphoid tissue at the base of the glands is more abundant here
than in the rest of the second region (fig. 2), with the exception of
the lymphoid patches, and that the prolongations of the muscularis
mucose towards the surface between the glands are more numerous
(m'.m').

The Mucous Membrane of the Third Region.—This is very thick
both in Dorcopsis luctuosa and in Macropus giganteus, the thickness
being as usual due to the length of the gland-tubes. These resem-
ble m many respects the pyloric part of the second region just
described ; thus they are long straight tubes lined near the orifice
with columnar epithelium, and in all the rest of their extent with
small cubical or polyhedral cells, which in many parts nearly fill up
the tubes. But there is this important difference, that superadded
to these and situated outside of them (but still within the basement
membrane, which they often cause to bulge outwards) there are, in
the middle parts of the Jength of the gland (figs. 6 & 7), certain
other cells of a spheroidal or ovoidal shape and granular appearance.
These are what have long been known as peptic cells; since it is
believed, although it has not yet been conclusively proved, that they
are the source of the pepsin of the gastric juice. ‘They were termed
by Rollett* the delomorphous cells of the gland, whilst the other,
more centrally situated, and usually less obvious cells, which are
continuous above with the columnar epithelium of the surface, he
has termed adelomorphous. For the present it will be better to
adhere to the old terminology (peptic cells) for the rounded cells,
and to term the angular ones, which line the whole tube within them,
central cells. The glands, moreover, in which the peptic cells occur
we may continue to term the peptic glands, and the region of the
stomach occupied by them the peptic region, without at the same
committing ourselves so far as to maintain that the other portions
of the stomach do not also, as some physiologists think, yield
pepsin.

To return to the structure of the glands. The spheroidal peptic
cells vary in number in different glands, being fewest in the parts of
the peptic region which are nearest the boundary between this and
the second or general glandular region. It frequently happens that
these peptic cells do not reach the fundus (6) of the gland, which
is not larger in these glands than the rest of the tube, and is occu-
pied exclusively by central cells which resemble the cubical cells
of the other glands, but are smaller and more closely packed. The
distribution of the peptic cells in the glands is well shown in fig. 6,
which is a sketch of part of a vertical section from the middle of the
peptic region as seen under a low power. ‘The preparation was
stained with aniline blue, according to Heidenhain’s directions+; the
peptic cells become much more deeply stained by this than the rest

* Untersuchungen, 1871. t Arch, f, mikr. Anat. vi. 1870.

1876.] MUCOUS MEMBRANE IN KANGAROOS, 175

of the tissue, and the limit of their distribution can be readily made
out. They are seen to be absent near the orifices of the glands,
where the tubes are lined with columnar epithelium.

The relation of the peptic cells to the central cells is best seen in
the horizontal sections (as in fig. 8, which is taken from the Dorcop-
sis stomach). Here the peptic cells (p, p) lie immediately outside
the central cells (c, ¢) (which almost fill up the tube, leaving but a
very small lumen) and in close contact with them. But in Macropus
the contact is not so close; for the basement membrane of the gland
sends horizontal lamellar projections inwards, partially surrounding
the spheroidal cells and separating them more from the central ones.

It can be clearly made out (both in vertical sections showing the
glands along their whole length, and in sections carried obliquely
across them so that in different parts of the section different
levels of the tubes are cut) that the central cells are directly con-
tinuous at the neck of the glands with the gradually shortening
columnar cells of the gland-mouth, and resemble, therefore, in this
respect the cubical cells which line the greater part of the tubes of
the second region*. In general aspect too the central cells resemble
those; but they are for the most part, as before mentioned, smaller
and more angular and closely packed. This is especially the case
at the base of the gland, where the cells almost entirely fill the tube
so as to leave little or no lumen (fig. 9).

Transition between the Second and Third Regions.—The line
of demarcation between these is best marked, as before stated, in
Dorcopsis, where there is a slight furrow between them, the
mucous membrane increasing rapidly in thickness on the peptic
side of the furrow. A section across the line and including a part
of each region, is shown in fig 10, as seen under a low power in a
preparation stained with aniline blue. The glands of the second
region become gradually shorter until opposite the bottom of the
furrow, where they are shortest ; those beyond rapidly increase in
length, but exhibit at first exactly the same structure. At about
the third or fourth row, however, a few peptic cells become super-
added to the others about the middle of the glands; and these
increase in number and occupy a greater length of the gland as we
proceed further into the third region, until after a few more tubes
they are found throughout the greater part of the length of the
glands; so that from a study of the mode in which the two kinds
of glands pass into one another, as well as from a comparison of
their structure, it is clear that the main parts of the glands of both
regions are almost precisely similar and will probably have a similar
function, and that the only difference of importance lies in the fact
of the superaddition of the peptic cells in the glands of the third
region—probably implying the superaddition of some other function
in these glands. Whether this, as is generally believed, is the elabo-

* Strictly speaking, these cells are not cubical; for although they appear so
when the glands are seen longitudinally, they must of course, as seen in a trans-
verse section of the glands, become narrower towards the lumen; so that the
shape of each cell is in reality that of a truncated wedge,

176 MESSRS, SCHAFER AND WILLIAMS ON THE _ [Jan. 18,

ration of pepsin, we hope that before long the results of some com-
parative experiments already commenced will enable us to form a
definite opinion.

In the foregoing account we have been induced to enter into what
might seem almost unnecessarily minute details with reference to
the structure of the gastric mucous membrane in these particular
animals, because, as we have already incidentally mentioned, they
seemed to us especially well adapted for investigation, partly on
account of the well-marked differences between the glands of dif-
ferent regions, combined at the same time as they are with many
unmistakable features of similarity, partly on account of the ease
and certainty with which the regions can be mapped out, and partly
also on account of the simplicity of fourm of the glands, which
renders them easy of observation throughout their whole length.

The identity between the glands of the third region here described
and the well-known peptic glands of the stomach has been already
incidentally noticed, and is sufficiently obvious. It will doubtless also
have suggested itself to most of our readers that the glands here
described as occupying the second region in the Kangaroo’s stomach,
and consequently by far the larger portion of the glandular mucous
membrane, resemble in most points of structure those which were
until the last few years known as the mucous glands of the stomach of
Man and the higher Mammalia. But the resemblance is more obvious,
both as regards situation and structure, in the part of the second
region which is near the pylorus, than in the remainder. In the latter
the epithelium of the glands presents peculiarities which have not
hitherto, it is believed, been noticed in the gastric glands of other
animals. These peculiarities are not improbably connected with the
nature of the food on which the Kangaroo subsists. Further inves-
tigation is necessary to show to what extent they are found in other
animals in which the food is similar.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PLATES.

Puate VIII.

Fig. 1. Vertical section of the mucous membrane of the stomach of Macropus
giganteus, carried across the line of junction between the first and
second regions. Magnified about 135 diameters. 4, end of first region
or region of stratified epithelium ; B, commencement of second region ;
X, junction of the two; S, stratified epithelium ; p, p, papillee of co-
rium rising up into this; c', lowermost columnar cells of the Mal-
pighian layer of the stratified epithelium; %, horny layer of ditto;
ly, lymphoid corpuscles between the cells of the Malpighian layer ;
gl, tubular glands of mucous membrane of second region; 9, 0, their
orifices; c, columnar epithelium of the surface; 7, 7, interglandular
tissue with numerous lymphoid cells; m.m, muscularis mucose ; »,
blood-vessels cut across.

Prats IX.

Fig. 2. Vertical section of a part of the second region of the mucous membrane,
showing three of the tubular glands, of Macropus giganteus, Magnified

1876. ] MUCOUS MEMBRANE IN KANGAROOS. 177

about 260 diameters. n, neck, m, middle part, 4, fundus, 0, orifices of
the glands; c, columnar epithelium of the surface continued into the
mouths of the glands; m.m, muscularis mucose; v, v, blood-vessels
cut across,

Fig. 3. Vertical section of part of a lymphoid patch, from the stomach of
Macropus giganteus, showing three of the tubular glands. Magnified
about 260 diameters. 0, 0, orifices of the glands ; c, columnar epithe-
lium of the surface; 7, neck, m, middle part, 4, base or fundus of the
glands ; m.m, muscularis mucosze ; s.77, submucosa; /.¢, lymphoid tissue.

- 4. Section of a nodule or follicle from lymphoid patch of stomach (Dor-
copsis luctuosa). Magnified about 60 diameters. F, follicle; d, de-
pression or pit in the mucosa over the follicle; g/, glands of the
mucosa with lymphoid tissue between them and at their base ; 2.2m,
muscularis mucose ; s. m, submucous areolar tissue with lymphoid tissue
near muscularis mucose ; J.s, lymphatic sinus at base of follicle,

Prats X,

Fig. 5. Vertical section of mucous membrane of second region of stomach near
the pylorus (Macropus ganteus), showing six of the tubular glands.
Magnified about 135 diameters. ¢, columnar epithelium of the sur-
face ; 0, 0, orifices of the glands ; 7, J, lymphatic vessels in the inter-
glandular tissue of the mucous membrane ; 7', m’, bundles of plain
muscular tissue passing up between the bases of the glands from the
muscularis mucosx, which is not represented in this figure.

Fig. 6. Vertical section of the third or peptic region of stomach (Dorcopsis lue-
tuosa). Magnified about 60 diameters. p, part of the glands which
contain peptic or delomorphous cells; 3, bases of the glands destitute
of these; 2.m, muscularis mucose,

Prats XT,

Fig. 7. Middle part of three tubular glands from vertical section of peptic
region of the stomach (Dorcopsis luctuosa), Magnified about 260
diameters. p, p, peptic cells; c, c, central or adelomorphous cells.

Fig. 8. Horizontal section of peptic region at level of middle of ‘the glands
(Dorcopsis luctuosa). Magnified about 260 diameters, p, p, peptic
cells, c, c, central cells, b.m, basement membrane of glands; », », capil-
lary blood-vessels cut across in the interglandular tissue,

Fig. 9. Base or fundus of one of the peptic glands, seen to be occupied entirely
by the angular central cells (Dorcopsis). Magnified about 260 diame-
ters,

Fig. 10. Section across the line of demarkation between the second and third
regions of the gastric mucous membrane (Dorcopsis luctuosa). Mag-
nified about 60 diameters. B, mucous membrane of the second region ;

, Mucous membrane of third or peptic region; X x, depression at
the junction between the second and third regions; p, parts of the
glands of the third region which contain the peptic cells; m.m, mus-
cularis mucose,

Figs, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are from preparations which had been coloured with
logwood-alum ; figs. 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 from sections stained with aniline blue.

In figs. 6 and 10 the outlines of the glands are only roughly indicated.

Fi

oR

Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1876, No. XII. 12

178 ON THE TORTOISES ETC, OF GALAPAGOS ISLANDS. [Feb. 1,

February 1, 1876.
G. R. Waterhouse, Esq., V.P., in the Chair.

The Secretary read the following extract from a Report by Com-
mander Cookson, R.N., of a visit by H.M.S. “ Peterel” to the Gala-
pagos Islands in July 1875, which had been communicated to him
by the First Lord of the Admiralty :—

«A notice of these islands would be incomplete without some
reference to the Tortoises for which they are so famous, and from
whom they derive their name.

“These animals are extinct in Charles Island; and only a very
few individuals are supposed to survive on Chatham Island. In
Hood, James, and Indefatigable Islands the numbers are so reduced
that they are no longer hunted, the few left being in the most
inaccessible parts of the islands; and I was assured that a search of
a fortnight might not result in finding a single individual on either
of these islands. Albemarle and Abingdon are the only remaining
islands in which they have ever been found. In parts of Albemarle
Island they are still very abundant, especially at the south-east end.

“They are still tolerably numerous near Tagus Cove. Landing
a party of twenty-four men about half a mile south-east of Tagus
Cove, we found in a few hours thirty tortoises: the three largest
weighed respectively 241 lb., 185 lb., and 173 1b. ; these, I was told,
were as large as they are commonly found now.

“Tagus Cove is a favourite resort of whalers for the purpose of
getting Tortoises. The anchorage is perfectly secure ; and the custom
is for almost the entire crew to be landed until as many Tortoises
are secured as can conveniently be taken on board, some whalers
going to sea with as many as 100.

““We found a good trail leading from the landing-place (at one of
the gullies before mentioned as having pools of fresh water at its
mouth) to the ground where the Tortoises are found, a distance of
about three miles; quantities of Tortoise shells, and traces of fires
showed the numerous camping-grounds.

“Tortoises were never, I believe, very abundant on Abingdon
Island; our searching party found four on this island. They were
on the high ground; and it was a work of great labour getting them
down to the boats. The distance was about four miles; but the
ground was exceedingly rugged, and covered with thick brush,
through which a trail had to be cut for the entire distance. The
largest found on this island weighed 201 lb., and the smallest
135 |b.

“In consequence of the extent of Albemarle Island, and the inac-
cessibility of many parts of it, I have no doubt these animals are still
very numerous on it, and are likely to be so for a long period even
at the present rate at which they are destroyed ; but I have already
shown the havoc made amongst them by the oil-makers. This is
the cause of their being nearly extinct on James and Indefatigable

1876.] MR. P. L. SCLATER ON THE HORN OF A DEER. 179

Islands, where they used to be so numerous. Admiral Fitzroy
found a party on James Island making oil in 1835.

“In Abingdon Island, where they are not numerous, I believe
they are doomed to destruction directly the orchilla-pickers are
placed on the island; for a party of sixty or eighty men will soon
hunt over this small island, and discover every individual on it.
The meat is highly esteemed by the inhabitants; we found it rather
tough and stringy ; but it makes excellent soup.

“*The tameness of the birds on the islands has been frequently
noticed; it is certainly very remarkable, especially in Charles and
Chatham Islands, which have- been so long inhabited; the small
birds of all kinds are so tame that they are easily knocked down
with a switch; some of the men killed numbers of doves in this
manner.

“The rocks at Iguana Cove were thickly covered with the hideous
black Iguanas mentioned by Admiral Fitzroy. We found them iu
numbers at the other places we visited, but nowhere else so nume-
rous or so large in size. Here they were found to weigh from 20
to 22 lb., against 12 to 14 lb. from other localities.”

Mr. Frederick Selous, Jr., exhibited a series of horns of African
Rhinoceroses in illustration of Mr, Drummond’s paper read at the
last Meeting of the Society.

These horns had been obtained in various localities in eastern
Africa, and consisted of the following specimens :—

1. R. bicornis major 3. Shot at Tamasanka, Nov. 19, 1874,
about lat. 19° 50! S., long 26° 10! E.

2. R. bicornis major 9. Shot near the river Gwai, September
1873, about lat. 18° 50' S., long. 27° E.

3. R. keiiloa 8. Shot on the southern edge of the marshes of
the Chebe river, August 28, 1874, about lat. 18° 30’ S., long. 4°
50! E.

4. R. simus 2. Shot on the border of the hills between the
Gwai and Zambesi rivers, May 1874, about lat. 18° 40! S., long. 26°
30! E.

5. R. simus 9. Shot Oct. 1872, near the river Sech Wechive,
north-east of the Matabili country, about lat. 18° 30! S., long. 29°
50' E.

6. R. simus 2. Shot Nov. 15, 1874, about lat. 19°S., long.
26° E.

Mr. Sclater read the following extract from a letter addressed to
him by Mr. Albert L. C. Le Sceuf, Hon. Secretary of the Zoologi-
eal and Acclimatization Society of Melbourne, Australia :—

“TI send you the horn of a Deer we have in our gardens, and I
shall be much obliged if you can let me know what variety it is.

cannot find it described anywhere, although I do not doubt it will
be familiar to you. The Deer were sent here some years ago by Sir
Henry Barkly, from the Mauritius. In appearance it is like the
Sambur Deer, but smaller, say about three feet high or rather

12*

180 PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON LEPIDOSIREN. [Feb. 1,

under. The colour of the hair is rather lighter than in the Sambur ;
the ears are not so large. The does breed freely every year with us.
We have liberated some in the bush, and given others away.”

Mr. Sclater exhibited the horn in question, and said that it
appeared to belong to Cervus rusa, originally of Java, but which
was known to have been introduced thence into the Mauritius many
years ago (see Blyth, Ibis 1862, p. 92).

Mr. Sclater thought it desirable that the facts of this transportation
should be placed upon record, as this Deer might probabi ly become
a denizen of Australia, as had been already the case in Mauritius.

The following papers were read :—

1. On the Position of the Anterior Nasal Apertures in
Lepidosiren. By T. H. Huxuey, Sec. B.S.

[Received January 7, 1876.]

In the course of the discussion which followed my paper on Cera-
todus, read before the Society on the 4th of January, reference was
made to the position of the anterior nasal apertures in Lepidosiren ;
and they were affirmed to be within the mouth, inasmuch as they
are situated between the upper and the lower lips.

The anterior nasal apertures correspond with the primitive open-
ings of the. olfactory sacs, which, in all known Vertebrata, are in-
variably developed from the integument of the under aspect of the
head, in front of the region which forms the roof of the oral
cavity: and, in all the vertebrated animals in which I had specially
studied the question, I had found the anterior nasal apertures to
be situated in front of the upper lip and therefore outside the mouth.
That they should be situated behind, or below, the upper lip, and
therefore inside the mouth (so far as the cavity included between
the lips may be properly called the mouth), appeared to me to be a
singular anomaly, the existence of which, however, I was not
prepared to dispute without reexamination of the facts. The point
is, In various respects, of so much interest that I have lost no time in
making the requisite investigation, with the result of leaving no
doubt whatever in my mind that in Lepidosiren, as in Ceratodus,
the anterior nasal apertures are truly outside the mouth, not only in
the sense of lying beyond the contour of the mandible, when this
is shut against the palate, but in the sense of being situated on the
underside of the head in front of the upper lip, and therefore alto-
gether beyond the limits of any permissible definition of the oral
cavity.

When the mouth of a Lepidosiren (L. annectens) is laid open from
below, and the palate and the contour of what has hitherto been
termed the upper lip (Fig. p. 181, ¢a@6d) are displayed, the latter
is seen to present a median portion (a 6) separated by a slight
undulation from the two lateral prolongations ea and 6d. The

1876.] PROF. T. H. HUXLEY ON LEPIDOSIREN. 131

latter are the edges of the fold which overhang the mandible on each
side when the parts are undisturbed. They occupy the maxillary
region of the head, and may be termed the maaillary lips.

The median portion of the anterior contour (a 4) does not belong
to the lips at all, but corresponds, as is easily seen in a section of
the skull, with the anterior extremity of the chondrocraninm and
the ventral edges of the nasal capsules. The line a 6 is, in fact,
the anterior contour of the head; and the pigment-cells of the dorsal
integument are here continued onto the ventral face. After a very
short distance, however, the integument terminates in a slight, trans-
verse, papillose ridge, which forms the anterior boundary of a shallow
median depression ; on each side of the hinder part of this depression
is one of the vomerine teeth (v.¢).

Under view of the fore part of the roof of the mouth and underside of the head
of a young specimen of Lepidosiren annectens (X38). ab, anterior
margin of the head; ae, 6d, right and left maxillary lips: a.m,
anterior nasal apertures; p.”, posterior nasal apertures; w./, pre-
maxillary lip; v.7, vomerine teeth; p.7, palatine teeth,

The anterior nares (a.n) lie immediately behind the anterior
contour of the head; and their more prominent posterior lips lie in
front of a transverse line drawn through the edge of the papillose
ridge. It is obvious that the area included between the anterior
contour of the head in front, the median fossa behind, and the
anterior nares at the sides, corresponds with the region occupied by
the naso-frontal process in the vertebrate embryo and with the homo-
logous large, shield-shaped, naso-frontal integumentary plate in the
Rays and Dogfishes. The papillose ridge (u./) is therefore the
middle or premaxillary portion of the upper lip; and if this be so,
it follows that the anterior nares in Lepidosiren are placed as in
Chimeeroids and Plagiostomi, on the under aspect of the head and
outside the mouth.

I may add that Lepidosiren has two upper labial cartilages—one
fibro-cartilaginous immediately behind the anterior nasal aperture,
and the other behind the posterior nasal aperture. These answer
to the upper labial cartilages in Chimera and Cestracion.

182 MR. F. J. BELL ON MOSCHUS MOSCHIFERUS. [Feb. I,

2. Notes on the Myology of the Limbs of Moschus moschi-
ferus. By F. Jerrrey Brix, Exhibitioner of Magdalen
College, Oxford. Communicated by Prof. Fiower,
F.B.S., V.P.Z.5.

[Received December 31, 1875.]

By the kindness of Prof. Flower, I have been enabled to dissect
the muscles of the fore and hind limbs of Moschus moschiferus, an
animal which has been lately made the subject of a monograph by
Prof. Flower, presented by him to the Society (P. Z.S. March 16th,
1875). ‘Lhe interest of any new facts that can be brought forward
concerning this Deer will be evident to all who heard or have read
his paper.

In examining the myology of the limbs, I have dissected the cor-
responding parts in Cervus virginianus (kindly sent me by Mr. A. H.
Garrod), Tragulus, sp. ? (from the store-room of the Royal College
of Surgeons.of London), and a common Sheep. I have also been able
to wake comparisons with the myology of the same parts in Hyomos-
chus, thanks to a paper published by M. Chatin in the ‘ Annales des
Sciences Naturelles’ *.

Unfortunately, both in the copy of Cuvier’s ‘ Planches de Myolo-
gie’ which I saw through the kindness of Mr. Garrod, and in that
belonging to the Library of the Royal College of Surgeons, there
were no plates of the muscles of a sheep, ox, or deer; but a full
description of those of the first two can be found in Chauveau’s ‘ Com-
parative Anatomy of Domesticated Animals,’ which is now easily
accessible ; and for this reason I have thought it unnecessary to de-
scribe, at any length, such muscles as offer no important variations
from what we find in the Sheep; in the same text-book will also be
found all the more common synonyms of the muscles—a most neces-
sary assistance to myologists in the present confused state of nomen-
clature.

Inthe hind limb of Moschus, as itcame into my hands, the femur was
removed. The muscles of the humerus are not described in this paper ;
but the more striking differences are only found in the arrangement
of those muscles which send tendons to the digits.

I. Fore limb.
A. Muscles inserted into the metacarpus.

a. Anterior face.
(1) Extensor metacarpi anterior.
(2) ss * obliquus.

In the arrangement of these muscles there was no important vari-
ation from that which obtains in the same parts in the sheep and
deer dissected.

* “ Observations sur la Myologio de l'Hyomoschus,” loc. cit, 5° sér. Zoologie et
Paléontologie, tom, xy, (1872).

1876. | MR. F. J. BELL ON MOSCHUS MOSCHIFERUS. 183

In Tragulus a similar arrangement obtains. In Hyomoschus, how-
ever, Chatin notes three muscles in this region, which he names ez-
tenseur gros, extenseur gréle, and adducteur. The adducteur appears
to be the same as the oblique extensor, so far as one can judge from
Chatin’s account ; he does not, however, note the oblique direction of
its tendons, which seems to be universal among the Ungulata, as it is
found in Equus, Ovis, Cervus, and Sus.

The anterior extensor arises by two heads barely separable from
one another, on the outer face of the distal portion of the humerus :
and from Chatin’s description and figure I am led to suppose that
he has divided this, which is really one muscle, into a portion “gros,”
and a portion “ gréle.”’

The tendon is only double at its distal extremity, where it widens,
and becomes bifid, to embrace both sides of the tuberosity of the me-
tacarpus.

B. Posterior face.
(1) Flexor metacarpi internus.
(2), » obliquus.
€5)) 3 externus.

Here, again, there is no important variation; but we may note that
the outer branch of the bifid tendon of the external flexor (3) is in-
serted into the tuberosity on the external side of the metacarpus, which
appears as the proximal end of the fifth metacarpal, united to the rest
of the bone in this region, and only represented distally by a short, fine
needle of bone ; a similar insertion of the tendon was seen in Cervus
virginianus ; in the Sheep the ending is more towards the median line
of the metacarpus, while in T’ragulus, Hyomoschus, and the Pig this
branch is attached to the head of the entire fifth metacarpal.

B. Muscles inserted into the phalanges.
a, Anterior face.

In the arrangement of the tendons of muscles going to the digits,
Moschus differs not a little from Cervus virginianus, or the Pig. In
the former, as in the Sheep, we find that there are three muscles
having their insertions in the digits, namely :—

i. Extensor communis, with tendons to the third phalanges of the
median digits.
ii. Extensor digiti interni (tertii).
iii. 3 »» externi (quarti).

Both of these have two branches—one to the second phalanx, and
one directed backwards and ending in the plantar cushion—but no
tendons going to the lateral digits, although those ending on the
plantar surface, as just described, probably represent what remains
of them.

C. virginianus, in addition to the muscles common to it and the
Sheep, possesses an extensor dig. minimi.

184 MR. F. J. BELL ON MOSCHUS MOSCHIFERUs. __[Feb. 1,

In the Pig the digits are all supplied from the common extensor,
by its division into four branches; while the extensor dig. interni,
further, is inserted into both the internal digits, and the fifth possesses
a proper extensor dig. minimi.

Now in Moschus each digit is provided with an extensor; but the
so-called common extensor, as in Cervus, sends out only two branches,
and these for the median digits, into whose third phalanges they are
inserted. The internal extensor is inserted into the first phalanx of
the third digit, on its anterior face, and the third phalanx of the
second, on its inner face. The external extensor is inserted into the
outer sides of the second phalanx of the fourth, and of the third pha-
lanx of the fifth digit. A small extensor dig. minimi is also present,
and is inserted into its second phalanx, after crossing the extensor of
the fourth digit, in the last or distal third of the metacarpus, as in C.
virginianus, as already described, though not as in the Sheep, where
this muscle is absent.

In Tragulus the common extensor is inserted only into the median
digits ; but in yomoschus, as Chatin says, the arrangement is Por-
cine; that is, the common extensor is inserted into all four digits.

As in the Sheep and Pig, the extensors of the phalanges arise on
the outer side of the radius, and from the external tuberosity of the
humerus; their tendons passing together along a deep groove on the
outer face of the distal end of the radius, in a strong fibrous sheath,
are directed, according to their destination, more or less inwardly
along the anterior face of the metacarpus. Separated from these,
however, is the tendon of the internal extensor, the fleshy body of
which lies on the flattened outer face of the ulna, while the tendon
itself, more deep, has a separate carpal sheath ; when it has passed
through this, it widens, but does not bifurcate till it approaches the
distal end of the metacarpus.

3. Posterior face.

1) Perforatus X Nae
a aioe } flexors of the digits.

The short flexor of the fifth digit, which is found in the Pig and
Hyomoschus, is absent.

In no known Ungulate does the perforatus send tendons to the
lateral digits, but only to the second phalanx of each median digit.
In all members of the group its fleshy portion consists of two masses
of muscle, arismg beneath the flevor metacarpi obliquus, from the
internal condyle of the humerus; in the Sheep these two tendons,
arising from the two muscular masses, one from each, unite in the
metacarpal region, and, more distally, bifurcation occurs ; in Cervus
virginianus, the two tendons remain separate, as also in the Pig and
Hyomoschus. In Moschus, however, there is a certain union of the
tendons, by means of a fine slip of tendon running from the inner to
the outer branch, in the metacarpal region.

The perforans, as in the Horse, Sheep, and Pig, consists of three
muscular portions, called by Chauveau epitrochlean, ulnar, and radial,

1876.] MR. F. J. BELL ON MOSCHUS MOSCHIFERUS. 185

from each of which a tendon arises; these three tendons unite into
one, strong and deeply situated, at the carpus.

In the Sheep and Cervus, only two branches are formed by this
tendon, one for the third phalanx of each median digit; but in
Moschus, shortly before reaching the metacarpo-phalangeal region,
there is given off from each side a delicate tendon, which is inserted
into the third phalanx of the second and fifth digits respectively ;
while the remainder, scarcely diminished in size, passes through the
sheath afforded it by the tendons of the perforatus, shortly after its
own bifurcation.

A similar arrangement obtains in Hyomoschus, according to Chatin;
in the Pig, however, the perforans is divided into four distinct branches.
There are no lumbrical or interosseous muscles, as might be inferred
from the structure of the bones of the manus. Hyomoschus has one
lumbrical and four interossel, as the Pig.

Il. Hind limb.

The femur, as already stated, was removed, so that it was impossible
to note the origins of several muscles, as had been done in the fore
limb ; but I saw nothing to lead me to Suppose that there was any
variation from that which ordinarily obtains among Ruminants.

On removing the skin and fascia, it was very easy to separate, on
the posterior side of the leg, in the tibial region, ‘a large triangular
mass of muscle, terminating in a tendon, which seemed to be inserted
into the head of the process of the calcaneum, and then to pass on to
the digits. Such an appearance is common enough in the hind limbs
of Ungulates, and seems to have given rise to Prof. Owen’s remark
that the gastrocnemius sends a tendon to the digits*—the fact
being, indeed, that the tendon which thus crosses, as described by
Owen, over the calcaneum, but which is not inserted into it, is that
of the plantaris muscle, the arrangement of which was clearly pointed
out by Meckel +, in speaking of the Horse :—

“Chez les solipédes le plantaire gréle et le court fléchisseur commun
sont confondus ; ou, si l’on veut, le dernier est avorté.... Le tendon
du muscle se dirige d’abord an devant de celui du triceps dela jambe
[¢. e. the gastrocnemius and soleus]; arrivé au calcanéum, il se place
derriére ce tendon, s’epanouit et s’insére a la grande apophyse de cet
ost; puis il se prolonge en avant.”

By others, again, the soleus has been considered the muscle from
which the perforated tendon arises, as Chatin says § :—

“D’aprés plusieurs auteurs, Stannius entre autres, le soléaire

* “The chief peculiarity of the flexors of the digits of the hind foot in hoofed
quadrupeds is the accession of muscles not so applied in othermammals, Thus
the ‘gastrocnemius,’ besides its insertion into the heel-bone, sends a strong tendon
along the back of the metatarsal, to the phalanges, where it expands and bifur-
cates, each division again splitting for the passage of that of the ‘flexor perforans’
eri being inserted into the middle phalanges.”"—- Anat. of Vertebrates, vol. iii.

. 20.
: t+ Anat. Comp. French ed. vol. vi. p- 442.
+ It would be more correct to say that at this pomt the tendon is surrounded

by a fibrous cap, inserted into the bone, which it has itself formed.
§ Loc, cit.

186 MR. F. J. BELL ON MOSCHUS MOSCHIFERUS. _[Feb. 1,

manque rarement chez les Mammiféres ; mais en général, au lieu de
contribuer 4 la formation du tendon d’Achille, il se terminerait par
un tendon propre, qui chez les Ruminants, le Cochon, et le Chien, se
diviserait pour se rendre aux orteils, de sorte que ce muscle jouerait
le rdle d’un court fléchisseur des orteils, outre celui qui lui est ordi-
naire.

« Dans I Hyemoschus, cependant, pas plus que dans le Cervus mex-
tcanus, une pareille duplicité de fonction ne saurait étre attribuée au
soléaire, car le fléchisseur des orteils qui glisse sur la face postérieure
du caleanéum, comme sur une poulie de renvoi, en est bien distinct.
Cuvier n’indique, d’ailleurs, nullement ce mode de terminaison du so-
léaire se prolongeant jusqu’aux orteils pour en former le fléchisseur
superficiel.””

It may, then, I think, be fairly concluded that the tendon which
is perfor ated in the intl limb of ‘Ungulates, i is that which arises from '
the plantaris ; and this is the view taken by Prof. Huxley * and by
Mr. Mivart tf.

A. Muscles inserted into the tarsus.
a. Anterior face. None.

f. Posterior face.

(1) Gastrocnemius.
(2) Soleus.

These two muscles ordinarily unite their tendons before being in-
serted into the calcaneum, and therefore have been described, chiefly
by French anatomists, as in the above quotation from the French
edition of Meckel, as one muscle, under the name of the ¢riceps of
the leg; for the gastrocnemius has two heads. But in Moschus, asin
Tragulus, the tendons of the two muscles are easily separable for their
whole extent, but a muscular branch unites their fleshy bodies.

The soleus is present in Hyomoschus, but absent in the Pig.

B. Muscles inserted into the metatarsus.

a. Anterior face. ;
(1) Extensor metatarsi internus.
(2) Ry ae anterior stve medius,
(3) mes e externus.

The median and internal flexors pass, with the common extensor
of the digits and the extensor of the fourth digit, through a highly
fibrous tarsal rmg. ‘The flexor internus is larger at its origin than in
the Sheep ; but in both animals, as also in C. virginianus, it arises
both from the head of the tibia and from the strong ridge on the
anterior face of the same bone. Chatin makes the vague observation
concerning this muscle, that it is ‘‘ assez dissemblable chez le Cervus
mexicanus comparé al Hyemoschus.”’ I observed no variation in
its arrangement in Moschus from that which obtains in C. virginianus ;
and the only point in which it differs from the arrangement in the

* Anat. of Vertebrata, p. 56. t Elementary Anatomy, p. 354,

1876.] MR. F. J. BELL ON MOSCHUS MOSCHIVERUS. 187

Pig is, that it terminates on the proximal end of the metatarsal, in-
stead of on the second cuneiform.

The extensor metatarsi anterior, and the extensor digitorum com-
munis are barely separable in the muscular portions, as in the Sheep,
Deer, Hyomoschus, and the Pig. The external extensor crosses over
the tarsus, in close company with the proper extensors of the fourth
and fifth digits; in the Sheep, as might be supposed, and in C. vir-
ginianus, the proper extensor of the fifth is absent. Save in this
particular, there is no variation in the arrangement of this external
extensor in Ruminants from that which obtains in the Pig.

3. Posterior face of the metatarsus; no muscles are in-
serted into it.

C. Muscles of the digits.
a. Anterior face.
(1) Extensor digiti quinti.
(2) 3 >» quarti.
(3) re digitorum communis.
(4) a digiti tertii.

(1) The tendon of this muscle is in close proximity to that of the
extensor dig. quarti, till it approaches the phalangeal or distal end of
the metatarsus, where it widens, separates from it, and is inserted into
the third phalanx of the fifth digit. It is absent in C. virginianus,
as in the Sheep.

(2) This muscle terminates by a broadened strong tendon, on the
second phalanx of the fourth digit, as in the Sheep, Cervus, Hyo-
moschus, and the Pig.

(3) The common extensor has only two branches, which end in the
third phalanges of the median digits, as in Cervus virginianus ; but
the same muscle has four branches in Hyomoschus, as in the Pig—
though only two in Tragulus, as in the manus.

(4) In close connexion with the common extensor arises the ex-
tensor of the internal digit, which terminates in the second phalanx
of the third, and the third phalanx of the second digit. No branch
for the second digit was found in C. virginianus; but the lateral di-
gits of the pes have no metatarsal bones at all, although there are
small metacarpals in the manus.

Chatin notes no internal flexor in Hyomoschus, which is strange,
as the muscle is found in the Pig and in Tragulus, as well as in the
Sheep and Cervus.

8. Posterior face.
(1) Perforatus.
(2) Perforans.
(3) Flexor obliquus.

The perforatus muscle has been already spoken of; it only now
remains to be added that it has only two branches, as in the manus.
The perforans, again, has but two tendons, and those for the median

188 MR. F. J. BELL ON MOSCHUS MOSCHIFERUS. _ [Feb. 1,

digits, whereas, it will be remembered that, in the manus, the lateral
digits also received tendons from this muscle; but the lateral toes of
Moschus, in the pes, are much smailer than those in the manus, and
the metatarsals are absent, as has been pointed out by Prof. Flower.
In Hyomoschus, and the Pig, tendons are sent to all four digits.

The tendon of the oblique flexor, after having passed through the
strong fibrous sheath found on the inner side of the tarsus, becomes
directly afterwards united with that of the perforans; in the Sheep
the union takes place somewhat lower down the metatarsus, in Cervus
at about the same spot.

D. Muscles of the pes. -

The pedal is a small muscle, arising from the inner face of the
caleaneum, and attached to the tendon of the common extensor; it has
no attachment to the inner extensor as in the Sheep and Deer; nor
has it two branches for attachment to the two tendons of the common
extensor as in Hyomoschus and the Pig. There are no interosseous
muscles, of which there are four in Hyomoschus and the Pig.

SuMMARY.

The most interesting points in the foregoing description are those
which refer to the arrangement of the tendons inserted into the digits.

i. They are interesting morphologically, as showing what was the
arrangement in the common ancestor of the true Cervide and of
Moschus—namely, that the extensor communis digitorum had only
two tendons, and those for the median digits ; for the same character
obtains in Tragulus ; while they offer a further proof of Prof. Flower’s
positions: —(a) That Moschus has close affinities to the true Cervidee ;
for this same arrangement seems to be constant throughout the group,
although different in Hyomoschus*. ((3) That Moschus is an older
and more generalized form; inasmuch as it still possesses tendons for
the lateral digits, arranged in the same manner as in Tragulus.

The absence of flexor tendons, arising from the perforans, and in-
serted into the lateral digits of the pes, may cause further stress to be
laid on the small size or complete absence of the metatarsals, which
is so highly characteristic of the Cervide.

ii. They are interesting physiologically, as showing how the Musk-
Deer managed to hold on to the rocks and crags of its home by all
four toes, in the manner described in Prof. Flower’s paper.

It will not, I trust, be long before we know what arrangement obtains
in the Reindeer, in Hydropotes, and others. I trust that the evidences
adduced on the subject of the homology of the perforated tendon of
the pes in the Ungulata, may settle this question, so far, at any rate,
as the gastrocnemius is concerned.

* The vagueness of some parts of M. Chatin’s description demands a recon-
sideration of the myology of Hyomoschus.

1876 .P1. XID 7

a

s
PaaS

I

M&N Hanhart

J.Smit lith.

[ANA .

B

A DER

HAUNA

=
J

ANATOMY OF (

J.Smit lith.

ANATOMY OF

a

- Ln TM,

CHAUNA DERBIANA.

ZS 1876 Pl XM.

a,

We} Riek t

AD Ta BiALAS 2 ek

Eas elke welled QV

1876.] ON THE ANATOMY OF CHAUNA DERBIANA., 189

3. On the Anatomy of Chauna derbiana, and on the 8 ystematic
Position of the Screamers (Palamedeide). By cAwHs
Garrop, M.A., F.Z.S., Prosector to the Society.

[Received January 5, 1876.]
(Plates XII.-XV.)

In his memoir “on the systematic position of the Crested
Screamer (Palamedea chavaria),” published in the ‘ Proceedings’
of this Society*, Prof. Parker has placed that bird among the An-
seres, and away from the Rallide, with which it had been generally
associated. In his “ Classification of Birds” +, Prof. Huxley adopts
the same view as Prof. Parker. Both these distinguished authorities
base their opinions on anatomical considerations ; it therefore be-
hoves me to attempt to substantiate the different views expressed by
me in my paper “on certain muscles of Birds, and their value in
Classification ’’t, as it is so considerably at variance with that of the
authorities just mentioned.

The great extent to which the skeleton is permeated with air
renders the features presented by the different bones of Chuna less
distinctive than in the majority of birds. For this reason the soft
parts will be first considered.

Cutaneous System. Pterylosis.—Nitzsch has described the ptery-
losis of Palamedea cornuta and Chauna chavaria; and, as might be
expected, C. derbiaga does not differ in any important particulars
from the latter. As he remarks, the most striking point observed in the
plucked bird is the extreme whiteness of the surface, which depends
on the fact that the skin is almost universally emphysematous to the
depth of nearly a quarter of an inch. On pressing with the finger,
' the characteristic crackling of a tissue filled with air is most marked,
the only places in which it is absent, or nearly so, being the anterior
surfaces of the upper ends of the tibia, and, to a less degree, two
triangular spaces, equilateral, with their bases towards the middle
line, situated one on each side over that part of each pectoral region
which is near the head of the humerus, in the apex of the larger
triangular surface bounded by the superior and axillary margins of
the great pectoral muscle.

Iu the Gannet and the Pelican the skin is likewise emphyse-
matous, but not exactly in the same way. In them the superficial
surface of the entis forms a plane surface, and the deep layer
another, with the air-cells intervening between them, and the feather-
quills traversing them. In Chauna, however, these two cutaneous
layers are not definable, the whole presenting the appearance as if a
non-emphysematous skin had been forcibly blown up, SO as to cause
its surface to be irregular and bubbled, more like an artificial]
distended mammalian lung than any thing else. The feathers and
the semiplumes do not perforate the air-cells, but cause the skin to
he indented where they are situated.

* P.Z.8. 1868, p. 511. t P.Z.8. 1867, p. 415. { P.Z.8. 1874, p. 117.

190 MR. A. H. GARROD ON THE [Feb. 1,

The disproportionately massive appearance of the legs is also
caused by the presence of air beneath the tessellated skin, which
extends almost to the ungual phalanges of the toes.

The contour-feathers, many of them, possess a very feeble after-
shaft, especially in the region of the nape, as found by Nitzsch in
C. chavaria; and there is also a slight groove along the posterior
surface of the rhachis of each.

The rectrices are twelve in number.

There are twenty-six remiges in one of my specimens ; Nitzsch
and Sundevall find twenty-seven. Of these ten are primaries, the
fourth being the largest. Of the sixteen secondaries the dista! twelve
are subequal, whilst the proximal four decrease in size as they
approach the elbow.

The tufted oil-gland is not strikingly large; it is somewhat flat,
with a single orifice on each side, surrounded by a circle of half-inch
feathers which constitute the tuft.

The tibio-tarsus is nude for its distal third, being there covered,
as over the tarso-metatarse and digits, with small red polygonal
scales.

The plumage is uninterrupted, there being no spaces without
contour-feathers except the axillary cavities mentioned by Nitzsch,
in which down-feathers only are to be found. The down-feathers
are universally distributed. The nude neck-ring of C. chavaria is
absent in C. derbiana. The feathers of the humeral tracts are con-
siderably the strongest of the contour-feathers.

Looked at in its entirety the pterylosis of theeScreamers is unique,
and in no way approaches that of the Anserine birds.

Alimentary Canal.—The palate is elongate and triangular, with
three longitudinal rows of papille, which are conical, large, and
therefore comparatively few in front, smaller and more numerous
behind. They all tend somewhat backwards.

The tongue is just over an inch long, and 3 of an inch broad,
its sides being parallel for nearly their whole length. The tip is
obtusely triangular, with a small papillary fringe at its extremity,
3 of an inch broad. The base is straight, and is edged with spines
zy of an inch long, and shorter, directed backwards. The surface
and lateral margins are quite smooth, the whole organ being flattened,
slightly grooved longitudinally down the centfe, and nowhere more
than 2 of an inch thick. At its base are two lateral juxtaposed
protuberances, rough on the surface, and together equal in area to
one third of its surface. There is no transverse constriction or
oblique groove like that found on the surface of the tongue in some
Anatidee.

The esophagus is uniform in diameter, no crop being even indi-
cated ; it is not capacious.

The proventriculus is peculiar. It is more than usually capacious,
and is glandular only in a patch which occupies but a small portion
of its surface. This patch (which is clearly shown in the represen-
tation of this portion of the alimentary canal in Plate XII. fig. 1, at
its upper end, where the proventricular dilatation ceases) has a

1876.] ANATOMY OF CHAUNA DERBIANA, 191

narrow zonary belt of glands. It can, however, be seen that by far
the majority of the glands are aggregated into a posteriorly situated
patch. The only birds with which I am acquainted in which the
proventricular glands do not form a zone, or an approach to one, are
Struthio and Rhea. In the Gallinee and Anseres they form a zone.

The glandular surface occupies a subelliptical space, 2 inches by
12 in its long and short diameters, in the upper and back part of
the canal, with the long axis in the direction of the tube. Its lower
end is 2? inches from the upper orifice of the gizzard. The gland-
tubes are simple, not racemose, and average + inch in length. The
remainder of the area of the proventriculus, about five sixths of it, is
covered with coarse and irregularly folded epithelium.

The gizzard is constructed on the usual type; it is decidedly
small in proportion to the size of the bird (in the Aunseres it is as
conspicuously large), being much more elongate, narrow, and less
muscular than in grain-feeders. Longitudinal folds plicate the tritu-
rating surfaces, which are smooth in the Geese, Ducks, and Swans.

The spleen is the size of a haricot bean, and of much the same
shape. Its position is in no way peculiar; but, as in all birds, being
placed above the gizzard, it tends to confirm the opinion that the
latter organ is only the representative of the pyloric end of the
stomach, the cardiac component of which is represented by the
proventriculus,

The liver is composed of two simple rounded lobes, united bya
narrow isthmus of hepatic tissue; the lobes are of nearly equal
size ; and there is a fairly voluminous gall-bladder.

The following table gives the intestinal lengths :—

: 2
tt. ine ft. in
Small intestine..........., ge 6 10
Large intestine............ lig 0 7
Oe a 5 ey ae Ors 0 2

The duodenum, with its characteristic bend round the pancreas, is
more capacious than the rest of the small intestine; but it is not
large, being about 2 inch in diameter. The hepatic and pancreatic
ducts enter it at the bend, 23 inches from the pylorus.

The pair of ceca present a condition unlike that found in any
other bird with which I am acquainted. In that they are situated
some considerable distance from the cloaca, they agree only with
Struthio and Rhea. In the much larger Cassowaries the large in-
testine is not more than 7 inches long. In both Apteryx and the
Tinamous, as well as in all other birds, the Anseres and Gallinge
included, the large intestine does not exceed 4 inches in length.
Chauna in having a large intestine, the length of which is several
times the diameter of the gut, agrees therefore with Struthio and
Rhea only. These organs are figured in Plate XIII., they being
opened up in fig. 1 to show their internal structure.

Instead of being smooth externally, the caca are sacculated on
two longitudinal bands, They are peculiarly capacious for their

192 MR. A. H. GARROD ON THE [Feb. 1,

length, and fusiform in general outline. The sacculating bands are
not lateral, but on their outer and inner borders, being continued
from the longitudinal fibres of the large and the small intestine.
Their mucous membrane is not plicated when they are distended.
It is only, among other birds, in Struthio and Rhea that the czeca
are sacculated; in these, however, there is only a spiral twist like
that in the cecum of the hares and rabbits.

Each cecum has a well-developed special sphincter muscle guard-
ing its aperture of communication with the intestine ; and what is
more peculiar still is, that they do not open into the colon proper,
but into a special cavity, a continuation of the main intestinal tube,
but separated off by a very constricting sphincter from the colon, as
well as by the ileo-cecal valve from the small intestine. This ileo-
colic cavity is ? of an inch long and about 3 an inch in diameter
when undistended. Its mucous membrane is like that of the czeca,
much more delicate than that of the colon. The ileo-czecal valve is
a small slit-like opening, nearly 7 of an inch long, with its lips pro-
jecting a little way into the ileo-colic cavity. The two openings of
the czeca into the same cavity are one on each side of it, a little
oblique in regard to it, and considerably larger in lumen. The
opening into the colon is very constricted; beyond it the mucous
membrane of the large intestine is, as Dr. Crisp remarks*, trans-
versely plicated, to produce an appearance much like coarse valvulee
conniventes.

Nothing like the above-described condition is to be observed in
any other bird, not even in Struthio or Fthea, in both of which, as
typically, the czeca enter the commencement of the uniformly ecylin-
drical colon by fair-sized orifices, not surrounded by a_ special
sphincter. ‘This being the case, I cannot agree with Prof. Parker’s
temark + that “there is nothing whatever in the digestive organs,
which are extremely voluminous, to separate the bird from the
Geese.”

Respiratory Organs.—Prof. Parkert remarks, “ the trachea and
inferior larynx are truly anserine ; for there are no inferior laryngeal
muscles, the contractors of the trachea ending one third of an inch
above the bifurcation, and only a delicate fan-shaped fascia going to
the half-rings. Moreover the trachea itself, from being flat and
cartilaginous, becomes round and then compressed, and osseous an
inch above the bronchi, so that it cannot be mistaken for any other
than the trachea of an anatine bird.’ In that the lower end of the
trachea is of smaller diameter than is the tube higher up, in that in
the same part the constituent rings are in close contact without
scarcely any intervening membrane, in that there are two pairs of
tracheal muscles running to the thoracic parietes, and in that the
intrinsic lateral tracheal muscles end before they reach the bifurca-
tion of the bronchi, the syrinx of the Screamers approaches that of
some of the Anseres; but in that there is no special modification of
the organ in the male, and in the absence of chondrification or ossi-
fication of what are generally present as dilating rings or half-rings

* P.Z._S. 1864, p. 16. t PB. Z.S. 1863, p. 514. +. Loc. cit.

1876.] ANATOMY OF CHAUNA DERBIANA. 193

to the bronchi, the Screamers are not Anserine, and in the latter
feature peculiar.

There is nothing remarkable in the rings of the windpipe, their
interlocking producing the well-known key-pattern. The last two
are greatly compressed laterally, so that the membranous bronchi, in
each of which there are only a very few slender half-rings, arise quite
close together. As can be seen from the figure, Place XII. figs. 2,
3, 4, the lateral muscles of the trachea are peculiarly powerful ; the
upper extrinsic pair is inserted into the middle of the membrane
which runs between the body of the coracoid bone and the corre-
sponding limb of the furcula on each side; the lower close to the
costal process of the sternum, at the back of the sterno<coracoid
articular margin of the former bone. The intrinsic muscle on each
side descends the windpipe to end by bifurcating opposite the origin
of the sterno-tracheal muscle, and cease, its anterior portion higher
than its posterior, six or seven rings lower down, some distance above
the bifurcation of the bronchi. The above-mentioned extremely
delicate nature of the commencing bronchial tubes is most peculiar.

The lungs present no special features of interest.

There are several myological characters which, though small in
themselves, all go to form the exact definition of any group of birds,
and aid in the determination of affinities. Among the more im-
portant of these are the presence or absence of the ambiens muscle*
(which is of fair size in Chauna), the presence or absence of the
femoro-caudal, the semitendinosus, and their accessory heads (which
are all four found in Chauna), Having dwelt fully on the impor-
tance of these muscles in the paper just referred to, all I need remark
on the present occasion with regard to them is, that there is there-
fore a difference between this bird and all the true anserine birds, in
none of which is there ever a trace of the accessory semitendinosus.
A reference to my paper on the muscles of the thigh of birds will
show that in possessing all the five above-mentioned muscles the
Screamers agree only with the Gallinz and their nearest allies, the
Rallidee, Musophagide, Cuculide, Columbze, and some of the Limi-
cole.

With reference to secondary myological points, there are four
which, in my estimation, deserve special attention. They are :—

1. The presence or absence of the expansor secundariorum muscle.

2. The presence or absence of a special muscular slip from the
biceps humeri to the patagium.

3. The area of origin of the obturator internus.

4. The degree of development of the tensor-cruris fascia.

These will be considered separately.

1. The presence or absence of the Expansor secundariorum musele.

Expansor secundariorum is the name which it is my habit to
employ for a very small and peculiar triangular muscle arising
from the quills of the last few (generally two or three) secondary

* Vide P. Z. 8. 1874, p. 116.

Proc. Zoon. Soc.—1876, No. XIII. 13

194 MR. A. H. GARROD ON THE [Feb. I;

remiges at the elbow. Its remarkably long and slender tendon,
which frequently traverses a fibrous pulley on the axillary margin of
the teres muscle, runs up the arm side by side with the axillary
vessels and nerves to be inserted in the thorax, into the middle of a
tendon which runs from the inner side of the middle of the seapular
element of the scapulo-coracoid articulation to near the middle of
the thoracic border of the sterno-coracoid articulation, at right angles
to it when the fore limb is extended. This arrangement being found
very well differentiated in the Storks, may, for the sake of con-
venience, be termed Ciconine. In Chavna it is exactly the same, as
may be seen from the accompanying drawing (Plate XIV. fig. 1, e.s).

In the majority of the Gallinaceous birds the expansor seeundari-
orum, with the normal origin from the secondary quills, has a dif-
ferent method of insertion, which has led M. A. Milne- Edwards to
describe the muscle in the common Fowl as a part of the coraco-
brachialis (brevis) in his superb work on fossil birds.

In the genera Tetrao, Francolinus, Rollulus, Phasianus, Euploca-
mus, Gallus, Ceriornis, and Pavo, the muscle instead of being inserted
into the scapulo-sternal fibrous band above referred to, after blending
to a certain extent with the axillary margin of the ¢eres, ceases by
becoming fixed to a fibrous intersection about one third down the
coraco-brachialis brevis muscle.

In Francolinus clappertent from among the Francolins, Ooturniz,
Odontophorus, Ortyx, Eupsychortyx, and Numida, the tendon does not
go so far as the short coraco-brachialis, but ends either by simply
joining the axillary margin of the ¢eres, or by at the same time
sending a tendinous slip behind it to the scapula. In Argus gigan-
teus the tendon, running from the elbow, turns round the axillary
border of the teres to end by joining a triangular muscular fasci-
culus, attached by its base to the upper portion of the thoracic
surface, which appears to be nothing but a differentiation-off of the
upper portion of the last-named muscle, In the Cracide this in-
sertion into the scapula is also found, but it is tendinous, like the
upper element of the thoracic band above described in the Storks
and Chauna; and in them there is also a second tendinous slip from
the axillary margin of the coraco-brachialis longus (Plate XII. fig. 5)
(not the drevis). In the Megapodide also the attachment to the
coraco-brachialis brevis is wanting, the tendon ending either by
blending with the ¢eres-margin, or running on to the scapula.

In the Ducks and Geese among the Anseres the tendons under
consideration, when they enter the thorax, run towards one another
and join, after having expanded out, in the middle line, in front of
the csophagus, and behind the trachea. In the Swans this ar-
rangement is not found, the tendons ending in the ciconine manner,
or by running to the upper end cf the scapula; and in this respect
Sarcidiornis resembles them.

From the tabular statement now exhibited (see p. 199) the nature
as well as the presence or absence of this muscle can be determined
in any special group of birds, The only Anomalognathous birds in
which I have found this muscle are the Coraciide.

1876.] ANATOMY OF CHAUNA DERBIANA. 195

2. The presence or absence of a special muscular slip from the
Biceps humeri to the Patagium.

The biceps humeri, the main flexor of the arm, arises from the
upper end of the coracoid bone, and from the upper portion of the
flexor surface of the humerus. In certain birds this muscle sends
off from its upper end a slender fusiform belly, which runs through
the proximal portion of the patagium to join its marginal tendon
near the middle of its course (Plate XIV. fig. 2). The presence or
absence of this muscular fasciculus is a very constant character among
closely allied birds. In the Table (p. 199) are recorded the names
of all those birds in which, according to my experience, it is to be
found. The only Anomalogonatous birds in which I have seen it
are the Caprimulgide.

3. The Area of Origin of the Obturator internus.

It is not my intention on the present occasion to enter into the
consideration of whether the muscle here called obturator internus is
homologous with the same-named muscle in Mammalia; suffice it to
say that it arises from the pelvic surface of the pubis and ischium,
and ends by a tendon which is inserted into the outer surface of the
head of the femur.

In a large number of birds, on looking at the pelvic view of this
muscle when undisturbed, its shape is seen to be an elongated oval,
occupying the obturator fossa, and covering the line of junction of
the ischium and pubis. In another large number of birds, instead
of being oval it is triangular, its posterior fibres expanding in such a
way as to cover most of the pelvic surface of the ischium. There
are a few birds in which an intermediate condition is found; they
are, however, very few. In most there is not the least difficulty in
deciding whether the obturator internus is oval or triangular (com-
pare Plate XV. figs. 1 and 2). From the Table (p. 199) the ar-
rangement existing in most birds can be found.

4. The degree of Development of the Tensor-cruris fascia.

To this point I have referred in my paper on the muscles of
Birds*, where its relations are explained. “It is the superficial
muscle of the outside of the thigh, covering the femur. It is flat
and triangular in shape, and arises as a membranous expansion
which covers the gluteus ii., from the lower two thirds of the pos-
terior border of the iliac fossa in which that muscle is situated, and
from the fibrous septum which separates that muscle from the
gluteus iii. Further down it has origin also from the whole length
of the ridge which separates the postacetabular area from the ex-
ternal lateral surface of the ischium, and which may be termed the
postacetabular ridge, as well as from the posterior border of the
ischium, as far forwards as its junction with the pubis, being here
slightly overlapped by the semitendinosus. The fibres converge
towards the knee; and the deep portion of the muscle blends in its
course with the vastus externus, together with which it continues

* P.Z. 8. 1873, p. 628.
13%

196 MR. A. H. GARROD ON THE [Feb. 1,

forward to become part of the broad thin tendon which covers the
knee and is inserted in the front of the tibia-head, the patella being
situated in it, together with the long, slender, and flat tendon of the
ambiens muscle, which is situated below it, running obliquely from
inside and above, outwards and downwards. In many birds this
muscle does not extend below the level of the femur, but ends
inferiorly by blending with the vastus externus; and consequently,
where such is the case, it evidently cannot, as it does otherwise,
cover any of the flexors of the leg.’’ Whether this postacetabular
portion uf the tensor fascie is present or absent can be found by
referring to the Table (p. 199). There are not many birds in which
it is very small.

As the Anserine affinities of the Screamers are being discussed, it
ought to be mentioned that in all the former the great pectoral
flexor of the wing is peculiarly elongate, and extends upwards above
the symphysis furcule, with its fellow forming a median raphe as an
anterior continuation of the carina sterni. The only other birds in
which this occurs are the Penguins. In the Screamers the great
pectoral flexor is not large, and does not extend upwards above the
middle of the furcula.

In the Anseres the extensor pectoral (second pectoral) is always
very long and broad, reaching the lower end of the sternum. In
Chauna it does not extend nearly to the posterior margin of the
sternum, and it is not bulky.

Again, the muscles of the Anseres are always intensely dark in
colour, whilst in the Screamer they are quite pale. In this respect
the two groups differ in the same way as do the Seals and the
Sirenia among Mammals.

Osseous System.—The skull, being that portion of the skeleton
which is least permeated with air, will receive the greatest attention
on the present occasion. With reference to it Prof. Parker remarks*,
‘«‘ All the skull and face, except at its two ends, conforms to the
lamellirostral type.” Prof. Huxley also places Palamedea in his
group ‘ Chenomorphe,” among the several features characterizing
those birds being that ‘‘ the lachrymal region of the skull is remark-
ably long.” That such is not the case in Chauna, Prof. Parker has
remarked in his article “ Birds” in the Encyclopeedia Britannica +.

It may be well before proceeding further to inquire more fully
into the nature of the lamellirostral type. Prof. Parker tells us that
“the great embryological distinctions between the skull and face of
the Geese and Fowls are, first, that in the latter the space between
the periotic mass and the superoccipital cartilage is a mere chink, in
the latter a persistent oval space; and secondly, that the anterior
parts of the face, viz. the preemaxillee, praevomers [maxillee], and
dentaries are small and compressed in the Fowls, large and out-
spread in the sifting birds.’ A glance at the accompanying figures
of the posterior surface of the skulls of a Magellanic Goose, a Derbian
Screamer, and a Razor-billed Curassow will enable the reader to decide
for himself which of the two groups, the Anseres or the Gallinz, the

* P.Z.8. 1863, p. 514. + Ene. Brit. 8th edit. vol. iii. p. 712.

1876.] ANATOMY OF CHAUNA DERBIANA. 197

Screamer more closely approaches, It evidently does not share the
peculiarities of the former, in all species of which the surface of
origin for the pair of large extensor muscles of the mandible is
characteristically compressed from side to side, and elongated from
above downwards, at the same time that there is the pair of openings
above the foramen magnum (figs. 1, 2, 3, p- 198).

Again, from a comparison of the inferior surfaces of the same three
skulls, it is equally evident that in the Screamer the preemaxille,
maxillaries, and dentaries agree with the same bones in the Gallina-
ceous bird in not being large and outspreading. The palate of Chauna
is represented in fig. 4.

In the Screamers the skull is, no doubt, as in the Anseres, desmo-
gnathous, having the maxillo-palatines united across the middle line ;
but this character is not sufficiently important. to compel us to unite
the two groups; for if such were the case it would bé necessary to
give credence to an association of birds which is in other respects
extremely unnatural. In the Capitonidee, for instance, Megalema is
not desmognathous, whilst Tetragonops is so.

As before stated, in the Anserine birds the lachrymal region is
specially long. This is least marked in the Cereopsis Goose ( Cere-
opsis nove-hollandie), where, however, it is clearly apparent. In
Chauna, the lachrymal region is as short as in the Gallinee, not in
the least elongated.

In both the Anseres and Galline the pterygoid bones have large
faceted surfaces for articulation with the basisphenoid rostrum. In
both groups these facets are situated very far forwards—quite at the
anterior ends of the bones in the latter ; in Chauna, however, these
articulations are quite independent of the anterior ends of the bones
(fig. 4), being nearly as far backward as the middle of their otherwise
free moieties.

As to the quadrate bones, their cranial articulations are bifid,
which is the case in all birds except Struthio, Rhea, Dromeus,
Casuarius, Apteryz, the Crypturi, and some (most) of the Gallinz.
They do to a certain extent resemble the same bones in the Anseres
in having the articular surfaces for the Jugal arches situated some
way behind the level of their mandibular articulations (not a Galli-
naceous character), which latter they also resemble in configuration,
the usually extended outer facet not running backwards and inwards
a8 in most birds but not in the Gallinz.

In the Gallinze, as in the Crypturi, the pterygo-quadrate articula-
tion is much longer than in other members of the class. In Chauna
this is not the case.

In Chauna the angle of the mandible is much prolonged and up-
curved, as in the Anseres, from which it however differs in not being
deeply excavated in the interval between the upturned process and
the inwardly-directed articular angle, It must be remembered that
the mandible is much the same in the Gallina.

It must also be remembered that the Screamers are the only
birds in which there are no uncinate processes to the ribs, as has been
shown by Mr. Parker,

198 MR. A. H. GARROD ON THE [Feb. 1,

Fig. 1. Chauna derbiana, Back view of skull.

Fig. 2. Chloéphaga magellanica. Back view of skull.
Fig. 3. Mitua tuberosa. Back view of skull.

Fig. 4. Chauna derhiana. Base of skull.

1876.] ANATOMY OF CHAUNA DERBIANA.
TABLE.
Expansor Biceps slip to the Obturator
Name of family. | secundariorum patagium internus
(see p. 193). (see p. 195). (see p. 195).
TINAMIDE ......... Ciconine. Absent. Triangular.
PaLaMEDEIDZ ... Ciconine. Absent. Oval.
GALLINE ......... Present (vide p. | Absent only in | Triangular.
194). Cracidee.
RALLIDE ......... Ciconine. Present. Triangular.
OTIDIDA.........- .| Ciconine. Absent. Oval.
Cariama........000- Ciconine. Absent. Triangular.
Phenicopterus ...| Ciconine. Present. Oval.
Serpentarius ...... Ciconine. Absent. Triangular.
Musopnacip#£ ...| Ciconine. Absent. Triangular.
CucuLip .........| Ciconine. Absent. Triangular.
PESEUTACH. scccwccsas- Absent. Absent. Shwsaleesies. Sisee. ceacticnd,
ANATIDE ......... Ciconine in Oyg- | Present. Peculiar from
nine, peculiar elongation of
in others (vide pelvis.
p- 194).
PSPHENIAOID AS ads sacleceees sesev.csattn ite Waliacs ob soot Aceon eonccoece | Triangular.
OoLYMBIDE ...... Not seen. Present. ?
PopiciPirTip#...... Not seen. Present. Oval.
PRocELLARIIDE | ? ? ?
FULMARIDE ...... 2 ? Oval.
PELARGI...........-) Oiconine. Absent. Oval.
OATHARTIDS ...... Ciconine. Absent. Triangular.
Heropiovsgs ......, Ciconine (not in | Absent. Triangular.
Cancroma and
Egretta).
Srecanoropzs ...| Absent. Absent, except in | Oval.
Phalacrocoracide.
AccrPITRES.........) Absent (not in | Absent. Triangular (exe.
Faico, Poly- Neophron).
borus, and Tin-
nunculus).
STRIGIDZ ......... Absent. Absent. Triangular (not
Scops).
CotumBz .........| Feeble or absent. | Present. Oval.
CHARADRIIDA...... Ciconine. Present. Oval.
GRUID Mia. 5 6505 Ciconine. Present. Triangular.
TIRRID AI Ges. 2 405000 In some. Present. Oval.
ANOID A ii... octet Absent. Present. Oval.

199

Postacetabular
portion of tensor
fascize
(see p. 195).

Large.
Absent.
Large.

Large.
Present.
Present.
Present.
Absent.

Present.
Present. |
Absent. |
Present, except in

Cygnine.

Absent. |
Present.
Present.

?

Absent.

Absent, or ex-
tremely small.
Present.
Absent, or ex-
tremely small.

Absent.
Absent.

Absent.

Present.
Present.
Present.
Absent.
Present (not in

Arctica alle ?).

ok ee ee ee ee ee eee ees eee

In conclusion, it seems to me that from considerations of ptery-
losis, visceral anatomy, myology, and osteology, the Screamers cannot
be placed along with the Anserine birds.
form of the angle of the jaw they, no doubt, closely approach them.
In their alimentary canal they are much nearer to Struthio and
Rhea (not Dromeus and Casuarius) than to any other birds. There
is a Ciconine tendency in their myology, whilst their osteology points
in no special direction.
these results, the Screamers must have sprung from the primary

In the windpipe and the

It seems, therefore, to me that, summing

200 DR. fT. S. COBBOLD ON ENTOZOA. [Feb. I,

avian stock as an independent offshoot at much the same time as did
most of the other important families. It may be fairly asked what
reason there is for the assumption that there was a sudden break up
of the bird-type at any particular period. It appears to me from
the study of anatomy that this was the case ; and it is evident that
the acquisition of wings by the previously terrestrial type form must
have suddenly interpolated a large number of intruders into domains
already occupied, aud must have all at once called forth a new aerial
struggle for existence, which, from the generalness of its action
must, within a short time, have brought out a great number of special
characters by natural selection.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Puiate XII.

Fig. 1. Proventriculus and gizzard of Chauna derbiana, cut open, and part of
the front wall removed.

. Anterior view of lower portion of windpipe of C. derbiana.

. Back view of same, the muscles of the left side having been removed.

. Right side view of same.

. Portion of right coracoid bone (c) with coraco-brachialis longus (c.b.1)
and coraco-brachialis brevis (c.b.b.) in situ, of Crax globicera. The
expansor secundariorum (¢.s) is seen to spring partly from the first-
named muscle.

Cue ©) bo

Puate XIII.

Fig. 1. Czeca of Chauna derbiana, with the anterior wall partly removed to show
the cavity intervening between the small and large intestine into
which the czeca open.

2. The ceca, external view.

Prats XIV.

Fig. 1. Axillary muscles of right side of Chawna_derbiana. e.s, expansor
secundariorum; p1, great pectoral; p2, second pectoral; c.0.J,
coraco-brachialis longus; 4, biceps; ¢, triceps; ¢.p.0, tensor patagil
brevis; sc, scapula; s¢, sternum; ¢, coracoid; f,furcula; %, humerus ;
c.v, cervical vertebra ; tr, trachea: S.R, secondary remiges.

2. The same part, left side, of Gallinula chloropus. B. slip, biceps slip ;
t.p.l, tensor patagii longus.

Puate XV.

Fig. 1. Museles of right side of interior of pelvis and inner side of thigh of
Chauna derbiana, the muscles of the anterior abdominal wall having
been removed. 0.7%, obturator internus; Amb, Ambiens; Quad,
Quadriceps extensor; Ad, adductor; s.¢, semitendinosus.

2. The same parts of Euplocamus albocristatus, similarly lettered. sart,
sartorius.

4, Notes on Entozoa. Part III. By T. Spencer Cosxoxp,
M.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., Correspondent of the Academy of
Sciences of Philadelphia.

[Received January 18, 1876.]

(Plate XVI.)

In continuing the “ Notes”? commenced in 1873, I may observe
that I have recently received important additions from naturalists

Sy ate Yoel i 2 yay gle A

TSC.del. J.Smut ith. M&N.Hanhart imp.

ECHINORHYNCHUS ELEGANS.

1876.] DR. T. S. COBBOLD ON ENTOZOA. 201

abroad. Although it so happens that comparatively few of the
parasites are altogether new to science, yet most of the contributions
present, in one way or another, points of interest. I propose in
future to extend the character of my notes, not only recording new
habitats and describing new species, but also paying regard to all
facts tending to throw light upon the question of geographical distri-
bution. I wish also to remark more fully on structural and mor-
phological peculiarities, especially when dealing with aberrant types.
The importance of certain species in relation to epidemics will also
receive attention. None can regret more than myself the necessarily
incomplete character of these records. It is evident, however, that
if we home-naturalists defer all public notice of the receipt of speci-
mens from co-workers abroad until we happen to have time at our
command to do full justice to the contributions, a multitude of useful
facts will inevitably be lost to science. In this connexion I may like-
wise observe that the mere verification of already known phenomena,
especially in the matter of distribution, is not without its cumulative
value.

8. FILariA TEREBRA (Diesing).

On the 27th of Februar , 1875, Dr. Edward L. Moss, of H.M.S.
‘Alert,’ now engaged in the Arctic Expedition, brought me three
examples of a nematode, which I have little hesitation in referring to
this species.

Dr. Moss obtained these parasites in 1874, during the time that
he had charge of the Naval Hospital ‘at Esquimalt, Vancouver’s
Island, British Columbia. They occupied the abdominal cavity of
the Black-tailed Deer (Cervus columbianus). The worms (usually
one, but occasionally two, being present in each cervine bearer) were
commonly found lying amongst the coils of the small intestine.
They had not in any way attached themselves to the peritoneal

embrane. I understood Dr. Moss to Say, in conversation, that he
had shot seventeen deer in all, the males and females being in about
equal proportion ; nevertheless not one of the bucks examined b
him showed any trace of the presence of these entozoa. This ab-
sence of parasites in the male hosts can hardly, I should think,
have been otherwise than accidental. Hitherto the worm appears to
have been observed in the Red Deer (C. elaphus) and in three species
of American Roe (C. rufus, C. simplicicornis, and C. nambi) by.
Natterer. Two of the worms measured each about 23 inches in length,
the third exceeding 3 inches. The head of one was injured ; but the
other two displayed in profile two prominent oral papille. Pro-
bably there were four of these processes, such as Dujardin described
in his Filaria cervina, which, according to Diesing, is a synonym of
this species. The body is marked throughout its entire length by a
series of prominent and regular folds, these, in some situations, be-
coming so conspicuous that, under an ordinary pocket-lens, they
present a beaded appearance. All the specimens had their attenu-
ated tails more or less spirally twisted; and a single brown-coloured
line occupied the whole length of the body. The precise relations

202 DR. T. S. COBBOLD ON ENTOZOA. [Feb. 1,

of this narrow but well-marked band are worthy of further study. I
believe the parasites were all males; but I was unable to detect the
external sexual openings.

9. EcHINORHYNCHUS TRANSVERSUS (Rud.)

On the 18th of Febuary, 1875, I received from Dr. Hooker, Pres.
R.S., eleven examples of a small acanthocephalus worm for identifi-
cation. They were obtained by his son, Mr. Charles P. Hooker,
who subsequently informed me by letter that he had found them in
a Redwing (Turdus iliacus) which he dissected on or about the 5th
of January, 1875. It was also mentioned that the worms occupied
the large intestine, probably to the number of one hundred in all.
Hitherto this parasite has been found abundantly in the Blackbird,
Thrush, and in most of the Turdide ; but not, I believe, in the Red-
wing. It has also been obtained from the Starling and Redbreast.

The occurrence of so many of these armed parasites in one host is
a noteworthy circumstance; and it is difficult to understand how
they could be present in such numbers without inflicting severe
injury on the bearer. Of course there is no proof that the bird did
not suffer inconvenience: at all events, analogous facts of parasitism
produced by other species of Echinorhynchi show that these Entozoa
are occasionally productive of fatal results.

10. EcH1norRHYNCHUS ECHINODISCUS (Diesing).

On the Ist of November, 1875, I received from Prof. Flower,
F.R.S., a glass jar labelled as follows, “‘Entozoon found attached to
intestine of the Tamandua Ant-eater.’”’ The parasite was obtained
from the Society’s Gardens on the 12th of August, 1871.

The Brazilian traveller, Natterer, originally obtained this worm
from Myrmceophaga jubata and M. bivittata. Creplin described it
from a IL, didactyla from Surinam (Wiegmann’s Archiv, 1849). I
presume the M. tamandua answers to the M. bivittata of Geoffroy,
as well as to the tridactyle and tetradactyle species of Linneeus.

The parasite in question appears to have been solitary. It isa
female, measuring exactly 10 inches long. The annulations of the
body commence about 3 an inch from the head, and are continued
on uninterruptedly with great regularity to the end of the tail.
On the average, twenty rings may be counted to the inch; thus
there are quite 200 altogether, as they are somewhat more closely
packed towards the neck and also at the tail. The proboscis was
firmly anchored within the gut; and I was unsuccessful in my at-
tempt to dissect it out entire. For a space of 4 of an inch in
diameter at the point of anchorage, the intestine was opaque from
inflammatory exudation.

11. EcHINORHYNCHUS ELEGANS (Diesing).

Six or eight years back, Dr. Murie placed in my hands a glass jar
containing eight parasites. I could not examine them at the time;
but on the 18th of April 1873 I made a careful study of the worms,
briefly noting down the privcipal facts of structure. Although the

1876. ] DR. T. S. COBBOLD ON ENTOZOA. 203

label on the jar was in places well nigh obliterated, I made out that
the worms had come from a Monkey ; but not being certain as to the
species, I did not attempt the identification of the parasites. Dr.
Murie has since further obliged me by looking up his notes ; and on
the 2nd of April 1875, he informed me by letter that the host was a
Pinche Monkey (Hapale edipus). This well known Marmoset had
been obtained from New Granada. The cause of the animal’s death,
which occurred at the Society’s Gardens on or about the 30th of June,
1866, was not ascertained. I have not in this case observed any signs
of inflammation in the intestine of the host, a portion of which, with
several of the Entozoa remaining attached was also supplied to me.
The mucous layer of the gut shows deep conical depressions at
the spots where the detached worms had anchored themselves.

So far as I can make out, Diesing’s original description of the
parasite is the only one that exists. I have gone over his numerous
memoirs contributed to the Vienna Accademy, but can find nothing
beyond the specific characters given in his ‘Systema.’ All the
specimens in the Vienna Museum, whence his description is taken,
were collected by Natterer. They were procured from the Marakina
(Midas rosalia), from two other true Marmosets (Hapale ursulus
and H. chrysoleucus), and from a Squirrel Monkey or Tee-tee
(Callithriz sciureus).

Though in one or two unimportant particulars our observations
do not agree, Diesing’s description is amply sufficient for the sys-
tematist’s purpose. By referring to the four specimens which I
have selected for illustration, it will be seen that all the worms
were more or less bent upon themselves. The larger specimens
present a tolerably uniform thickness throughout, the smaller ones
being thicker behind and almost club-shaped (Plate XVI. fig. 1). In
detached examples, the front end of the parasite is seen to support a
narrow and long neck, which is usually well marked off from the
body proper (d@). It is more or less regularly annulated, the folds
being continued downwards along the body, but gradually losing
their regular arrangement. If the anterior extremity of the neck be
examined with a powerful pocket lens, its abrupt and truncate sur-
face will be seen to display a number of lines or grooves radiating
from a common centre (fig. 2). During the perfect retraction of
the proboscis the centre is represented by a clear space, or wide
opening, which communicates with a cavity immediately beneath,
The end of the neck thus forms a sort of collar, or rosette, made up
of rays arranged like the spokes of a wheel. When the proboscis
is exserted this collar is more or less convex, but it becomes slightly
concave when the proboscis is retracted. Not improbably this at-
tractive-looking surface suggested to Diesing the specific title which
he gave to the worm. He recognized 24 rays: they probably vary
from that number up to 28; at least, I counted 27 in the specimen
(fig. 3). During exsertion, the proboscis forms, to the naked eye, a
nipple-like projection (fig. 2). According to Diesing it supports
three rows of hooks ; but I certainly saw four rows (fig.4). When
separately magnified these hooks present very different appearances

204 DR. T. S. COBBOLD ON ENTOZOA. [Feb21)

as to size and contour. These I believe to be due to respective
degrees of growth (fig. 5). Selecting one of the largest hooks, I
found it to measure about 54, in. in length, the broadest part of its
posterior root-process giving ;,/;y in. approximately. The base be-
tween the two fang-points measured ;1, in.; whilst internally the
hook displayed a well-defined cavity taking the general form of the
organ itself. At its lowermost angle the cavity becomes suddenly
narrowed into a fine channel that terminates in an opening at the
centre of the extremity of the posterior fang, This tube is some-
thing less than the ;;4;, inch in diameter (fig. 6).

By making a vertical section of the worm one may obtain a good
veiw of the arrangement of the parts about the head. Somewhat
diagrammatically I have represented the parts as they appear in the
retracted condition of the proboscis (fig. 7). This organ is now seen
resting, as it were, in a cavity formed by the arching over of the
rosette-shaped collar. The sheath of the proboscis itself is bordered
by powerful retractor muscles, which during extreme contraction re-
duce the proboscis to the form of an oval disk, at the same time
carrying the whole organ downward so as to conceal it entirely
within the lumen of the neck. The lower end of the muscular sheath
assumes the shape of a reversed cone, well rounded off at its depen-
dent apex. The sides of the neck are lined with longitudinal mus-
cular bundles, portions of which are, I suspect, differentiated to form
the special retractors of the sheath. Be that as it may, on either
side of the bulbous end of the sheath the lemuisci are conspicuous
and easily drawn out with a fine pair of forceps. They extend down-
wards to near the centre of the somatic cavity, attaining, in the
largest specimens, a length of no less than Zinch. Free ovaria were
not observed; but 1 found abundance of eggs, which were of an oval
form, measuring about =, in. from pole to pole and =4;in. in breadth.
They displayed three distinct envelopes. ‘The outer transparent
and very delicate membrane was marked by decussating curvilinear
lines (fig. 8 a), being succeeded by a second thicker envelope (6),
the two being separated by fluid contents. Many ova were found
freed from these coverings, these being, as a rule, rather more advanced
in growth, as shown by their finely divided yolk-contents, which in
some instances had passed into an early embryonal stage. In this
condition the eggs measured only 71, by z+, in. My sections of
the body of the parasite showed the openings of numerous water-vas-
cular channels ; but I did not carry the investigation further.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVI.

Fig. 1. Four examples of ELchinorhynchus elegans: a, immature; 0, c, d, full-
grown, natural size.

Fig. 2. Anterior extremity of a mature worm, showing the annulations of the
neck (a), the collar in profile (2), and the exserted portion of the pro-
boscis (¢). Enlarged.

Fig. 3. The collar, viewed from above, showing the folded border of the neck (a),
the series of rays (4), and the central opening (c). Highly magnified.

Fig. 4. Diagram of the proboscis in its retracted condition, to show the arrange-
ment of the hooks, .

M&N.Hanhart mp)

Willis del.et hth

PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES

NHanhart ump

Mé

1876.] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 205

Fig. 5. Four of the hooks as serially arranged on the proboscis: a, from the
external series, >, from the second, ¢, from the third, and d, from the
innermost, respectively. Magnified 60 diameters.

Fig. 6. A hook from the outermost row; showing the apex (a), base (4), bulbous
projection (c), the posterior root-process or fang (@), the minute open-
ing at its extremity (¢), which by means of a narrow channel (/)
communicates with the general cavity of the organ (g). The anterior
fang is marked h. Magnified 355 diameters.

Fig. 7. Diagram representing a vertical section of the anterior end of the neck :

a, collar; 6, fold of the first annulation; c, sheath of the proboscis ;
d, lumen of the neck; ¢, cavity for lodgment of the retracted proboscis ;
J, longitudinal muscular layer; g, lemniscus.

. Three eggs, showing the outer («), middle (4), and inner envelope (c);

also the yolk (d). Magnified 350 diameters.

Fig. 9. Two of the eggs found divested of their external coverings.

2.
0g
ios)

5. List of the Butterflies of Peru, with Descriptions of new
Species. By Hursert Drucez,F.L.S.,F.Z.S. With some
_Notes by Epwarp Barrier.

[Received January 10, 1876.]
(Plates XVII. & XVIII.)

During the past few years Mr. Salvin and I have received several
collections from Peru, principally made by Mr. Henry Whitely.
I now think it advisable to draw up the following list of the species,
only including those that I have been able to examine myself, and of
which I am certain of the locality being correct. I hope by so doing
to give some idea of the Butterfly-fauna of Peru, as well as to advance
our knowledge of the geographical distribution of Butterflies. The
collections from which I have made this list were formed by Mr.
Bartlett, Mr. Henry Whitely, and Mr. Pearce, in the following
localities.

Mr. Bartlett collected in the eastern part of Peru; for the exact
places visited by him, see map, P. Z.S. 1873, p. 252, pl. xxv.
Mr. Henry Whitely’s principal collection was made in the valley of
Cosnipata, situated on the eastern slope of the Andes of Caravaya,
and the smaller collections at Paucartombo and Huasampilla, east-
ward of Cuzco, at an elevation of about 9000 to 10,000 feet; he
also made a very small collection last yeat at Huiro, valley of
Santana, north of Cuzco, at an elevation of about 4800 feet. Mr.
Pearce, who travelled in Peru and Bolivia as a botanical collector for
‘Messrs. James Veitch and Sons, the well-known Horticulturists,
collected at Pozzuzo and Mina.

The collections contained 494 species (18 of which I have described
as new), representing 133 genera.

Mr. Bartlett’s collection had been picked over before any spe-
cimens came into our possession ; so that this list does not contain
all the species collected by him.

206 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. _[Feb. 1,

Family I. NYMPHALIDA, Swains.
Subfamily |. Danarn a, Bates.
Genus Danats, Latr.
1. D. eresrmus, Cram. (Pap. e.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 175. f. G, H
(1779).

Ucayali ( Bartlett). Mus. D.
“Not common ; frequents the banks of rivers.” —E. B.

2. D. nermippus, Feld. Reise Nov. Lep. ii. p. 348 (1867).
Cormillo (Pearce). Mus. S$. G.

Genus Lycorea, Doubl.
1. L. creosa, Godt. (Helic. c.) Enc. Méth. ix. p. 222 (1819).

Peru. Mus, D.
2. L. areraatis, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 16. f. 1 (1847).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.
Nauta (Bartleté). Mus. D.

«Found in damp shady places.” —Z#. B.

Genus Iruna, Doubl.
1. T. PHENARETE, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 17, f. 1 (1847).
Pezzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G. & D.

Genus Metuona, Doubl.
1. M. psrp1, Linn. (Pap. p.) Mus. Ulr. p. 228 (1764).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8S. G.
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
‘In shady places on the banks of the Ucayali.’””—2#. B.

Genus TuyripiA, Hiibn.
1. T. 1no, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p. 75 (1862).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.

Genus Dircenna, Doubl.
1. D. zevie (Helic. z.), Guér. Icon. Regne Anim. Ins. texte,
p. 470 (1844).
Ucayali (Bartlett). » Mus. 8. G. & D.
“‘ Frequents dull shady places.” —Z. B.
2. D. rua, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. iv. p. 102 (1860).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

Genus CeratiniA, Htbn.
1. C. ounrra, Hew. (th. 0.) Exot. Butt. ii. Ith. t. 22. f. 138
(1859).
Peru. Mus. D.

es

1876. ] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 207

2. C. sratiuua, Hew. (Ith. s.) Exot. Butt. v. Ith. t. 32. f. 217
(1874).

Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
3. C. crispiniuLA, Hopff. Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 340.
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

4. C. semirutva, Saly. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 163
(1869).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8.G. & D.
5. C. anasrasta, Bates, Trans. Linn. Soc. xxiii. p. 526 (1862).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

“Taken in the broad pathways to Sarayacu on the Upper Ucayali ;
not common.” —F£. B.

6. C. FRATER, Salv. (Ith. f.) Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 163
(1869).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G. & D.

7. C. avexta, n.sp. (Plate XVII. fig. 4.)

Upperside (female) : anterior wing black, with the base rufous
orange ; a yellow spot at the end of the cell and one below nearest
the anal angle crossed near the apex by’a band of yellow, a submar-
ginal row of six small white spots ; posterior wing rufous orange, a
spot at the end of the cell and the outer margin black. Underside
the same as above, with less orange-colour; the costal margin of the
posterior wing black, and a submarginal row of white spots on the
hind margin.

Exp. 27 inches.

Peru. Mus. D.

8. C. BAANA, 0. Sp.

Upperside (female) orange; anterior wing crossed beyond the
middle by a narrow band of yellow, an elongated spot in the cell, one
at the end of the cell, and one below near the inner margin all black;
the apex broadly black; posterior wing orange, with the outer mar-
gin (which is very narrow) black. Underside the same as above,
except that the base of the posterior wing is yellow, the costal margin
black, and a submarginal band of white spots to both wings.

Exp. 23 inches.

Peru. Mus. D.

9. C. TIGRINA, n.sp. (Plate XVII. fig. 2.)

Upperside (female) like C. fluonia without the yellow markings,
except a small spot beyond the middle on the costal margin, the apex
rufous with a marginal row of black spots ; posterior wing rufous,
with the central band as in C. fluonia, the outer margin black, den-
tated on the inner side. Underside as above.

Exp. 23 inches.

208 MR. H, DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. _[Feb. 1,

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D. & S.G.

The specimens vary in the amount of yellow in the posterior wing.
It may be a local race of O. fluonia, but is a distinct and well-marked
form.

Genus Sais, Hiibn.

1. S. zrrexua, Hew. (Ith. z.) Exot. Butt. iv. Ith. t. 25. f. 176
(1868).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G. & D.

Genus Scapa, Kirby.
1. S. reaputa (Bates), Trans. Linn. Soc. xxiii. p. 529 (1862).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

«Found in low moist places in the forest, upon a small white
flower.” —E. B.

Genus Mrecuanirtis, Fabr.

1. M. orryeta, n. sp. (Plate XVII. fig. 5.)

Upperside (male) transparent yellowish white, bordered with
greyish black, the margins all black; the anterior wing crossed at
the end of the cell by a black band widest on the costal margin.
Underside as above, except that the base and half of the costal
margin of the posterior wing is yellow, and several white spots at the

apex of both wings. é
Exp. 2 inches.
Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

A most singular species, exactly like an Ithomia with the neura-
tion of Mechanitis.

2. M. potymnta, Linn. (Pap. p.) Mus. Ulr. p. 224 (1764).

Nauta and Chyavetes (Bartlett). Mus. D.
3. M. metruone, Hew. Exot. Butt. ii. Mech. t. 3yf. 14 (1860).
Peru. Mus, D.
4, M. mazaus, Hew. J. c. t. 2. f. 8 (1860).

Huallaga (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

5. M. ocona, n. sp.

Upperside (male) : anterior wing black, the base to the middle of
the cell rufous ; an oblique band crossing the end of the cell to the
apex and two others beyond bright yellow, the third close to the
apex and only extending to the middle of the wing, four small white
spots on the hind margin ; posterior wing orange, yellowish in the
middle, crossed from the inner margin to the apex by a zigzag band
of black, the outer margin black, widest at the apex. Underside the
same as above, with a submarginal row of white spots to both wings
and the costal margin of the posterior wing black.

Exp. 23 inches.

Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

Mr. Whitely has only sent one specimen of this species.

1876.] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 209

Genus Naprgocenss, Bates.
1. N. corena, Hew. (Ith. c.) Exot. Butt. ii. th. t. 23. f. 142
(1861).
Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
(Rares; 0. ie

2. N. verriciiua, Hew. Exot. Butt. v. Ith. t. 33. f. 219 (1874).

Peru. Mus. D.
3. N. puro, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vii. p. 76 (1862).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

“The species of this genus are found in the darkest parts of the
forest, upon small obscure flowers, which they resemble, only being
noticed when disturbed.” —Z. B.

4. N. pyrrwo, n.sp. (Plate XVII. fig. 1.)

Upperside (female) : anterior wing orange, the apical half and a
round spot in the cell black, crossed at the apex by a band of pale
yellow ; posterior wing orange, with the outer margin and a band of
spots placed longitudinally across the middle black. Underside:
anterior wing the same as above, with a submarginal row of white
spots ; posterior wing as above, with two small white spots at the
apex. j

Exp. 23 inch.

Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.

Genus IrHomia, Hiibn.
1. I. ancuraiA, Hew. Exot. Butt. iv. Ith. t. 26. f. 162 (1868).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
2. I. mepina, Hew. C. C. ii. Ith. t. 21. f. 129 (1858).
Ucayali (Baréletét). Mus. D.

* Rare.’—E. B.

3. I. sawariuiA, Hew. Exot. Butt. iii. Ith. t. 24. f. 150 (1863).

Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.

‘Very common.” —E. B.

4. I. onrea, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. th. t. 1. f. 1 (1852).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D. & S. G.

“Very plentiful.”’—Z. B.

5. I. arrarra, Hew. Exot. Butt. ii. Ith. t. 13. f. 77 (1855).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.

6. I. auinrina, Feld. Reise Nov. Lep. ii. t. 44. f. 11, 12, iii.
p- 361 (1867).

Chanchamayo (Thamm.). Mus. D.
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Proc. Zoor. Soc.—1876, No. XIV. 14

210 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. ([Feb. I,

7. I. rurra, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Ith. t. 1. f. 6 (1852).

Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.

The specimen from Nauta differs from the type by having the
yellow band replaced by tawny, and may prove to be a distinct
species.

8. I. pHono, Hitbn. (Hymenitis p.) Zutr. ex. Schmett. f. 987,
988 (1837).

Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
9. I. zavaLerra, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. t. 9. f. 49 (1854).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“Not common.” —E. B.

10. I. sao, Hiibn. (Hymn. s.) Zutr. ex. Schmett. f. 767, 768
(1832).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

“ Plentiful, and found flying with other species.” —£. B.

11. I. antrsao, Bates, Trans. Linn. Soc. xxiii. p. 544 (1862).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G.
12. I. prrmutwa, Bates, Trans. Linn. Soc. xxiii. p. 545 (1862).
Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.

‘The only locality in which I found this species.” —Z. B.

13. I. nurimepr1A, Cram. (Pap. e.) Pap. Ex. ii. t. 126. f. C, D
(1779).

Nauta and Yurimaguas (Barélett). Mus. D.

«Not common. ’—Z#. B,

14. I. ezarv, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Ith. t. 11. f. 62, 63 (1855).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G.
15. I. sepa, Hew. Exot. Butt. v. Ith. t. 20. f. 196 (1872).
Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
16. I. sanontna, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Ith. t. 14. f. 86 (1855).
Peru. Mus. D.
17. I. r1mwna, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Ith. t. 8. f. 44 (1854).
Huallaga (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G.

18. I. curysopontA, Bates, Trans. Linn. Soe. xxiii. p. 546, t. 56.
f. 3a (1862).

Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
19. I. crpon1a, Hew. Exot. ii. Ith. t. 20. f. 121 (1857).
Yurimaguas and Huallaga (Bartlett). Mus. D.& 8. G,

1876.] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. zit

20. I. ornrana, Hew. Exot. Butt. ii. Ith. t. 22. f. 134 (1859).

Ucayali and Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G. & D.
** Scarce.” —ZE. B.

21. I. NepHete, Bates, Trans. Linn. Soc. xxiii. p. 548 (1862).

Huallaga (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G.

Nauta and pore (Bartlett). Mus. D.

** Not common.’ B.

22. I. rHeupELINDA, Hew. Exot. Butt. ii. Ith. t. 23. f. 146
(1861).

Peru. Mus. D.

23. I. zaLMuNNA, Hew. Exot. Butt. iv. Ith. t. 27. f. 175, 176
(1869).

Peru. Mus. D.

Genus Mexinzma, Hiibn.
1. M. cyvipps, Salv. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vii. p. 412 (1871).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G. & D.
2. M. orgstes, Salv. C. C. p. 412.

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
3. M. puastana, Butl. Trans. Ent. Soc. 1870, p. 489.
Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.

4. M. cHincHA, n.sp. (Plate XVII. fig. 3.)

he Exactly like M. ishka, Butl. (Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Mech. t. 1
f. 3), excepting that the yellow band is replaced by tawny.

Exp. 32 inches.

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
5. M. parvatis, Bates, Trans. Linn. Soc. xxiii. p. 552 (1867).
E. Peru (Bartlett). Mus. D.

Genus TirHoreEA, Doubl.
1, T. warmontA, Cram. (Pap. h.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 190 (1779).

Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.
2. T. nerrua, Hopff. Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 337.
Chanchamayo (Thamm.). Mus. D.

Subfamily 2. Saryrin#, Bates.

Genus Ciruaris, Hibn.
1. C. aurora, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p. 175 (1862).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
«Found in the darkest parts of the forest, on the ground and

about rotten fruit’? &c.—Z. B.
14¥*

212 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. 1,

2. C. pyropina, Salv. & Godm. (Callitera p.) Ann. Nat. Hist.
ser. 4, ii. f. 141 (1868).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G. & D.
Genus Hrermra, Fab.
1. H, prera, Linn. (Pap. p.) Mus. Ulr. p. 220 (1764).

Ucayali and Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.

‘This species I found commonly in the dense and moist parts of
the forest on the Upper Ucayali, and in similar localities at Yurima-
guas, but not so plentiful.’—Z. B.

2. H. uypasra, Hew. Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 2, ii. p. 247, t. 23. f. 2
(1854).

Valley of Cosnipata (1. Whitely). Mus. D.
3. H. macteannanta, Bates, Ent. Month. Mag. i. p. 180 (1865).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

The specimens from Peru are much more highly coloured than the

type.
Genus PrrrELxLA, Westw.

1. P. nyceta, Hew. Exot. Butt. ii. Het. t. 1. f. 1 (1860).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.
Nauta and Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“Not common; found in the darkest parts of the forest.””—Z. B.

2. P. pinpymeng, Cram. (Pap. d.) Pap. Exot. iii. t. 198. f. F, G
(1780).

Ucayali and Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.

**Common in low moist parts of the dense forest.” —F. B.

3. P. vamia, Sulz. Gesch. Ins. t. 18. f. 1 (1776).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus.8.G. & D.

4. P. asryocue, Erichs. (Het. a.) Schomb. Reisen, iii. p. 599
(1848).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.
5. P. vena, Linn. (Pap. 1.) Syst. Nat. i. 2. p. 784 (1767).
Ucayali and Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus.8.G. & D.

“ Very common.” —JL. B.

6. P. nortona, Hew. Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 2, ii. p. 246, t. 23.
f. 1)(1854).

Ucayali, Huallaga, and Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. 8S. G. & D.
“Very common.” —Z. B.

Genus ANCHIPHLEBIA, Hiibn.

A. TAYGETINA, Butl. Cat. Sat. B. M. p. 107, t. 5. f. 2 (1868).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 8S. G,
** Rare; found in the dense forest.” —Z. B.

1876.] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 213

Genus ANTIRRH@A, Hiibn.
A. PHILOPaMEN, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p- 425 (1862).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

Genus Oressinoma, Westw. :
1. O. rypHua, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. Diurn. Lep. t. 62. f. 5 (1851).

Valley of the Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
Huiro, ad alt. 4800 ped., valley of Santana (H. Whitely).
Mus. D.

2. O. sorata, Salvy. & Godm. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. ii.
p. 144 (1868).

Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
One specimen only.

Genus Evrrycuia, Hiibn.
1. E. HEsIone, Sulz. (Pap. h.) Gesch. Ins. p. 144, t. 17. f. 3,4
(1776).
Muia (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Ucayali (Barélett). Mus. 8.G. & D.
“Common; found about flowers on the banks of rivers and open
ground.” —Z, B.

2. E. ocypere, Fab. (Pap. o.) Gen. Ins. p. 260 (1777).

Peru. Mus. D.
3. E. camerra, Cram. (Pap.c.) Pap. Exot. iv. t. 295, f. F (1782).
Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.

‘Common about the banks of rivers.’ —Z. B,

4. KE, ericone, Butl. P. Z.S. 1866, p. 466, t. 39. f. 5.
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“Found in shady footpaths near villages.”’—F. B.

5. E. ursye, Linn. (Pap. 1.) Syst. Nat. i. 2. p- 772 (1767).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
6. E. rustica, Butl. Cat. Sat. B. M. p- 32, t. 1. f. 4 (1868).
Muna (Pearce). Mus, S, G.
7. E. wrematis, Butl. P. Z. S. 1866, p. 494.

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

Genus Lymanoropa, Westw.
1. L. rerrvuernosa, Butl. Cat. Sat. BaMs: py) 693564. £3
(1868).

Valley of the Cosnipata (H., Whitely). Mus. 8. G.
Huasampilla (H. Whitely), Mus. D.

214 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. 1,

2. L. venosa, Butl. Cat. Sat. B. M. p. 171, t. 4. f. 5 (1868).

Valley of the Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
3. L. acrz1pa, Butl. Cat. Sat. B. M. p. 171, t. 4. f. 6 (1868).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Huasampilla ( Whitely). Mus. D.
4. L. oceLuiFEeRa, Butl. Ann. Nat. Hist. 1873, xii. p. 219.

Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
5. L. rnusBEscens, Butl. Ann. Nat. Hist. 1873, xii..p. 219.

Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

Genus STERoMA, Westw.
1. S. anpEnsts, Feld. Reise Nov. Lep. iii. p. 475 (1867).

Peru. Mus. D.
2. S. prya, Doub. Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 66. f. 6 (1851).

Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
3. S. umBracina, Butl. Ann. Nat. Hist. 1873, xii. p. 221.
Huasampilla (7. Whitely). Mus. D.
4, S. superba, Butl. Cat. Sat. B. M. p. 172, t. 5. f. 6 (1868).
Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

Genus PepAuiopEs, Butl.

1. P. pancis, Hew. (Pronophila p.) Trans. Ent. Soe. ser. 3, vol. i.
p. 8, t. 4. f. 26, 27 (1862).

Muia (Pearce). Mus. 8S. G.
Huasampilla (H. Writely). Mus. D.
2. P. aneuxaris, Butl. Cat. Sat. B. M. p. 176, t. 4. f. 7 (1868).
Peru. Mus. D.

3. P. patuantias, Hew. (Pron. p.) Exot. Butt. v. Pron. viii.
f. 51, 59 (1874).

Muia (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.

4, P. portna, Hew. Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. i. p. 9, t. 4.
f. 28 (1862).

Muia (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
One specimen only.

5. P. zorppus, n. sp. (Plate XVIII. fig. 1.)

Upperside brown; anterior wing darkest in the middle; pos-
terior wing with the inner margin and the anal angle rufous brown.
Underside the same as above ; posterior wing with several very in-

1876. ] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 215

distinct white dots near the outer margin, and a submarginal dark
brown line.

Exp. 1} inch.

Peru. Mus. D.

Genus Oxroscuistus, Butl.

O. pronax, Hew. (Pron. p.) Exot. Butt. ii. Pron. t. 2. f. 10, 11
(1860).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.

Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

Genus Lasiopuiua, Feld.
1. L. crrra, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. iii. p. 336, t. 6. f. 1 (1859).

Muia (Pearce). Mus. 8S. G.
2. L.-orsirera, Butl. Cat. Sat. B. M. p. 182, t. 5. f. 6.
Huasampilla (2. Whitely). Mus. D.

3. L. pHaLasia, Hew. (Pron. p.) Exot. Butt. iv. Pron. t. 3. f. 13,
14 (1868).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

Genus Dapatma, Hew.

D. WHITELYI, n.sp. (Plate XVII. figs. 6 & 7.)

Upperside dark brown ; both wings crossed parallel to and near
the outer margin by a row of white spots. Underside very like D.
dorinda, Feld., without so much of the white on the posterior wing ;
better figured than described.

Exp. 37 inches.

Huasampilla, ad alt. 10,000 ped. (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

The largest described species of Dedalma, and very distinct on
_ the upperside.

Genus PRoNoruILaA, Westw.
1. P. rHELEBE, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 60. f. 3 (1851).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

2. P. varrasruis, Butl. Ann. Nat. Hist. 1873, p. 223.
Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

3. P. corDILLERA, Westw. Gen. D. L. p. 358, note (1851).

Peru. Mus. D.
Genus TayGetis, Hiibn.

1. T. curysocone, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 4 (1851).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
2. T. MERMERIA, Cram. (Pap. m.) Pap. Exot. i. t. 96.f. B (1779).
Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. De

**Common in the low parts of the dense forest.” —Z. B.

216 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. 1,

3. T. raamyra, Cram. (Pap. t.) Pap. Exot. iii. t. 242. f. B (1782).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
« A common species on the Ucayali.”—E. B.

4. T; PENELEA, Cram. (Pap. p.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 101.f.G@ (1779).
Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.

5. T. marpessa, Hew. (Dedis? m.) Exot. Butt. ii. Ded. t. 1.
f. 2 (1862).
Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.

Genus CorapveEs, Doubl. & Hew.
1. C.1puna, Hew. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. vi. p. 437 (1850).

Mufia (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.
Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

2. C. pANNoNIa, Hew. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. vi. p. 438,
t. 10. f. 1 (1850).
Peru. Mus. D.

3. C. utema, Hew. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. vi. p. 438, t. 10.
f. 3 (1850).

Muia (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.
4. C. cistenE, Hew. Exot. Butt. iii. Cor. t. 1. f. 4, 5 (1863).
Muia (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
5. C. ruscrpiaca, Butl. Ann. Nat. Hist. 1873, xii. p. 224.
Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
6. C. rutmrnatts, Butl. Cist. Ent. p. 26 (1870).

Peru. Mus. D.

Genus Bia, Hibn.
B. acrorton, Linn. (Pap. a.) Syst. Nat. i. 2. p. 794 (1767).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8S. G.
Ucayali (Bartlett). to Miso B:
“Common in low moist places in the dense forest upon rotten
fruit”? &c.—E. B.

Subfamily 4. Morpuin2, Butl.
Genus Morpuo, Fabr.
1. M. aurora, Westw. Gen. D. L. p. 339. n. 9, note (1851).
Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

2. M. zepuyritis, Butl. Lepidoptera Exot. pl. 56. f. 3, 4, p. 156
(1873).
Paucartambo (H. Whitely). Type, Mus. D.
. Mr. Whitely has only obtained a single specimen of this beautiful
species; it is one of the finest things sent home by him.

1876.] MR, H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 217

3. M. rampuaris, Butl. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xii. p. 225;
Lep. Exot. pl. 56. f. 1, 2, p. 156 (1873).

Huasampilla (H. Whitely).

This I think a good species, though closely allied to M. sulkowskyi.
Mr. Hewitson has lately received specimens sent by Mr. Buckley
from Bolivia.

4, M. czrvutevs, Perry, Arcana (1811).

M. didus, Hoff. Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 355.

Peru (Dr. Staudinger). Mus. D.

Very distinct from M. menelaus, Linn., with which Mr. Kirby
places it. I have seen many examples.

5. M. atexanprovna, Druce, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1874, p. 155.

Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

One specimen only.

6. M. acuruues, Linn. (Pap. a.) Mus. Ulr. p. 211 (1874).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

Chamicuros (Bartlett). Mus. D.

«Found in the dense forest.’”,—E. B.

7. M. HELENOR, Cram. Pap. Ex. i. t. 86. f. A, B (1779).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

8. M. patroctus, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. v. p. 110. n. 105 (1861).
M. papirius, Hopff. Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 356.

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Peru (Dr. Staudinger). Mus. D.

Subfamily 5. Brasouin &, Bates.
Genus OpsipHANES, Westw.
1. O. cassrx, Linn. (Pap. c.) Mus. Ulr. p. 265 (1764).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

2. O. xanTHus, Linn. (Pap. z.) J. c. p. 276.
Ucayali (Bartlett).
Genus Cauico, Hiibn.

1. C. rpomEneEvs, Linn. (Pap. 7.) Mus. Ulr. p. 213 (1764).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S.G.

“In the dense forest.”—#. B.

2. C. EupHORBUS, Feld. (Pavonia e.) Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p. 123
(1862).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

3. C. pentina, Druce, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1874, p. 155.

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Type, Mus. D.

218 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. ],

Subfamily 6. Acrz1N&, Bates.
Genus Acr@A, Fabr.
1. A. anreas, Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 18. f. 5 (1848).

Peru (Dr. Staudinger). Mus. D.
2. A. TeRPSIN», Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p. 78. n. 63 (1862).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.
3. A. LAvERNA, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 18. f. 4 (1848).
Huiro, valley of the Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
4, A. eriseaTA, Butl. Cist. Ent. i. p. 170. n. 49 (1873).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
5. A. mucta, Hopff. Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 346.

Peru (Dr. Staudinger). Mus. D.
6. A. nrcyLua, Hopff. /. c. p. 346.

Peru (Dr. Staudinger). Mus. D.

7, A. CALLIANIRA, Hiibn. Zutr. ex. Schmett. f. 845, p. 846
(1837).

Pozzuzo ( Pearce). Mus. 8. G.
Huiro, valley of the Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
8. A. ERINOME, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. v. p. 101 (1861).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

Huasampilla and Hiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
9. A. rapiaTA, Hew. Ex. Butt. iv. Acrea, t. 6. f. 39-41 (1868).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
10. A. aBaNnA, Hew. Exot. Butt. iv. Acrea, t. 6. f. 35, 36 (1868).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.

Subfamily 7. HeLriconin 4, Butt.
Genus Hexiconivs, Latr.

1. H. zoserpr, Butt. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4. vol. iii. p. 18, t. 9.
f. 3 (1869).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Type, Mus. D.

«‘ Found upon flowers near villages.” —Z. B.

2, H. ciyrra, Cram. (Pap. c.) Pap. Exot. i. t. 66. f.C. D (1779).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
3. H. rwea, Cram. (Pap. r.) Pap. Exot. i. t. 54. f. C, D (1779).
Nauta and Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.

“ Found on the banks of rivers, very common.”’—J#. B,

1876.] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 219

4. H. tevcap1a, Bates, T. L. 8. xxiii. p. 556 (1862).

Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
5. H. peruviana, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. iii. p. 396 (1859).
Peru. Mus. D.
6. H. ports, Linn. (Pap. d.) Mant. Plant. p. 536 (1771).

Santa Cruz (Bartlett). Mus. D.

*“ Not common.’ —Z. B.

7. H. MELPOMENE, Linn. (Pap. m.) Mus. Ulr. p. 232 (1764).
Valley of Santana (H. Whitely), one specimen only; Ucayali

(Bartlett) ; rare in Peru (£. B.). Mus. D.
8. H. rHetxiope, Hiibn. Samml. ex. Schmett. (1806-16).
Upper Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

*“Not common ; found about flowers near the villages.””—Z. B.

Y. H. acuaors, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p. 79. n. 67 (1862).
Pozzuzo (Pearce) ; Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

10. H. BARTLETTI, n.sp. (Plate XVIII. fig. 2.)

Upperside (male) black ; anterior wing with the base orange-red,
crossed beyond the middle by a band of light yellow, from the costal
margin to near the outer margin the band is broken and crossed by
the nervules, which are black ; posterior wing black, brownish on the
costal margin, an orange-red streak in the cell, and six between the
abdominal margin and the middle of the wing. Underside as above,
with less red at the base of the anterior wing ; abdomen black, the
sides spotted with yellow. Female the same as the male, with all
the orange-red markings wider, and a marginal row of small white
spots on the underside of the posterior wing.

Exp. ¢ 22 inches, 2 3 inches.

Santa Cruz (Bartlett). Mas. D.

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

This species is allied to Xanthocles, Bates, a Demerara species,
but quite distinct.

11. H. esreua, Bates, Trans. Linn. Soc. xxiii. p. 650 (1862).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.
12. H. xenocxea, Hew. Ex. Butt. i. Helic. t. 1. f. 1 (1852).
Peru (Dr. Staudinger). Mus. D.

13. H. revesipHe, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 15. f. 2 (1847).
Huasampilla and Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

14. H. artsrona, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Helic. t. 1. f. 4 (1852).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

220 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. 1,

15. H. sisypnus, Salvy. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4. vol. vii. p. 413.
Valley of Cosnipata (1. Whitely). Type, Mus. S. G. & D.

16. H. aurora, Bates, Trans. Linn. Soc. xxiii. p. 555 (1862).
Sarayacu, on the Upper Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
‘«* Rare, found on the footpaths in the forest.”——E. B.

17. H. arcuexya, Druce, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1874, p. 156.
Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Type, Mus. D.

Genus Everpes, Hiibn.
1. E. wexiconrorpes, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. v. p. 102 (1861).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S$. G.
2. E. unrrasciatus, Butl. Syst. Ent. vol. i. p. 169. n. 46 (1873).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S$. G.
3. E. typia, Fabr. (Pap. l.) Syst. Ent. p. 460. n. 73 (1775).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

« Not common ; flies about the villages.” —Z. B.

4. E. atrpHerRA, Godt. (Ceth. a.) Enc. Méth. ix. p. 246 (1819).

Santa Cruz, on the Huallaga (Bartlett). Mus. D.
Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
<Plentiful about the villages.”—Z. B.

5. E. 1saBELua, Cram. (Pap. i.) Pap. Ex. iv. t. 350.f. C, D (1782).

Nauta and Upper Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
«Rare; found about the banks of rivers.” —Z. B.

Subfamily 8. NympHaLin4a, Bates.
Genus Cota@nts, Hubn.
1. C. prpo, Linn. (Pap. d.) Syst. Nat. i. 2. p. 782 (1767).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.
Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.
«‘Not common.’ —E. B.

2. C. TELESIPHE, Hew. Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. v. p. 564

(1867).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S$. G.
Valley of Cosnipata and Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely).
Mus. D.
3. C. porusa, Linn. (Pap. p.) Mus. Ulr. p. 293 (1764).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

“‘ Found on flowers about the villages.’ —. B.

1876. ] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. _ 221

4. C. suuta, Fab. (Pap. j.) Syst. Ent. p. 509 (1775).

Cosnipata valley (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G. & D.
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“Common about the villages and on the mud-banks of the

rivers.”—F, B.
Genus AcGrAutis, Boisd.

1. A. suno, Cram. (Pap. j.) Pap. Exot. iii. 215. f. B, C (1782).
Pozzuzo (Pearce); valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus.S. G.
Ucayali (Barélett). Mus. D.
** Not common.” —Z£. B.

2. A. tuctna, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p. 110 (1872).

Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“‘Scarce.’—Z. B.

3. A. Moneta, Hiibn. Samml. exot. Schmett. (1816-24).

Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
4. A. GiyceRA, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. v. p. 102 (1861).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

Genus Eresia, Boisd.
1. E. eLepHima, Hew. Ex. Butt. iv. p. 102 (1861).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. §. G.
2. E. anzera, Hew. Ex. Butt. iii. Hres. t. 6. f. 33, 34 (1864).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
3. E. pusiuua, Salv. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 172 (1869).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
4. E. pompima, Salv. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. ii. p. 146 (1868).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G. & D.
5. E. rHomrota, Salv. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, p. 171 (1869).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G. & D.

6. E. periuua, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Hres. t. 1. f. 4 (1852).
Yurimaguas (Bartlett) and valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely).

Mus. D.
7. E. acrzina, Hew. Ex. Butt. iii. Hres. t. 3. f. 15 (1864).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.

8. E. munprNna, n. sp. (Plate XVIII. fig. 4.)

Upperside dark brown ; anterior wing crossed beyond the middle
by a broad red band. Underside: anterior wing, the base black, a
red streak along the costal margin to the end of the cell, and a red
band the same as above, the apex brownish white, crossed by the

222 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. 1,

black nervules; posterior wing brownish white, all the nervules
black.

Exp. 12 inch.

Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

A most curious species, precisely like Acrea erinome, Feld., with
which the single specimen sent by Mr. Whitely was mixed.

9. E. actinore, Salv. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 171
(1869).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
10. E. potrna, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Eres. t. 7. f. 6 (1852).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
11. E. aneusta, Hew. Ex. Butt. iv. Hres. t. 7. f. 58, 59 (1868).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
12. E. naupuia, Linn. (Pap. n.) Mus. Ulr. p. 309 (1764).
Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.

“Found in the moist parts of the forest.”—#. B.

Lae. cLARA, Bates, Journ. Ent. ii. p. 192 (1864).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G. & D.
«Found in the moist parts of the forest.” —Z. B.

14. E. nana, Druce, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1874, p. 156.

Valley of Cosnipata, and Huiro, valley of Santana (H Hea at
Mus. D

15. E. nussta, n.sp. (Plate XVIII. fig. 5.)

Upperside dark brown; anterior wing with two white spots, one
on the costal margin near the apex, the other below, nearest the anal
angle ; posterior wing powdered with ochraceous yellow, the outer
margin dentated, and crossed beyond the middle with three ochreous
bands. Underside the same as LZ. nana.

Exp. 14 inch.

Peru. Mus. D.

16. E. pEARCE!, n. sp. (Plate XVIII. fig. 3.)

Upperside dark brown; anterior wing crossed beyond the middle
from the costal margin to the inner margin by three broken bands
of orange spots; posterior wing crossed in the middle by a wide
orange-coloured band. Underside pale yellow, slightly speckled with
brown.

Exp. 1 inch.

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

A beautiful little species, and very distinct from any other.

Genus SyncHxioi, Doubl.
S. saunpDERSu, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 24. f. 2 (1847).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

1876.] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 223

Genus Eurema, Doubl.
1. E. kererstemnu, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 24. f. 4 (1847).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.

2. E. prong, Latr. (Van. d.) Humb. Bonpl. Obs. Zool. ii. p. 87,
t. 37. f. 1, 2 (1811-19).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S$. G.
Valley of Cosnipata, and Huiro, valley of the Santana (H.
Whitely). Mus. D.

Genus Junonia, Hiibn.
J. Lavinia, Cram. (Pap. l.) Pap. Ex. i. t. 21. f. C, D (1775).
Nauta and Ucayali (Bartlett) ; Huiro, valley of Santana (H.
Whitely). Mus. D.
“ This species may be found basking in the sun all day long upon
a red flower that grows about the villages and river-banks.”—Z. B.

Genus ANARTIA, Hibn.
1. A. saTROoPH, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 289 (1764).
Nauta and Upper Ucayali (Bartleéé). Mus. S. G. & D.

“Very common, always to be seen about flowers in open places
in the forest.” —. B.

2. A. amaLTHea, Linn. (Pap. a.) Mus. Ulr. p. 288 (1764).
Nauta and Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“ Very common.” —JL. B.

Genus Cyspe is, Boisd.
1. C. prormma, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Cydd. t. 2. f. 8, 9 (1852).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D,
2. C. cecipa, Hew. Ex. Butt. iv. Cyéd. t. 4. f. 26, 27 (1869).
Lima. Mus. D.
3. C. wuiTetyt, Butl. Ann. Nat. Hist. 1873, xii. p. 226.
Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
4. C. rHRAsyLua, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. iii. p. 397 (1859).
Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

Genus Eunica, Hiibn.
1. E. myepontra, Godt. (Nymph. m.) Enc. Méth. ix. p. 416
(1823).
Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.
Cosnipata valley (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
«Found about the banks of rivers.””—Z. B.

2. E. rirnonta, Feld. (Faunia t.) Reise Nov. Lep. iii. pp. 407,
613, t. 52.-f. 6-8 (1867).
Chyabetes (Bartlett). Mus. D.

224 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. 1,

3. E. crnara Hew. (Cyéd. c.) Exot. Butt. i. Cydd. t. 1. f. 2
(1852).

Santa Cruz and Huallaga (Bartlett). Mus. D.

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

4. E. ceuma, Hew. (Cybd. c.) Exot. Butt, i. Cybd.t.1. f. 3
(1852).

Huallaga (Bartlett). Mus. 8S. G.

Found on the forest footpaths near the river.

5. E. pecutna, Hew. (Cybd. 6.) Exot. Butt. i. Oybd. t. 2. f. 10
(1852).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

6. E. evecans, Salv. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 173
(1869).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8S. G. & D.

7. E. cartas, Hew. (Cyéd. c.) Exot. Butt. ii. Oybd. t. 3. f. 21, 22
(1857). 5
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.

8. E. TENEBROSA, Salv. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 173
(1869).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

9. E. BRUNNEA, Salv. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 174
(1869).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & E.

10. E. caraxis, Hew. (Pap. c.) Exot. Butt. ii. Cyéd. t. 3. f. 18,
19 (1857).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

11. E. cryt1a, Hew. (Cyéd. c.) Exot. Butt. i. Cybd. t. 1. f. 5, 6
(1852).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.
12. E. onputse, Cram. (Pap. o.) Pap. Ex. i. t. 42. f. E, F (1776).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

13. E. pomona, Feld. (Faun. p.) Reise Nov. Lep. iii. p. 407,
t. 52. f. 11, 12 (1867).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S$. G.
14. E. evrora, Cram. (Pap. e.) Pap. Ex. ii. t. 136. f.C, D (1775).
Huallaga (Bartlett). ' Mus. 8. G.

15. E. amexia, Cram. (Pap. a.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 136. f. B, C
C77).
Huallaga (Bartlett). Mus. S$. G.

1876.] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 225

16. E. Nortca, Hew. (Cybd. n.) Exot. Butt. i. Cyéd. t. 2. f. 13
(1852).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. W7 hitely). Mus. S. G. & D.

17. E. catorocuroa, Saly. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 172
(1869).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S$. G.

“The species of this genus are found about the mud-banks of
rivers and open forest-streams, also on the footpaths in the forest
and near villages.” —Z. B.

Genus Epreuriie, Doubl.
1. E. rexts, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. v. p- 105 (1861).
Pozzuzo (Pearce) ; valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.

2. E. ramperuusa, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 27. f. 3 (1848).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

Genus Eprcatsa, West.
E. numitia, Cr. (Pap. n.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 81. f. E, F (1779).
Pozzuzo (Pearce) ; valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.

Genus Tements, Hiibn.
1. T. artapye, Cram. (Pap. a.) Pap. Exot. ii. t.180.f. E, F (1779).
Ucayali (Bartlett); Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Chyavetos (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“Found upon leaves and flowers in the footpaths of the dense
forest.”—F. B.

2. T. putcura, Hew. (Paromia p.) Exot. Butt. ii. Zpiphile, t. 2.
f. 1, 2. (1861).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. §. G.

The specimens of this species from Pozzuzo differ much from the
typical form by not having the black band on the underside of the
anterior wing, its larger size, and brighter colour. I at first thought
it a distinct species; but upon comparison with the specimens in the
British Museum, I find that they have a specimen clearly interme-
diate between the two forms.

Genus Evsacis, Boisd.
I. E. mzon, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 30. f. 1 (1849).
Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
2. E. Gisexia, Hew. Exot. Butt. ii. Eub. t.11.f. 11, 12 (1859).
Yurimaguas (Bartlett) ; valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely).

Mus. D.
3. E. res, Godt. (Nymphalis t.) Enc. Méth: ix. p. 421 ( 1823).
Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. XV. 15

226 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. 1,

4, E. sertna, Fabr. (Pap. s.) Syst. Ent. p. 497 (1775).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G.

5. E. saupensa, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p. 113 (1862).
Pozzuzo (Pearce); valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.

6. E. racipura, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Hud. t. 1. f. 2, 3 (1852).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 5. G.
«The species of this genus are always to be seen flying about the
river-banks feeding upon rotten fruit” &¢.— J. B.

Genus Catuicore, Hibn.
1. C. nxurna, Hew. (Cat. e.) Ex. Butt. i. t. 4. f. 30, 31 (1854).
Huasampilla, and Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely).

Mus. D.
2. C.ctymena, Cram. (Pap. c.) Pap. Ex. i. t. 24. f. E, F (1775).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S$. G.
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

“Found on the mud-banks of the rivers upon deeayed fruit.’’—
E. B.

3. C. neguecta, Saly. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 176
(1869).
Pozzuzo (Pearce); valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

4. C. tipwina, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p. 114 (1862).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8S. G.
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

Genus PerisamMa, Doubl.

1. P. oppeii, Latr. (Erycina 0.) Humb. Bonpl. Obs. Zool. i.
D237, de 24.14. 1, 5 (ASLO): ;

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

2. P. xantuica, Hew. (Cat. x.) Exot. Butt. iv. Cat. t. 11. f. 75,
76 (1868).

Peru (Dr. Staudinger). Mus. D.

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

3. P. morona, Hew. (Caé. m.) Ex. Butt. iv. Oat. t. 12. f. 93, 94
(1868).

Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

4. P. wivara, Saly. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 175 (1869).

Valley of Cosnipata, and Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely).
Mus. D.

“a

1876.] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 227

5. P. vaninka, Hew. (Cat. v.) Ex. Butt. i. Cat. t. 4. f. 32, 33
(1854).

Valley of Cosnipata and valley of Santana (H. Whitely).
Mus. 8. G. & D.

6. P. suRINEI, Guenée, Lépid. du Mus. de Genéye, p- 28. n. 36,
pl. f'6:

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
7. P. canoma, Druce, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1874, p. 156.
Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Type, Mus. D.
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
mie P RHODOPTERA, Butl. Cist. Ent. vol. i. p- 162 (1873).
Huiro, valley of Santana (1. Whitely). Mus. D.

9. P. camexira, Hew. (Cat. ec.) Exot. Butt. vol. vy. Oaé. t. 13.
f. 99, 100 (1876).
Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

10. P. comnena, Hew. (Cat. c.) Exot. Butt. iv. Cat. t. 2. f. 775
78 (1868).
Valley of Cosnipata and Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

11. P. ocurirennis, Butl. Cist. Ent. i. p- 161 (1873),

Huasampilla and valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely).
Mus. 8. G. & D.

12. P. rristrigosa, Butl. Syst. Ent. vol. i. p-. 161 (1873).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D. & S. G.

Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

13. P. cHasesa, Hew. (Cat. c.) Exot. Butt. Cat. t. 5. f. 34, 35
(1855).

Valley of Cosnipata, and Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely).
Mus. D.

Pozzuzo (Pearce), Mus. S. G.

14. P. canamis, Hew. (Cybd. c.) Exot. Butt. iv. Oyd. t.4. f. 23,
24 (1869),
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S.G. & D.

Genus CaTacramma, Boisd.
1. C. mena, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. v. p- 107 (1861).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G. & D.
2. C. zeLPHANTA, Hew. Ex. Butt. ii. Cat, t. 8. f. 58, 59 (1858).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

15*

228 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. — [Feb. 1,

3. C. pasirnea, Hew. Exot. Butt. iii. Cat. t. 10. f. 73, 74 (1864).
Ucayali (Bartlett) ; Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

4. C. reLpert, Hew. Exot. Butt. iii. Cat. t. 10. f. 68, 69 (1874); °
N. Cat. t. 12. f. 96 (1868).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

5. C. rxceitsior, Hew. Exot. Butt. ii. Cat. t. 7. f. 49, 50, t. 9.
f. 64 (1858).

Peru. Mus. D.

6. C. pertsrerA, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Cat. t. 2. f. 15-17 (1853).

Huallaga (Bartlett) ; Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G,

7. C. conosura, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 28. f. 2 (1847).

Peru. Mus. D.
: Genus Catuiruea, Boisd.

1. C. peganpu, Hew. Exot. Butt. ii. Call. t. 2. f. 6-8 (1858).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

2. C. wuretyr, Salvin, Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 179
(1869).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.
Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
3. C. pepurseti, Feld. (Cyane, d.) Wien. ent. Mon. v. 107 (1861).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.
4. C. oprima, Butl. Lep. Ex. i. p. 12, t. 5. f. 1, 2 (1869).

Santa Cruz (Bartlett). Mus. D. & S. G.

“ The species of this genus are found associating with Catagramma
upon the mud-banks of the rivers, feeding upon rotten fruit ’’ &¢.—
E. B.

Genus CatuizoNna, Doubl.
C. rutvescens, Butl. Cist. Ent. vol. i. p. 162 (1873).
Pozzuzo ( Pearce). Mus. S. G.

Genus Panpora, Westw.
1. P. prowa, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 43. f. 5 (1850).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
Chamicuros (Bartlett). Mus. D.

2. P. regina, Bates, Journ. Ent. ii. p. 213 (1864).
Pozzuzo (Pearce), and valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely).
Mus. S. G.
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“These beautiful Butterflies delight in sitting flat against the walls
of houses and on thé steep clay banks of the rivers; they were very
abundant.’’—£. B.

te
bo
So

1876.] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES.

Genus Gync1a, Doubl.
G. pirce, Linn. (Pap. d.) Mus. Ulr. p. 287 (1764).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“Found on the forest footpaths about the leaves of bushes and
flowers.” —H, B.

Genus AGERon1A, Hiibn.
1. A. cHLo#, Stoll (Pap. c.) Supp. Cram. t. 5. f. 1, 1a (1787).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. §. G.
2. A. FERENTINA, Godt. (Nymp.f.) Enc. Méth. ix. p- 428 (1823).
Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

3. A. reRonta, Linn. (Pap. f.) Mus. Ulr, p- 283 (1764).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

4. A. vornax, Hiibn. Samml. ex. Schmett. (1816-24); Doubl.
Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 10. f. 1 (1847).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. W, hitely). Mus. S. G.
5. A. aMpaINoME, Linn. (Pap. a.) Syst. Nat.i. 2. p. 779 (1767).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8S. G. & D.

“‘ The species of this genus are found on the bark of the trees which
are covered with grey moss, to which they assimilate, usually near
villages on the forest foot-paths.”—Z, B.

Genus Diponis, Fabr.
1. D. acantsa, Boisd. Sp. Gén. i. t. 9. f. 7 (1836).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. §. G.
2. D. sisuis, Fabr. (Pap. 6.) Syst. Ent. p- 505 (1775).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

Genus Oxrna, Westw.
O. ozeca, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. p. 407, t. 31. f. 31 (1848).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
Genus Pyrruoecyra, Hiibn.
1. P. nemrea, Linn. (Pap. n.) Mus. Ulr. p- 297 (1764).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
2. P. nysantas, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p- 115 (1862).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

Genus Timetes, Westw.
1. T. coresta, Godt. (Nymph. c.) Enc. Méth. ix. p. 359 (1823).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

230 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. 1,

2. T. norica, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Tim. t. 1. f. 3, 4 (1852).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G. & D.
3. T. eGrna, Bates, Journ. Ent. ii. p. 329, t. 10. f. 1 (1865).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
4. T. rurewina, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Tim. t. 1. f. 5 (1852).
Santa Cruz (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.
Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.

5. T. uivrus, Kirb. (7. berania, Hew.) Exot. Butt. i. t. 1. f. 2
(1852); Staud. Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. 1875, p. 104.

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.
6. T. cretuon, Fabr. (Pap. c.) Gen. Ins. p. 252 (1777).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.

7. T. corinna, Latr. (Van. c.) Humb. Bonpl. Obs. Zool. ii. p. 84,
t. 36. f. 5, 6 (1819).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Huiro, valley of Santana (#. Whitely). Mus. D.
8. T. MARCELLA, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. v. p. 108 (1861).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.
9. T. HERMIONE, Feld. /. ec. p. 97.

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G. & D.

«One or other species of this genus was to be found in nearly all
the localities I visited, on the mud-banks of the rivers and streams,
feeding upon decayed fruit” &c.—Z#. B.

Genus Vicrorina, Blanch.
1. V. stENELES, Linn. (Pap. s.) Mus. Ulr. p. 218 (1764).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

2. V. epapuus, Latr. (Van. e.) Humb. & Bonpl. Obs. Zool. ii.
p. 74, t. 35. f. 3,4 (1811-19).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely) ; Yurimaguas (Bartlett).

Mus. D.
Pozzuzo (Pearce), Mus. S.G.
«* Found on the mud-banks.”—Z. B.

3. V. subpiTiA, Cram. (Pap. s.) Pap. Exot. iv. t. 328, f. A, B
(1782).

Pozztizo (Pearce); valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S.G.

Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.

*« Found about the footpaths of the forest on the leaves of bushes”
&co—E. B.

1876. | MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 231

Genus Herrerocuroa, Boisd.
1. H. remicua, Linn. (Pap. i.) Mus. Ulr. p- 311 (1764).

Nauta and Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
2. H. caturpuicuea, Butl. Cat. Fabr. p. 58. n. 5 (1870).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

Differs slightly from the type in the orange spot above.
3. H. erosia, Hew. Ann. Nat. Hist. xx. p. 299, t. 20. f. 3(1847).

Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
Pozzuzo (Pearce), and valley of Cosnipata (ZH. Whitely).

Mus. 8.G.
4. H. ximena, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p- 116 (1862).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
5. H. artcra, Hew. Ann. Nat. Hist. xx. p- 263, t. 21. f. 11 (1847).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. W hitely). Mus. D.
6. H. cyruerna, Linn. (Pap. c.) Mus. Ulr. p- 305 (1764).
Ucayali and Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G. & D.
7. H. sorxas, Butl. P. Z. S. 1865, p. 668. f. 2.
Valley of Cosnipata (HZ. Whitely). Mus. D,
8. H. anava, Hew. Ann. Nat. Hist. xx. p- 261, t. 21. f. 8 (1847).
Valley of Cosnipata (ZH. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.
Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
9. H. trzona, Feld. Reise Nov. Lep. iii. p. 424 (1867).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

10. H. vara, Hew. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. vi. p. 437, t. 9.
f. 8 (1850).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

11. H. mesentina, Cram. (Pap. m.) Pap. Ex. ii. t. 162. f. B, C
(1779).

Huallaga (Bartlett). Mus. S$. G.

“These Butterflies I found on the leaves and flowers in the foot-
paths of the dense forest.—E. B.

Genus Apatura, Fabr.

1. A. crane, Latr. (Nymph. c.) Humb. Bonpl. Obs. Zool. ii. p. 82,
t. 36. f. 3, 4 (1811-23).

Pozzuzo (Pearce), and valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely).

Mus. S. G.

2. A. pavont, Latr. (Nymp. p.) Humb. Bonpl. Obs. Zool. i. p.
197, t. 18. f. 34 (18112),

Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.

“Found on the walls of houses and bushes in villages."—F. B.

232 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. 1,

3. A. acaruina, Cram. (Pap. a.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 167. f. E, F
(1782).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

“Found about the villages and plantations of plantains, on the
ripe fruit and decayed vegetable matter.”—Z£. B.

4. A. exis, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. v. p. 109. n. 100 (1861).

Pozzuzo (Pearce), and valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely).

Mus. 8S. G.
Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
5. A. SELINA, Bates, Journ. Ent. ii. p. 334. n. 139 (1865).
Sarayacu (Bartlett). Mus. D.

«Very rare, found about the villages.” —Z. B.
6. A. uinpA, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p. 117. n. 119 (1862).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.
7. A. GRISELDIS, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p. 117. n. 120 (1862).
Nauta and Sarayacu (Bartlett). Mus. D.
8. A. Lucasi1, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 45. f. 2 (1850).

Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

9. A. cuERuTINA, Feld, Reise Nov. Lep. iii. p. 435 (1867).
Pozzuzo ( Pearce), and valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely).

Mus. S. G.
10. A. navinta, Butl. (Chlorippe 1.) P. Z.S. 1866, p. 39, t. 3. f. 1.
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.

11. A. zunripa, Godt. (Nymp. z.) Enc. Méth. ix. p. 377 (1823).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.

« The species of this genus prefer the villages on account of the
different kinds of fruit that are cultivated in and about them, also for
the refuse which the Indians throw away.”— E. B.

Genus AGANISTHOS, Boisd. ;
1. A. oxton, Fabr. (Pap. o.) Syst. Ent. p. 485 (1775).

Chyavitas (Bartlett). Mus, D.
Valley of Cosnipata. Mus. 8. G. & D.
« About the borders of the dense forest.”—E. B.

2. A. acuERoNTA, Fabr. (Pap. a.) Syst. Ent. p. 501 (1775).

Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

«‘Very common, in some places on the mud-banks I found these
insects in patches of hundreds together, feeding upon the rotten
fruit” &¢.—LZ. B.

1876. ] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 233

Genus Prerona, Boisd.
1, P. parRTES, Hiibn. Samml. ex. Schmett. (1806-16).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S.G.
2. P. MEANDER, Cram. (Pap. m.) Pap. Exot. i. t.12.f.A, B (1775).
Chamicuras (Bartlett). Mus. D.

«Very rare, found in the forest footpaths."—Z. B.
3. P. rycomepas, Cram. (Pap. /.) Pap. Ex. ii. t. 158. f. D (1779).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
4. P. praneste, Hew. Exot. Butt. ii. Prep. t. 2. f. 7, 8 (1859).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

Genus AGrias, Doubl.
A. SARDANAPALUS, Bates, Proc. Ent. Soc. ser. 2, vol. v. p. 111
(1860).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.
Peru (Dr. Staudinger). Mus. D.
Genus Smyrna, Hiibn.
S. BLOMFIELDIA, Fabr. (Pap. 6.) Spec. Ins. ii. p. 84 (1781).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

Genus Mercisranis, Westw.
1. M. saorvus, Doubl. Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 48. f. 2 (1850).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G. & D.
2. M. pevcation, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. iv. p. 238 (1860).
Chamicuras (Bartlett). Mus. D.

«© Plentiful about mud-banks.”—Z. B.

Genus Hypna, Hiibn.

H. ciyremnestra, Cram. (Pap. c.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 137. f. AB
(1779), iv. t. 364. f. A, B.

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Genus Paputa, Fabr.

1. P. EuRYPHyYLE, Feld. (Nymp. e.) Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p. 119
(1862).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. D.
2. P. purpiLe, Hiibn. Zutr. exot. Schmett. f. 905, 906 (1837).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

** Found about the river-banks and villages.”"—Z. B.

3. P. eryTHEMA, Bates, Journ. Ent. ii. p. 342 (1865).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

234 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. 1,

4. P. curysopHana, Bates, Ent. Mo. Mag. iii. p. 152 (1866).
Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.

5. P. nessus, Latr. (Nymp. n.) Humb. Bonp. Obs. Zool. ii. p. 76,
t. 35. f. 5, 6 (1811-23).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.

6. P. ryrtAnTHINA, Salv. & Godm. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. ii.
p. 148. n. 17 (1868).

Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
7. P. erycertum, Doubl. & Hew. Gen. D. L. t. 50. f. 1 (1850).
Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.
8. P. xenocies, Westw. Gen. D. L. p. 319. n. 11, note (1850).
Huasampilla (1. Whitely). Mus. D.
9. P. xEnocrates, Westw. /. ce. n. 13.

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.
10. P. morvus, Fabr. (Pap. m.) Syst. Ent. p. 484 (1775).
Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.

11. P. euauce, Feld. (Nymp. g.) Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p. 119
(1862).

Valley of Cosnipata (7. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.
12. P. poantes, Hoff. Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 353. n. 57.
Peru (Dr. Staudinger). Mus. D.

A very distinct species.

13. P. ALBERTA, n. sp. (Plate XVIII. fig. 6.)

Upperside blue-black ; anterior wing with the base, a large spot
crossing the wing at the apex, and two smaller spots near the anal
angle, greyish blue; posterior wing thickly irrorated with greyish
blue. Underside glossy brown, thickly speckled with dark and light
brown markings.

Exp. 22 inches.

Peru. Mus. D.

14, P. cyanegA, Salv. & Godm. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. ii. p.
148 (1868).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
15. P. appras, Hiibn. (Cor. a.) Samml. exot. Schmett. (1816-41).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

“The species of this genus are generally found about the river-
banks, near villages and forest-streams.”—Z. B.

1876. MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 235

Genus S1peRone, Hiibn.
S. roEpats, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p. 422 (1862).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
The specimen differs slightly from Felder’s type by having the red
band of the posterior wing broken into spots.
Genus Protoconivus, Hiibn.

P. cecrops, Doubl., var. ZQUATORIALIS, Butl. P.Z. 8. 1875,
p- 35, pl. v. fi.

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

The specimen differs from the variety named by Mr. Butler by
wanting the yellow spots near the outer margin of the anterior wing,
and would, without doubt, be considered a distinct species by some ;
but I should be very sorry to describe it, not having yet seen any
two specimens alike.

Family II. LEMONIIDZ.
Subfamily 1. Lisyruern.», Bates.
Genus Lisyruea, Fabr.
L. cartnenta, Cram. (Pap. c.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 108. f. E, F
(1782).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“Found in the forest footpaths.”—Z£. B.

Family III. ERYCINID®.
Subfamily 1. Nemeosrin 2, Bates.

Genus Eurysra, Hiibn.
1. E. satome, Cram. (Pap. s.) Pap. Exot. i. t. 12. f. G, H (1775).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.
2. E. parpus, Fabr. (Pap. d.) Mant. Ins. ii. p- 30 (1787).
Nauta and Lower Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

“Common in the dense forest upon dead leaves and rubbish.” —

EE. B

3. E. powna, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p- 410 (1862).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.

The specimen from Peru differs slightly in the width of the red
of the posterior wing, and the black spots being smaller than they
are in the Bogota specimens in my collection.

4. E. amr, Cram. (Pap. 1.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 150. f.C (1779).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. §. G.

5. E. HALIMEDE, Hiibn. (Zim. subt. h.) Samml. ex. Schmett.
(1806-16).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

236 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. ([Feb. 1,

Genus Mxrsosemi1a, Hin.
1. M. uurica, Cram. (Pap. u.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 100. f. E, F (1782).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“Found in the forest footpaths.”—Z. B.
2. M. supicauis, Butl. Trans. Ent. Soc. 1874, p. 430.
Ucayali (Bartlett). Type, Mus. D.

Subfamily 2. EuryGoNINa, Bates.
Genus EuryeGona, Boisd.
E. rurycuus, Hew. Exot. Butt. t. 5. f. 44-46 (1856).

Eucayali (Bartlett) ; Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
‘In the dense forest.” —E. B.

Subfamily 3. Eryci1n1in&, Bates.
Genus THERMONE, Westw.
T. pats, Hiibn. (Heluo p.) Samml. ex. Schmett. (1816-41).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

Genus Notueme, Westw.
N. eumevs, Fabr. (Pap. e.) Spec. Ins. ii. p. 63 (1781).
Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.

Genus Panara, Westw.
P. pHEReECLUS, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2. pp. 792, 248 (1767).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

Genus Lymwas, Blanch.
L. zorca, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Lim. t. 1. f. 2 (1852).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.
This species varies much in the width of the orange border of the
hind wings.
Genus LyroprEeryx, Westw.

L. aAPpPoLLONIA, Westw. Gen. Diurn. Lep. p. 433. n. 1, note, t. 72.
f. 1 (1851).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D. & S. G.
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

Genus Necyria, Westw.

1. N. saunpeRsu, Hew. (Eryc. s.) Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 2, ii.
p. 245, t. 22. f. 1 (1854).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.

1876.] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 237

2. N. WHITELYANA, Druce, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1874, p. 159.

Huasampilla (7. Whitely). Type, Mus. D.

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

Genus Erycrna, Fab.

1. E. mevisavs, Fabr. (Pap. m.) Gen. Ins. p- 271 (1777).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.

“On mud-banks and forest footpaths.” —£, BR.

2. E. autestes, Cram. (Pap. a.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 128.£.G (1779).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

3. E. conusra, Saund. Trans. Ent. Soe. ser. 2, v. p. 103, t. 11.
fi 1 (1859).

Valley of the Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

Genus Diorurna, Morisse.
1. D. perianper, Cram. (Pap. p.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 188. £. C
(1779).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
‘*On mud-banks and forest footpaths.” —Z. B.

a. PsECAs, Saund. Trans. Ent. Soc. Vv. p. 219, t. 20. f. 4,44
(1849), :
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

Genus ZEonra, Swains.
Z. syLpuina, Bates, Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool. ix. p. 383 (1868).
Valley of Cosnipata (1. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.
Differs from the type in having the crimson streak along the
abdominal margin bright orange.

Genus ITHomets, Bates.
I. mimica, Bates, Trans. Linn. Soc. Xxill. p. 542, note, n. 4
(1862).
Sarayacu (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.
Genus Cuama.imnas, Feld.
C. srioxa, Bates, Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool. ix. p. 379 (1868).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“ Forest footpaths.” —E. B.
Genus Orestia, Feld.
O. viruna, Hew. (Limnas v.) Exot. Butt. i. Lim. t. 1. £.5 (1852).

Yurimaguas (Bartlett), Mus. D.
“Forest footpaths.” —Z. B,

238 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. l,

Genus Siseme, Westw.

1. S. pauuas, Latr. (Eryc. p.) Humb. Bonpl. Obs. Zool. i. p. 244,
t. 24. f. 5, 6 (18112).

Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

2. S. cAuDALIs, Bates, Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool. ix. p. 384 (1868).

Huasampilla, and Huiro, valley of the Santana (H. Whitely).

Mus. D.

3. S. Lucitrus, Hopff. Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 363.

Huiro, valley of the Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

A very distinct species.

4. §. mititaris, Hopff. (Lasaia m.) Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874,
p: 365.

S. leculenta, Erschoff.
Peru (Dr. Staudiger). Mus. D.
A beautiful species, and very distinct from any that I am acquainted

with.
Genus Riopina, Westw.
R. tysippus, Linn. (Pap. 1.) Mus. Ulr. p. 332 (1764).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

Genus AMARYNTHIS, Hiibn.
A. meNnerRIA, Cram. (Pap. m.) Pap. Exot. i. t. 94. f. D, E
(1779). ;
Huallaga and Ucayali (Bartlett); Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.
Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.

Genus ANTEROS, Hibn.
A. BrAcTEATA, Hew. Exot. Butt. iii. Ané. t. 1. f. 11, 12 (1867).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

Genus Emesis, Fabr.

E. manpana, Cram. (Pap. m.) Pap. Exot. iii. t. 271. f. E, F
(1782).
Pozzuzo (Pearce); valley of the Cosnipata (H. Whitely).
Mus. $. G.

Genus Cuaris, Hibn.
C. cacias, Hew. Exot. Butt. iii. Char. t. 1. f. 2 (1866).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

Genus Beortis, Hiibn.
B. sacanis, Hew. Exot. Butt. v. Hrycinide, Boot. f. 1 (1874).

Valley of the Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
Huiro, valley of the Santana (1. Whitely). Mus. D.

1876.] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 239

Genus Lasara, Bates.
L. merits, Cram. (Pap. m.) Pap. Exot. iy. t. 366. f. B, C (1782).
Valley of the Cosnipata (H. Whitely).* Mus. S. G.
Nauta and Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“Common about the banks of rivers and villages.”—Z, B.
Genus Nympuiprivum, Fabr.
1. N. carica, Linn. (Pap. ec.) Mus. Ulr. p- 324 (1764).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.
2. N. ascoxia, Hew. Exot. Butt. i. Nymph. t. 1. . 4 (1852).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S$. G,

3. N. mentors, Hiibn. (Lim. subt. m.) Sammi. ex. Schmett.
(1806-1816),

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“ Frequents the forest footpaths.” —Z. B.
\ Genus Uranus, Bates,

U. wyarina, Butl. Journ, Linn. Soe. Zool. ix. p- 225, t. 6.
f. 26 (1867).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

Genus Sratacutis, Hiibn.

1.8, PALEGIA, Cram. (Pap. p.) Pap. Exot. iii. t. 197. £. Bt 236.
f. C (1782).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. §. G.

2. 8. caturoprg, Linn. (Pap. c.) Mus. Ulr. p. 223 (1764).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

3. S. eurerRps, Linn. (Pap. e.) Mus. Ulr. p- 226 (1764).

Nauta and Upper Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G. & D.
“‘ All the species of Stalachtis are found on the forest footpaths.”
E. B.

Family IV. LYCANIDA, Steph.
Genus Lycana, Fabr.

1. L. HANNo, Stoll (Pap. h.) Suppl. Cram. t. 39. f. a5 2)
(1790).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S$. G.
2. Tis » Sp: ?
Huiro, valley of Santana (. Whitely). Mus. D.

3. L. Kod, n.sp. (Plate XVIII. fig. 7.)

Upperside dark violet-blue, with the outer margins brown. Under-
side pale brown, darkest at the base of the wings ; anterior wing with

240 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. 1,

two white streaks at the end of the cell and two fine white broken
lines crossing from the costal margin to the inner margin ; posterior
wing with a silver-white streak from the base to the apex nearest to
the costal margin, a broad white spot beyond the middle nearest the
anal angle.

Exp. 2 inch.

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Type, Mus. 8. G.

A beautiful little species, of which Mr. Pearce only obtained two
or three specimens.

Genus Tuecua, Fabr.

1. T. puxurina, Feld. Reise Nov. Lep. p. 262, t. 32. f. 21, 22
(1865).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8S. G.
2. T. marsyas, Linn. (Pap. m.) Mus. Ulr. p. 315 (1784).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

3. T. erpsERosa, Hew. Ill. Diurn. Lep. p. 85, t. 33. f. 48, 49
(1867).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S$. G.

4. T. meton, Cram. (Pap. m.) Pap. Exot. iii. t. 201. f. D, E
(1782).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S$. G.
5. T. srrepHon, Fabr. (Pap. s.) Syst. Ent. p. 522 (1775).
Upper Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G. & D.

6. T. pApHLAGON, Feld. (Pseud. p.) Reise Nov. Lep. ii. p. 249,
t. 31. f. 10, 11 (1865).
Huasampilla, ad alt. 10,000 ped. (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

7. T. ocrista, Hew. Desc. Lye. p. 5 (1868) ; Ill. Diurn. Lep.
p. 123, t. 48. f. 235, 236 (1869).

Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

One specimen only.

8. T. BEoN, Cram. (Pap. 6.) Pap. Exot. iv. t. 319. f. B, C (1782).

Santa Cruz (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“‘ Forest footpaths.” —Z. B.

Family V. PAPILIONID.
Subfamily 1. Prerin #, Bates*.

Genus Pereute, Herr.-Schaff.
1. P. cHarops, Boisd. (Hut..c.) Sp. Gén. i. p. 407, t. 18. f. 1
(1836).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

* T have arranged the Piertne according to Mr. Butler’s paper on that sub-
family in ‘ Cistula Entomologica,’ vol. i. pp. 33-58.

1876.] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 241

2. P. rextuusa, Hew. (Zué. ¢.) Exot. Butt. ii. Hut. t. 1. f..1, 3
(1860).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

3. P. cauuinice, Feld. (Hué. c.) Wien. ent. Mon. v. p. 7, 9
(1S61).

Cosnipata (Whitely). Mus. D.

Genus Leoponta, Butl.
L. zenosina, Hopff. Stett. ent. Zeit. 1869, p. 429, 1874,
p- 331.

Cosnipata ( Whitely). Mus. 8S. G.
Peru (Dr. Staudinger). Mus. D.

Genus Mytorturis, Hiibn.
1. M. pyrrua, Fabr. (Pap. p.) Syst. Ent. p. 464 (1775).
Huallaga (Barélett). Mus. $. G.
Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
2. M. torena, Hew. (Pier. 1.) Exot. Butt. i. Peer. t. 1. f. 7
(1852).

Nauta and Upper ees (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“Very common,’—#. B

Genus Hresprrocuaris, Felder.
1. H. nerets, Feld. Reise Nov. Lep. ii. p. 146 (1865).
Cosnipata valley (Whitely). Mus. S. G.

2. H. nereIna, Hopff. Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 336.

Cosnipata valley (Whitely); Peru (Dr. Staudinger). | Mus. D.

3. H. catacramma, Koll. (Pier. c.) Denkschr. Akad. Wiss.
Wien. math.-nat. Cl. i. p. 361 (1830).

Cosnipata valley (Whitely). Mus. S. G.
Huiro, 4800 ft.; valley of the Santana (Whitely). Mus. D.

Genus Carastricra, Butler.
1. C. nora, Luc. (Hut. n.) Rev. Zool. 1852, p. 195.
Cosnipata valley (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

2. C. stsamnus, Fab. (Pap. s.) Ent. Syst. iii. 1. p. 44 (1793).
Pozzuzo (Pearce) and valley of the Cosnipata (H. Whitely).
Mus. 8. G
3. C. manco, Doub. (Hué. m.) Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, i. p. 121
(1848).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. XVI. 16

242 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. ([Feb. 1,

Genus SpuaNoGonNA, Butler.
1. S. satome, Feld. (J. s.) Wien. ent. Mon. v. p. 84 (1861).
Valley of Cosnipata (7. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

2. 8. constanttiA, Feld. Reise Nov. Lep. ii. p. 200 (1865).
Huiro, 4800 ft. elevation, valley of the Santana (H. Whitely).
Mus. D.
Genus TrrtAs, Swainson.
1. T. atBuxa, Cram. (Pap. a.) Pap. Exot. i. t. 27. f. E (1775).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G.
Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.

2. T. evaTHea, Cram. (Pap. e.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 99. f. C, D
(1779).

Valley of Cosnipata (Whitely). Mus. D.

3. T. mquaToriALts, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. v. p. 85 (1861).

Huira, 4800 ft. elevation, valley of Santana (H. Whitely).
Mus. D.

The type was from Ecuador.
4. T. rLavitua, Bates, Journ. Ent. i. p. 241. n. 4 (1861).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.

5. T. reticunata, Butl. P. Z. 8. 1871, p. 539.

Valley of Cosnipata (HI. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.

Huasampilla ad alt. 10,000 ped., Huiro ad alt. 4,800 ped., valley
of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

Genus Leproruosta, Builer.
1. L. everone, Doubl. (Pier. e.) Gen. Diurn. Lep. t. 6. f. 6
(1847),
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

2. L. cinerea, Hew. (Pier. c.) Trans. Ent. Soe. ser. 3, v. p. 563
(1847).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.
3. L. puttoma, Hew. (Pier. p.) Equat. Lep. p. 79 (1870).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

Genus AMYNTHIA, Swainson.
A. MENIPPE, Hiibn. Samml. ex. Schmett. (1806-1816).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
*« Common everywhere.” —L. B.

Genus Cauturpryas, Boisd.
1. C. suBpuxeE, Linn. (Pap. eub.) Syst. Nat. i. 2. p. 743 (1766).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
‘*Common on the Huallaga and in the whole of East Peru visited
by me.”—Z. B.

1876.] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 243

2. C. crpris, Fab. (Pap. cip.) Ent. Syst. iii. 1. p. 212 (1793).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
3. C. RuriNA, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. v. p. 82 (1861).

Huiro ad alt. 4800 ped., valley of Santana (H. Whitely).
Mus. D.

One specimen only.

4. C. puna, Linn. (Pap. ph.) Syst. Nat. i. 2. p. 764 (1776).
Upper Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
“* Not common.” —Z. B.

5. C. areante, Fab. (Pap. a.) Syst. Ent. p. 470 (1775).

Upper and Lower Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G. & D.
** Very abundant.” —Z. B.

6. C. rrire, Linn. (Pap. t.) Syst. Nat. i. 2. p. 763 (1766).

Upper Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
7. C.sratira, Cram. (Pap. s.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 120. f. C, D (1779).
Upper and Lower Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G. & D.

“The species of this genus are very abundant at certain seasons ;
they may be found by thousands on mud-banks of rivers, mingled
with Pieris, Papilio, and others.’’—Z. B.

Genus Pieris, Boisd.
1. P. pemopruite, Linn. (Pap. d.) Syst. Nat. i. 2. p. 761 (1767).
Nauta and Upper Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

2. P. prsonis, Hew. Exot. Butt. ii. t. 6. f. 40, 41 (1861).
Nauta and Upper Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G. & D.

3. P. prana, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. v. p. 81 (1861).

Nauta (Bartlett). “Mus. D.

‘* Pieris is generally distributed over the whole of East Peru; and
some of the species are extremely common on the mud-banks of the
rivers, where they assemble in patches of hundreds together. It is
puzzling to the traveller what becomes of the females. The whole
of the four years I was in Peru I only obtained about six females of
all the species of the genus Pieris ; the males I collected by hundreds.”
—E. B.

Genus Appras, Hiibn.

1. A. rnarrE, Godt. (Pap. 7.) Enc. Méth. ix. p. 142 (1819).

Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.

“Very common.”’—E£. B.

2. A. DRUSILLA, Cram. (Pap. d.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 207. f. C (1779).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D. & S. G.
iG*

244 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. 1,

Genvs Dapronoura, Butl.

1. D. pantrororta, Hiibn. (Myl. p.) Samml. exot. Schmett.
(1816, 1841).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.
2. D. yeucantuE, Feld. (Pier. l.) Wien. ent. Mon. v. p. 82
(1861).

Pozzuzo (Pearce); Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.
Huasampilla, ad alt. 10,000 ped. (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

Genus Syncuioé, Hiibn.
S. monusta, Linn. (Pap. m.) Mus. Ulr. p. 237 (1764).
Chamicuras (Bartlett). . Mus. D.

Genus Dismorruta, Hiibn.

D. nemesis, Latr. (Pier. x.) Humb. Bonpl. Obs. Zool. ii. p. 78,
t. 35. f. 7, 8 (1811-1819).

Huiro, ad alt. 4,800 ped.; valley of Santana (7. Whitely).
Mus. D.
Genus MoscuHoneEura, Butl.

1. M. eumetia, Cram. (Pap. e.) Pap. Exot. iii. t. 280.f. D (1782).

Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G. & D.

* In low moist parts of the forest, flying with Ithomia.”—E. B.

2. M. raevGents, Doubl. (Lep. ¢.) Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, i. p. 124
(1848).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

3. M. rHerMesia?, Godt. (Pier. ¢.) Enc. Méth. ix. p. 164
(1819).

Huiro, ad alt. 4800 ped. ; valley of Santana (77. Whitely).

Mus. D.
4. M. penta, Hopff. (Lep. p.) Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 334.
Peru (Dr. Staudinger). Mus. D.
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.

Mr. Salvin’s specimen is not so yellow on the underside, but does
not differ in any other respect.

Subfamily 2. Pap1rLr1oNiN a, Swains.
Genus Pavitio, Linn.
1. P. srsostris, Cram. Pap. Exot. iii. t. 211. f. F, G (1782).

Ucayali and Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
Valley of Cosnipata (7. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.
“Very common about the banks of rivers.’—. B.

1876. | MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 245
2. P. curora, Gray, Cat. Lep. Ins. B. M. i. p. 58, t. 10*. f. 6
(1852).
Ucayali and Huallaga (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

3. P. eruaces, Gray, Cat. Lep. Ins. B. M. i. p. 49, €. 8. £..9
(1852).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.
4. P. wneas, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 197 (1764).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 8S. G.

5. P. mapyes, Doubl. Ann. Nat. Hist. xviii. p. 375 (1846).
Huiro, ad alt. 4800 ped.; valley of Santana (H. Whitely).

Mus.
One specimen only.
6. P. potypamas, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 192 (1764).
Upper Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.
‘Not common; found on the mud-banks of rivers.’”’—Z. B.
7. P. tycrpas, Cram. Pap. Exot. ii. t. 113. f. A (1779).

Huallaga (Bartlett). Mus. 8.
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus.
«Rare, about the banks of rivers and forest-streams.’’—Z. B.

8. P. peLus, Cram. Pap. Exot. ii. t. 112. f. A, B (1779).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S.
Chamicuras (Bartlett). Mus.
‘* Plentiful about river-banks and villages.’—J. B.

9. P. crassus, Cram. Pap. Exot. ii. t. 112. f. C (1779).

Nauta, Ucayali, and Yurimaguas (Barélett). Mus. D.
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whately). Mus. S. G.
“Very common about the banks of rivers.” —Z. B.

OP

SS

10. P. pausantas, Hew. Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 2, li. p. 22, t. 6. f. 2
(1852).

Chamicuras (Bartlett). Mus. D.

“Not common on the banks of forest-streams.’’—Z. B.

11. P. poxicaon, Cram. Pap. Exot. i. t. 17. f. C, D (1775).

Ucayali (Barélett). Mus. S. G.

12. P. aurositaus, Bates, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 2, v. p. 348
(1861).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

13. P. reLesiiaus, Feld. Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. xiv. pp. 301, 345
(1864).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

246 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. [Feb. 1,

14. P. anproeeos, Cram. Pap. Exot. i. t. 16. f. C, D (1775).
Huasampilla, ad alt. 10,000 ped. (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

15. P. ancuistapves, Esp. Auss. Schmett. t. 13. f. 1, 2 (1785-
1798).

Chamicuras and Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.
16. P. rstporvus, Doubl. Ann. Nat. Hist. xviii. p. 374 (1846).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.
17. P. zacrevus, Doubl. Ann. Nat. Hist. xix. p. 174 (1847).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.

18. P. crests, Feld. Reise Nov. Lep. p. 86, t. 14. f. C, D (1865).
Pozzuzo (Pearce) ; valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely).

Mus. S. G.
Ucayali (Bartlett) ; Huasampilla (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

19. P. xanTHOPLEURA, Salv. & Godm. Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4,
ii. p. 151 (1868).
Lower Huallaga (Bartlett). Mus. S. G.

20. P. warscewiczul, Hopff. Stett. ent. Zeit. 1866, p. 29; Hew.
Exot. Butt. iv. Pap. t. 10. f. 30 (1869).

Valley of Cosmipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

“‘ Most of the Papilios may be found on the sand- and mud-banks
of ‘rivers, some more abundant than others. They congregate by
hundreds on the decayed fruit and vegetable matter thrown about by
the Indians, and retire to the forest at night, generally sitting on
the underside of the leaves of trees.” —F. B.

Family VI. HESPERID, Leach.
Genus TuyMe sg, Fab.

I. T. srmpxicius, Stoll (Pap. s.) Supp. Cram. t. 39. f. 6,65
(1790).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

2. T. surycues, Latr. (Hesp. e.) Enc. Méth. ix. p. 730. n. 5
(1823).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. S. G. & D.
3. T. orron, Cram. (Pap. o.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 155. f. A, B (1779).
Peru (ex Mus. Saund.). Mus. D.

4. T. carruius, Cram. (Pap. c.) Pap. Exot. iii. t. 260. f. F, G
(1782).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

5. 'T. proteus, Linn. (Pap. p.) Mus. Ulr. p. 333 (1764).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.

1876. ] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERELIES. 247

6. T. exapeus, Cram. (Pap. e.) Pap. Exot. iii. t. 260. f. C (1782).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

Genus TeLEGonvus, Hiibn.
1. T. ramusts, Cram. (Pap. r.) Pap. Exot. iv. t. 342. f. C (1782).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.

2. T. naxos, Hew. (Hud. x.) Deser. of Hesp. p. 10 (1867); Exot.
Butt. v. Hudamus, t. 3. f. 19 (1875).

Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. 8. G.

3. T. Lacypus, n. sp. (Plate XVIII. fig. 10.)

Upperside dark brown, paler on the outer margin of all the wings.
Underside as above, the palpi and underside of the head orange.

Exp. 2 inches.

Ucayali (Bartlett). Type, Mus. S. G.

I have a specimen from Villa Nova, on the Amazons.

Genus Turacipes, Hiibn.
T. arisToTELeEs, Doubl. & Hew. Diurn. Lep. t. 80. f. 2 (1852).
Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.
Genus Entuevs, Hiibn.
E. pevxus, Linn. (Pap. p.) Mus. Ulr. p. 327 (1764).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus, D.
Genus OxyneTRA, Feld.

O. sem1HyALina, Feld. Wien. ent. Mon. vi. p. 180 (1862); Reise
Nov. Lep. iii. t. 70. f. 9 (1867).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G. & D.

Genus Pyrruopyea, Hibn.
1. P. raasus, Cram. (Pap.¢.) Pap. Exot. iv. t. 380.f. M, N (1782).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely); Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

2. P. peEvcoxtoma, Ersch.

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.
3. P. acastus, Cram. (Pap. a.) Pap. Exot. i. t. 41. f. C, D (1776).
Ucayali and Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. S. G. & D.
4. P. wapassa, Hew. Trans. Ent. Svc. ser. 3, 1. p. 484 (1866).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
5. P. scyiua, Men. Cat. Mus. Pet. Lep. i. p. 95, t. 4. f. 7 (1855).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8S. G.
6. P. enerus, Fabr. (Pap. g.) Spec. Ins. ii. p. 135 (1781).

Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. D.

Cosnipata valley (H. Whitely). Mus. S, G.

248 MR. HU. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. ([Feb. 1,

7. P prryusa, Hew. Exot. Butt. ii. Pyr. t. 2. f. 11 (1875).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.

8. P. samina, Butl. Trans. Ent. Soc. 1870, p. 499.
P. zimra, Hew. Exot. Butt. iv. Pyr. pl. ii. f. 11 (1871).

Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.
9. P. azera, Hew. Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, ii. p. 479 (1866).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G. & D.

Genus Mysceuvs, Hiibn.

1. M. eprmacuia, Herr.-Schaff. Prod. Syst. Lep. iii. p. 59. n. 13
(1869).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Cosnipata valley (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
2. M. pooronis, Hew. (Lryc. p.) Descr. Hesp. p. 1 (1867).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.

Genus Erycipes. Hiibn.
1. E. py@Maxron, Cram. (Pap. p.) Pap. Exot. iu. t. 245. f. A, B
(1782).
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.
Chamicuras (Bartlett). Mus. D.
2. E. corytas?, Cram. (Pap. ec.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 100. f.C (1779).
Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.

3. E. orasus, n. sp. (Plate XVIII. fig. 9.)

Upperside glossy black, with the fringe white ; the palpi, head,
neck, and anus dark red. Underside the same as £. socrata, but
darker, with the basal half of the posterior wing white.

Exp. 14 inch.

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely), ex Mus. Saunders. Mus. D.

4. E. orerpes, Hew. Exot. Butt. v. Pyrrh. & Eryc. f. 32, 35
(1875).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

5. E. cuaronoris, Hew. Desc. Boliv. Butt. p. 21 (1874).

Valiey of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

Genus Carystus, Hiibn.

1. C. psrrracina, Feld. (Hesp. p.) Reise Nov. Lep. iii. p. 518,
t. 71. f. 17, 18 (1867).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G.
2. C. smmuivs, n.sp. (Plate XVIII. fig. 8.)
Upperside dark brown ; anterior wing crossed beyond the middle

1876. ] MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. 249

from the costal margin to the inner margin by a band of six small
yellow spots; a yellow spot at the end of the cell ; posterior wing
crossed in the middle by a narrow band from the costal margin to
near the anal angle. Underside brown; anterior wing with the base
blackish, the spots as above, but larger, some of them running toge-
ther ; posterior wing crossed by a wide white band.

Exp. 1? inch.

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.

Allied to C. wanthaphes, Hiibn., but very distinct.

Genus Pyreus, Hiibn.
1. P. omrina, Butl. Trans. Ent. Soc. 1870, p. 509.

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.
Peru. Type, Mus. D.
2. P. ruustia, Hew. (Leucoch. t.) Equat. Lep. p- 77 (1870).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.
3. P. syrecutus, Fab. (Pap. s.) Syst. Ent. p. 534 (1775).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.

Geuus Brontiapes, Hiibn.
B. procas, Cram. (Pap. p.) Pap. Exot. ii. t. 179. f. D (1779).
Ucayali (Bartlett). Mus. D.
Genus CarTerocePHatvus, Butl.

1. C. prmrpiatus, Feld. Reise Nov. Lep. iii. p. 522, t. 74. f. 7, 8
(1867).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.
2. C. acaruocuss, Feld. J. c. f. 16, 17.
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

This species varies very much. A specimen in my collection is
almost without the orange bands of the posterior wing.

Genus Acuytopes, Hiibn.
1. A. THRASO, Hiibn. Samml. exot. Schmett. (1806-1816).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
2 PA. , Sp. ?
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

3. A. Busirus, Cram. (Pap. 6.) Pap. Exot. iii. t. 261. f. A-C
(1782).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.

Nauta (Bartlett). Mus. D.

4. A. corBuLo, Cram. (Pap. c.) Pap. Exot. iv. t. 354. f. A (1782).

Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. S. G.

250 MR. H. DRUCE ON PERUVIAN BUTTERFLIES. ([Feb. 1,

5. A. ozotes, Butl. Trans. Ent. Soc. 1870, p. 515.

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. S. G.
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
6. A. MELANDER, Cram.(Pap.m.) Pap. Exot. iii. t.270.f. H (4782).
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. 8. G. & D.

7. A. viripiceps, Butl. Cist. Ent. i. p. 115 (1872).

Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8S. G.

8. A. rHRASyBuULUS, Fab. (Hesp. ¢.) Ent. Syst. ili. 1. p. 346
(1793).

Ucayali (Bartlet). Mus. D.

9. A. nearcuus, Latr. (Hesp. n.) Humb. Bonp. Obs. Zool. ii.
p. 135, t. 43. f. 3, 4 (1811-1823).

Ucayali and Yurimaguas (Bartlett). Mus. S. G. & D.
10. A. , 8p. / *
Pozzuzo (Pearce). Mus. 8. G.

11. A. pausus, Doubl. & Hew. (Achly. p.) Gen. Diurn. Lep. t. 80.
f. 6 (1852).

Nauta (Bartlet?). Mus. D.
12. A. ——, sp.?*
Valley of Cosnipata (H. Whitely). Mus. &. G.

Genus Hettas, Fabr.
H. ausrpyaGa, Feld. Reise Nov. Lep. iii. p. 531, t. 73. f. 18, 19
(1867).
Huiro, valley of Santana (H. Whitely). Mus. D.
“<I found the whole of the Hesperide plentiful throughout Kast

Peru; they are found about the flowers in plantations and villages,
as well as sand- and mud-banks of the rivers.”’—.B.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Prats XVII.
Fig. 1. Napeogenes pyrrho, p. 209. Fig. 4. Ceratinia alexia, p. 207.
2. Ceratinia tigrina, p. 207. 5. Mechanitis ortygia, p. 208.
3. Melinea chincha, p. 211. 6 & 7. Dedalma whitelyi, p. 215.
Puate XVIII.
Fig. 1. Pedaliodes zotppus, p. 214. Fig. 6. Paphia alberta, p. 234.
2. Heliconius bartletti, p. 219. 7. Lycena kod, p. 239.
3. Eresia pearcei, p. 222. 8. Carystus simulius, p. 248.
4. mundina, p. 221. 9. Erycides orasus, p. 248.
5. —— nussia, p. 222. 10. Telegonus lacydus, p. 247.
* T cannot determine these species; they are simply brown on both sides.

1876. | ON BUTTERFLIES FROM THE NEW HEBRIDES. 251

6. On a small Collection of Butterflies from the New
Hebrides. By Arraur G. Burtsr, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.

[Received January 12, 1876.]

The following species have recently been received from Alfred
Corrie, Esq., Surgeon to H.M.S. ‘ Pearl.’

Family NyMpHALID2.
Genus Caturpia@as, Butler.
lL. CaLuipLa@a GR&FFIANA, Herrich-Schaffer (two males):

Havannah Harbour, Vaté or Sandwich Island.

Dr. Herrich-Schaffer figures the female of this Butterfly, and
remarks ; —‘*‘ Herr Hewitson erklart sie fiir Z. Aisme, Boisd., welche
identisch mit HZ. eunice sein soll.”

The collection of the British Museum contains both C. hisme and
C. eunice; they are quite distinct from one another and from
C. graeffiana ; the latter, indeed, occupies an intermediate position be-
tween C. eunice and C. iphianassa, from both of which it differs in
the pale external area of the wings.

The male has a well-defined subcostal spot in primaries (as in C.
iphianassa), and six well-defined discal spots, all white; a small
oval lilac spot on interno-median area; secondaries with the usual
whity brown subcostal patch ; two obliquely placed subapical white
spots, and four pale-brown discal spots. Expanse of wings 3 inches.

This species is new to the Museum collection.

Genus Danats, Latreille.

2. Danats MopDERATA, Butler (two males).
Havannah Harbour, Vaté or Sandwich Island.
The two specimens sent by Mr. Corrie agree in every respect with
the type, thus establishing its constancy.

Genus DotEescHa.iia, Felder.
3. DoLESCHALLIA MONTROUZIERI, Butler (two males).
Espirito Santo, Havannah Harbour, Vaté or Sandwich Island.
Rather larger than the type, but in other respects similar.

Genus JunontiaA, Hiibner.

4. JuNoNnIA viILuipA, Fabricius (one female).
Havannah Harbour, Vaté or Sandwich Island.

Genus Diapema, Boisduval.
5. DrADEMA NERINA, Fabricius (four males and two females).

Havannah Harbour, Vaté or Sandwich Island.
This species has hitherto been kuown only from Australia, Wood-
lark Island, and Java. One of Mr. Corrie’s females is a curious

252 ON BUTTERFLIES FROM THE NEW HEBRIDES. [Feb. 1,

variety, in which the tawny spot of primaries above is barely visible,
and the submarginal whitish spots are obsolete.

The specimens were taken on the 7th of July, 1875; they are
much worn, which indicates that they must have been some time on
the wing.

6. D1iapema ocrocuta, Butler (one male and two females).

Havannah Harbour, Sandwich Island (22nd July, 1875).

This species has hitherto been unique in Mr. Druce’s collection
from Totoya, Fiji; the male from Vaté differs slightly from my
figure in the outline of the tawny band of primaries.

Hitherto I have considered the D. formosa of Herrich-Schiaffer to
be the male of my D. octocula; but now that we have both sexes I
am compelled to admit that Mr. Wallace was correct in determining
the type to be a male in which the abdomen is greatly distended ;
D. formosa is a distinct species.

The female of D. octocula differs from the male in its superior size,
the much paler colour of the tawny bands ; the primaries with better-
defined papillated ocellus ; four or five subapical white spots ; seconda-
ries with white pupils to all the black spots.

Family Lyc“nipz.
Genus Lampipes, Hubner.
7. LampipeEs TAITENS!s, Boisduval (one female).

Espirito Santo, New Hebrides (6th August, 1875).

The arrival of this little species is interesting ; I had supposed L.
taitensis to be the L. platissa of Herrich-Schafier ; but as Boisduval
says, at the end of his description, “Il est de la taille de Catochry-
sops beticus’’ (which suits this species admirably, whilst L. platissa
more nearly resembles L. strabo), I have very little doubt that we
now actually possess the typical L. ¢aitensis of the ‘ Astrolabe.’

8. LaMpIpDES CANDRENA, Herrich-Schaffer (one female).

Montague Island.

It is impossible to decide, without seeing plenty of specimens of
both sexes, whether or not the females of this species vary in the
width of the brown outer border; in the specimen here registered,
and one previously received from Fiji, the border is nearly twice as
wide as inan example sent to us from Germany with Herrich-Schaffer’s
name attached to it, yet in the males I find no such difference.

9. LAMPIDES GOODENOVII, 0. sp.

9. Allied to the preceding, but brilliant greenish morpho-blue,
the outer borders black, sharply defined ; the under surface altogether
deeper in colour, reddish brown, crossed by the same whitish lines ;
ocelli with reddish-orange zones. Expanse of wings 1 inch 2 lines.

Espirito Santo, New Hebrides (6th August, 1875).

This species is more brilliantly coloured than any other Butterfly
in the genus; I have named it in honour of the universally beloved

oe

1876.] MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON BOLIVIAN BIRDS. 253

and much lamented Commodore Goodenough, who met his death
whilst out with Messrs. Perry and Corrie on an entomological excur-
sion.

Family PapiLionip&.

Genus Betenois, Hiibner.
10, Brxenots nisE1A, McLeay (one male).

Havannah Harbour, Vaté or Sandwich Island.

The single example sent differs a little from the Australian type,
inasmuch as it resembles B. clytie 3 on the upperside ; but, with-
out seeing more specimens, it would be unsafe to consider it a dis-
tinct species.

7. Descriptions of new Birds obtained by Mr. ‘C. Buckley in
Bolivia. By P. L. Scuarer, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., and
Ossert Satvin, M.A., F.R.S.

[Received January 14, 1876.]

A collection of bird-skins formed by Mr. C. Buckley during his
recent expedition into Bolivia, at several localities on the eastern
slope of the main chain of the Andes, contains about 250 specimens,
referable to 133 species. As a second collection is shortly expected
from Mr. Buckley, we reserve a full account of the first one until the
series is complete, and for the present only give descriptions of the
new species which it contains. These are :—

1. Dig@Lossa GLAUCA, sp. nov.

Ex cinereo cerulescens fere unicolor ; alis caudaque nigris ceruleo
limbatis: subtus obscurior, remigum marginibus internis cine-
reis: rostro corneo, mandibula inferiore ad basin alba, pedibus
nigris: long. tota 4:0, ale 2°3, caude@ 1°6.

Hab. Nairapi, Bolivia (Buckley).

Mus. S.-G.

Of this new Digloesa Mr. Buckley sends but one specimen. It
is asmall species belonging to the ‘‘homochroous”’ section of Sclater’s
arrangement (Ibis, 1875, p. 207), and may be best placed between
D. plumbea and D. personata. From the latter it is distinguishable
by its much inferior size, from the former by its colour.

2. BUARREMON MELANOPS, Sp. nov.

Buarremon rufinucha, Sclater, Cat. A. B. p. 91 (nee Lafr. et
D’Orb.).

Supra niger ; pileo cum nucha castaneo ; lateribus capitis et mento
summo nigris: subtus flavus, hypochrondriis et crisso in oliva-
ceum transeuntibus: rostro nigro, pedibus obscure corneis: long.
tota 6:0, ale 2°7, caud@ 2°6.

Hab. Simacu, Bolivia (Buckley).

Mus. 8.-G. et P.L.S.

254 THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE, [Feb. 15,

Obs. B. rufinucha (Lafr. et D’Orb.) * macula frontali utrinque
sulphurea sane species diversa est.

Sclater has long had two examples of this species in his collection
obtained from the Maison Verreaux. They were referred to B. rufi-
nucha erroneously, as it appears on examination of the specimens of
that species in the British Museum. Mr. Buckley sends us five
examples of this bird, all obtained at Simacu.

3. LEPTOPOGON TRISTIS, Sp. NOV.

Supra olivaceus, unicolor ; alis nigris, tectricum alarium et secun-
dariorum externorum apicibus macula quadrata sulphureo-alba
ornatis ; remigum et rectricum marginibus externis olivaceis :
subtus sulphureo-flavus: subalaribus flavis: rostro et pedibus
nigris: long. tota 4:4, ale 2°15, caude 2:0, tarsi 0°75.

Hab. Bolivia, Simacu (Buckley).

Mus. S.-G. et P. L.S.

Obs. Sp. corporis colore supra olivaceo, subtus omnino flavo, ab

aliis hujusce generis satis definita.

Sclater has long had a single worn and imperfect skin of this
Leptopogon in his collection under the MS. name which we now
publish. Mr. Buckley sends but a single specimen. Sclater’s
example was obtained from a dealer in Paris, without any locality
attached to it.

4, HypoxAaNTHUS ATRICEPS, Sp. nov.

Hypoxanthus rivolii, Scl. et Salv. P. Z. S. 1873, p. 780.

Hab. Peruvia alta, Husampilla (Whitely) ; Bolivia, Ramosani
(Buckley).

Mus. 8.-G.

Obs. Similis H. rivolii, sed pileo summo in mari nigerrimo nec
rubro.

An examination of a series of skins of this Woodpecker from
Columbia, Ecuador, Peru, and Bolivia seems to show the form from
the two latter countries is distinct—the head in the male being black,
and never acquiring the brilliant crimson of the northern form.

February 15, 1876.
Prof. Mivart, F.R.S., in the Chair.

The following report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie
during the month of January 1876 was read by the Secretary :—

The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena-
gerie during the month of January 1876 was 52, of which 32 were
by presentation, 10 by purchase, and 10 were received on deposit.
The total number of departures during the same period by death
and removals was 78.

* Vide Sclater, Syn. Av. Tanagr. p. 25.

nh
or
on

1876.] MR. P. L. SCLATER ON A NEW PARROT.

The most noticeable additions during the month were :—

1. A Levaillant’s Cynictis (Cynictis penicillata), presented by
Viscount Mandeville, January 5th. Of this rare and elegantly
shaped Carnivore (figured in the Society’e ‘Transactions,’ vol. i.
pl. iii.) but few specimens have been lately received. One pre-
viously obtained was accidentally omitted from the Revised List of
Vertebrates, where the species is not mentioned.

2. A White-spotted Crake (Porzana notata), captured at sea off «
Cape Santa Maria, Uruguay, by an officer of the R.M.S.S. ‘Elbe,’
and received January 19th. The specimen agrees accurately with
the figure in the ‘Zoology of the Voyage of the Beagle’ (Birds,
pl. 48). The species is rare, and quite new to the collection.

3. A Panda (4lurus fulgens), sent home from Calcutta, and pur-
chased 16th February, 1876. There has been but one living specimen
of this rare animal previously in the collection.

Mr. Sclater exhibited the Parrot designated in Tschudi’s ‘ Fauna
Peruana’ (Aves, p. 271) Conurus illigeri, which had been kindly
sent to him for examination by M. Louis Coulon, Honorary Direc-
tor of the Museum of Neuchatel, and observed that it had been
wrongly determined by the author of the ‘Fauna Peruana.’ The
specimen, which, in spite of what Tschudi said, was certainly
not far from mature, presented no traces of the red markings on the
front, back, and belly, which are characteristic of Ara maracana
(i. e. Conurus illigert of Tschudi), and had besides a larger and
deeper bill and longer tail. It appeared to belong to a species
hitherto unrecognized, which might be described as follows :—

iN

mn
us

\

i

iN

Head of Ara couloni (nat. size).
ARA COULONI, sp. nov.

Conurus illigert, Tsch. Fauna Per. Aves, p. 271.
Sittace maracana, part, Finsch, Papag. i. p. 420.

Diagn. Viridis, capite undique remigibus et rectricibus extus ceru-

256 MR. W. K. PARKER ON THE SKULL [ Feb. 15;

lescentibus : caude parte basali in rectricibus externis rubri-
cante: alarum et caude pagina inferiore flavicante: long.
tota 16:0, ale 8°7, caude rectr. med. 9°5, lat, 4°5.
Hab. Peruvia alta, in reg. sylvatica orientali, ab incolis Loro real
dicta (Tschudi).
Mus. Novo-Castellano.
Obs. Species ab Aru maracana rostro majore, genis solum nudis,
area postoculari plumosa, et corporis colore rubro uullo certissimé
diversa, et Ludovico Coulon, Musei Novo-Castellani Directori optimo,

dicata.

Dr. T. S. Cobbold, F.R.S., exhibited and made remarks on a
Parasite (Echinorhynchus) obtained from the Tamandua Ant-eater
which had died in the Society’s Menagerie, and had been described
in his communication made at the last meeting.

Mr. W. K. Parker read the second part of his memoir on Agi-
thognathous Birds *, of which the following is an abstract :—

In my former communication I described thirty-one examples of
this kind of palatal structure in birds; in the present paper I have
added fifty-one more.

Altogether these eighty-two birds belong to thirty-nine “ fami-
lies ;”? so that I have taken, on an average, two examples of each
family. The materials for this research have beea kindly and
liberally put into my hands by a number of friends, among whom I
may mention Professors Alfred Newton, T. Rupert Jones, and
Garrod, Dr. Murie, Osbert Salvin, Esq., Robert Swinhoe, Esq.,
Mr. W. J. Williams, and Mr. Bartlett.

I began my last paper with a bird showing “ Agithognathism ”
in its initial state. 1 end this communication with another instance:
the first was Turniz, this is Thinocorus—both of the utmost
importance to any one seeking for the true passerine phylum.

Now if any one will say that because I have found initial Aigi-
thognathism in birds so far down below the most degraded (or
rather non-elevated) type of Passerines, as these birds, that there-
fore I, putting these types in the Aigithognathous list, seek to
make them appear as “ Coracomorphee,” such a one has failed
to catch my drift. Do we modern biologists believe in the gradual
modification of types or evolution of species, or do we not? If
we do, we shall reasonably expect to find that our neatly trimmed
and highly special types must have had grosser and more general
ancestors in the Tertiary period. Allowing this supposition, and
looking upon birds as a hot-blooded group whose roo¢ lay low
down, once, among the cold blooded reptiles, shall we not expect to
find birds more or less related to the modern types having the
nature of several at once?—‘“‘all these in their pregnant causes

mixed.”
In the examples given in this second part I have shown pecu-

* For part I. see Trans. Zool. Soe. ix. p. 289.

1876.] OF ZGITHOGNATHOUS BIRDS. 257

liarities of the skull that belong to certain groups of families, which
will, when once understood, be very helpful to Taxonomists. These
more minute researches go to modify some of Professor Huxley’s
views, as expressed in his paper ‘On the Classification of Birds’
(P. Z.S. 1867, p. 415). Certain it is that the skull of a bird often
seems to harmonize very ill with the rest of its structure, even with
the rest of the skeleton. Still the morphology of this chief part of
the framework, modified as it is in relation to the nervous, digestive,
and respiratory systems, must be of the utmost importance to any
one seeking to have broad views on these subjects.

“The groups formed by cranio-facial characters have a variable
value ; the desmognathous face passes over the Struthious border and
is possessed by the gallo-struthious Tinamous. The saurognathous
face (see Trans. Linn. Soc. 1875, plates i—v.) is possessed by the
“*Celeomorphe’’ only—namely, by the Woodpeckers and Wry-
necks.

“The eegithognathous face is possessed by all the ‘ Coraco-
morphee,’ and by them only, iz a perfect form, with the single
exception of the Swifts (Cypselidee)—a mere big ‘ genus” capable
of being cut up into a few subgenera.

«The desmognathous face turns up in many places; its funda-
mental or embryonic form is the schizognathous, the simple rep-
tilian cleft palate; this becomes desmognathous by ankylosis of the
right and left elements of the palate. Desmognathism is seen in
the Aigithognathz when ossification is very intense, as in Artamus,
Paradisea, and Gymnorhina.

«The simple, open, or cleft palate generally occurs in the groups
that lie on a level two or three degrees above the Ratitze, as Rails,
Plovers, Cranes, and the Fowl tribe; but it is also retained in types
that in other respects are amongst the highest and most specialized,
as the Trochilidz and the Caprimulgide.

“In the present paper research has been made into the morpho-
logy of the skull in the following groups-—namely Tanagride,
Brachypodide, Phytotomidz, Meliphagidz, Mniotiltidee, Coerebidee,
Vireonidee, Cardinalis, Icteridee, Emberizidee, Fringillide, Alaudide,
Paride, Panuride, Cypselide, Hirundinide, Oriolide, Motacillide,
Muscicapide, Liotrichide, Sazicola, and Nectariniide.

** And, lastly, the remarkable skull of Thinocorus is described, a
small Chilian type, whose body is thoroughly Charadrian, but whose
head is a mysterious mixture. Being imperfectly egithognathous,
it is here compared with the completely xgithognathous Passerine
types on the one hand, and on the other with birds much nearer akin,
namely the Crane and the Sun-bittern. These latter, in an appen-
dix, serve to compare with Thinocorus, and also show the schizo-
gnathous palate for comparison with the more complex palate of a
Passerine bird.

*‘ Thinocorus, whilst essentially a Plover, if the characters of the
skeleton generally be considered, yet shows more likeness in its
pti to that variety of the Plover type which we see in the larger

ranes.

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. XVII. 17

258 REV. O. P. CAMBRIDGE ON NEW [Feb. 15,

“The Tinamous, largely specialized into a kind of low gallinaceous
carinate type, yet retain the same form of skull and face as the
Ratitee. Thinocorus also retains much that is dromeognathous in
its skull, mixed with normal schizognathism: but superadded to
these characters we find an intimate union of the broad vomer with
the largely developed alinasal floor ; a little more metamorphosis, and
the palate would have corresponded with that of the Passerine birds.

“But in this bird, as in the Hemipod (Turniz) it is not in the
structure of the vomer and its relation to the nasal labyrinth that
we find all the Passerine characters. The face, generally, is rich in
such modifications: I showed them in my former Part with regard
to Turniz, and in this in the genus Thinocorus.

‘Tn the marvellously specialized skulls of the Passerine unlooked-
for osseous centres often appear; these are often very uniform in
certain families which are more or less allied.

“The first I may mention here are the “palato-maxillaries ;”’ these
are a pair of bones, separately representing the ingrowth of our upper
jaw-bone which forms the “ hard’ palate.” I find these in the
following families, namely Tanagride, Brachypodide, Mniotiltidee,
Ccerebidze, Cardinalidee, Icteride, and Emberizide. In some
families, besides lesser ossicles added to the vomer, one on each
shoulder, the vomer is not merely composed of a right and left half,
but each moiety is more or less broken up into two centres. Here
we have repeated the tetramerous vomer (vomers and ‘septo-
maxillaries’) of the Snake and the Lizard. The families showing
this structure more or less clearly are the Mniotiltidee, Coerebidee,
Vireonidee, Muscicapidee, and Saxicolidze.

** With the exception of JZenura, the South-American types are
most generalized, low, and, I may say, ancient; next to them the
Australian birds, and those from Malaisia and Central America ;
whilst the most highly specialized types belong tu the northern
hemisphere generally.

‘Looked at from my particular morphological stand-point, facts
like these seem to me to be well worth the pleasant labour I have’
spent in obtaining them.”

This paper will be published entire in the Society’s ‘ Transactions.’

The following papers were read :—

1. On a new Order and some new Genera of Arachnida from
Kerguelen’s Land. By the Rev. O. P. CamBripen, M.A.,
C.M.Z.S., Hon. Memb. New-Zealand Institute.

[Received January 15, 1876.]
(Plate XIX.)

The few examples of Arachnida found during the late Transit-of-
Venus Expedition to Kerguelen’s Land, and kindly sent to me by the
Rey. A. E. Eaton, I propose now to describe and figure. Almost

IP Zone /6.) ik.

OP Combxidae delt AT. Hollick kth. W.West & C° imp.

Kerguelen Island. Arachnida.

1876. ] ARACHNIDA FROM KERGUELEN’S LAND. 259

all of them are remarkable ; all appear to be new to science; and one,
indeed, at present seems to me incapable of inclusion in any hitherto
recognized order of Arachnids. The whole collection consisted but of
five species ; one of Araneidea and three of Acaridea, the fifth being
that upon which I propose to found a new genus, family, and order.
At first sight this delicate little Arachnid gave me the idea of a Che-
lifer deprived of its forcipated palpi; but a subsequent examination
with a stronger lens showed me that it possessed palpi of an entirely
different character from those of the pseudo-Scorpiones; and a final
scrutiny under a still higher power led to the detection of the eyes:
in the number and position of these there is a remarkable similarity
to the Solpugidea, while there are not wanting some general indica-
tions of affinity to the Araneidea. Its small size and general ap-
pearance when alive would probably induce one to place it among the
Acaridea ; but the structure of the mouth-parts, the distinct cephalo-
thorax and abdomen, and especially the character of the eyes seemed
to preclude this allocation. It is possible, however, that when the
Acaridea have been more thoroughly worked out by some future
arachnologist, the present anomalous little creature may become the
type of a suborder, or perhaps only of a family of that order.
Meanwhile in forming a distinct order for its reception, I desire to
obtain the free criticism and opinion of arachnologists more conversant
than myself with some obscure groups of Acaridea, as to its true
systematic position.

Order ACARIDEA.
Fam. ACARIDEs.
Gen. nov. ToryNorHora.

Body oval ; a slightly indented transverse line towards the fore part
on the upperside appears to mark the Junction of the cephalothorax
and abdomen.

Mouth-parts almost soldered together, leaving only the short palpi
and the extremities of the falces traceable.

Legs 8, slender, in 4 pairs (1-2 and 3-4 on each side), 5-jointed,
and terminating with two somewhat S-curved claws springing from
a small supernumerary or heel-joint.

Eyes four, in two pairs, one pair on either side of the caput.

Falces armed on the underside with serrated opposed edges.

Palpi short, strong, 4-jointed, with a single strong curved jaw-like
claw springing from its base on the upperside.

TORYNOPHORA SERRATA, sp.n. (Plate XIX. fig. 1.)

Length 3 line.

This minute Acarid is of an oval form, tolerably convex above, and
of a uniform pale luteous colour. From the fore part of the cephalo-
thorax four pointed processes project, each one terminating with a
very small joint, from which springs a curious clavate or spoon-
shaped bristle or tag ; a few with a somewhat similar tag are dispersed

thinly over the upper surface of the body, which is closely wrinkled,
Mi

260 REV. 0. P. CAMBRIDGE ON NEW [Feb. 15,

the wrinkles taking different but regular directions on the different
parts of the body.

The eyes are very minute, in two pairs, one on either side of the
caput ; those of each pair are near together but not contiguous.

The Jegs are 5-jointed, slender, and not very long; they are armed
with fine spines, bristles, and hairs, and terminate with two tarsal
S-shaped claws, springing from a small terminal joint, and furnished
beneath with some slender prominent clavate hairs. The legs are in
pairs, the first and second, and third and fourth legs on each side
having their basal joints respectively contiguous to each other, as in
the genus Trombidium, and articulated to the fore half of the lower
surface of the body.

The palpi are short, strong, 4-jointed ; and to the upperside of the
base of the digital joint is articulated a strong curved claw.

The mawille, labium, and falces coalesce and form a kind of suc-
torial apparatus, towards the fore part of which on the underside
are two opposed curved saw-edged processes.

Several examples of this curious Acarid, found under stones, were
contained in the Rev. A. E. Eaton’s Kerguelen’s-Land collection.
Being so very minute and delicate, they had suffered considerably by
being preserved in strong spirit.

Fam. BpELLIDES.
Gen. Scrrus, C. Koch?

ScrRUS PALLIDUS, Sp. n. (Plate XIX. fig. 2.)

Length 3 a line.

As far as I could ascertain from the single example contained in
the Kerguelen-Island collection, this small Acarid is an undescribed
species of the genus Scirus. Its colour is a dull yellowish white ;
and there are a few obscure blackish markings in two parallel
longitudinal lines along the upperside of the abdomen. The
body and legs are furnished with a few longish pale semidia-
phanous hairs. The eyes are in two pairs, those of each pair
contiguous, and in the position indicated by the two small oval
markings in figure 24. The only example received was injured by
the action of the spirit in which it had been preserved, so that the
exact details of its structure could not be satisfactorily observed ; in
the general appearance, however, of the beak-like mouth-parts there
seemed to be but little difference from the genus Bdella and others
nearly allied.

Order ACARIDEA.
Fam. IxopiIpEs.
Gen. Hyatomma, C. Koch.
Hyatomma puta. (Plate XIX. fig. 3.)

Length 2 line.
Body oval. Cephalothoraz yellowish brown, strongly tinged with
red on either side of its fore part and on the fore part of the caput.

1876.] ARACHNIDA FROM KERGUELEN’S LAND. 261

Abdomen dark yellow-brown, and (as well as the cephalothorax)
thinly clothed with short pale hairs; the hinder part of the abdomen
is of a pale dull yellowish hue, and its margin is indented with four
small elongate notches. On each side of the underpart, just behind
the basal joints of the 4th pair of legs, is a roundish patch, whose
surface appears to be covered with minute points, which may.
possibly be the plates of spiracular organs.

The legs are moderately long and tolerably strong, 7-jointed, the
last or tarsal joint being very small; they are of a pale yellowish
colour, marked underneath with patches of a bright shining orange
red, and furnished with a few short hairs ; each tarsus terminates
with two curved diaphanous claws springing from a small claw-joint ;
and beneath them is an oval sucker like pad.

The palpi are five-jointed (including the basal joints or maxille) ;
these latter are of a reddish colour and soldered to the labium; the
colour of the palpi is similar to that of the legs; the terminal (or
digital) joint is short and small; the next to it (or radial) is large and
tumid, the other two joints short. The length of the palpi slightly
exceeds that of the falces.

The falces are porrected in the form of a beak, and are armed
beneath with numerous sharp hooks or teeth directed backwards.

Several examples of this Acarid were found by the Rev. A. E.
Eaton on a Penguin (Pygosceles teniatus) in Kerguelen’s Land.

Ordo nov. ? PacituorHySIDEA.

External Characters of the Order :—Cephalothoraz and abdomen
covered with a continuous epidermis of a rather slight texture, un-
segmented, and united to each other throughout their whole breadth,
the point of junction being clearly indicated by a transverse line or
suture. Palpi filiform, and terminating with a single minute claw.
Legs eight in number, their basal joints closely grouped together on
the sternal surface of the cephalothorax, the tarsi terminate with
two claws, between which is a slender pectinated style. Falces
didactylous. Mazwille coalescing at their base. Labium (properly
so called) wanting. yes two.

Fam. Pa@ciLopHysIDEs.

In its general appearance this curious little Arachnid seems to be
a compound of the Spiders, Solpugids, Chelifers, and Acari. On its
upperside it reminds one strongly of the Solpugidea, both in the
massive falces, and its two eyes on a small tubercle at the fore extremity
of the caput ; its underside bears a strong resemblance in the maxillz
and palpi to the Araneidea ; its profile resembles that of the pseudo-
Scorpiones, while in its small size, continuous, delicate epidermis, and
closely approximated thorax and abdomen it shows a strong likeness
to the Acaridea.

Gen. nov. PaciLopuysis.

Eyes two, closely grouped on a small tubercle at the fore extremity
of the caput, just between and above the base of the falces.

262 REV, O. P. CAMBRIDGE ON NEW [Feb. 15,

Falces massive, as long as the cephalothorax, two-clawed, the
upper claw fixed, the lower movable, and both curved.

Maville \arge, coalescing at their base, and produced at their inner
extremity into a strong angularly pointed projection.

Labium none, and sternum none, properly so called, the basal
joints of the legs being articulated to the inferior surface of the
cephalothorax.

Abdomen longer than the cephalothorax. A small elongate oval
aperture towards the hinder part of the underside is probably the
genital opening, while a still more minute orifice beneath its extre-
mity is probably the anal aperture.

Legs moderately long and tolerably strong; they are 6-jointed,
furnished with long bristles, and terminating in two S-curved claws,
beneath which is a longish, slender, slightly upturned style, plu-
mose or finely pectinated along its underside.

Palpi 4-jointed, similar to the legs in armature ; the terminal (or
digital) joint ends with a small hooked claw ; and the bristles or hairs
on it are long and plumose.

PacILOPHYSiS KERGUELENENSIS, sp. n. (Plate XIX. fig. 4.)

Adult female. Length 4 line.

The eephaluthorax is of a somewhat quadrate form, narrower
before than at its junction with the abdomen ; it is moderately con-
vex above, and has a few long pale hairs or slender bristles directed
forwards on its upperside: its profile line is nearly level; and the
colour of the cephalothorax and abdomen is pale yellow, the legs and
other parts being of a whitish hue.

The eyes are small, but close together near the hinder part of a
small roundish tubercle or eminence, at the middle of the fore extre-
mity of the caput.

The legs are 6-jointed, rather long, tolerably strong, not greatly
differing in length, their relative length being 1, 4, 2, 3; they are
furnished with long pale bristles ; and the tarsi, which are undivided
and with two claws, are curved somewhat in the form of an S: beneath
thein is a largish bristle or style, pectinated or plumose on its infe-
rior side. ‘The joints do not differ greatly in length, the first two
or basal ones being the longest, and the rest nearly equal.

The palpi are similar, in their general armature, to the legs. The
digital joint is longer than the radial, and of an ovoid form; its
hairs are plumose, and the single terminal claw is sharply hooked
aud minute.

The falces are as long as the cephalothorax, very massive at the
base and didactyle, the lower claw being movable and opposed to the
upper one; both claws are curved, but project in the same straight
line and in the same plane as the cephalothorax, which the falces
equal in length.

The maaille are long, their inner extremities considerably pro-
duced into an angularly pointed form, and extending close beneath the
falces, to about two thirds of their length.

The abdomen, looked at in profile, is higher and more convex than

1876. | ARACHNIDA FROM KERGUELEN’S LAND, 263

the cephalothorax, and about double its length; its fore extremity is
conterminous in its breadth with the cephalothorax, but is constricted
laterally near the middle, the hinder extremity being rounded and
obtuse; its upper surface is furnished with a few long pale hairs or
bristles.

Several examples of this minute but most interesting Arachnid were
found under stones in Kerguelen’s Land by Mr. Eaton. Unfortunately,
from their extreme delicacy and small size, they had suffered severely
from the action of the strong spirit in which they were immersed.

Order ARANEIDEA.,
Fam. AGELENIDES.
Gen. nov. Myro.

Cephalothorax oval, roundly truncated before, and moderately
constricted on its lateral margins at the caput. Upper convexity
moderate ; profile-line slopes very gradually in a slightly curved line
from the hinder slope to the ocular region ; clypeus unusually narrow,
almost obsolete. Spinners short, those of the inferior pair longest
and strongest.

Eyes eight, unequal in size and forming a rather large and some-
what oval area, enclosed by two longitudinal curved rows of three
eyes each ; the curves directed from each other; within this area,
and towards its fore part, are two minute eyes near together in a
transverse line.

Legs not greatly different in relative length, which is 4, 1, 2, 3.
Each tarsus terminates with three claws.

Mazille large, curved towards the labium, much and roundly pro-
tuberant on the outer sides towards their extremity, which is rather
obliquely truncated ; the palpi issue from unusually near their lower
extremities.

Labium rather more than half the length of the maxille, very
difficult to be seen clearly ; but its form is apparently oblong, slightly
rounded at the apex.

Myro KERGUELENENSIS, sp. n. (Plate XIX. fig. 5.)

Adult male. Length nearly 23 lines.

The cephalothorax is of a yellow brown colour, the margins
surrounded with a fine black line; the normal grooves and indenta-
tions are well marked, and suffused with dusky black, giving the thorax
somewhat the appearance of radiating markings; the ocular region
is furnished with some bristly black hairs ; and some longer and finer
ones are distributed along the central longitudinal line to the hinder
slope.

The eyes are unequal in size and form a largish hexagonal area on
the fore part of the caput close to its fore margin; they may be de-
scribed either as in two longitudinal curved rows of three eyes each,
with two minute ones in a transverse line towards the fore extremity
of the enclosed area, or as four pairs, a hinder pair, two fore lateral
pairs, and a fore central pair; those of the hinder pair are sepa-

’

264 ON NEW ARACHNIDA FROM KERGUELEN’S LAND. [Feb. 15,

rated by an interval of an eye’s diameter, and each is also divided by
an equal interval from the hinder eye of the lateral pair on its side ;
the eyes of each lateral pair are separated by a slight interval, not
exceeding half the diameter of one of the fore central eyes; the hind
laterals are the largest of the eight ; and the interval between the
fore laterals is equal to about 15 diameter ; the interval between
the eyes of the fore central pair is equal to a diameter, the distance of
each from the fore lateral on its side being rather greater ; and that
of each from the hind lateral is equal to the diameter of the latter ; the
interval between the fore lateral eyes and the fore margin of the
caput is very slight indeed, being less than the diameter of one of the
central eyes.

The legs are moderately long and strong; their relative length
does not differ greatly, being 4, 1, 2,3. They are of a brownish
yellow colour, faintly and imperfectly annulated with dusky brown ;
the annulations are scarcely perceptible in some examples. They are
furnished with spines, bristles, and hairs, some of the latter being at
right angles to the different joints ; each tarsus terminates with three
curved claws, of which the inferior is much the smallest, and sharply
bent downwards.

The palpi are similar in colour to the legs; furnished with hairs
and a few bristles, and of moderate length and strength. The
cubital joint is short and bent; the radial is slightly longer and
spreads out gradually on its outer side into a somewhat irregularly
shaped prominent but not very large apophysis at its fore extremity ;
the digital joint is long and rather narrow, similar in form to that of
some species of Tegenaria; the palpal organs are simple, and have a
long curved filiform spine connected with them, and by which they
are very nearly encircled; this spine issues from the base of the
palpal organs, and curving first round their inner margin terminates
on the opposite side.

The falces are long, strong, and vertical, prominent near their
base in front, and similar in colour to the cephalothorax.

The mazille are similar in colour to the falces; their form has
been already described above.

The dabium has also been described. Its colour is dark blackish
brown.

The sternum is heart-shaped, similar in colour to the legs, and fur-
nished with hairs.

The abdomen is oval, moderately convex above, and does not pro-
ject greatly over the base of the cephalothorax. It is clothed with
hairs, some on the fore part of the upperside being prominent and
of a bristly nature. Its colour is brownish yellow mixed with brown
and black, a tolerably distinct pattern being visible on the upper-
side ; that on the fore half consists of two longitudinal curved rows,
each of three irregular yellowish spots, followed (on the hinder half)
by a series of alternate yellowish and black angular bars or chevrons,
the angles directed forwards; or the hinder half may be described
as of a yellowish colour marked with a series of four or six black
angular bars, which diminish in size towards the spinners; the

Were er, eee

PZ. 2 1S Ore ewe

G.Sowerby lith MAN Hanhart imp

NEW AUSTRA

fer
=
Nh
7)
©
fae}
J
=

1876.] MR. G. F. ANGAS ON NEW HELICES. 265

underside of the abdomen is of a uniform blackish brown colour with
an indistinct pale longitudinal line on either side.

The spinners of the inferior pair are strong but short, though
longer than those of the Superior pair.

The female resembles the male in general colour and markings ; the
sides of the abdomen, however, on the hinder half are paler than those
of the male, and are marked with two differently sized oblique irre-
gular blackish markings ; the genital aperture is simple, but of a dis-
tinctive form.

Eight males and one female were received from the Rev. Ae ES
Eaton, by whom they were found on Kerguelen’s Land under stones,
and running also at times on the ground.

This spider (as above observed), the only one found on the island, is
of great interest, being unmistakably allied to Tegenaria and Agelena,
though quite distinct from both.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIX,
Fig. 1. Zorynophora serrata, sp. 0.
a, upperside, highly magnified ; 4, underside without the legs; ¢, profile ;
d, leg of first pair ; ¢, extremity of tarsus of ditto: f palpi; g, extre-
mity of one of the cephalic projections, highly magnified ; 2, one of the
clavate hairs on abdomen, highly magnified ; %, mouth-parts on under-
side, highly magnified ; 0, natural length.
Fig. 2. Scirus pallidus, sp. n.
@, upperside; 6, upperside of caput and mouth-parts, more enlarged,
showing the position of the eyes; ¢, natural length.
Fig. 3. Hyalomma puta, sp. n.
a, upperside ; }, underside without legs; c, caput, palpi, and falces, more
enlarged ; d, natural length.
Fig. 4. Pacilophysis kerguelenensis, sp. n.
a, upperside; 6, underside without legs ; ¢, profile without legs or palpi;
d, extremity of tarsus of leg of second pair; ¢, digital joint of palpus ;
J; portion of falces and maxille in profile; f, natural length.
Fig. 5. Myro kerguelenensis, sp. n.
a, upperside ; 4, fore part of caput and falces, from the front, showing
the position of the eyes; c, profile; d, maxille and labium ; ¢, g, left
palpus in two positions; 2, genital aperture (2); f, natural length.

*. Descriptions of Four new Species of Helix; with some
notes on Helix angasiana of Pfeiffer. By Grorce Frencu
Angas, F.L.S., C.M.Z.S.

[Received January 26, 1876.]
(Plate XX.)

HELIX BEATRIX, n. sp. (Plate XX. figs, 1 to 5.)

Shell narrowly perforate, ovately conical, rather thin, not shining,
finely obliquely striated, variously coloured ; spire conoidal ; whorls
63, rounded, narrowly margined at the sutures, the last non-descend-
ing, somewhat inflated and obtusely subangulated at the periphery
in front, moderately convex at the base ; aperture subcircular ; the

266 MR. G. F. ANGAS ON NEW HELICES. [ Feb. 15,

outer lip very slightly expanded and reflected ; the collumella de-
scending vertically and callously reflected over the perfcration.

Diam. maj. 10, min. 8, alt. 13 lines.

Hab.” Solomon archipelago.

Var. a. Rich orange-yellow throughout, inner lip white, apex some-
times of a carnelian color.

Var. 6. Bright yellow, apex orange, with a narrow black band im-
mediately below the suture of the last whorl, lip black.

Var. c. Pellucid white, upper whorls yellow or orange.

Var. d. Upper whorls white, last whorl light brown, with a narrow
pale band below the suture, lip white stained inside with purple.

Var.e. Very dark purplish chocolate-colour, reddish towards the
apex.

This shell, like Helix meta, Pfr., is subject to remarkable variations
in colour, but may at once be distinguished by its smaller size, the
convexity of the whorls, and the roundness of the aperture, in which
the subfiexuous outer lip and diagonal form of H. meta are wanting.
The general form of the shell presents somewhat of a Paludina-like
aspect. The outer lip is much less expanded and reflected than in
H. meta, and the texture less glossy and shining.

Herx RAMSDENI, n. sp. (Plate XX. figs. 6, 7.)

Shell imperforate, turbinate, rather solid, obliquely faintly striated,
white, ornamented with a narrow brownish-black band on the lower
part of the penultimate whorl, and two broader black bands, one
above and the other below the periphery of the last whorl, the cen-
tral band being irregularly marked with diaphanous white spots ;
base tinged more or less with suffused chestnut next the columella ;
spire conical, apex rather obtuse ; whorls 53, convex, the first three
somewhat pellucid, the last descending in front; aperture very
oblique, truncately oval; peristome white, the right margin ex-
panded, sinuous, and reflected; the columellar margin obliquely
descending, flattened and expanded, slightly grooved in the middle,
and furnished with a long straight callus terminating abruptly
within the aperture.

Diam. maj. 123, min. 103, alt. 13 lines.

_Hab. ? Solomon archipelago.

This beautiful shell is somewhat allied to H. bozvini of Petit
(H. subrepta of Quoy), but it exhibits certain differences so marked
as to induce me to characterize it as a distinct species. ‘The whorls
of H. ramsdeni are more rounded, the last whorl is smaller, and the
shell generally somewhat more conical than in H. boivint; whiist
the peculiar white spots on the central black band remind one of
similar markings in H. ambrosia, Ang. The beautiful scarlet outer
lip so constant in H. doivini is entirely absent in the present species ;
and the shell is of an almost bluish white, while H. bowini has a
warm yellowish tinge.

I have named this shell in memory of the late Lady Harriet
Ramsden, from whose collection the typical specimen originally
came.

1876. ] MR. G. F. ANGAS ON NEW HELICES. 267

He1ix Moressyl, n.sp. (Plate XX. figs. 8, 9.)

Shell umbilicated, globosely conical, moderately solid, finely and
irregularly obliquely striated, fulvous chestnut, paler at the apex, with
various broad and narrow bands of deep brown, darker below the
sutures ; spire conical; whorls 6, convex, the last somewhat flat-
tened at the base and excavated towards the umbilicus ; aperture
oblique, sublunate, within glossy and of a pale purplish hue, lips
black, margins approximating and joined by a thin callus, outer
margin expanded and subreflexed, columellar margin dilated, partly
concealing the umbilicus.

Diam. maj. 23 min. 14, alt. 23 lines.

Hab. Port Denison, Northern Queensland.

In its general character this species comes nearer to H. yulet,
Forbes, than to any other ; but it differs in being larger, very much
more conical, and in having the base of the last whorl peculiarly
flattened.

Hevix rwopa, n.sp. (Plate XX. figs. 10-12.)

Shell deeply and profoundly umbilicated, depressedly convex, mo-
derately solid, finely obliquely regularly striated, fulvous brown,
scattered with pale, diaphanous, oblique stripe-like spots, with
a suffused brown band below the suture, and another darker and
narrower band above it, also a narrow dark band on either side
of the keeled periphery ; spire depressedly conical, apex obtuse ;
sutures narrowly margined ; whorls-6, convex, the last not descend-
ing, moderately keeled at the periphery and a little flattened at the
base; aperture oblique, truncately ovate, right margin rather sinuous,
very slightly expanded and subreflexed, the basal a little thickened,
somewhat reflexed, and white.

Diam. maj. 10, min. 9, alt. 5 lines.

Hab. San Christoval, Solomon archipelago.

This shell belongs to the Trochomorpha group, its nearest ally
being H. merziana, Pfr.

Hevrx aneasrana, Pfr. (not Newcomb, in Ann. Lyceum Nat,
Hist. New York).

This characteristic species (first described in the French ‘ Journal
de Conchyliologie,’ 1862, p. 228, by Dr. Pfeiffer, from a dead and
bleached specimen in a chalky condition, that was sent home by me
from the neighbourhood of Lake Torrens, in the interior of South
Australia) has been the cause of some confusion amongst concholo-
gists, which I desire to rectify. On my subsequently obtaining
living specimens of this species from the same locality I wrote to
M. Crosse, the editor of the Journal, stating that the diagnosis
should be modified, the Specimen figured having lost all its colour
and become thickened by exposure to the influences of the atmo-
sphere. This note was published by M. Crosse in the Journal for
1863, in which the colours of the living shell were given. Notwith-
standing this, Dr. Cox, of Sydney, in his ‘Monograph of the Austra-
lian Land Shells,’ states that M. Crosse is mistaken, and that the

268 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON THE [Feb. 15,

coloration he gives is that of H. biteniata, Cox, also from South
Australia, and persists in regarding the normal state of H. anga-
siana as “solid, white, and porcellaneous,”’ and furthermore gives
“* H. angasiana, not Pfeiffer,” as synonym of H. biteniata, Cox, in
his ‘Monograph.’ The coloration of H. angasiana, when fresh, is
singularly like that of H. éiteniata, although the form and charac-
ters of the two species are extremely different. I have therefore
given a figure of both the species on the accompanying plate, which
ought to set the matter definitively at rest. I may add that H. dite-
niata, Cox (1868), is a synonym of H. flindersi, A. Ad. & Ang.,
(P. Z. S. 1863), the description of which was unfortunately also
taken from a bleached specimen from which the bands had disap-
eared.
The shell described and figured as H. angasiuna by Dr. Newcomb
in the ‘ Annals of the Lyceum of Natural History of New York,’ in
May 1860, must stand as H. bougainvillei, it having been described
and figured under the latter name by Dr. Pfeiffer in the ‘ Proceed-
ings’ of this Society in February 1860 (see P. Z. S. 1860, p. 133).

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XX,

Figs. 1-5. Helix beatriz. Figs. 10, 11,12 Helix rhoda.
Figs. 6, 7. Helix ramsdent, Figs. 15, 14. Helix angasiana.
Figs. 8,9. Helia moresbyi. Figs. 15, 16. Helix biteniata.

3. Notes on some of the Blue Crows of America. By P. L.
Scuarer, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., and Osserr Savin,
M.A., F.R.S.

[Received January 9, 1875.]

The typical Crows (Corvus) are, as is well known to naturalists,
in the New World essentially a northern form, and have only pene-
trated into the Neotropical Region as far south as the highlands of
Guatemala and the northern Antilles. Several genera of Blue Crows
take their place in Central and Southern America. Of these, in our
‘Nomenclator,’ we enumerated 32 species as autoptically known to
us. But during the past three years the receipt of additional speci-
mens and examination of others in different collections has enabled
us to add slightly to the number, and to make certain rectifications
in our own list. These we beg leave to submit to the Society,

1. CyANOCITTA* ARGENTIGULA.

C. argentigula, Lawr. Aun. Lye. N. Y. xi. p. 88 (1875).

Under this name Mr. Lawrence has recently described a Jay from
Costa Rica with which we are not yet autoptically acquainted. Itis
apparently a well-defined species, belonging to the group containing

* The type of the genus Cyanocitta of Strickland is Garrwlus cristatus, Linn.,
as stated in precise terms by the founder of the genus (Ann. Nat. Hist. xv. p. 261,
1845); and we therefore cannot understand why the authors of ‘ North American
Birds’ and other American writers persist in giving the type as Garrulus

1876. ]} BLUE CROWS OF AMERICA. 269

C. nana and C. pumilo, and partakes to some extent of the character
of both, in having the crescentic white frontal and superciliary marks
of the latter, and the throat coloured as in the former species. It is
probably the representative in Costa Rica of the Guatemalan C. pu-
milio and the Mexican C. nana.

2. CYANOCITTA BEECHEI! (Vig.): Scl. et Salv. Nomencl. p. 39.

There are three somewhat similar species of Cyanocitta of a
uniform black below, two only of which are inserted in the list in
our ‘Nomenclator’ under the names C. beecheii and C. crassirostris
These three birds may be readily distinguished as follows :—

a. Frontis crista tenui elongata nigra............ 1. sanblasiana.
6. Frontis plumis breyibus erectis, crista nulla.
a'. Major: dorso lete ceruleo, naribus
plumis frontalibus omnino tectis 2. beecheii.
b’. Minor: dorso viridi-cyaneo, naribus
plumis froutalibus dimidio tectis 3. germana.

The synonymy of these species should stand as follows .—

CYANOCITTA SANBLASIANA.

Geai de San Blas, Néboux, Rev. Zool. 1840, pp. 290, 323.

Pica sanblasiana, Lafr. Mag. de Zoul. 1842, Ois. t. 28.

Cyanocorax de San-Blas, Prév et Desmurs, Voy. ‘ Vénus,’ v. p- 200.

Cissilopha sanblasiana, Bp. Consp. i. p. 380; Lawrence, Mem.
Boston Soc. N. H. ii. p. 284.

“ Cyanurus geofroti, Bp.” Gray, Hand-list, ii. p. 4, et in Mus. Brit.

Hab. Western Mexico: San Blas (Néboux); Acapulco (Leclan-
cher); Plains of Colima, Manzanilla Bay and Las Trochas (Xanfus).

Mus. 8.G., Acad. Philad., Brit.

Except as regards its thin frontal crest,this bird does not differ mate-
rially in form from its allies ; and we see no reason for making a genus
of it, as proposed by Bonaparte. The species is rare in European col-
lections. Messrs. Salvin and Godman’s specimen is one of Xantus’s
collection from the plains of Colima, and was presented to them by
the Smithsonian Institution. There is a single mounted example in
the Gallery of the British Museum, marked C. geoffroyi. In the
Jardin des Plantes there is also one mounted specimen of this species.

It should be noticed that the figure of this bird in the ‘ Magasin
de Zoologie’ gives the bill yellow, showing that in this species, as in
its two allies, this is a variable character, probably depending on
sex.

californicus, Again, the type of Cyanurus, Sw.,is not Garrulus cristatus, as given
in the above mentioned work, p. 271. This error was caused by Mr. G. R. Gray’s
unauthorized assumption that the first species in any author's list must necessarily
be his type. But Swainson himself tells us that the first three species which he
mentions (i.e. C. cristatus, C. stelleri, and C. sordidus) are “aberrant,” and that
the “typical” species are only found in the ‘tropics of America and India.”
It is obvious therefore that Cyanwrus, Sw. (1831)= Cyanocorax, Boie (1826), as
stated_by Strickland J. s, c., and that Cyanocitta is the proper generic name for
the “Blue Jays” of America, as used by us in our “ Nomenclator.”

270 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON THE (Feb. 15,

CYANOCITTA BEECHEII.

Pica beecheii, Vig. Zool. Journ. iv. p. 353 (1829), et Beechey’s
Voy. Zool. p. 22, pl. 6.

Cyanocitta crassirostris, Bp. Consp. i. p. 378 (1850).

Cyanocorax geoffroiit, Bp. C. R. xxxi. p. 564 (1850).

Cyanocorax beecheyi, Finsch, Abh. Nat. Ver. Bremen, vol. ii. p.

333.

Cyanocitta beecheyii, Lawr. Mem. Boston Soc. N. . ii. p. 283.

Hab. North-western Mexico; Mazatlan (Grayson and Bischof’) ;
Tres Marias Islands (Xantus).

As far as can be told by the imperfect diagnoses in Bonaparte’s
‘ Conspectus,’ his “‘ C. beachii”” is founded on a yellow-billed speci-
men of the next species, and his C. crassirostris on a black-billed
specimen of the present bird. Grayson says decidedly that the colour
of the bill in the present bird is a sexual character ; and there is not
much doubt that he is correct. Bonaparte’s C. geoffroii is also
undoubtedly based upon an individual of this species.

There is no example of the true C. beecheii in the British Museum.
In the Galerie of the Jardin des Plantes there are four, all labelled
“ Cyanocitta geoffroit, Bp.’ Two of these are from the Voyage of
the ‘Vénus,’ from San Blas and Mazatlan respectively, that from
San Blas being doubtless Bonaparte’s type.

CYANOCITTA GERMANA, Sp. nov.

Cyanocitta beachii, Bp. Consp. i. p. 378. (nec. Vig.).

Corvus (Pica) beecheii, Ryd. et Gerv. Mag. de Zool. 1836, pl. 72,
et Voy. ‘ Favorite,’ pl. 20.

Cyanocitta crassirostris, Salv. Ibis, 1861, p. 353; Moore, P. Z. S.
1859, p. 57: Lawrence, Ann. L. N. Y. ix. p. 201.

Cyanurus beecheti et C. crassirostris, Gray, Hand-list, ii. pp. 4 & 5.

Hab. Belize (Salvin, Dyson § Leylan); Peten (Morelet); Merida,
Yucatan (Schoté).

We have already stated that this bird is probably the C. beachii
of Bonaparte’s ‘Conspectus.’ Dr. Pucheran first pointed out the
difference between the figure of Eydoux and Gervais in the ‘ Magasin
de Zool.’ (which we suppose to be also intended for it) and that of
Vigors representing the true beecheii, and associated the former
with Morelet’s specimens from Yucatan. |

Not having looked sufficiently deeply into the complicated errors
of previous workers, we have hitherto used the term crassirostris for
the present bird, and have been followed therein by other writers.
But, as hinted by Pucheran*, there can be little question that the
insufficient diagnosis of Bonaparte’s C. crassirostris was really taken
from a black-billed C. beecheii.

As in C. beecheii, both yellow and black-billed specimens occur in
the present species. Of two examples obtained by Salvin at Belize, one
has a black bill and the other a yellow. The latter, moreover, has
slight white tips to the lateral rectrices, which we look upon as a

* Rey. Zool. 1858, p. 196.

1876.) BLUE CROWS OF AMERICA. 271

characteristic of the female of this species. The C. beecheii of Gray’s
Hand-list is based upon three similar yellow-billed and white-tipped
Specimens, in the British Museum, two of which were obtained by
Dyson in British Honduras.

In the Gallery of the Jardin des Plantes are two specimens of the
bird. One of these, labelled “‘ Mexique,” hasa yellow bill and white
tips to the tail. The other is a partial albino, and has the black por-
tions of the plumage, except the tibize, white. It agrees with the short
diagnosis given by Bonaparte of Cyanocitta beachii, jr. (Consp. p.
378), and is doubtless the bird from which it was taken, Amongst
the skins at Paris is one example of this species from Merida (Yu-
catan), with yellow bill and white-tipped rectrices. This is marked in
the handwriting of Jules Verreaux as the type of Bonaparte’s eras-
sirostris ; but this is clearly an error. It is, no doubt, the specimen
referred to by Pucheran (Rev. Zool. 1858, p. 196) as having been
brought by Morelet from Guatemala.

CyanocitTa soLtyaA, Bp. Journ. f. Orn. 1853, p- 47; Tacz.
P. Z. 8. 1874, p. 524,

Of this rare bird we have never been able to procure specimens,
but have examined that in the Paris Museum (probably Bonaparte’s
type) and convinced ourselves that it is an excellent species. There
is likewise an example of it in the Copenhagen Museum, obtained by
Prof. Reinhardt when at Lima, along with the specimen of Iridornis
reinhardti (Ibis, 1865, p. 495, pl. xi.). . We have not seen Tacza-
nowski’s specimens, but have little doubt that they really belong here,
and that the bird is from the Junin district of Peru. Further south
in the Cuzco district and in Bolivia C. viridi-cyanea takes its place*.

CYANOCITTA ARMILLATA, G. R. Gray.

The series of this bird in our collections present three recognizable
forms, not including C. ¢turcosa, Bp. These are from three different
mountain-ranges of Columbia and Venezuela, namely the Andes of
Merida, the central range of Bogota and Pamplona, and the Quin-
diu range, between the Cauca and Magdalena valleys. They may
be distinguished as follows, but are hardly worthy of specific rank.

a, MERIDANA.
Cyanocitta armillata, Scl. et Saly. P. Z. 8. 1870, p. 788.

In this form the whole upper surface is deep blue without any
greenish tinge on the lower back and tail ; the head is likewise barely
lighter, not of a silvery blue as in No. 2. Belowalso the plumage is
ot a darker blue and quite uniformly coloured except on the throat,
within the black neck-collar, where it is lighter, but not so bright as
in the Bogota bird.

Of this form Goering obtained specimens in the upper wood-region
of Merida, three of which are now before us.

* Cf. P.Z.S. 1873, p. 185.

272 ON THE BLUE CROWS OF AMERICA. [ Feb. 15,

3. BOGOTANA.

Cyanocitta armillata, G. R. Gray, in Gray & Mitch. Gen. of
B, pl. lxxiv.; Wyatt, Ibis, 1871, p. 330.

This is the ordinary “‘ Bogota” form, and is, we suppose, that
figured by Gray and Mitchell, as above quoted; but no description is
given. It is much nearer to the last than to the succeeding, having
no greenish tinge to the blue. But the throat is lighter, the head paler,
and the upper surface generally not quite so dark. Mr. Wyatt’s
skin from Pamplona belongs strictly to this form.

Y- QUINDIUNA.

Of this form Mr. T. K. Salmon has lately sent us many examples
from the Cordillera of Quindiu. The forehead is of a more intense
blue than in the Bogota bird; and this colour is continued over the
head and shoulders. The lower back, wings, tail and belly below are
of a more greenish blue ; but the throat within the black collar is of
nearly the same tint as in 3.

P.S.—Since this paper was written we have received from Mr.
Lawrence a separate copy of his paper entitled ‘ Description of a
new Species of Jay of the Genus Cyanocitta, and of a new Species of
the Genus Cyanocoraz,” read October 11th of last year before the
Lyceum of Natural History of New York. So far as we can tell
from Mr. Lawrence’s description, his Cyunocitta pulchra, from
Ecuador, there described, is a species with which we are not
acquainted. But the Cyanocorax, for which the name C. ortoni is
suggested (Ann. L. N.Y. xi. p. 166), is, in our opinion, none other
than Cyanocorax mystacalis, Geoffr., of which name C. uroleucus,
Heine, J. f. Orn. 1860, p. 115, is a synonym. Sclater’s collection
contains a skin of this species from Loxa in Ecuador, which agrees
in every respect with Mr. Lawrence’s description of his supposed
new bird. The association of C. mystacalis with C. cayanus (by
Bonaparte and others) is a great error, as may be seen by reference
to the original types of the former now in the Paris Museum and
Philadelphia Academy, both of which we have inspected, or even tothe
sufficiently accurate figure in the ‘ Magasin de Zoologie.’” Whether C.
bellus of Schlegel is really referable to C. mystucalis (as suggested,
Ibis, 1868, p. 111) is perhaps not quite certain ; for, as pointed
* out by Mr. Lawrence, Schlegel describes the outer tail-feathers of
his C. 6ellus as having their bases blue. An examination of the
typical specimen will be necessary to decide this question; but it
will, in our opinion, probably turn out to be the case that the asser-
tion made in the ‘Ibis’ is correct.

LIST OF THE PUBLICATIONS
OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.

THE scientific publications of the Zoological Society are of two
kinds — “ Proceedings,” published in an octavo form, and
“ Transactions,” in quarto.

According to the present arrangements, the “ Proceedings”
contain not only notices of all business transacted at the scien-
tific meetings, but also all the papers read at such meetings
and recommended to be published by the Committee of Pub-
lication. From fifty to seventy coloured plates and engravings
are attached to each annual volume of the “ Proceedings,” to
illustrate the new or otherwise remarkable species of animals
described in them. Amongst such illustrations, figures of the
new or rare species acquired in a living state for the Society’s
Gardens are often given.

The “Proceedings” for each year are issued in four parts, on the
first of the months of June, August, October, and April, the part
published in April completing the volume for the preceding
year. They may be obtained with black or coloured illustrations.

The “Transactions” contain such of the more important
communications made to the scientific meetings of the Society
as, on account of the nature of the plates required to illustrate
them, are better adapted for publication in the quarto form.
The series of papers of Professor Owen on the Anthropoid
Apes, and on the various species of Dinornis, all form part of
this series.

Fellows, and Honorary, Foreign, and Corresponding Members,
upon payment of a Subscription of £1 1s. before the day of the
Anniversary Meeting in each year, are entitled to receive all the
Society’s Publications for the year. They are likewise entitled
to purchase the Publications of the Society at 25 per cent. less
than the price charged for them to the Public. A further re-
duction of 25 per cent. is wade upon purchases of Publications
issued prior to 1861, if they exceed the value of five pounds.

The following is a complete list of the publications of the
Society already issued. They may be obtained at the Society’s
Office (11 Hanover Square, W.), at Messrs. Longmans’, the
Society’s publishers (Paternoster Row, E.C.), or through any
bookseller :—

{June lst, 1876. ]

2

PROCEEDINGS OF THE COMMITTEE OF SCIENCE AND CORRE-
SPONDENCE OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.

8vo. 2 vols.
To Fellows. To the Public.
Part I. 1830-31. 1 vol. SvO.........cecesseeees Price 4s. 6d. ... 6s.
4 ii. 1832. att eae el 7, HS IG. Use BIOS

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.
8yvo. 15 vols. and Index. (First Series.)

Priceto Price to the Price to Price tothe
Fellows. Public. Fellows. Public

Part I. 1833. l vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d. ... 6s. | Part IX. 1941. 1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d. ... 6s.
- II. 1834. is As 60 Gs. IG X. 1842. as As. 6d. ... 6s.
s AI. ASS: 5 4s. 6d....6s. | XI. 1843. 5 As. 6d. ... 6s.

TV 1836; “ Ae Gd) ea 08. [NO (55 Le POs. om 4s. 6d. ... 6s.
* V. 1837. Us 4s. 6d. ... 6s. 5 IIT. 1845. 35 4s. 6d. ... 6s.
a) VE AS8S8: i; BsnGeee. nos!) hs, UX EVe 1846, es 4s. 6d. ... 6s.
B VILY 1839: af AsiGdss. Oka | XV. 1847. te 4s. 6d. ... 6s.
» VIII. 1840. Y As. 6d: .2:6s.,- | Index 1830-47. 5 4s. Gd. ... 6s.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.
8vo. 13 vols. and Index. (Second Series.)

Without Illustrations. With Illustrations.
To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public.
es. di: iis. ot:

Part XVI. 1848. 1 vol. Svo.4s.6d. ... 6s. ... Price 1 1
BEVIS S49, = 46605 “ss. Gs... 33
5 EE 1850: s As- Od; << 65:
z XIX: 1851. - 456d: “ees ‘OS;
ei Ke S52. es As "Gade eis) © Gs
ea XL) 853. A AsO: ~ acts "HOS:
2) EX spas oe Ag) Gt. mass 05>
pe >.©.4 Ube ies 3 4¢60.-~ snc 08:
) Ve SoG; s 43) Gd: :- Os:
Pe. 2. Qe ye a As. Gi: ass * OS.
sy | S58: ¥ 43.\6d26 vee “G8:
3) OV LL: 1859 AgiGds— iis. Gs:
» XAVIII. 1860. ue Ae Ga < 3.) a iGS:

Index 1848-60. - As: G0. >. 165.

Se ee ee eS OOO} r}
Oo
ocoooooasocooonrc
ODOR Re Rm Re mR Ree
LOL MONINIDAhe HON

ILLUSTRATIONS TO THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL
SOCIETY OF LONDON, 1848-60. 8vo. 6 vols.

To Fellows. To the Public.
$s 1: age eer A
Mammalia ...--..-..-. 1 vol., ccntaining 83 Plates ... Price 2 8 O 3 3 0
Aves Aes hactcoees By vols., 55 Vee bs 15 pA Aor. 6 (6° 0
Reptilia et Pisces ... 1 vol., 55 03 Be fo PE ee ae 110 6
Mollusca......cceseccee 1 vol., as 5, Lr one sn Lees LO 1 10: .0
Annulosa et Radiata 1 vol., + SO =. me Mee a ae Ss peel,

3

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF
THE ZOQLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.

Complete. Letterpress only. Illustrations only.
To° To the To To the To To the
Fellows. Public. Fellows. Public. Fellows. Public.
1861, cloth 3Qs......... AL Se. tcaces AS Otleesesac-e OS caseseves TSU OMsecrcae. 4S:
SD ga 25) eae ee By Siew cles aiek 4S GGs =... 0: Gsecceaek ee DSS Odea ate aoe dls.
EROS pe Gseh) (deSavece cons A Gvenussses ASnOG sre sceee: GStccewen<: PAROS OY GRRE REE 4ls.
SOA Ea O2Ss tack ce ss A Seeccecves AS Giecame cor GSisccerses Dip Se Olessenaats 4ls.
WEG sey GSS tec ceaces AU Sv oncsrete AS AO: ccescie de Gstreescces D7 SHOdactate. As:
TSG, Pes SLSR Sk. ASF Sacgeet AS a OU navese: OS tcaeee ces DiS Odeetacese: 4ls.
With Illustrations With Illustrations
Uncoloured. Coloured.
To Fellows. Tothe Public. To Fellows. To the Public.
ISO /pGlOL Ds vccuiec seas ssc eades lls. 6d. ... 14s. 6d. ... 32s. 6d. ... 47s. 6d.
USOSUEE Gs. sa cdeckmasiesasa vce lls. 6d. ... 14s. 6d. ... 32s. 6d. ... 47s. 6d.
EG Semen aa! hides cat ceivel, dsp seh st lls. 6d. ... 14s. 6d. ... 32s. Gd. ... 47s. 6d.
WSO EiwdtswS oe unaceenstena liss6d. 22 IAs: Gas 2.28) Gd: ©. 47s) 6d:
Index, 1861-1870........... 4s. 6d. ... 6s. Od.
DS 7S Clothince ccc caecssceaesices Iss Gaines l4ss Gdn ca ols: Gdo \.2 47.8) 6d,
DACP AR yak oseenn ss bacnereciens lls. 6d. ... 14s. 6d. ... 32s. 6d. ... 47s. 6d.
USV/S3 Ser oaban eye nees doce ae lls. 6d. ... 14s. 6d. ... 32s. 6d. ... 47s. 6d.
NS ZAG» ebeel sseacsces aeeeapow'e te lls. 6d. ... 14s. 6d. ... 38s. 6d. ... 50s. 6d.
VSP sy yeueeectodetonee wes Lis. 6d. ... 14s. 6d. ... 38s. 6d. ... 50s. 6d.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF
LONDON. 4to. 8 vols. and Eight Parts.

To Fellows. To the Public.

s. d. ES
Vol. 1., containing 59 Plates (1833-35). Price 313 6 ... 4 18 0
Mol. -iI-; a ie, (ISda Al) oe ee OO... oe GAG
Vol. IIl., cp G3> 5; (1842-49) ones G6) oe 4UIE 0
Mol: liv, x 7S, s;0eGSol_G2)\ree Gy EGt Zr 0. 22., 82926
Vol. V., % bw 458 ((L862-66) an oes 26) Ges | GINO
Volh Vis oc Siieeste a CLOOO— 09) emu pel lane Ol assae lon OmO
Vol.VIL., 3 ie) 33 MCLSGO— 72) aw Sallie Ones. UIIG) “0
Vol.VIII., _,, S2e 5) lS 72—7 4h on Oe Caer Lok 0
Vol. IX, part 1, Cee (1874). thy LVM GWT reece oad sO
5 ee 1 (1875) Pra eeGrmeees 2. 2k 0
rp ns, 5, (1875 sa OPTS 0)... | Ae 0
oe sas 14s (1875) ee Ae Geek LI 22 0
cc er pak Os (1875) Se ee OF ons LOR O
5 as ce (1876) LOMO 6 014 0
» » Os ass (1876) eae LO: FA LS Be
oe oy Meh 1075; (1876). Ul) die 14 0

The following are the contents of the most recently published
Parts of the “ Transactions ” :—

Vol. IX. Part 7. “On British Annelida.”” By W. C. M‘Intosh, C.M.Z.S.
(Four Plates.)—*‘* On the Annelida of the ‘ Porcupine ’ Expeditions of 1869
and 1870.” By W. C. M‘Intosh, C.M.Z.S. (Three Plates.)

Vol. IX. Part 8. ‘On the Osteology of the Marsupialia. (Part V.)
os eet Genus Macropus.”” By Professor Owen, C.B., &e. (Ten

ates.

These publications may be obtained at the Society’s Office (11 Hanover
Square, W.), at Messrs. Longmans’, the Society’s publishers (Paternoster
Row, E.C.), or through any bookseller.

Now ready, price £25, in two volumes, bound in half-moroeco,
containing 100 coloured plates,

ZOOLOGICAL SKETCHES
By JOSEPH WOLF.

MADE FOR

THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON,
FROM ANIMALS IN THEIR VIVARIUM.
EDITED, WITH NOTES,

By PHILIP LUTLEY SCLATER, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S.,

SECRETARY TO THE SOCIETY.

Tuts series of Drawings was undertaken with the object of preserving a
faithful record of the living characters of the most rare and interesting
Animals in the Vivarium of the Zoological Society of London.

In selecting the subjects, particular regard has been paid to those species
which exhibit aptitude for acclimatization, either as objects of economic
value, or simply as additions to the Exotic Animals which are now so
frequently seen in the parks and on the ornamental waters of Europe.

The Drawings have been executed in Water Colours. after most careful
study, by Mr. Wor, who may be fairly said to stand alone in minute
knowledge of the habits and forms of Mammalia as well as of Birds; and
the Lithographie copies, partly printed in colour and then finished by hand,
are in such exact fac-simile as to be scarcely distinguishable from the ori-
ginals.

The Letterpress, prepared by the Editor, embraces all particulars of in-
terest relating to the general history, habits, distribution, and use of the
Animals illustrated in the Plates.

London: GRAVES AND Co., Pall Mall.

Price 6d., Sewed,
A GUIDE TO THE GARDENS
OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.

Thirtieth Edition, corrected according to the present Arrange-
ment of the Gardens,
By PHILIP LUTLEY SCLATER, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S.,
SECRETARY TO THE’SOCIETY,

London: Brapsury, AGNEw AND Co., 10 Bouverie Street; and at the Society’s
Gardens in the Regent’s Park.

Price 2s.; to Fellows, 1s. 6d.

REVISED LIST OF THE VERTEBRATED ANIMALS
NOW OR LATELY LIVING IN THE GARDENS OF
THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON, 1872.

This List contains the scientific and vernacular names of all the species
of Vertebrates im the Society’s collection, arranged in systematic order, and
forms a complete record of all the specimens that have been exhibited alive
in the Society’s Gardens during the past ten years. The total number
of the species is as follows :—Mammals 498, Birds 1044, Reptiles 181,
Batrachians 35, Fishes 68 ; total 1826.

Also Supplement to the above, containing additions received in 1872,
1873, and 1874. Price Is.

Londou: Lonamans & Co.; or at the Society's House, 11 Hanover Square, W.

ah Contents (continued).

January 18, 1876 (continued).

Page
5. On the African Rhinoceroses. By the Hon. W.H. Drummonn...................... 109
6. List of Birds met with in North-eastern Queensland, chiefly at Rockingham Bay. By
Hi. Prerson Ramsay, C.M.Z.8.—Part 10.7, 9s... 100s Tievec sec cc cece ce. 114
7. Description d’un nouveau Cerf tacheté du pays d’Ussuri méridional, Cervus dybowskii.
Pant vesceawowse, M28. j. as. odorata te ROT ee hele. cae. 123
8. Revision of the Lepidopterous Genus Teracolus, with Descriptions of the new Species.
By Arruur Garpiver Burier, F.L.S., F.Z.8. (Plates VI. & NET bereits Wee atm L2G
#. On the Structure of the Mucous Membrane of the Stomach in the Kangaroos. By
Epwarp A. Scuarer, Assistant-Professor of Physiology, and D. James Wit1iams,
Student of Medicine, in University College, London. Communicated by A. H. Gar-
roD, M.A., F.Z.S., Prosector to the Society. (Plates VETS KS) per See so isis cteaae LGD

February 1, 1876.
The Secretary. Extract from a Report of the visit of H.M.S. ‘ Peterel’ to the Galapagos

Islands...... Basinfoeiarend Gite senas Pea stent ctey Naw ces sale bidiaial ararciech al alate Wd eee ee ‘178
Mr. Frederick Selous, jun. Exhibition of and remarks on a series of Horns of African

EEO IRE RSP ee net Bickc> oi 2 DIE ache Se an eg pe PE a aa CME RC ga 179
Mr. Sclater. Exhibition of and remarks on an Antler of a Rusa Deer.................. 179

1. On the Position of the Anterior Nasal Apertures in Lepidosiren. By T. H. Huxrey,
PA Meier. iad S OMe PI ANT as wert OS Tk Lae cles due a SE ts NES 180

2. Notes on the Myology of the Limbs of Moschus moschiferus. By F. Jurrrey Bru, Ex-
hibitioner of Magdalen College, Oxford. Communicated by Prof. Frowsr, F.R.S.,
EEG CPi nem adda deatti es Maeno ss Meee at aCe MS. Weide Mayet iy 182

3. On the Anatomy of Chawna derbiana, and the Systematic Position of the Screamers (Pala-
medeide), By A. H. Garrop, M.A., F.Z.S., Prosector to the Society. (Plates XIIT~
21 Naga BE, bts ok, AMM Ra aR Pn RAIDS DR eh Re Pia YS PT 129

. Notes on Entozoa.—Part ITT, By T. Spencer Coszoxp, M.D., F-.R.S., F.L.S., Corre-
spondent of the Academy of Sciences of Philadelphia. inte XVI). chooses

a

5. List of the Butterflies of Peru, with Descriptions of new Species. By Hurserr Drvce,
B.LS., F.Z.8. With some Notes by Epwarp Barrier, (Plates XVII. & XVIII .) 0205

er)

. On a small Collection of Butterflies from the New Hebrides. By Arruur G. Buruer,
Benes Ein ie 7a aca at. Sh eLAeh to ratie/ fen HIS Suite tin wd. Bones ckh¥. uh oelee. Dol

. Descriptions of new Birds obtained by Mr. C. Buckley in Bolivia. By P. L. Scuarer,
M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., and Osserr Sanvin, Wye Ag HORE ars. h was eels teh are eo dee Da

~J

February 15, 1876.
The Secretary. Report on the additions to the Society's Menagerie in January 1876 ...... 254

Mr. Sclater. Exhibition of and remarks on a new Parrot belonging to the Museum of Neu-
chatel Asma eed eotareloh SS apt ae dex st aerate a hal Ags FS dish dasa she's, Wis wale hom ire ae wee EaDD

Dr. T. 8. Cobbold, F.R.S. Exhibition of and remarks on a parasite (Echinorhynchus) .... 256
Mr. W. K. Parker. Memoir on Xgithognathous Birds.—Part II. (Abstract.).......... 256

1. On anew Order and some new Genera of Arachnida from Kerguelen’s Land. By
the Rev. O. P. Campripcr, M.A., C.M.Z.S., Hon. Memb. New-Zealand Institute.

(Blnte SI ee teeta nme ok ee TOU CPE DADO ao erte 258
2. Descriptions of Four new Species of Helix ; with some Notes on Helix angasiana of Pfeiffer.
By Guorce Frencu Anaas, B.L.S., C.M.Z.S8. (Plate ©. ©) | Aparr r earieh fea eben or 265

3. Notes on some of the Blue Crows of America. By P. L. Scuarer, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S.,
and Onpxna Satyin,: NEAR deeds x + «d's atcha eae eee. 268

LIST OF PLATES.

1876.
PAB AI.
Plate Page
I. Xiphodon platyceps........ 6... eee ee cee eee eee cere eens 3
II. Leucopeza semperi ...-.. 1.2... . see eee eee eee e een eeee 15
III. Thamnophilus melanchrous ..........--.. ++ sees eres res 15
IV. Chart of Families of the order Glires ........++-.+--+-++> 61
V. New Land-Shells from Taviuni..............-+ ++ e+ seeees 99
iy New Species of Teracolus ......+0++.ceeeceecereccrrcees 126
VIII. Fig. 1. Stomach of Macropus giganteus .....-....-+------
Ix. { Figs. 2 & 3. Stomach of Macropus giganteus ......-+-++-.--
Fig. 4. Stomach of Dorcopsis luctuosa......-.-..-+++++++% 165
xX. ee 5. Stomach of Macropus giganteus ........-...++++--
Fig. 6. Stomach of Dorcopsis luctuosa........-+--++0+-+++ |
XI. Figs. 7-10. Stomach of Dorcopsis luctuosa ..-.---+--++++ )
XII. ’
eavaet Anatomy of Chauna derbiana ........-.-- eee eee ee ne « 189
XIV.
a |
XVI. Echinorhynchus elegans:....... 2.000220 eee sees eee sees 200
XVI } Peruvian Butterflies Tait ARI en OO
XVIII. oy
XIX. Kerguelen Island Arachnida ........---.-4.+--eeee eee eee 258
XX. New Australian and Solomon-Island Helices.............- 265
¢g
NOTICE. ~

According to present mi the ‘ Proceedings’ are issued in four parts,
as follows :—

Part _ I. containing papers read in January and February, on June Ist.

ata Ms ba, » March and April, on August Ist.
ibe a Bit », May and June, on October Ist.
IV. + 3s »5 November and December, on April Ist.

The price is 12s.\per part for the edition with coloured, and 3s. per part for
that with uncoloured Plates.

‘ A

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS |

O¥ THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY
OF LONDON.

FOR THE YEAR

1876.

PART II.

CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN

MARCH anp APRIL.

AUGUST Ist, 1876.

PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY,
SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER-SQUARE.
' LONDON:

MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, READER, AND DYER,
PATERNOSTER-ROW.

[Price Twelve Shillings.]

LIST OF CONTENTS.

PART II.—1876.

March 7, 1876.

Page
The Secretary. Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in February 1876 .... 273
Mr. Selater. Exhibition of and remarks on a skin of a female of Anderson’s Pheasant .... 274

Dr. Giinther. Exhibition of specimens of Antechinus minutissimus, from Rockhampton,
Australia

sth wipro leteletle! praiel scale ce >\ea Wlele ® ©..0 « 0 lvlole 0's’ (0/e' s.e\sla.s is ole! 9p. 010 \ehs py oe oes phere lee

Dr. Ginther. Exhibition of and observations on specimens of a species of Palythoa

sete

1. On the Anatomy of Aramus scolopaceus. By A. H. Garrop, M.A., F.Z.8., Prosector to
the Society

er rr ee ee cd

2. On the past and present Geographical Distribution of the Large Mammals of South
Africa. By T. EB. Bucwugy, B.A., F.ZS. ....-....00-- Pies acta Rnb kee OW ete Copter tetas

8. Notes on Entozoa.—Part IV. By T. Srencer Coszoxp, M.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., Correspon-

275

©
~

dent of the Academy of Sciences of Philadelphia. (Plate XXI1.) .......... ehictere 2
4, Supplementary Notes on Cervus mesopotamicus. By Sir Vicror Brooks, Bart., F.Z.8. 298
5. On Cervus schomburgki (Blyth). By Sir Victor Broozr, Bart., F.Z.S. «.., B04

March 21, 1876.

Mr. Sclater. Exhibition of and remarks upon a series of skins of the Parrots of the Fiji
Islands obtained by Mr. E. L. Layard, ¥.Z.8. ..... sierra ris AS aSERCOAG Ac

1. Descriptions of Lepidoptera from the Collection of Lieut. Howland Roberts. By Anruur
G. Butter, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &c. (Plate XXII.)

or a ee) Ce er er a iy

Contents continued on page 3 of wrapper.

1876.] THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 273

March 7, 1876.
Dr. A. Ginther, F.R.S., V.P., in the Chair.

The Secretary read the following report on the additions to the
_ Society’s Menagerie during the month of February, 1876 :—
_ The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena-

_. 'gerie during the month of February was 67, of which 36 were ac-

quired by presentation, 21 by purchase, 5 by exchange, 3 were bred
in the Gardens, and 2 were received on deposit. The total number of
departures during the same period, by death and removals, was 111.

The most noticeable additions during the month of February were
as follows :—

1. An example of the very singular Cervine form lately described
by Mr. Swinhoe in the Society’s ‘ Proceedings’ as Lophotragus mi-
chianus (P. Z. S. 1874, p. 452).

This animal was procured by Mr. A. Michie, of Shanghai (the
discoverer of the species), in the Ningpo district of China, and for-
warded to this country for sale. We purchased it from his agent on
the 12th ult. for £35.

The general appearance of the animal is very well indicated in the
plate (P. Z.S. 1874, pl. lix.) prepared by Mr. Keulemans from

) 2
4)

4 Qo ;

(fee

Lophotragus michianus ove
Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1876, No. XVIII. 18

274 DR. A. GUNTHER ON A SPECIES OF PALYTHOA. [Mar. 7,

the flat skin upon which Mr. Swinhoe founded the species, and which
is now in the Royal Zoological Museum of Berlin.

The animal is a male; and the canines project from the sides of
the mouth as in Hydropotes. There are no external antlers; but
there are hard projecting cores, sensible to the touch, beneath the
elongated hairs which form a flattened disk on the forehead, as will
be seen by the drawing (see woodcut, p. 273) which I exhibit.

Our Prosector will, no doubt, give us a complete account of this
most interesting form when our specimen dies. ;

2. Two White-backed Pigeons (Columba leuconota), from the
Himalayas, purchased 16th February ; and

3. A Narrow-barred Pigeon (Macropygia leptogrammica), from
Celebes, purchased 16th February. Both these Pigeons are new to
the collection.

4, A Bay Bamboo-Rat (Rhizomys badius), from India, received
the 16th February.

We have to thank Mr. Wood-Mason, of the Indian Museum,
Calcutta, for his present of an example of this interesting Rodent,
which is quite new to us.

5: A female Anderson’s Kaleege (Zuplocamus andersoni), from
Burmah, presented by Mr. W. Jamrach, 18th February.

We have not previously received examples of this species of
Kaleege, which is curiously inte:mediate between E. nycthemerus and
LE. lineatus.

Mr. Sclater exhibited a skin of a female of Anderson’s Pheasant
(Euplocamus andersoni, Elliot, P. Z.S. 1871, p. 137), which had been
obtained alive from Burmah by Mr. W. Jamrach, along with another
specimen of the same sex, which he had presented to the Society’s
collection.

Mr. Sclater stated that there could be little doubt that the Phasv-
anus crawfurdii, J. E. Gray, in Griffith’s Cuv. Anim. Kingdom, vol.
viii. p. 27, established upon a drawing in the possession of Mr.
Crawfurd (which Mr. Gould had reproduced in his ‘ Birds of Asia’
as the female of EZ. prelatus) was really the female of EL. anderson,
which species should therefore, in strictness, be called Huplocamus
crawfurdi.

Dr. Giinther exhibited specimens of Antechinus minutissimus, ob-
tained by one of Herr Godeffroy’s collectors in the neighbourhood of
Rockhampton, Australia,—and called special attention to the great
development of the genital organs, even in the young when in the
pouch, by which the sexes might be distinguished at this early stage.

Dr. Gimther also exhibited, and made observations on, specimens
of aspecies of Palythoa (probably P. actinella of Oscar Schmidt) pa-
rasitic on a Sponge, which had been obtained at Naples by Dr. Bal-
four, and belonged to the Cambridge Museum.

The following papers were read :—

1876.] | ON THE ANATOMY OF ARAMUS SCOLOPACEUS. 275

1. On the Anatomy of Aramus scolopaceus.
By A. H. Garrop, M.A., F.Z.S., Prosector to the Society.

[Received February 7, 1876.]

It being very seldom that an opportunity occurs for the study of
the anatomy of Aramus, a form the exact relations of which are but
little understood, I take the opportunity of describing this bird from
a female specimen which reached the Society’s Gardens alive, and
died, much emaciated, within a few days, on Oct. 7, 1875. I may
mention that the generic name Scolopaz was applied to it by Lin-
neeus, and that Lichtenstein termed it Rallus gigas. Mr. G. R.
Gray * places it among the Rallinz, next to Rallus aquaticus, whilst
Messrs. Sclater and Salvin t include it among the Alectorides, together
with Lurypyga, Cariama, and Psophia. It seems to me, however, that,
considering its different anatomical features, it is most intimately re-
lated to Grus, which, with it, is not distant from Ibis, Platalea, and
Eurypyga.

With reference to the skeleton of Aramus, it may be mentioned
that it is figured as a whole in Eyton’s ‘Osteologia Avium’ (pl. xiv.
K), and in the same valuable work (pl. 27. fig. 2) a front view of
the sternum, and a back view of tie pelvis are given, though the plate
is incorrectly lettered.

In Audubon’s ‘ Ornithological Biography ’ + a full account of the
viscera is given, with a woodcut of the alimentary canal. The author
considers the bird to be most intimately allied to the Rails.

Aramus is a strongly schizorhinal bird$; in other words, the
openings of the external osseous nares extend further backwards
than the posterior ends of the nasal processes of the premaxille. In
this respect it agrees with Grus, Zurypyga, and the Limicole, but
not with the Rallidee, nor with Cariama, nor with Psophia. -

As in Grus, Ibis, and Platalea, the lachrymal bones do not blend
with the region of the skull where they are attached; in the true
Limicole they do so. The palate is schizognathous, the maxillo-
palatines long, the vomer pointed, and the pterygoids out-spreading
at both ends exactly as in Grus. As in that genus, also, there is a
pair of occipital foramina, like those in Ibis, Platalea, and the Limi-
cole; but these do not occur in the Rallidze, nor in Cariama, nor in
Psophia. (Figs. 1, 2, and 3, p. 276, illustrate these points.)

The sternum is completely Gruine, as are the other parts of its
skeleton.

The pterylosis of Aramus has been fully investigated by Nitzsch ||,
who found that it agrees exactly with that of Psophia and
Grus, and with no other bird. The peculiarities of the feathers
themselves led that illustrious naturalist to place it with the Rails,
from which it differs in more than one pterylographic particular.

* Hand-list of Birds, vol. iii. p. 58.
t Nomenclator Avium Neotropicalium, p. 141.
t Vol. iv. p. 547 et seg. § Vide P. Z. 8. 1873, p. 33.
|] Ray Society’s English Translation, p. 125. Pe
18

276 ON THE ANATOMY OF ARAMUS SCOLOPACEUS. [Mar. 7,

There are two carotid arteries; and the right jugular vein, as is
frequently the case, is considerably the larger of the two.

The trachea is simple (the specimen is a female); the syrinx is
somewhat dilated; and a single pair of intrinsic muscles is continued
to the bronchial half-ring.

Fig. 1. Skull of Aramus scolopaceus, palatal view.
2. Ditto ditto lower jaw.
3. Ditto ditto top view.

Myologically, the ambiens muscle is strong; the femoro-caudal
(A) is absent, the accessory femoro-caudal (B) is thin and small ;
the semitendinosus (X) and the accessory semitendinosus (Y) are
fairly developed. Its muscle-formula* is therefore B,XY. In aii the
Rallidee the formula is AB,XY, the femoro-caudal being large. In

* Vide P. Z, 8. 1874, p. 111.

1876.] ON THE DISTRIBUTION OF SOUTH-AFRICAN MAMMALS. 277

Psophia it is B,XY, as it is in Cariama (in Chunga B is also ab-
sent). In Balearica regulorum the formula is XY; in Grus anti-
gone it is AB,XY, the femoro-caudal being reduced to almost a
thread ; in Anthropoides virgo the formula is AB,XY, as it is in
Ibis and Platalea, as well as in Eurypyga. Myology therefore
does not militate against the Gruine affinities of dramus.

Further, as in Grus, the tensor fascia covers the biceps cruris ;
the diceps humeri muscle sends a special belly into the patagium ;
the expansor secundariorum is Ciconine ; the obturatcr internus has
a triangular origin*.

Alimentary canal.—The tongue is 23 inches long, very slender,
quite smooth, nearly cylindrical, and tapering toa fine point in front.
It has a slight papillary fringing at its posterior edge. The wsopha-
gus is very capacious, although no crop is developed. The proven-
triculus is zonary ; its glands are cylindrical and short. Between it
and the gizzard is a capacious dilatation of the termination of the
gullet, lined, apparently, with squamous epithelium, the volume of
which is greater than that of the interior of the gizzard itself. The
gizzard is not large, and its muscular walls are not thick. The diver
has the left lobe a little larger than the right, a condition far from
common among birds; the gall-bladder is present. The average-
sized, or slightly narrow, ttestines are 40 inches in length. The
ceca are somewhat dilated toward their blind ends; they are 2 and
27 inches long. They are peculiar in being situated laterally, and
close together, instead of opposite one another, a condition approxi-
mated to in most of the non-columbine Schizorhinal birds, and in
them only; the small intestine therefore enters the colon by a
lateral, slit-like opening. In the Cranes the czeca are generally be-
tween 5 and 6 inches long ; and they being so much larger, the com-
parative size is much the same. In Ibis, Platalea, and Eurypyga
they are very much shorter; in Cariama they measure 10 inches,
whilst in Psophia their length is much the same as in Aramus.

2. On the past and present Geographical Distribution of the
Large Mammals of South Africa. By T. E. Buck.ey,
B.A, F.2.8.

[Received February 7, 1876.]

After I had made arrangements for an expedition to South Africa,
principally for the purpose of sport, in 1873, the University of
Cambridge offered me a grant from the “ Wort’s Fund,” on the
condition that I should send home a collection of specimens equal
in value to the amount of the grant, and should also make a report
to the Vice-Chancellor, detailing any observations that I thought of
sufficient importance to be preserved.

As the larger Mammals are yearly receding further into the interior,
and as their total extinction is only a question of time, I thought L

* For further reference to these points, vide P. Z. 8. 1876, p. 195.

278 MR. T. E. BUCKLEY ON THE GEOGRAPHICAL — [ Mar. 7,

could not do better than set down the limits of each of the most
important species at the time of my visit, as accurately as it was in
my power to ascertain them, adding thereto such particulars as could
be obtained from the accounts of former travellers, as to the range
of the species at the time of their visit.

Considering the number of people who year by year visit South
Africa for the purpose of shooting, it is wonderful how very little,
comparatively speaking, has been written on its zoology. Many
books on the sport to be met with there have appeared at different
times ; and from these a great deal may be learnt ; but this informa-
tion requires a vast amount of collating and sifting. On the larger
mammals, of which we are now alone speaking, Harris’s ‘ Wild
Animals of Southern Africa’ is perhaps the best book, giving, as it
does, a plate and description of all those met with by the author.
Dr. A. Smith’s work on the Zoology of South Africa gives us de-
scriptions and plates of only ten of the larger animals: the plates
are decidedly inferior to those of Harris ; and the colouring in one or
two instances is wrong. These two are the latest works on South-
African mammals; and when we consider the enormous number of
animals killed year by year there, and the consequent impending ex-
termination of these creatures, some of which even now are extremely
scarce, it is to be hoped that some one will before long take in hand
to set forth their complete life-history.

I am glad to say that now there are game-laws both in Cape
colony and Natal, which, late though it is, will at least preserve a
remnant of some of the larger animals, such as the Hartebeest and
Eland. Of the smaller Antelopes there are still plenty ; the.existence
of any of the larger species in the colonies will be noticed under
the proper heading, when I could get reliable information concern-
ing them.

The Tsetse fly has been of great service in preserving animals,
comparatively few hunters caring to shoot on foot in such a hot
climate. This is the reason why the Zulu country has so long
held large game, its southern boundary being only some seventy
miles from D’Urban; but now, since it has become the fashion for
the hunters to arm natives to shoot for them, even in this country,
favoured as it is by abundance of grass, water, and shelter, extermi-
nation is going on rapidly—so much so that a friend writes me
saying that after next winter he does not think that it will be worth
his while going to hunt in his old haunts; and yet this very country
only some ten or fifteen years ago swarmed with game to an incredible
extent. The result of the extermination of the game is that the
Tsetse disappears, thus giving a greater extent of country for the
rearing of domestic cattle.

The Tsetse appears to be found mostly where there are large herds
of buffaloes, and is said, in some cases, even to migrate with these
animals ; at other times it appears a very local insect,—in one case a
well-beaten road up country passing very close to its haunts; and, I
believe, at night cattle may be driven through these localities with per-
fect safety, care being taken to be outside before the break of day.

1876.] DISTRIBUTION OF SOUTH-AFRICAN MAMMALS. 279

My route from Natal was as follows: —I left Pietermaritzburg on
the 15th of May, crossed the Drakenberg range on the 6th of June;
on the 8th the bullocks were lost, which delayed me about a week ;
but I reached Pretoria on the 28th of June. I left again on the
night of the 30th, and struck the Crocodile or Limpopo river on the
10th of July, and travelled slowly along the river for the sake of
some shooting. Bamangwato was not reached until about the 5th or
6th of August. I was detained here about a week, but at last left
on the 12th. Unfortunately I took a wrong road on the way to the
Tati, and had to retrace my tracks for some considerable way, which
delayed my arrival there until the 28th of August. I left the Tati
on the Ist of September, and reached the Samouqui river, my
furthest point, about the 12th of the month. The route on my re-
turn journey was precisely the same, but took less time, owing to the
much lighter load to be carried down. My waggon arrived in Pieter-
maritzburg on the 3rd of January 1874.

My stay in the country having been very short, from the end of
April till the middle of the following January, and not much more
than the half of that time having been spent in a game country, my
notes cannot be very extensive. I shot twenty-two different species
of animals, and saw others,—a fair number, considering I had to do
all my shooting on foot, and with very little aid from the natives.

I have been aided in my notes by friends whose experience was
much greater than mine, and also by such books as I could get ;
but, being so far away from a library, there were, of course, many to
which I could not refer: this must be taken as an excuse for many
errors into which I may have fallen. I have purposely avoided
giving descriptions of any animals, as they are mostly described in
Harris’s book from actual specimens.

In the Table exhibited (see pp. 291, 292) I have endeavoured to
give the geographical distribution of these larger animals in Southern
Africa, as far as I could gather it, both at present and formerly ; but
I could get no information concerning Natal and the countries imme-
diately south of it, though it is probable that the coast-line, where it
represents the Zulu country, would be occupied by the same animals.

Apparently most of the South-African Antelopes have their repre-
sentatives to the north and west; thus the Waterbuck is repre-
sented by the Sing-Sing on the west, and the Méhédet of Baker
on the north. Many other instances might be mentioned. Some
species, again, are common to the whole of Africa, as the Giraffe and
one species of Black Rhinoceros; others, again, are very limited in
range, as the Blesbock.

The horns of all species of Antelope, whatever their shape may
be hereafter, are the same when young, and consist of two small
stumps three or four inches long, standing almost straight up.
While the horns are growing, especially during s summer, their bases are
quite soft, and for a “considerable way up can be pulled off in flakes.

1, ELepHas arricanus. (The Elephant.)
Excepting the few still preserved by Government in the Kayan

280 MR. T. E. BUCKLEY ON THE GEOGRAPHICAL [Mar. 7,

Forest, the Elephant may be considered extinct in the Cape colony
and Natal. Seven and twenty years ago it was found in the bush
around the town of D’Urban in the Natal colony, but now is
almost exterminated even in the Zulu and Amaswazi countries.
In the great reed-beds that exist in the neighbourhood of Santa-
Lucia Bay in the former country, a few still remain, owing to the
almost impossibility of getting at them; and in the Amaswazi
country a few, I am told, are occasionally found under the Bombo
Mountains. North of Delagoa Bay they get more numerous, espe-
cially so, I am told, in Umsila’s country. In the Matabili land the
Elephant is to a certain extent preserved, no one being allowed to
hunt these animals without the permission of the king. North of the
Zouga they are still fairly numerous; but with the immense number
of hunters and traders, the destruction must be great indeed, and
bids fair to exterminate the race in South Africa altogether, espe-
cially when we consider the very slow rate at which these creatures
increase, and that cows and bulls are shot indiscriminately.

North of the Zambesi the Elephant is found through Central
Africa into Abyssinnia, and along parts of the west coast. In some
places they occur in vast herds, as seen by Livingstone (Zambesi
Tributaries, p. 134), cows and bulls together. The number of
trees destroyed by these animals is enormous; along the rivers
Makloetze and Shashai, in the Bamangwuto district, the thick
mimosa-groves which border their banks have been altogether de-
stroyed by the ravages of these creatures.

The tusks of the cow Elephant are much thinner than those of
the bull; but the hollow inside does not extend so far down. The
largest tusk I heard of was one brought from Lake Ngami in 1872;
this weighed 170 lb.; but its fellow was rotten and worthless. I
have seen a pair weighing 90 lb. each; but such a perfect pair are,
I believe, not common. Be

When Elephants are disturbed. by shooting now, they often go
great distances, passing through a large extent of thirst-land to a
distant water; so fearful are they of fire-arms.

2. Rurtnoceros KEITLoa. (The Keitloa Rhinoceros.)

3. Rurinoceros simus. (The White Rhinoceros.)

Of African Rhinoceroses there are at least three distinct species, the
fourth, R. oswellii, being, I fancy, rather a doubtful one. The two
‘‘black”’ species are It. bicornis and FR. keitloa; they may at once
be distinguished from the White Rhinoceros by their overhanging
upper lip, which enables them to grasp the bushes on which they,
I believe, exclusively feed. The only black species I met with was
R. keitloa, observed on two occasions—once singly, another time an
old female and her calf about half-grown, which latter was secured.
Owing to incessant persecution these animals are now getting scarce,
eight Rhinoceroses only having been seen by our party. At one
time they must have been extremely common, judging from the
number of skulls seen lying about. Harris, in his description of R.

1876.] DISTRIBUTION OF SOUTH-AFRICAN MAMMALS. 281

simus, mentions having seen eighty of these animals in a day’s
march ; and on one occasion in the space of half a mile he saw
twenty-two and had to kill four in self-defence. A friend of mine
whom I met on his way down from the Zambesi, told me he had
only seen five, all R. sinus, and all of which he secured.

At one time it was not at all uncommon to see R. simus with the
anterior horu close on 3 feet and upwards in length ; now, however,
such animals are rare, most likely from the animal being shot down
before it arrived at its full size. The dung of the black and white
species differ materially ; for whereas that of the former is light-
coloured, more resembling that of an Elephant, that of the latter is
very dark and much softer: thus a hunier, should he not be ex-
perienced enough in “ spooring”’ to know which species he was after,
would immediately do so on seeing the dung. Each species of Rhi-
noceros drinks every night, as may be seen by going in the morning
to a waterhole, where their fresh spoor may be found, and the water
is generally churned up into a filthy mass of mud. After leaving the
water they go a long distance in Indian file should there be two or
three together, when they spread out and begin to feed. Having
had sight, by studying the wind and quietly (for a Rhinoceros is
very quick at hearing) placing one’s self near the line in which they
are advancing, one may get an easy shot at any distance.

Nearly every Rhinoceros is accompanied by a few individuals of
Buphaga africana, which rid it of its parasites and give it timely
warning of danger. When the animal runs, these birds accompany it,
hovering over it like flies above a horse’s head, uttering a note some-
thing like chirri-chirri-chit-chirri all the time. The White Rhi-
noceros may often be found standing under a tree in the open plains ;
and at such places the dung collects into enormous masses, showing
that the beast comes to the same tree day after day ; when the mass
gets very high the animal levels it with its horn. The Boreli (R.
bicornis) always lives in the bush, and is one of the few animals that
will charge and hunt a man unprovoked ; this species often has a sore
place behind the shoulder, which is supposed by the natives to be one
of the causes of its savageness. R. heitloa is generally known to
the hunters by the name of the Blue Rhinoceros.

4, Eauus auacea. (The Quagga.)

The animal commonly so called, is Burchell’s Zebra; the true
Quagga I never saw, though Harris mentions it as occurring in great
herds, but only to the south of the Vaal river. Whether, since his
time, it has become extinct or not is a question ; but the few ani-
mals of this genus that were seen on the open plains were all clearly
Burchell’s Zebra. Some few years ago the three species of this genus
were in little repute for their skins as compared with the Wilde-
beest and Blessbok; but of late years it has been discovered that
they are of great use for, I believe, connecting-bands for machinery;
at any rate their value increased so much that they have been shot
down, until you may go for a week through the “ High Veldt” and
not see one, although there will be thousands of other animals.

282 MR. T. E. BUCKLEY ON THE GEOGRAPHICAL [ Mar. 7,

5. Eauus montanus. (The Zebra.)

This species is said still to occur in the Hottentot Mountains near
Cape-town ; but it was not observed by us, nor did we see a skin
during the time we were in Africa; however, as we did not ascend
any mountains, where alone they are said to be found, we had no
opportunity of judging whether or not they were rare.

6. Equus surcHELLI. (Burchell’s Zebra.)

One of the commonest animals throughout South Africa, more espe-
cially in the wooded parts. A few years ago it was equally common
on the plains even in the north of Natal, but now has either been
shot out or driven back by the hunters. This is the Quagga par
excellence of South-African sportsmen, by whom it is killed, both
for its skin, which is now extremely valuable, and also for its meat,
which is one of the most palatable morsels you can give to your
native servants; but there is a sort of smell about it which, with its
dark colour and yellow fat, make it any thing but tempting to most
white men. These animals are generally found, at least in the bush,
in small parties of from eight to ten, frequently in company with Blue
Wildebeests. The largest troop I ever saw contained probably about
forty individuals. They are generally in good condition. This species,
I believe, when possible, drinks every day; I have seen them at the
water at midday, and also coming down again to it in the evening.

Their geographical range is wide: Speke and Grant found them
north of Uganda; and at the present time they are common animals
in the Zulu country. Their note is a sort of bark, like the Dutch
pronunciation of the word Quagga, whence, most probably, came
the name. They utter this constantly after being disturbed by a
shot, especially if one is wounded and lags behind.

Out of five of these animals shot in one herd, there were indivi-
duals showing every variation of colour and marking, from the yellow
and chocolate stripes, to the pure black and white, the stripes in
some ceasing above the hock, and in others being continued di-
stinctly down to the hoof. I saw a young foal in September, the
only one I remember to have seen.

7. GAzELLA EvCHORE. (The Springbuck.)

Still common in Cape colony, and more or less abundant through
South Africa up to the Zambesi; it does not, however, occur in
the Zulu and Amaswazi countries. Small herds of this species are
generally seen mixed up with the Blesbocks and Wildebeests.
When disturbed they go off in a series of bounds, opening the
white line that extends halfway down the back to the rump, making
the animals appear as if wholly white. When they come to a road,
they usually spring right across it. Both male and female have
horns, those of the latter, however, being much smaller and thinner.
The calves are dropped about November, and are then cream-
coloured. Gordon Cumming gives an interesting account of the
periodical migrations of this Antelope in his work on South-African
hunting. :

1876.] DISTRIBUTION OF SOUTH-AFRICAN MAMMALS. 283

8. Aipyceros MELAMpPUus. (The Pallah.)

This graceful Antelope occurs in all suitable localities, from the
Zulu country far into Equatorial Africa. In the winter it is found
in large herds ; but in the summer these generally break up ; and they
may often be seen in family parties of three—an old ram and doe,
and a young one. They seem to be fond of the vicinity of water, far
from which I never observed them; when disturbed, they often
bound off like a Springbuck. The male alone has horns, which are
large for the size of the animal; the skin is much used by the natives
for making karosses, at which the Bechuanas are very expert. The
Pallah is essentially a wood-loving animal, never being found in the
open country. Dr. Burchell seems to have been the first to make
this species correctly known; in the second volume of his ‘ Travels,”
p- 301, he gives a description of one that was obtained near Kuruman,
where he first met with it.

9. NANOTRAGUS OREOTRAGUS. (The Klipspringer.
fo)

The Klipspringer occurs in greater or less abundance throughout
the whole of South Africa. I met with them in the Matabili coun-
try, haunting the rocky mounds that rise up so suddenly from the
level ground, called ‘ Kopjes”’ by the Dutch, generally in small
parties of three. Their hair, which is long and bristly, is much used
by the colonists for stuffing saddles. When alarmed at the foot of
a Kopje, they at once ascend to the top; should, however, the hill
be a small one, they soon take off across the country if pursued.

The Klipspringer does not invariably stay among rocks and high
ground, though it always remains close by, as on three occasions I
found them on the level ground at the foot of the stony rises that
are so common in the African bush.

10. NanorraGus TRAGULUS. (The Steinbock.)

This species was very common after passing Pretoria, the capital
of the Transvaal, into the Matabili country; it is found in the
Zulu and in Damara land, and seems spread through the whole
country south of the Zambesi. They live either singly or in pairs,
often in the driest situations, as they appear to require very little
water.

One that I surprised suddenly in the sandy bed of a river lay close
like a hare in its form until it considered me too near, when it ran
off; they almost invariably stop, however, when they have gone a
certain distance—a habit which often leads to their destruction.

The Steinbock feeds in the early morning, when it may often be
seen creeping among the bushes; during the middle of the day it
lies in a sort of form, and does not stir again until evening.

11. CePHALOPHUS GRIMMIA. (The Duiker.)

The Duiker is met with through Natal and the Zulu country up
to the Matabili country, but is not mentioned by either Andersson or
Baines as occurring in Damara land. It is generally found in the
bush-country solitary ; when disturbed it rarely stands again, as a

284 MR. T. E. BUCKLEY ON THE GEOGRAPHICAL __[ Mar. 7,

Steinbock does, but goes off at once; when wounded it screams
like a hare. Like the Steinbock the Duiker lives in the most arid
country, seeming to be quite independent of water.

12. Cornus ELLIPSIPRYMNUS. (The Waterbuck.)

A common species, extending from the Zulu country through the
east of Equatorial Africa into Abyssinia, as mentioned by Grant and
Baker. It seems never to be found far from water, through which
it does not hesitate to go when alarmed ; it lives in herds of from
three or four to as many as twenty, though the old males generally
live a solitary life, at least not more than one being found with a
herd of females and young. The younger males herd by themselves,
as I have shot two out of a small lot of six or seven, their horns then
not being more than four or five inches in length. The females are
hornless. The Waterbuck is found abundantly through the Zulu
and Amaswazi countries up to the Limpopo and Mariqua, which
seem to be its boundary in a south-west direction ; it is found on the
Zambesi, and at least as far to the west as the Botletlie river, where
Chapman mentions killing one ; but here its place is mostly occupied
by thé Leché. The flesh of the Waterbuck is so coarse, poor, and
tasteless that even the natives do not care for it. From the white
ring round its rump the Dutch have given it the name of Kringhat.

13. SrrepsiceRos kubDv. (The Koodoo.)

Once common in the Cape colony, the Koodoo, unless there be a
very small remnant indeed, is not found now nearer than the Zulu
country. Here it yet holds its ground in spite of the yearly per-
secution of the hunters, by whom it is killed on account of the value
of its skin, which is fine, but at the same time tough and durable. It
has a wide range, being found through Central Africa into Abyssinia,
as recorded by Speke and Baker ; but it is remarkable that the finest
specimens come from the Zulu country, even animals killed near the
Zambesi not having such fine horns ; possibly this may be accounted
for by the Zulu country possessing better pasturage. The males
alone possess horns; the females and young go about in small herds
of seven and eight, sometimes one old male accompanying them ;
this would probably be in the rutting-season ; I have also seen a small
herd of young males only. This species frequents the bush country
exclusively, and seems to prefer that part where there are many stony
rises ; the tips of the horns of the old males glance in the sun almost
like the points of bayonets. The Koodoo is supposed to be able to
do with less water than many of the other antelopes ; but I have seen
them drinking in the middle of the day ; they are difficult animals
to spoor, as they feed in a scattered manner, sometimes returning
on their own tracks a short distance, in a way different from other
antelopes; young calves well grown were seen following their dams
in September.

14. Oreas canna. (The Eland.)
Of all antelopes inhabiting Southern Africa the Eland is the one

1876.] DISTRIBUTION OF SOUTH-AFRICAN MAMMALS. 285

most liable to extermination’; easily ridden down, the best and fattest
of all animals, the skin of value as well, it is year by year diminish-
ing in numbers. Throughout my travels I only saw them on two
occasions, aud never obtained a specimen; I have at different times
seen their fresh spoor (which resembles that of the buffalo, but is
rather smaller and rounder) in the driest spots through which we
passed ; and it is said they require very little water. Harris speaks
of these animals as occurring in vast droves in the open country
south of the Vaal river; now tke Eland is only to be found in the
more remote wooded country. A few yet remain in certain parts
of Natal, one locality being Bushman’s River, where, luckily, they
are now carefully preserved.

15. TraGeLapHus ANGAsI. (The Inyala.)

This fine Bush-buck inhabits the bush bordering the sea-coast
along the Zulu and Amaswazi countries, from the Inyalazi river (its
southern boundary), as far north at least as Delagoa Bay, probably
beyond this. It appears to be very local, never, as far as I could
hear from the hunters, being found out of this limit. The Inyala lives
in small herds, the old rams being generally solitary ; but the younger
ones accompany the females. They inhabit the very thickest bush.

16. AuceLapHus cAAMA. (The Hartebeest.)

Why the Hartebeest should have become so rare is a matter of
conjecture ; but from being one of the commonest animals through-
out the Cape colony (according to Harris, up to the tropic of
Capricorn), it is now one of the rarest of the antelopes. We observed
it only on three or four occasions, once just before reaching the Cro-
codile River, and once or twice in the colony of Natal, where, being
preserved, it is now becoming fairlycommon. At the time of Harris’s
visit to South Africa it seems to have been extremely abundant,
mingling with the vast herds of Blesbocks and Wildebeestes. A few
are met with about the Bamangwato hills; Col. Grant mentions
having met with this species as well as 4. lichtensteini in Equatorial
Africa. A friend tells me, however, that he never met with it from
Shoshong (the capital of the Bechuanas) to the Zambesi. It is not
mentioned by Baines, Andersson, or Chapman as occurring in South-
west Africa. In the south-east, again, a few still remain in the Zulu
country, as well as in Natal; but I could not hear of it as occurring
in the Amaswazi country, where its place is taken by the Sassabye.
The Hartebeest prefers the open country or where the bush is, at
best, very scanty : the three or four we saw near the Crocodile River
were very shy, not allowing us to approach nearer than five or six
hundred yards.

17. ALCELAPHUS LUNATUS. (The Sassabye.)

Although, in Harris’s time, the Sassabye appears to have been
common on the plains, at the present day it is essentially a bush-
loving animal. According to Dr. O. Smith the Sassabye was rarely
known to advance to the south of Latakoo ; at present its southern

286 MR. T. E. BUCKLEY ON THE GEOGRAPHICAL [Mar. 7,

limit appears to be the Amaswazi country ; along the Limpopo it is
very common, and continues so into the Matabili country up to the
Zambesi. The old males do not seem to associate with the females ;
nor do they appear so common, as out of nearly a dozen obtained by
us only two were males, and one of these was immature. We ob-
served very young calves in October. The Sassabye runs with a
peculiar gait, reminding one of a rocking-horse ; its shoulders are
very high, sloping away to the rump ; it does not seem to be a very
shy animal.

18. ALCELAPHUS ALBIFRONS. (The Blesbock.)

Persecuted though it is, the Blesbock still continues to hold its
ground, occurring through the Orange Free State and the Transvaal
in countless numbers. In the winter they migrate south, a straggler
coming even as low as Harrismith; in the summer, again, they go
north of the Vaal river. They do not seem ever to have occurred
much to the west of 24° east long., or north of 25° south latitude ;
on the east the Drakenberg range is the boundary. At one time
they were found in the Cape colony, but were scarce there even in
Gordon Cumming’s time: the extensive plains in the Orange Free
State and the Transvaal, however, were probably always the head-
quarters of this species. Why the Blesbock should still be so nume-
rous, and the Bontebock, D. pygarga, almost extinct whereas, accord-
ing to Harris, in 1836 it was almost as common as the Blesbock, is a
problem not easily solved, inhabiting as they did the same localities,
and feeding over the same ground. In habits, size, and appearance
the Bontebock is almost identical with the Blesbock ; yet out of the
vast herds of the former all that remain are a few individuals care-
fully preserved in the old colony near Cape l Agulhaz. The Blesbock
calves in November, the young at first being a sort of creamy brown
colour ; the males and females live together in the same herds : these,
when disturbed, invariably run up the wind, carrying their heads
down.

19. CarosLepas GNU. (The common Gnu.)

When Harris first entered the colony in 1836, the common Gnu
was met with in Graaf Reinet ; now, however, their numbers are so
much reduced by continued hunting, that it is not until we come to
about fifty miles south of the Vaal river that any are seen. In winter
a few wander to within ‘a few miles of Harrismith; but in summer
as we were coming to Natal we only saw them after crossing the
Vaal. On the 20th of June I saw quantities of Wildebeest and Bles-
bocks that were spreading themselves over the plains south of the
Vaal; and this is the time when they are most persecuted, as they
are then very poor in condition, and with a good horse may easily
be ridden down, especially in the early morning, when they are stiff
with the frost and cold. Their skins are valuable, and form one of
the chief exports of Natal; and their flesh is converted by the Dutch
boers into “beltong.” Both sexes have horns; but those of the
female are much lighter and do not meet so closely over the forehead.

1876.] DISTRIBUTION OF SOUTH-AFRICAN MAMMALS. 287

In summer the colour of their skin is a dark brown; but in winter this
turns to black. On taking out the brains when preserving a head
there is generally found a quantity of a large white maggot, more
like an exaggerated woodlouse than the common maggot; the Bles-
bock too seems equally afflicted with these creatures. In December
we observed lots of young calves; they resembled their mothers in
colour ; at this time the old bulls lead a solitary life, and seem to be
much tamer, as I one day walked up to two on open ground to within
one hundred and fifty yards, whereas they will scarcely allow one
within five hundred on ordinary occasions. This species is liable to
an epidemic which at times, I believe, makes great havoc amongst
them ; I saw a young one in this condition: all the hair was off as
if it had been burnt; and it was unable to rise. It is very amusing
to watch the antics of a herd when aroused or excited ; when ap-
proached to within five or six hundred yards they chase one another
round and round for a short time, stand, stare, and paw the ground,
then lashing their long white tails against their sides, set off as hard
as they can go. They goin herds of from eight to fifty; but I
never saw them in such masses as the Blesbocks. They exhibit a good
deal of curiosity ; three approached our waggon one day when out-
spanned close enough to allow of my shooting one of their number
from the waggon-box, where I was sitting writing.

Although the Orange Free State and the Transvaal are the head-
quarters of this animal, yet they are found considerably to the north
and west of this, as Chapman mentions meeting with this species on
the Chobi river, which is in 18° S. lat., and 25° E. long.; Baines
and Andersson mention it as common in some parts of South-west
Africa through which they travelled.

In summer the old males separate from the herds and live solitary.
At this time they fix on one spot, making a sort of lair, to which
they will return after feeding or being disturbed. This sometimes
leads to their destruction ; for if two or three men go together, the
old bull immediately gets up and goes away; on this one of the
party lies down in the spot lately occupied by the beast, the other
two then retire. The Wildebeest thinking every thing is now safe
goes quietly back to his particular spot, and is then shot at by the
man who is lying down.

20. CaroBLepas GorGON. (The Brindled Gnu.)

The Blue Wildebeest, as it is generally called in S. Africa, was at
one time found in abundance almost to the borders of Cape colony ;
but it does not seem to have entered it, according to Dr. Smith’s ac-
count of that animal; it is yet found in the Zulu country ; and, ac-
cording to Baines and Andersson, it is common in Damara-land. In
Col. Grant’s ‘Observations’ sent tothe Geographical Society he says: —
“This Gnu was found in large herds in Khutu, in the western borders
of Uyaramo. It inhabits the park-like country adjoining the river
Kingani, and was not seen after crossing the east coast range.” It isa
common species through S. Africa, very often being in company with
Burchell’s Zebra. About November the old bulls separate from the

288 MR. T. E, BUCKLEY ON THE GEOGRAPHICAL [Mar.7,

herds and go singly; one that I shot about that time had its head
plastered with mud, as if it had been using its horns on a bank, like
we see the Stags in Scotland during the rutting-season. At one time
the Blue Wildebeest inhabited the plains equally with the common
Gnu ; now, however, it is rarely seen except in the bush-country ; like
it, too, it generally makes one or two wheels round, when disturbed,
before it takes to flight.

21. Hrpporracus Equinus. (The Roan Antelope.)

This Antelope (except the Eland, the largest of the family) was at
one time, according to Dr. Smith, found within the Cape colony; but
now its furthest range south seems to be the Amaswazi country,
where it is still occasionally shot. It is probable that the Kalahari
desert is its south-western boundary, as it is not mentioned by either
Baines or Andersson in their works. Dr. Livingstone met with it in
large herds on the Leeba; and Schweinfurth shot it in the Djoor
district. The Roan Antelope is probably the rarest of the genus;
nowhere does it appear very common; Harris in his ‘ Southern Africa’
mentions killing several males of this species, but never seems to
have procured a female, as he says in his description of this animal
that it is hornless, a mistake copied also by Chapman ; this is not the
the case, as the female has horns almost as long as the male. The
only specimen I procured was shot standing in the middle of a sand
river in company with a solitary Sassabye. Both this and the Sable
Antelope will charge savagely when brought to bay; their cry of
danger or anger is a kind of hissing snort, different from that of other
antelopes. Their Bechuana name is “Qualata.” From the accounts
of natives this species seems to be most common in Umsila’s country,
which lies to the east of the Matabili.

22. HippoTracus NIGER. (The Sable Antelope.)

This splendid Antelope was first discovered in 1836 by Capt.
Harris on the Magaliesberg hills, where, it is said, one or two still
linger ; this would seem to be their southern limit, as the species is
not found in the Zulu or Amaswazi countries ; it is found however at
Zoutpansberg, in the north-east of the Transvaal, and probably would
be found to extend as far as the coast. To the west Livingstone
met with it on the river Leeba, which is in long. 23° E., lat. 12°
S.; but it is not mentioned by either Andersson or Baines as oc-
curring in the south-west. To the north, the head of a young one
was brought home by Speke, which Grant shot at Ukutu, which
would be near the latitude of Zanzibar. The Matabili country is per-
haps the locality where it is most numerous; we first met with traces
of it near the Makloutze river, where we saw the skin of a large male
in the possession of some natives. This species goes about in herds,
sometimes very large. I have seen about fifty together ; but there are
not many old males among them ; they are mostly females and young,
the adult males generally leading a solitary life. The females of
this species carry horns, but not so long as the old males: the colour
of an adult female is dark chestnut, white underneath, with a mane

1876.] DISTRIBUTION OF SOUTH-AFRICAN MAMMALS. 289

reaching to the shoulders ; the young are much lighter in colour,
whereas an old male is as black as jet. In running, the neck is
arched, which throws the horns forward. he Sable Antelope is
said to be able to defend itself from a Lion by striking sideways
with its powerful horns. Mr. Baines has informed me that he has
picked up horns covered with the hair and blood of a Lion. He
himself saw a dog pierced through from chest to flank by an old male
of this species that was wounded near his waggons.

23. Oryx carensis. (The Gemsbock.)

At one time common in Cape colony, Gordon Cumming having
killed it not far from Colesberg, the Oryx or Gemsbock is now, I
believe, restricted in that district to a locality not far from Cape
L’Agulhaz, where a small remnant are now carefully preserved. It
seems never at any time to have spread far to the east, at least not
to the Zulu and Amaswazi country, according to the testimony of
hunters there; nor does it seem to be common in, if even an inhabi-
tant of, the Transvaal. To the west of that country, however, it is
common, being found through Secheli’s and Sicomo’s territories.
The borders of the Kalahari desert, by the Zouga up to Lake Ngami,
and Damara Land seem to be the stronghold of this animal. Palatzi,
a small water-hole in the Bamangwato district, about 27° E., was
the only place where I myself observed this animal; but, being
disturbed by some Giraffes, I was unable to get ashot. From what
I learnt from hunters at Shoshong, however, it occurs east of this
again, but sparingly. A friend told me that he never observed this
species either going to or coming back from the Zambesi. I have
heard that the Matabili have no name for this animal; but the
Bechuana term is “Kokama.” A good description of the habits
of the Oryx is given by Andersson in his ‘Lake Ngami.’ It
may be mentioned that both sexes have horns, these being longer in
the female.

24. Busatus carrer. (The Cape-Buffalo.)

At one time abundant all through the Cape colony, the Buffalo
now is found no nearer than the Zulu country; and even there it is
getting very scarce. I heard that a small herd exists in Natal, near
Bushman’s River, where it is very strictly preserved. The largest
herd we met with consisted of at least two hundred individuals of
both sexes. The value of their hide has led to their gradual exter-
mination in the more accessible parts, and even far in the Matabjli
country there were hunters killing them for this only. One man, we
heard, had got upwards of a hundred in a month ; surely no animal
can long withstand such slaughter.

On approaching a herd the noise made by the animals rubbing
their horns against the trees is very audible, as well as a rumbling
sound. There is little danger in attacking a herd, as on the first shot
there is a general stampede; but a wounded animal and a solitary old
bull are very dangerous; often a solitary animal will charge down
in the direction of the smoke of a shot, or after running a certain

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. XIX. 19

290 MR. T. E, BUCKLEY ON THE GEOGRAPHICAL _ [ Mar. 7,

distance will turn out of the way, and, retiring quietly in the bush
alongside its own tracks, will charge on the unsuspecting hunter; and
there are few who have not had several narrow escapes from these
animals.

We saw very young calves of the Buffalo towards the end of Sep-
tember; and there was a full-grown foetus in a cow which we killed
about that time; when first born they are of a dark brown colour,
Buffaloes require water at least once in the twenty-four hours,
generally drinking at night, but sometimes in the afternoon; they
feed in the morning and evening, but lie still during the heat of the
day, in the shade.

Attempts have been made to domesticate the Cape-Buffalo, but
they appear to have resulted in failure; not only is the animal too
uncertain in temper, but, just as in the wild state it goes to rest
during the heat of the day in the shade, so it is that from this
reason the Buffalo is less hardy than the Ox, as it is unable to
work during a great part of the day.

25. CAMELOPARDALIS GIRAFFA. (Giraffe.)

From all accounts it would appear that the Giraffe never occurred
south of the Orange River. Sparrmann mentions it as occurring to the
north and north-west of the colony in 1772, but seems not to have
obtained a specimen. Paterson, in his ‘Journey,’ published in 1789,
mentions that a friend of his killed one just north of the Orange
River, which was devoured, however, by lions before he had a
chance of inspecting it. Later on he was more fortunate; and at
p. 125 he gives a description of one, and a very fair drawing also.
To the east, I am informed that, although no longer inhabiting
their country, the Zulus have a name for the Giraffe: their country
lies between 27° and 29° south ; so that 28° would be about their
southern range.

At present I should say that the Giraffe does not occur much
further south than 24°; it was about in this latitude, where the rozd
leaves the Limpopo river on the way to Shoshong, that we first saw
its spoor. Being rarely killed except from horseback, the Giraffe yet
holds its own in the “fly ’-country, where the Horse cannot enter,
and from its enormous length of neck is able to take good care of
itself from any one trying to stalk it on foot.

The flesh of a young cow is very good, and the marrow-bones
excellent ; its skin is used by the natives for making sandals, and
by hunters and traders for making reins.

The Giraffe lives in small herds of from three to twelve; it in-
habits the driest country, feeding on the young shoots of the mimosa
trees, and occasionally on a small green fruit resembling an apple.
When hunted they go off at a great pace, though it does not appear
so, their long necks oscillating like a pendulum, and their tails
screwed up over their rumps.

The following Table gives a summary of my conclusions :—

1876. |
NAME.

1. Elephas africanua,

2. Rhinoceros keitloa.

3. RB. simus

3a. R. bicornis.........

4. Hquus quagga ......

5. E, montanus

6. He. burchellii

. Gazella euchore ...

8. Alpyceros melam-

pus.
12, Cobus ellipsi-
prymnus.

12a. C. leechi

13. Strepsiceros kudu.

DISTRIBUTION OF SOUTH-AFRICAN MAMMALS.

PRESENT DISTRIBUTION *,

A few still found in Cape colony, in the
Knysna forest.

Found in the Zulu country, in places
similar to those of the White Rhino-
ceros.

Still found in the Zulu country about lat.
28°, not further west than long. 31°,
until we come to lat. 24°; there found
everywhere more or less commonly in
suitable localities.

Same as preceding species, but probably
extends westwards a little sooner than
it does,

Unknown apparently, the Quagga so often
mentioned by African hunters being
E. burchellii.

Said still to occur in the mountainous
districts of George (?), in the Cape
colony. Mentioned by Livingstone as
oceurring on the Zambesi in about
1861, and by Baines in Damara Land
in 1851; but its proper limits are very
imperfectly known, P

From 29° lat. in the Zulu country, in any
place where there is any large game,
but getting very scarce in the open
places of the Transvaal and Orange
Free State.

Still found through the colonies, but spa-
ringly in comparison to former years.
Abundant in grassy plains through the
Orange Free State and the Transvaal.

Still inhabits the Zulu country, getting
commoner the further north; very
common on the Limpopo from about
lat. 25° to the west. Mentioned by
Baines in 1861 as being found first in
long. 18°, lat. 22° 30’.

Found in the Zulu country; common on
the Mariqua and Limpopo rivers, lat.
25°. Probably does not extend much
further west than long. 24°.

To the west this species does not appa-
rently advance beyond 26° 30! lat. ;
probable southern limit long. 21°.

Found in the Zulu country, not west of
long. 30°, until we get between lat. 26°
and 25°.

291

Past DISTRIBUTION,

Common through the whole of 3. Africa:

No information, as this species was not
distinguished from R. bicornis until
about 1836 by Sir A. Smith. He
says, “‘ We may infer that the Keit-
loa has not, at least for many years,
been in the habit of generally ex-
Kents his range higher than about

at.”

25° 8.

First found by Burchell at Latakoo in
1812, lat. 27°, long. 24°, said by the
natives at that time to have occurred
frequently even south of this.

In 1652 common on Table Mountain; in
1774 found by Sparrmann in lat. 32°;
in 1812 mentioned by Dr. Burchell as
almost exterminated in that latitude.
Last one in Cape colony seen in 1840
in the Zuurberg and Addo bush (vide
Gordon Cumming’s book, vol. i. p. 48),
Zuurberg is in lat. 33°.

At one time very common through the
colony up to the Vaal river, which is
said by Harris to be its northern limit.
In his time it was very numerous in
the extensive plains north of the Vaal
river, in 1836,

Probably the same limits as now.

It is likely that this species only occurred
to the north of the Orange River, taking
the place of the real Quagga.

Extremely common everywhere in suit-
able localities, but not further east
than the Drakensberg Mountains.

Found by Burchell at Kuruman in lat.
27° 6!, long. 24° 39’, who calls it one of
the rarer Antelopes, probably did not
occur much to the south in this part
of Africa.

Seems not to have been found very far
from its present limits.

In the same localities as at present,

Common everywhere. A few in Cape
colony in the Zuurberg in 1849.

* Tn all cases when boundaries are mentioned, Petermann’s map of South Africa is referred fo.
*

14.

292

NAME.

Oveas canna

15. Tragelaphus an-

gasi,

16. Alcelaphus caama,

17.

1s,

A, Tunatus ...cc..

A. albifrons

18a. A. pygargue

19,

20,

~)
3

te
uo

Catoblepas gnit ...

OC. JOrgonr.......s008

. Hippotragus

equinus.

PEL, ARGON sent cvten ss

. Oryx capensis......

24, Bubalus caffer ...

25. Camelopardalis

giraffa.

MR. T. k. BUCKLEY ON THE GEOGRAPHICAL

PRESENT DISTRIBUTION.

A few preserved in Natal. Still found in
Zulu Land, but not west of long. 30°
until one comes to lat. 24°, or at least
but rarely. On the west coast in
Damara Land rarely seen so far south
as 20°, according to Andersson, 1897.

Inhabits the coast-line from the Inyalazi
river in Zulu Land, as far north at
least as Delagoa Bay.

In parts of Natal; a few seen in long. 27°,
lat. 25°; still a few found in the Zulu
country. Its spoor seen in long. 27°,
lat. 23°, but apparently getting very
rare.

In the Amaswazi Land, in lat. 27°; com-
mon on the Limpopo; ss Seine in
lat. 25°, goes as far west as long. 20°.

Western boundary 28° long., eastern the
Drakensberg range ; an occasional one
in winter found in the north of Natal.
Probable boundary of its northern
range lat. 35° 30'. Principal habitat
the open country in the Orange Free
State and the south of the Transvaal.

In the Cape colony, in Breida’s Farm at
Cape L’Agulhaz, apparently the only
place in which it is now found.

Not known apparently west of the Dra-
kensberg range of hills; occurs yet
through most parts of the Transvaal
and Orange Free State in the open
country; found again in lat. 22°, from
about long. 26°, into Damara Land..

Still found in the Zulu country. Does
not begin to extend its range west un-
til about lat. 25°.

Still found in the Amaswazi Land in lat.
27°; its probable range, besides, is most
likely the same as that of the Sable
Antelope.

Still said to linger on the Magaliesberg,
where they were first found by Harris
in 1836 or 1837. It probably does not
extend further westward than long.
23°, lat. 21°, or further south than late
26°, and there only sparingly.

A few still preserved at Cape L’Agulhaz,
in Cape colony, on Breda’s Farm. At
present its furthest range east seems
to be long. 27° nearly, yet found as far
north as Tat. 24°.

About lat. 28° in Zulu Land; a few still
preserved in Natal, in those places
not extending beyond 30° EK. long.
Begin to extend their range west about
the Tropic of Capricorn.

On the east coast abont lat. 25°, which is
the probable latitude through 8. Africa

Mar. 7,

Past DISTRIBUTION.

Common through 8. Africa.

Probably the same as at present.

Common everywhere.

First found about Latakoo in lat. 27°,
long. 25°, by Dr. Burchell.

In other

Found sparingly in the colony.
oundaries were the same

respects its
as at present.

According to Harris, its limit north ap-
pears to have been 28° lat.; but its
principal habitat was, according to the
same author, the extensive grassy
plains south of the Vaal river.

In much the same situations as now, but
came much farther north,

Apparently never crossed the Vaal river
into the colony, but common in all
suitable localities to the north of it.

Aeouniiog to Dr. Smith, once found in

the old colony ; but how far north is
not known for certain. Gordon Cum-
ming met with it just to the north of
the Vaal river.

The same as at present.

Found commonly in the Cape colony,
but probably never further east than
its present limit, being more of a
western animal; or probably that part
as os country was more suited to its
habits.

Common through all S, Africa.

About lat. 28°, to the west of long. 24°.
The Giraffe probably never crossed the
Orange River to the south.

1876.] | DISTRIBUTION OF SOUTH-AFRICAN MAMMALS. 293

In this Table, when latitude and longitude are mentioned, south
latitude and east longitude are to be understood. When a species is
stated to be common everywhere, suitable localities must be under-
stood.

I have endeavoured to make this Table as accurate as possible ;
but there is little very recent information of the south-west parts,
Baines’s ‘ Explorations’ in 1862 being the latest.

There is also no information to be got of the great Kalahari
Desert, whither I believe many animals go during the rainy season,
and where they are comparatively safe from pursuit, except from the
Bushmen.

I have taken lat. 18° as my northern limit of S. Africa.

The following list of the specimens which I sent home, and which
are now in the Museum of Zoology and Comparative Anatomy of the
University of Cambridge, has been drawn up by J. W. Clark, M.A.,
F.Z.S., Superintendent of the Museum.

Care Burrato (Bubalus caffer), 3, skeleton.

Warer-Bucx (Cobus ellipsiprymnus), 3, skeleton. An unusually
fine skeleton, with skin, of a completely adult animal.

Roan AnrELorE (Hippotragus equinus), 3, skeleton, with skin.

Impauua (AZpyceros melampus), 3, skeleton. The skeleton is of
a very old animal. With it were sent a skin, also of a male,
and a skin of a female.

BrRINDLED GNU or

Be Saris baa ie (Catoblepas gorgon), 3, skeleton, adult.

et aeie i ii | (Alcelaphus lunatus), 3, skeleton.
Koopoo (Strepsiceros kudu), 3, skeleton.

Exanp (Oreas canna), ¢, skeleton.

Inyaa (Tragelaphus angasii), 2, skin.

BurcHexi’s Zesra (Equus burchellii), skeleton, with skin.
Lion (Felis leo), 9, skeleton.

Sprorrep Hyana (Hyena crocuta), 3, skeleton.

Sitver Jacka (Canis mesomelas), 2 skeletons, with skins.

Busn-BaBy (Galago maholi), skeleton.

294 DR. T. S, COBBOLD ON ENTOZOA. { Mar. 7,

8. Notes on Entozoa.—Part IV. By T. Spencer Cosson,
M.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., Correspondent of the Academy of
Sciences of Philadelphia.

[Received February 14, 1876.]
(Plate XXI.)

The present series comprises a variety of new and interesting pa-
rasites, all of them belonging to the Nematode Order.

12. ASCARIS CORNELYI, nov. sp. (Plate XXI.)

On the 21st of December, 1875, I was requested to identify a ne-
matoid which Mr. Selater had only a few days previously received
from Mr. J. M. Cornély, C.M.Z.S. As stated on the label of the
bottle, the worms had been removed from the intestines of a Vulturine
Pintado (Numida vulturina). At once making a pocket-lens exami-
nation of the parasites, I remarked that the species was probably new
to science ; and on the 30th of the same month this opinion was
confirmed by careful investigation. la a more or less marked man-
ner its characters differed from allied forms infesting fowls and game
birds (such as Ascaris compar, A. perspicilla, A. inflexa, &c.);
consequently I have ventured to name the worm A. cornelyi, after
the discoverer. The bottle contained eleven specimens in all, eight
of them being of the male sex. I think the worms must have been
unduly shaken during transmission ; for not only were they coiled
together in a very complicated way, but at least three of the males
had their exserted spicules broken. From the best examples I
gathered the following diagnostic characters :—Head entirely naked
and destitute of appendages, the dorsal lip being conspicuously larger
than either of the two ventral lips ; body much contorted and rather
suddenly narrowed at either end, especially towards the head in the
female ; tail of the male appearing diagonally abrupt when seen in
profile, and furnished with a sharply pointed subulate process at the
tip, also presenting on either side a feebly developed but distinctly
four-lobed membrane; spicules two in number, long and slender,
unequal, the exserted portion of the longer one measuring fully =. of
an inch ; tail of the female with an ensiform profile, sharply pointed
and furnished with an extremely minute, distinct but scarcely sepa-
rable process at the tip. Males up to 2 of an inch in length, the fe-
males being very nearly an inch long, with a breadth of ; of an inch.

Of the accompanying figures, two of them illustrate the characters
of the head and tail of a female worm, whilst the others show respec-
tively right and left profile views of the tail of the male as exhibited
by the two most perfect specimens (Plate XXI. figs. 1-4). The ar-
rangement of the spicules in the fourth figure is clearly the result of
artificial twisting.

13. STRONGYLUS HEMICOLOR, nov. sp. (Plate XXI.)
Nearly ten years back I received a batch of parasites from the

PZ. le fer len.

M& N.Hanhart imp.

TSC del. JSmit lith.

NEW OR RARE ENTOZOA.

e

mh.
Ms ee |
f O ye d |

1876.] DR. T. S. COBBOLD ON ENTOZOA. 295

Zoological Gardens. Some of these have been described in the So-
ciety’s ‘ Proceedings ;’ and others have been publicly noticed elsewhere
in a less formal manner.

Amongst the series in question was a bottle that contained three
different species of nematoid parasites, all derived" from one and the
same host. The infested animal was a Lemur (Pithecia leucocephala)
which appears to have died at the Gardens on the 28th of June, 1866.
The worms were of three well-marked sizes. ‘The largest species,
represented by a single parasite and measuring 83 inches long, could
not be distinguished from the ordinary Ascaris lumbricoides of the
human subject. It had been removed by Dr. Murie from the
rectum,

The worms of intermediate size, numbering irall eleven specimens,
were taken from tle stomach and cesophagus; six of these were males
averaging from an inch to an inch and a quarterinlength. The five
females varied from 13! to 2" inlength. A pocket-lens examination
at first suggested that they were examples of Sprroptera dilatata (a
species that is common in the South-American Monkeys) ; but [ have
since determined otherwise. The smallest set of parasitic worms from
the Lemur, of which there were no less than forty-four specimens in
the bottle, proved to be new to science. These had been removed
from the small intestine. In the condition in which I received them
they were each thrice or four times coiled upon themselves, remiad-
ing one of the appearance so often seen in the encapsuled nematodes
of fishes. After my original brief examinations, I put all the worms
aside for future study ; and it was not until the 16th of April, 1873,
that I found the necessary leisure to work out the general structure
of these elegant little parasites. Their minute size rendered them
eminently favourable for microscopic examination ; and in this way
I obtained evidence of the existence of several peculiarities that I had
not hitherto encountered amongst the nematodes. The following
characters will form a ready means of identification:—Head well
wnarked and furnished with a transversely striated bilateral membrane
which projects beyond and contributes to the formation of the mouth;
oral aperture simple and continuous with a long and moderately nar-
row cesophagus ; body decidedly attenuated in front and almost uni-
formly thickened behind, its surface being marked by (2 or 14 con-
spicuous lines, forming in profile slightly raised parallel ridges ex-
tending from one end to the other; tail of the female suddenly
narrowed to a conical point, the arms being placed within a very
short distance of its extremity; tail of the male furnished with a large
circular and apparently undivided hood, supported by ten rays;
spicule solitary and rather long. Males only 4, and females only 4
of an inch in length.

In addition to the above diagnosis I may add that I have named
the species hemicolor, from the circumstance that the anterior half of
the body in nearly all the specimens was a shade darker in colour
than the posterior half. TI have illustrated the structure of the worm
by five figures. One of these affords a general view of the male para-
site naturally coiled upon itself (Plate XXI. fig. 5). The longitu-

296 DR. T. S, COBBOLD ON ENTOZOA. [ Mar. 7,

dinal lines are not represented here ; but they are separately shown in
figure 6, where the quarter-inch glass also brought into view numerous
transverse strize between the ridges. Alterations of the focus, however,
served to show that the transverse lines were continuous and not in-
terrupted by the longitudinal lines. I am under the impression that
these lines are due to the presence of water-vascular canals, but could
not demonstrate the existence of a lumen with certainty. Another
illustration shows part of the bursa highly magnified (fig. 7). The
tubular character of the rays, with their finely granular contents, was
well seen, the bursal membrane being itself marked by a series of
perfectly distinct striee radiating from the base to the outspread
margin, the latter being distinctly bordered by a thin extension of the
cuticular layer. In another drawing I have represented an enlarged
view of the head of the male (fig. 8) ; and I have also given (fig. 9) a
less magnified view of the tail of the female.

14, SprROPTERA MURIEI, noy. sp. (Plate XXI.)

The eleven nematodes above mentioned as being of intermediate
size I have also determined to be new to science. As already stated,
they-were removed by Dr. Murie from the stomach and and cesopha-
gus of the Lemur ( Pithecia leucocephala). The following characters
will be sufficiently diagnostic in view of future identifications: —Head
simple and unarmed, the mouth being bordered by six very slightly
elevated papillee; body uniform in thickness, but suddenly narrowed
at either end, both sexes presenting a conspicuous gland opening at
the ventral surface, about ;1, of an inch below the oral margin ; tail
of the male strongly curved, sharply pointed, and furnished with
broad lateral folds, each about =," in length; spicules two, scimitar-
. shaped, remarkably stout and short, the larger measuring not more
than z1,’ lengthways; tail of the female comparatively blunt, the
anus being placed about =/;" from the tip. Males up to 13"; females
13" to 2" long.

The accompanying Plate (figs. 11-13) supplies three illustrations
of this worm, showing all the more essential characters above described,
and likewise, in addition, the presence of a supplementary caudal
appendage in the male, besides several stalked gland-ducts connected
with the lateral membranes.

15. Ascaris ANDERSONI, noy.sp. (Plate XXI.)

On the 27th of September, 1875, I received a small parcel con-
taining entozoa from Dr. John Anderson ; and I was informed by
letter that all the parasites had been obtained by the donor from
hosts occupying the north-eastern province of India.

In the series in question there were six examples of a smal] nema-
tode removed from the ceecum of a squirrel (Sciurus ?). Two of
the specimens were males, four being females. Believing them to re-
present a new species, I append the following diagnostic characters :—
Head simple, unarmed ; body finely drawn out in front and sharply
pointed behind in both sexes; tail of the male furnished with a
minute oval-shaped spine at the tip, also with two long arcuate spi-

1876. ] DR. T. S. COBBOLD ON ENTOZOA. 297

cules slightly winged at the extremity ; tail of the female with the
terminal spine continuous and scarcely distinct. Males measuring
up to 3” in length ; females to 2” long, with a thickness of 1. at the
widest part.

I have given two illustrations representing the tails of either sex
(figs. 14 and 15). The profile view shows but one spiculum, the
other being concealed by its side. I could not find the situation of
the reproductive opening in the female. The uterine branches were
filled with nearly spherical ova, measuring from 34," to -}," from
pole to pole. The more advanced in development contained coiled
embryos.

16. Ascaris sIMPLEX, Rud.

Dr. John Anderson’s small but interesting collection of parasites
also showed four characteristic specimens of this species. ‘They had
been obtained by the donor from the intestines of the Dolphin of the
Ganges (Platanista gangetica). Singular to say, all the examples
were of the female sex, the two largest measuring about 12" from
head to tail. The smaller worms did not either of them exceed one
inch in length. In connexion with these specimens, all of which
were carefully examined by me on the 28th of last September, I have
only to add that they presented the peculiarly flexed state of the
chylous intestine or stomach as described by Dujardin. As that
distinguished helminthologist had already accurately surmised, the
4lscaris delphini of Rudolphi must clearly be regarded as identical
with this species.

17. ASCARIS LEPTURA, Rud.

In addition to the above-described species, Dr. Anderson’s collec-
tion also shows three specimens of a small nematode taken from the
intestine and cloaca of a tortoise (Testudo elongata). Two of them
are of the male sex, measuring a trifle over half an inch, the female
being nearly three quarters of an inch long.

18. Oxyuris opesa, Diesing. (Plate XXI.)

In the collection of entozoa which I received from Mr. Charles
Darwin, F.R.S., in the month of August, 1862, there were five
specimens of this nematode. Unfortunately Mr. Darwin’s MS.
has been mislaid. I have little doubt, however, that these parasites
were obtained from the intestinal canal of a Capybara in the year
1832. All the worms were females, their heads displaying six very
conspicuous papillee, three of which I have represented in profile in
the accompanying Plate (fig. 16). The point of the tail varied so
considerably in form that 1 have added representations of it from two
specimens. The extremity was in all cases marked by the presence of
asmall conical transparent process, the centre of which showed a distinct
cavity containing fine granules (figs. 17 and 18). The eggs have a
long, oval, almost elliptical form, some of them exhibiting a finely
sculptured externa! envelope. Three membranes were distinctly
visible (fig. 19). Some of them showed a distinct separation of the

298 SIR V. BROOKE ON CERVUS MESOPorAMiIcus. [Mar. 7,

yelk-contents into two masses, the smaller division being finely gra-
nular, whilst the larger mass was formed of moderate-sized corpuscles
like those usually seen in the so-called mulberry-cleavage stage.

19. SrronGyLus TUB&¥FORMIs, Zeder. (Plate XXI.)

In the small collection of parasites presented to me many years
ago by Mr. Caleb B. Rose, F.R.C.S., [ only recently noticed a little
nematoid which is clearly referable to this species. It was entangled
amongst a number of characteristic examples of Ascaris mystax of
the Cat, and had consequently been overlooked. Being a solitary
male specimen (since added to the special series of Entozoa contained
in the Museum ofthe Royal Veterinary College), I did not make a very
full examination of the worm; but on referring to my notes made on the
3rd of December last, I find that I have remarked upon the great size
of the bursa, the rays of which were very conspicuous. I did not uncoil
the specimen (represented in the accompanying Plate exactly as it
appeared under Ross’s 3" objective), for fear of injuring it; but I
judged the length to be about $ of an inch. As it is the only speci-
men that has come under my notice, I have figured it (fig. 20).

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXI.

Fig. |. Ascaris cornelyi: head of female, magn. 20 diam.
2. The same: tail of female, magn. 24 diam.
3. The same: tail of male, magn. 25 diam.
4, The same: tail of a rather smaller male.
5. Strongylus hemicolor : male, magn. 30 diam.
6. The same: section of surface, magn. 150 diam.
7. The same: part of bursa, magn. 150 diam.
8. The same: head of male, magn, 150 diam.
9. The same: tail of female, magn. 30 diam.
10. The same: three eggs, magn. 150 diam.
11. Spiroptera muriei: head of male, magn. 30 diam.
12. The same: tail of male, magn. 30 diam.
13. The same: tail of female, magn, 30 diam.
14. Ascaris andersoni: tail of male, magn. 25 diam.
15, The same: tail of female. magn. 25 diam.
16. Oxyuris obesa: head of female, magn, 23 diam.
17. The same: tail of female, magn. 24 diam.
18. The same: tail of another female.
19. The same: egg, magn. 122 diam.
20. Strongylus tubeformis: male, magn. 23 diam.

4, Supplementary Notes on Cervus mesopotamicus.
By Sir Victor Brooks, Bart., F.Z.S.

[Received January 19, 1876.]

Having lately received from my indefatigable correspondent Mr.
Robertson, H.B.M. Vice-Consul at Busrah, several fresh specimens of
the horns of Cervus mesopotamicus (vide P. Z.S. 1875, p. 261, pl.38),
I hasten to lay before the Society some additional observations which
these specimens have enabled me to make upon this interesting
species.

Pa

1876.] SIR V. BROOKE ON CERVUS MESOPOTAMICUS. 299

The accompanying drawings, lettered according to the figures given
in my original notice of the species (J. c. pp. 263 & 264, figs. 2 & 3)
represent the left horns of four individuals; and all, with the ex-
ception of the largest (fig. 1), havejbeen taken from the animals

Fig. 1.

Left antler of Cervus mescpotamicus (remarkably largely developed).

after death. As compared with the single horn of the adult male (J. c.
p. 264, fig. 3.) which formed the basis of my description of the fully
grown horns of the species, the horns at present under consideration
offer no very essential points of contrast, the characters presented by
the new specimens in no way tending to render the anomalous form of
horn described by me as characteristic of the species, less decided.
There are, however, certain not entirely unimportant details in which
the new specimens (consisting of single horns of six distinct males, in-

300 SIR V. BROOKE ON CERVUS MESOPOTAMICUS. [Mar. 7,

clusive of those figured) agree together, while they differ from the
specimen first received ; a slight modification of my original diagnosis
appears to me to be therefore necessary.

With one exception (fig. 2), in none of the horns lately sent by
Mr. Robertson is the inner tine 6 (/.c. p. 264, fig. 3 6) developed,
from which I am led to believe that this tine is of uncertain occur-

Fig. 2.

Left horn of Cervus mesopotamicus (about four years of age).

rence, and does not by any means constitute a fundamental specific
character. Again, with but one exception (fig. 3 c), in none of the new
specimens is the upper of the two tines (/. c. p. 264, fig. 3, ¢) which
projects from the anterior aspect of the palmated portion of the horn
any thing more than a mere rudiment ; in some it is entirely absent.
Instead of being subcylindrical, as was the case with the beam of
the old type specimen, the beams of all the new specimens are very
decidedly compressed anteriorly, forming, in the more adult, a sharp
ridge from which are, not unfrequently, developed blunt rudimentary
tines (c’, figs. 1, 2, 3,4). In the finest horn sent by Mr. Robertson
the upper third of the beam is furnished with eight strong tines,
some of which are upwards of 7” in length (fig. 1d) ; and even in the
horns belonging to younger animals (figs. 2 & 3) these coronal tines

1876.| SIR V. BROOKE ON CERVUS MESOPOTAMICUS. 301

Fig. 3.

Left horn of Cervus mesopotamicus (about four years of age).

appear to be generally more numerous than was indicated by the old
specimens.

These facts considered, the following diagnosis of the specific
characters of the horns of Cervus mesopotamicus will, I think, be
found more perfect than that given in my first notice of the species.

CERVUS MESOPOTAMICUS.

Horns, adult male.—Each horn supported on a short pedicle, its
base surrounded by a massive well-developed burr, immediately above
which a short straight brow-antler projects forwards and slightly up-
wards (a, figs. 1-4).

Expanding gradually from the burr, a more or less distinct fan-
shaped palm is formed, from the anterior aspect of which are given
off one or two laterally compressed, powerful tines (c, figs. 1-4, &
l. ec. figs. 2 & 3).

Above the palm the horn is contracted into a short beam rounded
posteriorly, but with its anterior surface laterally compressed into a
sharp ridge, from which blunt rudimentary tines are occasionally de-

302 SIR V. BROOKE ON CERVUS MESOPOTAMICUS. [ Mar. 7,

veloped (c’, figs. 1-4). From the posterior surface of the upper
third of the beam arises a row of long subcylindrical tines, from 3 to
8 in number, the bases of which, in very strongly developed specimens
(fig. 1), are united so as to form a’‘second palmature. The lower
three fourths of the beam are bent in a decided curve outwards and
slightly downwards, the upper fourth abruptly inwards and upwards.

Fig. 4.

Left horn of Cervus mesopotamicus (adult and of typical form).

From the following extract of a letter which I received from Mr.
Robertson a short time since, it will be seen that I have been some-
what unfortunate in the name chosen for this species; as, however,
the name CO. mesopotamicus has been published, I believe I shall be
taking the course least conducive to future confusion in adhering to
it: Mr. Robertson writes :—

«T am very glad to see by your letter received some days ago, that
the horns haye enabled you to decide about the spotted deer. I fear,

1876.] SIR V. BROOKE ON CERVUS MESOPOTAMICUS. 303

however, that I did not clearly explain that this deer is met with in
no part of Arabia, except in the jungles bordering the river Karoon
and its tributary the Diz, both of which issue from the hitherto un-
explored Luristan Hills. 1t does not exist in Mesopotamia or any-
where near the Euphrates ; and the name Cervus mesopotamicus seems
therefore to be a little misleading. I suspect, indeed, that this deer
is really a native of the Luristan Hills, and that those I occasionally
meet with on the Karoon are a few which wander down along it in the
dry season. It is certain that there are more of them on the Karoon
during the hot months than in winter. I have got a few horns from
Luristan and some Gazelles’ skulls from various parts of Arabia,
which I shall send you by the first opportunity. Natives tell me the
Luristan Hills abound in wild sheep and deer of various kinds. I
should like much to visit them ; but the inhabitants are predatory and
fanatical, and if one wished, as I should, to leave the caravan-route,
and explore the hills, a stronger party than I could conveniently
muster would be necessary. I went twice to the Karoon last winter,
but saw no deer on either occasion. Lions were plentiful, and other
kinds of game consequently scarce, I hope to be more fortunate
next season.”
Busreh, May 30, 1875.

The table, which I here append, of some comparative cranial
measurements of Cervus mesopotamicus and Cervus dama* will, I
trust, be of service in the determination of the species.

|

| Cervus mesopotamicus. Cervus dama.

. inches. | metre. inches, metre.
| eee teases a \ 128 | 0813 | 111 | ogee
"Distance from anterior |
sae tha 65 0165 | 59 | O-150
HeANT ES, -. cececacceee sss
Distance from anterior |
extremity of nasals to |
free extremity of pre-
IMARAU SD... fos cee etins eo
, Width between the orbits. 46 Ons 41 0-104
_ Width of upper extremity ) |
| of the nasals between | | 2-9 | 0.074 | 1-8 0-046
the anteorbital vacui-{| ~‘ | é |
(1G: one eee S Ee coscaetees | |
: Distance from lower rim | |
of orbit to maxillo- +! ioe +t 80028 6 0-016
malar suture ......... |
‘Distance from mazxillo- | |

0069 | 22 | 0-056

malarsutureto alveolus } | 9 0-023 LL 0:027
of posterior molar |

' Extent of upper premolar \ |

BOLICS”...< 50000005 teats Ss]

Extent of upper ere

1:55 0:039 | 1°35 0-034

|
BEVIES, 33520 Hote nddedeneenst je 7 |< OtObe i | oor

* The measurements of Cervus dama are taken from an unusually large out-

lying Buck.

304 SIR V. BROOKE ON CERVUS SCHOMBURGKI. | Mar. 7,

5. On Cervus schomburgki (Blyth).
By Sir Victor Brooks, Bart., F.Z.S.

[Received February 11, 1876.]

No fresh information of any consequence having been added to
our knowledge of Cervus schomburgki since Mr. Blyth’s original
notice of the species (P. Z.S. 1863, p. 155, and 1867, p. 835), I
have thought the following details and specific diagnosis, based on
specimens which I recently received from Siam, and on an adult stag
mounted in the gallery of the Muséum d’ Histoire Naturelle at Paris,
worthy of the Society’s notice. For the Siamese specimens, which
consist of the frontlet and horns of a remarkably fine old male, and
a pair of loose horns of abnormal and very interesting growth, |
am indebted to the kindness of Dr. Campbell, late resident medical
officer of the British Consulate at Bangkok. Respecting the locality
from which the specimens were obtained, Dr. Campbell writes, ‘in
rat to your queries, I believe that all the specimens were procured
in Northern Siam, probably even in the tributary States named
Laos or Shan.” The horns of the normal specimen (tig. 1), which
are of very vigorous growth, possessing 20 distinct points, present
all the characters described by Mr. Blyth as typical of the horns of

Fig. 1.

Normal antlers of C. schomburgki.

1876. } SIR V. BROOKE ON CERVUS SCHOMBURGKI. 305

this fine species. The entire external surface of the abnormal horns
(fig. 2) is covered with dense nodular exostosis, intersected by deep
furrows, which adds greatly to their circumference, and gives to the
extremities of the tines a blunt rounded outline. A section through
the centre of one of the tines shows no line of demarcation between
the external and internal portious of the horn, the same remarkable
density pervading the whole; hence the very great weight of the
horns, which is nearly double that of the normal pair.

Fig. 2.

Abnormal antlers of C. schouburgki.

There can, I think, be no doubt that this abnormal condition has
been the result of injury to the testes of the deer to whom these
horns belonged—many specimens, affected by a similar exostosis,
which exist in my own and public collections having been the direct
result of castration. Thongh much still remains to be ascertained
by carefully conducted experiment and observation before an exact
and exhaustive knowledge of the effects of injuries to the testes of deer
upon their antlers can be obtained, the three following propositions
may, I think, be considered as resting upon a moderately firm basis.

(1) Ifa deer is perfectly castrated within the first six months of
his life, no antlers are ever developed. (2) If castrated during the
growth of his antlers, their growth in a natural direction is immedi-
ately arrested, and the velvet is retained during life, the horns fre-
quently assuming very varied monstrous forms. (3) The castration
of a deer with fully grown antlers free from velvet, causes the pre-
mature fall of these antlers, which are immediately replaced by a
pair of antlers of normal or subnormal external outline and dimen-

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. XX. 20

306 SIR V. BROOKE ON CERVUS SCHOMBURGKI. _[ Mar. 7,

sions, which remain, with their velvety periosteum, persistent during
the remainder of the animal’s life. The two former of these proposi-
tious I have myself verified by experiment; the third I must, for
the present, take upon the authority of former experimenters*, and
upon the assurance of Mr. Sawyer, Head Keeper of the Royal Park
at Richmond, who, some years ago, informed me that he had very
frequently tried this experiment for himself and invariably with the
same result.

From the almost perfectly normal outline and dimensions of these
abnormal horns of Cervus schomburgki it is, I think, evident that
they are referable to a deer castrated whilst in “hard horn.” Their
exostosed superficial surface, in which their abnormality consists, is
accounted for by the supposition that the velvety periosteum being
in full connexion (as it was possibly for some years) with the cir-
culatory system, continued to perform, probably in a sluggish and
irregular manner, its proper physivlogical function, the deposit of
osseous matter, thus giving rise to a slowly increasing exostosis, in
which the external arterial and venal canals became more and more
deeply imbedded. At the same time the great density and weight
of the horns seems to indicate that this external deposit of osseous
matter was accompanied by an internal deposit which gradually
obliterated the cancellous tissue of the centre of the horn.

The form of horns described as characteristic of Cervus schom-
burgki in the following diagnosis is based on the examination of
numerous specimens, including the types; the external coloration
and body-measurements upon the adult male specimen preserved in
the Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle at Paris. This specimen was sent
by M. Bocourt from Siam in 1868, and is that mentioned by Mr.
Blyth (P. Z. S. 1867, p. 835), and later by Mr. Sclater (Trans. Z.
S. vol. vii. p. 349).

The comparative measurements of Cervus schomburghi, Cervus
duvaucelli (Cuv.), and Cervus eldi (auct. anon.) are taken from the
frontlet and horns of the adult male Cervus schomburgki (fig. 1)
above mentioned and from very fine skulls of Cervus duvaucelli and
Cervus eldi in my own collection.

CERVUS SCHOMBURGKI (Blyth).

Adult male.—Antlers with very long powerful brow-antlers, which
are frequently forked; beam very short, and more or less laterally
compressed, upper part of the antlers strictly dichotomous, each of
the main branches about equally developed, and in itself dichoto-
mous, and furnished with long cylindrical tines. External surface
of the antlers smooth and polished. Hair in winter rather long
and coarse. General colour uniform brown, darkest on the nose and
upper surface of the tail, and lightest on the cheeks and lower parts
of the sides and haunches. Lower lip, belly, and under surface of
the tail whitish. Upper lip, occiput, and limbs with a decided tinge

* See a curious old work to which Prof. Rolleston has lately called my at-

tention, entitled ‘The Economy of Nature in Acute and Chronical Diseases of
the Glands,’ by Dr. Richard Russell (pp. 21-24).

1876.]. MR. SCLATER ON THE SKINS OF FIJIAN PARROTS. 3u7
of rufous. The hair on the front of the metacarpal cannon bones is
lengthened into an everted mane about 2 inches in length.

Immature male.—Antlers with the posterior of the two main
branches less developed than the anterior branch.

Female. Unknown.

Hab. Northern parts of Siam.

Cermus | Cervus tt
schomburgki. | duvaucelli. Corvus eldi.
| SS ———s —
inches. inches. inches,
Height at shoulder ............... 41 43 32
ben sthtat ear’ ahem ae 65 7
Wadtihyat ears: :.02o.sce.ateek oases | 38 3°5 |
Length of tail, exclusive of hair 4 | 5 |
Length of beam from burr to |
HOM eeetenaetcsccaessecees casbe 8 | 17
Length of longest tine on an- |
terior branch of fork......... 16 13
Length of longest tine on pos-
terior branch of fork ......... 17 11:5
Greatest span of coronal tines.. 22:2 18
Length of brow-antlers ......... 175 | 14-7 10
Total length of skull ............|..0000...seeeeeeee | 15°4 13
rom free extremity of praemax- |
ill to tip of nasals .........].......cc0ec0se0e- 3:3 26
From ditto to anterior rim of
ONDIG.2 Sh. heed cree oeaone |S eae ost Ae 8:2 6:9
Extent of upper premolars ......|.......0.00060060- 1:9 1:35
Extent of upper molars .........|...0....000eeceees 26 1-85
Extent of lower premolars ......|....06.....000000 18 1:3
Extent of lower molars .........|..00.......0se0ees 29 2:15

|
|
|

March 21, 1876.
Dr. E. Hamilton, V.P., in the Chair.

Mr. Sclater exhibited a series of skins of the Parrots of the Fiji
Islands, obtained by Mr. E. L. Layard, F.Z.S., and belonging to
Lord Walden’s Collection. Mr. Sclater called special attention to a
new species of the genus Pyrrhulopsis of Reichenbach, from the
island of Taviuni, which Mr. Layard proposed to call éaviunensis,
represented by several specimens. This species had nearly the same
purplish red colour as P. tabuensis (sive atrigularis, Peale), of which
a fine specimen was living in the Society’s Gardens—but was readily
distinguishable by the total absence of the blue nuchal collar. Ré-
ferring to his former remarks on this subject (P. Z. S. 1864,
p. 158), Mr. Sclater pointed out that the special habitat of four
species of this group of Parrots had now been ascertained, and
showed them on a chart of the Fiji group. These were :—

1, P. arrreutaris (Peale): Ngau Island (Rayner).
20*

308 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON LEPIDOPTERA, { Mar. 21,

. P. ravrunensis, Layard: Taviuni (Layard).
3. P. sPLENDENS (Peale): Kandavu and Viti Levu (Layard).
4. P. personata (G. R. Gray): Kandavu (Layard).

It seemed now quite certain, from the researches of Dr. E. Graffe
(ef. J. f. O. 1870, p. 416), that the true P. tubuensis was found in
the Tonga group, not, indeed, on the island of Tongatabu, but on
the adjcining island of Eua or Eoua of that group. Mr. Sclater
was therefore not yet quite convinced, in spite of what Messrs.
Finsch and Hartlaub had stated (J. f. Orn. 1870, p. 123), that
Peale’s P. atrigularis (which he had identified, P. Z. S. 1864, p. 158,
as applicable to Mr. Rayner’s specimen from Ngau Island, Feejees)
was certainly =P. tabuensis, unless, indeed, it should turn out that
P. tabuensis had been introduced by the natives of the Tonga
Islands from the Feejee group *.

The following papers were read :—

1. Descriptions of Lepidoptera from the Collection of Lieut.
Howland Roberts. By Arrnur G. Burturr, F.LS.,

E.ZS., ke.
[Received February 21, 1876.]

(Plate XXII.)

The first two species here described were lent to me by Lieut.
Roberts soon after his arrival in England ; but press of work has pre-
vented me from determining their affinities until now.

Family Erycinip&.
STIBOGES, n. gen.

Allied to Abisara, aspect of Nymphidium.

Wings with rounded outer margin broad, costal nervure of ‘pri-
maries terminating abruptly at about the middle of the costa, opposite
to the end of the discoidal cell, subcostal with five branches, the last
two forking to apex ; upper radial emitted from the inferior margin
of the subcostal near its origin; lower radial nearly equally dividing
the discocellulars, which are concave; second and third median
branches emitted near together; precostal of secondaries short,
oblique, directed backwards ; costal nervure short, straight, oblique,
terminating at basal third of costa; subcostal forking beyond the

* Mr. Salvin kindly sends me an extract from the ‘ Voyage in search of La
Perouse” (trenslated from the French, 2 vols. 8vo, 1800) in illustration of this
point. ‘On the morning of the 26th March we landed (on Tongataboo). . . .
They (the natives) sold us several birds; among others a charming species of
Lory, which they assured us had been brought them from Fidgi.”—TZom. cit.
ii. p. 105.—P. L. S.

B45 167692 xed:

R.Mintern Mustern Bros. imp

NEW MALAYAN LEPIDOPTERA.

1876.] MR. A. G. BUTLER ON LEPIDOPTERA. 309

end of cell, the upper fork running close to the margin from the
second third of costa; radial emitted close to the subcostal, reducing
the upper discocellular to a point; lower discocellular long, oblique,
nearly straight; second and third median branches emitted nearer
together than the first and second; body slender ; eyes prominent;
antennze slender, submoniliform; palpi very small. Type Stiboges
nymphidia, n. sp.

1. SrrpoGes NympuHrpia, n. sp. (Plate XXII. fig. 1.)

Wings semitransparent, snow-white ; primaries with broad costal
and external dark-brown borders, sinuated internally ; two irregular
submarginal series of unequal white spots ; secondaries with a broad
outer border, undulated internally ; a sinuated disco-submarginal
lunulated pale brown line ; a submarginal series of elongated white
spots; body dark brown; wings below as above; legs, palpi, and
venter white. Expanse of wings | inch 9 lines.

Pinang (Roberts).

Family ZGERIIDz.
Genus Sura.
2. SuRA CHALYBEA, n. sp. (Plate XXII. fig. 4.)

Wings bright metallic steel-blue, becoming purple towards the
outer margin ; body purplish black ; legs and anal tufts black-brown ;
antennee black-brown, Expanse of wings | inch 9 lines.

Singapore (Roderts).

Family SPHINGID&.
Subfamily MacroGrossinz.
Genus MacroGtossa.
3. MACROGLOSSA OBSCURICEPS, n. sp. (Plate XXII. fig. 5.)

Wings purplish black, primaries crossed near the middle by a
broad ill-defined regular greyish band, bounded on each side by two
velvety-black parallel lines ; two scarcely visible waved discal lines ;
secondaries with the costal area creamy-ochreous ; interno-median
area crossed obliquely by a streak of dull ochreous hairs ; body above
ferruginous ; head and antennze dull black ; segments of abdomen
with lateral anterior piceous spots, the second and third segments
with posterior lateral ochreous spots, the fourth to sixth segments
with lateral white-tipped tufts; fifth segment blackish, especiaily at
the sides; anal tuft black, tipped with ferruginous; wings below
ferruginous, outer borders blackish, base ochraceous ; a central trans-
verse dark brown line; abdominal area of secondaries ochreous ; palpi
white; pectus sordid whitish, brownish at the sides; venter ferru-
ginous, with central triangular testaceous patches; tufts as above.
Expanse of wings 2 inches 3 lines.

Ayerpanas, Malacca (Roberts).

This is one of the best-marked of the species of Macroglossa.

310 MR. A. ANDERSON ON THE [Mar. 21,

Genus LopHura.

4, Lopuura MINIMA, n. sp. (Plate XXII. fig. 2.)

Primaries above grey, apical area broadly purplish brown, crossed
by a dark brown discal line, and bounded internally by a triangular
subcostal blackish spot ; base brownish ; two black spots on inner
margin ; secondaries tawny, with broad ferruginous external border ;
head and thorax grey, abdomen rosy greyish, dorsal region dark ;
wings below dull tawny, powdered, especially towards the outer mar-
gins, with grey ; secondaries with a black-edged white dot at end of
cell ; anal angle, and two parallel central transverse lines, ferruginous ;
body below rosy greyish, back of pectus whitish. Expanse of wings
1 inch 1 line.

Ayerpanas, Malacca (Roberts).

Subfamily SMERINTHIN.
Genus Mimas.

5. MIMAS TERRANEA, 0. sp. (Plate XXII. fig. 3.)

Primaries greyish clay-brown, crossed by two central diffused red-
dish bands; adull black dot at end of cell ; several dark grey discal
spots towards apex ; secondaries dark brick-red ; body greyish clay-
brown; antennee and lateral tufts on metathorax reddish ; wings be-
low rosy greyish ; primaries with the discoidal cell and interno-median
area ferruginous ; a straight transverse discal brown line from costa
to inner margin: secondaries with an elongated cuneiform ferrugi-
nous abdominal streak ; two central parallel brown lines; fringe yel-
lowish ; body rosy greyish. Expanse of wings 3 inches 2 lines.

Ayerpanas, Malacca ([oderts).

A very well marked and distinct species.

2. Corrections of and Additions to “ Raptorial Birds of
North-western India.”—Part II1.* By Anprew ANDER-
son, F.Z.S. &c.

[Received February 22, 1876.]
(Plate XXIII.)

Another collecting- season enables me to add the following novelties
and additional information on the subject of my last paper, thus
bringing up the number of Raptorial Birds occurring in the plains
of the North-western Provinces to no less than fifty-two species.

Additions to former lists are indicated by an asterisk.

2. VuLTrur caLvus, Scop.

In allusion to my having found Gyps bengalensis resting on palm-
trees, I have now to mention that on the 28th January last I saw a
pair of King Vultures building on a solitary tar-tree (Borassus fla-

* For Part I. see P. Z. 8, 1875, page 16.

f IK Ae) |

SN
Mis

t imp
Hanhart
Hann

ie ‘S
B: LONIC U
BY

1876.] RAPTORIAL BIRDS OF INDIA. 311

belliformis). One bird invariably remained in the nest, sorting the
materials as they were brought by its mate.

*|2. Fatco sasyLonicus, Gumey. (Plate XXIII.).

This was ¢he prize of the season; and I believe the present example
is the finest extant, both as regards maturity and beauty. I shot
this specimen in the Etawah district, on the 27th November, while
seated on the top of a low babool tree. It allowed me to ride suffi-
ciently close up to it to enable me to distinguish its rufous head and
the warm reddish hue of the underparts, which are the tests of the
fully matured Falco babylonicus. At first it occurred to me that it
was only a Lithofalco chicquera; but its superior size soon dispelled
my doubts; and a minute later, as the lovely bird hung by its claws
head downwards, bleeding profusely through the mouth, I saw that
it was a fine example of the present species.

The specimen now before me (a male) appears to be in full ma-
ture dress. Carefully measured in the flesh, the following are the
results :—Length 14°7 ; wing 10°7; tail from vent 6:0; tarsus 1°6;
bill straight (including cere) 1:0, along the curve (as above) 1-1,
width at gape 1°1; greatest expanse of foot-—length 4:0, breadth 3°6,
centre toe and claw 2°5; weight 1 lb. 6 oz.; the wings fall short of
the tail by 1-1.

The cere, gape, and orbital space were bright yellow; the bill was
pale blue, darkening gradually towards the tip, which was blue-black ;
the irides were dark brown ; and the claws were horny black.

The crop contained the remains of a Lark or Pipit. The Falcon
was in full enjoyment of repose after having made a good meal, and
was quite unconscious of any approaching danger : I have seldom had
a better opportunity of examining a bird of the kind at such close
quarters before.

The figure in ‘ The Ibis’ for 1861, p. 217, does not represent a
fully adult bird. It will be seen on comparing that figure with the
plate now given that the following characters are the indications of
full maturity :—first, the pale blue or grey mantle, every feather
being broadly edged and tipped with rufous ; second, the very rufous
head, the moustachial stripe being also shaded off with the same
colour ; third, the warm reddish tint of the underparts, which, from
the throat to the vent are wholly devoid of any markings at all, there
being only a few light-blue or lavender dots on the lower flanks and
tibial plumes.

I cannot understand Mr. Hume’s 16-inch male+; his measure-
ments surely refer to a female; if he were correct, Falco babylonicus
would be fully as large as Falco peregrinus (my males of the latter
average under 16 inches!), whereas it is in reality a smaller species.

27 bis. AquiLa BrrascraTa, Gray and Hardw.

That Aquila orientalis, Cab., has hitherto (erroneously though)
been held to be distinct from Aquila bifasciata, Gray and Hardw., by
continental naturalists admits no longer of any doubt. I have just

+ Of. ‘Rough Notes” part i. p. 80.

312 MR. A. ANDERSON ON THE [ Mar. 21,

received a typical ‘‘ bifasciata ”’ in evidently nestling or first plumage
from Dr. Crowfoot, labelled “ orientalis, juv., Sarepta, August,” of
which the following is a description :—General colour of upper parts
a rich hair-brown; the lower surface is a little lighter in tone; some
of the feathers of the nape of the neck (as in the nestling of 4. has-
tata) are tipped with fulvous ; the lower row of median coverts, the
greater wing-coverts, and ends of the secondaries and tertials are
very broadly ended with salmon-colour or reddish buff, forming three
distinct wing-bars when the wing is closed; some of the median
coverts nearest the tertials have the buff spot at the end of the feather
of a long or isosceles-triangular shape, the point of the spot being of
course towards the base of the feather; most of the lower-back
feathers are broadly edged with buff, and the lowest ones adjoining
the upper tail-coverts are longitudinally marked with duller buff;
one or two of these feathers have this colour almost confined to one
side of the feather, with a slight spot en the other web; others have
a very large oval spot of dull buff on the apical half of the feather,
with a brown stripe down the middle of the feather dividing the
buff ; the side feathers of the lower back are much paler brown, and
the broad edges of the feathers are dull white instead of buff; all
the upper tail-coverts are of a beautiful buff or salmon-colour, having
their edges somewhat paler; the tibial plumes are tipped with dull
whitish ; the lower tail-coverts are first du!l white streaked with
brown, and those beyond them nearest the tail are dull unspotted
buff ; along the ridge of the wing towards bases of primaries there
are some whitish spots, and the primary-coverts are broadly ended
with salmon-colour, like the greater coverts; lining of wing brown
near bend; lower down the feathers are tipped with white, and those
nearest the primaries are largely patched with buff, the lowest
feathers of all being white with some grey patches ; axillary plumes
brown, with white tips; primaries black ; secondaries not so black ;
tertials a dark brown, save the light tips of the two latter ; the inner
primaries towards their bases are slightly mottled on their inner webs
with grey, and the secondaries and tertials increasingly so, taking
the form of distinct bars on the two latter; tail dark brown, barred
with grey, all the feathers being broadly ended with reddish buff;
the cere and feet appear to have been greenish yellow; the outer pri-
maries are not fully grown; and as the specimen was procured in
August, it is in all probability not more than three months old ;
length of wings 19°75, tail 10°25, tarsus 3°6, bill from gape 2°8 ;
the nostrils are long ones, placed obliquely, as is characteristic of A.
bifasciata.

This specimen, probably a female, is not full-grown, as the outer-
most primaries are only partially developed; and it is evidently in
nestling plumage, as indicated by its uniform rich, soft, silky, dark
brown plumage; the wing-bands as well as upper tail-coverts (these
would have become gradually white from exposure to the influence
of the sun) are of a rich fulvous or salmon-colour. I have frequently
killed this Eagle in a similar stage of plumage* ; but the wing-bands

* Of. P.Z.S, 1872, p. 621.

1876. ] RAPTORIAL BIRDS OF INDIA. 313

and upper tail-coverts of the vast majority of them by the time they
arrive in this country get bleached to a dirty white, leaving only
traces of the salmon-colour above referred to.

In the present example the underparts are of a uniform dark brown
colour ; 7. e. there is no indication of the stone-coloured blotches I
have before referred tot; but this, I think, is due to individual vari-
ation, and I attach no importance whatsoever to the absence of this
peculiarity in a solitary specimen.

It will thus be seen that Dresser’s larger figure (‘ Birds of Europe,’
part xxxiii.) represents a bird in nestling plumage, after the buff
bands have faded considerably. How long it remains in this difas-
ciated plumage can only be ascertained by keeping one in captivity ;
but it is as well to repeatt that the assumption of the fully adult
dress is attained by the gradual disappearance of the wing-bands
(these at first are buff or salmon-coloured, and then white) and the
markings on the under surface (when present), after which it presents
a uniform brown throughout, with the addition (in the course of
time) of a fulvous nuchal patch, which is the sign of a fully matured
bird. The growth, however, of this patch is far from regular, and
few specimens are procured having it fully developed ; at times it is
confined to the top of the head, at others to the nape of the neck in
a crescentic or half-moon shape.

27. AquiLa MOGILNIK, G. Gmel.

Having now seen the nestling of A. difasciata and A. hastata, I
feel confident, for analogous reasons, that the Aden-killed 4. mogil-
nik in the lineated stage § was also in nestling or first plumage. This
specimen was of a much richer tone throughout than the birds usually
procured in this country, the fact being that the sun had not as yet
affected the original tint of its plumage.

* 40, PANDION HALIAETUs, Linn.

I lost a wounded Osprey on the 24th November last at a jheel in
this district, which caused me not a little regret, the more so as I
toiled after the bird up to my knees in water, first for some four hours
in the morning, and again in the afternoon. It was very wild, keeping
to the middle of a large open piece of water, and invariably settling
on a decayed stump of a babool tree, where there was no approach
of any sort. The place swarmed with larger Eagles, of sorts which
never allowed the stranger to have a moment’s rest, and were con-
tinually depriving it of its well-earned prey.

Mr. Cockburn, Curator of the Allahabad Museum, has lately
given me a fine mature female which he shot in that district, where,
he says, it is far from uncommon. In the well-watered parts
of Northern Oudh and Eastern Bengal it is much more common ;
but the majority of the jheels in the Doab are too shallow as well as
too weedy to attract this purely fish-eating Eagle.

' Of. P.Z. 8. 1875, p. 21. t Of. P.Z.8. 1872, p. 622.
§ Cf. P.Z.S8. 1875, p. 21:

314 MR. A. ANDERSON ON THE [Mar. 21,

51. Crrcus swarnsontl, Smith.

A young male of this species which I shot on the 25th October
last, close to Futtehgurh, is very interesting, as it illustrates the man-
ner in which the light grey plumage of the adult male is gradually
assumed. The rufous head ard rust-coloured markings on the under-
parts of this specimen, which was sexed by myself, indicate that the
juvenile dress of the young male resembles in some degree that of
the female. I have recently had an opportunity of examining another
young male, belonging to Mr. Brooks, which is in a still further ad-
vanced stage, having only the forehead rufous.

‘The irides of the Futtehgurh-killed bird were bright yellow, as in
fully adult specimens ; the legs and feet were light yellow; the bill
and claws were black ; and the cere was greenish yellow.

* 52. Circus cineRAceus, Montagu.

Jerdon’s statement + “equally abundant with the last . . .”’ and,
again, “I have found it in every part of India”’ requires modification
as regards the deltaic portion of the North-western Provinces, an area
coniprising several thousand square miles. In this part of the country,
although C. swainson7i is extremely common everywhere, C. cinera-
ceus can only be considered in the light of an occasional straggler ;
and as the capture I am about to record throws some light on the
geographical range, plumage, and food of this species, it is of interest
in more ways than one.

Returning to my camp late in the evening of the 12th March,
through an extensive tract of stiff dry grass from two to three feet
high, I suddenly disturbed a large gathering of Harriers that had
evidently settled on the reed beds for the night. There could not
have Leen less than forty birds, inclusive of a few short-eared Owls
that were closely packed in that one spot. As they circled overhead
I recognized Circus eruginosus in all shades and colours ; there was
also a fair sprinkling of C. swainsonii, male and female. Being at
the time on the gui vive for strangely coloured Harriers, I singled out
and brought down what appeared to me on the wing to be a bird
that could hardly be referred to the latter species. It fell from a
good height on to the edge of a dry pond, rupturing its crop, which
was very much distended and literally crammed with the callow
young and eggs of Galerida cristata and Pyrrhulauda grisea, the
majority of these dainty morsels having been swallowed entire.

The specimen underwent a critical examination by candlelight ;
and great was my delight when, instead of the common C. swainsoni’,
I found that my list could now boast of the addition of a fine adult
male example of Montagu’s Harrier. The plumage accords with
Yarrell’s description of the adu/t male—with this notable exception,
however, that in my specimen the whole of the underparts, from the
chin to the under tail-coverts, are uniform with the mantle, viz.
bluish grey, dashed with longitudinal streaks of orange on the vent

+ Of. ‘Birds of India,’ vol. i. p. 98.

1876.] RAPTORIAL BIRDS OF INDIA. 315

and thigh-coverts, whereas the author I have quoted (as in fact do
Jerdon, Sharpe, and Hume?) gives the dreast only as bluish grey,
and the rest of the underparts (of the adult male) as white. Nowhere
do I find the whole of the underparts described as bluish grey the
same as the back; so that the present example would appear to be
unique in this respect f.

The following are its dimensions :—length 17-6, wing 14°5,
tail from vent 9-4, tarsus 2-3. The irides were bright yellow ; the
legs and feet. were dingy or pale yellow ; the bill and claws were black ;
and the cere was greenish yellow.

But though this bird was doomed to succumb to the cause of
science in a foreign country, the most melancholy event in its history °
is connected with its life in far more civilized climes than India; for
its broken leg clearly testifies to the narrow escape it has had from
falling a victim to the vengeance of some one’s zealous game-preserver,
most probably while acting as one of the “sanitary police of Nature.”
The left tarsus has the appearance of having been snapped in a trap,
about the middle of the joint; the skin, which apparently had not
been severed, has enabled the broken portion to reunite sideways ;
and though the fracture has healed in a most remarkable manner,
the lower part of the leg hangs by the skin, which has assumed the
form of a thick tegument ; so that for all practical purposes, excepting
perhaps for roosting, the injured leg could not have been of any use ;
the broken stump protrudes beyond the join by a quarter of an inch.

The range of Montagu’s Harrier in Northern India is very puzzling.
In the jungle tracts of Bundelkhand (south of the Jumua) it is far
from uncommon, and in parts of Oudh and Rohilkhand (north of the
Ganges) it is pretty generally distributed ; so that its absence in the
Duab, an enormous tract of country, large areas of which are in every
way suited to its habits, is very singular indeed.

*53. CiRCUS MELANOLEUCUS, Gmel.

It is with much pleasure that I announce for the first time the
advent of this unexpected addition (essentially an inhabitant of the
humid country of Eastern Bengal and the arais generally) to the
comparatively speaking arid plains of the North-western Provinces.
The specimen in question fell to the shot of my friend Mr. Luard, on
the 10th of February, when we were out shooting on the banks of the
Ganges, near Futtehgurh. When shot it had just alighted on the
ground, and was in the act of eating a large green grasshopper ; its
crop contained orthopterons insects of various kinds.

It is an exceedingly fine male in the pied livery of the adult bird ;
its large, lustrous, gold-coloured eyes contrast strangely with its black
and white plumage, giving it in life a most beautiful appearance.
Carefully measured in the flesh it gave the following results, which,

+ Cf. ‘Birds of India,’ vol. i. p. 97; ‘Catalogue of Accipitres,’ vol. i, p. 66;
‘Rough Notes,’ p. 303.

} Since the above was written I have received two male specimens of C. cine-
raceus from Europe, and in both examples the breast only is bluish grey.

316 ON THE RAPTORIAL BIRDS OF INDIA. [Mar. 21,

for the sake of comparison with the measurements of Circus swain-
sonii and C. cineraceus, 1 annex in a tabular form :—

Species. Length. Wing. Tail from vent. Tarsus.
in. in. in. in.
CO. swainsonii 3 17°6 lar2 8'8 2°6
C. cineraceus 3 17°6 14°5 9°4 2°3
C. melanoleucus 6 16:5 12 Ot” ane Std 3°0

Remarks. Particular attention is drawn to the long wing and tail of
C. cineraceus, and to the characteristic long tarsus of C. melanoleucus.

The irides of the present specimen were gold-coloured ; the legs
_ and feet were dingy yellow ; the bill was blue-black ; the claws were
black ; and the cere was pale yellow.

Before leaving the subject of C. melanoleucus, I may mention,
from my own experience, that the Oudh tarai generally, as far west
as the Shahjehanpore district, as well as parts of Central Qudh (where-
ever there are extensive grass jungles) may be added to the localities
given by Hume as the regular range of this species*.

70. AscALAPHIA COROMANDA, Lath.

The coloured eggs of Poliornis teesa, referred to in my last paper,
have been wholly eclipsed by the acquisition of a pair of really well-
marked eggs of the Dusky Horned Owl, which I took on the 28th of
November last from an old nest of Mycteria australis, shooting oue
of the parent birds off the nest.

Mr. Hume, who has seen these eggs, aud who was not a little
sceptical in the matter of Owls so far forgetting themselves as to lay
spotted eggs, writes to me as follows :—‘‘ Your eggs of Ascalaphia
coromanda are spotted ina remarkable way. After carefully examin-
ing them I have now nothing to say contrary to what you hold ; held
up against the light the colour of the shell, a dull sordid yellow, is
precisely that of many white eggs of A. corumanda; and under a
powerful microscope the granulations appear to me to be similar to
those of A. coromanda. Of this Owl | must still have seventy or
eighty specimens by me; and I have taken eggs without number, and
I do not think I ever saw a single spot on any one of them.”

One of these eggs was quite fresh ; the other had been incubated
for some ten days or so. In order to make certain that this was not
a case of mistaken identity, I visited the nest several times in com-
pany with my friend Mr. Hastings before removing the eggs.

The markings consist of indistinct lilac blotches, showing through
the shell, as it were, on of course a pure white ground ; and they are
both profusely though minutely spotted, especially at the obtuse end,
with brown and lilac spots (or, rather, specks) of various shades.

In conclusion I have a few emendations to make to my last paper
POZ.S. 1875} po TO pln ma:

In the first place the two figures of A. hastata have been wrongly
numbered. No I. is the one with the striated breast ; otherwise the
plate and letterpress do not accord. Again, the explanation of

* Cf, Hume in Journ, Asiat. Soc, 1870, and ‘Stray Feathers,’ yol. iii. p. 34.

:
S.1876.P1.Xxag

|

ale

JSmut del. et lith M&NHanhart imp

‘YORARIUS CHILENSIS

1876. ] MR. H. SAUNDERS ON THE SIERCORARIINE. 317

Plate III. at the end of the article requires amendment, and should
stand thus:—Fig. 1. 4. hastata, young 2, from aspecimen obtained
from the nest at Saharunpore, and killed 28th August, 1873, being
the youngest of the three birds obtained on the same occasion. Fig.
2. A. hastata 9, from a specimen after its first moult ; killed Octo-
ber 21st, 1874.

The figures have been reduced to one fourth of the natural size.

Note.—These birds were made into specimens when in captivity ;
they were not shot.

3. On the Stercorariine or Skua Gulls.
By Howarp Saunpers, F.L.S. &c.

[Received March 3, 1876.]
(Plate XXIV.)

In the following remarks upon the well-marked subfamily of the
Laride, known as the Lestridine, or, more correctly as regards prio-
rity of nomenclature, as the Stercorarine, I shall pass over as briefly
as possible the points which are already known to most ornithologists,
and direct my observations to the synonymy and range of the mem-
bers of the group, with incidental remarks upon their progressive
stages of plumage. My principal predecessor in this work is Dr.
Elliott Coues, who published in the ‘ Proceedings of the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia,’ 1863, an elaborate “ Review of the
Lestridinz,”’ with the primary object of showing that the true “ Lestris
richardsonii”’ of Swainson, described in the ‘ Fauna Boreali-A mericana,’
p- 433, was a distinct species from the light-breasted form with which
most naturalists had united it; but in his recently published ‘ Birds
of the North-West’ (Washington, 1874) he retracts this opinion, in
accordance with the views derived from more extended experience.
He still, however, adheres to his original plan of dividing the family
into two subgenera, Buphagus of Moehring for S. catarrhactes
and S. antarcticus, and Stercorarius for the remaining species ;
and he continues to employ both the generic and the specific names
given by writers previous to the date of the ! 2th edition of Linnzeus’s
‘Systema Nature’ (1706), preferring to make the 10th edition the
starting-point of his system of nomenclature. Argument on this
subject would be futile ; there is nothing to prevent any American
naturalist from making his own rules; but British ornithologists
have a recognized code of laws in the Rules of the British Association
for 1842, drawn up and signed by the principal naturalists of that
day, and generally adopted up to the present time both here and on
the continent. In these it is agreed that the principle of priority
ought not to be carried back beyond the 12th edition of Linneus,
a solitary exception being made in favour of those genera of Brisson
which are additional to those of Linnzeus’s 12th edition. My excuse

318 MR. H. SAUNDERS ON THE STERCORARIINE. [ Mar. 21,

for recapitulating these axioms is, that in consequence of them it is
necessary to reject several names given by Briinnich in his ‘Orni-
thologia Borealis,’ 1764, which antedates our starting-point by
two years—a fact of which some ornithologists, who have probably
not examined the date of publication, do not seem to be aware.
Under these circumstances, it is needless to discuss the subgenus
Buphagus of Moebring (1752); nor do there appear to be any suffi-
cient structural differences to warrant the generic separation of the
Great Skuas from the other species, the Pomatorhine Skua forming
such a connecting link between the heavy and the elegant forms as
to preclude any consistent separation, unless Reichenbach’s genus
Coprotheres be also accepted for the Pomatorhine. For myself 1
prefer to retain all the known species of Skua in the same genus,
viz. Stercorarius of Brisson (1760), the type of which is the species
whose rightful name is, in my opinion, Stercorarius crepidatus
(Gm.), but which I will for the present, to avoid any ambiguity,
distinguish by the vernacular name of Richardson’s Skua. I am, of
course, aware.that this name was originally applied solely to a
dark form of a well-known species; but it has since been generally
adopted ; and as having been applied to no other, its use precludes
the possibility of a misunderstanding.

The genera are as follows :— d

Larus (part), Linneeus, 1766. L. catarractes=Great Skna, L.
parasiticus= Long-tailed or Buffon’s Skua.

Stercorarius, Brisson, 1760. Type ‘Le stercoraire”’ =S. crepidatus
(Richardson’s Skua).

Labbus, Rafinesque, 1815 ; Predatriz, Vieillot, Analyse, 1816.
Based on ‘‘le Labbe,”’ of Buffon, which is Richardson's Skua.

Lestris, Mliger, Prod. 1811. “ZL. parasiticus, L. crepidatus, L.
catharractes.”’ :

Oceanus, Koch, 1816. ‘ O. parasiticus, O. crepitatus ”” (sic).

Cataractes, Fleming, Phil. Zool. 1822. ‘‘ Cataractes vulgaris.”

Coprotheres, Reichenbach, 1852. S. pomatorhinus.

Megalestris, Bonap. 1856. S. catarrhactes, S. antarcticus.

The generic name, variously spelt Cataractes, Cataracta, or Ca-
tarracta, the two latter adopted by Retzius and Leach from Briiunich,
had been previously applied to a subgenus of the Uriine ; and under
the name of Catarrhactes antiquus, Prof. Marsh has described some
bones found in the Tertiary deposits of N. Carolina (Am. J. Sc.
1870, p. 213). I mention this because these applications of generic
names to widely different birds are very confusing, and might lead to
the supposition that the fossil remains of a Skua had been discovered.
Those who persist in separating the Skuas must therefore adopt
Megalestris for the large forms, as the small pointed-tailed species
are the types of all the other genera. It is certainly unfortunate
that the earliest available name Stercorarius tends to perpetuate a
popular fallacy, although one of universal distribution ; but a pre-
cisely parallel case occurs in the signification of the word Caprimulgus,
and other instances might be adduced. _Illiger’s generic name Lestris

1876.] MR. H. SAUNDERS ON THE STERCORARIINE. 319

(or robber) is undoubtedly far preferable, so far as its meaning goes,
and it has been very freely adopted ; but the laws of priority compel
us to reject it, if we would avoid perpetuating confusion.

I have deemed it advisable on the whole to give the references to
those prae-Linnzean authors upon whose descriptions those of writers
subsequent to 1766 are based, marking by a line the division between
them and the available nomenclature. The synonyms are given in
order of date ; and I have also inserted those references which appeared
to me to have any real value. It is impossible to avoid some errors;
but at least I have taken every precaution, and with some few
exceptions, where the original works were not accessible, I have
personally verified every reference.

STERCORARIUS CATARRHACTES.
Larus fuscus, Briss. Orn. vi. p. 165 (1760).
Catharacta skua, Brinn. Orn. Bor. p. 33 (1764).

Larus catarractes, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. p. 226 (1766), ex Briinn.
Larus catarrhactes, Gmelin, Syst. Nat. i. p. 603 (1788).
Cataracta skua, Retz. F. Suec. p. 161 (1800).

Lestris catharractes, Iliger, Prodromus, p. 273 (1811).

Lestris catarractes (L.),'Cem. Man. d’Orn. p- 511 (1815); Faber,
Prod. Island. Orn. p. 102 (1822); Macgill. Brit. Birds, v. p- 479
(1852).

Catarracta fusca, Leach, S. Cat. M. & B. Brit. Mus. p. 40
(1816).

Stercorarius catarrhactes,-Vieillot, N. Dict. H. Nat. xxxii. p- 144
(1819); Gray, Gen. Birds, iii. p. 653 (1849); Dresser, B. of Eur.
pt. xli. (Sept. 1875).

Cataractes vulgaris, Fleming, Hist. Brit. An. p. 137 (1828); Selby,
Ill. Brit. Orn. ii. p. 514 (1832).

Lestris cataractes et Lestris skua, C. L. Brehm, Vig. Deutsch.
p. 715 (1831).

| Stercorarius pomarinus, Vieillot, Gal. Ois. p. 220, pl. 288 (1834),
fig. excell. (!)

Lestris cataractes, Naum. Vég. Deutsch. x. p. 471, pl. 270
(1840).

Stercorarius cataractes, De Selys-L. Fne. Belg. p. 155 (1842).

Megalestris catarrhactes, Bp. Cat. Parzudaki, p. 11 (1856).

Stercorarius catarractes, Bp. Consp. Av. ii. p- 206 (1857);
Laurence, Ann. Lye. Nat. H. N. York, 1553, p. 7; Baird’s B. N.
Am. p. 838 (1860); B. Ross, Nat. Hist. Rev. 1862, p- 289;
Feilden, ‘ Zoologist,’ 1872, p. 3290.

Buphagus skua, Coues, Proc. Ac. Nat. Se. Phil. 1863, p. 125,
B. of N. W. Am. p. 604 (1874).

There was no particular variation observable in the plumage of
sixteen specimens from the Faroe Islands, and in many others sent
to me from time to time for examination; the older the bird the
wider are the chestnut markings which occupy the centre of the
feathers on the upper parts, and the longer and the more yellow

320 MR. H. SAUNDERS ON THE STERCORARIIN2E, [ Mar. 21,

become the filamentous feathers of the neck. The under wing-
coverts and the avillaries are always sooty, with, at most, but very
few and ill-defined russet markings. I have examined the in-
teresting melanism belonging to Mr. J. H. Gurney, jun., figured by
Mr. Dresser in his ‘ Birds of Europe ;’ it was obtained in October,
and the first primary on each wing has not yet attained its full
length. From the crescentic edges to the dorsal feathers, seen on
holding it to a side light, from the absence of acuminate feathers
on the neck, and from the weak bill (which is much thinner than in
Mr. Dresser’s plate), I have little doubt of this example being a
bird of the year; this impression is confirmed by the satin-like ap-
pearance of the primaries and upper parts, which is very different
from any thing I have ever observed in birds whose plumage has
undergone any wear.

The range of this species is the most restricted of any member of
the family which breeds in the northern hemisphere. It has not
been observed in Spitzbergen ; and its most northern breeding-place
within the Arctic circle is at the Lofoten Islands, off the coast of
Norway ; thence it is found nesting west and southwards to Iceland,
the Faroes and the Shetland Islands. It is not recorded from the
Baltic, or from the White Sea. Seebohm and Harvie Brown did
not observe it in their recent expedition to the mouth of the
Petchora; nor did Middendorf find it in N. Siberia, where the other
three European species breed. Von Baer’s identification of this
bird in Novaya Zemlya may well be doubted, as none of the many
subsequent explorers have observed it there. Pallas (Z. Ros.-As. i.
p- 309) supposed that this might have been the bird recorded by
Steller, as observed in 58° N. lat., on the Pacific coast, feeding on
the carcass of a whale; but as it had a “yellowish bill” it was
more probably a Fulmar Petrel. It has not been recorded as yet
from the Pribilov Islands, the Aleutians, or Alaska; but it probably
occurs along that coast, as a single specimen is described by Mr.
Lawrence as having been obtained off Monterey, in California. Mr.
Bernard Ross found it at the mouth of the Mackenzie river,
and about Great Slave Lake, north of which it is very rare; it
also appears to range throughout the Hudson’s-Bay territory, and.
is clearly, as far as dimensions go, the “ZL. keeask”’ of Latham,
mixed up with the Pomatorhine Skua, as shown by the oe
of the particoloured feet ; the Esquimaux name of the latter species
also happens to be ‘ Keeask,” according to Richardson, who does
not mention S. catarrhactes. There is no authentic record of its
occurrence on the Atlafitic s®a-board of the United States; and in
South Greenland it was only twice observed by Holbéll. From its
breeding-stations it passes southwards in antumn along the western
shores of Europe as far as the Straits of Gibraltar and N. Morocco,
beyond which there is, as yet, no trace of it. As a mere straggler,
of course, it has been found in Germany; and it was recorded by
Mr. C. A. Wright as having been obtained at Malta (Ibis, 1864,
p-. 150); but the specimen has subsequently proved to be S. poma-
torhinus. Mr. Godman does not enumerate it amongst the birds of

1876.] MR. H. SAUNDERS ON THE STEROORARIINA. 321

the Azores, Madeira, or the Canaries; but future observations may
probably show a somewhat more extended range than I have been
able to trace.

As a species it is nowhere abundant, and of late years its numbers
in the Faroes and Shetland Islands have so seriously diminished
as to render its speedy extermination there extremely probable.
Although, like the rest of the family, it is essentially a ‘ robber
gull,” yet it is by no means entirely parasitic ; for it feeds to a great
extent upon flesh, and especially upon the Kittiwake gull, of whose
feathers and bones all the castings were composed which Capt.
Feilden examined at the Faroe Islands, whilst the stemachs of
those he shot were full of flesh. This purely maritime Gull is the
only one which can be plundered with impunity that is found in any
great numbers in the haunts of the Great Skua; for the Herring- and
Great Black-backed Gulls would not tamely yield their prey; and it
is werthy of note that the winter range of S. catarrhactes extends
no further south than that of the Kittiwake. We shall see that the
heat of the tropics proves no barrier to other uorthern species
which, from their superior swiftness of flight, require less specialized
conditions for their existence.

STERCORARIUS ANTARCTICUS.

Lestris cutarractes, Quoy and Gaimard, Voy. ‘ Uranie,’ p. 137,
Atlas, pl. 38 (1824) (Falkland Islands) ; Gould, B. of Aust. vii. pl.
21 (1848); Hutton, Ibis, 1872, p. 248 (Chatham Islands).

Lestris antareticus, Lesson, Traité d’Orn. p. 616 (1831); Sel.
and Salvin, P. Z.S. 1871, p. 579 (part).

Megalestris antarctica, Gould, P. Z.S. 1859, p. 98.

Lestris antarctica, Sclater, P.Z.S. 1860, p. 390; Abbott, Ibis,
1861, p. 165 (Falkland islands).

Lestris fuscus, Ellman, Zoologist, 1861, p. 7472.

Buphagus antarcticus, Coues, Proc. Phil. Ac. 1863, p. 127; B.
N.W. Am. p. 604 (i874).

Lestris eatarrhactes, Hutton, Ibis, 1867, p. 185.

Stercorarius antarcticus (et madagascarensis’), Bp. Consp. Av.
ii. p. 207 (1857); Von Pelzeln, Novara-Reise, Végel, p. 150 (1865)
(Sé. Pauls I.) ; Buller, B. New Zealand, p. 267 (1873).

Stercorarius catarractes (6), Schlegel, Mus. P.-B. p. 47 (1865);
Layard, B. 8. Africa, p. 366 (1867) ; Sharpe, Zool. ‘ Erebus and
Terror,’ i. App. p. 32 (1875).

Buphagus skua antarcticus, Coues, in Bull. U.S. N. M. no. 2
p- 9 (1875) (Kerguelen Island)*.

Quite irrespective of the enormous gap which, so far as we know,
at present separates the geographical range of S. catarrhactes from

* Since writing the present article I have read the very interesting ac-
count of the habits of this species as observed at Kerguelen’s Island by Dr.
Kidder, Naturalist to the American Expedition to observe the Transit of Venus.
It would appear that it avoids the water, and preys principally upon other
birds; there are also other modifications of the usual habits of birds of this
genus, to which space will not allow me to allude,

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. XXI. 21

322 MR. H. SAUNDERS ON THE STERCORARIIN#E. [ Mar. 21,

that of the Antarctic Skua, it seems to me that only the want of a
sufficient series of both species for comparison can ever have led to
their being united; for undoubtedly the distinctness of many other
birds as species is unhesitatingly acknowledged on much slighter
grounds. In the examination of a large series I have never met
with any northern Skua with the stout deep bill with its well-
marked angle at the gonys which invariably characterizes the
southern bird; and if mere colour is taken into consideration, the
total absence of rufous both on the underparts, the axillaries, and
the under wing-coverts serves to distinguish the Antarctic Skua at a
glance. But whilst perfectly distinguishable from S. catarrhactes,
it presents three interesting variations in the course of its range,
which I have been enabled fo trace by the aid of a fine series in the
British Museum. From Campbell’s Island in 54° S., 168° E., up
to Norfolk Island, in 29° S. (its most northern known range), past
Kerguelen’s Island, the Crozets, and up to the Cape of Good Hope,
where Layard observed it in April, the specimens all agree in their
remarkable uniformity of sooty-brown plumage, there being few, if
any, striations even upon the feathers of the neck, whilst the size of
some of the examples is enormous, the primaries measuring 16 and
17 inches from carpal joint to tips of primaries. The Falkland-Island
Skuas, locally known as ‘‘ Cape-Egmont Hens” and “ Sea-Hens,”’
are decidedly smaller, and the acummate feathers of the neck and
shoulders are distinctly streaked with yellowish white, although the
general sooty appearance is preserved. But in three specimens ob-
tained during the voyage of the ‘ Erebus’ and ‘Terror,’ on the edge
of the pack-ice, the upper parts are somewhat less dusky than in the
Falkland-Island birds, and the tips of the feathers of the breast are
tinted with yellowish, though the underparts of the feathers retain
their sooty hue, whilst the acuminate feathers of the neck form a
complete ring of yellow verging upon golden, and, by contrast with
the darker colour of the crown, giving somewhat the appearance of a
hood. In general dimensions this form is somewhat smaller than
the preceding, and the bill is even more short and stout in propor-
tion ; but the general characters of resemblance are preserved through-
out, the under wing-coverts and axillaries being dark smoke-coloured,
whilst the lighter hue of the underparts extends no further than the
tips of the feathers, and may be due to climatic influences. In their
somewhat bleached appearance and the closer texture of the feathers
about the base of the bill, these three birds have the appearance of
permanent inhabitants of inhospitable circumpolar regions, whilst
the Falkland-Island birds seem to be a connecting link between this
and the larger form, whose range is principally within more tempe-
rate climates, where the conditions of existence are easier.

It is most probable that Bonaparte’s 8. madagascarensis belongs
to this species, as the late Commander Spurling saw what he supposed
to be a Great Skua off the Comoro Islands, and this would bring its
extreme range up to about 12°S., leaving even then an interval of
more than 40° of latitude between it and the most southerly known
range of 8. catarrhactes. Neither has ¢rue S. antarcticus been

1876.] MR. H. SAUNDERS ON THE STERCORARIINA, 323

found, so far as I am aware, on the western side of the Straits of
Magellan, or on the coasts of Chili or Peru, where its place is taken
by a bird which I consider fully entitled to specific rank, and which,
strange to say, has all its affinities with the northern Skua, S. catar-
rhactes.

STERCORARIUS CHILENSIS (Plate XXIV.).

Lestris antarcticus, var. 6. chilensis, Bp. Consp. Av. ii. p. 207
(1857) ; (Mus. berol. ex Am. Merid. Rostro vix breviore quam in
Huropeo, potius graciliore quam robustiore).

Lestris antarctica, Scl. & Salvin, Ibis, 1869, p. 284 (Santa Mag-
dalena, Straits of Magellan— Cunningham).

S. supra fuliginoso-nigricans, pileo summo fere concolori; corpore
reliquo superiore maculis longitudinalibus rufescentibus versus
apicem angustioribus plus minusve dilatatis variegato ; collo pos-
tico albicante vix rufescente longitudinaliter striate ; alis dorso con-
coloribus, remigum scapis albis, tectricibus alarum minimis dorso
concoloribus et in eodem more rufo maculatis : primariis vix al-
bido, secundariis maculis magnis rufescentibus terminatis ; supra-
caudalibus rufo marmoratis et subterminaliter maculatis ; cauda
nigra, pallidius terminata; loris et plumis subocularibus fuligi-
nosis pileo concoloribus, his rufo lavatis ; genis, regione parotica,
et corpore subtus toto cinnamomeo-rujis ; axillaribus et tectricibus
subalaribus castaneo-rufis, his et pectoris lateribus paullo fuligi-
noso striatis; colli lateribus dorso concoloribus ; ala subtus ni-
gricante, primariis basin versus albis ; rostro nigro ; pedibus nigris.
Affinis 8. catarrhacti, sed rostro graciliore, corpore subtus con-
spicue cinnamomeo-rufescente, et subalaribus et axillaribus casta-
neis distinguendus.

Professor Peters, of Berlin, to whom I wrote on the subject, has
courteously informed me that the type specimen in that museum has
all the above characteristics. It is a slightly immature bird, and
came from Chili.

Through the kindness of Mr. G. Fanshawe, F.Z.S., I have lately
become possessed of four specimens of a Skua shot by his nephew,
Mr. J. R. Denison, at Mejillones, on the little strip of coast which
belongs to Bolivia, in lat. 23° 5’ S., at the end of February or be-
ginning of March. Three of these birds are adults; the fourth is
evidently immature, as shown by the brown crescentic tips to the dor-
sal feathers; and the rufous of the underparts is less strongly marked
than in the adults, showing that the ruddy colour increases with age.
But even the young bird is ruddier than any S. catarrhactes I ever
saw. In the museum at Cambridge is a similar immature specimen
obtained by Dr. Cunningham, late of H.M.S. ‘ Nassau,’ in the Straits
of Magellan, in April; and Mr. Gervase Mathew, R.N., writes to me
that he observed this chestnut-breasted bird at Valparaiso in January,
and a month later at Coquimbo, when in H.M.S. ‘ Resolute.’ More
than this is not known to me at present; and in the absence of any
reliable information as to its breeding-haunts it would be rash to in-
dulge in any speculations as to whether they are to the na or to

21

324 MR. H. SAUNDERS ON THE STERCORARIINS. [ Mar. 21,

the south of the Equator. The affinities of this well-defined form are
decidedly with S. catarrhactes, and not with S. antarcticus ; it is,
indeed, a somewhat slighter bird than the former, and remarkable
for its rich emnamon-coloured underparts, wing-coverts and axil-
laries. The presence of this species on the shores of the South Pacific
may be accounted for by the cool stream of water, about 300 miles ”
wide, and known as Humboldt’s current, which runs northwards from
the Straits of Magellan, along the coasts of Chili and Peru. This
cool band abounds iu fish ; and in consequence of these altered con-
ditions we find there at least six species of Gull, some of them nu-
merically abundant; whereas on the east coast of America there isa
noticeable scarcity of Gulls within the tropics. Where Gulls are
found, the stout heavy forms of Skua can pick up a living; their
more lightly formed congeners can rob the Terns, and the two long- «
tailed species are more thana match in flight for the Arctic Tern; but
against that family the Great Skuas would have little chance; and
hence, probably, their more restricted range. If this species should
prove to have its breeding-places in the North Pacific, it is somewhat
singular that it should never have been observed north of the Equator,
and that the only specimen of a great Skua recorded from the north-
west coast, namely at Monterey, California, lat. 44° N., is clearly
from the description given, S. catarrhactes. If, on the other hand,
it should prove to be a denizen of the southern hemisphere, it is still
more remarkable that we should find in such close proximity to S.
antarcticus a form whose affinities are with S. catarrhactes. In
order of arrangement it should follow the latter species, although in
the present case I have taken it last for convenience of treatment.

STERCORARIUS POMATORHINUS.

Stercorarius striatus, Brisson, Orn. vi. p. 152, pl. 13. fig. 2 (juv.),
1760.

Larus keeask (part.), Latham, Ind. Orn. p. 818 (1790).

Larus parasiticus, Meyer & Wolf, Tasch. D. Vég. ii. p. 490,
descrip. p. 492 (1810), nec auctorum.

Catarracta parasita, var. camtschatica, Pallas, Zoogr. Rosso-As.
p. 312 (1811).

Lestris pomarinus, Temm. Man. d’Orn. p. 514 (1815) ; Audubon,
B. Am. vii. p. 186, pl. 451 (1844); Ross, in Parry’s 4th Voy. App.
p. 196 (1828), fide Newton.

Stercorarius pomarinus, Vieillot, N. Dict. Hist. Nat. xxxii. p. 158
(1819); De Selys-L. F., Belg. p. 155 (1842); Gray, Gen. of B. iii.
p- 653 (1849); Coues, Proc. Phil. Ac. 1863, p. 129; B. Ross, Nat.
Hist. Rev. 1862, p. 289 (Gt. Slave Lake, very rare); Wright, Ibis,
1864, p. 151 (Malta); Gurney, Andersson’s B. of Damara Land,
p- 357 (1872).

Cataractes pomarina, Steph. in Shaw’s G. Zool. xiii. p. 216 (1826).

Cataractes pomarinus, Selby, Il. Brit. Orn. ii. p. 517 (1832).

Lestris spheriuros, Brehm, Vog. Deutsch. p. 718 (1831).

Lestris striatus, Eyton, C. Brit. Birds, p. 51 (1836).

Lestris pomarina, Faber, Prod. Island. Orn. p. 104 (1822); Sw. &

1876.] MR. H. SAUNDERS ON THE STERCORARIINA. 325

Rich. F. Bor.-Am. p. 429 (1831); Naumann, Vég. Deutsch. x.
p. 487, pl. 271 (1840); Temm. Man. d’Orn. p. 495, ed. 1840;
Middendorf, Sib. Reise, p. 240, tav. xxiv. fig. 1 (egg) (1853).

Coprotheres pomarinus, Reich. Nat. Syst. Vog. p. v (1852).

Catarracta pomarina (Tem.), Blyth, J. As. S. Bengal, xxviit.
p. 406 (1859) (Moulmein).

Lestris pomerinus (Tem.), Newton, P. Z. S. 1861, p. 401, pl. xxix.
fig. 3 (egg).

Lestris pomarhinus, Preyer, R. n. Island (1862).

Lestris pomatorhinus, Sclater, Ibis, 1862, p. 297.

Stercorarius pomarhinus, Malmgren, Spitzbergens Fogl. p. 411
(1864).

Stercorartus pomatorhinus, Newton, Ibis, 1865, p. 509 ; Gillett,
Ibis, 1870, p. 307 ; Coues, in Elliot’s Prybilov Is. (1874); Coues,
B. of N.W. Am. p. 607 (1874); Eaton, Zoologist, 1874, p. 3812
{Spitzbergen) ; Newton, B. Greenland, p. 107 (1875).

Lestris pomatorhina, Th. v. Heuglin, Ibis, 1872, p. 65.

The description and figure given by Brisson of his Stercorarius
striatus clearly show that he had before him an immature specimen
of this species, the representation of the strong heavy feet garnished
with large claws being highly characteristic. Although Brisson’s
name cannot be retained, yet, if it had been adopted by any naturalist
subsequent to the 12th ed. of Linneeus, it must necessarily have ante-
dated the well-known name given by Temminck ; but this change has
fortunately been spared us. With regard to Gmelin’s name of crepi-
datus, which Dr. Coues was inclined to refer to this species, I trust
to be able to show that it can only belong to that which I call for
the present Richardson’s Skua. ‘'Temminck’s name is therefore re-
tained, subject to the emendation proposed by Mr. P. L. Sclater
(Ibis, 1862, p. 297), where he showed that the classical spelling
should be pomatorhinus, being derived from ropa (operculum) and
piv (nasus), a view which has since been generally adopted by
ornithologists. There can be no doubt from the description,
especially of the tail-feathers, given by Pallas that this is the species
called by him C. parasitica, var. camtschatica.

In plumage this species does not exhibit any remarkable variation,
although some immature birds are decidedly less marked with sooty
striations on the underparts than others. In the adults the
acuminate feathers on the neck assume a beautiful golden tinge ; and
the dark pectoral band evidently becomes narrower with increasing
age until it is totally lost and the bird is pure white from the chin
to the abdomen. I have only seen one example of this extreme
plumage, in the Rouen Museum, which boasts of nineteen picked
specimens of Pomatorhine Skuas, none of which, unfortunately, bears
any label indicating either date or locality.

The most northern locality recorded for this species is lat. 82° N.,
where a specimen was observed by Ross flying past the boats on
Parry’s fourth voyage. It has been found on the coast of Spitz-
bergen, and in Novaya Zemlya; and south of these points it ranges
throughout the whole of the arctic and subarctic regions. Von
Middendorf found it breeding on the “ barrens’”’ of the Taimyr and

326 MR, H. SAUNDERS ON THE STERCORARIINE. [ Mar. 2],

the Boganida, in Siberia, and was the first to give a figure of the
egg; and it is said to breed in societies from Bjornenas, north of
Egedesminde, to the northward (Newton, B. of Greenland). There
must, however, be many other breeding-places within the arctic circle ;
for the species is abundant in the north, and is not uncommon on
our coasts, principally on the west, in autumn. Passing along the
coasts of Western Europe, it occurs as a straggler in the interior
of the continent, and visits the Mediterranean as far east as Sicily
and Malta; goes down the west coast of Africa, where Capt. Shelley
obtained it off Fantee; crosses the equator, and reaches Walwich
Bay in lat. 23° S., where Andersson shot two specimens, one of
which, a bird of the year, is in my collection. With this proof of
its traversing the tropics it is no longer remarkable that it should
have been obtained at Moulmein, on the coast of Tenasserim, in
lat. 16° 22' N., by Major Tickell, as recorded by Mr. Blyth; the
singular thing was, that the specimen in question should prove to be
an adult and not a bird of the year, like all the other visitors to the
south which I have examined*. There isa specimen in the plumage
of the first year in the collection of Messrs. Salvin and Godman,
obtained by Mr. Cockerell off Cape York, the northern extremity of
Australia. On the east coast of America it occurs from Labrador
as far south as New York and Pennsylvania, beyond which it has
not yet been traced. On the west coast there is no positive record
beyond two instances on the Prybilov Islands; but Mr. Gervase
Mathew’s description of a Skua observed by him at Valparaiso and
Coquimbo seems to refer to this species, respecting whose winter
range we must wait for further details.

STERCORARIUS CREPIDATUS. (Richardson’s Skua.)

Stercorarius (Le Stercoraire), Brisson, type of genus Sterco-
rarius.

Catharacta cepphus, Brinn. Oru. Bor. p. 36 (1764).

Catharacta coprotheres, Briinn. Orn. Bor. p. 36 (1764), dark form.

The Black-toed Gull, Pennant’s Brit. Zool. ii. p. 419, tab. 2
(1768).

Larus crepidatus, Banks, Hawkesworth’s Voy. ii. p. 15 (1773) ;
Gmelin, Syst. Nat. p. 602 (1788); Latham, Ind. Orn. p. 319 (1790); -
Meyer & W. Tasch. deutsch. Vog. il. p. 493 (1810); Scoresby,
Arctic Reg. i. p. 534 (1820).

“Larus parasiticus, Linn.” Boddaert, T. des Pl. Eul. no. 991 (nec
Linn.).

Lestris crepidatus, Tem. Man. d’Orn. p. 515 (1815).

Stercorarius crepidatus, Vieillot, N. Dict. Hist. Nat. xxxii. p- 155
(1819).

Lestris parasitica, F. Faber, Prodr. Is. Orn. p. 105 (1822); Brehm

* Since writing the above I haye had the opportunity of referring to Major
Tickell’s coloured drawing of this identical specimen, which proves it to be an
immature bird after all! Mr. Blyth’s error in stating it to be an adult was
doubtless owing to the want of any specimens for comparison at that time.

1876.) MR. H. SAUNDERS ON THE STERCORARIINZ, 327

& 8. Beitr, Vogelk. ili. p. 853 (1822); Naum. Vog. Deutsch. x.
p- 506, pl. 272, 273 (1840).

Cataractes parasiticus, Fleming, Brit. An. p. 138 (1828); Selby,
Ill. Brit. Zool. ii. p. 520 (1832).

Lestris richardsonii, Swain., Sw. & Rich. F. Bor.-Am. p. 433,
pl. 73 (1831); Macgill. Brit. B. v. p. 492 (1852); Audubon, B.
Am. vii. 190, pl. 452 (1844); Gould, B. of Eur. v. pl. 441 (1837);
Meyer, Ill. Brit. B. vii. p. 177 (1857).

Lestris parasita, Keys. & Bl. Wirb. Eur. p. 240 (1840); Midd.
Sib. Reise, p. 241 (1853).

Stercorarius parasiticus, Schaeff. Mus. Orn. p. 62, pl. 37 (1789) ;
De Selys-L. Fn. Belg. p. 155 (1842); G. R. Gray, List B. Br. Mus.
ili. p. 167 (1844); Gray, Gen. Birds, iii. p. 653 (1849); Lawr.
Baird’s B. N. Am. 839 (1858); Blakiston (B. N.W. A.), Ibis,
1863, p. 152; Degl. & G. Orn. Eur. ii. p. 397 (1867); B. Ross,
Nat.-Hist. Rev. 1862, p. 289; Coues, Pr. Phil. Ac. 1863, p. 132;
Newton, Ibis, 1865, p.510 (Spitzbergen); Andersson, B. of Damara
Land, p. 357 (1872); Gould, B. G. Brit. v. p. 80 (187 ); Hume,
Stray Feathers, p. 268 (1873) (Sindh); Buller, B. New Zealand,
p- 268 (1873); Coues, Rep. Prybilov Is. no. 541 (1874); Sharpe,
Voy. ‘ Erebus and Terror,’ i. App. p. 32 (1875); Newton, B. Green-
land, p. 107, Arct. Man. (1875).

Lestris parasiticus, Bp. Consp. Av. ii. p. 208 (1857).

Lestris parasiticus, var. coprotheres, Bp. Consp. Av. ii. p. 209.

Lestris thuliaca, Preyer, Reise n. Island (1862).

Lestris parasitus, Th. v. Heuglin, Ibis, 1872, p. 65.

Lestris spinicaudus, Hardy, Rev. et Mag. Zool. 1854, p. 657.

Stercorarius spinicauda, Layard, B. 8. Af. p. 366 (1867).

Stercorarius parasitica, Dall & Bannister, Tr. Chic. Ac. i. p. 303
(1869) (Alaska).

Stercorarius asiaticus, Hume, Stray Feathers, p. 269 (1873)
(Sindh).

Lestris boji, schleepii, benickii, Brehm, and Stercorarius tephras,
Malmgren, are believed to be this, whilst Lestris brachyrhynchus
and L. microrhynchus, Brehm, are ascribed to the next ; but it would
be a mere waste of time to verify Brehm’s supposed species.

Dr. Coues follows those authors who have chosen to divert
Linnzeus’s name of ZL. parasiticus to this species—a supposition
utterly negatived by the description in the Syst. Nat. p. 226, which
is based upon that in his ‘ Fauna Suecica,’ p. 55, No. 156. Nothing
could well be clearer than his statement :—‘ rectricibus duabus inter-
mediis longissimis,’ which can ouly apply to the Buffon’s or Long-
tailed Skua; but, as if to make assurance doubly sure, Linneus
adds ‘“‘remiges nigra, rachi |. 2. nivea.’”’ The natural inference
from drawing especial attention to the fact that the shafts of the
first and second primaries are white, is clearly that those of the
other primaries are not white. Now the particular characteristic
by which ‘‘Richardson’s Skua,’’ may be distinguished at any age
beyond that of the nestling, is that the shafts of the other primaries
are conspicuously lighter than in those of Buffon’s Skua, in which

328 MR. H. SAUNDERS ON THE STERCORARIINE. [Mar. 21,

only those of the first and second primaries are white, those of the
third and successive primaries being dark. I am indebted to Mr.
R. Collett, of Christiania, for pointing out to me, some years since,
this excellent distinction. The L. parasiticus of Linnzeus is there-
fore not S. crepidatus, but the ‘ Buffon’s Skua;” and so is,
according to my view, Catharacta parasiticus of Briinnich ;_ but
it is needless to discuss the latter name, as it is out of date.

Dr. Coues considers that the Larus crepidatus of Gmelin is
in all probability based upon the young of the Pomatorhine Skua,
to which Brisson gave the name of Stercorarius striatus. It is true
that Gmelin (who translated from Latham) identifies S. striatus of
Brisson with his L. crepidatus; but although S. striatus is certainly
a young Pomatorhine, it was by no means easily recognizable by
the naturalists of that day; and, moreover, Gmelin correctly cites
in the first place Catharacta cepphus, Briinn., which is certainly this
species, and in the third line refers to “ Le Labbe ou Stercoraire”’ of
Buffon, whose figure (‘Planches Enluminées,’ No. 991) is an ex-
cellent one, besides giving an accurate description of the tail-feathers
(‘‘rectricibus duabus intermediis longoribus ”’) ; he also refers it to the
“ Black-toed Gull”’ of the ‘ Brit. Zool.,’ which is clearly this species.
This would be quite sufficient to impose Gmelin’s name of L. crepidatus
upon “ Richardson’s Skua ;” but the name did not actually originate
with Gmelin. On referring to Hawkesworth’s ‘ Voyages’ (1773), vol.
ii. p. 15 (not vol. i. p. 15, as erroneously cited by Latham, and of
course duly copied by Gmelin, without reference), we find in the
narrative of Lieut. Cook’s voyage in the ‘Endeavour’ that “ on the
8th October 1768 (when a little to the south of the Cape-Verd
Islands) Mr. Banks [afterwards Sir Joseph Banks] shot the Black-
toed Gull not yet described according to Linnzeus’s system ; he gave
it the name of Larus crepidatus.’’ The Black-toed Gull is described
in Pennant’s ‘ British Zoology,’ vol. ii. p. 419 (1768); and plate 2
is an excellent representation of a ‘‘ Richardson’s Skua”’ of the
year, the feet of this species at that age having the upper part of the
webs yellowish, and the posterior portion black, giving the bird the
appearance of being “shod” or “ sandalled,’’ whence Banks’s some-
what quaint Latin rendering. I think it probable that the bird was
identified from Pennant’s description and figure ; for in the MS. in
the British Museum of Solander, who was also in the ‘ Endeavour,’
there is indirect evidence of that work having been on board ; but
as Banks gave no description, it is perhaps safest to cite Gmelin as
the authority for the name.

It is now well known that there are two very distinct plumages to be
found in birds of this species, even in the same breeding-places—an
entirely sooty form, and one with light underparts,—and that white-
breasted birds pair with whole-coloured birds as well as with those
of their respective varieties. If this species is “dimorphic,” the
offspring of one particoloured aud one whole-coloured bird ought to
resemble one or other of their parents without reference to sex ; my
examination of upwards of a hundred specimens from widely different
localities and in all stages inclines me to the belief that this is not
the case, and that the young of such union will be intermediate,

1876. ]} MR. H. SAUNDERS ON THE STERCORARIINE. 329

whilst the offspring of two similar parents will “breed true.” This

point can only be solved by some ornithologist who will devote his

attention to a colony during the breeding-season, observing the pro-

duce of all these unions, and, if possible, marking the nestlings before

ae take wing; perhaps some of our Scotch friends will take the
int.

That the sooty plumage is not merely a sign of immaturity is
shown by the long tail-feathers, and by the burnished tinge of the
acuminate ones on the nape.

It is worthy of notice that in Spitzbergen, its most northern
breeding-ground, neither Dr. Malmgren nor Professor Newton found
a single example of the dark whole-coloured form; all those which
Admiral Collinson’s and Dr. Rae’s Expeditions brought home from
the far north are also white-breasted specimens, which looks as if
the dark form was a more exclusively southern one.

In the white-breasted birds the striations on the underparts
decrease with age until little more than a pectoral band remains ;
this, again, becomes narrower until in some specimens it entirely
disappears and the bird is white from the chin to the abdomen.

This species has the most extended range of any member of the
family. Parry found it up to lat. 82° 2! N.; and it breeds throughout
the arctic and subarctic regions, as far south as the islands of the
north of Scotland ; and Thompson records it as having nested near
Achil Island on the west of Ireland. I should not be surprised to
learn that there is some beeeding-place along the western shores of
France; for both old and also very young birds occur at Malaga
early in August. Some go higher up the Mediterranean ; but others,
principally the young, continue their course along the west coast of
Africa, to Walwich Bay and as far as the Cape of Good Hope; and
in those waters they pass the months of what is our winter, compel-
ling the Terns and the small Gull (L. hartlaudii) to disgorge their
prey. From the altered appearance which they present in their
progressive stages of plumage at a time when European naturalists
have lost sight of them, an individual from the vicinity of St. Helena
received the name of S. spinicauda. Careful examination of a series
of specimens from the Cape of Good Hope, where Mr. E. L. Layard
only observed them from December to February, showed that all
were in the act of losing and renewing the central tail-feathers and
the outer primaries, which are the last to be moulted; and although
at the first glance the birds have a somewhat distinct look, yet there
can be no doubt whatever of their being our northern species.
Most that I have seen are birds of less than a year old, although
this immaturity is less noticeable in the dark-plumaged birds than
in the lighter ones; in none, however, are the central tail-feathers
fully developed, and most are still partially in the quill-sheath. One
specimen, evidently obtained just before the northward migration, is
absolutely the same as a bird of only two months older from the
Faroes. It is to be presumed that S. crepidatus goes up the east
coast of Africa, as Mr. Allan Hume obtained it (naming it S. asia-
ficus), and observed many along the coast of Sindh, the Gulf of Oman,
and between Guader and Bombay.

330 MR. H. SAUNDERS ON THE STERCORARIINE. [Mar. 21,

Returning to the Atlantic, we find it along the North-American
coast; and Solander, in his MS., describes, under the names of L.
Suliginosus and L. nigricans, two specimens of this species obtained
in the harbour of Rio de Janeiro on December 4, 1768, thus giving
it a claim to be included in the list of the Neotropical Laridz so
ably worked out by Messrs. Sclater and Salvin (P. Z. S. 1871,
p. 564). South of Rio there is no record of its occurrence on the
east coast of America; but I can only refer to this species the
example obtained by Mr. Buller at Horowhenua in the Province of
Wellington, New Zealand, on April 30, 1864. His general deserip-
tion suits S. crepidatus; and he expressly states that the shafts of
the primaries are white, the characteristic which particularly serves
to distinguish it from Buffon’s Skua, with which he has identified it.
At the time that I examined the specimen in question I was not
aware of this distinctive feature: the skin also had been badly pre-
served; and, to make matters worse, the plumage was so worn and
abraded that it is a marvel that the bird was able to fly at all.

On the west coast of America it is only recorded as occurring at
the Prybilov Islands and in Alaska ; but Mr. Gervase Mathew, R.N.,
informs me that when at Callao in April 1873, in H.M.S. ‘ Reso-
lute,’ he observed many small Skuas in various states of plumage,
and attributed them (correctly no doubt) to this species, which he
had often observed previously on the English coast.

STERCORARIUS PARASITICUS. (Long-tailed or Buffon’s Skua.)

Le Stercoraire @ longue queue, Buffon, Pl. Enlum. 762.
Stercorarius longicaudus, Brisson, vi. p. 155 (1760).
Catharacta parasitica, Briinn. Orn. Bor. p. 37 (1764).

Larus parasiticus, Linn. Syst. Nat. p. 226 (1766), Fauna Suec.
55. no. 156 (“‘rectricibus duabus intermediis longissimis.”’); ? Mil-
ler, Zool. Dan. Prod. 166 (1774); Phipps, Voy. N. Pole, p. 187
(1774); Gm. Syst. Nat. p. 601 (1788); Scoresby, Arctic Regions,
i. p. 534 (1820).

Catharacta parasitica, O. Fab. F. G. p. 103 (1780).

Catarracta parasitica, Retz. F. Suec. p. 160 (1800).

Catarractes parasita, Pallas, Z. Ros.-As. p. 310 (1811).

Lestris parasitica, Illiger, Prod. p. 273 (1811); Sw. & Rich.
F. Bor.-Am. p. 430 (1831) ; Macgill. Brit. B. v. p. 503 (1852).

Lestris parasiticus, Temm. M. d’Orn. p. 512 (ed. 1815), p. 796
(ed. 1820), p. 501 (ed. 1840); Jenyns, Brit. Vert. An. p. 283 (1835) ;
Gould, B. of Eur. v. pl. 442 (1837); Audubon, B. Am. vil. 192,
pl. 452 (1844); Meyer, Ill. Brit. Orn. vii. p. 174, pl. 314 (1857).

Stercorarius longicaudus, Vieill. N. Dict. Hist. Nat. xxxii. p. 157
(1819); Newton, Ibis, 1865, p. 511 (Spitzbergen); Degl. & Gerbe,
Orn. Eur. ii. p. 399 (1867).

Lestris crepidata, Brehm & S. Beitrage z. Vogelkunde, iii. p. 861
(1822); Naum. Vig. Deutsch. x. p. 534, pl. 274 (1840).

Lestris buffonit, Boie, Meyer & W. Tasch. ili. p. 212 (1822);
Middendorff, Sib. Reise, ii. p. 241, taf. xxiv. fig. 2 (1853).

1876. | MR. H. SAUNDERS ON THE STERCORARIIN&. 331

Stercorarius cepphus, Steph. in Shaw’s Gen. Zool. xiii. pt. isp.
211, pl. 23 (fig. nec descrip.) (1826) ; B. Ross, Nat.-Hist. Rev.
1862, p. 289, Blakiston, Ibis, 1863, p. 152 (Mackenzie River).

Lestris lessoni, Deg]. Mém. Ac. R. Lille, p. (1838); Schinz, Eur.
F. p. 392 (1840).

Lestris cephus, Keys. & Blas. Wirb. Eur. p. 240 (1840); Bp.
Consp. Av. ii. p. 209 (1857).

Stercorarius longicaudatus, De Selys-L. F. Belg. p- 156 (1842) ;
Degl. Orn. Eur. ii. p. 298 (1849); Newton, B. Greenland, p. 107
(1875).

Stercorarius cephus, Gray, Gen. Birds, iii. 1849, p. 653 ; Schlegel,
Mus. P.-B. Lari, p. 49 (1863); Gray, Hand-List, iii. p. 110 (1871).

** Lestris longicaudatus, Briss.,’’ Thomps. Nat. Hist. Ireland, iii.
399 (1851).

Lestris hardyi, Bonap. Tabl. d. longipen. Compt. Rend. xlii. 1856,
p. 770; Consp. Av. ii. p. 210 (1857).

Stercorarius huffoni, Coues, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1863, p. 136; Dall
& Bann. Tr. Chic. Ac. i. p. 304 (1869) (Alaska) ; Coues, Prybilov
Isl. (1874); Irby, Orn. Str. Gibraltar, p. 216 (1875).

Lestris longicaudata, T. v. Heuglin, Ibis, 1872, p. 65 (Novaya
Zemlya).

In treating of the preceding species I have already shown that
Linneeus’s description of his ZL. parasiticus can only apply to this
species, which may always be distinguished by its very long central
tail-feathers and by having, even in immature plumage, the shafts of
only the first and second primaries white, those of the others being
dusky. In its adult state, the Long-tailed Skua has also the under
tail-coverts, abdomen, and flanks of a sooty brown; the tarsi also are
yellowish olive, whilst in adult S. erepidatus the legs are black. I
have seen but few immature specimens, all birds of the year, obtained
on their autumnal migration ; they are of a nearly uniform sooty
colour, -with the usual pale edgings to the feathers characteristic of the
first plumage. This species is found from Novaya Zemlya to Spitz-
bergen, and, south of these points, throughout the whole circuit of the
arctic regions. Von Middendorff first discovered its breeding-places
on the Taimyr and Bogonida, in Siberia; the late John Wolley found
it nesting on the Lapland fells; Sir John Richardson obtained nestlings
in Melville Peninsula; Mr. Bernard Ross observed it at the mouth
of the Mackenzie River ; it occurs in the Prybilov Islands ; and Dall
and Bannister found it in Alaska, the extent of its recorded range on
the Pacific coast. By far the rarest of the family as an autumnal
visitant, it ranges along our shores and those of Western Europe as
far south on the Straits of Gibraltar and Morocco, beyond which
there is no trace of it, whilst on the east coast of America it does not
seem to go south of lat. 40° N. I have already pointed out that Mr.
Buller’s supposed example of this species from New Zealand must be
referred to S. crepidatus. Professor Peters, of Berlin, has kindly in-
formed me that the type specimen in that Museum of Lestris hardy,
Bonaparte, has the shafts of all except the first two primaries dusky ;
and on that ground I presume it to be a young bird of this species.

332 THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONS TOTHE MENAGERIE. [ Apr. 4,

The specimen in question is said to have been obtained “ between
the Philippines and Sandwich Islands’’—a considerable extension
to the range of the species so far as it is at present known.

In concluding my remarks on a family whose members are princi-
pally Arctic in their habitat, it would be a great omission if I failed to
acknowledge my indebtedness to Professor Newton’s comprehensive
remarks on the Arctic fauna in these ‘ Proceedings,’ in ‘The Ibis,’
and in the ‘Arctic Manual.’ The whole available information respect-
ing the northern range of the Skuas is given in a condensed form, ac-
companied by most important references; and to these originals,
especially to the paper on the Birds of Spitsbergen in ‘The Ibis,’ 1865,
I would refer those who require more details than I have thought it
necessary to give in the present article.

April 4, 1876.
Prof. Newton, F.R.S., V.P., in the Chair.

The Secretary read the following report on the additions to the
Society’s Menagerie during the month of March 1876 :—

The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena-
gerie during the month of March was 91. Of these, 65 were ac-
quired by presentation, 16 by purchase, 3 by birth, and 7 were re-
ceived on deposit. The total number of departures during the same
period, by death and removals, was 111.

The most noticeable additions during the month of March were
as follows :—

1. A male Brown Monkey (Macacus brunneus, Anderson), trans-
mitted home to us from Siam as a present by Mr. T. G. Fermor
Hesketh, F.Z.S.

This Monkey was presented to Mr. Hesketh by the King of
Siam, and is, no doubt, from that country. It agrees generally with
Dr. Anderson’s figure (P. Z. 8. 1872, p. 203, pl. xii.), but is rather
darker in colour.

Dr. Anderson tells me he has now come to the conclusion that, in
spite of what he stated (P. Z. 8. 1874, p. 652), his Macacus brunneus
and M. arctoides of Is. Geoffr. are referable to the same species.
Dr. Anderson also takes Blyth’s view*, that M. speciosus of
Geoffr. St.-Hil. et F. Cuv. properly applies to this Siamese Monkey,
and not to the Japanese species figured under that name by
Temminck. ‘This, however, though probable, | may observe, can-
not be positively proved, as the name was established on a drawing,
and there is no existing type. I think, therefore, it would be better
to use Macacus arctoides (as the oldest name that can be certainly
attributed to this animal), and to call the Japanese species, which I
have lately figured (P. Z. 8. 1875, pl. xlvii.), M. fuscatus (as pro-
posed by Blyth /. s. c.), rejecting the term speciosus altogether.

* “ Mammals of Burmah,” in J, A. 8. B. No. i. 1875, p. 6.

P ZS 16 767i xe

IN
Tf

M&N-Hanhart imp

JSmit delet lith,
POLYBORUS THARUS, ver.

1876. | PROF. NEWTON ON THE DODO. 333

The present example has a deep-red face, but quite uniform non-
annellated hairs. The annellations, Dr. Anderson tells me, only
appear in the adult animal. ;

2. Two Caracaras (Polyborus) in a very remarkable plumage,
purchased of a dealer in Liverpool March 2ad, and stated to have
been received from ‘ Patagonia.” Their general form and size is
exactly that of Polyborus tharus; and I am of opinion, on the
whole, that they are merely young individuals of that species in an
abnormal phase of plumage; though it is right to say that other
naturalists who have seen them are inclined to believe that they
belong to a distinct species.

Mr. Smit’s drawing (Plate XXV.) gives a correct figure of these
curious birds. The plumage is of a nearly uniform milky white,
with yellowish shaft-stripes on the back and breast ; the naked cere
is flesh-coloured, the bill greenish yellow; the feet are nearly white ;
but the iris is dark brown. It will be observed that the tail is im-
perfect.

3. A lead-coloured Falcon (Hypotriorchis concolor), presented
March 3rd by Mr. A. F. Allman, having been captured on board a
vessel on its passage down the Mozambique Channel. This is an
immature bird, nearly in the plumage figured by Schlegel and
Pollen (Orn. Madagase. pl. xii.), and is the first example we have
received of this scarce species.

4. Three Sirens (Stren lacertina, Linn.), from South Carolina,
presented by Mr. G. &. Maingault, Curator of the Museum of
Natural History, Charleston, March 29th. Mr. Maingault has on
a previous occasion transmitted to us an example of this rare and
singular Batrachian; but these are the first that have reached us
alive.

5. A South-American Flamingo (Phenicopterus ignipalliatus),
from the Upper Amazon, acquired by purchase March 29th. The
individual assigned to this species in 1871 (P. Z.S. 1871, p. 627),
which was guite young when received, and is now adult, is certainly
not of this species, but either a small individual of P. antiquorum or
one of the so-called P. minor; so that the present example is the
first of the present species we have received. The bird is very
remarkable for its party-coloured legs, the greater part of the toes
and tibio-tarsal joimt being of a bright scarlet.

Professor Newton, V.P., exhibited a small volume, belonging to
the Rev. Richard Hooper, of Upton Rectory, near Didcot, and
remarked : —

*« This little book has been kindly lent to me by its owner, who
has before interested himself in enquiries after the Dodo (Didus
ineptus)*. It is obviously the same work as that described by
Broderip in our ‘ Transactions’ (iv. p. 183), but an entirely different
and, so far as I can learn, a hitherto unknown edition of it.
Broderip’s copy was published, he says, at Amsterdam, by Abraham
Wolfgangh, in 1662. Mr. Hooper’s is without date, and was published
at the same place by ‘Abraham en Jan de Wees, Boek-verkoopers,

* Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (2) iii. p, 259.

334 MR. R. B, SHARPE ON A HAWK-OWL. [ Apr. 4,

inde 4 Evangeliste.’ Internal evidence fails to show more than
that it did not appear before 1643, occurrences in which year are
several times mentioned in its pages (e. g. pp. 261 and 345); and on
a fly-leaf are the initials ‘ R. L.’ and the date ‘ 1676.’ NowI am
informed by Mr. Bradshaw, the Librarian of the University of Cam-
bridge, that A. de Wees is known to have published an edition of
this work (which I should have said is a translation and amplifi-
cation of Pliny’s Natural History) in 1662, the same year that
Wolfgangh did. But the volume I have here is not that edition,
and must therefore be either an earlier or a later one. I am inclined
to believe the former, (1) because, as I have already said, no year
later than 1643 is mentioned in it, and (2) because the figure of the
Dodo which it contains (at p. 374) is unquestionably of cognate
origin with that given in the rare edition of Bontekoe’s Voyage
(p. 7), which I now exhibit. This edition of Bontekoe is thought
by Strickland * to have been published ‘a year or two” subse-
quently to 1646. Comparing the two figures now before you, I
think you will admit that the copper-plate of the Pliny has not been
copied from the woodcut of the Bontekoe, but the woodcut from the
copper-plate ; and if so, the impression in Mr. Hooper’s Plinyt+ is the
earliest we yet know of this very singular figure. It is unfortunate
that the fate of Broderip’s copy is unknown to me; nor am I aware
of the existence of a second copy of that (Wolfgangh’s) edition.
Both in the title-page and in the text there are many typographical
differences between the two editions, if the extracts reprinted in our
‘Transactions’ may be trusted ; but these differences seem to have
no scientific interest, however valuable they may be to bibliographers,
and I will not trouble you with them.”

Mr. R. Bowdler Sharpe, F.Z.S., exhibited a specimen of a Hawk-
Owl (Surnia ulula), belonging to Mr. James Rawlence, of Bulbridge-
within-Salisbury. It was shot by a Mr. Long several years ago near
Amesbury, in Wiltshire, and was given by him to Mr. Rawlence, in
whose collection it remained till Mr. Mansell-Pleydell happened to
see it, and brought it to London for identification. The specimen was
very interesting as being the first British-killed specimen of the true
Swedish Surnia ulula. It would be seen, on reference to the ‘ Birds
of Europe,’ that all the specimens of Hawk-Owls hitherto killed in
Great Britain have belonged to the American form, Surnia funerea,
with the exception of one bird shot in Shetland, which was probably
the Swedish bird; this, however, could not be ascertained, as the

* «The Dodo’ &e. p. 63.

t The full title of the volume is C. PLINI SECUNDI Des wydt-vermaerden
Natuur-kondigers vyf Boecken. Handelende van de Nature, I. Van de Menschen.
II. Van de vieryoetige en kruypende Dieren. III. Van de Vogelen. IV. Van
de kleyne Beestjes of Ongedierten. V. Van de Visschen, Oesters, Kreeften, &c.
Hier zijn by-gevoeght de Schriften van verscheyden andere oude Autheuren
de Natuur der Dieren aengaende. En nu in desen laetsten Druck wel het
vierde part vermeerdert, uyt verscheyden nieuwe Schryvers en eygen onderyin-
dinge: en met veel kopere Platen verciert. t AMSTERDAM. By Abraham en
Jan de Wees, Boek-verkoopers / inde 4 Evangeliste.

J Smit hth

ANATOMY OF PLOTUS ANHINGA

Fibrous loop, ossiiied
we the vier spectes.
Tendon whick ruzs

wiki tibrous loop,
here removed trom th

Seen sane

“VONIHNV SALTOTa FO ANOIVNG

dum qzeyuey wy way

D
te Yi
Salon

Wh

by woo ys pun F

FRSA PAID TERESA

uondasud || d

PZS 1876 Pl XXvM ~

Hanhart imp.

TSmart lth

ANHINGA

)

x

FPS Oia

ANATOMY OF

1876. ] ON THE ANATOMY OF PLOTUS ANHINGA. ' 335

skin had been destroyed by moth. The present was therefore the
first authentic introduction of the Surnia ulula into this country.
The Hawk-Owls of America and Europe were, Mr. Sharpe said,
searcely distinct species, but tolerably recognizable races.

Tne following Papers were read :—

1. Notes on the Anatomy of Plotus anhinga. By A. H.
Garrop, M.A., F.Z.S., Prosector to the Society.

[Received March 31, 1876.]
(Plates XXVI., XXVII., XXVIII.)

The Darter is one of those birds whose anatomy, with the
exception of its skeleton, is comparatively little known; I therefore
take the present opportunity of describing the organs and some
of the most important muscles of Plotus anhinga from the two
specimens which were recently living in the Society’s collection, and
which, from my prosectorial advantages, it has been my good
fortune to be able to dissect.

On December 28th, 1872, the Society became possessed, for the
first time, by purchase, of a male specimen of Plotus anhinga,
which died on the 17th of this month, with general jaundice and
distention of the gall-bladder from obstruction of the common bile-
duct. The second specimen, a female, was purchased on the 30th
of September, 1875; it was never quite healthy, and died on the
7th of February, without any special organic lesions, but with a
dropsical condition of the subcutaneous areolar tissues, frequently
found in Steganopod birds. It is this second specimen which I
first dissected ; and the other coming to hand, opportunely for me,
has enabled me to verify my observations.

Pterylographically, there is nothing for me to add to the results
arrived at by Nitzsch*. ‘The skin is not in the least pneumatic, in
which respect it contrasts greatly with Sula and Pelecanus, and
agrees with Phalacrocorax.

With reference to the anatomy of its circulatory organs, it is to
be noted that Plotus anhinga possesses only a single carotid artery,
the left. In Sula bassana, Phalacrocorax carbo and P. lugubris,
Fregata aquila, and Phaethon there aretwo. In Sula fusca (a speci-
men in very bad immature plumage from Port Lemon, Porto Rico)
the left carotid only exists, as also in Pelecanus rufescens and P.
onocrotalus.

As to the respiratory organs, from Plate XXVIII. fig. 3 it can
be seen that the syrinx is in no way peculiar, a single pair of intrinsic
lateral muscles being present. By the side of it I have figured the
lower portion of the windpipe of a male Gannet (Sula bassana), in
which a pair of fatty bodies are developed just above the bifurcation
of the bronchi, the like of which I have not elsewhere seen.

* Pterylography, Ray Society's Translation, edited by P. L. Sclater, F.R.S.,
p- 151.

336 MR. A. H. GARROD ON THE [Apr. 4,

Osteologically Plotus anhinga deserves some special attention.
Brandt * in his valuable memoir on avian anatomy has fully
described and figured the skeleton. Nevertheless from his draw-
ing of the vertebrae of the cervical region it is evident that he was
not thoroughly acquainted with the peculiarities of their mutual
articulation.

Eyton 7 describes briefly the osteology of Plotus nove-hollandice,
but does not give figures. The specimen he refers to is in the Col-
lege-of-Surgeons’ Museum (No. 1179.4). His drawing of Phalacro-
corax cristatus t, however, makes it apparent that he fully realizes
the peculiarity of the mutual relationships of the cervical vertebrae
in its close allies.

W. Donitz§ draws attention to a peculiarity in the cervical region
of Plotus levaiilantit which will be referred to further on. This
peculiarity is not represented in Brandt’s figure of P. anhinga; and
it is not to be found in either of the Society’s specimens, one being
at least three and a half years old.

In speaking of Phalacrocorax cristatus Mr. Eyton remarks,
“The tubercle on the upper edge of the occipital bone has a pointed,
movable, triangular process attached to it, which I suspect has also
been the case with my specimen of Plotus, but has been lost.”

In the Society’s female specimen there is a fibro-cartilaginous
similarly situated process, not more than one sixth of an inch long,
which is ossified in the evidently older male. In his notes on the
anatomy of the Cormorant, Hunter tells us || that ‘a small bone,
about an inch long, passes back from the os occipitis and gives .
origin to the temporal muscle, which is very strong.’ The same
bone in the Darter, although comparatively not so long, performs
the same function, the superfical temporal muscles meeting behind
the skull along the median raphe, which becomes ossified to form the
above-mentioned bony style in the adult bird. (See Plate XXVIII.
fig 1 a.)

Before commencing the description of the cervical articulations of
the Darters, it may be mentioned that the same condition is observed,
only in a less marked degree, in the Cormorants, and still less in the
Gannets and Pelicans.

The first eight cervical vertebre (including the atlas and axis),
when articulated together in such a way that all the articular sur-
faces are in their proper relations one to the other, form a continuous
curve with a strong concavity forwards. So considerable is this
curve, that when the beak of the bird is horizontal the axis of the
peculiarly long eighth vertebra is parallel to that of the skull, or
very nearly so. ‘The curve is not a part of a circle, but is one
which gradually augments in acuteness from above downwards, its
most considerable development being between the 7th and 8th ver-
tebree, which are consequently articulated at a considerable angle

* Mémoires de l’Acad. Imp. des Sciences de St. Pétersbourg, tom. v. 6eme
Série, Sect. d. Se. Nat. 1839.

ft Osteologia Avium, p. 218. t Loe, cit. pl. v. f. 1.

§ Archiv fiir Anat. u. Physiol. 1873, p. 357.

|| Essays and Observations, edited by Prof. Owen (1861), vol. ii. p. 328.

1876.} ANATOMY GF PLOTUS ANHINGA. 337

with one another, more strongly marked than that between the 5th
and 7th, and this, again, more decided than that between the ith
and 6th, and so on.

The 8th and 9th vertebre articulate so as to form an angle exactly
the opposite in direction—namely, with its genu directed forwards
instead of backwards. The same is the case with the 9th and 10th,
the 10th and 11th, the Lith and 12th, the 12th and 13th; more
slightly so between the 13th and 14th, and the 14th and 15th; whilst
the 15th and following until the last (the 20th), which with the one
above it carries imperfect ribs, form almost a straight line with one
another, being slightly bowed, with the convexity directed backwards.

With the exception of the atlas and the 6th and 7th, the cervical
vertebree are peculiarly elongate, the 8th being more so than the
others, as may be seen in Plate XXVI. fig. 1.

Donitz figures a pair of accessory bony bridges on the dorsal sur-
face of the vertebra following the most lengthy oue, which must
evidently therefore be the 9th. He, however, speaks of it as the
8th, which seems to me to be an error depending on the omission of
the consideration of the atlas, because in Plotus anhinga (both
from Brandt’s figure and my specimens) it is most certainly the 9th,
as it is in Plotus nove-Aollandie, Phalacrocorax carbo, and P.
lugubris. I have, however, not seen Plotus levaillantii.

Donitz attributes the peculiar kink in the neck of the Darters,
which it is impossible to obliterate without lacerating the surround-
ing muscles, to the presence of the bony bridges he describes ; in
this, however, he is mistaken, it depending on the above-mentioned
peculiarity in the 8th cervical vertebra, by which it is angularly
articulated with the 7th and 9th vertebrz, the upper gene being
posterior, and the lower anterior. In further verification of this, it
may be stated that in P. anhinga the bony bridges do not exist, and
yet the kinking is most strongly marked.

Myologically the cervical region of the Darter is very peculiar, on
account of the great concentration of its muscular mechanism to-
wards the thoracic end of that segment of the body, the tendons
from them running lengthy courses up the neck. The anterior and
the posterior cervical muscles will be considered separately.

Anterior cervical region.—Normally in birds the longus colli
anterior, or great front flexor muscle of the neck, commences as a
series of thin tendinous slips from the middle of the bodies of the
first two or three vertebrae which carry complete ribs (true dorsals).
The fibres diverge and ascend in such a manner that they form a
bilateral median mass acutely triangular at its lower end. They
receive continual accessions from the bodies and hemapophyses of
the cervical vertebrae, ending in slips which are attached, succes-
sively, to the apices of the anterior transverse processes three or
four higher than the vertebrae whence they sprang. Through the
whole length of the cervical region they are of very similar mass,
and therefore help to maintain the otherwise fairly uniform diameter
of the vertebral column *.

* Vide Owen on Apteryx, Trans. Z. 8. vol. iii. pl. 33, p. 310.

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. XXII. 22

338 MR. A. H. GARROD ON THE [Apr. 4,

In Plotus this uniformity is considerably disturbed, irrespective
of the above-described kink, by the excessive development of the
longus colli in its lower almost interthoracic portion, as well as,
though to a less degree, by the enlargement of the longus colli
posterior behind.

In Plotus anhinga, as above stated, there are 20 cervical vertebre.
A small slip of the longus colli arises from the body of the third
dorsal vertebra, which is inserted into the transverse process of the
17th cervical. Above, and in eontact with this, is another similar
slip to the 16th cervical. From the bodies of the 2nd and Ist
dorsal vertebrze, as well as from the antero-median portions of the
six lower cervical vertebree, a large muscle arises on each side, in
layers (somewhat resembling the layers formed by the basally
expanded petioles of an onion bulb)—the lower being partially en-
closed in the upper—which ultimately form a bipenniform mass
with a tendon running axially through it and continually receiving
additions in the form of outer coverings of tendinous tissue arising
from the enclosing muscles, till it forms a strong single tendon which
courses up the front of the neck, close to the middle line on each
side, to be inserted into the downward-directed, peculiarly long
hamapophysial spine of the 8th cervical vertebra, and gives off slips,
on its way up, to the serially homologous processes of the 9th and
10th vertebree. A similar tendinons slip to the 11th vertebra has
an independent origin from the bodies of the 15th and 16th verte-
bree, internal to the main muscular mass, which is almost the size of
a lemon, and with its fellow of the opposite side, of much the same
shape, fillmg up and projecting beyond the slight anterior con-
cavity above mentioned, formed by the mutual articulations of the
15th, 16th, 17th, 18th, and 19th cervical vertebree. (In Plate XXVI.
figs. 1 & 2, these different details are clearly shown.)

Posterior cervical region.—Here there is an exaggerated develop-
ment of muscle in the juxta-thoracic part, opposite the similar
enlargement in front, although it is not so considerable behind.
The longus colli posterior is the muscle which is excessively de-
veloped. It becomes differentiated from the posterior dorso-spinal
mass opposite the 14th and 15th cervical vertebrae to run up the
neck in the form of a fleshy belly which receives additional origins,
in the form of muscular slips, from the vertebree as high as the 9th
cervical. Where the slip from the 10th vertebra (which is a small
one) joins it, the muscle becomes tendinous, forming a rounded cord,
to the inner side of which the large fasciculus from the 9th vertebra
is attached.

A reference to the account given above of the disposition of the
vertebree in this region will make it evident that the tendon of the
longus colli posterior must make a considerable backward turn op-
posite the transverse line of articulation between the 8th and 9th
cervicals—because there the two bones meet at a considerable angle,
with the genu directed forwards. This being the case, some special
mechanism is essential to prevent the tendon from breaking away
from the vertebral column when the muscle with which it is

1876.] ANATOMY OF PLOTUS ANHINGA. 339

associated contracts. In fact, a pulley has to be formed round
which the tendon may turn in the same manner that at the knee,
in birds, the diceps cruris is able to act upon the fibula from a point
situated some way down it, because it is bound close to the greatly
bent knee-joint by the well-known sling-band in that region. In
Plate XXVI. figs. 1 & 2, the sling-band here described is clearly
shown.

A similar sling-band is found in the posterior cervical region of
those birds which have any great backward curve of the neck, it in
the Gannets being also associated with the 9th vertebra. It is
nothing more than a Specialization and strengthening of the aponeu-
rosis which is always found covering the muscles, Opposite the
place where the strain occurs. In Phalacrocorax carbo the general
sheath is strong, and no specialized band ean be distinguished.

In Plotus auhinga this sling-band is attached at its inner end,
with its fellow of the opposite side, to the middle line of the posterior
surface of the neural arch of the 9th vertebra, about halfway be-
tween its proximal and distal extremities ; whilst’ at its outer end it
is fixed to the tubercle which is situated just outside the upper arti-
cular process of the same vertebra, a backward and slanting loop of
tendinous tissue joining the two (vide Plate XXVI. figs. 1 & 2).

It is the ossification of this Just-deseribed tendinous loop which

constitutes Donitz’s bridge in P. levaillantii and P. nove-hollandie.
“In neither of the Society’s specimens of P. anhinga, nor in that
figured by Brandt, nor in‘a Specimen of the same species seen by
Donitz himself, is this bridge ossified. It may therefore be that in
fee anhinga it remains tendinous ; or, less probably, it has happened
that the four specimens inspected have none of them been adult birds.
One is at least 32 years old, we know. :

Through this bridge, as has been briefly desevibed by Donitz, from
a dried specimen, the tendon of the longus colli posterior passes—
which it does before it receives the considerable fleshy fasciculus
originating from the neural arch of the ninth vertebra, as is rendered
evident in Plate XXVI. figs. 1 & 2.

The tendon, augmented by fibres from the just-mentioned addi-
tional origin, passes up the back of the neck, side by side with its
fellow, to end by being inserted into the posterior surface of the
lower articular process of the axis vertebra, it, in its course, sending
small tendinous slips to the corresponding parts of the third and
fourth cervical vertebree. ‘The tendon is peculiar in being ossified
where it is opposite the bodies of the vertebrae with which it is re-
lated, and supple at the joints, which makes it appear to be com-
posed of alternate bony and fibrous elements when it is removed from
the body. From the fifth, fourth, and third vertebree short
muscular fibres ascend to join the corresponding portions of the
main tendon in single penniform series.

It is nearly always the case in avian anatomy that the inner fibres
of the cervical portion of the longus colli posterior muscle become
differentiated to form the digastrique du cou of Cuvier, better known
tous as the biventer cervicis, a muscle one peculiarly interesting

22%

340 MR. A. H. GARROD ON THE (Apr. 4,

modification of which, in the genus Ceryle among the Alcedinide,
has been described and figured by Dr. Cunningham in the Society’s
‘ Proceedings’*. This, by the way, I may mention, I have had the
opportunity of fully verifying. Meckel, in his ‘ General Treatise on
Comparative Anatomy,’ tells us? that he found it at its minimum of
development in the Gallinze, the Goose, and the Cormorant. Ina
specimen of Sula fusca, as well as in Phalacrocorax carbo, it is
present, but extremely small, I find. It is entirely absent in Plotus
anhinga, the longus colli posterior (cervicalis ascendens, Meckel)
entirely ceasing at the lower margin of the axis vertebra, in the
tendon above described.

There are other myological features deserving of special notice in
the thoracic and crural regions of the Darters.

The great pectoral muscle is composed of two independent
layers :—a superficial large one, arising from the inferior border of the
sternum, its carina, and from the outer border of the furcula; and a
deep one from the upper two thirds of the deeper part of the carina,
superficial to the pectoralis secundus, and from the symphysial half
of the outer border of the furcula. The superficial layer is inserted by
a broad linear attachment to the pectoral ridge of the humerus, whilst
the deep layer ends in a rounded tendon which commences at the
axillary margin of the triangular muscle, with which it is associated,
and receives the fibres of the remainder of the muscle in its course
to its attachment into the lower end of the pectoral ridge of the
humerus, beyond the insertion of the lowest fibres of the superficial
layer. In Plate XXVII. this arrangement is clearly indicated. A
condition exactly similar to this is observed in Phaéthon, Pelecanus,
Sula, the Cathartide, all the Storks, and the Petrels, and in no
other birds as far as 1am aware. In Phalacrocoraz it is not easily
recognized.

As in Phalacrocorax and Phaéthon, but not in Sula or in Pele-
canus, the biceps muscle of the arm sends a fleshy slip to the middle of
the patagial tendon of the tensor patagii longus (Plate XXVII. 6.8).

No trace of the expansor secundariorum{ muscle could be de-
tected.

As in all the other Steganopods, the tensor fascia of the thigh
does not cover the biceps cruris in the least.

The ambiens is of fair size; it deeply grooves the large ossified
patella; and some of the fibrous ligament overlapping this groove
shows traces of ossification ; so that in aged birds the groove may be
converted into a foramen, as is always the case in Phalacrocoraz,
where the thus formed foramen is far from superficial (vide Plate
XXVIII. figs. 5,6, &7). Ina specimen of Pelecanus rufescens the
patella was not ossified.

The semitendinosus is very large, composed of parallel fibres, and
without any accessory head developed to join it. ‘The femoro-caudal
also, as in all other true Steganopods, lacks an aecessorius ; it closely

* P.Z.8. 1870, p. 280.

+ French edition, Paris, 1829-30, vol. vi. p. 11.
t Vide ante, p. 193.

1876.] ANATOMY OF PLOTUS ANHINGA. 341

resembles that muscle in Sula and Pelecanus, being separated from
the obturator externus by a well-marked interval, which is not the
case in Phalacrocorax*. It is to be remembered, as I have had the
opportunity of stating elsewhere+, that in Fregata aquila the semi-
tendinosus is entirely absent, as in the Accipitres, whilst in Phaéthon
it has an accessory head as well as a considerable bulk itself, these
facts tending strongly to verify Brandt’s division of the Steganopods ¢
into three well-differentiated groups, of two of which the two above.
named genera are the only examples.

The alimentary canal of the Darter presents features of especial
interest, as in its stomach there is a modification in the structure of
the proventriculus not referred to in zoological works generally. It
is fully described by Mr. Macgillivray in Audubon’s ‘ Ornithological
Biography’ §, where an excellent figure illustrates the account. Mr.
Macgillivray also accurately describes most of the other viscera. He,
however, omits to refer to the hairy mat in the second stomach, which
latter viscus, he strangely says, is soft and smooth inside. The
observations here made, which are in accordance with those of Mr.
Macgillivray, cannot be considered de trop, as the extremely abnor-
mal conformation he describes required verification before it could
be accepted as not being merely an individual peculiarity.

The tongue, as an independent organ, does not exist. It is very
small in all Steganopods, but free at its anterior extremity ; smallest
proportionally in Pelecanus. In Plotus, however, it is not free at
its apex, it forming merely a longitudinal groove along the middle of
the floor of the mouth, and euding abruptly behind by a small trans-
verse slightly projecting ridge, 24 inches in front of the rima glot-
tidis, which is evidently the rudiment of the base of the organ. The
hyoid cornua, 13 inch long, running in the faucial membrane, here
meet and blend.

There is no crop; the cesophagus, however, is very dilatable. The
proventriculus does not form a zone, as is the rule: nor does it form
a patch, as in Struthio, Rhea, Chauna, and a few other birds; but
it forms a special gland-cavity into which the individual constituents
of the organ open. This cavity communicates with the digestive
tube by a small orifice which is situated on the right side of the
stomach, just below the commencement of the yellow dense charac-
teristic epithelium of the stomach in birds. Plate XXVIII. fig. 2
will assist in rendering this explanation more distinct.

The proventricular compartment is covered by peritoneum, is nearly
globose, about the size of a chestnut, and fixed to the right side of
the lower end of the cesophagus. On superficial inspection it looks
very like an enlarged spleen (that organ being subglobose in birds).
Its cavity is very small, being much encroached upon by the great
depth of the cylindrical glands which compose its walls. The yellow
stomach-epithelium surrounds its orifice aud goes no further. There
are no indications of additional proventricular glands at the lower

* Vide P. Z. 8. 1873, p. 636.
+ P.Z.8. 1873, p. 636, and 1874, p. 122,
t P.Z.8. 1874, p. 116. § Vol. iy. p. 158.

342 MR. A. H. GARROD ON THE [Apr. 4,

termination of the cesophagus, the epithelium in that part being quite
smooth and apparently squamous.

This further development in Plofus of a special and well-differen-
tiated gland-organ from what in other birds is a zone or a simple
circular patch of glands, is very similar to the equally uncommon
development of the cardiac eland-organ in the stomach of the
Manatee, which is most certainly only a modification of the similarly
situated gland-patch in the Dugong.

The stomach is not developed into a gizzard, its walls in no part
exceeding one sixth of an inch in thickness. It is divided into two
compartments, a cardiac and a pyloric, as is that of the Pelican.
The former of these corresponds to the gizzard in most birds, the
latter to the imperfectly formed cavity associated with the pyloric
valve in the Storks, Gannet, &c. (wide Plate XXVIII. fig. 2).

Of the stomach of the Pelican, Hunter tells us* that ‘it is oblong,
much in the direction of the cesophagus, with a little curve, smallest
at the lower end: it makes a quick turn and swells again into a
round bag; or it may be supposed that from the side near the
lower or smaller end is attached a bag whence the duodenum arises.”
In the Catalogue of the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons
(1852), Prof. Owen? remarks, with reference to a specimen (No. 519)
of the stomach of a Pelican (Pelecanus onocrotalus), ‘‘'The ceso-
phagus is continued into the proventriculus or glandular cavity,
without any marked constriction; and the latter passes insensibly
into the part analogous to a gizzard. This part communicates by a
transverse aperture with a small globular cavity, which is lined by a
vascular membrane, and communicates with the duodenum by a very
small oblique aperture. This superadded cavity renders the analogy
between this stomach and that of the Crocodile complete, with the
exception of the absence in the latter of distinctly developed gastric
glands. These, in the Pelican, are simple elongated follicles, closely
compacted together, and extended over a large surface.” In Plotus
the second cavity is similarly situated, intervening between the
stomach proper and the duodenum. The dense yellow epithelium
of the one, however, extends into the other, right up to the pyloric
valve. [It may be that in the specimen described by Prof. Owen .
the lining had been previously stripped off, which may have led to
the term vascular being applied to the mucous membrane of the
second stomach. |

Hunter, in his dissection of Su/a and Phalacrocorax, does not
mention the existence of asecond stomach; and I have not observed
or found recorded such an arrangement in either of those genera,
or in Phaéthon, or in Fregata.

In Plotus there is still another peculiarity which, as far as I know,
is found in only one other bird, namely Cathartes aura. In Audu-
bon’s ‘ Ornithological Biography ’ ¢, Mr. Macgillivray tells us that
in the stomach of C. aura “there is a pyloric lobe [second com-

* Hssays and Observations, Owen's edition, 1861.

+ Vol. i. Organs of Motion and Digestion,” p. 148.
{ Vol. v. p. 340.

1876.] ANATOMY OF PLOTUS ANHINGA. 343

partment] about half an inch in diameter, which is lined with bristly
hairs, They are all inserted at right angles to the surface, penetrate
to the base of the epithelium, and are of various lengths, some of
them not protruding beyond the surface, others upwards of half an
inch, of various colours, some black, generally tipped with whitish,
others light greyish yellow, ail thick at the base, and tapering to a
fine point. Being disposed in a regular manner, they might seem to
form a part of the organization of the stomach, and not to be, like
the hairs found in Cuculus canorus and Coccyzus americanus, merely
extraneous.” The pyloric orifice in Plotus anhinga, as is seen in
Plate XXVIII. fig. 2, is protected by a mat of lengthy hair-like pro-
cesses, much like cocoa-nut fibre, which nearly half fills the second
stomach. This second stomach is globose, and nearly an inch in
external diameter. Its dense lining-membrane is raised into short
rugz and tubercles, as is that of the first; and it is evidently a
modification of the epithelium which develops these tubercles in
the region of the pylorus which gives rise to the above-mentioned
mat-sieve. The hairs composing the mat are hispid, slender, and
about half an inch long. They arise from a surface a little less than
a square inch in area round the pylorus, which is in its centre.
They cease at the very margin of the small circular orifice, where
the commencement of the delicate mucous membrane of the duode-
num can be just seen. My friend, Mr. E. A. Schifer, Assistant Pro-
fessor of Physiology at University College, has very kindly examined
these hairs microscopically, and tells me that ‘they are much more
like true hairs, both in structure and mode of attachment, than they
are like the epithelial projections which are so often met with over
the filiform papillee of the human tongue, which, at first sight, they
much resemble. Like hairs, they consist of an outer ‘ cuticular’ part,
and an inner ‘fibrous’ part; and in some places there is also yet
another substance running along the middle of the fibrous part,
which might be compared to the medulla of a hair. The cuticular
part is much thicker in proportion than that of a cutaneous hair, and
forms here and there dentate projections at the sides of the filament.
The cuticle is continuous with the horny superficial portion of the
stratified epithelium which covers this part of the stomach ; in neither
can the outlines and nuclei of the component cells be distinctly seen,
the cells having blended into a nearly homogeneous substance. That
portion of the hair which extends below this into the deeper layers
of the epithelium, appears not to be covered with a prolongation of
the cuticle, but to be formed only of the fibrous part. This last-
named seems, like the fibrous or cortical constituent of a cutaneous
hair, to be composed of a closely set bundle of much elongated cor-
nefied epithelial cells, slightly larger than those of a cutaneous hair,
and with their extremities not fusiform (as in that) but truncated.
The number in a cross section varies according to the size of the
filament. They may, in many, be seen projecting at the end a little
beyond the cuticular part.

“The roots of the gastric hairs are so closely set as fo occupy the
greater portion of the mucous membrane, so that the connective

344 ON THE ANATOMY OF PLOTUS ANHINGA. (Apr. 4,

tissue of the corium, which occupies the intermediate space, is very
smallinamount. Between the tissue and the hair-root is seen a layer
of columnar epithelium cells, which in some places are of considerable
length. They are continuous towards the surface with the deeper
ceils of the stratified epithelium. They represent the ‘root-sheaths ’
of the cutaneous hair, and seem to have undergone a horny meta~
morphosis.

«At their extreme ends the roots are entirely different from those
of the cutaneous hairs. There is no hair-knob and no papilla; but
the root generally breaks up into two, three, or more short rootlets,
each of which tapers to a pointed extremity. This, at least, is the
appearance in vertical section ; but transverse sections show that this
branching of the hair-root has, at all events in the first instance,
more of a laminated character.

“ These rootlets are covered hy a layer of cubical epithelium cells,
which are continuous with the columnar cells surrounding the hair-
root. The latter, as before remarked, is formed merely by the fibrous
substance or cortical portion of the hair; and the fibres which com-
pose this would therefore seem to be in some way produced by these
cells.

“ Some few hairs seem to end by a single tapering rootlet, but most
of them spread out and branch in the way described.”

This peculiar hairy mat must act as an excellent sieve to prevent
the entrance of solid particles, fish-bones, &c. into the narrow in-
testines.

The small intestine is 55 inches long in the female, and 40 inches
in the male; and it is not capacious. The duodenal loop measures
5 inches in each limb. The left lobe of the bilobed liver is about
half the size of the right; and a gall-bladder of considerable size is
present. The large intestine is 6 inches long in the female, and
3 inches in the male. There is only a single caecum, exactly like
that in the Ardeidze, in my specimens. This conformation of cecum
is found in no other Steganopod bird, there being two ceca in all the
other genera. These, in Pelecanus, are a little over an inch in length,
in Sula slightly shorter, whilst in Phalacrocorar, Fregata, and
Phaéthon they are simple knob-like bodies, nearly globose in form.
The rudiment of the vitelline duct is persistent.

In the distance of its diminutive caecum from the cloaca (in other
words, in the length of the large intestine) Plotus differs slightly
from its allies. In Pelecanus the large intestine is under 2 inches in
length ; and it is much the same in Sula. In Phaéthon it does not
exceed a quarter of an inch in length. It, however, differs con-
siderably in my two specimens, being in both longer than the same
in Audubon’s specimen.

In the urino-genital system of Plotus anhinga, in both sexes, the
ducts open in the normal manner into the cloaca, just above its
lower orifice. This orifice, however, is not on the surface, but is into
a cavity, behind the cloaca, which opens externally quite close to the
place where the two communicate. Except for this nearly marginal
orifice the second cavity is a cecal sac, oval in shape, aud about

1876.] MR, DRESSER ON THE BLACK AND HAZEL Grouse. 345

13 inch high, covered at its blind end with the crypts of shallow
glands, which also run down its sides. That it is a modification of
the éursa Fabricii cannot be doubted.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Puiatr XXVI.

Fig. 1. View of left side of neck of Plotus anhinga, dissected. J.c.a. longus
colli anterior muscle ; /.c.p. longus colli posterior muscle. The fibrous
representative of Donitz’s bridge is seen attached to the ninth cervical
vertebra.

2. View of part of the posterior region of the neck of Plotus anhinga. The
roman figures refer to the cervical vertebre counted from the head.
Donitz’s bridge is seen attached to the ninth; and at a@ is also seen a
fibrous band, which is of similar function, attached to the eleventh.
At 6 is seen the fasciculus of the tendon of the posterior neck-muscle
which traverses the fibrous loop, which latter has been removed on
the left side.

Puate XXVIII.

View of the anterior thoracic region of Plotus anhinga, dissected to show
the superficial (p. 1, 1) and deep layer (p. 1, 2) of the pectoralis major
muscle on the right side, as well as the pectoralis minor (p. 2) on the
left. The insertion of the deeper layer of the pectoralis major is seen
to be surrounded by the much more considerable mass of the similar
portion of the superficial stronger layer. The triceps (¢) and the
biceps (5) of the cubitus are seen on the right side, as is the patagial
slip (0. s) of the latter. The sternum (s¢.) is superficially bound to
the lower end of the coracoid bone by the anterior sterno-coracoid
ligament (ant. st. cor. lig), which is particularly powerful in the Ste-
ganopods and Storks.

Puate XXVIII.

Fig. 1. View of top of head of Plotus anhinga, showing the occipital style (a)
and the temporal muscle (7) arising from it on one side.

2. Stomach of Plotus anhinga, inside view.

3. Anterior view of the lower end of the trachea in Plotus anhinga.

4. The same in Sula bassana.

5 & 6. Top and side view of the patella in Phalacrocorax carbo, showing
the canal for the ambiens muscle. N.B. The side view (fig. 6) is acci-
dentally drawn with the base uppermost.

7. Front of patella in Plotus anhinga deeply grooved by ambiens muscle.

2. Remarks on a Hybrid between the Black Grouse and the
Hazel Grouse. By H. E. Dressnr, F.Z.8.

Amongst the Gallinaceous birds, and especially amongst the
Ducks, we not unfrequently find wild hybrids; and not a few of
these hybrids have during the last year or two been exhibited at the
meetings of this Society—but none, I may almost venture to say, so
interesting as the bird I have now the pleasure to exhibit before the
meeting; for there can be no doubt that it is a wild cross between
the Black Grouse (Tetrao tetriv) and the Hazel Grouse (Bonasa
betulina), a cross that has, so far as I can ascertain, never yet been
recorded. The Rackelvogel of the Swedes, the hybrid between the
Capercailly and the Black Grouse, is by no means uncommon,
especially in places where the males of the Capercailly have been

346 MR. DRESSER ON THE BLACK AND HAZEL GROUSE. [Apr. 4,

shot off ; and I have seen several interesting hybrids between the
Black Grouse and the Willow Grouse. Mr. Collett names an
instance of a male Willow Grouse having been seen to pair with a
barndoor Fowl; and I have heard of the Black Grouse crossing with
the Red Grouse; but I have never seen a specimen of a hybrid between
these two; and I may add that I can find no record in the works of
the Scandinavian authors of a hybrid between the Hazel Grouse and
the Black Grouse having hitherto been met with. The specimen
exhibited belongs to John Flower, Esq., F.Z.S., who has intrusted
it to me for examination and exhibition, and who gives me the fol-
lowing particulars respecting it :—

“T bought this bird of W. Smithers, poulterer, near the Cannon-
Street Railway Station, on March 16, 1876. It had passed through
several hands before it came to Mr. Smithers; and all that I have
as yet been able to learn of its past history is that it came from
Norway. Some one who has had the bird seems to have been
aware that it was something out of the common, as I found a piece
of cotton wool had been placed in the cesophagus, no doubt to pre-
vent the feathers being soiled by the escape of matter through the
mouth ; and judging from its appearance, the wool had been there
some considerable time.

“The weight of the bird, which was in very fair condition, was a
trifle over 1lb. 90z. The weight of a grey hen, which I weighed
for the purpose of comparison, [ found to be 1 lb. 102 oz.

“On dissection the hybrid proved to be amale. The intestines
and ceca were as nearly as possible exactly like those of the grey
hen, except that the intestine of the hybrid (measured from the
gizzard to the lower end of the czeca) was 3 inches shorter than in
the grey hen, the length between these points being, for the grey
hen 54 inches, for the hybrid 51 inches. The length of the ceca
in both was 24 inches.

“The crop was empty; but the gizzard contained a quantity of
small stones, most of them of white quartz, and a quantity of twigs
and vegetable matter, including one bud of a birch catkin. 1 turned
the contents of the gizzard out into a small basin of warm water ;
and these, when stirred, emitted rather a sweet aromatic smell,
which must have arisen from the vegetable matter which the bird
had eaten.

“Thinking something might be learnt from the colour of the
pectoral muscles when cooked, I had the muscles of the hybrid and
of the grey hen baked. Those of the grey hen then presented the
usual contrast characteristic of the Black Grouse ; but the muscles
of the hybrid were nearly white, the lower muscle being slightly
brighter in colour than the upper one. ‘The flesh of the hybrid
was much inferior in flavour to that of the black Grouse, being
rather dry and tasteless, much like the flesh of a red-legged
Partridge. I have preserved the breast-bone and pelvis; and they
accompany this memorandum.”

I may remark that, so far as my own experience goes, and from
what I have ascertained from the various Swedish and Russian

WENAPH NLT IN

KOGTa SESS Zee

1876.] MR. E.R. ALSTON ON THE GENUS DASYPROCTA. 347

sportsmen who have had ample opportunities of studying the habits
of the Hazel Grouse, it is always monogamous, and that when -
paired the pair remain strictly faithful to each other. Therefore I
have never heard of a Hazel cock having been seen ata “lek” of
the Black Grouse, though the male Willow Grouse has been known
to attend there, and to take ample advantage of his opportunities.
I can only surmise that the present hybrid has been the result of a
Hazel cock which had failed in finding a mate, having paired with
some Grey Hen met with during his solitary wanderings.

8. On the Genus Dasyprocta; with Description of a New
Species. By Epwarp R. Auston, F.L.S., F.G.S., F.Z.S.

[Received March 11, 1876. ]
(Plate XXIX.)

My attention has been lately turned to the Mammals of Central
America ; and I have hence been led to review all the known species
of the genus Dasyprocta, concerning the characters and distribution
of which a good deal of confusion has existed. Through the kind-
ness of Mr. Sclater and Dr. Giinther I have been enabled to com-
pare the skins of a numberof Agoutis which have died from time to
time in the Society’s Gardens with the specimens in the British
Museum, and believe that I am now able to atrange the various
forms with some approach to general correctness.

The range of the genus Dasyprocta extends throughout a con-
siderable part of the Neotropical Region, from the Antilles and
Mexico in the north to Brazil and Paraguay in the south. Within
these limits there exist a number of well-marked but nearly allied
geographical races, of which eight or nine appear to deserve specific
distinction. As might be expected in such closely related forms, I
have been unable to find any constant cranial distinctions, and have
been compelled to depend on outward characters, of which I have
found the coloration of the long hairs of the rump to be the most
trustworthy. Owing to the confusion which has existed as to some
of these species, and to the carelessness of collectors and museum-
- curators as to locality, it is very difficult to make out the exact dis-
tribution of the various races of Agouti; but I have endeavoured to
note what little information we possess.

The following, then, is the principal synonymy, with brief
diagnoses and habitats, of the various Agoutis, beginning with a well-
marked species, which appears never to have been described, and
which I propose to call :—

1. Dasyprocra IsrHMica, sp. n.

Fur ringed with black and yellow ; rump black, more or less
washed with orange or yellow, the long hairs being black at the
base, scarcely annulated except close to the tips, which are broadly

348 MR. E. R. ALSTON ON THE GENUS DAsypRoctTaA. [Apr. 4,

margined with the light colour; feet dusky. Length about 22 in.,
hind foot 4°25 in.

Hab. Central America.

This Agouti is at once distinguished from all the others which have
black and yellow annulated fur, by the long hairs of the rump being
black with broad pale tips. Seven or eight individuals of both sexes
agree in all essential characters, but differ slightly in the colour of
the tips of the long hairs, and consequently in the general colour of
the rump. The exact distribution of the species is still uncertain.
Several living examples have been received from Colon by the
Society, which have hitherto been referred to D. punctata* ; and it
appears probable that the Agouti of Costa Rica which Dr. von
Frantzius calls D. eristata+ wiil prove to be the same.

2. D. CRISTATA.

Cavia cristata (Geoffroy), Desmarest, Nouv. Dict. d’ Hist. Nat.
i. p: 215 (1816, descr. orig. ).

Dasyprocta cristata, Desmarest, Mamm. p. 358; Waterhouse,
Mamm. ii, p. 383; Wagner, Suppl. Schreb. Saugeth. iv. p. 41.

’ Dasyprocta antillensis, Sclater, P.Z.S. 1874, p. 666, pl. Ixxxii
(descr. orig.).

Fur very dark, ringed with black and reddish or brownish yellow,
nuchal tuft and rump black, the long hairs either dusky or obscurely
ringed at the base. Length about 18 in. ; hind foot 3°75 in.

Hab. West Indies.

The West-Indian Agouti for which Mr. Sclater proposed the pro-
visional name of D. antillensis, is identical with the specimens which
Mr. Waterhouse identified with Desmarest’s D. cristata, and seems
to agree perfectly with the original descriptions. The phrase pelage
noirdtre, piqueté de roux, is particularly characteristic; and I am
convinced that Mr. Waterhouse was correct, although the figure in
F. Cuvier and Geoffroy’s ‘ Mammiféres’ (iii. livr. 52) gives the idea
of a lighter animal. ‘The species was founded on a pair of Agoutis in
the Jardin des Plantes, which were said to have been received from
Surinam. ‘There can be little doubt, however, that this was an error,
and that the species is a strictly insular race. The Society has
received living specimens from St. Vincent and St. Lucia; and there
are skins from St. Thomas in the British Museum. In one example
from the first-named island, the hairs of the rump are obscurely
ringed at the base, and the nuchal crest is but little developed.

3. D. VARIEGATA.

Dasyprocta varieyata, Von Tschudi, Faun. Peru. p. 190, pl. xvi.
(1844, descr. orig.). .

Fur dusky at base, black, ringed with pale yellow only near the
tip, the long hairs of the nape and rump entirely black, or with a
narrow pure white ring near the tip. Length about 22 inches, hind
foot 4 inches.

Hab. Peru, New Granada, Panama?

* Cf. Sclater, P. Z. 8. 1874, p. 666. + Cf. Wiegm. Arch. 1869, p. 274.

1876.] | MR. E.R. ALSTON ON THE GENUS DASYPROCTA. 349

Mr. Waterhouse united the Peruvian Agouti with D. cristata; but
it is a well-marked species, easily distinguishable by the fur being
annulated only near the tip. According to Von T'schudi it inhabits the
forests and “ceja” regions of Eastern Peru, to an altitude of 6000
feet above the sea. The Society has received living specimens from
Colon, the exact locality of which is uncertain ; and Mr. E. Gerrard,
Jun., has kindly lent me two fine examples collected by Mr. Salmon
at Medellin, near Antioquia, New Granada. It is probable that the
Agouti obtained by Mr. Fraser, at Palhatanga, Equador, which Mr.
Tomes referred to D. caudata (D. azare)* was really of this species.

4. D. ruviGinosa.

Dasyprocta fuliginosa, Wagler, Isis, 1832, p. 1220 (deser. orig.) ;
Waterhouse, Mami. ii. p. 385.

Dasyprocta nigricans (Natterer), Wagner, Wiegm. Arch. 1842,
p. 362 (descr. orig.) ; Wagner, Suppl. Schreb. Saugeth. iv. p- 46.

Dasyprocta nigra, Gray, Ann. Nat. Hist. x. p. 264 (1842, deser,
orig.), Voy. ‘Sulphur,’ p. 36, pl. xvi.

Fur ringed with brownish or sooty black and pure white; rump
hoary, the very long and soft hairs being broadly tipped and often
ringed at the base with white. Length about 23 inches; hind foot
4°75 inches.

Hab. Amazonia; Peru; Ecuadort.

Wagner and Waterhouse have shown that the above are merely
synonyms of this large dark species. Wagler described it from
specimens collected on the Brazilian Amazons; and Natterer obtained
it at Borba and on the Rio Nigro. Mr. Sclater has a skin collected
by Mr. E. Bartlett, at Chamicuros, on the Peruvian Amazons; and
@ specimen obtained in Ecuador, by Mr. Fraser, was referred to this
species by Mr. ‘Tomes.

5. D. Mexicana.

Dasyprocta mexicana, De Saussure, Rev. et Mag. de Zool. (2°
sér.), xil. p. 53 (1860, descr. orig.).

Fur ringed with black and pure white, the rump black, the long
hairs being black throughout their length, throat and belly almost
white. Average length 17 inches; hind foot 3°50 inches.

Hab. Mexico.

As remarked by its first describer, this species most resembles D.
Jfuliginosa. It differs, however, in its much smaller size, its darker
coloration, and in the less elongated hairs of the rump being black
throughout from the base to the tip. It is a native of the “hot
zone” of Mexico; and a specimen is now living in the Society’s
Gardens, presented by Mr. Marckmann de Lichtabel, in February
1874.

6. D. azarz. (Plate XXIX.)

Dasyprocta azare, Lichtenstein, Doubl. Zool. Mus. Berl. p. 3

* P.Z.S. 1860, p. 216. t Of. P.Z.8. 1860, p. 216.
¢ Of. P.Z.S. 1874, p. 683.

350 MR. FE. R. ALSTON ON THE GENUS DASyPRocTa. [Apr. 4,

(1823, deser. orig.) ; Wagner, Suppl. Schreb. Saugeth. iv. p. 38 ;
Waterhouse, Mamm. ii. p. 387.

Dasyprocta caudata, Lund, K. Dansk. Vidensk. viii. p. 297
(1841, deser. orig.).

Fur ringed with black and yellow, nearly uniform throughout,
slightly darker on the back and often hoary on the ramp; the long
hairs ringed to the base; throat and breast pure yellow. Length
20 inches ; hind foot 3°30.

Hab. S. Brazil, Paraguay, Bolivia.

This is the most southern species of Agouti, replacing the more
northern N. aguti in the province of St. Paulo, Brazil, where
Natterer found it in great numbers. If Wagner is right, however,
in uniting Lund’s D. caudata with the present species, its range
extends a little further north, into the Province of Minas Geraes.
Southwards it is found, according to Dr. Burmeister, throughout
southern Brazil and Paraguay, but does not extend beyond the Rio
de la Plata*. In Bolivia, Mr. Waterhouse says that it was found by
Mr. Bridges, near Santa Cruz de la Sierra, where it is called Hoche
colorado by the inhabitants.

‘As I hope to have another opportunity of figuring the Central-
American Agoutis, I have chosen this species, of which I am not
acquainted with any good representation, as the subject of the accom-

panying Plate (Plate XXIX.).
7. D. PUNCTATA.

Dasyprocta punctata, Gray, Ann. Nat. Dist. x. p. 264 (1842,
descr. orig.), Voy. ‘Sulphur,’ p. 36, pl. xv.

Fur ringed with black, and either bright rufous or yellow, uni-
form throughout, hairs of rump scarcely elongated, ringed to the
base; breast and lower parts also annulated, except a pale median
line on the abdomen. Length about 22 inches ; hind foot 4 inches.

Hab. Guatemala, Costa Rica.

Skins collected Ly Mr. Salvin in Guatemala differ much in ruddi-
ness, from a bright chestnut to a pale yellow. The latter agree
exactly with the types of Gray’s D. punctata (from ‘Tropical
America’’). They so much resemble D. azarw that one might be
inclined to follow Wagner and Waterhouse in uniting them, were it
not for the vast difference in their geographical position. Even the
pale examples of D. punctata may be always distinguished ‘from
the Brazilian form by the larger size, the still more uniform colora-
tion, and the annulation of the fur on the chest; and I have never
seen a specimen of D. azare which showed a trace of the rich ruddy
tints which seem to be normal in the Guatemalan form. The Society
has also received this species from Costa Rica.

8. D. aGutTi.

Mus aguti, Linnzeus, Syst. Nat. i. p. 80 (1766, deser. orig.).

* Thiere Brasil. p. 233.
+ Cf. Mr. Salvin’s remarks on some analogous facts in the distribution of
birds (Ibis, 1872, pp. 147-152).

1876.] MR. E.R. ALSTON ON THE GENUS DASYPROCTA, 351

Dasyprocta aguti, Desmarest, Mamm. p. 358; F. Cuvier et
Geoffroy, Mamm. iii. 3™° liv.; Waterhouse, Mamm. ii. p. 376;
Wagner, Suppl. Schreb. Saugeth. iv. p. 42.

Fur ringed with black and yellow ; rump bright yellow or orange,
the long hairs pale yellow at their base, and only obscurely ringed
near the tip. Length about 20 inches.

Guiana, N. Brazil, E. Peru.

The range of the Yellow-rumped A gouti is particularly difficult to
make out, as its specific name has beenapplied to almost every
member of the genus. It extends, however, from British Guiana,
where Schomburgk* says it is extremely common, through North
Brazil, where Natterer collected specimens near the junction of the
Madeira and Amazons, to Eastern Peru. In the latter country Von
Tschudi says that it inhabits the plains, and does not go up into the
mountains like D. fuliginosa.

9. D. PRYMNOLOPBA.

Dasyprocta prymnolopha, Wagler, Isis, 1831, p. 619 (descr.
orig.) ; Wagner, Suppl. Schreb. Saugeth. iv. p. 46; Waterhouse,
Mamm. ii. p. 380.

Fur ringed with black and yellow; nuchal crest and a longitudinal
band on the rump black, sides of the rump rich golden orange or
rufous ; the long black hair uniform in colour, or light yellow at the
base. Length about 20 inches; hind foot 3°75.

Hab. Guiana.

Of the distribution of this most beautiful species I have been
unable to learn any thing beyond the fact of its being a native of
Guiana. It is probably a more northern race than the last, and may
extend into Venezuela. Many examples are now living in the Society’s
Gardens.

10. D. acoucny.

Cavia acouchy, Erxleben, Syst. Reg. An. p. 354 (1777, descr.
orig. ).

“Bae. acouchy, Desmarest, Mamm. ii. p. 358; Wagner,
Suppl. Schreb. Saugeth. iv. p. 48; Waterhouse, Mamm. ii. p. 391.

Fur ringed with dark brown and rufous, upper parts darker, lower
parts and a spot behind each ear bright rufous or yellow. Tail pro-
duced, slender, slightly haired. Length about 14 inches, tail 2
inches, hind foot 3 inches.

Hab. Guiana, N. Brazil.

This little species, easily distinguished from all the rest by its
having a complete tail, instead of merely a tuberculous rudiment, is
abundant in Guiana and North Brazil; but I have been unable to
find any proof of the often repeated assertion that it is also met with
in some of the West-Indian Islands. Probably it has been confused
with D. cristata.

Of the remaining described species, D. eroconota, Wagler (Isis

* Reisen in Brit, Guiana, iii. p. 779.

352 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON NEW fApr. 4,

1831, p. 618), appears to have been founded on an individual varia-
tion of D. aguti with white incisors; D. albida, Gray (Ann. Nat.
Hist. x. p. 264) is probably, as Mr. Sclater has suggested*, an
accidental variety of the Antillean Agouti which I have here referred
to D. cristata; and, finally, Mr. Waterhouse was no doubt correct
in regarding ‘‘ D. leptura, Natterer’? (Wagner, Schreb. Siug. iv.
p- 49) and D. evilis, Wagler (Isis, 1831, p. 619), as being merely
synonyms of D. acouchi.

4, On new Species of Bolivian Birds. By P. L. Scrarer,
M.A., Ph. D., F.R.S., and Ospert Satvin, M.A., F.R.S.

[Received April 3, 1876.]
(Plates XXX.-XXXIII.)

The following new species of birds are founded on specimens con-
tained in a collection recently formed in Bolivia by Mr. C. Buckley.
Nearly the whole of this collection was made in the province of
Yungas, in a forest-clad spur of the Andes which extends in a north-
easterly direction between the Rio de la Paz and the Rio Coroico,
affluents of the Rio Beni and then of the great tributary of the
Amazon the Rio Madeira. Mr. Buckley’s head quarters in this
district was a place called Tilotilo, a mere group of Ranchos not in-
dicated on any map. The country he explored included a great
range of elevation, extending from about 3000 feet to 12000 feet
above the sea-level, and consequently considerable variation of climate
and vegetation, the rich forests so characteristic of the eastern slopes
of the Andes forming the chief feature. ‘The collection, which con-
tains between 400 and 500 skins of about 194 species, has passed
into the hands of Messrs. Salvin and Godman. The following are
the species in it which we consider to be undescribed.

1, CATHARUS MENTALIS, Sp. ov.

Supra saturate fumoso-brunneus unicolor, alis caudaque paulo
obscurioribus : subtus schistaceus medialiter dilutior, ventre
medio fere albo; mento et gula cum genis brunneo indutis:
rostro aurantiaco ; pedibus pallide corylinis: long. tota 6:5,
ale 3°3, caude 3°2, tarsi 1°3, rostri 0:95.

Hab. “Suape” prope “ Tilotilo”’ prov. Yungas, Bolivia.

Oés. Similis C. fuscatro, sed mento brunnescente et colore cor-

poris superi fuscescentiore distinguendus.

2. BasILEUTERUS EUOPHRYS, Sp. nov.

Supra olivaceo-viria.s unicolor: superciliis latis et corpore subtus
flavis : loris, pileo medio et regione oculari nigris : rostro nigro:
pedibus pallidis : long. tota 5:5, ale 2:7, caude 2°6, tarsi 0°95,

* P.Z.S. 1874, p. 666.

i

by

Cee

oe | >
i i
KW oe

JSmit delet lith

|
|

JSmit del.et lith

&N Hanhart imp

MALACOTHRAUPIS DENTATA

dat qreureH NeW

“‘STIVWISAdGaEN Vian iy?

“ULI ep WUS'P

JSmait delet hth

M& N.Hanhart inp

!

a THAMNOPHILUS SUBFASCIATUS, 18,29

1876.] SPECIES OF BOLIVIAN BIRDS. 353

rostri a rictu 0°67. Fem. mari similis, sed pileo et loris
vx nigricantibus.
Hab. Tilotilo, prov. Yungas, Bolivia.
Obs. B. nigri-cristato affinis, sed superciliis latis et elongatis
diversus.

3. MALACOTHRAUPIS DENTATA, sp.et gen. nov. (Plate XXXI.}

Malacothraupis, gen. nov. ex Familia Tanagridarum, generi Lanioni
affine, sed rostro crassiore et minus elongato et alis brevioribus
distinguendum: rostrum medialiter dentatum et ad apicem
uncinatum: sete rictales viv ulle: ale breviuscule, rotundate,
remigibus iii iv® et v® fere equalibus et longissimis, primo
quam septimus paulo breviore : pedes modici : cauda paulum
elongata.

Sp. unica M. dentata.

Supra cinerea, pileo paulo obscuriore superciliis angustis albis :
alis et cauda nigricantibus cinereo limbatis: subtus clare
castanea, mento et abdomine medio albis: crisso cinereo ad-
umbrato : rostro superiore nigricante, inferiore fusco, pedibus
obscure plumbeis.

Hab. Tilotilo, prov. Yungas, Bolivia.

Fig. 1.

Ne

b \ AN y

)

Head, wing, and foot of M. dentata.

4. CALLISTE PUNCTULATA, sp. nov.

Supra lete viridis, plumarum centris nigris quasi punctata: alis
caudaque nigris viridi limbatis: subtus alba, nigro guttata,
ventre medio pure albo: hypochondriis et crisso aureo indutis :
rostro et pedibus nigris: long. tota 4:5, ale 2°5, caude 2-0.

Hab. Tilotilo, prov. Yungas, Bolivia.

Obs. Species, sicut in C. guttata, subtus distincte maculata, sed

ab hac colore capitis nitore aureo omnino carente diversa, et ideo
magis ad C. punctatam appropinquans.

Proc. Zoox. Soc.—1876, No. XXIII. 23

354 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON NEW [Apr. 4,

5. CALLISTE FULVICERVIX, sp. nov. (Plate 6.0.9 fig. 1.)

Cerulea: alis caudaque nigris ceruleo limbatis: ventre medio
crissoque albis ochraceo tinctis: loris nigris: fascia trans
nucham angusta stramineo-fulva: subalaribus albis: rostro
nigro ; pedibus fuscis: long. tota 4°3, ale 2:9, caude 1°9.

Hab, Tilotilo, prov. Yungas, Bolivia.

Obs. Species C. rujficervici affinis, sed colore corporis puriore

ceruleo, pileo quoque et cervice postica ceruleis pectori concolori-
bus, neque nigris distinguenda.

6. CALLISTE ARGYROFENGES, sp. nov. (Plate XXX. fig. 2.)

Supra nitide stramineo-flava, pileo alis et cauda sericeo-nigris :
subtus abdomine nigro, lateribus stramineo-flavis, et gule
argenteo-viridi insignis: subalaribus nigris: rostro et pedibus
nigris: long. tota 4°5, ale 2°8, caude 1°9.

Hab. Tilotilo, prov. Yungas, Bolivia.

Obs. Proxima C. argentee, sed alis omnino nigris, gula viri-

descentiore et dorso flavescentiore sane diversa.

' 7. CHLOROSPINGUS CALOPHRYS, Sp. nov.

Supra olivaceo-viridis, pileo cum nucha et capitis lateribus nigris :
Sronte et superciliis latis et elongatis aurantiacis: subtus flavus,
gutture aurantiaco, lateribus in olivaceum trahentibus: rostro
plumbeo, tomiis pallidis: pedibus pallide fuscis: long. tota
5°5, ale 2°65.

Hab. Tilotilo, prov. Yungas, Bolivia.

Obs. Proximus C. auriculari ex Peruvia, sed ab hoe, item ab

affini C. atripileo ex Columbia, superciliis aurantiacis gula con-
coloribus diversus.

8. CYANOCORAX NIGRICEPS, sp. nov.

Cineraceo-violaceus, capite undique cum gula et cervice antica
nigris: remigibus intus cineraceis: cauda supra caerulea,
subtus nigricante: rostro et pedibus nigris: long. tota 1°30,
ale 7°5, eaud@é 6°5.

Hab. Tilotilo, prov. Yungas, Bolivia.

Obs. Similis C. cyanomelani ex Paraguaya, sed capite nigro et

rostro crassiore satis diversus.

9. OcHTHODIETA FUSCORUFUS, Sp. nov.

Supra fumoso-brunneus unicolor ; alis caudaque nigricantibus,
secundariorum marginibus externis et tectricum minorum et
majorum fascia apicali necnon rectricis extime margine ex-
teriore clare rufis, remigum omnium pogoniis internis nist apud
apices et rectricum omnium marginibus internis cum corpore
toto subtus ferrugineo-rufis: gula albicante, fusco obsolete
striolata: rostro et pedibus nigris: long. tota 7:0, ale 4:1,
caudeé 3°2, tarsi 0°9.

Hab. Tilotilo, prov. Yungas, Bolivia, et Peruvia int.

Obs. Species Ochthodieate et Ochthece generibus quasi inter-

1876. ] SPECIES OF BOLIVIAN BIRDS. 355

media, cum illo melius congruere videtur: habitus fere sicut O.
fumigati, sed rostro breviere, et quoad colores corpore subtus
ferrugineo primo visu distinguenda.

Besides the Bolivian example, we have a specimen of this same
species obtained by Mr. Whitely, at Paucartambo, in Peru, in January
1874.

10. OcHTH@CA PULCHELLA, Sp. NOV.

Supra cinerea, dorso postico rufescente: loris et superciliis angustis
citrino-flavis, fronte pileo concolori: alis et caudu fuscis,
secundariorum marginibus externis et tectricum majorum et
minorum apicibus clare rufis: subtus dilutius cinerea, ventre
medio albicantiore, hypochondriis rufescentibus : rostro fusco,
subtus ad basin albicante: pedibus nigris: long. tota 4:5, ale
2°4, cuudae 2-0.

Hab. Tilotilo, prov. Yungas, Bolivia.

Obs. Species forma et ptilosi O. citrinifrontis, ex Miquatoria,

sed fronte non flava et alis rufo bifasciatis distinguenda.

11. ANH RETES FLAVIROSTRIS, Sp. Nov.

Supra cineraceo-olivaceus, fronte et laterrbus capitis nigro
striolatis, pilet plumis ad basin albis, crista tenui elonguta nigra
terminatis: alis nigris, secundariorum et tectricum alarium
marginibus latis distincte albis : cauda nigra, rectricis utrinque
extime pogonio externo toto et ceterarum, nisi in mediis,
apicibus angustis albis: subtus pallide citrino-flacicans, gula
et pectore toto albo et nigro confertim flammulato: rostro ad
basin aurantiaco, ad apicem nigricante: pedibus nigris: long.
tota 4:0, ale 2°1, caud@e 2°2.

Haé. Tilotilo, prov. Yungas, Bolivia.

Obs. Species A. parulo proxima, sed flammulis pectoris latioribus,

tectricum fasciis albis distinctis et rostro ad basin aurantiaco diversa.

Sclater’s collection contains a worn specimen of this species col-

lected in Bolivia by Bridges, which has been hitherto referred to

A. parulus.

12. LaTuRiA UROPYGIALIS, sp. nov. (Plate XXXII.)

Supra cinerea unicolor, alis caudaque obscurioribus ; uropygio late
castaneo: subtus dilutior, hypochondriis et ventre imo cum
crisso castaneo-rufis: alarum remigibus primariis externis in
mare valde acuminatis et extrorsum versis, in femina paulum
acuminatis: rostro corneo, pedibus nigris: long. tota 10-5,
ale 5:5, caude 5°6.

Hab. Tilotilo, ad alt. 8000 ped., Bolivia.

Obs. Species remigum forma abnormali insignissima, crassitie et

habitu generali L. fuscocineree preedita.

The structure of the wing of this species is of so remarkable a

character that it deserves a more lengthened notice.

As will be seen by the figure, the inner web of the first primary

of the male of Z. uropygtalis begins to be slightly attenuated at
23*

[Apr. 4,

556 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON NEW

about two thirds of its distance from the base: at about half an inch
from the extremity it is still further reduced by more than one half,
and at the same time curved gently outwards. The second primary

Fig. 2. \

ST
~

—
7S
=———

=

SS
SSS

wWSS=
SS
ae

Ss
SS

I
LV) | Y VW i IVY
WV WWW AANA
Wf | f q |
( Y | / \ y | |
| j WE WV,
AY \ V/ hi iy) /
HV, \ mR AVA \ ml) \
V Vy \ yy} i {I \" \ \\ ‘\ \
WC ALA ANY
as OWI WW UNS 13
HD Ih A \\\ tS \
. Way AN
4 4 Vs 3

Primaries of Lathria uropygialis, from inside.
is very similar to the first, and nearly of the same length. The
third, fourth, and fifth are still more abnormally attenuated, and °6
inch shorter than the first two. They are nearly of equal length ;
but the third is slightly shorter than the fourth, and this than the
fifth. The sixth primary is rather more normal in appearance, and
a little longer than the fifth. The seventh, eighth and ninth are
nearly equal in length and, next to the first and second, the longest
in the wing. They are pointed at their extremities and but slightly
turned outwards. The tenth and last primary is normal throughout :
except at the end, which is pointed ; its outward curve is very slight.
Besides this abnormality, the inner web of each primary is slightly
turned upwards along its margin, so as to clasp the shaft of the next
succeeding primary when the wing is expanded. The barbules, also,
of the outer webs of the primaries from the fourth to the seventh
inclusive, terminate in fine filaments.
This structure is the same in two specimens of this singular bird,
which are, no doubt, males. In another, which we take to be a

1876.} SPECIES OF BOLIVIAN BIRDS. 337

female, the structure is much more normal. The primaries gradually
increase in length from the first to the fifth, sixth, and seventh,
which are nearly equal and longest. They have but a slight outward
curvature at the extremities; and the inner webs are comparatively
but slightly reduced.

In L. fusco-cinerea, which in general size and structure comes
nearest to the present bird, the primaries are normal throughout, and
show none of these peculiarities.

This singular wing-structure is worthy of at least a subgeneric
distinction ; and we suggest the term Chirocylla* as indicative of it.

13. GRALLARIA ERYTHROTIS, sp. nov.

Supra obscure olivacea, cinereo tincta: subtus valde dilutior et
rufescente lavata, ventre medio pene albo: regione auriculari
vivide rufa, fronte et superciliis hoe colore tinctis: rostro
nigro, ad apicem albicante, pedibus clare corylinis: long. tota
6:0, ale 3°5, caude 2°0, tarsi 2-0.

Hab. Tilotilo, prov. Yungas, Bolivia.

Obs. Species forma et statura omnino G. monticole, sed regione

auriculari rufa distinguenda.

14. THAMNOPHILUS SUBFASCIATUS, sp. nov. (Plate XXXIII.)

Supra cinereus olivaceo tinctus, pileo et alis extus rufis: subtus
cinereus, pectore toto et ventre medio albo et nigro confertim
transfasciatis: cauda nigra, rectricum pogoniis internis albo
transfasciatis: subalaribus et remigum marginibus internis
ochraceis: rostro corneo, pedibus nigris: long. tota 5'5, ale
2°7, caude 2°6.

Fem. Rufescenti-cinerea, pileo, alis extus et cauda rufis: subtus
ochraceo-rufescens unicolor.

Hab. Tilotilo, prov. Yungas, Bolivia.

Obs. Sp. Th. argentino maxime affinis, sed fasciis pectoris nigris

latioribus et crebrioribus, rostro fortiore et colore feminz diversa.

15. ASTURINA SATURATA, sp. nov.

Supra fusca, dorsi plumis et scapularibus intus pallidiore fusco
vel ferrugineo transfasciatis : capite toto Susco-nigro, gula con-
colori, albido vix striato: subtus precipue in pectore saturate
rufa, abdomine toto et tibiis pallido ferrugineo transfasciatis :
erisso fulvo, fere unicolori: remigibus primariis rufis, nigro
transfasciatis, intus in pogonio interiore Sulvescenti-albis,
apicibus fusco-nigris: cauda rufescenti-fusca, subtus dilutiore
nigro trivittata; rectrice una utrinque extima basin versus
fasciis duabus angustis alteris notata: rostro nigro, cera et
pedibus flavis: long. tota 15:0, ale 10-0, caude 7:0, rostri a
rictu 1°25, tarsi 2°55.

Hab. Apollo et Tilotilo, Bolivia. ;

Obs. A. nattereri forsan proxima, sed capite nigrescentiore et fasciis

caudee pallidis distincte ferrugineis diversa.
* Xeilp, manus, et cvAXOs, curvus.

358 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

This Bolivian race of Asturina seems to be separable from the form
already recognized, by its combination of the characters of several of
its allies. The tail is like that of the Central-American A. ruficauda,
from which, however, it differs inthe dark head and rufous chest.
The underparts resemble those of 4. nattereri; but the head is
darker, and the tail is differently coloured. A. pucherani differs
from the present bird in the lighter, almost creamy, colour of the
underparts and primaries.

A recent examination in the Paris Museum of the specimens referred
to as Astur magnirostris by D’Orbigny (Syn. Av. p. 5; and Voy.
p. 91) proves them to belong to Asturina pucherani as defined
in our synopsis of the genus Asturina (P.Z.S. 1869, p. 133, and
Exot. Orn. p. 177, t. 89); though from D’Orbigny’s remarks upon
them we were previously in some doubt on this point.

5. A Revision of the Neotropical Anatide. By P. L.
Scrarer, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., and Ossperr Satvin,

M.A., F.B.S.
[Received April 4, 1876.]
(Plate XXXIV.)
Page
Tele OCUCH ONG cceseahisras's cceptnadet« spcioueMactaaienias = ctatscaen abs she aenaaag 358
II. Preliminary remarks on the Neotropical Anatide ........-...... 358
[UY Synopsisiof the Species’... ia-..:.-.encossvenseracssas+-racpencsecesnssrs 360

IV. Table of their geographical distribution and remarks thereon... 409

I. INTRODUCTION.

The greater part of this paper was written before the issue of the
‘Nomenclator Avium Neotropicalium’ in 1873; and the systematic
arrangement of the genera and species of Anatidze adopted in the
‘Nomenclator’ was taken from the MS., which was laid aside un-
finished in consequence of the pressure of other matters. It has
now been thought desirable to complete it for publication, in order
to show the ground upon which certain species were included in the
list, and in order to give a more complete account of the geographical
distribution of the South-American Anatidze than has yet appeared.
Certain necessary changes in the nomenclature have been introduced.

As only a small portion of this widely distributed family is treated
of here, no attempt has been made to propound any new classifica-
tions, but that in ordinary use has been followed.

It has not been thought necessary to give descriptions of the
species contained in Baird’s ‘ Birds of North America.’

II. Pretiminary REMARKS ON THE NEOTROPICAL ANATID&.

The Anatidze of the southern portion of the South-American con-
tinent differ greatly, both as to genera and species, from the mem-
bers of the same group of birds found on the northern confines of
the Neotropical fauna. The former are most of them peculiar to

TOLL V.TSEUUP LT \
u nN

WI J Tap yuu

1876. ] NEOTROPICAL ANATID. 359

the districts in which they are found, whilst the latter, with few ex-
ceptions, consist of winter emigrants from the northern continent.
In the intermediate country, comprising by far the larger portion of
South America, few members of this family are met with. In speaking
of the Anatidee of the Neotropical Region, therefore, our subject very
naturally divides itself into two portions, each of which requires
somewhat different treatment, owing to the amount of attention they
have received from naturalists. We propose, then, to give a more
complete account of those species which belong strictly to the
southern continent, including the Antilles and Central America
with Mexico. The species which belong to the northern continent

and which only come during winter within the limits of the South-
American avifauna, on the other hand, we shall handle more briefly,
confining our notes and references to such as bear upon their occur-
rence in their winter quarters.

The geographical distribution of the South-American Anatidee
requires special consideration, inasmuch as the members of this
family found in the Neotropical region, except in a few cases, do
not conform in their range to the limits assigned to that region, but
to a great extent rally round the more temperate portions of the
continent. The characteristic species are in no case met with near
the northern boundaries of the Neotropical region.

The equatorial genera Dendrocygna and Cairina, however, reach
Southern Mexico; and the former is represented throughout the
Antilles. They alone are distributed according to the prevailing
law affecting Neotropical birds. Intertropical countries in general
are not rich in Anatide ; and America is no exception to the rule.
The Tree-ducks (Dendrocygna) form the chief exception. They
alone abound in Tropical America, the high Andes (tropical only in
position) being, of course, left out of consideration. The cause of this
scarcity is not very apparent at first sight. The enormous rivers of
tropical America and its numberless lagoons might be expected to
be capable of supporting Ducks in any quantity. But such is not
the case. The intertropical species are almost all of them arboreal
in their habits ; and it may: possibly be that this is so because they
thus escape being preyed upon by the large Crocodilians whieh
abound in these waters.

The bulk of the peculiar South-American species are not found to
the northward of the lower portion of the basin of the La Plata.
Here, however, and onwards to Tierra del F uego they abound, not
only in species but in individuals, and their numbers would seem to
rival those of the northern hemisphere. But the component species,
and, in many instances, the genera, are quite different. Swans are
there, but the species bear no resemblance to those of the north.
The Geese are all different. Anas is there, but differing widely from
the northern prototype. The same may be said of Dajila, where the
sexes are similarly dressed, instead of being widely different. Mareca
is also there; but here, again, the sexes are nearly alike, instead of
the reverse. The Teals, too, of the south are very different from
those of the north. The host of northern diving and oceanic species

360 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON (Apr. 4,

are doubtfully represented by the two aberrant genera Metopiana
and Tachyeres; and the Andean Merganetta stands quite alone.

The Shovellers (Spatula) of north and south are strictly con-
generic; so also are the members of the genera Hrismatura and
Mergus.

Returning to the strictly tropical members of this family, and
tracing their alliances and range, we find some remarkable facts in
geographical distribution, which, so far as we are aware, find no
parallel amongst birds. The genus Chenaloper contains but two
species—one belonging to the valley of the Amazons and the adjoining
districts, the other to Africa. Sarcidiornis is found in Paraguay,
Africa, Madagascar, the peninsula of India, Ceylon, and Burmah.
Dendrocygna viduata is common to both the American and African
continents; and D. fulva is found alike in America, India, and Mada-
gascar. The causes of this singular distribution of so many mem-
bers of one family are at present inexplicable.

The greater part of our characters in the following synopsis are
taken from specimens in the collection of Salvin and Godman,
which contains most of the known South-American species. In
selecting specimens for description we have sought out such as
came from the same or the nearest locality to that where the
original types were procured.

Ill. Synopsis or THE Species oF NeorropicaL ANATIDE.

The Anatidse may be divided into the following seven sub-
families :—
J. Anserine or Geese.
Il. Cygnine or Swans.
Ill. Anatine or River-ducks.
IV. Fuliguline or Sea-ducks.
V. Erismaturine or Lake-ducks.
VI. Merganettine, or Torrent-ducks.
VII. Merging or Mergansers.

Subfamily I. ANSERIN#.
Genus 1. ANSER. Type.
Anser, Cuv. Régn. An. i. p. 530 (1817)...... A, cinereus.
Chen, Boié, Isis, 1822, p. 563 .............. A. hyperboreus.

Anser is strictly an arctopolitan form, of which winter visitants
belonging to three species occur in the Antilles.

1. ANSER HYPERBOREUS.

Anser hyperboreus, Pallas, Spic. Zool. vi. p. 31 (1769); Zoogr.
vol. ii. p. 227, t. 65; Baird, B. of N. Am. p. 760 (1858) ; Cab. J.
fiir Orn. 1857, p. 225 (Cuba); March, Pr. Ac. Phil. 1864, p. 70
(Jamaica).

Chen hyperboreus, Gundl. Repert. F.-N. i. p. 387, et J. fir Orn.
1875, p. 371 (Cuba).

Hab. Cuba (Gundlach); Jamaica (March).

1876. ] NEOTROPICAL ANATIDA. 361

In Cuba A. hyperboreus seems to be a regular annual visitant,
and is common, remaining in the island from October until the end
of March. It has only been observed in Jamaica when the winter
in the north has been severe.

2. ANSER CERULESCENS.

Anas cerulescens, Linn. S. N. i. p. 198 (1766).

Anser cerulescens, Elliot, B. of N. Am. t.43; Bryant, Pr. Bost.
Soc. N. H. xi. (1866) p. 70 (Inagua).

Chen cerulescens, Gundl. Repert. F.-N. i. p. 387, et J. fiir Orn.
1875, p. 374 (Cuba).

Hab. Inagua, Bahama Island (Bryant); Cuba (Gundlach).

Dr. Bryant reports that, some years before his visit to Inagua in
1859, a flock of this Goose visited the island, when every individual
was killed by the inhabitants. Dr. Gundlach, who maintains the
distinctness between this bird and A. hyperboreus, says that it is of
rare occurrence in Cuba, but that it arrives along with the migratory
flocks of the allied species.

3. ANSER GAMBELI.

Anser gambelii, Hartl. Rev. Zool. 1852, p. 7; Baird, B. of N.
Am. p. 761 (1858) ; Cab. J. fiir Orn. 1857, p. 226 (Cuba) ; Gundl.
Repert. F.-N. i. p. 387, et J. fiir Orn. 1875, p. 375 (Cuba) ; Lawr.
Mem. Bost. Soc. N. H. ii. p. 313 (Mazatlan).

Hab. Cuba (Gundlach) ; Mazatlan (Grayson).

Not common, but not so rare in Cuba as A. ce@rulescens, where,
however, it is stated to be a regular winter visitant, remaining in the
island from October till the end of March. Col. Grayson obtained
it near Mazatlan, N.W. Mexico.

Genus 2. Bernicia.
Type.
Bernicla*, Boié, Isis, 1822, p. 563 ........ .. B. torquata
(= B. canadensis).

Chloéphaga, Eyton, Mon. Anatide, p. 13 (1838) B. magellanica.
Tenidiestes, Reich. Nat. Syst. d. Vég. p. ix

CASGZY fot aces ate oheps ole erteatt, saute we estates B. antarctica.
Chletrophus, Bannister, Pr. Ac. Se. Phil. 1870,

ae Meee RARE ent Sa DO ee B. poliocephala.
Oressochen, Bannister, Pr. Ac. Sc. Phil. 1870,

Pa classe ccna okey i epsiN ch sets ns as) si efohal eats B. melanoptera.

Bernicla is a widely extended form, with four or five representatives
in North America, of which one reaches the Neotropical region as an

* Some attempts have recently been made to revive Branta of Scopoli (Ann.
1. H.N. p. 67) for this genus. But Branta of Scopoli is an artificial group
composed of species which have no sort of natural affinity, and is therefore
to be cancelled. Besides Branta is generally used for Puligula rujina, and it
would create great confusion to substitute it for the universally accepted term
Bernicla.

362 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

occasional winter visitant, and with six peculiar species in Antarctic
America.

1, BERNICLA CANADENSIS.

Anas canadensis, Linn. S. N. i. p. 198 (1766).

Bernicla canadensis, Baird, B. of N. Am. p. 764 (1858); March,
Proc. Ac. Phil. 1864, p. 70 (Jamaica); A. & E. Newton, Ibis, 1859,
p- 368 (St. Croix’).

Anser parvipes, Cass. Pr. Ac. Phil. vi. p. 188 (1852), (Vera
Cruz).

Hoe canadensis, var. occidentalis, Lawr. Mem. Bost. Soc.
N. H. ii. p. 271 (Durango).

Hab. Jamaica (March) ; Durango, Mexico (Grayson).

An occasional visitant in Jamaica in winter, its occurrence depend-
ing upon the rigour of that season in the north. Messrs. A. & E.
Newton think that a flock of wild Geese seen in the Island of St.
Croix in 1857 probably belonged to this species. Anser parvipes,
from Vera Cruz, is only known to us from Cassin’s description, but
may probably belong to B. canadensis. Durango is the only other
recorded Mexican locality for it. Col. Grayson here met with it.

<

2. BERNICLA MELANOPTERA.

Anser melanopterus, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 93 (1838) (Lake Titi-
caca); Darwin, Voy. Beagle, iii. p. 134, t. 50 (1841); Schl. Mus.
des P.-B., Anseres, p. 100; Tschudi, F. P. p. 308 (1846) (Puna reg.
of Peru).

Bernicla melanoptera, Gay, Faun. Chil. p. 443 (1848) (Chili) ;
Reich. Natat. lviii. f. 953 ; Bibra, Denkschr. Akad. Wien, v. p. 131;
ef. J. fiir Orn. 1855, p. 57 (Chili) ; Cassin, Gilliss’s Exp. ii. p. 101
(1856) (Chili); Phil. & Landb. Wiegm. Arch. 1863, p. 185, et
Cat. Av Chil. p. 40 (Chili) ; Scl. Ibis, 1864, p. 121; P. Z.S. 1867,
pp: 320, 334, 339 (Chili); Scl. & Salv. P.Z.S. 1869, p. 156
(Pitumarca).

Chioéphaga melanoptera, Burm. La Plata-Reise, il. p. 513, et
P. Z. 8. 1872, p. 365.

Oressochen melanopterus, Bannister, Proc. Ac. Phil. 1870, p. 131.

Anser montanus, Tsch. Wiegm. Arch. ix. pt. i. p. 390.

Anser anticola, Tsch. Wiegm. Arch. x. pt. i. p. 315 (1844).

Alba; remigibus nigris; scapularibus et cauda viridescenti-

nigris ; tectricibus alarum maoribus extus purpureis, speculum
formantibus ; minoribus albis ; scapularibus anterioribus fusco
notatis, posterioribus fuscis in viridescenti-nigrum trahentibus :
long. tota circ. 30, ale 17°5, caude 6°5, rostri a rictu 1°7, tarsi
3°7, dig. med. cum ungue 3°3 (Descr. exempl. ex Peruvia in
Mus. 8S. & G.): rostro (ave viva) carneo, ungue nigricante,
pedibus rubris, trideo bscura. Fem. mari similis, sed minor.

Hab. Lake Titicaca (King, Pentland); Puna region of Peru
(Tschudi); Tinta, S. Peru (Whitely); cordillera and plains of Chili
(Ph. et Landb.); Quintero, Chili (Gay); Portillo Pass, Chili
(Gilliss).

1876. | " NEOTROPICAL ANATID, 363

This fine goose is found in the high Andes of Peru and Bolivia,
and has been observed both on Lake Titicaca and at Tinta and Pi-
tumarca, at an elevation of from 11,000 to 14,000 feet above the
sea-level, in what Tschudi has termed the “Puna region.” It is
also found throughout the central provinces of Chili, descending to
the plains in winter, but in summer retiring to the high Cordillera,
to the verge of the line of perpetual snow. It has been observed at
Quintero, in the province of Santiago, and in such numbers, on a
small body of water near the celebrated Portillo Pass, that the spot
is called Valle de los Pinquenes, Pinquen being the native name of
this species. The limit of its southern range probably hardly passes
the 35th degree of south latitude.

There were three specimens of this fine species lately living in the
menagerie of this Society (List Vert. Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 244); but
none of them seemed to enjoy such good health in captivity as the
other South-American Geese. The male is considerably larger than
the female.

3. BERNICLA MAGELLANICA.

Oie des Terres magellaniques, Buff. Pl. Enl. 1006, undé

Anas magellanica, Gm. 8. N. i. p. 505 (1788) (Straits of Ma-

gellan).

Anser pictus et magellanicus, Vieill. Enc. Méth. p. 117 (1823).

Chloéphaga magellanica, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 82 (1838) ; Dar-

win, Voy. Beagle, iii. p. 134 (1841) (Tierra del Fuego and Falkland
Islands); Scl. P. Z.S. 1857, p. 128; 1858, p. 289; 1860, p- 387
(Falkland Islands) ; Gould, P. Z.S. 1859, p. 96 ; Abbott, Ibis, 1861,
p- 157 (Falkland Islands) ; Scl. & Salv. Ibis, 1868, p- 189 (Straits
of Magellan) ; 1870, p. 500 (Elizabeth Isle); Ph. & Landb. Cat.
Av. Chil. p. 40.

Bernicla magellanica, Gay, Fauna Chil. p. 443 (1848) (Chiloe).

Painted Duck, Cook, It. i. p. 96, unde

Anas picta, Gm. 8. N. i. p. 504 (1788) (Staaten Island).

Anas leucoptera, Gm. 8. N. i. p. 505 (1788); ex Buff. xvii.

p- 101, et Brown’s Ill. t. 40 (Falkland Islands).

Anser leucopterus, Vieill. Enc. Méth. p. 113 (1823).

Bernicla leucoptera, Less. Traité d’Orn. p. 627 (1831).

Alba, hypochondriis et dorso superiore cum parte basali colli
postici nigro transvittatis; primariis, tectricibus alarum majo-
ribus, tertiariis et scapularibus elongatis cinerascentibus ; dorso
postico et rectricibus cinerascenti-nigris ; rostro nigro, iride fere
nigra, pedibus obscure plumbeis: long. tota circ. 26, ale 16°3,
caudeé 5°5, rostri a rictu 1°6, tarsi 3°8, dig. med. cum ungue 3°3.
Fem. capite et collo cinnamomeis ; gastreo antice cinnamomeo,
postice albo, omnino nigro transvittato ; subcaudalibus latera-
libus nigris, mediis fusco irroratis ; dorso antico cervino et
albo transvittato, postico et rectricibus brunnescenti-nigris :
primariis fusco-nigris, secundariis albis, tertiariis et scapu-
laribus elongatis grisescentibus ; tectricibus alarum majoribus
eneis, vitta subapicali nigra, albo terminatis; rostro nigro,

364 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

iride fere nigra, pedibus flavis: long. tota circ. 26, ale 16,
caude 5:5, rostri a rictu 1:6, tarsi 3°3, dig. med. cum ung. 3
(Descr. exempl. ex Ins. Falklandici in Mus. 8. & G.).

Hab. Straits of Magellan (King, Darwin, Cunningham): Staaten
Island (Cook): Falkland Islands (Darwin, Abbott).

According to Darwin, this Goose is found in Tierra del Fuego and
the Falkland Islands, being common in the latter. They live in
pairs or small flocks in the interior of the island, and seldom ap-
proach either the sea or the freshwater lakes. They build on the
outlying islets, probably through fear of the foxes; and the same
cause may also account for their being tame by day but the reverse
on the approach of dusk. They live entirely on vegetable matter,
and are called by the seamen ‘‘ Upland Geese.”

Capt. Abbott, who, like other travellers, found this species common
in Kast Falkland, says that it breeds all over the country, as well as
on the adjoining islets—and on this point differs from Mr. Darwin ;
but he adds that the disappearance of foxes from East Falkland may
have led to a change of habits as regards the situation chosen by
this species for its nest. He gives a good account of its nesting-
habits.

This species appears to do well in captivity, and many broods
have been reared in the Gardens of this Society since its introduction
in 1857 (Rev. List of Vert. Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 245).

The Chilian form of this Goose has been described by Philippi and
Landbeck as Bernicla dispar—the main and, in fact, the only
distinction consisting in the male being distinctly barred with black
on the under surface. Our immature male specimen from the Falk-
lands is marked to a slight extent in a similar manner; and we are
disposed to consider the character one of hardly sufficient value to
separate the two forms specifically. The following references belong
to the Chilian form :—

4. BeRNICLA DISPAR.

Bernicla magellanica, Cassin, Gilliss’s Exp. ii. p. 201, t. xxiv.
(1856); Gay, Fauna Chil. p. 443 (1848) (Chiloe).

Bernicla dispar, Ph. & Landb. Wiegm. Arch. 1863, p. 190, et
Cat. Av. Chil. p. 40; Burm. P.Z.S. 1872, p. 366; Sclater, Ibis,
1864, p. 122.

Chloéphaga dispar, Scl. P. Z. 8. 1867, pp. 320, 334.

Hab. Central Chili (Ph. et Landb.) ; Argentine Republic, Sierra
Tinta and Rio Negro (Burm.).

Philippi and Landbeck state that this Goose is of frequent occur-
rence in winter in the central provinces of Chili, and that one of the
collectors for the Museum of Santiago brought a specimen from the
Straits of Magellan.

Burmeister refers the Goose frequenting the Sierra Tinta, near
Tandil, to the southward of Buenos Ayres, to this species or race ;
he also adds that he has recently received both sexes from El Carmen,
on the Rio Negro.

In October 1871 the Society purchased of Mr. Weisshaupt, along

1876. ] NEOTROPICAL ANATIDE. 365

with other Chilian animals, a pair of this form of the Magellanic
Goose. The female unfortunately died; but the male was lent to a
correspondent, who returned to the Gardens in its place, in November
1875, a pair of young birds, bred between it and a female B. magel-
lanica vera, of which we exhibit a drawing. The male, it will be
observed, is not quite so strongly barred as in the pure B. dispar,
but presents well-defined black edgings on the under plumage. The
females of the two forms are, so far as we can see, quite identical.

KA
My ty He
NO NAY |
ie
Geen

; a, Male, and b, Female, Magellanic Geese in the Society’s Gardens, bred
} between B. dispar 3 and B. magellanica Q. :

W\\

366 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON (Apr. 4,

5. BERNICLA POLIOCEPHALA.

Anas inornatus 2, King, P.Z.S. 1830-31, p. 15 (Straits of
Magellan).

Bernicla inornata, Gray & Mitch. Gen. B. t. 165; Gay, Faun.
Chil. i. p. 444.

Chloéphaga poliocephala, Gray, List Gall. Grall. and Anseres in
B. M. p. 127 (1844), deser. nulla; Scl. P. Z.S. 1857, p. 128; 1858,
p- 290; 1861, p. 46 (Falkland Islands); 1867, p. 335; Abbott,
Ibis, 1861, p. 159 (Falkland Islands); Scl. & Salv. Ibis, 1868,
p- 189 (Oazy Harbour) ; 1870, p. 499 (Port Grappler) ; Nomencl.
p- 128.

Bernicla poliocephala, Burm. P. Z. 8. 1872, p. 366 (Bahia Blanca).

Anser poliocephalus, Schl. Mus. des P.-B., Anseres, p. 191.

Chletrophus poliocephalus, Bann. Pr. Ac. Phil. 1870, p. 131.

Bernicla chiloensis, Ph. & Landb. Wiegm. Arch. 1863, p. 149
(Chiloe), et Cat. Av. Chil. p. 40.

Capite toto et collo cum scapularibus griseo-plumbeis, pectore et
dorso superiore castaneis nigro transfasciatis ; abdomine, tectri-
cibus subalaribus, campterio et tectricibus minoribus albis ; pri-
mariis nigris; secundariis albis, interioribus fusco in pogonio
externo notatis; tectricibus alarum majoribus nigris, extus
viridescenti-nitentibus, apicibus albis; dorso imo et cauda nigris,
hypochondriis nigro et albo transfasciatis, crisso castaneo ;
rostro nigro, pedibus extus flavis intus fusco-nigris: long. tota
24, ale 13°5, caude@ 5, tarsi 2°7, dig. med. cum ung. 2°5 (Deser.
matis ex Patagonia (Rio Negro) in Mus. S.& G.). Fem. mari
similis.

Hab. Straits of Magellan (King, Cunningham); Patagonia, Rio
Negro (Hudson) ; Chiloe (Philippi & Landbeck) ; Falkland Islands
(Abbott, Leconte).

This species was at first supposed to be the female of the bird
described by Captain King as Anas inornatus, under which name an
excellent figure of it was given by Gray and Mitchell in the ‘ Genera
of Birds.’ Mr. Gray was the first to detect the error and to give
the present bird a MS. name; but he left it to Sclater to describe
the species and make the distinctions clear. The fact of the similarity
of the sexes in this and the next species has been abundantly shown
by living birds which have reared broods in captivity in our Gardens.
The species does not seem to be very common in the far south, as it
escaped Mr. Darwin’s notice ; and in the Falkland Islands, the great
rendezvous of these Geese, it would appear to be only a strageler.

During the three years Captain Abbott resided in the Falkland
Islands he only observed three examples of this species; and these
were obtained singly amongst flocks of ‘‘ Upland Geese’’ (B. magel-
lanica): he supposes that these birds were stragglers from the coast
of Patagonia. F. Leconte, who was sent by this Society to the
Falklands to obtain living animals, brought home one skin of this
Goose.

Burmeister says the range of this Goose extends over the whole of
Patagonia, where it is one of the most common species.

1376.] NEOTROPICAL ANATID2&. 367

Philippi and Landbeck state that the true patria of their B.
chiloensis is the island of Chiloe, where it breeds. During the
winter it migrates further northward. At Ancud it may be seen in
a domesticated state.

Dr. Cunningham obtained this Goose at Oazy Harbour, in the
Straits of Magellan, but did not meet with it in the Falkland Islands.

6. Bernicua RUBIDICEPS.,

Bernicla tnornata, Gray, Zool. Voy. Erebus and Terror, t. 24.

Chloéphaga rubidiceps, Scl. P. Z.S. 1860, p- 387, t. 163 (Falk-
land Islands); 1861, p- 46; Abbott, Ibis, 1861, p. 158 (Falkland
Islands) ; Scl. et Salv. Nomencl. p. 128 ; Sharpe, Zool. Erebus and
Terror, Birds, peor

Anser rubidiceps, Schl. Mus. des P.-B., Anseres, p. 102.

Chleetrophus rubidiceps, Bann. Pr. Ac. Phil. 1870, p. 131.

Corpore subtus cum capite toto et collo cinnamomeis, pectore et hy-

' pochondriis nigro transfasciatis, crisso nigro marginato ; supra

grisescens colli basi crebre nigro et cinnamomeo transfasciata,
tnterscapulii plumis fascia subterminali nigra notatis ; dorso
imo, uropygio et cauda nigris viridescente vix tinctis; remigibus
nigris, secundariis et tectricibus alarum minoribus albis ; tec-
tricibus majoribus extus eneo-viridibus albo terminatis: long.
tota cire. 23, ale 13-5, caude 4:5, rostri a rictu 1°5, tarsi 25,
dig. med. cum ungue 2°8 (Descr. maris ex insulis Falklandicis in
Mus.8. & G.). Rostro nigro, iride fere nigra, tarsis extus flavis
intus nigrescentibus (Desc. av. in vivario Zool. Soc. Lond.).

Hab. Falkland Islands (Abbott, Leconte).

The ‘Brent Goose,” as this species is called in the Falkland
Islands, Captain Abbott Says, is not so common as the other species,
except in some places in the North Camp, where he saw large
numbers in pairs.

The male is larger than the female, and frequents the edge of the
nearest pool of water whilst the female is sitting on her nest amongst
dry bushes. The eggs are usually five (rarely six) in number, and
are laid the first week in October. "The young birds attain the dress
of maturity the first year, except that the wing-speculum is dull
black instead of glossy green,

This species also does well in captivity, many broods having been
reared since 1860, when the species was first introduced into this
country alive (Rev. List of Vert. Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 245).

7. BERNICLA ANTARCTICA *,
Antarctic Goose, Forst. It. pp. 495, 518, undé

* BERNICLA INORNATA,

Anas inornatus, King, P. Z. 8. 1830-31, p. 15 (Straits of Magellan).

Bernicla inornata, Gay, Faun. Chil, p. 444 (1856); Gray and Sharpe, Zool.
Erebus and Terror, Birds, pl. 30.

Chlotphaga inornata, Scl. et Saly. Nomencl. p- 128; Sharpe, Zool. Erebus and
Terror, Birds, p. 37.

Similis precedenti sed minor, dorso angustius transfasciato ; speculo alaré,

368 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

Anas antarctica, Gm. 8. N. i. p. 505 (1788) (Tierra del Fuego) ;
Schl. Mus. des P.-B., Anseres, p. 98.

Bernicla antarctica, Steph. Shaw’s Zool. xii. p. 59; Eyton, Mon.
Anat. p. 84 (1838); Darwin, Voy. Beagle, iii. p. 134 (1841)
(Tierra del Fuego, Falkland Islands) ; Less. Voy. Coq. t. 50; Gay,
Fauna Chil. p. 442 (1848) ; Reich. Natat. lvii. f. 397, 948; Bibra,
Denkschr. Akad. Wien, v. p. 131 (Chili); ef. J. fiir Orn. 1855,
p- 57; Cassin, Gilliss’s Exp. ii. p. 200, t. xxiii. (1856) (coast of
Chili) ; 1860, p. 388; 1867, pp. 320, 334, 339; Gould, P. ZS.
1859, p. 96; Scl. & Salv. Ibis, 1869, p. 284 (Port Otway); 1870,
p- 499 (Goods Bay); Nomencl. p. 128; Abbott, Ibis, 1861, p. 159
(Falkland Islands); Burm. La Plata-Reise, ii. p. 514, et P.Z.S.
1872, p. 366; Ph. & Landb. Wiegm. Arch. 1863, p. 199, et Cat.
Av. Chil. p. 40.

Teniadestes antarctica, Bannister, Pr. Ac. Phil. 1870, p. 132.

Anas hybrida, Mol. Storia, p. 213(?); Gm. S.N. 1. p. 502
(1788), ex Molina. :

Anas magellanicus, Sparrm. Mus. Carls. t. 37.

. Mas alba; rostro nigro, pedibus flavis: long. tota circ. 24:0, ale
15:0, caude 5:2, rostri a rictu 1°7, tarsi 3, dig. med. cum ungue
3°5 (Deser. exempl. vix adult. ex ins. Falklandicis in Mus.
8. &G.). Fem. brunneo-nigra; vertice et nucha brunneis,
Sronte, capitis lateribus et collo albo vermiculatis; dorso postico,
uropygio et cauda albis ; primariis nigris, secundariis et tectri-
cibus alarum minoribus cum subalaribus albis ; tectricibus
majoribus viridescente extus terminatis, speculum alare forman-
tibus: subtus pectore hypochondriis et ventre summo distincte
albo transfasciatis, ventre imo cum crisso albis: long. tota circ.
24'0, ale 14:0, caude 5:3, rostri a rictu 1°7, tarsi 2°7, dig.
med. cum ungue 3°2 (Descr. exempl. ex ins. Falklandicis in
Mus. 8. & G.).

Hab. Tierra del Fuego (Forster, Darwin, Cunningham) ; Straits
of Magellan to Chiloe (Darwin, Philippi § Landbeck); Patagonia
(Burmeister, Hudson); Falkland Islands (Darwin, Abbott).

This is one of the oldest known species of South-American dAna-
tide, being alluded to by Forster and also apparently by the Abbé
Molina, as well as in Pernety’s ‘ Voyage.’ The remarks of the first
author led to the name given to it by Gmelin, by which it has since

dorso imo et rectricibus fusco-nigris ; pedibus flavis: long. tot. circ. 24, ale
14:8, cauda 4:5, tarsi 3, dig. med. cum ungue 2'5, rostri a rictu 1:2.

Hab. Straits of Magellan (King).

Though the type specimen of this bird in the British Museum bears a general
resemblance to a male B. magellanica, we are by no means sure that it may
not ultimately prove to be merely an immature specimen of Bernicla antarctica,
the size of the bill corresponding more closely with that of the last-named
species. From this, however, it differs in having a black tail, and in other
minor characters. The specimen is evidently immature; but not being able
to assign it positively to any other species, we leave it for the present to
stand as doubtful; at the same time we think it more than probable that it
will eventually be found to belong to one of the above-mentioned Bernicle.

1876. ] NEOTROPICAL ANATID&. 369

been almost universally recognized. The bird described by Molina,
and called Anas hybrida, which name was alsu adopted by Gmelin
as apparently applying to a species distinct from his 4. antarctica,
probably refers to this species; and if so, Molina’s name has the
priority ; but so vague are his descriptions, and so inapplicable the
name he has chosen, that we must decline to disturb a title so firmly
established as antarctica. Forster noticed this species in Tierra del
Fuego, where it has since been seen by every traveller who has written
on the birds of that district. Here Darwin found it, and also in the
Falkland Islands and on the western coast of South America as far
north as Chiloe. It lives exclusively on rocky parts of the sea-coast ;
hence the name, “ Rock-Goose,” given to it by sailors. In the deep
and retired channels of Tierra del Fuego, says Mr. Darwin, the snow-
white male, invariably accompanied by his darker consort, and
standing close by each other on some distant rocky point, is a common
feature in the landscape.

Captain Abbott confirms Mr. Darwin’s observation as to the
abundance of this Goose in the Falklands; he adds that he found it
along the coast, and that the nest is placed a few yards from the
shore, in an exposed place, and the female may sometimes be seen
sitting on her eggs from a distance. The male bird remains sta-
tioned close by. The eggs are generally six or seven in number,
and, during the absence of the female, are carefully covered with
down from her breast.

Philippi and Landbeck give to this species the same range along
the west coast as Mr. Darwin, adding that it is occasionally seen at
Valdivia. Its eastern range, according to Burmeister’s latest obser-
vations, does not extend northward of the inlet of Santa Cruz, where
it winters.

Little success has at present attended the efforts to introduce this
species into England. One individual has reached this country alive
up to the present time. (See Rev. List of Vert. 1872, p. 245.)

Genus 3. CHENALOPEX.
Chenalopex*, Stephens, Gen. Zool. xii. pt. 2,
POA UERIL) on ckwy were is seme eve sums. oO. CQYNUHEH.

Type.

CHENALOPEX JUBATA.

Anser jubatus, Spix, Av. Bras. ii. p. 84, t. 108 (1825); Burm.
Syst. Ueb. iil. p. 433.

Chenalopex jubata, Gray & Mitch. Gen. B. t. 164; Cab. in
Schomb. Guiana, iii. p. 762; J. E Gray, Knowsl. Menag. ii. t. xv.;
Taylor, Ibis, 1864, p. 96 (Orinoco); Scl. & Salv. P. Z. S. 1866, p.
200 (Ucayali); Nomencl. p. 128; Pelz. Orn. Bras. p. 319.

Sarkidiornis jubata, Gray, Hand-l. iii. p. 74.

* Mr. G. R. Gray (Hand-l. iii. p. 74) refers to “‘ Chenonetta, Brandt, 1836,” as
synonymous with Chenalopex. But Chenonetta was proposed by Brandt (Deser.
et Ic. An. Ross. fase. i. p. 5) for Anas jubata, Latham, of Australia, not for
Anser jubatus, Spix.

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. XXIV. 24

370 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON (Apr. 4,

Anser polycomus, Cuv. in Mus. Paris; Less. Traité d’Orn. i. p.
627 (1831); Schl. Mus. des P.-B. Anseres, p. 95.

Anser pollicaris, Licht. in Mus. Berol.

Chenalopex pollicaris, Licht. Nomencel. p. 101.

Capite toto cum ecollo et pectore sordide albis, collo postico ob-
scuriore ; interscapulio fusco-nigro ; dorso antico, scapularibus
et hypochondriis castaneis ; dorso imo alis et cauda purpura-
scenti-nigris, secundariis quinque internis macula magna alba,
speculum alare formantibus, ornatis: tectricibus alarum majori-
bus viridescenti-nitentibus ; abdomine medio et crisso albis, ventre
imo utrinque nigro ; rostro nigro mandibula nisi in apice flava ;
pedibus flavidis: long. tote 20, ale 11:5, caude 3°7, tarsi 3°7,
dig. med. cum ungue 2°4 (Desc. spec. ex Amazonia Peruviana
in Mus. 8. & G.).

Hab, Valley of the Amazons (Spiz, Bartlett); Guiana (Schom-
burgk) ; Orinoco (Taylor); Caicara, Rio Guaporé et Rio Negro
(Natterer).

The range of the species is restricted to the low-lying districts of
the valley of the Amazons, and the adjoining countries of Guiana
and Venezuela on the Orinoco, where, however, especially in the
former region, it would appear to be abundant. Natterer obtained
eight specimens during his journey, some on the head waters of the
Madeira in Matogrosso, others on the Rio Negro.

Little has been recorded of the habits of this Goose. Schom-
burgk met with it in pairs frequenting sand banks; and Natterer
states that the stomach of one he examined contained small seeds.

This species has its nearest ally in C. egyptiaca of the African
continent, with which it would appear to be strictly congeneric.

Subfamily I]. Crenin 2.

Genus 1. CyGnus. Type.

Cygnus, Meyer, Tasch. d. d. Vog. ii. p.497 (1810) C. olor.
Olor, Wagl. Isis, 1832, p. 1234 .......5..... C. musicus.
Chenopsis, Wagl. Isis, 1832, p. 1234 .......... C. atratus,
Coscoroba, Reich. Nat. Syst. d. Vog. p. x. (1852) C. coscoroba.

Two species of Swan, both very distinct from any of their northern
congeners, are found in Antarctic America.

1. CyGNUS NIGRICOLLIS.

Anas nigricollis, Gm. 8. N. i. p. 502 (1788), ex Bougainville.

Anas melanocephala, Gm. 8S. N. i. p. 502 (1788), ex Molina,

Anas melanocorypha, Mol. Saggio, ed. 2, p. 199 (1810).

Anser melanocoryphus, Vieill. Enc. Méth. p. 108 (1823) ex
Molina.

Cygnus nigricollis, Steph. Shaw’s Zool. xii. p. 17 ; Eyton, Mon.
p- 98 (1838); Hartl. Ind. Az. p. 27; Gay, Faun. Chil. p. 445, t.
14 (1848); Burm. Syst. Ueb. ili, p. 432; La Plata-Reise, ii. p.
512; Journ, fur Orn. 1860, p. 266, et P. Z.S. 1872, p. 365;

1876. ] NEOTROPICAL ANATID#. 371

Bibra, Denkschr. Akad. Wien, v. p. 131; ef. J. fiir Orn. 1855, p.
57; Sel. P. Z.S. 1859, p. 206, 1860, p. 388, 1867, pp. 334, 339;
Abbott, Ibis, 1860, p. 159; Ph. & Landb. Cat. Av. Chil. p. 50;
Scl. & Salv. P. Z. S. 1868, p. 145, et Ibis, 1869, p. 284 (Hlizabeth
Isle), et Nomencel. p. 139.

Cisne de cabeza negra, Az. Apunt. no. 425.

Albus; capite et collo cum striga postoculari et mento nigris ;
loris nudis: long. tota circ. 48°0 poll. angl., ale 17°5, caude
5°5, rostri a rictu 3°0, tarsi 3°5, dig. med. cum ungue 4.2
(Deser. exempl. ex inss. Falklandicis in Mus. 8. & G.). Rostro
plumbeo, ungue albo; cera-tumida ruberrima ; iride fere nigra,
pedibus pallide carneis (ave viva).

Hab. Falkland Islands (Add0f7); Straits of Magellan (Bougainville,
Cunningham) ; La Plata (Azara, Burmeister); Chili (Gay, Philippi
& Landbeck).

This Swan is abundant in the pampas of Buenos Ayres, and in
the lower portion of the Argentine Republic, and thence southwards
to Tierra del Feego. It is also found in the Falkland Islands and
along the western coast of South America beyond Valparaiso, perhaps
almost up to the frontier of Bolivia. Dr. Cunningham observed
both this species and C. coscoroba near Sandy Point in the Straits
of Magellan, where they were breeding.

In the Falkland Islands the Black-necked Swan is found through-
out the year, but is rather scarce and very wild. It seldom breeds
on the main island, but retires to the adjacent islets for that pur-
pose. Dr. Burmeister mentions its occurrence on the Parana, and
also states that it is found on the island of Santa Catharina off the
coast of Brazil, this being probably nearly its most northern
limit.

The Black-necked Swan has long been introduced into Europe ;
and seldom a year passes but one or more broods are reared in the
Gardens of this Society.

2. CYGNUS COSCOROBA.

Anas coscoroba, Mol. Stor. Nat. Chili, p. 207; Gm.8.N.i. p. 503
(1788) ex Molina.

Anser coscoroba, Vieill. Enc. Méth. p. 112 (1823).

Cygnus coscoroba, Hartl. Ind. Az. p. 27; Eyd. & Gerv. Ois. de
Favorite, in Mag. de Zool. 1836, p. 36; Gray and Mitch. Gen. of
Birds, t. clxvi. ; Gay, Faun. Chil. p. 446 (1848) (Chili) ; Burm. J.
fir Orn. 1860, p. 226, et La Plata-Reise, ii. p. 512 (Parana); P.
Z. S. 1872, p. 365; Scl. P. Z. 8. 1867, pp. 334, 339 (Chili), 1860,
p- 388 (Falklands); Abbott, Ibis, 1861, p. 159 (Falklands); Schl.
Mus. des P.-B. Anseres, p. 83; Ph. & Landb. Cat. Av. Chil. p. 41;
Scl. & Salv. Ibis, 1869, p. 284 (Rio Galegos); Nomencel. p. 129.

Cygnus anatoides, King, P. Z. 8. 1830-31, p. 15 (Straits of
Magellan); Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 101 (1838).

Cygnus chionis, Ill. in Mus. Berol. ; Licht. Nomencl. p. 101.

Coscoroba chionis, Bp. C. R. xiii. p. 648 (1856).

24%

372 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

Ganso blanco, Az. Ap. no. 436 (La Plata), undé

Anser candidus, Vieillot, N. D. xxiii. p. 331 (1816), et Ene.
Méth. p. 351 (1823).

Coscoroba candida, Reich. Nat. Syst. d. Vog. p. x.

Albus ; primariorum apicibus nigris ; loris plumosis ; rostro lato
anatiformi ruberrimo, ungue carneo ; iride fere nigra; pedibus
rubro-carneis (ave viva) : long. tota circ. 400, ale 175, caude
5'8, rostri a rictu 3:0, tarsi 3°5, dig. med. cum ungue 5°0
(Descr. exempl. ex Chilia in Mus. S. & G.).

Hab. Chili (Molina, Gay, Philippi & Landbeck) ; Straits of Ma-
gellan (King, Cunningham); Falkland Islands (Addo¢t) ; Buenos
Ayres (dzara, Burmeister).

Burmeister observed the Coscoroba Swan in large numbers on the
rivers Parana and Salado, especially in the lagoons bordering the
river near Santa Fé. During the winter, he says, it keeps in flocks
like our Swan. He also observed it at Mendoza and in the large
lakes of the Pampas.

Azara met with only two individuals of this species in Paraguay,
and a small flock at about 28° S. lat. He says, however, that
jt abounds in enormous flocks in the lagoons bordering the La
Plata.

The Coscoroba Swan is rare in Chili, according to Philippi and
Landbeck, who, however, give no details respecting its range on the
western coast, though they mention a young one having been brought
to them from the Straits of Magellan.

Mare harbour is the only part of East Falkland where Capt. Ab-
bott ever saw or heard of this species. At that spot there is usually
a flock of eight or ten to be seen. They breed in the neighbourhood,
young birds of about a month old having been observed.

Living specimens of this Swan were brought to England in
1870 and 1871, but as yet have not reproduced. A pair made a
nest in the Society’s Gardens ; and eggs were laid in 1872, but no
young birds were hatched.

Subfamily III. Anatin a.

Genus 1. DENDROCYGNA. Type.

Dendronessa, Wag). Isis, 1832, p. 281 (nec Sw.).. D. arcuata.
Dendrocygna, Sw. Class. Birds, ii. p. 365 (1837). D. arcuata.
Leptotarsis, Eyt. Mon. Anatine, p. 29 (1838) .. D. eytoni.

This genus is a good example of what may be called a Tropico-
politan group, being represented nearly everywhere within the tropics.
In America four very distinct species are found, besides another that
is scarcely more than a representative form.

1. DENDROCYGNA FULVA.

Penelope mexicana, Briss. vi. p. 390 (Mexico), undé
Anas fulva, Gm. 8. N. i. p. 530 (1788); Vieill. Ene. Méth.
p- 136 (1823); Max. Beitr. iv. p. 918; Wagl. Isis, 1831, p. 532;

1876.] NEOTROPICAL ANATIDE. 373

Burm. Syst. Ueb. iii. p. 435; J. f. Orn. 1860, p. 226 (Tucuman) ;
La Plata-Reise, ii. p. 514.

Dendrocygna fulva, Baird, Birds N. Am. p. 770, t. 63 (Fort Tejon,
Cal.) ; Scl. P. Z. S. 1864, p. 301, and 1866, p. 149; Scl. & Salv.
P. Z.S. 1869, p. 635 (Buenos Ayres), et Nomencl. p. 129; Schl.
Mus. des P.-B. Anseres, p. 87; Pelz. Orn. Bras. p. 319 (1870);
Burm. P. Z. 8. 1872, p. 377 (Buenos Ayres); Lawr. Mem. Bost.
Soc. N. H. ii. p. 313 (Mazatlan).

Anas virgata, Max. Reise, i. p. 322.

Pato roxo y negro, Az. Apunt. no. 436, undé

Anas bicolor, Vieill. N. D. v. p.136; Enc. Méth. p. 356; Hartl.
Ind. Az. p. 28; Léot. Ois. Trin. p. 514 (1866) (Trinidad).

Anas sinuata, Licht. in Mus. Berol.

Anas collaris, Merrem, in Ersch. u. Grub. Ene. sect. i. vol. xxxv.

ook
‘ Dendrocygna major, Jerdon, Birds of Ind. iii. p. 790 (India) ;
Sel. P. Z. S. 1866, p. 148 (Madagascar).

Castanea, pilzo obscuriore, linea mediali colli postici nigra ; dorso
nigro, in parte anteriore castaneo transfasciato ; alis et cauda
nigris ; tectricibus alarum minoribus obscure badiis, tectricibus
supracaudalibus albis ; plumis hypochondriorum elongatis, cas-
taneis, fascia mediali alba nigro utrinque marginata ornatis ;
rostro et pedibus nigris: long. tota 18°0, ale 8°5, caude 2-0,
rostri a rictu 2°3, tarsi 2:0, dig. med. cum ungue 3:0 (Deser.
spec. ex Mexico, in Mus. 8. & G.).

Hab. Mexico (Brisson, Grayson); 8.E. Brazil (Max.); Paraguay

and Buenos Ayres (dzara, Burmeister) ; Montevideo (Sellow).

Dendrocygna fulva, according to Burmeister, is found in the
eastern and northern districts of the La-Plata basin, on the rivers
Uruguay and Parana, and as far north as Tucuman; and Azara
observed it both in Paraguay and in Buenos Ayres. In the Brazilian
empire it was obtained by Prince Maximilian on the river Belmonte
and also on the sea-coast near Porto Seguro; but although Burmeister
states that it is found throughout Central Brazil, Natterer seems to
have failed to secure specimens. It appears, so far as we know, to
be absent from the basin of the Amazons and from the whole of the
northern portion of the southern continent; nor is it found in
Central America or in the West Indies. In Mexico it reappears,
and would seem to be by no means rare, occurring from the Rio-
Grande frontier and California to Mazatlan and the valley of Mexico.
Singular as this distribution is, it is still more remarkable when we
consider thac there appear to exist no tangible grounds for separating
the American bird from that called D. major by Jerdon, which
ranges throughout the peninsula of India and is also found in Mada-
gascar !

2. DENDROCYGNA AUTUMNALIS.

Red-billed Whistling Duck, Edw. t. 194 (West Indies), undé
Anas autumnalis, Linn. 8. N. i. p. 205 (1766).

Dendrocygna autumnalis, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 109 (1838);

374 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON (Apr. 4,

Baird, B. of N. Am. p. 770 (1858) (Texas) ; Cassin, Pr. Ac. Phil.
1860, p. 197 (R. Truando) ; Scl. P. Z. S. 1858, p. 360; Scl. & Salv.
Ibis, 1859, p. 231; Taylor, Ibis, 1860, p. 315 (Lake Yojoa); Scl. &
Salv. P. Z.S. 1864, pp. 299 (partim) & 372 (Panama), et Nomencl.
p. 129; Lawr. Ann. Lye. N. Y. viii. p. 13 (Panama), et ix. p. 143
(Costa Rica); Mein. Bost. Soc. N. H. i. p. 313 (Mazatlan) ; Salv.
Ibis, 1865, p. 193.

Capitis lateribus et gutture cinereis, hoe albicantiore, colli postici
linea mediali brunnescenti-nigra ; pileo (versus nucham obscu-
rtore), collo inferiore et corpore toto antico cum dorso medio et
scapularibus lete castaneo-brunneis, pectore paullo dilutiore ;
dorso postico, ventre toto et cauda nigris, ventre imo et tibiis
albo variegatis, crisso fere albo ; alis nigris, tectricibus alarum
minoribus internis ochracescentibus, mediis canis, externis albis ;
remigibus (extimo excepto) in pogonio externo et remigum tectri-
cibus lactescenti-albidis ; rostro rubro, ungue nigro; pedibus
flavis : long. tota 16°0, ale 8°5, caude 2:8, tarsi 2:0, dig. med.
cum ungue 2°6, rostri a rictu 2°0 (Descr. maris ex Panama in
Mus. 8. & G.).

' Hab. Mexico (Grayson) ; Guatemala (Salvin) ; Honduras (Tay-
lor); Costa Rica (Arcé); Panama (M‘Leannan).

Latham’s description of his Anas autummalis was based upon
Edwards’s plate 194; and upon reference to this figure we feel no
doubt that a specimen of the Central-American form of this Duck
was the subject of Edwards’s drawing. Moreover Edwards says, in
the text of his work, that his specimen was brought from the West
Indies.

The birds described by Baird from the Rio Grande, on the Texan
frontier, evidently agree with Central-American examples ; but Baird
seems to have had specimens of the South-A merican form also before
him when writing his notes on this species in the ‘ Birds of North
America.’ He attributes the greyness of the lower neck and breast
in a South-American specimen to greater maturity —a view which can
hardly be maintained, seeing that this peculiarity is found, so far as
our experience goes, only in examples from the southern part of
America,

In Central America this species is only found in the hottest part
of the country and in the lagoons near the sea-coast, especially in
those which lie in such abundance along the Pacific coast of Guate-
mala. During Salvin’s stay there in 1863 he not unfrequently saw
small flocks of this Duck, and also obtained specimens. In Honduras
Mr. Taylor found this Tree-Duck abundant on Lake Yojoa. From
Costa Rica we have an example collected by Arcé on the Gulf of
Nicoya ; and at Panama, whence we also have a specimen, it is not
uncommon. M‘Leannan had a pair of this species alive when Salvin
stayed at his Station at Lion Hill.

The bird found on the Truando by Lieut. Michler’s party probably
belongs to this race; but we cannot speak with certainty on this
point. It may also extend its range along the west coast as far as

~

1876.) NEOTROPICAL ANATID&. 373

Guayaquil; but this, too, remains to be determined ; nor can its
eastward limit be as yet defined. The form found in Trinidad (as
described by Léotaud) certainly belongs to the next species.

8. DENDROCYGNA DISCOLOR.

Dendrocygna autumnalis, Cab. in Schomb. Guian. iii. p. 762; Sel.
P. Z. S. 1864, p- 299 (partim) ; Scl. & Salv. P. Z.S. 1866, p. 200
(Ucayali); Léot. Ois. Trin. p. 507 (1866) (Trinidad); Schl. Mus. des
P.-B. Anseres, p. 92; Pelz. Orn. Bras. p. 320 (1870); Finsch,
P. Z.S. 1870, p. 589 (Trinidad).

Canard Siffleur de Cayenne, Buff. Pl. Enl. 826.

Dendrocygna discolor, Scl. & Salv. Nomencl. p. 161 (1873).

Capite, collo antico, pectore et dorso superiore griseis, pileo obxcu-

riore; gutture albicante, torque colli inferi indistincté castaneo ;
dorso medio lete castaneo ; ventre, alis et cauda nigris ; tectrici-
bus alarum minoribus internis ochracescentibus, mediis canis,
externis albis ; remigibus (extimo excepto) in pogonio externo et
remigum tectricibus albis ; crisso albo nigroque vario, rostro
rubro, ungue nigro; pedibus flavis: long. tota 16:0, ale 8:0,
caude 2°5, rostri a rictu 2°2, tarsi 2°0, dig. med. cum ungue 2°5
(Descr. exmpl. ex Surinam in Mus. S. & G.).

Hab. Columbia, 8. Martha (Deppe, in Mus. Berol.); Surinam
(Kappler); Trinidad (Léotuud); Guiana (Schomb.); Cayenne
(Buffon); Ucayali (Bartlett); Barra do Rio Negro, and Minas Geraes
(Natterer).

Obs. Similis preecedenti, sed dorso superiore et pectore canis nec
castanels.

This southern form of D. autumnalis is distinguishable at a glance
from that of Central America by the upper portion of the back being
of a different colour from the middle and lower back—the former
being of a grey tint, the latter rich chestnut-brown. In the northern
form no such difference is apparent, the whole upper surface being of
the same chestnut tint. The breast in the former bird also is greyish,
and in the latter chestnut.

D. discolor, as we have proposed to term it, is found in the northern
part of South America, extending from the littoral of Columbia and
Guiana over the great Amazon valley, and occasionally ranging as far
south as Mato Grosso and the interior of Minas Geraes, where spe-
cimens were obtained by Natterer.

4, DENDROCYGNA ARBOREA.

Anas arborea, Linn. S. N. i. p. 207 (1766); Gm. S. Nai. p. 540
(1788); Vieill. Enc. Méth. p. 141 (1823).

Dendrocygna arborea, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 110 (1838); Gosse,
B. Jam. p. 395 (Jamaica); Cab. J. f. Orn. 1857, p. 227 (Cuba);
Thienem. J. f. Orn. 1857, p. 157 (Cuba); A. & E. Newton, Ibis,
1859, p. 366 (St. Croix); Scl. P.Z.S. 1864, p. 300; March, Pr.
Ac. Phil. 1864, p. 70 (Jamaica) ; Gundl. Repert. F.-N. i. p. 387

376 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

(1866) et J. fiir Orn. 1875, p. 375 (Cuba) ; Bryant, Pr. Bost. Soe.
N. H. xi. (1866) p. 70 (Inagua); Schl. Mus. des P.-B. Anseres, |
p- 84; Sel. & Salv. Nomencl. p. 73.

Black-billed Whistling Duck, Edw. Glean. t. 193.

Canard Siffeur de la Jamaique, Buff. Pl. Enl. 804.

Anas jacquini, Gm. 8. N. i. p. 536, ex Jacquin, Beitr. p. 5.
n. 3(?).

Fusco-brunnen, capite ochracescentiore, nucha cum stria colli postict
nigra, torque collari nigro variegata ; dorsi plumis et tectrict-
bus ularum marginibus pallidioribus ornatis, his quoque nigro
maculatis ; subtus gutture toto albo, pectore fulvescente, abdo-
mine, precipue in hypochondriis, albo nigroque variegato ; dorso
postico et cauda nigris; alis cinereis, remigibus fusco ter-
minatis ; rostro et pedibus nigris : long. tota 18°5, caude 3'0,
rostri a rictu 2°2, tarsi 2°5, dig. med. cum ungue 2°8 (Descr.
exempl. ex Jamaica in Mus. Brit.).

Hab. Cuba (Gundlach); Jamaica (Gosse, March); St. Croix

(Newton fr.).

This Tree-duck is a resident in Cuba, where, according to Dr. Gund-
lach, it is common. It is said to rest during the day and to visit the
lagoons towards dusk. It nests from June to September. Mr. March
remarks that is a permanent resident in Jamaica, frequenting the
lagoons and morasses where mangroves abound, and feeding by night
as well as by day. The habits of this species in Jamaica are also
fully described by Mr. Gosse (/.c.). Numerous flocks frequent the
millet-fields in Jamaica from December to the end ot February. They
are described as beating down the corn as they descend in compact
flocks, and then picking the grain from the ears trampled under foot,
which they cannot otherwise reach as it stands erect. In this manner
they do a considerable amount of damage. The species is easily tamed,
but does not appear to breed in confinement.

In St. Croix the Messrs. Newton state that the ‘‘ Mangrove-
Duck” is pretty common ; but they are unable to say for certain
whether it breeds in the island. It is more often heard than seen,
its habit being to resort to its feeding-ground at night and to rest
during the day in the recesses of the mangrove-swamps.

5. DeENDROCYGNA VIDUATA.

Anas viduata, Linn. 8. N. i. p. 205 (1766); Jacquin, Beitr. i. p. 3,
t.i.; Gm. 8S. N.i. p. 536 (1788) (Cartagena) ; Vieill. Enc. Méth.
p- 132 (1823) ; Max. Beitr. iv. p. 921 (Brazil) ; Burm. Syst. Ueb. iii.

. 434.
: Dendrocygna viduata, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 110 (1838); Cab. in
Schomb. Guiana, iii. p. 762; Hartl. Ind. Az. p. 28; Tsch. F.P. p.54 ;
D’Orb. Voy. i. p. 448; Burm. La Plata-Reise, ii. p. 515 (Tucuman) ;
J. f. Orn. 1860, p. 266; Gundl. Repert. F.-N. i. p. 388, J. fiir Orn.
1875, p. 377 (Cuba); Scl. P.Z.S. 1864, p. 299; Leéot. Ois. Trin,
p- 509 (1866) (Trinidad); Scl. & Salv. P. Z.S. 1866, p. 200 (Uca-
yali), 1869, p. 160 (Rep. Arg.), et Nomencl. p. 129; Schl. Mus. des

1876. } NEOTROPICAL ANATID. 377

P.-B. Anseres, p. 90; Pelz. Orn. Bras. p- 319(1870); Reinh. Fugl.
Bras. Camp. p. 21 (1870) (Lagoa Santa).

Canard du Maragnon, Buff. Pl. Enl. 808.

Pato cara blanca, Az. Apunt. no. 435.

Facie tota et macula guttural albis ; nucha, collo antico, abdo-
mine medio, cauda, dorso postico eé alis nigris ; collo postico et
humeris castaneis ; dorso medio et scapularibus brunneis, plumis
singulis ochraceo marginatis; tectricibus alarum olivaceo-nigris ;

hypochondriis albo nigroque transfasciatis: rostro et pedibus

nigris : long. tota 17-0, ale 9-0, caude 2°5, tarsi 2°0, dig. med.
cum ungue 2°6, rostri a rictu 2:2 (Descr. exempl. ex Columbia in
Mus. 8. & G.).

Hab. Columbia (Mus. S. & G.) ; Guiana (Schomé.); Rio Brancho
(Natt.); Trinidad (Léotaud) ; Upper Amazons (Bartlett); Peru
(Tschudi) ; Bolivia (D’ Orbigny) ; Paraguay ( 4zara); Tucuman (Bur-
meister) ; Brazil (Maximilian) ; Rio Parana and Cuyaba (Natterer) ;
Lagoa Santa (Lund) ; Bahia (Wucherer); Cuba (Gundlach).

This species has a very wide range in South America ; but though
its casual appearance in Cuba has been recorded, it has never yet been
met with in Central America. Commencing from the valley of the
Magdalena it spreads over the whole continent, including the island
of Trinidad, as far as the vicinity of Buenos Ayres. In Paraguay,
Azara saw it in large flocks of as many as two hundred individuals
and more. He notes its ery as “ 6-6i-bi,” which is uttered as it flies
at all hours of the night. The members of a flock fly in a straight line
or crescent.

Genus 2. Sarciprornis. Type.

Sarcidiornis, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 20 ( 1838) .. 8. melanonota.

This genus appears to be truly Tropicopolitan, and is represented
by two or three species or closely allied forms in India, Africa, and
America.

SARCIDIORNIS CARUNCULATA.

‘Anas carunculata, Ill.,”’ Licht. Abh. Ak. Berlin, 1816-17, p- 176.

Ell Pato crestudo, Az. Apunt. no. 438.

Pato de crista, Max. Beitr. iii. p. 942.

Anser melanotus, Burm. Syst. Ueb. iii. p- 434.

Sarcidiornis regia, Hartl. ind. Az. p- 27 (1847); Burm. La Plata-
Reise, ii. p. 513 (Tucuman); J. f. Orn. 1860, p- 266; Scl. P. Z.S.
1867, p. 339, 1868, p. 532; Pelz. Orn. Bras. p- 319; Scl. & Salv.
Nomencl. p. 129.

Hab. Paraguay (Azara); Tucuman (Burmeister); interior of
prov. Bahia (Mawimilian); Matogrosso and Barra do Rio Negro
(Natterer).

We are unable to give a description of this species, as no authentic
South-American examples are at present accessible to us. It is
therefore not possible for us to give independent testimony as to the
identity or distinctness of the birds found in South America, Africa,
and India; but we have good reason to believe that the South-
American form is really separable.

378 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON (Apr. 4,

Hartlaub (/. s.c.) says there is no sufficient difference between’
American and Indian specimens; but v. Pelzeln distinguishes the
American form from the African and Indian birds by its darker
flanks.

The South-American bird has, as will be seen from the above
quotations, usually been identified with the Pato Real, or Anas regia
of Molina; but we now know that the Sarcidiornis does nct occur
at all in Chili, and that the “ Pato Real”’ of that country is Mareca
chiloensis, according to Philippi and Landbeck (Cat. Av. Chil. p. 95),
though Molina’s vague description may have had some reference to
Cairina moscnata. If, then, as would appear to be the case, the
American bird is really separable from the Indian, the proper name
for this species is carunculata—a term based by Illiger on Azara’s
Pato crestudo, and published by Lichtenstein in 1818.

The range of this Duck in South America is by no means
extended ; and it has seldom been noticed beyond the upper waters of
the basin of the Parana. It occurs, however, in the interior of
Bahia, according to Prince Maximilian ; and Natterer met with it at
Barra do Rio Negro, ou the Amazons, in July 1832.

Genus 3. CarrIna.

Cairina, Fleming, Phil. of Zool. p. 260 (1822).
Moschatus, Less. Ind. Orn. i. p. 633 (1831).
Gymnathus, Nuttall, Man. Orn. ii. p. 403 (1834).

This genus contains a single form, originally American, but now
introduced into the Old World and naturalized in many parts of the
tropics.

CAIRINA MOSCHATA.

Anas moschata, Linn. 8S. N. i. p. 199; Max. Beitr. iv. p. 910
(Brazil) ; Schl. Mus. des P.-B. Anseres, p. 73.

Catrina moschata, Cab. in Schomb. Guiana, iii. p. 763; Tsch. F.
P. p. 54; D’Orb. Voy. i. p. 111; Burm. Syst. Ueb. iii. p. 440
(Brazil), et La Plata-Reise, ii. p. 514 (Parand and Tucuman) ; J. f.
Orn. 1860, p. 266; Moore, P. Z.S. 1859, p. 65 (Honduras) ; Sel. &
Salv. Ibis, 1859, p. 232 (Guatemala); P.Z.S. 1864, p. 373 (Pa-
nama), 1866, p. 200 (Ucayali), 1867, p. 979 (Pebas); Salv. Ibis,
1865, p. 198; Taylor, Ibis, 1860, p. 315 (Honduras); Léot. Ois.
Trin. p. 521 (1866) (Trinidad); Pelz. Orn. Bras. p. 320 (1870) ;
Reinh. Fugl. Bras. Camp. p. 21 (1870) (Lagoa Santa); Lawr. Mem.
Bost. Soc. N. H. ii. p. 315 (Mazatlan).

Carina moschata, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 142 (1838).

Catrina sylvestris, Stephens, Zool. xii. p. 69.

Anas mariane, Shaw, Nat. Mise. ii. t. 69 (?).

El Pato Grande o Real, Az. Apunt. no. 437.

Le Canard musqué, Buff. Pl. Enl. 986.

Capite toto, collo, et corpore subtus brunneo-nigris, abdomine lineis

albis angustissimis transvittato; dorso iridescente purpureo,
plumis singulis nigro marginatis, scapularibus et tertiariis

1876.] NEOTROPICAL ANATID. 379

elongatis cum cauda lete viridi-nitentibus; secundariis chalybeo-
ceruleo indutis ; primariis nigris ; tectricibus alarum omnibus
supra et subtus cum plumis axillaribus pure albis ; hypochon-
driis viridi viv tinctis ; rostri carunculis rubris, pedibus
nigris : long. tota 29:0, ale 15:0, caude 7°5, rostri a rictu
2°6, tarsi 2°3, dig. med. cum ungue 3°8 (Descr. maris ex
Guatemala, in Mus. 8. & G.). Fem. mari similis sed minor:
long. tota 25:0, ale 12:5, caude 5°5, rostri a rictu 2°3, tarsi
1°8, dig. med. cum ungue 2°9.

Hab. Paraguay (Azara); Parana and Tucuman (Burmeister) ;
Lagoa Santa (Reinhardt) ; Bolivia (D’ Orbigny) ; Peru (Tschudi) ;
Brazil (Mawimilian, Burmeister) ; Amazonia (Bartlett, Hauxwell) ;
Guiana (Schomburgk); Trinidad (Léotaud); Panama (M‘Leannan) ;
Honduras (Taylor); Guatemala (Salvin); Mexico (Grayson, Xantus).

The Muscovy Duck, so well known in a domestic state nearly all
over the world, is a native of the hottest portion of tropical America.
It is usually found in lowland swampy districts ; and where there are
extensive forests it not unfrequently abounds. During the day the
birds remain in the forest-swamps; but towards evening numbers
may be seen sitting on the lower boughs of trees standing on the
margin of a clearing.

In Guatemala, Salvin found this Duck abundant on the Pacific
coast in lagoons near Santana Mixtan and also at Huamuchal. It
is likewise met with on the Atlantic side on the Rio Polochic, and
also between Lake Peten and Lake Yax-ha. Its extreme northern
limit seems to be N.W. Mexico, where Col. Grayson found it at
Mazatlan, and Xantus at Rio Zacatula.

Its southern range extends to the upper Parand and Tucuman. It
is not uncommon in Paraguay, according to Azara, although not found
on the La Plata. It is to be seen usually in pairs or singly, but also
in flocks of twenty or thirty. It always roosts in trees, usually re-
sorting to the same trees night after night. The nest, in which from
ten to fourteen eggs are deposited, is made in a hole or fork of a large
tree at some elevation from the ground. It seeks its food not only
in the rivers, but on moonlight nights resorts to the maize and corn-
fields and also plucks up the roots of mandioca.

The native habitat of the Muscovy Duck was known to some of
the earliest writers. The date of its iutroduction as a domesticated
species into Europe and elsewhere does not appear to have been
recorded, but doubtless dates back to soon after the Spanish conquests
in America.

Genus 4. Anas. Type.
Anas, Binns §..N.. i. po194.(1766)s 606 co eens A. boschas.
Boschas, Sw. Class. B. ii. p. 367 (1857) ...... A. boschas.

Chauliodus, Sw. Faun. Bor.-Amer. p. 440 (1831) A. strepera.
Ktinorhynchus, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 137 (1838) A. strepera.
Chaulelasmus, G.R.Gray; Pr. Bonap. Geog. Comp.
List of B. p. 58 (1838) ............ 00. ee eee. A. strepera.
Five species of true Anas (or, at least, not yet separated from the

380 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

Linnean type) occur within the Neotropical Region. Three of them
are stray visitors from the north into the Antilles; the remaining
two are peculiar Antarctic species.

1. ANAS BOSCHAS.

Anas boschas, Linn. S8.N. i. p. 205 (1766); Baird, B. of N. Am.
p- 774; Cab. J. f. Orn. 1857, p. 229 (Cuba) ; March, Pr. Ac. Phil.
1864, p. 72 (Jamaica) ; Gund]. Repert. F.-N. i. p. 388, et J. fur
Orn. 1875, p. 378 (Cuba) ; Scl. & Salv. Nomencl. p. 129; Lawr.
Aun. Lye. N. Y. viii. p. 13 (Panama) et Mem. Bost. Soc. N. H. ii.
p. 314 (Mexico).

Anas maxima, Scl. P. Z.S. 1859, p. 370 (Mexico).

Hab. Cuba (Gundlach) ; Jamaica (March); Mexico (De Oca,
Grayson); Panama (M‘Leannan).

According to Dr. Gundlach, 4. boschas is rarely seen wild in
Cuba; but in 1850 a flock on passage from the north settled in the
lagoons near Cardenas, and the bird is occasionally to be seen in
the market of Havana. Mr. March says it is rare in Jamaica. In
Central America it has been recorded from Mexico and Panama, but
nowhere’else.

2. ANAS OBSCURA.

Anas obscura, Gm. 8. N. i. p. 541 (1788) ; Baird, B. of N. Am.
p- 775; Cab. J. f. Orn. 1857, p. 229 (Cuba); March, Pr. Ac. Phil.
1864, p. 72 (Jamaica); Scl. & Salv. Nomencl. p. 129; Lawr. Mem.
Bost. Soc. N. H. ii. p. 314 (Mexico).

Hab. Jamaica (March); Tepic, Mexico (Grayson).

The Dusky Duck is said to be of rare occurrence in Jamaica. In
Cuba, Dr. Gundlach formerly suspected its occasional presence, but
does not mension it in his last ‘ Revista de las Aves Cubanas.’ In
Mexico it has hitherto only been noticed at Tepic by Grayson.

3. ANAS SPECULARIS.

Anas specularis, King, Zool. Journ. iv. p. 98 (1828); Eyton,
Mon. Anat. p. 138 (1838); Jard. & Selb. Ill. Orn. iv. tab. 40 ;
Gay, Faun. Chil. p. 450; Cassin, Gilliss’s Exp. 11. p. 202; Sel.
P. Z. 8. 1867, p. 335 (Chili) ; Ph. & Landb. Cat. Av. Chil. p. 42;
Scl. & Salv. Nomenel. p. 129.

Anas chalcoptera, Kittlitz, Mém. prés. Acad. St. Pétersb. ii. p. 471,
t. 5 (1835); Schl. Mus. des P.-B., Anseres, p. 46; Gray, Hand-l.
lil. p. 82.

Supra chalybeio-nigra, cervice postica et uropygio fumoso-brunneis;
dorsi superioris plumis hoe colore marginatis; capite toto et
nucha nigris, plaga magna faciali utrinque et gutture medio in
semitorquem collarem transeunte distinctissime albis ; subtus
valde dilutior et rufescentior, et fasciis transversis rufis in pec-
tore variegata ; alis et interscapulio chalybeio-nigris ; speculo
alari lato vivide cupreo, huyjus parte distali velutino-nigra
margine albo terminata ; hypochondriis eneo-nigro maculatis ;

1876.] NEOTROPICAL ANATIDS. 381

plumis axillaribus albis ; rostro obscuro, pedibus flavis : long.
tota 210, ale 11:0, caude 4:8, tarsi 19, vostri a rictu 2:3,

Fem. mari similis, sed coloribus minus claris.

Hab. Magellan Straits (King); Southern and Central Chili (Paxil.
§ Landb.).

This Duck is very remarkable for its conspicuous white patch on
each side of the face and pure white throat and neck, as well as the
large richly coloured alar speculum. So far as we yet know, it is
exclusively a western species. According to Philippi and Landbeck
it is common from the Straits of Magellan as far north as Valdivia,
but is rare in the central provinces of Chili.

4. ANAS CRISTATA.

Crested Duck, Lath. Syn. iii. p. 543, unde

Anas cristata, Gm. S. N. i. p- 940 (1788) (Statenland); Gay,
Faun. Chil. p. 449 (1848) ; Gould, P. Z. 8. 1859, p- 96 (Falklands) ;
Sel. P. Z. S. 1860, p. 389 (Falklands), 1867, p. 335 (Chili); Abbott,
Ibis, 1861, p. 160 (Falklands); Ph. & Landb. Cat. Av. Chil. p- 41;
Scl. & Salv. P. Z.S. 1867, p. 990 (Salinas, Peru); Ibis, 1870, p- 499
(Tuesday Bay), et Nomencl. p- 129; Schl. Mus. des P.-B. Anseres,

. 39.
; Anas specularoides, King, Zool. Journ. iy. p- 98 (1838).

Anas pyrrhogaster, Meyen, Nov. Act. xvi. Suppl. p. 119, t. xxv.
(Maipu, Chili).

Dafila pyrrhogaster, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p- 113 (1838).

Supra terreno-fusca, colore pallidiore in dorso superiore varie- °
gata ; pileo fuscescenti-nigro in cristam elongatam desinente ;
speculo alart lato cupreo-viridi, parte distali nigra, fascia ex-
terna alba terminata ; subtus fusca, magis rufescens et maculis
tndistinctis in pectore notata; crisso et subalaribus fere nigris,
harum plaga media alba; xostri maxilla nigra, mandibula
flava, pedibus nigris : long. tota 20:0, ale 10°5, caude 5:0,
rostri a rictu 2°1, tarsi 1:8, dig. med. cum ungue 2°4.

Hab. Falklands (Abbott) ; Magellan Straits (Cunn.); Chili (Ph.

& Landb.); 8. Peru (Whitely).

This species has a wider range than the last, extending northwards
into Southern Peru, where Mr. Whitely obtained specimens in 1867
at Salinas, a salt lake on the Cordillera, above Arequipa, at an altitude
of 14,00 feet. In Chili, Philippi and Landbeck tell us, it inhabits
the high cordilleras in summer, but descends during winter to the
plains, and is found along the coast down to the Magellan Straits,
where Dr. Cunningham obtained specimens.

The Crested Duck is common everywhere on the Falkland islands,
mostly frequenting salt water, though occasionally seen near fresh-
water pools. Old birds are always found in pairs. They live upon
shellfish. They retire inland to breed ; and the duck lays five eggs,
in a nest covered with down. The eggs are laid from the beginning
of October to the beginning of November.

The only near ally of this Duck in the N eotropical region is the
preceding species, from which it may be at once distinguished by the

382 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

absence of the conspicuous white face-markings and the small erest.
It is, no doubt, the Anas specularoides of King.

5. ANAS STREPERA.

Anas strepera, Linn. 8. N.i. p. 100 (1766); Sel. & Salv. Nomencl.

29:
: Chaulelasmus streperus, Baird, B. of N. Amer. p. 782; March,
Pr. Ac. Phil. 1864, p. 72 (Jamaica); Gundl. Repert. F.-N. i. p. 389,
et J. fiir Orn. 1875, p. 381 (Cuba); Lawr. Mem. Bost. Soc. N. H.
ii. p. 315 (Mexico).

Hab. Cuba (Gundl.) ; Jamaica (March); Mexico (Grayson).

The occurrence of a single male bird of this species in the market
of Havana is the sole authority for its admission into the list of Cuban
birds. In Jamaica, however, Mr. March says, it is sometimes abun-
dant, but of irregular occurrence. Its presence in Mexico is confined
to the N.W. provinces, where Grayson observed it.

Genus 5. HETERONETTA. Type.
: Heteronetta, Salvadori, Atti de la Soe. Ital. d.
Be Mate wi P. O74 UG) wei. clas oe ss oe H. melanocephala.

This is certainly an aberrant form of Anas in many respects; and
Dr. Salvadori is probably correct in isolating it. Schlegel even goes
so far as to put it with the Fuligule ; but before accepting this view,
we require a knowledge of its tracheal formation.

HETERONETTA MELANOCEPHALA.

Pato cabeza negra, Az. Apunt. no. 438 (Buenos Ayres), undé
Anas melanocephala, Vieill. N. D. v. p. 163 (1816), et Ene. Méth.
p- 354 (1823); Hartl. Ind. Az. p. 28; Cassin, Gilliss’s Exp. ii.
p- 202, t. xxv. (1856); Scl. P. ZS. 1867, p. 335 (Chili); Phil. &
Landb. Cat. Av. Chil. p. 42; Scl. & Salv. Nomenel. p. 129.
Heteronetta melanocephala, Salvad. Atti Soc. ital. viii. p. 374
1866).
Fuligula melanocephala, Schl. Mus. des P.-B. Anseres, p. 32.
Anas nigriceps, Licht. in Mus. Berol. ; Nomencl. p. 101.
Anas atricapilla, Merrem, in Ersch. u.Grub. Ene. sect. i. vol. xxxy.
p- 26.

Supra saturate nigricanti-fusca, rufescente minutissime vermicu-
lata; capite colloque toto fuliginose nigris ; secundariorum
fascia terminali angusta alba ; subtus sordide alba, in pectore
summo hypochondriis et crisso rufescente irrorata; rostro ni-
gricante, macula basali utrinque carnea ; pedibus corneis : long.
tota 14°5, ale 6°3, caud@ 2°3, tarsi 1°1, rostri a rictu 2:0.
Fem. pileo dorso concolori, genis fuscis nigro vermiculatis, gula
et stria superciliari indistincta albidis diversa.

Hab. Buenos Ayres (Azara); Chili prov. of Santiago (Ph. &

Landb.); Brazil, Rio Grande do Sul (Maz.); Mendoza (Weisshaupt).

This peculiar Duck was first described by Azara, who ‘ bought a

pair in Buenos Ayres,” where, however, Burmeister does not seem to

1876. ] NEOTROPICAL ANATID&. 383

have recognized it. Prince Maximilian tells us (Beitr. iv. p. 932) that
he has received examples from Rio Grande do Sul ; and Weisshaupt
obtained a series of skins during his excursion from Santiago to
Mendoza, some of which are in Salvin and Godman’s collection.

In Chili, where it also occurs, Philippi and Landbeck say that up
to the present time this species has not been found beyond the pro-
vince of Santiago, and that the hunters confound it with Erismatura
Serruginea.

Genus 6. QuERQUEDULA. Type.

Querquedula, Steph. Gen. Zool. xii. p. 142 (1824) .. Q. circia.

Nettion, Kaup, Nat. Syst. p. 95 (1829) ..........Q. erecea.

Cyanopterus, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 130 (1838) .... Q. circia.

Pterocyanea, Bp. Cat. Met. Uee. Eur. p- 71 (1842)... Q. cireia.

Ten Querquedule (under which head we embrace the Teals and
Garganeys) occur within the Neotropical region. Of these, two are
northern species, which visit the Antilles and Central America in
winter; the remaining eight are endemic Neotropical species, one of
which, however, has extended its northern range into the southern
portion of the Nearctic region.

The ten Neotropical Querquedule may be diagnosed as follows :—

a. Tectricibus alar. min. ceruleis.

Plaga faciei utrinque alba.........0......cccccccceelcceseeeesecece. 1. discors.
Facie (cum corpore antico) rubra ...........ceecceccccccsee, 2. cyanoptera.
8. Tectricibus alar. min. fuscis.
6'. Pileo et cervicis Jateribus in mare rubris .................. 3. carolinensis.
c’. Pileo et cervicis lateribus nigro fasciolatis.
e". Rostro sup. ad basin flayo.
Major : interscapulio dorso fere concolori............... 4. oxyptera.
Minor : interscapulio nigro WAUGLG PALO’. core deed. <sacea laces 5. flavirostris.
AV ae is Gls See ene Orr 6. andium.
d'. Pileo fuscescenti-nigro ; cervicis lateribus albis.
Rostro superiore ad basin rubro ...............seececeeeee 7. versicolor.
POSE AOUO III eS IG Me 8. puna.
e. Tectricibus alar. min. nigris,
leOnignois bs ade tcevess Jn saaeaet «<2 RO RGNGEG OcSEEE CED Soca 9. torquata.
ICI reas ee bee yates e Sacos's pikcsdb den skkaeaasdbes.4 10. brasiliensis.

1. QUERQUEDULA DISCORS.

Anas discors, Linn. 8. N. i. p. 205 (1766).

Querquedula discors, Steph. Gen. Zool. xii. p. 149; Baird, B. of
N. Am. p. 779; Cab. J. f. Orn. 1857, p- 228 (Cuba) ; Sallé, P. Z.S.
1857, p. 237 (S. Domingo) ; Sel. P. Z. S. 1857, p- 206 (Jalapa,
Mexico), 1859, p. 393, 1860, p- 254 (Mexico) ; Scl. & Saly. Ibis,
1859, p. 231 (Guatemala), et Nomencl. p. 129; Salv. Ibis, 1865,
p. 193; Gundl. Repert. F.-N. i. p. 389, et J. fiir Orn. 1875, p. 380
(Cuba) ; March, Pr. Acad. Phil. 1864, p- 71 (Jamaica); Lawr. Ann.
Lyc. N. Y. viii. p. 101 (Sombrero), ix. (1868) p- 143 (Costa Rica) ;
Mem. Bost. Soc. N. H. ii. p. 314 (Mexico) ; Bryant, Pr. Bost.
Soc. N. H. xi. p. 97 (S. Domingo) ; Salvin, P. Z. S. 1870, p. 219
(Veragua).

384 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

Pterocyanea discors, Léot. Ois. Trin. p. 516 (Trinidad).

Cyanopterus discors, Tayl. Ibis, 1860, p. 315 (Honduras).

Hab. Cuba (Gundl.) ; Jamaica (March) ; St. Domingo (Salle,
Bryant) ; Sombrero (Lawr.); Trinidad (Léotaud) ; Mexico, Jalapa
and Orizaba (Sallé) ; Mazatlan (Grayson) ; Guatemala (Salvin) ;
Honduras (Taylor) ; Costa Rica (Lawrence).

In Cuba this is the commonest of the North-American migratory
Ducks, arriving about the beginning of September and leaving the
island again in April. In Jamaica Mr. March says he has never
seen the “ Bluewings ” earlier than November, and that they again
appear in full summer-plumage in March and April on their way to
the north. This species is likewise met with in the other Antilles, as
far down as Trinidad.

On the continent, Q. discors has been traced down as far as
Veragua, as will be seen by our list of localities. In Guatemala,
Salvin found it common in winter, arriving in September and leaving
again in March and April. It is met with in the high and low
districts alike, chiefly on the lakes.

2. QUERQUEDULA CYANOPTERA.

Pato alas azulas, Az. Apunt. no. 434 (La Plata, Buenos Ayres),
unde

Anas cyanoptera, Vieill. N. D. v. p. 104 (1816), et Ene. Méth.
p- 352 (1823) ; Merrem, in Ersch. & Grub. Ene. sect. i. vol. xxxv.
p. 33; Burm. J. f. Orn. 1860, p. 226; La Plata-Reise, ii. p. 516
(Mendoza) ; Schl. Mus. des P.-B. Anseres, p. 51.

Querquedula cyanoptera, Cass. Ill. Orn. p. 84, t. xv. (Louisiana,
Utah), et Gilliss’s Exp. ii. p. 202 (1856) ; Baird, B. of N. Amer.
p- 780; Scl. P.Z.S. 1855, p. 164 (Bogotdé, St. Martha), 1856,
p. 310 (Mexico), 1860, p. 389 (Falklands), 1867, p. 355 (Chili) ;
Gould, P. Z. S. 1859, p. 96 (Falklands) ; Abbott, Ibis, 1861, p. 161
(Falklands) ; Scl. & Salv. P. ZS. 1869, p. 160 (Buenos Ayres), et
Ibis, 1868, p. 189 (Sandy Point).

Anas ceruleata, Licht. in Mus. Berol.; Bibra, Denkschr. Ak.
Wien, v. p. 131 (1853) (Chili) ; ef. J. f. Orn. 1855, p. 57; Lawr.
Ann. Lye. N.Y. v. p. 220 (California).

Querquedula ceruleata, Gay, Faun. Chil. p. 452 (1848); Ph. &
Landb. Cat. Av. Chil. p. 42.

Pterocyanea ceruleata, Hartl. Ind. Az. p. 27 (1847).

Anas rafflesi, King, Zool. Journ. iv. p. 97 (1828); Jard. & Selb.
Ill. Orn. t. 23.

Cyanopterus rafflesi, Ryton, Mon. Anat. p. 132 (1838).

Rubra, pileo nigro; interscapulio et scapularibus nigro varie-
gatis; dorso postico nigricante ; alarum tectricibus minoribus
ceruleis; speculo alari viridi, fascia alba supra marginato ;
remigibus primariis nigris, secundariorum scapis albo et ochraceo
fiammulatis ; rostro nigro, pedibus flavis: long. tota 18-0, ale
7:6, caude 3:0, tarsi 1°3. Fem. supra nigricans, plumarum
marginibus albidis; subtus sordide alba, fusco varicgata,

1876. ] NEOTROPICAL ANATID4. 385

gutture albo nigro punctulato; alarum tectricibus et speculo
sicut in mari.

Hab. Andes of Columbia (Mus. S. G.) ; St. Martha (Verreaux);
Chili (Ph. § Landé.); Buenos Ayres (Azara §& Burm.) ; Magellan
Straits (Cunningh.) ; Falklands (4bdoé¢).

This Duck, first discovered by Azara, has a very wide range in
the New World, from the extreme south up to California on the
west, and occurs accidentally in Louisiania. It was found by Azara
only in the Rio de la Plata and Buenos Ayres ; but Burmeister
observed it at Mendoza and on the Parana, in lagoons and rivers,
Philippi and Landbeck say that it is frequently met with throughout
the republic of Chili; and Dr. Cunningham obtained specimens in
the Straits of Magellan. It seems not to be very common in East
Falkland, though Capt. Abbott shot seven in one day at Mare
Harbour. But it most probably breeds in these islands, as pairs
were observed throughout the summer months.

In the eastern part of South America (that is, in Brazil, Amazonia,
and Guiana) we do not find the occurrence of this Duck noticed ;
but it is certainly met with in the Andes of Columbia and on the
northern littoral of Venezuela, and probably keeps to the line of the

Andes. It has not yet been recorded from any part of Central
America ; but will probably be ultimately found there, as it is not un-
common in the Western United States and has occurred accidentally
in Louisiana.

3. QUERQUEDULA CAROLINENSIS.

Anas carolinensis, Gm. 8. N. i. p. 533 (1788).

Querquedula carolinensis, Steph. Gen. Zool. xii. p. 148; Baird,
B. of N. Amer. p. 777; Jard. Ann. & Mag. N. H. xx. (1847) p. 377
(Tobago) ; Cab. J. f. Orn. 1857, p. 228 (Cuba); Moore, P. Z. S.
1859, p. 65 (Honduras) ; Scl. P. Z. S. 1857, p. 215, 1859, p. 370,
1860, p. 254 (Mexico) ; Scl. & Salv. Ibis. 1859, p. 231 (Honduras) ;

_Nomencl. p. 129.

Nettion carolinensis, March, Pr. Ac. Phil. 1864, p. 72 (Jamaica) ;
Gundl. Repert. F.-N. i. p. 389, et J. fiir Orn. 1875, p. 381 (Cuba) ;
Lawr. Mem. Bost. Soc. N. H. ii. p. 314 (Mexico).

Hab. Cuba(Gundl.); Jamaica (March); Tobago (Kirk) ; Mexico
(Sallé, De Oca, Grayson) ; Honduras (Dyson).

The Green-winged Teal of the North-Americans occurs on passage
in Cuba, but is rare. In Jamaica it is sometimes seen in autumn,
but more generally in the spring. A single immature specimen was
sent to Sir W. Jardine from Tobago by Mr. Kirk, who says that the
species arrives in that island in October and November and departs
in March or April. In Mexico it has been obtained at Magatlan,
Orizaba, and Jalapa. Leyland procured examples of it many years
ago in Honduras, on the Aloor river. This is its furthest continental
range to the south yet known to us.

4. QUERQUEDULA OXYPTERA.

Anas oxyptera, Meyen, Nov. Act. xvi. Suppl. p. 121, t. 26 (1833)
(South Peru).

Proc. Zooxu. Soc.—1876, No. XXY. 25

386 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

Querquedula oxyptera, Tsch. F. P. pp. 55, 309 (Sierra region of
Peru); Sel. & Salv. P.Z.S8. 1867, p. 990 (S. Peru), 1868, p. 570,
1869, p. 157 (Peru); Nomencel. p. 129.

Querquedula angustirostris, Ph. & Landb. Wiegm. Arch. 1863,
pt. i. p. 202 (Tacna).

Supra pallide schistaceo-fusca, capite toto nigro frequenter trans-
Sasciolato ; interscapulio rufescente lavato, plumis in centro
obscurioribus ; uropygio valde dilutiore; speculo alart lato
nigro supra et subtus fascia ochracea terminato et fascia splen-
denti-eneo-viridi intus inclusa ; remigibus obscure schistaceis,
secundariorum marginibus utringue pallide rufescentibus ; ab-
domine albo, pectore nigro punctato ; rostro flavo, culmine et
apice nigris ; pedibus corneis : long. tota 17°5, ale 8°7, caude
4°0, tarsi 1°4, rostri a rictu 1°8.

Hab. Cordilleras of Peru, near Lake Titicaca (Meyen); Salinas
above Arequipa ( Whitely) ; Laguna of Cucullata above Taena (Fro-
been).

This Duck was first discovered by Meyen, who obtained specimens of
it on the high cordillera of Peru, near Lake Titicaca. Meyen’s name
(oxyptera) having been wrongly applied to the next species, Philippi
and Landbeck (as was pointed out by us in 1867) redescribed the
bird in 1863 under the name angustirosiris. Their specimens were
obtained by Frobeen, on the Lake of Cucullata, in Southern Peru.

Our examples of this species were collected by Mr. Whitely on the
salt lake of Salinas, situated at an elevation of 14,000 feet above
Arequipa. Mr. Whitely subsequently procured other examples on
the lagoon of Tungasuca and on the river near Tinta, in the district
of Cuzco.

ay QUERQUEDULA FLAVIROSTRIS.

Pato pico amarillo y negro, Azara, Apunt. no. 439 (Buenos Ayres),
unde

Anas flavirostris, Vieill. N. D. v. p. 107 (1816), et Ene. Méth.
p- 353 (1823); Schl. Mus. des P.-B. Anseres, p. 59.

Querquedula flavirostris, Burm. J. f. Orn. 1860, p. 226, et La
Plata-Reise, ii. p. 516 (Mendoza); Scl. & Salv. P.Z.S. 1868,
p- 146 (Buenos Ayres), et Nomenel. p. 129.

Anas creccoides, King, Zool. Journ. iv. p. 99 (1828).

Querquedula creccoides, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 128 (1838); Gay,
Faun. Chil. p. 453 (1848); Cassin, Gilliss’s Exp. ii. p. 203, t. xxvi.
(1856) (Chili); Darwin, Voy. Beagle, iii. p. 135 (1848); Sel.
P. Z.S. 1860, p. 389 (Falklands), 1867, p. 335 (Chili) ; Gould,
P.Z.S. 1859, p. 96 (Falklands); Ph. & Landb. Cat. Av. Chil.
p- 42; Abbott, Ibis, 1861, p. 160.

“ Querquedula oxyptera, Meyen,” Reich, Nat. t. lii. f.164; Bibra,
Denkschr. Ak. Wien, v. p. 131 (1853) ; ef. J. f. Orn. 1855, p. 57
(Chili).

Similis precedenti, sed minor, rostro breviore ; interscapulii plumis

in centro nigris, fuscescente ochraceo stricte marginatis ; uro-

1876.] NEOTROPICAL ANATID&. 387

pyyto paululum obscuriore ; pectoris guttis magis distinctis et
Sere totum ventrem occupantibus ; necnon alis et tarsis breviori-
bus distinguenda : long. tota 15:0, ale 7:4, caude 3:5, rostri a
rictu 1°65, tarsi 1:2.

Hab. Buenos Ayres (Azara, Hudson); Mendoza (Burm.); Straits
of Magellan (Darwin); Falklands (Adéott) ; Chili (Philippi §
Landb).

This Duck was first obtained by Azara in Buenos Ayres; and his
name for it was not very correctly latinized by Vieillot. We have speci-
mens from the same neighbourhood, obtained by Mr. W. H. Hudson,
It seems to be distributed thence all over Antarctic America. Accord-
ing to Burmeister it is not unfrequently seen near Mendoza, in the
lagoon of Rodeo del Medio. Philippi and Landbeck state that it is
common in Chili, and southwards on the western coast to the Straits
of Magellan. In the last-mentioned locality Mr, Darwin also obtained
specimens.

In the Falkland Islands this species is more plentiful in the in-
terior than in the neighbourhood of civilization, and is found in large
flocks in some of the freshwater streams. It lays in September, and
even as early as August ; and the nest, with its complement of five
eggs, placed in the dry grass in some retired unfrequented valley,
is very difficult to find. As a rule, the bird is very tame.

6. QuERQUEDULA ANDIUM. (Plate XXXIV.)

Dafila , sp.?, Sel. P. Z. 8. 1860, p. §3 (Ecuador).

Querquedula andium, Scl. & Salv. Nomencl. Av. Neotr. p- 162, et
P. Z. 8. 1875, p. 237.

Capite undique nigro et albo frequentissime marmorato ; dorso
obscure cinereo, scapularibus eneo-nigris fusco circumeinetis ;
speculo alari eneo-nigro in secundariis dorso proximis nitidis-
sime eneo-viridi, supra et subtus fascia pallide castanea mar-
ginato ; abdomine albo cineraceo adumbrato ; pectore maculis
plumarum centralibus fusco-nigris ; rostro nigro, pedibus car-
neis: long. tota 16:0, ale 9:0, caude rigidiuscule 3°5.

Hab. High Ecuador, between Riobamba and Mocha (Fraser) ;

Sierra Nevada of Merida (Goering).

Obs. Similis Q. oxyptere et Q. flavirostri, sed notzo obscuriore,
rostro nigro, et speculo alari zeneo neque viridi distinguenda.

Mr. Fraser obtained a single specimen of this Duck on the high
plateau of Riobamba in 1859 ; but Sclater did not succeed in making
out the species. Subsequently Salvin selected two examples of the
same bird from a collection sent to this country from Quito; and we
were thus enabled to describe it for the first time in our ‘ Nomen-
clator.’ a

Last year we had again the pleasure of recognizing an example of
this species in Mr. Goering’s last collection from the Sierra Nevada
of Merida, where it was obtained at an altitude of 10,000 feet.

It would appear, therefore, that this Duck replaces the two pre-
ceding species in the Andes of Ecuador and Venezuela. We have

not yet seen it from Columbia; but no doubt it occurs there also.
25*

388 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON (Apr. 4,

7. QUERQUEDULA VERSICOLOR.

Pato pico de tres colores, Az. Apunt. no. 440 (Paraguay) undé

Anas versicolor, Vieill. N. D. v. p. 109 (1816), et Enc. Méth.
p- 853 (1823) ; Schl. Mus. des P. B. dnseres, p. 57.

Querquedula versicolor, Cassin in Gilliss’s Exp. ii. p. 203 (1856)
(Chili) ; Scl. P. Z. S. 1860, p. 389 (Falklands) ; 1867, p. 335
(Chili) ; Abbott, Ibis, 1861, p. 161 (Falklands); Scl. & Salv.
P. Z. S. 1868, p. 146 (Buenos Ayres) ; Ibis, 1870, p. 499 (Sandy
Point), et Nomencl. p. 129; Salvin, Trans. Zool. Soe. iv. p. 499.

Anas maculirostris, Licht. Doubl. p. 84 (1825), ex Azara; Burm.
J. fiir Orn. 1860, p. 266, et La Plata-Reise, ti. p. 516 (Mendoza) ;
Sund. P. Z. S. 1871, p. 126 (Galapagos).

Querquedula maculirostris, Gay, Faun. Chil. p. 452, Phil. &
Landb. Cat. Av. Chil. p. 42.

Pterocyanea maculirostris, Hart]. Ind. Az. p. 28.

Anas fretensis, King, P. Z. 8. 1830-31, p. 15; Jard. & Selb. Il.
Orn. iv. t. 29.

Cyanopterus fretensis, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 131 (1838).

Anas muralis, Merr. Ersch. & Grub. Ene. sect. i. vol. xxxv. p. 42.
' Supra nigra albo transfasciolata, fasciis in uropygio frequentiori-

bus et angustioribus ; pileo fumoso-nigro unicolori, capitis late-
ribus cum gutture lacteo-albis ; abdomine albido, in pectore
ochracescente induto et nigro guttato, in vertice magis albicante
et nigro frequenter transfasciato ; alis extus grisescenti-fuscis ;
speculo purpurascenti-viridi, supra et subtus albo marginato et
subtus fascia altera subterminali nigra ornato ; hypochondriis
fasciis latis albis et nigris distincte notatis ; rostro nigro, macula
ad mandibule basin utrinque aurantiaca, pedibus corylinis : long.
tota 16°5, ale 7:6, caude 3°4, tarsi 1°3, rostri a rictu 1°9.
Fem. mari similis sed coloribus paulo dilutioribus et speculo
alari obscuriore { Deser. exempl. ex Chilia (Leybold)].

Hab. Paraguay (Azara); Buenos Ayres (Hudson) ; Mendoza
(Burm.) ; Magellan Straits (Hing) ; Falklands (Addéo¢é) ; Chili
(Phil. et Landb.) ; Galapagos (Sund.).

This Duck, first described by Azara from Paraguay, is found all
over Antarctic America. Mr. Hudson obtained it at Conchitas near
Buenos Ayres; and according to Burmeister it occurs at Mendoza
(at the foot of the Cordillera) near marshes and brooks.

In Chili Philippi and Landbeck found this species somewhat rarer
than Q. cyanoptera. In Kast Falkland itis not common ; but when it
does occur it is usually seen innumbers. It breedsin the Falklands ;
for Capt. Abbott had young birds brought to him, though he never
found a nest.

The supposed extension of the range of this Duck to the Gala-
pagos is rather surprising. It rests upon the authority of Sundevall,
who determined the specimen.

8. QUERQUEDULA PUNA.

Anas puna, Tsch. Faun. Per. p. 309 (Peru); Burm. Syst. Ueb.
ii. p. 439.

1876.] NEOTROPICAL ANATID&X. 339

Querquedula puna, Scl. & Salv. P. Z. S. 1869, p. 157 (Peru) ;
Ex. Orn. p. 197, t. 99, et Nomenel. p. 129.

Supra pallide fuscescenti-cinerea, fusco variegata, plumis media-
liter obscurioribus ; pileo toto et linea nuchali nigris; alis
ewtus fuscescenti-cinereis ; tectricibus minoribus plumbeo tinctis
et margine lato albo terminatis ; secundariis in pogonio externo
e@neo-viridibus, albo late terminatis ; subtus ochraceo-alba, peec-
toris plumis fusco obsolete guttatis ; ventre toto et crisso nigri-
cante minute transfasciolatis ; tectricibus subalaribus et plumis
axillaribus albis ; rostro (in ave viva) ceruleo, culmine nigri-
cante ; pedibus cerulescenti-schistaceis: long. tota 18°0, ale
8°5, caude 3, rostri a rictu 2°1, tarsi 1°3, dig. med. cum ungue
1:9,

Hab. High Peru (Philippi); Bolivia, Cochabamba (D’ Orbigny).

Oés. Affinis Q. versicolori sed rostro cerulescente, pileo nigro et
hypochondriorum fasciis angustis distinguenda.

The first examples of this fine Duck that attracted our notice were
those in the gallery of the Jardin des Plantes at Paris, one of which
is marked as having been obtained in the province of Cochabamba
in Bolivia by D’Orbigny, and the other in Chili by Mr. Gay, the
latter locality, however, being probably erroneous.

The specimens were noi named ; and we were at first inclined to re-
gard them as belonging to an undescribed species. Subsequently, how-
ever, we received Peruvian skins of the same bird from Mr. H. Whitely,
and were thus induced to make a more accurate examination of it.
This led to the discovery that it is the species described by Tschudi
in his ‘ Fauna Peruana’ as Anas puna, from a specimen obtained
by Philippi in the highlands of Peru, and transmitted to the Berlin
Museum. We should add that Sclater has examined the typical
example of 4. puna in that collection, and is convinced of its identity
with the present bird.

Mr. Whitely obtained two examples of this Duck on the lagoon of
Tungasuca, which is situated in the Andes, south-east of Cusco, at an
elevation of about 12,000 feet above the sea-level. The skins are
both marked as “females ;”” but the male, we suppose, would hardly
differ, except perhaps in possessing rather brighter plumage.

Mr. Whitely states that in the living bird the bill is light blue,
with a streak of black down the centre of the upper mandible, the
eye dark hazel, the legs and toes bluish slate-colour. He adds that
he met with this Duck in pairs, but found it rather rare.

Querquedula puna is a very well-marked species, and can hardly
be confounded with any other member of the family. It seems to be
most nearly allied to Q. versicolor, but is readily distinguishable by
its larger and uniformly coloured bill, blacker head, whiter throat,
and by the finer markings above and on the flanks.

9. QUERQUEDULA TORQUATA.

Pato collar negro, Azara, Apunt. no. 441 (Paraguay) undé

Anas torquata, Vieill. N. D. v. p. 110 (1816), et Enc. Méth.
p- 345 (1823) ; Schl. Mus. des P. B, Anseres, p. 61.

390 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

Querquedula torquata, Hart). Ind. Az. p. 28 (1847) ; Gray, List
Gall. Grall. & Ans. B. M. p. 139 (1844); Scl. P. Z. S. 1867,
p- 335 (Chili) ; Scl. & Salv. P. Z.S. 1869, p. 635 (Buenos Ayres),
et Nomencl. Av. Neotr. p. 129.

Pato ceja blanca, Azara, Apunt, no. 442 (Paraguay), undé

Anas leucophrys, Vieill. N. D. v. p. 156 (1816), et Enc. Méth.
p- 354 (1823) ; Hartl. Ind. Az. p. 28 (2).

A. rubidoptera, Dubois, Orn. Gal. p. 90, pl. lvii. (d et 2) (1839).

4 rhodopus, Merrem, Ersch. & Grub. Enc. sect. i. vol. xxxv.
p- 42.

Supra terreno-fusca, pileo et cervice in semitorquem posticum
utrinque expansis, tectricibus alarum minoribus, dorso postico
et cauda supra nigerrimis ; scapularibus pure castaneis ; alis
Susco-nigris, plaga magna in secundariorum tectricibus nivea,
secundariis ipsis extus viridi-eneis ; subtus capitis lateribus
cum gutture sordide albis fusco striolatis ; pectore rosaceo induto
et nigro sparse guttato; ventre ‘et hypochondriis albis griseo
tenuissime transfasciolatis, crisso medio nigro plaga utringue
nivea ornato; rostro nigro, pedibus flavissimis : long. tota 14-0,
ale 7:2, caude 27, tarsi 1:1, rostri a rictu 17. Fem. fusca,
superciliis et stria capitis utrinque cum gula et colli lateribus
albis ; subtus alba fusco transfasciata ; alis et cauda nigris ;
secundariis extus viridi-eneis ; alis macula magna alba, sicut
in mare, ornatis ; rostro rubro, pedibus flavis.

Hab. Paraguay (Azara); Buenos Ayres (Hudson).

This fine Duck, for our first knowledge of which we are indebted
to Azara, is rather scarce in collections, and has yet only been re-
cognized in few localities. Azara obtained examples of both the
somewhat dissimilar sexes in Paraguay, and described them under
different names, as was first pointed out by us (P. Z. S. 1869, p. 635)
from Mr. Hudson’s specimens collected near Buenos Ayres, Philippi
and Landbeck (Cat. Av. Chil. p. 94) deny the occurrence of this
Duck in Chili, which Sclater had given on the authority of certain
specimens in the French national collection marked “ Chili, Gay.”
But we now know full well that Gay’s localities are utterly untrust-
worthy.

10. QUERQUEDULA BRASILIENSIS.

Anas brasiliensis, Briss. Orn. iv. p. 360, undé

A. brasiliensis, Gm. 8. N. i. p. 517 (1788) (Brazil) ; Max. Beitr.
v. p. 936 (Brazil) ; Cab. in Schomb. Guiana, iil. p. 762 (Guiana) ;
Burm. Syst. Ueb. iii. p. 437 ; J. fiir Orn. 1860, p. 267; La Plata-
Reise, ii. p. 517 (Tucuman) ; Schl. Mus. des P. B. Anseres, p. 61 ;
Reinh. Fugl. Bras. Camp. p. 21 (1870) (int. Brazil).

Querquedula brasiliensis, Scl. & Salv. P. Z.S. 1869, p. 635
(Buenos Ayres); Nomencl. p. 129; Pelz. Orn. Bras. p. 320 (1870).

“© Q. erythrorhyncha, Spix,” Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 127 (1838) ;
Darwin, Voy. Beagle, iii. p. 135 (1841) (Buenos Ayres and Straits
of Magellan).

Ipicutiri, Az. Apunt. no. 437 (Paraguay), undé

1876.] NEOTROPICAL ANATID&. 3Y1

Anas ipicutiri, Vieill. N. D. v. p. 120 (1816), et Enc. Méth. p. 354
(1823).

Querquedula ipicutiri, Hartl. Ind. Az. p. 28 (1847); Gay, Faun.
Chil. p. 451; Ph. & Landb. Cat. Av. Chil. p. 42.

Anas paturi, Spix, Av. Bras. ii. p. 85, t. 109 (Rio S. Francisco).

A, notata, Licht. in Mus. Berol.

Supra fusca, pileo brunnescente ; dorso postico, cauda et tectrici-
bus alarum minoribus nigris; alis fusco-nigris, primariorum
internorum et secundariorum pogoniis externis nitenti-eneo-
viridibus, secundariorum internorum apicibus latis niveis, a
colore eneo fascia nigra disjunctis ; subtus dilutior, in pectore
rubiginoso lavata, gutture albidiore, ventris plumis fusco obsolete
transfasciatis; rostro nigricante, pedibus flavis: long. tota
15°5, ale 7, caud@e 3°3, tarsi 1:2, rostri a rictu 1°8.

Hab. Guiana (Schomb.) ; Rio Brancho (Natt.) ; Rio San Fran-
cisco (Spix) ; 8S. E. Brazil (Zax. et Burm.); S. Paulo and Mato-
grosso (Natt.); Bolivia (Pearce) ; Paraguay (Azara) ; Buenos
Ayres (Hudson) ; Parana and Tucuman (Burm.) ; Magellan Straits
(Darwin).

This Duck seems to be very widely extended in Eastern South
America from the north down to the extreme south. Schomburgk
found it abundant in the marshy savannas of British Guiana; and
Natterer obtained specimens on the Rio Brancho, In 8.E. Brazil
it is said by Prince Maximilian to be the commonest species of Duck.
According to Azara, Q. drasiliensis is much more abundant in Para-
guay than in Buenos Ayres. It is usually seen in pairs, but some-
times in flocks of twenty, associating with other Ducks. He adds
that it moults in May and nests in August.

Burmeister says this species is very common on the Parana and in
all marshes and lagoons of the northern districts. It is also common
at Tucuman. Mr. Darwin obtained specimens from Buenos Ayres in
October, and from the Straits of Magellan in February.

Gay has inserted this species (like many others) in his list of Chilian
birds; but Philippi and Landbeck (Cat. Av. Chil. p. 42) state
that so far as they know it does not occur in that Republic. Gay’s
specimen was probably from Bolivia, whence Salvin has obtained an
example.

Genus 7. Darina. Type.

Dafila, Stephens, G. Z. xii. pt. 2, p. 126 (1824).. D. acuta.
Phasianurus, Wagler, Isis, 1832, p. 1235 ......D. acuta.
Pecilonetta, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 32 (1838).... D. bahamensis.
Three Pintails are met with in the Neotropical Region. One of
these is the well-known European bird which penetrates in winter into
the northern portion of the region ; the others are endemic southern
species, one of which is sometimes separated as generically distinct.

1. DaFILA ACUTA.

Anas acuta, Lim. S. N. i. p. 202 (1766). ‘
Dafila acuta, Baird, B. of N. Am. p. 776; Cab. J. fir Orn. 1857,

392 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

p. 227 (Cuba); Scl. P. Z.S. 1857, p. 206 (Jalapa, Mexico); Scl.
et Salv. Ibis, 1859, p. 231 (Guatemala), et Nomencl. Av. Neotr.
p- 130; March, Pr. Ac. Phil. 1864, p. 71 (Jamaica); Lawr. Ann.
Lye. N. Y. viii. p. 13 (Panama), et ix. (1868) p. 143 (Costa Rica) ;
Mem. Bost. Soc. N. H. ii. p. 314 (Mexico); Gundl. Repert. F.-N.
i. p. 388, et J. fiir Orn. 1875, p. 378 (Cuba).

Hab. Cuba (Gundlach); Jamaica (March) ; Mexico, Jalapa
(Sallé); Mazatlan (Grayson) ; Coahuaha (Xantus) ; Belize (Salvin) ;
Guatemala, Duefias (Salvin) ; Costa Rica (Lawrence); Panama
(M‘Leannan).

In Cuba the Pintail is very common on passage during the winter
and autumnal months. It also occurs in Jamaica in numbers as a
winter visitant. It was seen at Belize by Salvin, and is a common
visitor to the Lake of Duefias in winter. Its furthest recorded loca-
lity south appears to be the isthmus of Panama, where M‘Leannan
found it.

2. DaFiLa SPINICAUDA.

Pato cola aguda, Az. Apunt. no. 429 (Buenos Ayres), undé

Anas spinicauda, Vieill. N. D. v. p. 135 (1816) et Enc. Meéth.
p. 356; Burm. La Plata-Reise, ii. p. 515; Schl. Mus. de P.-B.
Anseres, p. 39.

Erismatura spinicauda, Hartl. Ind. Az. p. 27; Pelz. Orn. Bras.
p. 321 (1870).

Dafila spinicauda, Scl. P. Z. 8. 1870, p. 665, t. xxxviii. (Chili) ;
Sel. & Salv. P. Z.S. 1868, p. 146 (Rep. Arg.), 1869, p. 157 (Tinta,
Peru), et Nomencl. Av. Neotr. p. 130.

Anas oryura, Meyen, Nov. Act. xiv. Suppl. p. 122 (1833) ;
Merrem, Ersch. & Gruber’s Enc. sect. i. vol. xxxv. p. 43 ; Gay, Faun.
Chil. p. 449 (1848); Cassin, Gilliss’s Exp. ii. p. 202 (1656); Burm. La
Plata-Reise, ii. p. 515 (Mendoza) ; Sel. P. Z. S. 1867, p. 335 (Chili) ;
Ph. & Landb. Cat. Av. Chil. p. 41.

Dafila urophasianus, Scl. P. Z. 8. 1860, p. 389 (Falklands) ;
Abbott, Ibis, 1861, p. 160 (Falklands).

Dajila sp.? Scl. & Salv. Ibis, 1868, p. 189 (Sandy Point).

Anas caudacuta, Burm. J. fir Orn, 1860, p. 266 (Mendoza).

Supra fusca, plumis in centro nigricantibus fusco circumdatis ;

pileo lete rufescente nigro punctulato ; alis extus fuscis, spe-
culo alari amplo eneo-nigro, fascia lata cervina utrinque margi-
nato ; subtus pectore et hypochondriis cum crisso rufescentibus,
plumis in centro nigris ; gutture sordide albo parce nigro punc-
tato; ventre albo in parte inferiore fusco obsolete variegato ;
rostro nigro, mandibula ad basin utrinque flava ; pedibus plum-
beis: long. tota 19:0, ale 9°7, caude@ rectr. med. 5'5, ext. 3,
rostri a rictu 2°3, tarsi 1°6, Fem. mari similis.

Hab. S. Brazil, 8. Paulo (Natt.) ; Monte Video (Sel/ow) ; Buenos
Ayres (dzara, Hudson); Rio Parana et Mendoza (Burm.) ; Ma-
gellan Straits (Cunningh.); Falklands (Adbott); Chili (Phil. et
Landb.); S. Peru, Tinta (Whitely).

This Pintail has a wide distribution in Antarctic America, extend-

1876. | NEOTROPICAL ANATIDA, 393

ing from S. Brazil on one coast and the highlands of Peru on the
western side down to the Magellan Straits and the Falklands.

Azara, its original discoverer, gives no particulars respecting its
history, merely saying that he obtained four similar Specimens in
Buenos Ayres. It was procured in the adjoining State of Monte
Video by Sellow, and in the Brazilian province of Sao Paulo by
Natterer. Burmeister says this Duck is not unfrequently found in the
lagoons bordering the Parand. In his « La Plata-Reise’ he distin-
guishes a western race from the vicinity of Mendoza, for which he
adopts Meyen’s term oxyura. But after comparing eastern and
western specimens together, we are of Opinion that they belong to
one species.

In Chili Philippi and Landbeck say that this is the commonest
species of Duck. In the Falkland Islands it occurs rather sparingly
in the freshwater ponds of the interior, where it resides throughout
the year. The species is also found on the adjoining coast of Pata-
gonia; and the specimen in Dr. Cunningham’s collection left unde-
termined in our first list of his birds (‘ Ibis,’ 1868, p. 189) certainly
belongs to it, though not in full plumage. Mr. Whitely has sent
several skins of this Duck home from the Cuzcan Andes, obtained
on the lake of Tungasuca and on the river near Tinta,

3. DAFILA BAHAMENSIs.

Llathera Duck (Anas bahamensis), Catesby, Carolina, vol. i,
p- 93, t. 93, undé

Anas bahamensis, Linn. S. N. i. p- 199 (1766); Max. Beitr. iv.
p. 925 (S.E. Brazil) ; Burm. Syst. Ueb. iii. p. 436; J. fiir Orn.
1860, p. 266, et La Plata-Reise, ii. p. 515 (Uruguay) ; Schl. Mus.
des P.-B. Anseres, p:,55.

Dafila bahamensis, Hart]. Ind. Az. p- 27 (1847) ; Cab. in Schom-
burgk’s Guiana, iii. p. 763 ; Gay, Faun. Chil. vol. i. p. 448 (1848) ;
Cassin, Gilliss’s Exp. ii. p. 203 (1856) ; Sel. P.Z.8. 1867, p- 335
(Chili); Ph. & Landb. Cat. Av. Chil. p- 41; Scl. & Salv. P. Z.S.
1868, p. 146 (Rep. Arg.), 1870, p. 323 (Galapagos), et Nom. Av.
Neotr. p. 130; Pelz. Orn. Bras. p- 320 (1870) ; Salvin, Trans. Zool.
Soc. iv. p. 499.

Pecilonetta bahamensis, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p- 116 (1838) ;
Sclater, P. Z.S. 1860, p- 389 (Falklands) ; Darwin, Voy. Beagle, iii,
p. 135 (Galapagos Islands) ; Abbott, Ibis, 1861, p- 160 (Falklands).

Anas fimbriata, Merrem, Ersch. u. Grub. Enc. sect. i. vol. xxxv.
p. 35 (ex Azara).

Anas urophasianus, Vig. Zool. Journ. iy. p- 357 (1829) ; Zool.
Beechey’s Voy. p. 31, t. 14.

Dajila urophasianus, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p- 112, t. 20 (1838).

Anas ilathera, Vieill. Enc. Méth. p- 152 (1823), ex Brisson,
Orn. iv. p. 360.

Pato pico aplomado y roxo, Az. Apunt. no. 433 (Buenos Ayres),
unde

Anas rubrirostris, Vieill. N. D. y. p- 108 (1816), et Enc. Méth.
p. 353 (1823).

394 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

Rufescenti-fusca, plumis in centro nigricantibus ; dorso postico
nigricante; tectricibus caude superioribus cum cauda cervinis,
rectricibus mediis dilutioribus ; alis obscure schistaceo-nigris,
speculo lete eneoviridi, supra et subtus fascia saturate cervina
marginato et fascia altera subterminali subtus ornato ; secun-
dariorum intimorum marginibus externis cervinis, cum specult
marginibus concoloribus ; subtus fuscescenti-cervina, omnino ob-
solete nigro guttata, gutture toto cum genis et cervice antica pure
albis ; rostro nigro, macula ad basin utrinque rubra ; pedibus
fuscis : long. tota 18°0, ale 8:4, caude rectr. med. 5, ext. 2°8,
tarsi 1-5, rostri a rictu 1°9. Fem. mari similis.

Hab. British Guiana (Schomd.) ; Praia de Cajutuba, near Para
(Natt.); S.E. Brazil (Maz. et Burm.); Buenos Ayres (dzara et
Burm.); Patagonia (Darwin, King); Falklands (Abdott); Chili
(Ph. et Landb.); Galapagos (Darwin et Habel).

Linnzeus established his Anas bahamensis upon the Hathera Duck
of Catesby, of which that author tells us a single specimen was
procured in the Bahama Islands. Catesby’s figure most undoubtedly
represents the present species ; but if his locality is correct, the bird
obtained was probably a straggler, as we have no other authentic
record of its occurrence north of Guiana, where Schomburgk noticed
it in flocks on the mouths of the rivers. Azara obtained two speci-
mens of this Duck in a lagoon on the pampas of Buenos Ayres ;
and Darwin records it from Bahia Blanca in Northern Patagonia.
Burmeister says it is spread abundantly over the whole of Brazil in
ponds and marshes, and that it is nearly the commonest species of
Duck there. He also observed it numerous in the La-Plata district,
as well as on the Rio Uruguay. It is also common near Buenos
Ayres, and is often seen exposed fur sale in the market. On the
Parana and further westwards Burmeister did not observe it.

In Chili it is of uncertain occurrence, some years there being none
to be seen, whilst in others it appears in plenty. Philippi and Land-
beck remark that it is also found in Peru; but we have not yet seen
examples from that locality. Mr. Darwin procured one specimen
from a small salt-water lagoon in the Galapagos archipelago in the
month of October; and Dr. Habel also obtained three individuals
in that group of islands, and says it is not uncommon there. In
the Falkland Islands it appears as a straggler from the mainland.

Genus 8. Mareca. Type.

Mareca, Stephens, G. Z. xii. pt. 2, p. 130 (1824).. M. penelope.

Two Widgeons occur within the limits of the Neotropical Region,
one of which is a winter migrant from the north, the other a pecu-
liar Antarctic species of rather abnormal form.

1. MareECA AMERICANA.

Le Canard jensen, Buff. Pl. Enl. 955, unde

Anas americana, Gm. 8. N. p 526 (1788).

Mareca americana, Steph. G. Z. xii. pt. 2, p. 135; Baird, B. of
N. Am. p. 783; Cab. J. fir Orn. 1857, p. 227 (Cuba); Scl. &

1876. ] NEOTROPICAL ANATIDZ. 395

Salv. Ibis, 1859, p. 231 (Guatemala), Nomencl. Av. Neotr. p- 130 ;
Newton, Ibis, 1860, p. 308 (St. Thomas); Salv. Ibis, 1865, p. 193;
March, Pr. Ac. Phil. 1864, p. 71 (Jamaica) ; Léot. Ois. Trin. p- 511
(Trinidad) ; Gund), Repert. F.-N. i. p. 388, et J. fiir Orn. 1875,
p- 378 (Cuba); Lawr. Mem. Bost. Soc. N. H. it. p. 315 (Mexico),

Hab. Mexico (Grayson); Guatemala (Salvin) ; Cuba (Gund1.) ;
Jamaica (March); St. 'Yhomas (Newton) ; Trinidad (Léotaud).

The American Widgeon is said to be very common in Cuba during
the annual migration from September to April. In Jamaica, too, it
is to be seen in all its forms and variety of plumage. Mr. Riise
procured specimens in St. Thomas; and Léotand records it asa
regular winter visitant to Trinidad. In Central America it likewise
occurs in winter, having been found by Salvin in all the Guatemalan
lakes during that season.

2. Mareca srpinaTrix.

Anas sibilatrizx, Poeppig, Fror. Not. no. 529 (1829), p. 10
(Chili).

danas chilvensis, King, P. Z.S. 1830-31, p. 15; Burm. J. fiir Orn.
1860, p. 227, et La Plata-Reise, ii. p. 517 (Mendoza) ; Schl. Mus,
P.-B. Anseres, p. 46.

Mareca chiloensis, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p- 117, t. xxi. (1838) ;
Hart]. Ind. Az. p: 27 (1847); Gay, Faun. Chil. p- 447 (1848);
Cassin, Gilliss’s Exp. ii. p. 201 (1856); Gould, P. Z. §. 1859, p. 96
(Falklands) ; Phil. & Landb. Cat. Av. Chil. p. 41; Sel. P.Z.S.
1860, p. 389 (Falklands); 1867, pp. 335 (Chili); 1870, p. 665
Chili ; Scl. & Salv, P. ZS. 1869, p. 635 (Rep. Arg.); Ibis, 1869
p. 284 (Gregory Bay), et Nomencl. Av. Neotr. p. 130.

Pato pico pequeno, Az. Apunt. no. 432 (Buenos Ayres).

Anas parvirostris, Merr. Ersch. u. Grub. Ene. sect. i. vol. xxv.
p- 43 (1841).

Supra nigra, in cervice albo transfasciata, dorsi et scapularium
plumis albo utrinque marginatis ; pileo et genis pure albis, nucha
et cervice postica viridi-purpureo lucentibus 3 alis fuscis, tectri-
cibus minoribus albis 3 Secundariis velutino-nigris ad basin albis ;
subtus alba, gutture et cervice antica nigricantibus, pectore supe-
riore nigro albo transfasciolato, hypochondriis Serrugineolavatis ;
rostro et pedibus nigris : long. tota 20-0, ale 10°3, caude 4:3,
tarst 1°4, rostri a rictuy 16. Fem. mari similis sed paulo
obscurior.

Hab. Paraguay (Azara); Buenos Ayres and Mendoza (Burm.) ;
Falklands (Aédéo¢t); Chiloe (King) ; Valdivia and Central Chili
(Phil. et Landb.).

Azara was the original describer of this fine Duck, from specimens
obtained in Buenos Ayres ; but Vieillot appears to have missed
giving any Latin appellation to the species ; and it was first provided
with a scientific name by Poeppig, who gave an excellent description
of it in his “ Fragmenta Zoologica Itineris Chilensis,” published in
Froriep’s ‘Notizen’ for July 1829. This was two years before
Capt. King’s term chiloensis (usually employed for this species) ap-

396 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

peared ; and we have consequently found it necessary to revert to
the older name.

This Duck is found near Mendoza, according to Burmeister, at the
foot of the Cordilleras in the lagoons and rivers. It also occurs in
the lakes of the Pampas and near Buenos Ayres, where birds are
often sold in the market. In Southern Chili and Valdivia, as stated
by Philippi and Landbeck, it is a rare species, but is more common in
the central provinces. It is one of the wildest and scarcest birds in
East Falkland. Capt. Abbott never found its nest, but says that
young ones were seen in a pond near Port Louis in January.

Genus 9. Spatuna. Type.

Spatula, Boié, Isis, 1822, p. 563..........--00.. S. clypeata.

Rhynchaspis, Stephens, G. Z. xii. pt. 2, p.114(1824). S. clypeata.

Two Shovellers are likewise found within Neotropical boundaries.
One of them is a northern immigrant, only met with in the Antilles ;
the other a fine well-marked southern endemic species.

1. SPATULA CLYPEATA.

Anas clypeata, Linn. 8. N. i. p. 200 (1766).

Spatula clypeata, Boie, Isis, 1822, p.564; Baird, B. N. Am. p.781;
Sel. & Salv. Ibis, 1859, p. 231 (Guatemala), et Nom. Av. Neotr.
p- 130; Scl. P. Z. S. 1862, p. 20 (Mexico); Newton, Ibis, 1860,
p- 308 (St. Thomas) ; March, Pr. Ac. Phil. 1864, p. 71 (Jamaica) ;
Gundl. Repert. F.-N. i. p. 389, et J. fiir Orn. 1875, p. 379 (Cuba) ;
Léot. Ois. Trin. p. 518 (1866) (Trinidad) ; Lawr. Mem. Bost. Soe.
N. H. ii. p. 314 (Mexico).

Rhynchaspis clypeata, Cab. J. fir Orn. 1857, p. 228 (Cuba).

Hab. Mexico (Boucard, Grayson); Guatemala (Salvin) ; Cuba
(Gundlach) ; Jamaica (March).

In Cuba, according to Dr. Gundlach, the Shoveller is a regular
winter visitant, remaining from September to April. It also appears
in Jamaica in considerable numbers. In Mexico it has been found
at Guaymas and Mazatlan, as well as in S. Mexico. In Guatemala
it is common in winter.

2. SPATULA PLATALEA.

_ Pato espatulato, Az. Apunt. no. 431 (Buenos Ayres), undé

Anas platalea, Vieill. N. D. v. p. 157 (1816), et Ene. Méth. p. 357
(1823); Burm. La Plata-Reise, ii. p. 517 (Panama and Buenos
Ayres) ; Schl. Mus. des P.-B. Anseres, p. 35. .

Spatula platalea, Hartl. Ind. Az. p. 27; Scl. P. Z.S. 1867,
p- 335 (Chili); Scl. & Salv. P. Z. 8. 1868, p. 145 (Buenos Ayres),
et Nomencl. Av. Neotr. p. 130.

Rhynchaspis maculatus, Gould, MS.; Jard. & Selb. Ill. Orn.
t. 147; Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 134 (1838); Phil. & Landb, Cat.
Av. Chil. p. 43. ;

Dafila cesio-scapulata, Reich. Natat. tab. li. f. 180; Bibra,

1876.] NEOTROPICAL ANATID.E. 397

Denkschr. Ak. Wien, v. p. 131 (1853), et J. fiir Orn. 1855, p. 57
(Chili).
Rhynchaspis mexicana, Licht. Nomencl. p. 102 (descr. nulla) (?).
Supra et subtus rufescens, nigro guttata, capite et cervice undique
dilutioribus et maculis minutis aspersis ; uropygio nigro; dorso
postico nigricante rufo undulato ; alis fusco-nigris, tectricibus
minoribus ceruleis, intermediis albis ; secundariis eatus eneis
viridi nitentibus, scapularibus et secundariis dorsi proximis
linea scapum occupante alba ornatis; crisso nigro; cauda
Jusca, rectricibus lateralibus extus albo marginatis ; rostro (in
pelle) obscuro; pedibus flavis : long. tota 20°5, ale 8-0,
caude 4:5, tarsi 1°4, rostri a rictu 2°7. Fem. supra nigri-
canti-fusca, plumarum marginibus cervino-rufis; tectricibus
alarum minoribus cerulescente lavatis ; subtus cervino-rufes-
cens nigro variegata et obsolete punctata; gula fere imma-
culata, crassitie minore.

Hab. Buenos Ayres (Azara §& Hudson); Parand (Burm.); Chili
(Phil. §& Landb.); Falklands (Leconte).

According to Azara this species of Shoveller is found both in
Paraguay and in Buenos Ayres. Burmeister also met with it on the
Parana and near Buenos Ayres. In Chili Philippi and Landbeck
state that it is common in the central provinces, but rarer towards
the south. Mr. Darwin obtaind his specimen of this Shoveller from
the Rio de La Plata; whence also the one described in Jardine and
Selby’s ‘Illustrations of Ornithology,’ under the name of Rhyn-
chaspis maculatus, was procured by Mr. Gould.

A female of this species, in Salvin and Godman’s collection, was
obtained in the Falklands by Leconte when he went to obtain living
Sea-lions in 1867.

Genus 10. Arx.

Type.
7 DOM TT Ie te at St er a A, sponsa.
Dendronessa, Sw Faun. Bor.-Am. Birds, p. 497 (1831). 4. sponsa.
Lampronessa, Wagler, Isis, 1832, p. 282 .......... A. sponsa.

Aiz is an Arctic form, the American species of which has dif-
fused itself as far south as Cuba and Jamaica.

AIX SPONSA.

Anas sponsa, Linn. S. N. i. p. 207 (1766). -

Aix sponsa, Boié, Isis, 1828, p. 329 ; Baird, B. of N. Am. p. 785;
Gundl. J. fiir Orn. 1857,3p. 226, Repert. F.-N. i. p. 389, et J. fiir
Orn. 1875, p. 381 (Cuba); March, Pr. Ac. Phil. 1864, p. 71 (Jamaica);
Sel. & Salv. Nom. Av. Neotr. p. 130; Lawr. Mem. Bost. Soe. ii. p. 315
(Mexico).

Hab. Mexico (déert) ; Cuba (Gundl.); Jamaica (March).

A resident species in Cuba, frequenting shady lagoons. It nests
in the island; but at what time of year Dr. Gundlach had not ascer-
tained. In Jamaica it is very rare. Mr. Lawrence gives Col. Abert
as the authority for its occurrence near Mazatlan, Mexico.

398 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

Subfamily IV. FuLiguULINa.

The Sea-ducks are essentially arctic in their distribution. One
peculiar form only (Micropterus) occurs on the coast of Antarctic
America. A second form (Metopiana), though belonging to this
group, seems to be only met with on fresh water.

Genus 1. METOPIANA. Type.

Metopiana, Bp. C. R. xliii. p. 146 (1856) ...... M. peposaca,

Some authors have been inclined to associate this peculiar Duck
with the Anatine ; but though it is, we believe, strictly an inhabitant
of fresh water, and has not the lobated hind toe of the typical Fuli-
gulinee, it possesses their peculiarity in the structure of the trachea,
as mentioned by Burmeister (La-Plata Reise, ii. p. 518), and as
recently described and figured by Garrod (P. Z. S. 1875, p. 154).

METOPIANA PEPOSACA.

Pato negrizco ala blanca, Az. Apunt. no. 430 (Paraguay and
Buenos Ayres), undé

Anas peposaca, Vieill. N. D. v. p. 132 (1816), et Enc. Méth.
p- 357 (1823); Hartl. Ind. Az. p. 27; Burm. La Plata-Reise, ii.
p- 518, J. fiir Orn. 1860, p. 227 (Parana).

Fuligula peposaca, Schl. Mus. des P.-B. Anseres, p.31.

Anas metopias, Poppig, Fror. Notiz. no. 529, p. 9 (1829).

Fuligula metopias, Gay, Faun. Chil. p. 456 (1848); Harti.
Naum. 1853, p. 217; Cassin, Gilliss’s Exp. ii. p. 204, t. xxvii.
(1856) Chili; Scl. P. Z.S. (1867), 335; Reich. Nat. t. cclxxxv.
f. 2350; Phil. & Landb. Cat. Av. Chil. p. 43.

Metopiana peposaca, Bp. C. R. xliii. p. 146 (1856) ; Sel. & Salv.
P. Z. S. 1868, p. 146 (Buenos Ayres), et Nom. Av. Neotr. p. 130;
Sel. P. Z. S. 1870, p. 666, t. 37; Garrod, P. Z. 8S. 1875, p. 154.

Anas albipennis, Licht. MS.

Nigra, in dorso minutissime albo irrorata, cervice postica et
capite superiore toto nitore purpureo indutis; secundariis
albis, nigro terminatis et tectricibus nigris obtectis, speculum
album efficientibus ; primariis grisescenti-albis, horum quatuor
externis in pogonio exteriore et omnium apicibus nigris ; ventre
toto griseo et ulbo minutissime vermiculato; crisso albo;
rostro rosaceo, ad basin tumido; pedibus flavis: long. tota
19:0, ale 9°4, caude 2'8, tarsi 1:7, rostri a rictu 2°3. Fem.
supra brunnea, campterio et speculo alari albis; subtus alba,
pectore et hypochondriis rufescenti-brunneis, rostro obscuro,
pedibus corneis (Descr. exempl. ex Monte Video).

Hab. Paraguay (Azara) ; Buenos Ayres (Hudson) ; Monte Video

Johnston in Mus. S.-G.); Parana (Burm.); Chili ( Phil. et Landb.).

This beautiful Duck was first obtained by Azara, who, however,
gives no details respecting it; but Burmeister tells us it is very
common on the Parana; and Mr. Hudson obtained specimens near
Buenos Ayres. In the central part of Chili, Philippi and Landbeck
state that it is common, but rare in the southern provinces.

1876.] NEOTROPICAL ANATID&. 399

Judging from the description of Prince Maximilian, his Anas
erythrophthalma (Beitr. iv. p. 929), as already suggested by Salvin
(Ibis, 1874, p. 319), would appear to be very closely allied to the
present species, if not identical with it. The male, as described,
seems to be in immature plumage. The female agrees tolerably
well with that of the present bird. Prince Maximilian obtained his
two specimens of A. erythrophthalma in a small lake near Villa de
Belmonte, in S.E. Brazil, in the month of November. No subse-
quent travellers seem to have recognized the species so far north.

The Rosy-billed Duck has been successfully introduced into
Europe, and has bred on more than one occasion in our Gardens.
In the ‘ Proceedings’ for 1870 (J. s. c.) Sclater has given an account
of it, and figures of both sexes from the living birds.

Genus 2. Funicuta. Type.
Branta, Boié, Isis, 1822, p. 564 (nec Scop.).. F. rufina.
Fuligula, Stephens, G. Z. xii. pt. 2, p 187 .. F. rufina.
Callichen, Brehm, Vég. Deutschl. p. 921 (1831) F. rufina.
Fuliz, Sund.Vet. Ak. Handl.1835,p. 129 (1836) = Fuligula.
Nyroca, Fleming *, Phil. of Zool.ii. p.260(1822) F. leucophthalma.
Aythya, Boi, Isis, 1822, p. 564............ F. ferina.
Marila, Reichenb. Nat. Syst. p. ix. (1852) .. F. ferina.
Fuligula, as here considered, is a purely northern form, of which
five species occur in winter within the Neotropical Region.

1, FuLiGuLa MARILA.

Anas marila, Linn. 8. N.i. p. 196.

Fuligula marila, Stephens, Zool. xii. p. 198.

Fuliz marila, Baird, B. N. A. p. 791; Lawrence, Mem. Bost. Soc.
N. H. ii. p. 315 (Mazatlan).

Hab. Mazatlan, Mexico (Grayson).

Col. Grayson found the Scaup near Mazatlan in the winter months.

2. FULIGULA AFFINIS.

Fuligula affinis, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 157 (1838); Gosse, B.
Jamaica, p. 408; Scl. & Salv. Ibis, 1859, p. 231 (Guatemala)
Salv. P. Z.S. 1870, p. 219 (Veragua).

Fulix affinis, Baird, B. of N. Am. p. 791; Gundl. Repert. F.-N.
i. p. 390, et J. fiir Orn. 1875, p. 382 (Cuba); Lawr. Ann. Lyc. N.
Y. ix. (1868), p. 143 (Costa Rica); March, Pr. Ac. Phil. 1864, p. 71
(Jamaica) ; A. & E. Newton, ILbis, 1859, p. 366 (St. Croix); Sel.
et Salv. Nom. Av. Neotr. p. 130; Lawr, Ann. Lyc.-N. Y. ix. p. 210
(Yucatan), et Mem. Bost. Soc. N. H. ii. p. 315 (Mexico).

Fuligula mariloides, Cab. J. fiir Orn. 1857, p. 230 (Cuba).

Fuligula marila, Jard. Aun. & Mag. N. H. xx. 1847, p. 377 (To-
bago); Léot. Ois. Trin. p. 522 (1866) (Trinidad),

Hab. Cuba (Gundlach); Jamaica (March); Tobago (Kirk);

* Fleming puts Anas ferina first on the list; but A. myroca should be con-
sidered his type, if that bird is separated from Fwligula.

400 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

Trinidad (Léotaud); Mexico (Grayson) ; Yucatan (Schott); Guate-
mala (Salvin); Costa Rica (v. Frantzius); Veragua (Arcé).

This Duck is rather rare in Cuba, but occurs during the autumnal
and winter months on passage on the large lagoons which are not
choked with high reeds. In Jamaica it is seen in considerable
numbers:in winter. Mr. Kirk also records it from Tobago, but says
it is very rare; and Léotaud gives it as a frequent visitor to Tri-
nidad, where it arrives in November, and departs in April.

In Guatemala Salvin found it abundant on the lakes in winter;
v. Frantzius obtained it in Costa Rica; and Arcé has sent specimens
from Veragua.

3. FULIGULA COLLARIS.

Anas collaris, Donov. Brit. B. vi. t. 147 (1809).

Fuligula rufitorques, Gosse, B. Jamaica, p. 408; Sclater, P. Z.S.
1862, p. 20.

Fuligula collaris, Cab. J. fiir Orn. 1857, p. 230 (Cuba); Salv. &
Scl. Ibis, 1860, p. 277 (Guatemala).

Fuligula affinis, 8cl. P. Z. 8. 1859, p. 369 (err.).

Fuliz collaris, Baird, B. of N. Am. p. 792; March, Pr. Ac. Phil.
1864, p. 72 (Jamaica) ; Gundl. Repert. F.-N. i. p. 390, et J. fiir
Orn. 1875, p. 383 (Cuba) ; Lawr. Mem. Bost. Soc. N. H. ii. p. 315
(Mazatlan); Scl. et Salv. Nom. Av. Neotr. p. 130.

Hab. Cuba (Gundlach) ; Jamaica (March); E. Mexico (Bou-
card); N.W. Mexico (Grayson et Xantus); Guatemala (Salvin).

One of the commonest of the northern migrants in Cuba, where
it frequents open lagoons not choked with reeds. In Jamaica it is
rarely met with. —

We have examined Mexican skins of this Duck collected by Bou-
card and De Oca; and Salvin found it on the lakes of Guatemala
sparingly in winter.

4. FULIGULA AMERICANA.

Fuligula americana, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 155 (1838).

Aythya americana, Baird, B. of N. Am. p. 793; Gosse, B. Ja-
maica, p. 408, et March, Pr. Ac. Phil. 1864, p. 72 (Jamaica) ; Scl.
et Salv. Nom. Av. Neotr. p. 130; Lawr. Mem. Bost. Soc. N. H. ii.
p- 315 (Mexico).

Hab. Jamaica (March); valley of Mexico (Le Strange) ; Mazatlan
(Grayson).

According to Mr. March this Pochard is not uncommon in
Jamaica in winter. We know of but few instances of its occur-
rence on the mainland within the limits of the Neotropical region.
Mr. Le Strange brought one specimen from the valley of Mexico;
and Col. Grayson obtained it at Mazatlan.

5. FuLIGULA VALISNERIA.

Anas valisneria, Wills. Am. Orn. viil. p. 103, t. 70 (1814).
Fuligula valisneria, Cab. J. fir Orn. 1857, p. 230 (Cuba).

1876.] NEOTROPICAL ANATIDE. - 401

Aythya valisneria, Baird, B. of N. Am. p. 794; March, Pr. Ac.
Phil. 1864, p. 72 (Jamaica) ; Salv. Ibis, 1866, p. 198 (Guatemala) ;
Gundl. Repert. F.-N. i. p. 390, et J. fiir Orn. 1875, p. 382 (Cuba) ;
Scl. et Salv. Nom. Ay. Neotr. p. 130; Lawr. Mem. Bost. Soc. N. H.
il. p. 315 (Mexico).

Hab. Cuba (Gundlach) ; Jamaica (March); Mexico (Grayson) ;
Guatemala (Salvin).

An occasional winter visitant in Cuba, having been observed by
Dr. Gundlach in some numbers in 1839 and 1850. Mr. March
says that it is sometimes found in Jamaica in company with the
Pintail. Col. Grayson found it at Mazatlan.

Salvin once killed a single specimen of the Canvas-back on the
Lake of Duefias; but this is the only instance of its occurrence so far
south that we are acquainted with,

Genus 3. CLANGULA. Type.

Clangula, Fleming, Phil. of Zool. ii. p. 260 (1822) C. glaucion*.

Glaucion, Kaup, Nat. Syst. p. 53 (1829)........ C. glaucion.

Bucephala, Baird, B. of N. A. p. 796 (1860).... C. albeola.

Clangula is another high northern genus, of which two species
have been casually met with just within the confines of the Neotro-
pical Region.

1. CLANGULA GLAUCION.

Anas clangula et A. glaucion, Linn. 8. N. i. p. 201."

Clangula americana, Cab. J. fiir Orn. 1857, p. 230 (Cuba).

Bucephala americana, Baird, B. of N. Am. p. 796; Lawr. Mem.
Bost. Soc. N. H. ii. p. 315 (Mexico).

Hab. Cuba (Lembeye) ; Mexico (Grayson).

Dr. Gundlach tells us that Lembeye delieved ke had seen an ex-
ample of the Golden-eye on a pool in Cuba, but was not able to
get it. We observe that Dr. Gundlach omits this species altogether
in his ‘ Revista,’ and still more recently published notes in the
‘ Journal fiir Ornithologie’ (1875). It may, however, find a place
in this paper on the authority of Col. Grayson, who shot it at
Mazatlan.

2. CLANGULA ALBEOLA.

Anas albeola, Linn. 8. N.i. p. 199 (1766).

Clangula albeola, Bp. Comp. List, p. 58; Cab. J. fiir Orn. 1857,
p- 230 (Cuba).

Bucephala albeola, Baird, B. of N. Am. p. 797; Gundl. Repert.
F.-N. i. p. 390, et J. fiir Orn. 1875, p. 383 (Cuba).

Hab. Cuba (Gundlach).

A specimen of this Duck has been once observed in the market of
Havana, and was procured by Gundlach.

* Fleming, it is true, puts Avas glacialis first in his list; but 4. clangu/a is
obviously his type, and therefore we do not use Baird’s term Bucephala,

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1876, No. XXVI. 26

402 ; MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

Genus 4. CGEpEMIA.

Oedemia, Fleming, Phil. of Zool. ii. p. 260 (1822).
One species only of this northern group is recorded to have been
obtained within our limits.

CEDEMIA PERSPICILLATA.

Anas perspicillata, Linn. 8. N.i. p. 201 (1766).

(demia perspicillata, Baird, B. of N. Am. p. 806; March, Pr.
Ac. Phil. 1864, p. 72 (Jamaica); Scl. et Salv. Nom. Av. Neotrp.
p- 130.

Hab, Jamaica (Gosse).

The Surf-scoter has been cbtained in Jamaica, according to
Gosse, only once. March also says it is very rare.

Genus 5. TACHYERES. Type.

Micropterus, Less. Traité d’Orn, p. 630 (1831) .. T. cinereus.

Tachyeres, Owen, Trans. Zool. Soc. ix. p. 254 (1875). T. cinereus.

This is a peculiar Antarctic type, rather questionably placed with
the other Fuliguline *.

TACHYERES CINEREUS.

Anas cinereus, Gm. 8. N. p. 506 (1788), ex Pernety (Falklands).

Micropterus cinereus, Gay, Faun. Chil. p. 457 (1848); Gonld,
P. Z. S. 1859, p. 96 (Falklands); Phil. & Landb. Cat. Av. Chil.
p- 43; Scl. P. Z. 8S. 1860, p. 389 (Falklands); Scl. & Salv. Ibis,
1868, p. 189 (Sandy Point), 1870, p. 499 (Gallegos river), et Nom.
Ay. Neotr. p. 130; Cunningham, Ibis, 1868, p. 127.

Fuligula cinerea, Schl. Mus. des P.-B., Anseres, p. 13.

Anas brachyptera, Lath. Ind. Orn. ii. p. 834; Q. & G. Voy. Uran.
p- 139, t. 39.

Micropterus brachypterus, Eyton, Mon. Anat, p. 144 (1838);
Darwin, Voy. Beagle, ili. p. 136 (1841).

Oidemia patachonica, King, P. Z. 8. 1830-31, p. 15.

Micropterus patachonicus, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 143 (1838) ; Scl.
P. Z. 8. 1861, p. 46.

Tachyeres brachypterus, Owen, Trans. Zool. Soc. ix. p. 254.

Grisescenti-brunneus ; pectore, hypochondriis, scapularibus et

dorso antico cinereo maculatis ; gutture rufescente ; stria post-
oculari et fascia alari albis; abdomine toto clare albo; alis
et cauda pure griseis, hujus rectricibus duabus mediis elongatis
retrorsum curvatis : long. tota 27:0, ale 10°8, caude@ 4°5, tarsi
2°4, dig. med. 4:0, rostr. 2°7.

Hab. Falklands (Pernety, Abbott) ; Magellan Straits (Cunning-
ham); Chili, Valdivia (Ph. et Landb.).

This peculiar Sea-duck, originally discovered in the Falklanu
Islands, is found also on the west coast of S. America, according to
Philippi and Landbeck, from the Straits of Magellan as far north as
Valdivia in Chili.

* Of. Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 51.

1876. } NEOTROPICAL ANATIDZ. 403

Mr. Darwin, in describing its habits, says that its wings are too
small and weak to allow of flight, but that by their aid, partly swim-
ming and partly flapping the surface of the water, it is enabled to
move very quickly. He adds that he is nearly sure that it moves
its wings alternately instead of, as in the case of other birds, both
together. It is able to dive only a short distance. It feeds on mol-
lusks, obtained from floating kelp and tidal rocks.

Dr. Cunningham remarks that the Loggerhead Duck is very
plentiful in the eastern part of the Straits of Magellan, and that it
also occurs in abundance at the Falkland Islands. \ He adds that the
bird is exceedingly hard to kill.

In the latter islands Capt. Abbott found them in great numbers,
where they breed along the coast. The nests are readily found by
searching the shore just opposite where the male bird is seen swint-
ming by himself. The old female flutters off to the water, being
quite unable to fly. It lays from the end of September to the end
of November, making its nest in the long grass or a bush of some
kind. The usual complement of eggs is seven, as many as nine
being sometimes found.

The “ Flying Loggerhead”’ is probably the young bird of this
species, though it would appear from Capt. Abbott’s remarks that it
breeds when still able to fly; for one flew out of a nest that he
found, high up into the air. Capt. Abbott considers the flying bird
distinct ; but Dr. Cunningham’s view seems to be the correct one,
viz. that ‘‘the so-called M. patachonicus is only the young of M.
cinereus, the peculiarity being that the power of flight departs from
the bird as it grows old” *,

The anatomy of this Duck is fully described in Dr. Cunningham’s
memoir in the Society’s ‘ Transactions.’

Subfamily V. Er1tsMATURINA.
Genus ErisMATURA. Type.

Undina, Gould, B. of Eur. vol. v. pl. 383 (1836) .. &. mersa.
Erismatura, Bp. Comp. List, p. 59 (1838) ........ E. mersa.

Of the three species of this quasi-cosmopvlitan group one is only
found in the northern part of the Neotropical region, a second is very
widely spread in tropical America, and the third may be regarded as

1. ErtsMATURA RUBIDA.

Anas rubida, Wils. Am. Orn. vii. p. 128, t. 81 (1814).
Erismatura rubida, Bp. Comp. List, p- 59; Baird, Bird of N. A.
p. 811; Eyton. Mon. Anat. p. 171; Gundl. Repert. F.-N. i. p. 390,
et J. fiir Orn. 1875, p. 384 (Cuba); Cab. J. fiir Orn. 1857, p. 230
* See P. Z. 8.1871, p. 262, and Trans. Zool. Soc. vii, 493.

404 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

(Cuba); Scl. & Salv. Ibis, 1859, p. 231 (Guatemala) et Nom. Av.
Neotr. p. 136; Scl. P. Z. 8S. 1859, p. 393 (Mexico); Lawr. Mem.
Boston Soc. N. H. ii. p. 315 (Mexico).

Biziura rubida, Schl. Mus. des P.-B., Anseres, p. 11.

Jamaica Shoveler, Lath. Syn. iii. pt. 2, p. 518, undé

Anas jamaicensis, Gm. 8. N. i. p. 529; Lath, Ind. p. 857, et
Vieill. Ene. Méth. p. 127 (1823) (2).

Hab. Cuba (Gundlach) ; Mexico, Oaxaca (Boucard); Tepic
(Grayson) ; Guatemela, Lake of Duenas (Salvin).

Although certainly resident in Cuba, this is a rare species. Dr.
Gundlach has found it only in the neighbourhood of Havana.
Salvin met with it breeding on the Lake of Duejias in Guatemala,
where it is the only Duck resident throughout the year. He ob-
served that it diminished in numbers during the period of the spring
migration. It builds in May amongst the reeds on the margin of
the lake, making a nest of dead flag with a little down. The eggs

are rough in texture, and much resemble those of the European
EE. mersa.

2. ERISMATURA FERRUGIN EA,

Erismatura ferruginea, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 170 (1838) (Chili) ;
Gray, List Galline &c. (1844), p. 146; Gray & Mitch. Gen. B.
t. 169 (1844) ; Bridges, P. Z. S. 1843, p. 119 (Lake of Quintero,
Chili); Gay, Faun. Chil. p. 458 (1848); Bibra, Denksch. Ak.
Wien, v. p. 131, et J. fiir Orn. 1855, p. 57; Cassin, Gilliss’s Exp.
li. p. 204; Phil. & Landb. Cat. Av. Chil. p. 43, et 1872, p. 549
(Rio Negro); Scl. P. Z. S. 1867, p. 335 (Chili) ; Sel. & Salv. P. Z.S.
1868, p. 177 (S. Peru), et Nom. Av. Neotr. p. 131; Burm. P. Z. 8.
1872, p. 369; Taczanowski, P. Z.S. 1874, p. 554.

Biziura ferruginea, Schl. Mus. des P.-B., Anseres, p. 10.

Erismatura vittata, Ph. & Landb. Wiegm. Arch. 1860, p. 26
(Chili) ; Scl. P. Z. S. 1867, p. 335.

Erismatura cyanorhyncha, Licht. M.S. (teste Burmeister).

Supra castanea, capite et collo toto nigris ; alis et cauda fuscis ;
subtus sordide alba, fusco irrorata, pectore et hypochondriis
castaneis corpore concoloribus ; rostro ceruleo, pedibus fuscis :
long. tota 16:0, ale 5°5, caude 3°8, tarsi 1*2, rostri a rictu 1:6.
Fem. fusca, cervino (precipue in dorso et pileo) irregulariter
transfasciata; vitta suboculari aibida ; subtus sordide alba,
Susco (precipue in pectore et in hypochondriis) transvittata.

Hab. Central Peru (Nation, Jelski); S. Peru (Whitely); Chili
(Bridges, Phil. et Landb.); Buenos Ayres (Burm.); Rio Negro
(Hudson).

This Hrismatura was first obtained in Chili by Mr. C. Crawley,
and described by Eyton from his specimens in the British Museum.
Philippi and Landbeck state it is common on all the lakes of the
Central Provinces. They at one time described the female as of a dif-
ferent species (.-vittata), but subsequently acknowledged their error
(see P. Z.S. 1868, p.53)). From Chili this species spreads north-

1876.) NEOTROPICAL ANATID. 405

wards along the Andes as far as Central Peru, where Jelski observed
it breeding on the Lake of Junin, and obtained skins and eggs. It
likewise crosses the Andes into the Argentine Republic, as Bur-
meister met with it onthe Laguna Matanza, near Buenos Ayres, and
Mr. Hudson collected examples on the Rio Negro.

3. ERISMATURA DOMINICA.

Anas querquedula dominicensis, Briss. Orn. vi. p.472(S. Domingo),
undé

Anas dominica, Linn. 8. N. i. p. 201 (1766); Max. Beitr. iv.
p- 938 (Bahia); Burm. Syst. Ueb. iii. p. 439 (Lakes of S.E.
Brazil).

Erismatura dominica, Eyton, Mon. Anat. p. 172 (1838); Cab.
J. fiir Orn. 1857, p. 231 (Cuba); Gundl. Repert. F.-N. i. p. 391,
et J. fiir Orn. 1875, p. 384 (Cuba); A. & E. Newton, Ibis, 1859,
p. 367 (St. Croix’); Scl. P.Z.S. 1857, p. 206 (Jalapa), et 1860,
p. 254 (Orizaba); Léot. Ois. Trin. p. 525 (1866) (Trinidad) ; Pelz.
Orn. Bras. p. 320 (1870); Reinh. Fugl. Bras. Camp. p. 20 (1870)
(Lagoa dos Pitos); Lee, Ibis, 1873, p. 137 (Entrerios); Lawr. Mem.
Boston Soc. N. H. ii. p. 316 (Mexico).

Biziura dominica, Schl. Mus. des P.-B. Anseres, p. 9.

Sarcelle de la Guadeloupe, Buff. Pl. Enl. 967 (2), undé

Anas spinosa, Gm. 8. N. i. p. 522 (1788) (Cayenne et Guiana) ;
D’Orb. in La Sagra’s Cuba, Aves, p. 201 (Cuba et Bolivia).

Erismatura spinosa, Gosse, Birds Jam. p. 404 (Jamaica).

“ Erismatura ortygoides, Hill,” Gosse, Birds Jam. p. 406, et Ill.
pl. 113.

Ferruginea, nigro variegata et maculata ; pileo nigro, vitta super-
eiliari et altera suboculari, cum mento et genis infimis, albidis
nigro punctatis ; alis fuscis plaga magna secundariorum alba ;
cauda nigra; abdomine sordide albo rufescente irrorato; axil-
laribus pure albis; rostro ceruleo, pedibus nigris: long. tota
13:0, ale 5:5, caude 3°8, tarsi 1:0, rostri a rictu 1:5. Fem.
Susco-nigra, dorso cervino maculato ; capitis lateribus et cor-
pore subtus cervinis, illo nigro bivittato; pectore nigro varie-

ato.

Hab. Cuba (Gundlach) ; S. Domingo (Briss.); Jamaica (Gosse) ;
S. Croix (Newton) ; Trinidad (Léotaud); Mexico, Jalapa (Sallé) ;
Tepic (Grayson); Veragua (Arcé) ; S.E. Brazil (Maz. e¢ Burm.) ;
Mattodentro et Sao Paulo (Natt.); Uruguay (Sellow); Entrerios
(Lee); Bolivia, Chiquitos (D’ Ord.)

Obs. Ab E. rubida et E. ferruginea crassitie minore, dorso varie-
gato et macula alari alba prorsus distinguenda. —

This species of Erismatura is widely diffused in Tropical America,
from Mexico and the Antilles down to Uruguay, inhabiting the fresh-
water lakes like other members of the genus. It nests in Cuba,
where Dr. Gundlach says it is common, resident, and an excellent
diver. Mr. Gosse noticed this species in a broad piece of water
near Redonda, in Jamaica, where as many as three may be seen at one
time. They appear to be tame, but when alarmed smk rather than

406 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

dive into the water. They seldom fly, and then only with a heavy
laboured flight. ‘The bird referred to by Mr. Gosse as the Quail-
duck, or LH. ortygoides of Mr. Hill, is the male of this species.

Mr. A. Newton describes what he believes to have been a flock of
this Duck in St. Croix. He observed them for some time, but was
unable to obtain a specimen. Léotaud tells us it is not rare in
Trinidad.

In Central America this Lake-duck occurs as far north as the
neighbourhood of Mazatlan, where Col. Grayson obtained it, and
Jalapa, where Sallé collected specimens. Further south, down the
Isthmus, it has not yet been recorded ; but Salvin has recently re-
ceived a skin obtained by Arcé somewhere in Veragua.

We have no recent testimony as to the occurrence of this species
in Guiana and Amazonia; but in South and Central Brazil it
appears to be found in all the freshwater lakes. In Entrerios it
was obtained by Mr. Lee near Gualeguaychu, and in the adjoining
republic of Uruguay by Sellow. In La Sagra’s ‘Cuba’ D’Orbigny
mentions that he procured examples of it in the small lakes of
the province of Chiquitos in Bolivia, its furthest known range in this
direction.

Subfamily VI. MERGANETTINE.

The Torrent-ducks form a peculiar and somewhat isolated group
of the Anatide, restricted to the Andes of South America from Co-
lombia to Chili.

Genus MERGANETTA. Type.
Merganetta, Gould, P. Z.S. 1841, p.95 ........ M. chilensis.
Raphipterus, Gay, Faun. Chil. p. 459 (1848) .... M. ehilensis.

The three species may be diagnosed from the male dress as
follows :—

GA GHUCGUN ON ET Oncaea creuttaan gc cece bes sisou de nare nce ekminaismecatacet 1. armata,

6. Gutture albo.
Ventre nigro, medialiter fusco variegato ..........sss0ee08 2. turneri.
Ventre albo griseo flammulato ...........seceeersenseesceees 3. leucogenys.

In the females the under surface is of a uniform chestnut-red.

1. MERGANETTA ARMATA.

Merganetta armata, Gould, P. Z. 8. 1841, p. 95 (Chile); Des
Murs, Icon. Orn. t. 48 Q (Chili); Gray & Mitch. Gen. of B. t. 170
(3); Bibra, Denkschr. Akad. Wien, v. p. 132, et J. fiir Orn. 1855,
p. 37; Cassin in Gilliss’s Exp. ii. p. 204 (1856) ; Scl. P. Z.S. 1867,
p- 340; Sel. & Saly. Ex. Orn. p. 200, et Nom. Av. Neotr. p. 131.

Biziura armata, Schl. Mus. des P.-B., Anseres, p. 12.

Raphipterus chilensis, Gay, Faun. Chil. p. 459 (1848); Phil. &
Landb. Cat. Av. Chil. p. 43.

Merganetta chilensis, Des Murs, Icon. Orn. t. 5 (¢).

Supra nigra, plumis albo utrinque marginatis ; capite colloque

postico et laterali albis, pileo medio in strigam nuchalem pro-

1876.] NEOTROPICAL ANATIDE. 407

ducto et linea utrinque ab oculis ad collum imum descendente
nigris ; alis extus cerulescenti-schistaceis ; tectricibus et secun-
dartis albo anguste terminatis, speculo alari eneo-viridi ; dorso
postico cinereo, uropygio fasciolis minutis albis variegato ;
subtus rufescenti-ochracea, lineis nigris ornata ; mento, linea
ad rostri basin, spatio suboculari cum gutture conjuncto et pec-
tore superiore utraque ex parte nigerrimis ; rostro flavo, pedibus
rubellis: long. tota 16°5, ale 7, caud@e 4:5, rostri a rictu 1:6,
tarsi 1-9. Fem. supra ardesiaca, dorsi plumis nigro flammu-
latis; collo et uropygio lineis albis nigrisque vermiculatis ;
subtus omnino castanea.

Hab. Rivers of the Chilian Andes (Bridges, Gay).

We are indebted to the researches of Mr. Bridges among the Chi-
lian Andes for the discovery of this curious form. He sent home
specimens of the present species in 1811, which were described by
Mr. Gould before this Society in November of that year. Mr. Bridges
remarks that it swims and dives against the flow of the Chilian
mountain-torrents with a rapidity truly astonishing.

2. MERGANETTA TURNERI.

Merganetta turneri, Scl. & Salv. P. Z. S. 1869, p. 600 (Peru),
Ex. Orn. p. 199, t. 100, et Nomencl. p- 131.

Merganetta leucogenys, Scl. & Salv. (nec Tsch.) P. Z. S. 1869,
pPisy.

Supra nigra, interscapulio et scapularibus rufo marginatis ; capite
colloque toto albis, linea rostrum cingente, pileo medio in strigam
nuchalem producto et linea utringue ad imum eollum descendente
nigerrimis ; alis extus cerulescenti-cinereis 3 speculo alari eneo-
viridi ; tectricibus alarum et secundariis albo anguste termi-
natis ; abdomine nigro, ventre medio JSusco variegato; crisso et
uropygio nigris, albo minute vermiculatis; cauda Suscescenti-
cinerea unicolori; tectricibus subalaribus cinereis ; rostro et
pedibus obscure rubris: long. tota 16°0, ale 7°5, caude 5-0,
rostri a rictu 1°5, tarsi 1:8, digitt medii cum ungue 2°3.
Fem. supra cinerea, lateribus cervicis et uropygio albo nigroque
minute vermiculatis ; dorso nigro flammulato ; alis albo bifas-
ciatis ; speculo alari obscure eneo-viridi 3 subtus fulvo-rufa
unicolor: long. tota 16-0, ale 6:4, caude 4:0, rostri a rictu 1°35.

Hab. 8. Peru; Rivers of the Cuzcan Andes (Whitely).

When we first received examples of this bird from Mr. H. Whitely
we referred it to the species described by Tschudi as Merganetta
leucogenys. Having, however, made a reinvestigation of the group,
we convinced ourselves that Tschudi’s bird is, so far as can be de-
cided by his figure and description, inseparable from the Merganetta
columbiana of New Granada, and that the present species must be
regarded as undescribed, being equally distiuct from the New-Gra-
nadan form, and from the Chilian Merganetta armata. From the
former it differs in its larger size, and black breast and flanks, which
are only relieved by some brownish marks in the middle of the belly.
In the New-Granadan bird, which is well represented in Des Murs’s

408 MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON [Apr. 4,

‘Iconographie’ (tab. vi.), the whole abdomen is white, sparingly
striped with narrow blackish markings, and the bill is narrower and
much less elevated than in this species. Merganetta armata, of
which an excellent figure will be found in Gray and Mitchell’s
‘Genera of Birds,’ resembles the present bird in having a black
breast ; but the edges of the scapularies are white instead of rufous,
and the throat and fore neck are black, instead of being pure white
as in its two northern allies. It would seem, therefore, that this
Species occupies an intermediate position as regards the differential
characters of the male, just as it does in geographical range, between
the two known species. As regards the female, our specimen does
not appear to differ in colour from the corresponding sex of Merga-
netta armata (Des Murs, Icon. t. xlviii.).

3. MERGANETTA LEUCOGENYS.

Anas leucogenys, Tsch. Wiegm. Arch. 1843, p. 390.

Erismatura leucogenys, Tsch. Faun. Peru. p. 311, t. xxxvi.

Merganetta leucogenys, Scl. & Salv. Ex. Orn. p. 200; P. Z.S.
1869, p. 601, et 1874, p. 679, et Nomencl. p. 151; Tacz. P. Z.S.
1874, p. 554.

Merganetta columbiana, Des Murs, Rev. Zool. 1845, p. 179, et
Icon. Orn. t. 6; Scl. P. Z. S. 1855, p. 164 (Bogota).

Supra cinerea, dorsi plumis nigris rufescente utrinque marginatis ;
uropygio fasciolis minutis albis nigrisque variegato; capite
colloque toto albis, linea circum rostrum, pileo medio in strigam
nuchalem producto et linea ab oculis ad collum imum utrinque
descendente nigerrimis ; alis cerulescenti-schistaceis, tectrici-
bus et secundariis albo anguste marginatis ; speculo alari eneo-
viridi ; abdomine albo obsolete nigro striolato ; rostri flavi cul-
mine nigricante, pedibus rubellis: long. tota 12:5, ale 6:0,
caude@ 4°5, rostri a rictu 1°4, tarsi 1:5. Fem. supra cinerea,
dorso nigro fammulato ; genis, cervicis lateribus et corpore toto
inferiore fulvo-rufis unicoloribus : long. tota15°5, ale 5°3, caude
4, tarsi 1°5, rostri a rictu 1°4.
Hab. Columbian Andes near Bogota (Goudot) ; Quindiu range
(Salmon); Ecuador (Mus. 8.-G.) ; Central Peru (Tschudi et Jelski).

This Merganetta was originally discovered by Goudot, a well-
known French collector, in the neighbourhood of Bogota. There is
a skin in Salvin and Godman’s collection from Ecuador ; and Tschudi
and Jelski obtained it in Central Peru.

Subfamily VII. Mercin«z.

Genus Mereus. Type.
Mergus, Linn. 8. N. i. p. 207 (1766)........ M. cucullatus.
Lophodytes, Reich, Av. Syst. Nat. p.ix.(1852) M. eucullatus.
Besides the Hooded Merganser, which occasionally intrudes from
the north, one peculiar endemic species of this group is found in the
Neotropical region.

1876. } NEOTROPICAL ANATID-E, 409

1. Mereus cucunuarus.

Mergus cucullatus, Linn. S. N. i. p- 207 (1766); Cab. J. fiir
Orn. 1857, p. 231 (Cuba) ; Scl. et Salv. Nom. Av. Neotr. p. 131.

Lophodytes cucullatus, Baird, B. of N. Am. p- 816; Gundl. Repert.
F.-N. i. p. 391, et J. fiir Orn. 1875, p- 385 (Cuba); Sclater, P. Z. S,
1859, p. 369 (Jalapa).

Hab. Cuba (Gundlach); Mexico (De Oca).

The Hooded Merganser is of rare occurrence on passage in Cuba,
and does not appear to have been noted elsewhere within our limits,
except in South-eastern Mexico.

2. MERGUS OCTOSETACEUS.

Mergus octosetaceus, Vieill. N. D. xiv. p- 222 (1817), et Enc.
Méth. p. 351 (1823) (Brazil).

Mergus brasilianus, Vieill. Gal. des Ois. ii. p. 209, t. 283 (1834);
Eyton, Mon. Anat. p- 176 (1838); Burm. Syst. Ueb. iii. p. 441 ;
Pelz. Orn. Bras. p. 322 (1870) ; Schl. Mus. des P.-B. Anseres, p. 6;
Sel. et Salv. Nom. Av. Neotr. pelsi.

Mergus fuscus, Licht. Doubl, p. 85 (1823).

Mergus lophotes, Cuv. MS. (teste Schlegel).

Supra fusco-niger purpureo vix tinctus 3 plaga alarum duplici,
fascia nigra divisa, alba; cervice postica eneo micante ; pileo
et crista elongata tenui saturate JSumoso-nigris ; abdomine satu-
rate cinereo, fasciis numeroses albis in ventre signato ; cervice
antica et pectoris lateribus griseo et nigro confertim vermicu-
latis ; rostro nigro, pedibus flavidis ; long. tota 19-0, ale faze
caude 4:0, tarsi 1°4, rostri a rictu 2°2.

Hab. 8.E. Brazil, Sio Paulo (Licht.); Rio Ytarare (Natt.).

This scarce Merganser was first described by Vieillot from Dela-
lande’s specimens in the Paris Museum, and subsequently figured by
the same author under another name. Lichtenstein gives Sao Paulo
as its locality ; and Natterer obtained five examples on the River
Ytarare in the southern part of that province in August 1820. One
of these skins, marked as the female sex, 1s now in the collection of
Salvin and Godman, whence our description is taken.

IV. Table of the Geographical Distribution of the Neotropical
Anatide, with remarks thereon.

On referring to the last column of the Table (pp. 410 & 411), it
will be seen that out of the 62 species of Anatide included in the
Neotropical list 25 are likewise found in North America. Of these
25, however, two (Dendrocygna fulva and Querquedula eyanoptera)
are visitors from the south ; and the Nearctic species which intrude
into the Neotropical region (mostly in winter) are, so far as is at
present known, 23 in number, namely

Anser hyperboreus, Anas boschas,
cerulescens, obscura,
gambeli, strepera,

Bernicla canadensis, Querquedula carolinensis,

Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1876, No. XXVII. 27

410

Querquedula discors,
Dafila acuta,
Mareca americana,
Spatula elypeata,
Aix sponsa,
Fuligula marila,
affinis,

collaris,.

MESSRS. SCLATER AND SALVIN ON

[Apr. 4,

Fuligula americana,
valisneria,
Clangula glaucion,
albeola,
CEdemia perspicillata,
Erismatura rubida,
Mergus cucullatus.

Deducting these 23, there remain 39 in the purely Neotropical list,
which may be divided as follows.
In the first place, the genera Chenalopex, Dendrocygna, Sarcidi-

ornis, and Catrina are essentially tropicopolitan.

We may therefore

associate the birds of these genera together as an intertropical divi-
sion containing eight species, namely

Chenalopex jubata, Dendrocygna arborea,
Dendrocygna fulva, viduata,
autumnalis, Sarcidiornis melanonota,
discolor, Cairina moschata.
| | | | | |
Zz ei | | | la| |o |
dled al) 11] 1 | ge.
Se sre er ote fe tase S|
See ie).1 | | jal [ests] SBR (8
gise| Flea! | | seclestal te
ISISR4) LslSiSia| (8 A SES 5 Sa Zs
SIS ala Sle! -|S/s/8-8|Cal|SiAcigl&
|e Sie MES Ele Sleql4|s\sle sles
CS lor Aji a] . a | @ . | ae |
___ FR PRR eR er Bas <4)
{ ; } | i)
1. Anser hyperboreus ......... Jee-| MA cal ydd oc wlucal de |x|
2. ese sera haere Wrs| scape lochs i BEA Hes Pel eee a haar |
3. gamibeli’ .....ccsie«c+s2 laaltyecs lets see ee | el ne ee | * || #
4, Bernicla canadensis ......... a) ae Re ede (a (Oe ha be ad el oe Le x lel x!
eo: melanoptera ........./+++ ee (a Pee Jele} |
*6. magellanica............ *| «| | | |
“Sk Gispar, c.Ahec snes eneseac| ees esol (eo Oe ae Wek
*8, poliocephala ......... era ESA ES Pd Sey
*9, rubidiceps ........-..- % sal |
*10 antarcti¢a i.02.04..0: Po ene Lent |
*11. Chenalopex jubata ........./... oe ar ees ee a feschays | x | *
*12,. Cygnus nigricollis ......... %)o% |x} e le ee | aa
*13, COBCOTODS..:.0is0.00000%- %| * [ele] |
*14. Dendrocyna fulva .........|... je.) | | eI a * eee] *
*15, —— autumnalis ...............| feetten| ay ceefeweleee Bae| tive a | ae
*16 Giseolan. qiéessen tos<c<saleat fasaleds feeb webnatas Je]
*17 arhored Reccacceccesawslco dl sees ella bee: | cc nol Baatetel ee HPA ate Hac shi gas, tae
*18 WAGUSEA = yesaeeenemetr: be See e aes leteeees ioe [eel de cl ae ol Pesala be
*19. Sarcidiornis carunculata...)...) ... |...!... HH] He feeeleead He | |
*20. Cairina moschata,...... oss fad idee estar [: veefoe[ ee | % FRA eee: |
21. Anas boschas “<....:..0+2..--|.=- Weseoo ba Bas Pee eee Re BN TAG LR Goon Ae ree ale fale]
22. OBSCURE) « Stes cess tap -[aee Be bee Bon ee yee bea ey « |«lx
*23. specularis...........0+00|+-- x |x| |«
#24, Cristatals... eee ial Bikca? (osai Peed EP * | * | |
SSS [a le a Pa (| ——
|7| 8 |7/8/4/5/2/2/4/3| 5 j1/ojo| 7 |8l7

1876.] NEOTROPICAL ANATID&. 411

: $ 3 ea aad eg
dled) 1) 11] |_| Gls
qi35| \3 rs |e] |Slte¢
ai OP) |B | 9 19) l)9.9 ;
eise| lel | idl esl leis (s
Cis Ay -|S\| -| fa) sos H) do) Stl | &
FI $/S/8) 3 o/Sis diS|Sisia o|2
aE SIHS/SISlES/S|E1S-e1 (Sas Sie |8
See lela eicinginl
VIE fe | Ye | fe I bis sis << |; |
| aa
7| 8 |7/3|415/2|214/3| 5 |1/0/0| 7 |38|7|
25. Anas strepera .......0..00.../++- | ee ite lee wise |nce fone becaleaelemcll <actil cel excleee Me Sein | (Se
*26. Heteronetta melanocephala...) ... «| * | |
27. Querquedula discors ......... aissel| an {amtanels cefece|aoalsnclete[ieesee fess [ase oe ler iets Lesed|
*28, cyanoptera ...........- Hatebileihs be) 96 Lochs waleal sacle gee peaae Fah Mea bag? eb
29. —— carolinensis............|..- real ed ors Pie see taeeg tev [amet al Es cally alec aleege cule an
#30. OSV PLOW wa--ssgaveacene| aa: Wa Secael Aa bos Geel Bact BES bens |
«31. flavirostris ............ x] * el x sal al |
ee, —— wading... a bool css | Kale dll Sehnegte at |
x83. —— versicolor..............- lino Kae | 31 Hale leee lee ess thee [oes ee ylecel teal ie
x34. ULV ie Seetlos es semsrdciees es vow, Weelbee|secheen se Toe |
#35. ROL GUAR «cease. 55 c6. es prahicge dane hse Ihe lf | |
*36. brasiliensis .. ......... eas fab. [ rele [ae loede je | |
ihe Dati ACH te 0.5. cccsnsess ag nM ale al a fete. 4 Ine 5, FP
#38. spinicauda ............ }*| * |x] x |
89. —— bahamensis ............ abi ee 46 |" elotasleala lanl Shae hal
40. Mareca americana ......... Veealll weet |es etal ec esters ae liccsl ctl tteme tote al em ae
*41, —— sibilatrix ............... || * |x] x] ier es :
42: Spatula clypeata ............ beet eal ese eae a Mee etl eal liee © Weecleselerth, Sule EN
x43. —— platalea ............... H] oe Le] % |
44, Aix sponsa ........6.0.0004. soma) <oiewale-.| aetoalece| f. | eck =A eal:
x45. Metopiana peposaca ...... 204 | BBE ie * | Huet
46. Fuligula marila ............ 36d). ccoq| hem P| Pes eel Bee eel Re vie way | |seclncatenali gett seelice
47. affinis ....... LAs eh oh Mea | MSG OH eo3 | | 28 es] cals] Pan per een = lige lsc
48. —— collaris.................. Hacc | nos || Peel Bo las bee Ped Geel Beel OER Shh] a [lao
49. —— americana ............|.-. ere (ce: [foal fas | al eles end eBex lise lise
50. —— valisneria............... | ol EE BB Se Fe re | * || x
51. Clangula glaucion Bae|aee Yewelces|se<]oee|ra-l>os1,ccloes]” saz fere|=<cteset Seen el (Gel
52 allbeolajste,. sega reees< Zor) ooo Pec eer Ree sae |osa|onelemelewetwaetifeec|sselsost Seni ae Ie |
58. Cidemia perspicillata ...... it 2 603 Ge ee ec Mee eco] ee a ass * | 3
x54. Tachyeres cinereus ......... % | # |
55. Erismatura rubida......... CSCS Ae NN Oe ee eal x | «|x
*56, FETEUPINCA -. scccessesa=| vo a 63) esa Bes | Se ee | ire a
x57. —— dominica .............+-]... Pee bs Peele doe bad ae: ee Oe Re ed
x58. Merganetta armata.........|... el | [ee |
*59. —— turmerl...............000]--- Bec |bee(hasleas Pesleseioe|| iter Paes
+69, leucogenys ............|... ceo |ae4| eactoan baclecel 3 |eeslave hae ig babt
61. Mergus cucullatus ......... Ber | eoo || eel Leelee red) coa peel Matson |Wecee eck Gye cele ese E32
«62 octosetaceuS............)... [tee lee leee ee. * | 1 3 a ie
WW Eee Mae D(a OE ae ee en Se a a eg
15, 15 [L814 5 9) 5/7/55 10 |3 22) 25 25/25
} | |

Secondly, the quasi-cosmopolitan genus Hrismatura has 2 repre-
sentatives peculiar to the Neotropical region—namely, ZL. ferruginea
and EF. dominicana.

After deducting these two categories, the remaining 29 species
form the Antarctic division of the Neotropical Anatidze, and consist
mostly of species belonging to genera also found in the north—e. g.
Bernicla (6), Cygnus (2), Anas (2), Querquedula (8), Dafila (2),
Mareca (1), Spatula (1), and Mergus (1). Adding these together,

412 SCLATER AND SALVIN ON NEOTROPICAL ANATID#. [ Apr. 4,

we have the following 23 species of Neotropical Anatidee belonging
to genera also met with in the north—namely

Bernicla melanoptera, Querquedula flavirostris,
magellanica, andium,

— dispar, versicolor,
poliocephala, puna,
rubidiceps, torquata,
antarctica, brasiliensis,

Cygnus nigricollis, Dafila spinicauda,
coscoroba, bahamensis,

Anas specularis, Mareca sibilatrix,
cristata, Spatula platalea,

Querquedula cyanoptera, Mergus octosetaceus.
oxyptera, ‘

Lastly, there are 4 generic forms of Anatide peculiar to the
Antarctic portion of the Neotropical region (Heteronetta, Meto-
piana, Tachyeres, and Merganetta), embracing the following six
species—

‘Heteronetta melanocephala, Merganetta armata,
Metopiana peposaca, turneri,
Tachyeres cinereus, leucogenys.

The Neotropical Anatidee may therefore be summarized as
follows :— .
A. Nearctic species, mostly occurring only in
winter within the Neotropical Region .. .. 23

B. Neotropical species.
a. Species belonging to Tropicopolitan

SONNET. ae Pan beck tog a ere eee a 8
6. Representatives of a Cosmopolitan
EOE, sine orgie ae = : 2

ec. Peculiar species of genera alsoArctic.. 23
d. Species of peculiar Antarctic genera... 6

LIST OF THE PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.

Tue scientific publications of the Zoological Society are of two
kinds — “ Proceedings,” published in an octavo form, and
“Transactions,” in quarto.

According to the present arrangements, the “ Proceedings”
contain not only notices of all business transacted at the scien-
tific meetings, but also all the papers read at such meetings
and recommended to be published by the Committee of Pub-
lication. From fifty to seventy coloured plates and engravings
are attached to each annual volume of the “ Proceedings,” to
illustrate the new or otherwise remarkable species of animals
described in them. Amongst such illustrations, figures of the
new or rare species acquired in a living state for the Society’s
Gardens are often given.

The “Proceedings” for each year are issued in four parts, on the
first of the months of June, August, October, and April, the part
published in April completing the volume for the preceding
year. They may be obtained with black or coloured illustrations.

The “Transactions” contain such of the more important
communications made to the scientific meetings of the Society
as, on account of the nature of the plates required to illustrate
them, are better adapted for publication in the quarto form.
The series of papers of Professor Owen on the Anthropoid
Apes, and on the various species of Dinornis, all form part of
this series.

Fellows, and Honorary, Foreign, and Corresponding Members,
upon payment of a Subscription of £1 1s. before the day of the
Anniversary Meeting in each year, are entitled to receive all the
Society’s Publications for the year. They are likewise entitled
to purchase the Publications of the Society at 25 per cent. less
than the price charged for them to the Public. A further re-
duction of 25 per cent. is made upon purchases of Publications
issued prior to 1861, if they exceed the value of five pounds.

The following is a complete list of the publications of the
Society already issued. They may be obtained at the Society’s
Office (11 Hanover Square, W.), at Messrs. Longmans’, the
Society’s publishers (Paternoster Row, E.C.), or through any
bookseller :—

[August Ist, 1876.]

2

PROCEEDINGS OF THE COMMITTEE OF SCIENCE AND CORRE-
SPONDENCE OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.

8vo. 2 vols.
To Fellows. To the Public.
Part Te elss0=3le~ 1 voleSvoi-cc.cccescsenceenoe Price 4s. 6d. 6s.
By il. WBSZ. ran Nraiee See? Ce eee a AS. Od. ee ORS

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.
8vo. 15 vols. and Index. (First Series.)

Price to Price to the Price to Price tothe
Fellows. Public. Fellows. Public

Part I. 1833. 1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d. ... 6s. | Part IX. 1841. 1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d. ... 6s.
er a4: naiss68, | gy) XE IRAN ea
a TITS 1835¢ » ASiG0) A sGse || see ON W843) s 4s. 6d. ... 6s.
5 IV. 1836. Sith), ithe, MERITS 5 5d eg et
as V. 1837: = A SAGs yse OS. s\W) pee eS R45: ee 4s. 6d. ... 6s.

|

» VI. 1838. as 4s. 6d. ... 6s. oe MALV. 1846. 3 4s. 6d. ... 6s.
3) WIE. 1839. a 4s. 6d. ... 68. | XV. 1847. _ 4s. 6d. ... 6s.
» VIII. 1840. 4s. 6d. ... 68. | Index 1830-47. =F As. Gd. ... 6s.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.
8vo. 13 vols. and Index. (Second Series.)

Without Illustrations. With Illustrations.
To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public.
ee So eds ass a.
Part® \ XViI--1848: lwoliSvo. 4s. 6d. *..< 96s. “<. Pree 1 0 <— tea “6
» X9¥VII. 1849. a A) 7 AS SA al SC MN OT ol Lge) = ey ~. 6
» AVIIL. 1850. 3 As. Gdia 2006S eee, 6 PS) O
55 XIX. 1851. su 45.605) sees, ol lGs: 3 »O\d6,..0 com LO
5 RX Lee. a Ag6d. Vee GS es . O.16.:0 | (ee at
- XXI. 1853. 3 AS G0, ees aeOSs & 30°18 "0 ina) ame ult
55 ea. 1854. - 4s)'Gdt i’ Ss. 26s: ae a 20 40 7 ae 167 0
» XXIII. 1855. Fy As\ 6d tae) 1Gs: a 7G Fas, 7
» XXIV. 1856. as ds; Gd. ac62-0u 168. a lel 40 seal SFG
3 EV S57. 5 4s\\Ods; akocseiOSs! ces0 ty ue Lk gnO at pelomes | 36
» XXXVI. 1858. > 4sGde se0) G85 22,0. Sys fl lD BO me een an
95 SAVII. 1859. F ASSOUteec. OS! so. wl 1220! se eee, wo
ss XXVIII. 1860. 53 As. 6d. sin 6s, etal) Waal 2-H 0, e220
Index 1848-60. 3 45. Gd; test O68:

ILLUSTRATIONS TO THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL
SOCIETY OF LONDON, 1848-60. 8vo. 6 vols.

To Fellows. To the Public.

Bde Rae A

Mammalia ...-........ 1 yol., ccntaining 83 Plates ... Price 2 8 0 oS 3) 0
FAVES «sien. hucecenmeaees 2 volas “ 17/3 es PB gueeards.-'0. 6 6 0
Reptilia et Pisces ... 1 vol., pa AST sss te Pe el IPsés SP 1 10)-36
Mollusca... .:cc.s:scese 1 vol., ES 5] lei = ete as a) aes 110 ©
Annulosa et Radiata 1 vol., * OO a ees x1) a 3-10

3

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF
THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.

Complete. Letterpress only. Illustrations only.
To To the To To the 'o To the
Fellows. Public. Fellows. Public. Fellows. Public.
1S60s-cloth 325..t...... 47S. <a verdes ASS'O0 Me..tces Giterccctee fad Otecccss sa: 41s
NSG2e passe O26 wane wos Alsteu.. cba: 4s. Od. .cccnee: Oeeaneere Diss Od see hace 4ls.
WEGSy se) FO28.: 5.02... ATS rcesecs 45. 6d: .sececs OScccaecees PSH OMS owcrens 4s.
USGS 5 PP O2Ss csc c0c5 Al) ssacssche 45. Odsccccuses GS cen cece Of Ss Oe sa cesate Als.
PSO sss) Gas. c.< ccs: A] St Janasesc4 83. OU satan (SORARBRREEE D7 SiGe seco 4ls.
LSGGstyett OSs ace. sce AS vaeseses As. Otlict ces .ne G55 50 kane 0821 St Oe soe ea 41s,
With Illustrations With Illustrations
Uncoloured. Coloured.
To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public.
PSO sClObMarnanasss .<.scs 000 on Lis; 6d. .:. 14s. 6d. ... 32s. 6d. :.. 47s. 6d.
SOS Si iigey drasstasscsciascessees lls. 6d. ... 14s. 6d. ... 32s. 6d. ... 47s. 6d.
WSG9 vies vedscwawsssctsscousces Lls. 6d. ... 14s. 6d. ... 32s. 6d. ... 47s. Gd.
TS AC eae od techs <a ame ecen tions sne lls. 6d. ... 14s. 6d. ... 32s. 6d. ... 47s. 6d.
Index, 1861-1870............ 4s, 6d. ... 6s. Od.
PEL el ObD a5... ecneneedeevens lls. 6d. ... 14s. 6d. ... 32s. 6d. ... 47s. 6d.
\VoV/2 / SARneee camera rrcrnad lls. 6d. ... 14s. 6d. ... 32s. 6d. ... 47s. 6d.
[chs SARE ene mearcenesas. © INsiGd. .-.) 14s).6d. ... 32s. 6d... 47s. 6d:
DS VAG oa) cueee-snessecesaas lls. 6d. ... 14s. 6d. ... 38s. 6d. ... 50s. 6d.
SF ateess | cactecencoaieer caoer ML SLOhmeeelasuOd. .< SOS. (Gd. «50S. 6d:

1876, part 2 (Mar. & Apr.) 2s. 3d. ... 3s. 0d. ... 9s. Od. ... 12s. Od.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF
LONDON. 4to. 8 vols. and Eight Parts.

To Fellows. To the Public.

Se S., dhe £s. da.

Vol. 1., containing 59 Plates (1833-35). Price 313 6 ... 4 18 O
Voli; s fies) lso5-411). 7,,°' 45°00 IT oS
Vol. III., oF Mee eet? 49): 3. 8. 6. 40
Vol. IV., 2: Bee oe (2801-62). - G5 2 0 2 852 6
Vol. V., ch epee se) (1862-66). 45> 8S: G6 2 26 1970
Vol. VI., cc Dee GLCGG—69) 5 Geer ll 5s Otel ber OeO
Vol.VIL., = MoV 55 2 (IB69—72).> 4) 817-08 523 16 0
WelVET <5. SZ eto s2as4)s eth s Si oie Leelee
Vol. IX. part 1, 22 55 (1874). ase lle Ga eet ote
fc Hes eee (1875). fro al PA 5 BED Ae,

+ aos i ep (1875). spa OS 2.0) Fees BAA

35 a A Ass (1875). eel Wh 6 en 20

53 Pry anes (1875). we eG 110 0

e acs As (1876). LO LOe 6 014 0

oa aie 1S (1876). Oh Loe cele tere

7 eS; LORE; (1876). OS) Okan aeelme dian ()

The following are the contents of the most recently published
Parts of the “ Transactions ””:—
Vol. IX. Part 7. “On British Annelida.” By W. C. M‘Intosh, C.M.Z.S.
(Four Plates.)—** On the Annelida of the ‘ Porcupine ’ Expeditions of 1869
and 1870.” By W. C. M‘Intosh, C.M.Z.S. (Three Plates.)
Vol. IX. Part 8. “On the Osteology of the Marsupialia. (Part V.)

Fam. Poephaga, Genus Macropus.” By Professor Owen, C.B., &e. (Ten
Plates. )

These publications may be obtained at the Society’s Office (11 Hanover
Square, W.), at Messrs. Longmans’, the Socicty’s publishers ( Paternoster
Row, E.C.), or through any bookseller.

Now ready, price £25, in two volumes, bound in half-morocco,
containing 100 coloured plates,

ZOOLOGICAL SKETCHES
By JOSEPH WOLF.

MADE FOR

THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON,
FROM ANIMALS IN THEIR VIVARIUM.
EDITED, WITH NOTES,

By PHILIP LUTLEY SCLATER, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S.,

SECRETARY TO THE SOCIETY,

Tuis series of Drawings was undertaken with the object of preserving a
faithful record of the living characters of the most rare and interesting
Animals in the Vivarium of the Zoological Society of London.

In selecting the subjects, particular regard has been paid to those species
which exhibit aptitude for acclimatization, either as objects of economic
value, or simply as additions to the Exotic Animals which are now so
frequently seen in the parks and on the ornamental waters of Europe.

The Drawings have been executed in Water Colours. after most careful
study, by Mr. Wotr, who may he fairly said to stand alone in minute
knowledge of the habits and forms of Mammalia as well as of Birds; and
the Lithographic copies, partly printed in colour and then finished by hand,
are in such exact fac-simile as to be scarcely distinguishable from the ori-

inals,
e The Letterpress, prepared by the Editor, embraces all particulars of in-
terest relating to the general history, habits, distribution, and use of the
Animals illustrated in the Plates.

London; Graves AND Co., Pall Mall.

Price 6d., Sewed,

A GUIDE TO THE GARDENS
OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.

Thirtieth Edition, corrected according to the present Arrange-
ment of the Gardens,

By PHILIP LUTLEY SCLATER, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S.,
SECRETARY TO THE SOCIETY.

London: Brapsury, AGNEW AND Co., 10 Bouverie Street; and at the Society's
Gardens in the Regent’s Park.

Price 2s.; to Fellows, 1s. 6d.

REVISED LIST OF THE VERTEBRATED ANIMALS
NOW OR LATELY LIVING IN THE GARDENS OF
THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON, 1872.

This List contains the scientific and vernacular names of all the species
of Vertebrates in the Society’s collection, arranged in systematic order, and
forms a complete record of all the specimens that have been exhibited alive

m the Society’s Gardens during the past ten years. The total number

of the species is as follows :—Mammals 498, Birds 1044, Reptiles 181,

Batrachians 35, Fishes 68; total 1826.

Also Supplement to the above, containing additions received in 1872,

1873, and 1874. Price Is.

London: Lonemans & Co.; or at the Society's House, 11 Hanover Square. W.

Contents (continued).

March 21, 1876 (continued).

Page

2. Corrections of and Additions to ‘“ Raptorial Birds of North-western India.” (Part II.)
By Anprew Anperson, F.Z.S. &. (Plate XXIII.) ......,...2ceecseeee cece eee 310

3. On the Stercorartine, or Skua Gulls. By Howarp Saunpers, F.LS. ke. (Plate
WVeo) ittetin <) syofs's o)dla.e) 5a ole biale artoede Sil sfeahatare eters Gendron 0 "5 bee of carat heer ae 17

April 4, 1876.

The Secretary. Report on the additions to the Society's Menagerie in March 1876. (Plate
ENON Mea meget arr Tnje/ ale! a'aic:s:c10ia/alnie’»,e vlalmfaumah tateniveleraiei oe sete atkersava cists «afro eee 332

Professor Newton, V.P. Exhibition of and remarks on a book belonging to the Rev. R.
Hooper, containing a notiée of the! Dodo. 5) «ovr a% «arcs « vicisievefoupislale witelae's oaale a saree 3393

Mr. Bowdler Sharpe, F.Z.S, Exhibition of a specimen of Hawk-Owl (Surnia ulula), killed

BNL CROHGPESEILALIN <1. fala’) sietayloleta've\cvec. clave w'sieleelasice << im neous Calais stothiclatal siete io ier vate

1. Notes on the Anatomy of Plotus anhinga. By A. H.Garrop, M.A., F.Z.S., Prosector to
the Society. (Plates XXVI-XXVIII.)...... SORE RStT SCCM CUE ECAC EEE t7 Bi)

2. Remarks on a Hybrid between the Black Grouse and the Hazel Grouse. By H. E.
Darssen, EAS 2s secs docie sestes Beta cat ala! o's:5, ojaistatiorss teases ti eets Slee Sie ia pa gees 345

3. On the Genus Dasyprocta; with Description of a New Species. By Epwarp R. Atsron,

OTS Soi Gas., Bez aie (PIAL MONK). ei. ss vig'a cielo w viclvleoc'tascle aie wif ale, viata “Aner

4, On new Species of Bolivian Birds. By P. L. Scuarer, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., and
Ossert Satyin, M.A., F.R.S. (Plates XXX.-XXXTIT.).............. ere sae 352

5. A Revision of the Neotropical Anatidez. By P. L. Sclater, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., and
Ossert Satvin, M.A., F.R.S. (Plate XXXIV.) ........0cc.eseeeeee eeecoccccs DG

é ,) A, Pa
\
LIST OF PLATES.
1876.
PA Bap De
Plate ° Page
XAT MOINS w Orsrare CENEOZOA pwiel.joya nl etsnclore Soe revepeile/s fale) sib olsen teehee 294
XXII. New Malayan Lepidoptera ..............6. 0.00.0. 22 05 308
AOD el aleotbabylonicuey! ssi sic isie\censisissts alse cicce ae piotalnte: Siute alwtemape 310
TOR EVE Stercovariue chilensis! (50 af. eot co galee ele o dios wie ielee ope aeeheye mete uOa
XXV. Polyborus tharus, var. 2.00.00... cee cece e ent e ee ence ne 333
. XXVI.,
XXVII. | Anatomy of Plotus anhinga ............esee.e ees e eee 335
XXVIII. /
XIX, Dasyprocta azat@ ho... eee ee ee wets ce er na 347°
XXX. Fig. 1. Calliste fulvicervix; Fig. 2. C. argyrofenges...... “i
XXXII. Malacothraupis dentata ............ cece eee cee e ee ee ee \ 359
XXX. Lathria uropygialis.: iw... is eee eee eee ee eaten y | :
XXXITL. Thamnophilussubfasciatus........-+++++ss esses eee eee )
MOGKTV., VQnerquediala:ameinan oyster oils leech canine) taint cates neue
NOTICE.

According to present arrangements the ‘ Proceedings’ are issued in four parts,
as follows :—

- Part I. containing papers read in January and February, on June Ist.

I. He » March and April, on August Ist.
III. Rs Fi », May and June, on October Ist.
Vito ess 5 », November and December, on April Ist.

The price is 12s. per part for the edition with coloured, and 3s. per part for
that with uncoloured Plates.

van

ia
f,

Ad Vi ay
HAN

1 aa

tina
nl
inh we

Ai aa pry 4 AV erhaet F iy i |
oe a / : A At . a "i | A ih Z vi a > WN

Ay
Bh chk

| ane me Av won
eek aan] ; ADEM eri lh
| : i ‘aoe i} 1: Js ie ' i
i h i aa iat ag i }

: e init
<u ay } ay

4, ry aay, v

Aina
A eh Vi
mh One

Dave ny uch ap peta SM
Do Ni |

Wh ah ht he

ria

cee hie wah ik hak! vf riteey Tako Rar '
Vi ‘ ’ , iM i My y . y Z it hi " ¥ My 1 ff: n Byte

FO Ct pe opt

Rjenpe

A ee Meme a ote ae

> mr i
Pil rtee

od

ietpanee gers
het yey

nf
he

5
7

ri
te

thy j oo bod Paar
iit Hye _
SPORE ha
Sears,

teas

*